JP2023145791A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving durability.SOLUTION: An upper regulation part 765 generates resistance to displacement of a load member 761 to an upper side (electromagnetic solenoid SOL 2 side) and reduces a load applied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL 2 from the load member 761, so that, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL 2 is avoided from receiving an excessive load. Therefore, it is possible to improve durability of the game machine. In addition, by increasing a number of positions where a load is received, a load is distributed for suppressing a load, and a gap may be provided between the load member 761 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL 2 by the upper regulation part 765 for blocking transmission of the load.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 51

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

There is a game machine configured to displace a displacement member using an electromagnetic solenoid (Patent Document 1).

JP2015-231434A

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of improving the durability of the gaming machine. The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve durability.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a displacing means configured to be displaceable, and a drive disposed on the side of the displacing means in a predetermined direction for driving the displacing means in the predetermined direction. A driving means configured to be able to generate a force, and a resistance means configured to be able to generate a resistance against displacement of the displacement means in the predetermined direction, the resistance means being configured to move the force from the displacement means to the driving means. It is configured to be able to reduce the load applied to.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising support means for supporting the displacement means, and the driving means is arranged closer to the support means than the resistance means. .

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the support means rotatably supports the displacement means about a predetermined axis, and the predetermined axis is arranged in the predetermined direction with respect to the resistance means. placed on the side.

According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect, durability can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 1, durability can be improved by the support mode of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine according to the third aspect, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to the second aspect, durability can be improved by suppressing the generated load.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary device. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the window movable unit taken along line XX in FIG. 2. FIG. (a) is a rear view of the window movable unit, and (b) is a front view of the window movable unit. (a) is a rear view of the window movable unit, and (b) is a front view of the window movable unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-like member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-like member. FIG. 3 is a partial front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a partial front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the wing-like member and the auxiliary member, showing the meshing state of the wing-like member and the auxiliary member. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a top view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the first operating unit. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a wing-like member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission board. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a wing-like member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission board. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a wing-like member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission board. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a wing-like member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission board. (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically illustrating the displacement relationship of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the second operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the second operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operating unit. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the base member. It is a top view of a plate-shaped displacement member. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of a hollow member 740. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the light guide member, the plate-shaped displacement member, and the hollow member taken along the line XLIX-XLIX in FIG. 47. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the drive unit. It is a front view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a front view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a front view of a 2nd operation unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LVa-LVa in FIG. 53, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LVb-LVb in FIG. 54. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of time-measured changes in conduction between left and right electromagnetic solenoids and changes in attitude of a plate-shaped displacement member. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of time-measured changes in conduction between left and right electromagnetic solenoids and changes in attitude of a plate-shaped displacement member. It is a top view of a 2nd operation unit. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LIX-LIX in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LIX-LIX in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LIX-LIX in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LIX-LIX in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LXIII-LXIII in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LXIII-LXIII in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LXIII-LXIII in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LXIII-LXIII in FIG. 58. FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the rotational displacement of a large receiving part. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXVIII-LXVIII in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXVIII-LXVIII in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXVIII-LXVIII in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXVIII-LXVIII in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LXXII-LXXII in FIG. 58. FIG. (a) and (b) are rear views of the window movable unit in the second embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the first operating unit. (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically illustrating the displacement relationship of the first operating unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the drive unit of the second operation unit in the fourth embodiment. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second operating unit of the fifth embodiment along a line corresponding to the LVa-LVa line in FIG. 53. It is a front view of the game board in 6th embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a base board, a winning opening unit, and a throwing unit. (a) is a front view of the winning a prize mouth unit, and (b) is a rear view of the winning a prize mouth unit. (a) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a perspective back view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a winning a prize mouth unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) is a front view of the front unit, and (b) is a rear view of the front unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit. (a) is a front view of the displacement member, (b) is a side view of the displacement member, and (c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member. It is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87(b). It is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87(b). (a) is a side view of the drive unit, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the drive unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 93(b). It is a sectional view of the winning a prize opening unit taken along the XCVII-XCVII line in FIG. 83. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit taken along the line XCVIII-XCVIII in FIG. 97. (a) is a front view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit, (b) is a back view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit, and (c) is a top view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of specific winning a prize mouth unit 950. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the specific winning a prize mouth unit along the CII-CII line of FIG. 99(c). (a) and (b) are perspective front views of a specific winning a prize opening unit. (a) is a front view of the specific winning a prize mouth unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the specific winning a prize mouth unit taken along the line CIVb-CIVb of FIG. 104(a). (a) is a top view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit and a drive unit, (b) is a side view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit and a drive unit. (a) is a sectional view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit along the CVIa-CVIa line in FIG. 105(a), and (b) is a sectional view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit along the CVIb-CVIb line in FIG. 106(a). It is a sectional view of a drive unit. (a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit, and (b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit. (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball throwing unit, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the ball throwing unit. (a) is a front view of the distribution unit, and (b) is a side view of the distribution unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit. (a) is a sectional view of the distribution unit taken along the line CXIIa-CXIIa in FIG. 109(a), and FIG. 112(b) is a sectional view of the distribution unit taken along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a). (a) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the distribution unit in range CXIII of FIG. 112(b). (a) is a front view of the passage unit, and (b) is a side view of the passage unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit. (a) is a front view of the replacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the replacement unit. (a) is a sectional view of the replacement unit taken along the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line in FIG. 117(a), and (b) is a sectional view of the replacement unit taken along the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line in FIG. 118(a). 82 is a sectional view of the game board taken along the line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 81. FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board along the line CXXb-CXXb of FIG. 120(a). (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board along the line CXXb-CXXb of FIG. 120(a). It is a rear view of a front unit and a displacement member in a 7th embodiment. (a) and (b) are sectional views of a drive unit in an eighth embodiment. (a) and (b) are sectional views of a drive unit and a displacement member in a ninth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective back view of a back base and a displacement member in a 10th embodiment. (a) and (b) are rear views of the front unit and the displacement member. It is an exploded perspective back view of a back base and a displacement member in an 11th embodiment. (a) and (b) are rear views of the front unit and the displacement member. (a) is a rear view of the front unit in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the CXXIXb-CXXIXb line in FIG. 129(a). (a) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line CXXXb-CXXXb of FIG. 130(a). (a) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the CXXXIb-CXXXIb line of FIG. 131(a). (a) is a side view of a drive unit in a fourteenth embodiment, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. 133(a) is a sectional view of the game board, and FIG. 133(b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along the line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb in FIG. 133(a). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the sixteenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic rear view of the winning opening unit in the seventeenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line CXXXVb-CXXXVb in FIG. 135(a). (a) is a schematic diagram of the winning opening unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 136(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb of FIG. 136(a). (a) is a schematic diagram of the winning opening unit viewed from the back, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb of FIG. 137(a).

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 44, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface on its left side for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the player's operation, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a rail 61 in addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for guiding balls. , 62, a general winning hole 63, a first winning hole 64, a second winning hole 140, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, etc. (see 1).

The base plate 60 is formed from a wooden board member. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are screwed from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Note that the base plate 60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to winnings in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, after which the jackpot transitions to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (during probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 140. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) among the "low probability states" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability is the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 140 is increased. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

During the probability change or time saving period, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the feather member 945 (electric accessory) attached to the second winning hole 140 is opened is changed, compared to the normal period. A long time is set. When the wing member 945 is in an open state (open state), it is easier for a ball to enter the second prize opening 140 than when the wing member 945 is in a closed state (closed state). becomes. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the feather member 945 attached to the second winning hole 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, the feather member 945 is changed in one win. It is also possible to make a change to increase the number of times that 945 is opened compared to normal times. In addition, during probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the time for which the feather member 945 attached to the second winning hole 140 is opened and the number of times the feather member 945 is opened in one win are changed. At least one of them may be changed. In addition, during probability change or time saving, the time when the feather member 945 attached to the second winning hole 140 is released or the number of times the feather member 945 is released in one win are not calculated, but only the winning probability of the second symbol. may be changed to be higher than normal.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting winning) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a variable display, and an LED that displays a second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the feather member 945 attached to the second winning hole 140 remains for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened).

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more chances to have the wing member 945 of the second winning opening 140 in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 140.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, there are other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the open time or number of openings of the feather member 945 for one win, etc. When the state is such that it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the wing member 945 may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a portion of the balls fired at the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and displayed on a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be located below the variable display unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 140 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 140, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning port switch. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 140 may be five.

A feather member 945 is attached to the second prize opening 140. This wing member 945 is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the wing member 945 is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the feather member 945 is in the open state (enlarged state). ), making it easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 140.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the wing member 945 is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the wing member 945 is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during the probability change and time saving period, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 140 compared to the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 140, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 140 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have a feather member like the second winning hole 140, so that balls can always be won.

Therefore, under normal circumstances, the feather member attached to the second winning hole 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second winning hole 140, so if you turn to the first winning hole 64 without the feather member, The player fires the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first winning slot 64, he or she can obtain many opportunities for a jackpot lottery and win the jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the feather member 945 attached to the second winning hole 140 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning hole 140 is in a state where it is easy to win. , fire the ball toward the second prize opening 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed shot"), and let it pass through the through gate 67 to open the feather member. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability jackpot by winning into the second winning hole 140.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is left-right symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning hole 64 by "hitting right" or aiming at the second winning hole 140 by "hitting left". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment tells the player how to shoot the ball depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the game into "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the trouble of changing the way the ball is hit can be eliminated.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the first winning hole 64, and a specific winning hole 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, a jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position may also be the lower right side of the first winning hole 64 or the first The location is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be located to the left of the variable display unit 80, for example.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out openings 71 are arranged as a pair on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving the wing member is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include a drive motor MT1 and electromagnetic solenoids SOL1 and SOL2.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the structures of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 will be explained. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 300, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 300. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate. Further, in FIG. 6, illustration of the third symbol display device 81 is omitted.

As described above, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and has rails 61 and 62 in addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for guiding balls. , the general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, the through gate 67, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, the pair of left and right window movable units 150, and the balls ejected from the gaming area. It is constructed by assembling a ball flow down unit 290 etc. that is configured to be able to flow down, and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

As mentioned above, the base board 60 is formed from plywood made by stacking plywood boards. 60 and is formed to be shieldable.

As shown in FIG. 6, the base plate 60 has a through hole formed at approximately the center position so that the variable display unit 80 can be disposed therein, as well as a through hole formed to allow the electrical wiring connected to the through gate 67 to pass therethrough. A plurality of (two in this embodiment) small through-holes 60a are provided, and a plurality (three in this embodiment) of fitting recesses 60b are provided so as to be able to fit into the front end of the operating unit 300 in a concave-convex manner. , a plurality of (two in this embodiment) light transmission holes 60c are provided in the left and right lower portions in the front-rear direction.

The light transmission hole 60c is formed at a position through which light emitted from the operating unit 300 side can pass, and is intended to improve the performance effect of the game board 13 from the viewpoint of light emission performance. This will be explained in detail.

On the front side of the light passage hole 60c, downstream surface constituent members 91 and 92 formed from a light-transmitting resin material are arranged, and the outer portions 94 of the downstream surface constituent members 91 and 92 form the light passage hole. The downstream surface forming members 91 and 92 are fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 in a manner that covers the downstream surface 60c.

The left and right flow surface components 91 and 92 are constructed in a substantially symmetrical shape, except that the covering plate FB is provided on the front side of the right flow surface component 92, so that the left flow surface structure is similar to that of the left flow surface structure. The member 91 will be described in detail, and the description of the downstream surface forming member 92 on the right side will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 5, the downstream surface forming member 91 has a plate-like part disposed along the front surface of the base plate 60, and a strip-like part 93 formed in a strip-like shape with the same width as the inner rail 61. The game area is divided into a strip part 93, an outer part 94 which is an outer part (outer part in front view) of the game area partitioned by the band part 93, and a game area partitioned by the band part 93. An inner part 95 is an inner part of the area (inner part in front view).

As described above, the outer portion 94 is located outside the gaming area, and therefore is configured as a portion that does not easily affect the flow of the ball. Therefore, since there is no need to consider the effect on the sphere due to the displacement of the outer plate part 94, the wall thickness of the outer part 94 can be designed to be thin.

Furthermore, even if the thickness of the inner part 95 is reduced as a result of designing the outer part 94 to be thin, the rigidity of the base plate 60 is Displacement of the inner portion 95 in the front-rear direction (deformation in the thickness direction) can be suppressed using this. Furthermore, by designing the outer part 94 and the inner part 95 to be thin, it is possible to ensure a sufficient front-to-back width of the gaming area.

In this way, the outer part 94 can be designed to be thin without impairing the functions required of the inner part 95, and as a result, the light emitted from the operating unit 300 side and passing through the light transmission hole 60c can be reduced. , can be easily seen by the player through the outer part 94.

In this embodiment, since the base board 60 is formed from a wooden board member, it is difficult for the player to see the light emitted from the back side through the thickness of the base board 60. On the other hand, by forming the light transmission hole 60c (see FIG. 6) and arranging the light emitting means on the back side of the hole 60c as in this embodiment, the base plate 60 can be made of a wooden board member. You can easily change the brightness that is visible through the screen.

For example, in the case of forming a decorative pattern that is visually recognized as being continuous with the outer part 94 and other parts when viewed from the front, an illumination board 777 disposed on the back side of the outer part 94 may be provided. By changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means 778 in multiple types and changing the brightness of the outer part 94, even the same decorative pattern can be seen in multiple types.

Further, for example, a decorative member whose visible pattern changes depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means 778 may be attached to the outer part 94. In this case, the appearance (image) of the game board 13 can be greatly changed depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means 778.

Note that the mode of the decorative member that changes the visible pattern depending on the light emission mode is not limited at all. For example, it may be a member that is designed so that different patterns can be visually recognized depending on the angle at which light is applied, such as an illumination plate. Alternatively, for example, it may be a member that is designed to change the visible pattern by changing the emitted color, provided that the pattern is drawn in multiple colors and the irradiated light is available in multiple colors. .

The inner part 95 is arranged inside the gaming area as described above. If the inner part 95 is displaced (deformed), there is a risk that it will affect the ball flowing down the game area, but in this embodiment, the flesh part of the pace board 60 is arranged on the back side of the inner part 95. (Since the light transmission hole 60c is configured to fit on the outer part 94 side with respect to the strip part 93 when viewed from the front), the rigidity of the base plate 60 is used to reduce the displacement of the inner part 95 ( deformation) can be prevented. This makes it possible to stabilize the flow of the ball.

A general prize opening 63 is arranged in the inner part 95, and the general prize opening 63 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the downstream surface constituent member 91 is located on the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by being fixed from the side with a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

As described above, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with the center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, and the window movable unit 150 is provided at the upper left and right corners of the center frame 86. is installed.

FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 7, illustration of the lower part of the game board 13 is omitted, and the auxiliary device 160 is shown in an exploded front perspective view.

The window movable unit 150 includes a displacement member 151 that is rotatably displaceable and configured to be visible to the player in the window inside the center frame 86, and a displacement member 151 disposed on the back side of the displacement member 151. The displacement member 151 is provided with an auxiliary device 160 that generates a driving force to drive the displacement member 151 and irradiates light toward the displacement member 151.

The displacement member 151 is formed into a bifurcated shape when viewed from the front and back, and includes a bifurcated portion 152 that is pivotally supported at the base end formed near the bent portion, and is disposed at both distal ends of the bifurcated portion 152 and has an open back side. The bifurcated portion 152 has a distal end portion 153 formed in a box shape (bag shape, cup shape), and an overhang portion 154 that protrudes in the radial direction from the base end portion of the bifurcated portion 152.

The tip part 153 is formed into a box shape (bag-like, cup-like) with the bottom side facing the front side and is arranged so that the player can see it, and is fastened to the opening side of the presentation part 153a. It is provided with a ring-shaped part 153b which is a fixed ring-shaped part and has a shape that is narrower on the opposite side of the production part 153a compared to the production part 153a side.

The production part 153a has a light diffusion shape (jagged shape) formed on the inner surface, and can diffuse the light irradiated from the back side to the inside of the open part, so that the actual light irradiated is in a narrow range. Even if it is irradiated with light, it is possible to make the entire effect section 153a appear to be (dimly) shining to a player viewing the effect section 153a from the front side.

A movable range of the projecting portion 154 in both directions of rotation is defined by a pair of claw portions 86a protruding from the center frame 86 side. That is, the displacement member 151 is configured to be rotatably displaceable at an angle (an angle less than 360 degrees) defined by the arrangement of the claw portion 86a and the relationship with the overhang portion 154.

8 is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary device 160, and FIG. 9 is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary device 160. The auxiliary device 160 includes a contact member 161 disposed at a position where it can come into contact with the displacement member 151 (see FIG. 7), and a metal member whose one end (front side end) is connected to the contact member 161 so as not to be relatively rotatable. (in this embodiment, made of brass), a driven member 163 that is connected to the other end (rear side end) of the transmission shaft rod 162 in a relatively non-rotatable manner, and a transmission shaft rod 162 made of brass (in this embodiment, made of brass). A known E-ring 164 is fitted into both ends of the transmission shaft 162 from the radial direction, a support case 170 that is configured to be able to pivotally support the transmission shaft rod portion 162 and has a case-like structure as a whole, and a support case 170 that is disposed inside the support case 170. An illumination board 180 is provided.

The transmission shaft rod portion 162 is a cylindrical member whose outer shape is a perfect circle when viewed in the axial direction (front-back direction) of the mid-abdominal region, and is cut into a planar shape from a predetermined radial direction at both ends. The tip has a substantially D-shaped cross section. By fitting these both end portions into the inserted hole 161b of the contact member 161 and the inserted hole 163b of the driven member 163, the contact member 161, the transmission shaft rod portion 162, and the driven member 163 are moved relative to each other. Non-rotatably (integrally) connected.

The abutting member 161 is made of a resin material, and has a base end 161a in which an inserted hole 161b, which is a through hole through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted and has a D-shaped cross section, is bored. , and an arm portion 161c extending outward from the base end portion 161a and having a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front.

The driven member 163 is made of a resin material, and has a base end 163a in which an inserted hole 163b, which is a through hole through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted and has a D-shaped cross section, is bored. , and an arm portion 163c extending straight outward from the base end portion 161a and having a substantially flat plate shape.

A metal plate member MB1 made of metal (magnetic material) is disposed on the upper surface of the driven member 163. In this embodiment, the metal plate member MB1 is fixed to the driven member 163 by engagement with the elastic claw 163d.

To be more specific, a rail portion is provided at both radial end portions of the arm portion 163c to guide the back and forth slide of the metal plate member MB1, and this rail portion is configured to guide the metal plate member MB1 only from the front side. (only the front side is fully open). When sliding the metal plate member MB1 along the rail portion, the elastic claw 163d is pressed down by the metal plate member MB1, and when the metal plate member MB1 is slid as it is, the metal plate member MB1 is attached to the rear side wall of the rail portion. The slide is regulated by the contact, and at this position, the pressing down of the elastic claw 163d by the metal plate member MB1 is released (it has risen to a position facing the side surface of the metal plate member MB1), and the elastic claw 163d is pressed against the metal plate member MB1. It engages with the plate member MB1 so as to restrict its retraction toward the front side.

Note that the method of fixing the metal plate member MB1 to the driven member 163 is not limited to this. For example, the metal plate member MB1 may be fastened and fixed to the driven member 163, may be tied with a binding band, or may be attached with adhesive tape or the like.

The support case 170 includes a rear member 170B, a middle member 170M that is disposed on the front side of the rear member 170B and has a support hole 174 through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted, and a middle member 170M that is disposed on the front side of the middle member 170M. A front member 170F is provided with a decorative shape (wave pattern) formed on the front side, and a plurality of these (three in this embodiment) plate-like members are stacked one on top of the other and fastened and fixed.

The illumination board 180 is formed into a substantially L-shaped plate shape when viewed from the front in accordance with the shape of the front member 170F, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs and the like arranged at positions designed in consideration of presentation. It includes a light emitting means 181, a connector 182 provided as a part to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of through holes 183 formed in the illumination board 180 for assembly.

The light emitting means 181 includes a strong light emitting means 181a arranged inside the light transmission hole 177 when viewed from the front, and a weak light emitting means 181a arranged outside the light transmission hole 177 (opposing the back surface of the plate of the front member 170F). 181b.

The through hole 183 is formed in an elongated oval shape along the direction of inclination. This makes it easy to assemble the through hole 183 to the protruding cylindrical portion 172 whose outer shape is a perfect circle when viewed from the front.

That is, while the posture of the illumination board 180 is inclined (see FIG. 10), the protruding direction of the protruding cylindrical portion 172 is not inclined (front-back direction), so compared to when assembled in the same direction. Although poor assembly (not assembled or loosely assembled) is likely to occur, in this embodiment, the through hole 183 is formed in an elongated oval shape along the direction in which the orientation of the illumination board 180 is inclined. A larger allowance can be made for the through hole 183 along the direction of inclination, and the through hole 183 can be easily assembled to the protruding cylindrical portion 172.

The illumination board 180 is housed between the front member 170F and the middle member 170M, but at this time, the illumination board 180 is placed in a posture in which the front surface of the board faces diagonally downward (the normal line is inclined downward to the front side). be done. This will be explained in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the window movable unit 150 taken along the line XX in FIG. Note that, for ease of understanding, illustration of the rear member 170B is omitted, and the outer shape of the displacement member 151 is illustrated with imaginary lines. Note that the XX line is arranged to pass through the center of the upper protruding cylindrical portion 172. In addition, in the following description, FIGS. 8 and 9 will be referred to as appropriate.

In the middle member 170M, the aspect of the wall portion on the front side is different between the upper wall portion 170MU and the lower wall portion 170MD. That is, the upper wall portion 170MU is configured as a non-sloping wall portion (the normal line faces in the horizontal direction), and the lower wall portion 170MD is configured as a wall portion that slopes (the normal line faces downward on the front side). Constructed as.

In this manner, the illumination board 180 is supported with respect to the wall portions having different normal lines such that the back surface of the plate is in a posture along the lower wall portion 170MD (a posture in which the normal line is inclined downward to the front side). That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), the direction of the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means 181 of the illumination board 180 is inclined downward on the front side.

The middle member 170M includes a protruding frame portion 171 that protrudes in a frame shape toward the front side, and a plurality of protruding columnar portions that protrude in a small-diameter cylindrical shape toward the front side inside the protruding frame portion 171. 172, and a wiring through hole 173 that is bored in the front and back direction in a position that surrounds the connector 182 at the left and right outer (left side) corners.

The protruding frame portion 171 seals the entire periphery of the illumination board 180 by abutting the outer frame portion of the front member 170F front and back. Thereby, the illumination board 180 can be prevented from being visible from between the front member 170F and the middle member 170M, and light leakage from the same position can be prevented.

The protruding cylindrical portion 172 includes a large-diameter seat and a small-diameter insertion portion that further protrudes from the seat, and is assembled so that the insertion portion enters the through hole 183 of the illumination board 180. The rear surface of the illumination board 180 is supported by the seat, and the arrangement of the illumination board 180 can be stabilized.

Here, the seat portion of the protruding columnar portion 172 disposed on the upper wall portion 170MU is higher than the seat portion of the protruding columnar portion 172 disposed on the lower wall portion 170MD. Thereby, it is possible to stably support the illumination board 180 assembled in the above-mentioned inclined position, and to ensure a gap between the upper wall portion 170MU and the illumination board 180.

The protruding tip of the seat of the protruding cylindrical portion 172 is formed as an inclined surface that matches the attitude of the illumination board 180 (an inclined surface configured such that the protruding length becomes shorter as it goes downward). . Thereby, the protruding cylindrical portion 172 can be given not only the function of stabilizing the arrangement of the illumination board 180 but also the function of stabilizing the posture of the illumination board 180.

The wiring through hole 173 is a through hole for passing an electric wiring connected to the connector 182 of the illumination board 180. Since the posture of the illumination substrate 180 can be maintained by the load applied to the illumination substrate 180 through this electrical wiring, the posture of the illumination substrate 180 can be stably supported without fastening and fixing the illumination substrate 180. can do.

The front member 170F is made of a colored (white in this embodiment) and light-transmissive resin material and has a shape in which the back surface is substantially parallel to the lower wall portion 170MD, and is circularly perforated in the front-rear direction. A plurality of light transmitting holes 177, a plurality of protruding cylindrical parts 178 protruding toward the back side in a small diameter cylindrical shape, and a frame part forming the outer periphery of the back surface of the plate are connected to each other when viewed in the left-right direction L. An L-shaped support portion 179 is provided.

The light transmission hole 177 is formed so as to surround one of the LEDs constituting the light emitting means 181 when viewed from the front. As a result, the appearance of the light emitting means 181 disposed on the back side of the light transmission hole 177 and the other light emitting means 181 when viewed from the front side of the front member 170F changes. That is, it can be visually recognized that the inside of the light transmission hole 177 emits more intense light than the other parts.

A plurality of the protruding cylindrical portions 178 are formed with substantially the same protruding length. As a result, the distance between the main body plate portion of the front member 170F and the illumination board 180 is made uniform over the entire arrangement range of the illumination board 180, and the illumination board 180 in an inclined position is surface-supported at a plurality of positions. Therefore, the stability of supporting the illumination board 180 can be improved while maintaining the degree of freedom in arrangement of the light emitting means 181 and suppressing unevenness in the light emission mode.

That is, since the illumination board 180 is placed in an inclined position with the front side of the board facing downward, in order to maintain that position it is preferable to support it from the front side. If the illumination board 180 is supported by the illumination board 180, the area in which the light emitting means 181 disposed on the front side of the illumination board 180 can be arranged tends to be restricted. If the area of the support part is reduced with priority given to the area where the light emitting means 181 can be arranged, the posture of the illumination board 180 will collapse, and the distance between the main body plate part of the front member 170F and the illumination board 180 will be reduced. It tends to vary within the range, and there is a possibility that the light emission pattern becomes uneven.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a plurality of small-diameter protruding cylindrical portions 178 having the same protruding height are provided so that the front surface of the illumination board 180 can be supported simultaneously at a plurality of points. Therefore, a plurality of protruding cylindrical portions 178 that support the illumination board 180 can be arranged in a plurality of small gap positions that occur between adjacent light emitting means 181. Thereby, the stability of supporting the illumination board 180 can be improved while maintaining the degree of freedom in arranging the light emitting means 181 and suppressing unevenness in the light emission mode.

In the assembled state, the L-shaped support portion 179 is disposed to face the top and front surface of the illumination board 180 and functions to suppress displacement of the illumination board 180. That is, the lower part of the L-shaped support portion 179, which is disposed to face the front surface of the illumination board 180, supports the illumination board 180 and prevents it from falling forward due to its own weight.

In addition, the rear part of the L-shaped support part 179 and the illumination board 180, which are arranged to face the top surface of the illumination board 180, are normally arranged with a gap between them, so that the illumination board 180 can be loosely supported. The vertical displacement of the illumination board 180 can be suppressed to a minimum.

Note that a support portion having the same shape as the L-shaped support portion 179 is also formed on the front side of the lower wall portion 170MD of the middle member 170M (formed at two positions on the left and right), and on the lower surface of the illumination board 180. and the rear surface, and function to suppress displacement of the illumination board 180. That is, in this embodiment, the L-shaped support parts arranged above and below the illumination board 180 are configured to suppress displacement of the illumination board 180 in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction.

Thus, in this embodiment, the illumination board 180 is not directly fastened and fixed, but is supported stably by being sandwiched between the front member 170F and the middle member 170M from the front and back. There is. This is because, for example, if the middle member 170M and the illumination board 180 are fastened and fixed and configured as a single rigid body, the light board 180 may vibrate under the influence of vibrations generated in the middle member 170M. This is a countermeasure that takes this into consideration.

That is, according to the present embodiment, since the illumination board 180 is not fastened and fixed to the middle member 170M or the front member 170F, even if vibration occurs in the middle member 170M or the front member 170F, it will not be affected by the vibration. The arrangement of the illumination board 180 can be easily maintained independently.

Here, it is considered that the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 disposed on the back side of the middle member 170M is likely to cause the vibration of the middle member 170M, but in this embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is It is disposed on the opposite side (back side) of the illumination board 180 across a gap created on the front side of the portion 170MU.

With this configuration, the vibration of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is transmitted to the illumination board 180 via the small-diameter protruding cylindrical portion 172, so that the vibration of the vibration solenoid SOL1 is alleviated by the deformation of the protruding cylindrical portion 172. Therefore, transmission of vibration to the illumination board 180 can be suppressed. Therefore, direct transmission of vibration from the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 as a vibration source to the illumination board 180 can be avoided.

The middle member 170M has a support hole 174 that is bored in the front-rear direction with a diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the transmission shaft rod portion 162 and is configured to rotatably support the transmission shaft rod portion 162, and a support hole 174 located below the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1. A lower regulating portion 175 is provided, and an upper regulating portion 176 is provided on the opposite side of the support hole 174 with respect to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1.

The driven member 163 is normally tilted due to its own weight (see FIG. 11(a)), but when electricity is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, magnetic force (electromagnetic force) is generated, and this magnetic force (electromagnetic force) The metal plate member MB1 is attracted and displaced upward. That is, in the present embodiment, as the metal plate member MB1 is displaced between the raised position where it is placed as a result of being raised by electromagnetic force and the lowered position where it is placed as a result of the electromagnetic force disappearing and it being lowered by its own weight, The contact member 161 and the driven member 163 are rotationally displaced. The rotational displacement will be explained below with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12.

11(a) is a rear view of the window movable unit 150, and FIG. 11(b) is a front view of the window movable unit 150. 12(a) is a rear view of the window movable unit 150, and FIG. 12(b) is a front view of the window movable unit 150.

Note that FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b) illustrate a state in which electricity is not supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the driven member 163 is tilted by its own weight (lower position state), and FIG. 12(a) and 12(b) illustrate a state in which the metal plate member MB1 and the driven member 163 are raised (in the raised position) by the electromagnetic force generated when electricity is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1.

In addition, in FIGS. 11(a) and 12(a), illustration of the rear member 170B is omitted for easy understanding, and in FIGS. 11(b) and 12(b), the outer shape of the displacement member 151 is The shape of the opening on the back side is illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 11(a) and 12(a), in the lowered position, the driven member 163 comes into contact with a cushion portion 175a attached to the upper surface of the lower regulating portion 175, and is regulated from downward displacement. In this position, it comes into contact with a cushion part 176a attached to the lower surface of the upper regulating part 176, and upward displacement is regulated.

Note that the material of the cushion portions 175a and 176a is not limited at all. For example, it may be a general-purpose plastic such as polypropylene or polystyrene, an engineering plastic such as polycarbonate, a thermosetting resin such as melamine resin, polyurethane, or epoxy resin, or a rubber material. Further, the cushion parts 175a and 176a may be made of the same material or may be made of different materials.

Here, the lower regulating part 175 and the upper regulating part 176 are configured to have different positions (distances from the transmitting shaft bar part 162) with respect to the transmission shaft bar part 162. explain.

First, since the load applied to the lower regulating portion 175 via the driven member 163 is mainly a load generated by the own weight of the driven member 163, the driven member 163 is supported by supporting the center of gravity of the driven member 163. It can be stably supported. For this reason, the lower regulating portion 175 is disposed at the center of gravity of the driven member 163 (approximately at the center of the arm length).

On the other hand, since the load applied to the upper regulating part 176 via the driven member 163 is mainly due to the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, the arrangement of the upper regulating member 176 is There are few benefits associated with the location of the center of gravity. In this embodiment, the load transmitted to the upper regulating member 176 via the driven member 163 is reduced by arranging the upper regulating member 176 to face the rotating tip of the driven member 163.

That is, when a moment of force of the same magnitude is generated, the force is transmitted via the driven member 163 at a position farther from the rotation axis of the driven member 163 (a position where the arm related to the moment is longer). Since the load is reduced, the load transmitted to the upper regulating member 176 can be reduced.

In this way, it is desirable that the load transmission to the upper regulating member 176 occurs at the rotating tip of the driven member 163, so in this embodiment, the width dimension (radial width) of the cushion portion 176a is shortened (the cushion 175a). Thereby, load transmission at the intermediate portion of the driven member 163 can be avoided, and load transmission can be stably caused at the rotating tip.

Moreover, since the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 continues to be generated in the raised position, it is difficult to imagine that the driven member 163 will bounce back after colliding with the cushion portion 176a.

On the other hand, by increasing the width (radial width) of the cushion portion 175a of the lower regulating portion 175 (longer than the width of the cushion portion 176a), the area of the surface receiving the load can be increased. The pressure (stress) generated in the cushion portion 175a due to the load due to the own weight of the drive member 163 can be reduced. Thereby, bouncing of the driven member 163 after colliding with the cushion portion 175a can be suppressed.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, bouncing of the driven member 163 can be suppressed while reducing the load transmitted to the cushion parts 175a, 176a via the driven member 163 during displacement in both the vertical directions.

A protruding part 176b is formed below the upper regulating part 176 and protrudes in a curved shape from the back side of the middle member 170M. The protruding portion 176b is disposed to face the rotating tip of the driven member 163, and when the driven member 163 is displaced to the front side, the protruding portion 176b suppresses contact with the driven member 163 in a small area and rotates the driven member 163. guides the rotation of the

As shown in FIGS. 11(b) and 12(b), the distal end portion 153 of the displacement member 151 is disposed on the front side of the strong light emitting means 181a disposed inside the light transmission hole 177 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the light emitted from the strong light emitting means 181a is visible to the player via the tip portion 153.

As described above, the internal shape of the effect section 153a allows the player who views the effect section 153a from the front side to see the entire effect section 153a as if it were (faintly) shining. Even in a situation where the displacement member 151 is displaced while the actual arrangement of the means 181a does not change, it is possible to suppress a change in the light emission mode of the effect portion 153a.

In other words, the player can see the light that is visually recognized through the effect section 153a as if it is being displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the effect section 153a, so that it is as if there is an LED or the like inside the effect section 153a. A light emitting means is provided, and it is possible to create an illusion as if the display section 153a is being displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the presentation section 153a.

On the other hand, since the weak light emitting means 181b can appear to emit light at a fixed position, the weak light emitting means 181b arranged on the illumination board 180 can be The strong light emitting means 181a, which is also arranged on the illumination board 180, can be visually recognized as emitting light while being displaced.

As a result, the light emitting effect that is often achieved by adopting multiple illumination boards, with the first board in a fixed arrangement and the second board in a movable configuration, can be achieved by using a single electrical board with a fixed arrangement. This can be achieved using a decorative board. As a result, the number of illumination boards can be reduced while producing the same presentation effect.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 5. The operation unit 300 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside.

FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 300. The operation unit 300 includes a bottom wall 311 and a box-shaped back case 310 whose front side is open from an outer wall 312 that stands up from the outer edge of the bottom wall 311 .

The back case 310 is formed into a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 311a in the center of the bottom wall portion 311. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, it is possible to divide the display region of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view).

The operating unit 300 includes a first operating unit 400 in which a movable device is disposed in the internal space of the rear case 310 so as to be displaceable along a path including above the opening 311a, and a first operating unit 400 which is disposed on both left and right sides of the opening 311a to produce light emission. A left and right effect unit 600 for performing the above operations, etc., and a second operation unit 700 disposed below the opening 311a are housed, respectively, and are configured as one unit.

Specifically, the first operating unit 400 is disposed above the opening 311a, and the second operating unit 700 is disposed below the opening 311a, respectively, on the bottom wall 311 of the back case 310. Note that FIG. 5 shows a state in which the first operating unit 400 and the second operating unit 700 are attached to the back case 310.

The back case 310 extends from the front end of the outer wall 312 as a flat plate along (for example, arranged parallel to) the back of the game board 13, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), the back case 310 extends from the front end of the outer wall 312 to the front end of the game board 13. A support plate portion 313 for support is provided.

The support plate portion 313 is fastened to the base plate 60 with a positioning convex portion 313a that has a shape capable of fitting into a fitting recess 60b formed on the base plate 60 of the game board 13 and protrudes toward the front side. A plurality of insertion holes 313b are provided through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The rear case 310 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning protrusion 313a into the fitting recess 60b (see FIG. 6), and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 313b and screwed into the base plate 60. As a result, the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 can be integrally fixed, so that the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 as a whole can be improved.

Note that the shape of the positioning convex portion 313a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, a convex portion with an outer shape slightly smaller than the internal shape (in this embodiment, circular or oval) of the fitting recess 60b may be used, or a convex portion with a larger fitting gap may be used in consideration of workability during assembly. It may also be a protrusion of any shape (even smaller external shape). Moreover, when the inner shape of the fitting recess 60b is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex part 313a is also made into a rectangular shape correspondingly.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 13, in this embodiment, many support plate portions 313 are densely arranged on the left side and upper side of the back case 310, and fewer support plate portions 313 are formed on the right side and lower side. However, this is the result of a design that takes into consideration the balance between improving the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operating unit 300 as a whole and space efficiency.

That is, when the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is formed of plywood made by stacking plywood boards as in this embodiment, the movable member disposed on the back side of the game board 13 passes through the flesh of the base board 60. Since the movable members are not visible, the entire back side of the area where openings can be formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13 (recessed from the side) is effective as a performance area where the movable members are visibly disposed.

On the other hand, at the location where the support plate part 313 is formed, the internal space of the back case 310 is eroded inward by the area of the support plate part 313 in front view, so the movable member is moved by that amount. The area where it can be installed will be narrowed. Therefore, if the strength problem can be maintained even if the support plate part 313 is omitted, the restriction on the arrangement range of the movable member can be avoided by omitting the support plate part 313. That's true.

In this embodiment, the reason why many support plate portions 313 are disposed on the left side and upper side of the back case 310 is related to the range of the area where the player can visually recognize the ball shot into the game area or the like. That is, the support plate portion 313 is formed at a location other than the range where the shot ball is visually recognized.

To explain in more detail, in this embodiment, the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (FIG. 4) passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and passes through the return ball prevention member 68 to the game area. It was introduced in 1992, and from then on it was configured to flow down the gaming area. In a pinball game, the area that is thought to attract the most attention is the area where the ball passes, and other outer areas (for example, the area on the opposite side of the third symbol display device 81 across the outer rail 62 and inner rail 61). ) usually receives less attention.

Therefore, the lower left and upper left, based on the arc convex to the left formed by the outer rail 62, and the upper left and upper right, based on the arc convex upward, as ranges that the ball cannot reach. It is thought that players' attention to the game will be lower.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned outer edge member 73 and the surfaces facing the outer rail 62 at the lower left and upper left of the outer rail 62 are formed in a shape that follows the outer rail 62, and are arranged on the front side of the game board 13. The block-shaped member 74 is made of a resin material that does not transmit light, and in addition to the fact that the game board 13 is made of a plywood board that does not easily transmit light, the outer edge member 73 can be viewed from the front side of the game board 13. It is configured such that the back side of the game board 13 cannot be viewed through the block-like member 74.

In the present embodiment, the support plate portions 313 are preferentially disposed at locations where attention is low and locations where visibility is not possible. In fact, even in the left side and upper side where many support plate parts 313 are formed, the support plate parts 313 are formed near the corners of the back case 310, avoiding the central part as the overhanging end of the outer rail 62. be done.

In other words, the rigidity of the operation unit 300 and the game board 13 as a whole can be reduced by selecting the locations where the space will be eroded by forming the support plate portion 313 from locations with low visibility (low performance performance). A high degree of freedom in designing the area within the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the ball can be ensured while achieving the effect of aiming to secure the ball.

From this point of view, since there is a common configuration in pachinko machines in which the balls fired by the ball firing unit 112a roll along the outer rail 62 and are introduced into the gaming area, the range where the balls do not fall is the lower left, upper left It can be easily placed in the upper right corner.

Approximately the lower half of the right outer wall 312 is provided with a notch 312a that is cut out (formed) toward the back side. This notch 312a is cut out below the belt-shaped part 93 (see FIG. 5) of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and leaves a gap between it and the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). Form.

By forming the cutout portion 312a in this manner, the following effects can be achieved. For example, the gap formed by the notch 312a can be made to function as a wiring passage through which the electrical wiring connected to the variable prize winning device 65 passes to the outside of the back case 310. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the electrical wiring will interfere with other components, compared to the case where the wiring is routed up and down.

Furthermore, the gap formed by the notch 312a can be used as a space for arranging the configuration required for the variable prize winning device 65. The components necessary for the variable prize winning device 65 include, for example, a solenoid that generates a driving force, a channel for flowing a ball, a board for a light-emitting effect, a detection sensor for detecting a ball, and other structures. is exemplified.

Further, by arranging a light emitting means such as an LED near the notch 312a, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be easily seen by the player as light with a blurred outline. In other words, compared to the case where the entire circumference of the back case 310 is connected to the game board 13 (the boundary of the light emitted from the back side of the game board 13 is formed along the shape of the back case 310). This makes it possible to blur the boundaries of the light visible through the game board 13. Thereby, it is possible to avoid that the boundary of the light that is visually recognized through the game board 13 depends on the shape of the back case 310, and the degree of freedom in producing light emission can be improved.

Furthermore, compared to the case where the electrical wiring connected to a light emitting means such as an LED is arranged so as to extend to the outside of the operating unit 300 along the back surface of the game board 13, it is easier to operate the electrical wiring through the notch 312a. A configuration like this embodiment in which the light is output outside the unit 300 can reduce the possibility that the electric wiring will block the light emitted from the LED.

That is, by configuring the electrical wiring so that it can be brought out of the operating unit 300 without passing it around to the front side of the LED, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the electrical wiring blocks the light emitted from the LED. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing effects using light emitted from light emitting means such as LEDs.

Note that the shape and length (vertical length) of the cutout portion 312a is not limited at all. For example, the notch portion 312a may be formed over the entire area (vertical width) between the upper and lower support plate portions 313.

As described above, in this embodiment, the right side of the back case 310 is not fastened to the game board 13, so when considering the rigidity of the right side of the game board 13, it is not necessary to rely on the rigidity of the operating unit 300. I can't.

As a countermeasure against this, in this embodiment, a metal plate-like member 75 is provided on the outer edge portion 73 at a position corresponding to the right end portion of the game board 13. The metal plate member 75 will be explained below.

FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, outer edge member 73, and metal plate member 75, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13, outer edge member 73, and metal plate member 75. In addition, in FIGS. 14 and 15, in order to facilitate understanding, the game board 13 is shown alone, and illustrations of other members arranged on the game board 13 are omitted.

The outer edge member 73 is made of a resin material, and includes an arcuate wall portion 73a that constitutes an upper side and has an arcuate inner surface, and a thin wall extending downward from the lower end of the arcuate wall portion 73a. The vertical wall portion 73b includes a vertical wall portion 73b, and an inclined wall portion 73c formed with an upper surface that slopes downward toward the left from the lower end portion of the vertical wall portion 73b. In this way, by configuring the outer edge member 73 with a single member that covers almost the entire area in the vertical direction, the outer edge member 73 is made of a single member that covers almost the entire area in the vertical direction. The number of man-hours required for assembling the game board 13 can be reduced.

The vertical wall portion 73b includes a plurality of plate-like protruding portions 73b1 that protrude in a plate-like manner toward the back side along the right side portion, and is bent from the front side edge of the right side portion into a U-shape when viewed in the vertical direction. A cylindrical protruding part 73b3 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the back side at the joint between the plurality of bent parts 73b2, the arcuate wall part 73a and the inclined wall part 73c, and a cylindrical protruding part 73b3 that is attached to and fastened to the cylindrical protruding part 73b3. A fastening portion 73b4 formed into which a screw can be inserted is provided.

The bent portion 73b2 is arranged at an intermediate position between the arrangement intervals of the plate-like protruding portions 73b1. As a result, in relation to the metal plate member 75, which will be described later, the holding force of the metal plate member 75 to the vertical wall portion 73b is suppressed while suppressing the number of seam penetration portions 75c formed in the metal plate member 75. can be improved.

In other words, compared to the case where the plate-like protrusions 73b1 at three locations resist the bending of the metal plate-like member 75, the plate-like protrusions 73b1 and the bent portion 73b2 prevent the metal plate-like member 75 from bending. Since resistance to bending can be generated, the load generated at one location can be reduced. In addition, by arranging the plate-shaped protruding portions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 at equal intervals, the load generated when the metal plate-shaped member 75 bends can be equally distributed, so that the load generated when the metal plate-shaped member 75 bends can be equally distributed. Excessive load can be prevented from occurring.

The metal plate-like member 75 has a main body plate portion 75a which is folded back multiple times in the transverse direction and has no creases in the longitudinal direction, and is bent leftward at the back side edge of the main body plate portion 75a. A plurality of seam penetrating portions 75c are formed to penetrate in the front-back direction at the joint between the bent portion 75b, the main body plate portion 75a and the bent portion 75b, and a plurality of joint penetration portions 75c are formed to penetrate in the front-back direction at the upper and lower ends of the bent portion 75b. A through hole 75d is provided along with the plate portion in which the through hole 75d is formed, and an insertion hole 75e is formed in a stepped plate portion toward the front side so that a fastening screw can be inserted therethrough.

The metal plate-like member 75 generates particularly strong resistance to bending in the longitudinal direction because the bent portion 75b is formed in the vertical direction in addition to the way the main body plate portion 75a is creased. Therefore, by disposing it integrally with the vertical wall portion 73b, which is easily curved in the longitudinal direction, the vertical wall portion 73b can be efficiently reinforced.

The seam penetrating portion 75c is formed in a size that allows the plate-like protruding portion 73b1 of the vertical wall portion 73b to be inserted therethrough. In this embodiment, the vertical wall portion 73b and the metal plate-like member 75 can be integrated by inserting the plate-like protruding portion 73b1 into the joint penetration portion 75c.

When the metal plate member 75 is assembled to be integrated with the vertical wall portion 73b, the front side edge of the main body plate portion 75a is sandwiched between the bent portion 73b2 and the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 73b, and a cylindrical protrusion is formed. The portion 73b3 is inserted into the through hole 75d. In this way, the metal plate-like member 75 and the vertical wall portion 73b are positioned relative to each other at a plurality of locations in the vertical direction. In this state, the outer edge member 73 and the metal plate member 75 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 75e into the fastening portion 73b4.

With the above configuration, the metal plate member 75 is disposed above and below the vertical wall portion 73b, so that the entire vertical wall portion 73b can be reinforced. Here, the plate-shaped protruding part 73b1 and the cylindrical protruding part 73b3 of the vertical wall part 73b penetrate through the metal plate-like member 75 and extend to the back side, and their tips engage with the game board 13. The engagement between the metal plate member 75 and the game board 13 will be described below.

The game board 13 has a plurality of recesses 13e recessed on the right side edge of the front surface so as to be able to receive the plate-like projections 73b1, and a cylindrical projection 73b3 on the upper and lower sides of the recesses 13e. A plurality of positioning holes 13f are provided which are formed as recesses.

When the outer edge member 73 and the metal plate-like member 75 are assembled into the game board 13 in an integrated state, the plate-like protrusion 73b1 is received in the recessed part 13e, and the circular protrusion 73b3 is received in the positioning hole 13f, respectively. and positioned. That is, the plate-like protruding portion 73b1 and the circular protruding portion 73b3 are used not only for positioning with the metal plate-like member 75 but also for positioning with the game board 13. Thereby, the number of positioning objects can be reduced.

In this embodiment, as described above, since the metal plate member 75 is assembled to suppress the curvature of the vertical wall portion 73b, there is no need to provide sufficient rigidity to the vertical wall portion 73b alone, and the vertical wall The portion 73b can be formed so thin that it can be easily curved in the left-right direction when used alone.

Furthermore, the rigidity of the metal plate member 75 can suppress the deformation of the game board 13 (improve the rigidity), so even if there is a gap between the game board 13 and the back case 310, the game board 13 can be It can maintain its shape.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 5 and 13. A first operating unit 400 is disposed above the third symbol display device 81 of the operating unit 300. The first operation unit 400 includes a light emitting production device LA1 that can be displaced from the state shown in FIGS. 5 and 13 to a position on the front side of the third symbol display device 81, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 and This device visually entertains the player by controlling the displacement in synchronization with the operation of the frame button 22 that can be operated by the player. The details of the first operating unit 400 will be explained below.

16 and 17 are partial front views of the operating unit 300. In FIG. 16, a retracted state in which each component of the first operating unit 400 is retracted to the upper side of the third symbol display device 81 is illustrated, and in FIG. The overhanging state of overhanging (downward) toward the 3-symbol display device 81 side is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the internal shape of the back case 310 is not made symmetrically. In particular, regarding the upper wall (ceiling surface), the right side in front view is lower than the left side in front view due to the relationship with the shape of tank 130 of dispensing unit 93 (see FIG. 3). That is, where the tank 130 is arranged on the upper right side of the operating unit 300, in order to secure the installation area, the upper wall of the rear case 310 is arranged in a lower position on the right side than on the left side. (arranged along the wall schematic line UL).

In this way, it is easier to secure a larger area on the left side than on the right side (there is more room in the ceiling height) inside the rear case 310, so in this embodiment, the drive motor MT1 and the coil spring Auxiliary devices that do not directly affect the appearance of performances such as SP1 (not intended for players to see) are arranged on the left side.

As a result, the drive motor MT1 and the coil spring SP1 can be disposed by effectively utilizing the depression (gap) created by the asymmetrical shape of the upper wall of the rear case 310, and the lower edge of the first operating unit 400 can be made to have a symmetrical shape. However, since it can be moved as far upward as possible, it is possible to easily ensure a large vertical dimension of the display viewing area of the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in accordance with the left-right asymmetrical shape of the upper wall of the back case 310, the shape of the wing-like member 460 (see FIG. 16) of the first operating unit 400 is adjusted in the retracted state of the first operating unit 400. The shape of the side facing the upper wall of the rear case 310 is designed. That is, the wing-like member 460 on the left side is designed to protrude toward the upper wall side of the back case 310 compared to the wing-like member 460 on the right side.

Note that the wing-like members 460 are configured to unite and be visually recognized as one body when the state of the first operating unit 400 changes from the retracted state to the extended state, and are designed to have a bilaterally symmetrical shape in this state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the left and right wing-like members 460 are configured in an asymmetrical shape.

In this embodiment, when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state, the asymmetrically shaped portion (the upper side that contacts when combined) of the wing-like member 460 is hidden by the game board 13 (see FIG. 2), so the left and right wing members It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the shaped member 460 is configured in an asymmetrical shape.

18 and 19 are front perspective views of the first operating unit 400, and FIGS. 20 and 21 are rear perspective views of the first operating unit 400. 18 and 20 illustrate the retracted state of the first operating unit 400, and FIGS. 19 and 21 illustrate the extended state of the first operating unit 400.

In the first operation unit 400, when the drive motor MT1 is rotationally driven, the arm member 414 rotates through a plurality of gears interposed therebetween, and the elevating plate 430 moves up and down in synchronization with the rotational movement.

The elevating plate 430 is supported by a metal rail 405 that is disposed approximately in the center of the left and right and is configured to be vertically expandable and retractable, and an auxiliary arm member 444 that is disposed on the opposite left and right side of the arm member 414. Ru.

A relative displacement member 442 that relatively displaces in the vertical direction in synchronization with the change in attitude of the auxiliary arm member 444 is disposed on the elevating plate 430. In synchronization with the displacement of the relative displacement member 442, the relative displacement member 442 rotates symmetrically. The plurality of displaced wing-like members 460 are displaced.

Accordingly, the constituent members of the first operating unit 400 are displaced between the retracted state and the extended state in a displacement manner that combines elevation and rotation with the drive of the drive motor MT1. Thereby, although only a single drive motor MT1 is used, it is possible to displace the constituent members in multiple directions, so that the performance effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 20, when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state, the upper end portion of the arcuate upper gear portion 444b of the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to protrude upward from the upper edge of the elevating plate 430. Ru. When the first operation unit 400 is in the retracted state, the upper edge of the elevating plate 430 is shielded by the base plate 60 of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) and is difficult to see. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the gear portion 444b is protruding.

On the other hand, since the auxiliary arm member 444 rotates in conjunction with the downward displacement of the elevating plate 430 from the retracted state to the extended state of the first operating unit 400, the upper edge of the elevating plate 430 in the retracted state The arcuate gear portion 444b, which had been projecting upward (see FIG. 27), is displaced downward with the downward movement of the elevating plate 430, and is hidden below the upper edge of the elevating plate 430 (see FIG. 28).

In this way, the arc-shaped gear portion 444b of the auxiliary arm member 444 is allowed to protrude from the elevating plate 430 at the location where it is shielded by the base plate 60 due to the arrangement, and the position where the elevating plate 430 is not shielded by the base plate 60 is allowed. By configuring the auxiliary arm member 444 to be displaced so that the overhang portion is hidden on the back side of the elevating plate 430 until the elevating plate 430 is displaced, the auxiliary arm member 444 is always hidden on the back side of the elevating plate 430. The degree of freedom in designing the auxiliary arm member 444 and the elevating plate 430 can be improved compared to the case in which the auxiliary arm member 444 and the lifting plate 430 are designed.

For example, since the upper edge of the elevating plate 430 can be placed further down, interference between the upper edge of the elevating plate 430 and the upper outer wall 312 of the rear case 310 can be avoided (see FIG. 16).

Furthermore, by configuring the auxiliary arm member 444 to be rotationally displaced, a rack gear-shaped portion (a portion having gear teeth formed along a straight line) is maintained protruding toward the third symbol display device 81 side. While avoiding this, it is possible to ensure a sufficient length of the elevating plate 430 extending toward the third symbol display device 81 side.

That is, even if a fixed rack gear-shaped portion is formed on the elevating plate 430 side of the main body plate portion 401 and configured to mesh with the rotary gear 441, the portion will not move relative to the elevating plate 430 as the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced. Although the relative displacement member 442 can be vertically displaced, in this case, it is necessary to always dispose a fixed rack gear-like portion along the position where the elevating plate 430 is arranged. Therefore, if a configuration in which a large part of the lifting plate 430 protrudes downward from the lower edge of the main body plate part 401 as in the lifting plate 430 of this embodiment is used, the fixed rack gear-like part is moved from the lower edge of the main body plate part 401. It was necessary to form it so as to protrude from the side toward the third symbol display device 81 side.

Therefore, there may be problems such as poor visibility of the third symbol display device 81 due to the third symbol display device 81 being blocked by a fixed rack gear-shaped portion, or a problem in which the third symbol display device 81 is blocked by a fixed rack gear-shaped portion, and the rack gear is not connected to the elevator plate 430 when the first operation unit 400 is in the retracted state. There is a possibility that problems such as a reduction in the degree of freedom in designing the elevating plate 430 may occur due to the purpose of hiding the shaped portion.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a variable auxiliary arm member 444 is used instead of the fixed rack gear-like part, so that it can be placed on the back side (hidden) according to the displacement of the elevating plate 430. ) An auxiliary arm member 444 can be placed. Therefore, while avoiding a situation in which the rack gear-shaped portion is kept protruding toward the third symbol display device 81 side, the length (displacement amount) of the elevating plate 430 toward the third symbol display device 81 side can be sufficiently adjusted. can be secured.

22(a) and 23 are exploded front perspective views of the first operating unit 400, and FIG. 22(b) shows the meshing state of the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470. 24 and 25 are exploded rear perspective views of the first operating unit 400. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 22(a), 23, 24, and 25, the first operating unit 400 is formed from a resin material into a horizontally elongated plate shape, and is located at the bottom of the rear case 310 (see FIG. 16). A transmission unit 410 composed of a main body plate 401 fastened and fixed to the wall 311, a plurality of members rotatably supported by the main body plate 401, and connected to the tip of an arm member 414 of the transmission unit 410. A back arrangement plate 420 is composed of a plurality of plate-shaped parts arranged on the same plane including a connecting plate part 421 which is connected to The device includes an elevating plate 430, and a synchronous operation unit 440 supported between the elevating plate 430 and the accommodation plate portion 425 of the rear arrangement plate 420 (see FIGS. 23 and 25).

In addition, the first operation unit 400 includes a plate-shaped support plate portion 450 fastened and fixed to the elevating plate 430, rotatably supported by the support plate portion 450, and fastened and fixed to the front side of the synchronous movement unit 440. A set of left and right wing-like members 460 that rotationally displaces due to a load applied by the displacement of a fixed transmission plate 490, and an auxiliary member 470 that rotates in synchronization with the wing-like members 460 (FIG. 22(a), FIG. 22( b) and Figure 24).

The main body plate section 401 includes a shaft support section 402 that pivotally supports a transmission gear 412, an end support section 403 that is disposed on the lower right side of the shaft support section that supports an end gear 413, and an arm support section that is a columnar section that supports an arm member 414. 404, a metal rail 405 which is arranged at the left and right center part and whose rear side part is fixed so that the front side part can be vertically displaced; a long hole portion 406, a cover portion 407 formed in a plate shape from a light-transmissive resin material and covering the area where the long hole portion 406 is formed from the back side, and a detection sensor SC1 for detecting the state. Equipped with.

The terminal support portion 403 includes an axial support portion 403a formed in the same shape as the axial support portion 402, an annular protrusion 403b protruding along a circle centered on the axial support portion 403a, and A stopper portion 403c is provided that projects toward the front side in a fan shape at a position between the protrusion 403b and the shaft support portion 403a. The stopper portion 403c is formed by general compression molding, and the side opposite to the protruding portion is formed as a recessed portion.

The lid portion 407 closes the area where the elongated hole portion 406 is formed. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the electrical wiring DH1 passing through the wiring through hole 401a formed through the main body plate part 401 from the front side of the main body plate part 401 and reaching the back side of the elongated hole part 406 is inserted into the elongated hole. It is guided to the front side through the section 406. Therefore, in a situation where there is no lid part 407 and the back side is open, the electrical wiring DH1 protrudes to the back side, and during the assembly work, the electrical wiring DH1 is between the bottom wall part 311 of the back case 310 (see FIG. 13) and the main body plate part 401. There is a risk of getting caught. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the area where the electrical wiring DH1 is arranged is partitioned off by the lid part 407, so that the electrical wiring DH1 is prevented from being pinched between the bottom wall part 311 and the main body plate part 401. Can be done.

Thereby, the first operating unit 400 can be assembled into the rear case 310 without checking the arrangement of the electrical wiring DH1, so that the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

The transmission unit 410 includes a drive gear 411 that is non-rotatably connected to the rotating shaft of the drive motor MT1, a transmission gear 412 that is meshed with the drive gear 411 and rotatably supported on the shaft support portion 402, and A terminal gear 413 is meshed with the transmission gear 412 and rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 403a, and an arm member 414 is pivotally supported by the arm support portion 404 so that its attitude can change as the terminal gear 413 rotates. Be prepared.

The terminal gear 413 has a gap between an annular protrusion 413a that has an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the annular protrusion 403b and protrudes toward the back side, and an inner surface of the annular protrusion 413a. A stoppered part 413b protrudes in a fan-like manner similar to the stopper part 403c with a gap between the two, a cylindrical protruding part 413c that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the front at an eccentric position away from the shaft support part 403a, and a front face of the gear part. A detected portion 413d is provided which extends in a fan shape in the outer diameter direction from a flange portion formed in a flange shape on the side.

The annular protrusion 413a is disposed such that the side surface on the shaft side faces the annular protrusion 403b, and the annular protrusion 403b is sandwiched between the annular protrusion 403b and the stopped portion 413b. That is, the annular protrusion 403b serves as a guide rail that guides the rotation of the terminal gear 413.

The stopped portion 413b is formed by general compression molding, and the side opposite to the protruding portion is formed as a recessed portion. The stopped portion 413b interferes with the stopper portion 403c in its rotational direction. That is, in this embodiment, the rotation angle of the end gear 413 is limited by the circumferential dimension of the stopper portion 403c and the stopped portion 413b. That is, the terminal gear 413 is rotationally displaced by a rotation angle of less than 360 degrees.

In addition, when designing the shapes of the stopper part 403c and the stopped part 413b, calculate the rotation angle required for the end gear 413, and calculate the remaining angle (the angle obtained by subtracting the rotation angle of the end gear 413 from 360 degrees). The shapes of the stopper portion 403c and the stopped portion 413b may be designed respectively at an angle divided into two equal parts. As a result, it is possible to prevent either the stopper portion 403c or the stopped portion 413b from becoming weak in strength, thereby extending the service life of the first operating unit 400.

The cylindrical projecting portion 413c is a metal rod made of brass, and is fitted and fixed to the terminal gear 413 made of resin. A ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction and a known E-ring E1 are arranged at the tip of the bulge, and the arm member 414 is connected and supported to the cylindrical bulge 413c so as not to fall off.

The detected portion 413d is formed with a thickness that allows it to pass through the detection gap of the detection sensor SC1, and when the detected portion 413d is detected by the detection sensor SC1, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is activated by the first operating unit. 400 can be determined to be in the evacuation state.

The arm member 414 includes an annular portion 414a that is rotatably supported by the arm support portion 404, a plate portion 414b that extends in the radial direction from the front side of the annular portion 414a, and a plate portion 414b that extends from the front side of the annular portion 414a. An intermediate plate portion 414c that is arranged parallel to the rear surface of the portion 414b and connected to the extending end of the plate portion 414b, and a long hole portion formed in the intermediate plate portion 414c in the shape of a long hole. 414d, a tip plate portion 414e arranged parallel to the rear side with respect to the intermediate plate portion 414c and connected to the extending end of the intermediate plate portion 414c, and a front side from the extending tip of the tip plate portion 414e. A cylindrical protruding portion 414f that protrudes in a cylindrical shape is provided.

The elongated hole portion 414d is formed in a size that allows the cylindrical protruding portion 413c of the terminal gear 413 to be inserted therethrough, and the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted through the elongated hole portion 414d.

The cylindrical projecting portion 414f is a metal rod made of brass, and is fitted and fixed to the tip plate portion 414e made of resin. A ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction and a known E-ring E1 are disposed at the protruding tip of the cylindrical protruding part 414f, and the connecting plate part 421 of the back arrangement plate 420 is attached to the column so that it cannot fall off. It is connected and supported by the projecting portion 414f.

FIG. 26 is a top view of the first operating unit 400. In FIG. 26, a second intermediate position of the first operating unit 400 is illustrated, and for ease of understanding, a coil spring SP1, a fixed pulley on which the coil spring SP1 is guided, a drive motor MT1 and the drive motor MT1 The illustration of the base plate to which is fastened and fixed is omitted.

According to FIG. 26, in this embodiment, the shape of the arm member 414 is designed so that a large area on the front side of the arm member 414 can be secured. That is, by forming the arm member 414 in a shape bent back and forth, interference with other members can be functionally avoided. This will be explained below.

The plate-shaped portion 414b is arranged closer to the front than the detection sensor SC1 in order to avoid interference with the detection sensor SC1. In other words, the restriction on the front and rear positions of the plate-shaped portion 414b is due to its relationship with the detection sensor SC1, so it is limited to a location that is not related to the detection sensor SC1 (a location on the opposite side of the rotation axis (arm support portion 404) with respect to the detection sensor SC1). Now, you can design the front and rear positions as you like.

In this embodiment, the intermediate plate part 414c, which is disposed on the opposite side of the rotation axis (arm support part 404) with respect to the detection sensor SC1, is disposed on the back side compared to the plate part 414b. As a result, the front-to-back distance between the front surface of the terminal gear 413 and the arm member 414 can be narrowed, and the load can be transmitted to the arm member 414 at the base side of the cylindrical projecting portion 413c. It is possible to avoid a decrease in load transmission efficiency due to deformation of the cylindrical projecting portion 413c.

Furthermore, since this is due to the relationship between the front and back positions of the intermediate plate portion 414c and the end gear 413, at a location that is not related to the end gear 413 (a location on the opposite side of the rotation axis (arm support portion 404) with respect to the end gear 413), The front and rear positions can be designed as desired.

In the present embodiment, the tip plate portion 414e, which is disposed on the opposite side of the rotating shaft (arm support portion 404) with respect to the end gear 413, is disposed on the back side compared to the intermediate plate portion 414c. As a result, a large space can be secured on the front side of the tip plate part 414e, so that the rear arrangement plate 420 and It is possible to easily ensure the longitudinal dimensions of the constituent members such as the synchronous operation unit 440.

As described above, in this embodiment, the shape of the arm member 414 is set with the aim of making it possible to avoid interference with other members, but there are other structural effects as well. For example, by bending the arm member 414 in stages, it is possible to prevent the load generated on the arm member 414 from concentrating locally (at one point) (stress concentration can be alleviated), and the arm member 414 can be bent in stages. 414 can be improved.

Furthermore, by configuring the minimum necessary gap to avoid interference with other members, it is possible to configure a large gap on the opposite side of the arm member 414 with respect to the other member that secures the gap. Therefore, using the gap, it is possible to run an electric wiring (an electric wiring different from the electric wiring DH1) or to arrange an additional presentation member (such as an illumination board).

Further, according to FIG. 26, in this embodiment, the electrical wiring DH1 arranged to reach the light emitting device LA1 from the main body plate part 401 side may be unintentionally pinched by the wing-like member 460 or rotated. It is configured such that it can be prevented from being bitten by the gear teeth of the gear 441 and the relative displacement member 442. This will be explained below. In addition, in this description, FIG. 25 will be referred to as appropriate.

The electrical wiring DH1 is first guided from the main body plate portion 401 side to the auxiliary arm member 444 through the long hole portion 406. At this time, the electric wiring DH1 is inserted into the through hole 448a of the end side plate 448 and passed inside the extension portion 444c.

Inside the extending portion 444c, the electric wiring DH1 is guided to the proximal end portion 444a while being prevented from falling off by the retaining portion 444c1. Thereafter, the electrical wiring DH1 is guided from the base end side part 444a to the back side of the accommodation plate part 425, and is an L-shaped area partitioned by the frame part protruding toward the back side of the accommodation plate part 425 and the closing plate 428. It passes through and reaches the through hole 427.

The frame portion protruding toward the back side of the housing plate portion 425 is provided with an omitted portion 425b that is omitted from protruding approximately halfway around the insertion hole 425a. The omitted portion 425b allows the electric wiring DH1 to be guided to the front side of the closing plate 428 at an angle of 180 degrees. This can reduce the possibility that the electrical wiring DH1 will bend near the insertion hole 425a when the auxiliary arm member 444 rotates.

The electric wiring DH1 is passed through the through hole 427 to the front side, passes through a cylindrical portion 433 formed at a position overlapping the through hole 427 in the front and back, and is guided to the front side of the lifting plate 430, and is guided to the front side of the lifting plate 430. While being temporarily fastened to the fastening portion 451 of 450 with a binding band or the like, it is connected to a connector provided on the illumination board of the light emitting display device LA1.

In this way, the electrical wiring DH1 is disposed inside the constituent members (auxiliary arm member 444 and rear placement board 420) for most of its route, so the electrical wiring does not follow the route like in a conventional pachinko machine. Compared to the case where most of the electrical wiring DH1 is exposed (exposed), the possibility that the electrical wiring DH1 collides with other movable members and receives a load can be reduced.

Further, in this embodiment, the guide path of the electric wiring DH1 and the relative displacement member 442 that slides are separated. That is, it is only the rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 (rotational displacement accompanied by sliding displacement of the rotating shaft) that can cause deformation such as bending or curving in the electric wiring DH1.

As a result, even if the vertical displacement speed of the elevating plate 430 and the displacement speed of the relative displacement member 442 are configured to be significantly different, the relationship between the deformation of the electrical wiring DH1 and the displacement speed of the relative displacement member 442 can be maintained. By disconnecting it, it is possible to avoid an increase in the load applied to the electric wiring DH1.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 22(a), FIG. 23, FIG. 24, and FIG. 25. The back arrangement plate 420 includes a plate-shaped connecting plate portion 421 that is connected to the cylindrical projecting portion 414f of the arm member 414 and fastened to the elevating plate 430, and a plate-shaped connecting plate portion 421 that is disposed on the right side of the connecting plate portion 421 and is connected to the elevating plate 430. An accommodating plate part 425 to which the front side member of the metal rail 405 is fastened and fixed, and an L-shaped plate which is fastened and fixed to the accommodating plate part 425 and partially closes the back side of the accommodating plate part 425. It is provided with a block plate 428 having a shape.

The connecting plate portion 421 includes an insertion elongated hole 422 formed in the main body plate portion in the form of a long elongated hole in the left-right direction so that the cylindrical projecting portion 414f can be inserted therethrough, and a front side and an elongated insertion hole below the insertion elongated hole 422. It includes a support box part 423 formed in a box shape with an open upper side.

Since the support box portion 423 is formed to be elongated downward with respect to the long insertion hole 422, the rigidity of the accommodation plate portion 425 can be reinforced using the support box portion 423. That is, the support box part 423 is arranged to face the support wall part 426 on the left and right, and when the support wall part 426 is largely bent and deformed to the left and comes into contact with the support box part 423, the deformation is corrected by the support box. This can be suppressed by the rigidity of the portion 423.

The accommodation plate part 425 includes a support wall part 426 provided on the left edge of the main body plate part in a linear plate shape extending in the vertical direction and protruding toward the front side, and a through hole bored on the front side of the closing plate 428. hole 427.

In this embodiment, the electrical wiring DH1 is inserted into the through hole 427. That is, the through hole 427 is formed with an inner diameter that allows the connector disposed at the end of the electrical wiring DH1 to be inserted therethrough.

The closing plate 428 is formed so that the front surface of the plate comes into contact with a frame portion projecting in a frame shape from the back side of the accommodation plate portion 425, and is configured to partition an area between the accommodation plate portion 425 and the closing plate 428. configured. In this embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 is arranged only on the inside of the frame of the accommodation plate 425 (on the front side of the closing plate 428). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring DH1 from entering the metal rail 405 side (left side of the frame).

An irregularly shaped hole 428a is formed through the closing plate 428 so that a temporary fixing part 425c, which is a U-shaped part projecting toward the back side at a position closer to the through hole 427 than the omitted part 425b, can be seen when viewed from the rear. Ru.

The irregularly shaped hole 428a is made up of a horizontally elongated portion whose horizontal width is slightly longer than the horizontal width of the temporary fastening portion 425c, and a vertically elongated portion that is provided to intersect with the horizontally elongated portion to ensure an area through which the binding band can be passed. It is formed.

The temporary fastening part 425c has a role as a fastening part of the binding band. By temporarily securing the electrical wiring DH1 with a binding band, the arrangement of the electrical wiring DH1 can be stabilized. In this case, by tightening the cable tie, the path of the electrical wiring DH1 guided from the auxiliary arm member 444 to the closing plate 428 can be brought closer to the closing plate 428, so that the insertion hole 425a of the accommodation plate 425 is centered. A gap can be provided between the edge portion of the semicircular plate portion and the electric wiring DH1 (see FIGS. 25 and 26). This can prevent the electrical wiring DH1 from rubbing against the edge portion of the housing plate portion 425, thereby extending the service life of the electrical wiring DH1.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the binding band that temporarily fastens the electrical wiring DH1 (see FIG. 26) guided between the omitted portions 425b can be exposed from the irregularly shaped hole 428a of the closing plate 428, so that the binding band can be exposed from the irregularly shaped hole 428a of the closing plate 428. Replacement or assembly can be performed without removing the closing plate 428.

As a result, the temporary fixing position of the electrical wiring DH1 is a position between the accommodation plate part 425 and the closing plate 428, which is a location where the position of the electrical wiring DH1 with respect to the constituent members of the first operating unit 400 is fixed (i.e., the position where the electrical wiring DH1 is fixed) The base end side part of the auxiliary arm member 444 is the first part that displaces the electric wiring DH1 with respect to the lifting plate 430 when the electric wiring DH1 travels along the path from the light emitting display device LA1 to which one end of DH1 is connected. The binding band can be replaced without removing the closure plate 428 while temporarily fixing the electrical wiring DH1 at the location (overlapping the route up to 444a). Therefore, it is possible to improve the service life of the electrical wiring DH1, and also to improve the maintainability of the binding band related to the electrical wiring DH1.

In this embodiment, the electrical wiring DH1 is made to run along the front side of the blocking plate 428 along the shape of the blocking plate 428, and since the blocking plate 428 has an L-shape in rear view, the electrical wiring DH1 is Curving along a first plane perpendicular to the front-back direction on the front side of the plate 428, and curving along a second plane (a plane perpendicular to the first plane) perpendicular to the left-right direction near the through hole 427. become. Thereby, the holding force for holding the electrical wiring DH1 on the closing plate 428 and the accommodation plate 425 can be improved, and the position of the electrical wiring DH1 can be stabilized.

The elevating plate 430 includes a fastening part 431 made up of a plurality of parts related to fastening and fixing the rear arrangement plate 420, a support part 432 made up of a plurality of parts related to supporting the synchronous operation unit 440, and an electric wiring DH1. A cylindrical part 433 formed to be inserted through, a fastening part 434 composed of a plurality of parts related to fastening and fixing of the support plate part 450, and a plurality of parts formed in the main body plate part to avoid interference between members. It includes a coping part 435 and a decoration part 436 in which a substantially bilaterally symmetrical pattern is applied to the front surface of the plate.

The fastening portion 431 includes at least a pair of gourd-shaped protrusions 431a that are arranged at the lower end of the elevating plate 430 and support vertical displacement of the relative displacement member 442 (slide rack). The gourd-shaped protrusion 431a is a part that supports the relative displacement member 442, but has a female screw shape formed from its tip, into which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the accommodation plate part 425 to the elevating plate 430 is screwed. Ru. That is, it is used both as a part related to fastening and fixing the rear arrangement plate 420 and a part related to supporting the synchronous operation unit 440.

The cylindrical part 433 extends to the back side through the gap between the constituent members of the synchronous operation unit 440, and its back end comes into contact with the front surface of the housing plate part 425, and in this abutting state, the tubular part 433 connects with the through hole 427. The inside of the cylindrical portion 433 is continuously connected. The electrical wiring DH1 is inserted back and forth through this continuously connected portion.

The coping portion 435 may include, for example, a portion of the main body plate portion in order to avoid interference with the connecting portion between the fixed transmission plate 490 and the relative displacement member 442 (in this embodiment, raised fastening portions arranged vertically). A notch 435a that is cut upward from the lower edge, and an arcuate gear part that is recessed in a wall that is formed in a wall shape to protect the upper part of the axis of the arcuate gear part 444b of the auxiliary arm member 444. An example is a recessed portion 435b formed to avoid interference with the recessed portion 435b.

The decorative portion 436 is arranged on the back side of the feather-like member 460, and is configured to cooperate with the feather-like member 460 to make a series of patterns visible as the feather-like member 460 is displaced. This will be explained later.

The synchronous operation unit 440 includes a pair of rotating gears 441 that mesh with each other, a relative displacement member 442 that meshes with one of the rotating gears 441 and is formed to be movable in the vertical direction, and a long hole in the relative displacement member 442. an auxiliary arm member 444 having a pair of elongated holes 443 drilled in the shape of a shape, a rotating gear tooth that meshes with the other rotating gear 441, and an end fastened and fixed to the rotating tip of the auxiliary arm member 444 from the back side. and a side plate 448.

The gourd-shaped protrusion 431a is inserted into the elongated hole 443. By arranging the longitudinal direction of the gourd shape and the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole 443 substantially parallel to each other, the posture of the relative displacement member 442 can be stabilized.

In addition, compared to the case where the gourd-shaped protrusion 431a is formed in an oval shape, the area in contact with the elongated hole 443 can be made smaller, so that the relationship between the gourd-shaped protrusion 431a and the relative displacement member 442 can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the frictional resistance that occurs between the two.

The auxiliary arm member 444 includes a ring-shaped proximal end portion 444a that is pivotally supported by the large-diameter protrusion 432a of the support portion 432, and a circular arc in which gear teeth are formed concentrically with the ring shape of the proximal end portion 444a. A gear portion 444b, an extending portion 444c extending in a ring-shaped radial direction from the base end side portion 444a, and a substantially semi-cylindrical shape disposed at the extending tip of the extending portion 444c. It is provided with a cylindrical member 444d whose open part on the inner side of the cylinder is continuously connected to the open part of the extension part 444c.

The proximal side portion 444a has an insertion hole 425a into which a fastening screw is inserted, which is inserted into the female threaded portion formed at the tip of the large diameter protrusion 432a while being inserted into the large diameter protrusion 432a. Movement toward the back side is restricted by the accommodation plate portion 425. That is, the base end side portion 444a is pivotally supported in such a manner that it faces the elevating plate 430 and the accommodation plate portion 425 from the front and back so that it cannot fall off.

The extension part 444c is formed in a box shape with an open back side, extends from one side in the short direction to the other side on the back side, and connects the short side of the electrical wiring DH1 with the other side. A retaining portion 444c1 formed with a gap slightly longer than the direction dimension (width dimension) is provided. This retaining portion 444c1 plays a role of preventing the electrical wiring DH1 that is passed between the other side of the extending portion 444c in the lateral direction and is disposed inside the extending portion 444c from falling off later. have.

Note that the form of the retaining portion 444c1 is not limited to this. For example, the gap between the extending portion 444c and the retaining portion 444c1 may be configured to be shorter than the short side dimension (width dimension) of the electric wiring DH1. In this case, when assembling (inserting) the electrical wiring DH1 into the gap between the extension part 444c and the retaining part 444c1, it is necessary to bend the retaining part 444c1 to widen the gap. The effect of preventing the electrical wiring DH1 from falling off can be improved.

As long as the electrical wiring DH1 is disposed inside the extension portion 444c, expansion and contraction of the electrical wiring DH1 when the first operating unit 400 moves up and down can be suppressed to a minimum. This will be described later with reference to No. 30.

The cylindrical member 444d is designed so that its outer diameter is slightly shorter than the transverse dimension of the elongated hole 406, and when inserted into the elongated hole 406, This enables sliding movement of the auxiliary arm member 444 along and rotational movement of the auxiliary arm member 444.

The end side plate 448 has a through hole 448a through which the electric wiring DH1 can be inserted, and the electric wiring DH1 inserted into the through hole 448a is inserted into the cylindrical portion 444d inserted into the elongated hole portion 406. It passes through the inside, passes inside the extension portion 444c, is guided to the back side of the proximal end portion 444a, and enters between the closing plate 428 and the accommodation plate portion 425. Then, it passes through the through hole 427 and the cylindrical portion 433 and is guided to the front side.

Because the electrical wiring DH1 is passed through the through hole 448a, the inner shape of the through hole 448a is larger than the outer diameter of the connector connected to the end of the electrical wiring DH1. In other words, the through hole 448a is formed with a size that allows the connector to be inserted therethrough.

The through hole 448a is formed in an irregular shape that includes not only the central portion of the end side plate 448 but also a region eccentric to the outside of the diameter, and in particular, is formed to have a large opening on the extended portion 444c side. Therefore, regardless of the attitude of the auxiliary arm member 444, the electrical wiring DH1 can be brought closer to the extension portion 444c, so that as the attitude of the auxiliary arm member 444 changes, the arrangement of the electrical wiring DH1 with respect to the auxiliary arm member 444 becomes larger. You can avoid changing (outraging).

In addition, the through hole 448a extends counterclockwise in rear view from the extending portion 444c side at the outer diameter side of the end side plate 448. Due to this extension, the opening range of the through hole 448a when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state can be expanded to the right, so that the horizontal displacement width required for the electric wiring DH1 can be suppressed.

In this case, even in the configuration of this embodiment in which the end side plate 448 is displaced left and right when the elevating plate 430 is moved up and down, the direction of the through hole 448a is changed to prevent the left and right displacement of the end side plate 448. It can be used to provide relief. Therefore, since the displacement width required for the electric wiring DH1 can be made shorter than the displacement width of the end side plate 448, the extra length of the wiring set in consideration of the displacement of the electric wiring DH1 can be shortened. At the same time, the load applied from the end side plate 448 to the electrical wiring DH1 can be reduced.

A fixed transmission plate 490 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the relative displacement member 442. That is, in the same way that the elevating plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 undergo relative displacement, the support plate portion 450 fastened and fixed to the elevating plate 430 and the fixed transmission plate 490 fastened and fixed to the relative displacement member 442 undergo relative displacement. do.

The support plate part 450 is a plate-shaped member to which the light-emitting display device LA1, which is formed in a disc shape and has a light-emitting board disposed on the back side, is fastened and fixed to the front side, and is a plate-like member that is fastened to the front side by fastening screws that are inserted into the elevating plate 430. a plurality of fastening portions 451 into which are screwed, and a pair of left and right fastening shaft support portions 452 into which fastening screws that are inserted into the cylindrical portion 461 of the wing-like member 460 and are inserted into the elevating plate 430 are screwed. , a pair of left and right through holes 453 are formed below the fastening shaft support part 452, and a support part 454 that hooks and supports the upper protrusion LA1b of the light emitting production device LA1.

The light emitting display device LA1 includes a pair of fastening parts LA1a on the lower part into which fastening screws inserted into the support plate part 450 are screwed, and a pair of protrusions on the upper part that are protrudingly provided so as to be insertable into the support part 454. It is equipped with LA1b. In this way, by supporting the lower part of the light emitting display device LA1 by fastening and fixing, and supporting the upper part by engaging, it is possible to secure sufficient support strength and to prevent the shadow of the fastening screws from appearing on the upper rear side of the illumination board. This can be avoided.

A three-dimensional or two-dimensional decorative pattern is provided on the front side of the light emitting production device LA1 so as to be visible to the player. This decorative pattern is configured so that it can be visually recognized as an integral decoration with the feather-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 in a situation where it is not hidden by the feather-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 (FIG. 34 reference).

In this embodiment, the shape of the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 is shaped like a shellfish (for example, a scallop shell), and the shape of the light-emitting device LA1 arranged between them is shaped like a pearl. It is formed from a visually recognizable approximately circular shape when viewed from the front. That is, by making the light-emitting production member LA1, the wing-like member 460, and the auxiliary member 470 visible as one, it is possible to construct an appearance that evokes the series of concepts of "a pearl placed inside an open shell". .

The wing-like member 460 is composed of a plurality of members supported by the fastening shaft support portion 452, and includes a cylindrical portion 461 that is rotatably supported by the fastening shaft support portion 452, and a cylindrical portion 461 that is rotatably supported by the fastening shaft support portion 452. An arc-shaped gear 462 formed in an arc shape and meshed with each other, an extension part 463 extending in a plate shape from the cylindrical part 461 to the opposite side of the arc-shaped gear 462, and the extension part 463 of the extension part 463. Formed portions 464L and 464R formed on the extending end side and configured to be able to reflect light intensely by applying plating to the front surface of the plate, and an arcuate gear along an arc smaller in diameter than the arcuate gear 462. A downstream gear 465 formed on the front side of the arc gear 462, a flange portion 466 formed in a flange shape covering the back side of the arcuate gear 462, and an extension end portion where the flange portion 466 extends in the outer direction. A cylindrical protruding portion 467 is provided that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the back side.

The arcuate gear 462 is formed as a gear tooth formed into an arc with the same diameter that meshes with the pair of cylindrical portions 461 at an intermediate position. That is, the rotation angles of the plurality of (left and right) wing-like members 460 rotated by the meshing of the arcuate gears 462 are the same (symmetrical).

The extending portion 463 includes a recessed portion 463a that is recessed only on the right side. The recessed portion 463a is a shaped portion that facilitates avoiding interference with the electrical wiring that passes through the cylindrical portion 433 and is guided to the front side of the elevating plate 430, and the details will be described later.

The forming portions 464L and 464R are combined when the first operation unit 400 is extended and configured as a series of approximately semicircular (approximately semielliptical) decorative bodies (see FIG. 17). When the unit 400 is in the retracted state, it is arranged to be left and right, and its size is asymmetrical (see FIG. 16).

Specifically, while the lower side is formed symmetrically, in the shape of the upper side that comes into contact when combined, the left forming part 464L is formed to protrude in the rotational direction compared to the right forming part 464R. By doing so, it is formed in a large size. In other words, when the first operating unit 400 is in the extended state, the contact surfaces S1 of the forming portions 464L and 464R are arranged on the right side (see FIG. 17).

The shapes of the upper end portions of the wing-like members 464L and 464R, which are arranged opposite to each other, differ depending on the distance from the cylindrical portion 461. In other words, the side closer to the cylindrical portion 461 (the side closer to the rotation axis, the inner diameter side) of the wing-like members 464L, 464R is arranged so that when the wing-like members 464L, 464R come closest to each other, they can overlap each other in a front view. It has a shape in which an interference portion 464a is disposed with a positional shift in the direction of the rotation axis.

In this embodiment, the side closer to the cylindrical portion 461 corresponds to a portion where a decorative pattern that is visually recognized as a series of patterns is formed when the wing-like members 464L and 464R are brought closest to each other. The above-mentioned interference portion 464a can prevent cuts from occurring in the contact surfaces S1 of the wing-like members 464L, 464R when the wing-like members 464L, 464R come closest to each other, so that the decorative pattern can be seen by the player. It can be visually recognized without any discomfort.

On the other hand, on the side far from the cylindrical part 461 (the side far from the rotation axis, the outer diameter side), the rotation axis of the wing-like members 464L, 464R is set so that the rotation of the wing-like members 464L, 464R can be stopped by contact. The shape is such that the contact surfaces are arranged at positions that match in direction.

By providing the part where the load occurs when the wing-shaped members 464L, 464R stop due to contact with each other at the outermost diameter part where the arm length in calculating the moment of force is the longest, the wing-shaped members 464L, 464R can be reduced due to contact. The load on the system can be minimized.

In this way, by changing the shape of the wing-like members 464L, 464R depending on the distance from the cylindrical part 461, the series of decorative patterns formed when the wing-like members 464L, 464R come closest to each other can be made to look strange to the player. In addition, it is possible to minimize the load that may be generated on the wing-like members 464L, 464R when the wing-like members 464L, 464R come closest to each other.

The flange portion 466 serves both to suppress displacement of the arcuate gear 462 in the front-rear direction and to partition the arcuate gear 462 and the fixed transmission plate 490. This makes it possible to optimize the meshing state of the arcuate gear 462 and to prevent the arcuate gear 462 from coming into contact with and getting caught on the fixed transmission plate 490 and causing excessive resistance.

The cylindrical projecting portion 467 is inserted into the elongated hole 491 of the fixed transmission plate 490, and a ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction is inserted into the projecting tip. In addition, a female thread is formed on the protruding tip, and a fastening screw is inserted through the collar C1 and has a cap larger than the inner diameter of the collar C1. Thereby, the fixed transmission plate 490 is irremovably connected to the cylindrical projecting portion 467.

The auxiliary member 470 is composed of a pair of left and right plate-like members that are rotatably supported, and includes a supported part 471 formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom, and a supported part 471 that is inserted through a through hole 453 and is not rotatable. A gear portion 473 having gear teeth that are non-rotatably fitted to the end of the insertion metal rod 472 and formed on an arc centered on the insertion metal rod 472. Equipped with.

A female thread is formed in the front side of the insertion metal rod 472 in the radial direction, and a through hole is provided at the corresponding position of the supported portion 471 into which the threaded part of the fastening screw that is screwed into the female thread can be inserted. is formed. After the insertion metal rod 472 is inserted into the supported part 471, a fastening screw is screwed into the female screw through the through hole, thereby preventing the insertion metal rod 472 from falling off from the supported part 471.

The gear portion 473 is rotatably supported around the through hole 453 as the insertion metal rod 472 is supported by the through hole 453 . Since the gear portion 473 meshes with the downstream gear 465 (see FIG. 22(b)), it rotates in synchronization with the rotation angle of the wing-like member 460.

The fixed transmission plate 490 has a plate-like part fastened and fixed to the front side of the relative displacement member 442, a long hole part 491 bored as a curved long hole in the plate-like part, and a long hole part 491 formed in the lower end of the plate-like part. It includes a metal rod 492 that is a non-rotatably supported metal rod-shaped member and projects toward the front side, and a decorative portion 493 that is non-rotatably fixed to the projecting tip of the metal rod 492.

The elongated hole portion 491 includes a vertical portion 491a formed along the vertical direction, and a curved portion 491b bent laterally than the vertical portion 491a. By dividing the elongated hole portion 491 in this manner, the vertical displacement of the fixed transmission plate 490 and the accompanying rotational displacement of the wing-like member 460 are not completely synchronized, but a deviation is provided in the synchronization mode. However, the details will be described later.

The manner in which the metal rod 492 and the decorative portion 493 are connected and fixed is similar to the manner in which the insertion metal rod 472 and the supported portion 471 are connected. Thereby, the metal rod 492 can be prevented from falling off the decorative portion 493.

Next, the operation mode of the first operation unit 400 will be explained. 27, 28, 29, and 30 are rear views of the first operating unit 400. 27 to 30 illustrate the displacement of each component as the drive motor MT1 rotates. In FIG. 27, the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state, and in FIG. 28, the wall schematic line UL ( In FIG. 29, the first intermediate state of the first operating unit 400 is shown in which the elevating plate 430 has descended from the retracted state by a distance slightly longer than the vertical shift dimension (see FIG. 16), where the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary arm member 444 is A second intermediate state of the facing first operating unit 400 is illustrated in FIG. 30, and an extended state of the first operating unit 400, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state, the attitude of the end gear 413 is determined by the detected portion 413d entering the detection gap of the detection sensor SC1. In this embodiment, the state detected by the detection sensor SC1 is only the retracted state, and the other states (first intermediate state, second intermediate state, extended state) are only a preset displacement amount from the retracted state. This is the state after the displacement, and is not detected by the detection sensor SC1.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state, a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413 and the cylindrical projecting portion 413c and a longitudinal direction of the elongated hole portion 414d of the arm member 414 (arm member radial direction of rotation of 414) are orthogonal to each other. As a result, the load applied from the arm member 414 to the end gear 413 is generated along the linear direction passing through the rotation axis of the end gear 413, so even when the power of the drive motor MT1 is cut off, the arm member 414 can maintain this posture (use of dead center).

The tip plate portion 414e of the arm member 414 is disposed outside an arc MXS that circumscribes the disc portion of the end gear 413 with the rotation axis of the arm member 414 as the center. Thereby, it is possible to avoid interference between the tip plate portion 414e and the end gear 413 during the rotational displacement of the arm member 414.

The auxiliary arm member 444 functions to prevent the right side of the elevating plate 430 from descending. Although the auxiliary arm member 444 is supported so as to be able to slide in the elongated hole 406, it is not resistive, and due to the contact friction generated between the cylindrical portion 444d (see FIG. 25) and the elongated hole 406. Dynamic resistance occurs. That is, the right side of the elevating section 430 can be supported by the auxiliary arm member 444 due to the effect of this motion resistance.

As shown in FIG. 28, the rotational displacement of the arm member 414 causes the lifting plate 430 to move downward, and the relative displacement member 442 moves up and down as the rotating gear 441 meshes with the auxiliary arm member 444 that is displaced accordingly. It is displaced downward with an amount of displacement exceeding the amount of displacement of the plate 430.

Although it has a complicated shape, the transmission of the driving force from the auxiliary arm member 444 to the relative displacement member 442 is based on the meshing of gears, so the amount of displacement of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 and the amount of displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 There is a one-to-one correspondence with the rotation angle of .

As shown in FIG. 28, while the arm member 414, the auxiliary arm member 444, the elevating plate 430, and the relative displacement member 442 are displaced as described above, the wing-like member 460 maintains the same posture as in the retracted state. maintain.

That is, according to the present embodiment, there is a time lag between the timing at which the elevating plate 430 starts descending from the retracted state of the first operating unit 400 and the timing at which the wing-like member 460 starts rotating. The cause of this time lag will be described later.

In this embodiment, the elevating plate 430 is lowered by the vertical dimension of the wall schematic line UL (see FIG. 16) before the wing-like member 460 starts rotating. It is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of a problem in which the rear case 310 collides with the upper wall portion during displacement.

In other words, the displacement mode in which the wing-like member 460 is rotationally displaced after descending by the vertical dimension of the wall schematic line UL is such that the upper wall portion of the back case 310 is formed so that there is no deviation in height between the left and right sides. This is the same condition as the displacement mode (conventional displacement mode) in which the wing-like member 460 is rotated at the same time as the elevating plate 430 is lowered. Therefore, the operation of the first operation unit 400 of this embodiment can be realized by utilizing the operating conditions of the conventional displacement mode (parameters such as gear ratio and displacement amount). Thereby, the cost required for design can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 27, the arm member 414, which was hidden on the back side of the elevating plate 430 in the retracted state, extends above the elevating plate 430 as the elevating plate 430 descends, as shown in FIG. Displaced like this.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the wing-like member 460 is configured to be movable with respect to the elevating plate 430 so as to hide the arm member 414 (see FIG. 29). That is, the wing-shaped member 460 not only serves as a presentation means for enlivening the game by making the decorative pattern formed on the surface side visible to the player, but also serves as an effect that the arm member 414 for power transmission is used as the lift plate 430. It also functions as a means of collective concealment.

In particular, in this embodiment, the formed portion 464L of the wing-like member 460 on the side where the arm member 414 having the function of transmitting driving force is disposed is larger than the formed portion 464R of the wing-like member 460 on the opposite side. Since the arm member 414 has a large shape, the arm member 414 can be easily hidden from the player's view.

Note that, similarly to this, the forming portion 464R is configured to hide the auxiliary arm member 444 (see FIG. 30). In this embodiment, due to its configuration, in the second intermediate state, the arm member 414 protrudes above the elevating plate 430, while the auxiliary arm member 444 is still hidden behind the elevating plate 430. That is, after the arm member 414 extends above the elevating plate 430, the auxiliary arm member 444 extends above the elevating plate 430 (see FIG. 30).

Therefore, even when using the forming part 464R, which has a smaller shape than the forming part 464L (the amount of upward protrusion of the elevating plate 430 at the same time is smaller than the forming part 464L), there is no problem in using the auxiliary arm member. 444 can be hidden from the player's view.

As shown in FIG. 29, at a position slightly past the state where the cylindrical projecting portion 414f is farthest to the left from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, the auxiliary arm member 444 assumes a posture with its longitudinal direction facing the left-right direction. Become. When the cylindrical projecting portion 414f is farthest to the left from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, the rightward load applied from the arm member 414 to the elevating plate 430 tends to be large; When the auxiliary arm member 444 applies a leftward load to the lifting plate 430, the displacement resistance of the lifting plate 430 becomes large.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is tilted slightly past the state where the cylindrical protruding portion 414f is farthest to the left from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, and the cylindrical portion 444d (see FIG. 25) at the right end of the elongated hole portion 406 so that a leftward load can be applied to the elevating plate 430 via the auxiliary arm member 444, thereby reducing the displacement resistance of the elevating plate 430. While suppressing this, it is possible to suppress displacement of the elevating plate 430 in the left-right direction due to the load applied to the elevating plate 430 in the left-right direction.

Note that in the state shown in FIG. 29, the cylindrical projecting portion 413c of the end gear 413 is arranged outside the arc MXS, but since the tip plate portion 414e has already gone too far below the cylindrical projecting portion 413c, Interference between the tip plate portion 414e and the end gear 413 can be avoided.

In other words, the arc MXS is only defined as a reference position, and the design of the end gear 413 and arm member 414 depends on whether or not interference will occur when the end gear 413 and arm member 414 are actually interlocked. This is done by dynamically considering whether

As shown in FIG. 30, in the extended state of the first operating unit 400, the end gear 413 rotates with the end point being a position where the stopped portion 413b of the end gear 413 contacts the stopper portion 403c of the main body plate portion 401. Note that the control is such that the drive motor MT1 is driven so that the end gear 413 stops at a position slightly before the position where the stopped portion 413b contacts the stopper portion 403c. Thereby, it is possible to structurally prevent the terminal gear 413 from over-rotating while avoiding early damage to the stopped portion 413b and the stopper portion 403c.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the extended state of the first operating unit 400, a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413 and the cylindrical projecting portion 413c and the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole 414d of the arm member 414 (arm (radial direction of rotation of member 414) are orthogonal to each other. As a result, the load applied from the arm member 414 to the end gear 413 is generated along the linear direction passing through the rotation axis of the end gear 413, so even when the power of the drive motor MT1 is cut off, the arm member 414 can maintain this posture (use of dead center).

Note that the posture is maintained in both directions along the rotation direction of the arm member 414. That is, it is possible to prevent not only displacement in the direction of gravity but also upward displacement of the first operating unit 400 from the extended state to the retracted state.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the lifting plate 430 connected to the arm member 414 from rebounding and moving upward after reaching the extended state. It is possible to prevent the members (synchronous operation unit 440, wing-like member 460, auxiliary member 470, etc.) from being displaced. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the contact state of the wing-like member 460.

The auxiliary arm member 444 functions to prevent the right side of the elevating plate 430 from rising. Although the auxiliary arm member 444 is supported so as to be able to slide in the elongated hole 406, it is not resistive, and due to the contact friction generated between the cylindrical portion 444d (see FIG. 25) and the elongated hole 406. Dynamic resistance occurs. That is, the right side of the elevating section 430 can be supported by the auxiliary arm member 444 due to the effect of this motion resistance.

In addition, the auxiliary arm member 444 suspends and supports the elevating plate 430. As a result, although the driving force from the drive motor MT1 and the biasing force from the coil spring SP1 are generated only on one side (the left side), it is possible to prevent the posture of the elevating plate 430 from becoming unstable on the left and right sides of the metal rail 405. It can be avoided.

Here, as described above, as long as the electrical wiring DH1 is disposed inside the extension portion 444c, the expansion and contraction of the electrical wiring DH1 due to the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 of the first operating unit 400 can be suppressed to a minimum. Explain what you can do.

When the route of the electric wiring DH1 is traced from the light emitting production device LA1 side, the route is fixed to the elevating plate 430 until it reaches the auxiliary arm member 444, and the route becomes variable only at the auxiliary arm member 444. On the other hand, since the shape of the extension portion 444c in which the electric wiring DH1 is disposed is fixed even when the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the electric wiring DH1 will undergo expansion/contraction displacement. can.

At the position where the electrical wiring DH1 exits from the through hole 448a to the rear side, a horizontal displacement occurs in the electric wiring DH1 due to a horizontal displacement of the end side plate 448. In this way, the displacement that may cause expansion and contraction of the electrical wiring DH1 is limited to that caused by the displacement of the end side plate 448, so in this embodiment, the horizontal displacement of the end side plate 448 is measured and the necessary amount is After calculating the extra length of the electrical wiring DH1 and adding the extra length to the electrical wiring DH1 in the route from the fixed position of the electrical wiring DH1 to the end side plate 448 (with the electrical wiring DH1 loosened), is fixed to the main body plate portion 401.

In other words, the location where the electrical wiring DH1 may expand or contract due to the vertical displacement of the lifting plate 430 can be limited to the vicinity of the end side plate 448. The amount of vertical displacement can be suppressed to less than half.

Furthermore, as described above, the shape of the through hole 448a of the end side plate 448 allows the displacement width of the electrical wiring DH1 to be reduced compared to the displacement width of the end side plate 448, so that the excess electrical wiring DH1 can be reduced. The length can be shortened.

31, 32, 33, and 34 are front views of the first operating unit 400. 31 to 34 illustrate how each component is displaced as the drive motor MT1 rotates. In FIG. 31, the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state, and in FIG. 32, the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state. 33 shows the second intermediate state of the first operating unit 400, and FIG. 34 shows the extended state of the first operating unit 400.

As shown in FIG. 31, the lower edge of the wing-like member 460 is formed symmetrically. Therefore, when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state, the first operating unit 400 that enters the field of view where the third symbol display device 81 is viewed can be visually recognized by the player as a symmetrical movable member.

As shown in FIG. 32, when the elevating plate 430 is slightly displaced downward, the posture of the wing-like member 460 is maintained. Therefore, even in the state shown in FIG. 32, the first operating unit 400 that enters the visual field of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player as a symmetrical movable member.

In the first intermediate state shown in FIG. 32, compared to the retracted state shown in FIG. The decorative portion 493 is displaced downward by an amount of displacement that exceeds the amount of downward displacement.

Therefore, when changing the first operating unit 400 from the retracted state to the first intermediate state, the player who visually recognizes the elevating plate 430 not only sees that the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced, but also that the elevating plate Since the decoration part 493, which is displaced by an amount of vertical displacement different from the amount of vertical displacement of 430, can be visually recognized as being displaced vertically, the presentation effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the second intermediate state, compared to the first intermediate state, the difference between the displacement amount of the elevating plate 430 and the displacement amount of the decorative part 493 increases, and in addition, 470 changes its posture.

FIG. 34 shows a state in which the wing-like members 460 abut each other at opposing positions. The wing-like member 460 is visually recognized as if it were a single, approximately semicircular (semi-elliptical) decorative member by combining a pair of left and right members. It is formed at a position shifted to the right from the horizontal center position where the rail 405 is arranged.

In this embodiment, the upper edge side of the forming part 464L is configured in advance to be extra on the forming part 464R side than the upper edge side of the forming part 464R, so that the abutment surface S1 in the extended state is shifted from the left and right center. It is composed of

Since the upper edges of the forming portions 464L and 464R are disposed in a position where they are shielded by the base plate 60 of the game board 13 when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state (see FIG. 2), the upper edges of the forming portions 464L and 464R are It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the 464R is configured in a laterally asymmetrical shape. Thereby, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the asymmetrical shapes of the forming portions 464L and 464R.

Furthermore, since the abutment surface S1 is deviated from the metal rail 405 in front view, even if the wing-like member 460 rebounds due to the impact at the time of contact and a gap is created again, the rail member can be removed from the gap. 405 can be avoided from being visually recognized, and only the decorative shape formed on the front surface of the main body plate portion 401 can be visually recognized.

As a result, compared to the case where the inorganic metal rail 405 (in other words, a member that is essential for realizing the displacement of the movable accessory and is not intended for decoration) is visible from the gap, , it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation effect.

Further, the contact surface S1 is disposed at a position offset from the center position between the left and right sides, which is generally assumed by a player to be a break between a pair of movable members that come into contact with each other on the left and right sides. In other words, the player does not create a gap at the location where the player expects a gap to occur (left and right center position), but instead places the contact surface S1 at a position shifted from that location where there is a possibility of a gap occurring. By arranging them, even if a gap occurs, the gap can be made less noticeable.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 34, the visibility of the decorative portion 436 changes depending on the arrangement of the wing-like members 460. That is, from the retracted state (see FIG. 31) to the second intermediate state (see FIG. 33) of the first operating unit 400, the outer shape of the decorative portion 436 is shielded by the wing-like member 460, and the player cannot see the entire appearance. The structure is difficult to understand.

On the other hand, in the extended state of the first operating unit 400 (see FIG. 34), the outer shape of the decorative portion 436 disposed below the wing-like member 460 is visible; It is formed so that it is continuous with the outer shape of the main body when viewed from the front.

That is, a series of decorative shapes (in this embodiment, a "shell" shape) that are visible when the pair of wing-like members 460 extend from the first operating unit 400 are further extended downward from the lower edge. A decorative portion 436 is formed. Therefore, a series of decorative shapes larger than the series of decorative shapes (see FIG. 38) formed by combining the pair of wing-like members 460 can be constructed, and can be visually recognized by the player.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the process of displacement of the wing-like member 460 to form a series of decorative shapes is not the same. That is, the first displacement process includes a process in which the pair of wing-like members 460, which constitute a series of decorative shapes, are displaced in a manner close to each other and combined to form a series of decorative shapes.

On the other hand, as part of the second displacement process, the wing-like member 460 and the decorative part 436, which are one component of a series of decorative shapes, overlap in the front view when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state, and the overhanging As the condition approaches, the feather-like member 460 is displaced in a direction in which the overlapping margin becomes smaller (in a direction in which the feather-like member 460 moves away from the decorative portion 436), thereby configuring a series of decorative shapes.

Through these different processes, while the displacement of the wing-like member 460 is a simple displacement mode of proximity displacement, the shapes can be connected at both end edges along the displacement direction of the wing-like member 460, and a series of decorative shapes can be formed. Can be configured. Therefore, while suppressing the shape of the wing-like members 460 that are individually displaced, the series of decorative shapes that are combined in the extended state of the first operating unit 400 is made large compared to the size thereof. can do.

35, 36, 37, and 38 are rear views of the support plate portion 450, the wing-like member 460, the auxiliary member 470, and the fixed transmission plate 490. 35 to 38 illustrate how each component is displaced as the drive motor MT1 rotates. In FIG. 35, the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state, and in FIG. 36, the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state. In FIG. 37, the second intermediate state of the first operating unit 400 is illustrated, and in FIG. 38, the extended state of the first operating unit 400 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 35, a plurality of through holes LA1c are formed on the back side of the light emitting display device LA1 and are distributed along an arc shape, and light leaks to the back side through the through holes LA1c. It is configured as follows. In the extended state of the first operating unit 400, the wing-like member 460 is arranged so as to cover the back side of the through-hole LA1c, so that the light leaking from the through-hole LA1c is transmitted to the formation portions 464L, 464R of the wing-like member 460. can be reflected to the front.

The rotational displacement of the wing-like member 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38. Since the rotational displacement of the wing-like member 460 is caused by the relationship between the cylindrical projecting portion 467 and the elongated hole portion 491 of the fixed transmission plate 490, this portion will be explained in particular detail.

From the retracted state illustrated in FIG. 35 to the first intermediate state illustrated in FIG. 36, the direction in which the vertical portion 491a of the elongated hole portion 491 through which the cylindrical projecting portion 467 is inserted is opened (vertical direction) Since this and the displacement direction of the fixed transmission plate 490 are the same, rotational displacement of the wing-like member 460 due to the load applied to the cylindrical projecting portion 467 can be prevented.

Note that in this embodiment, a separate member for biasing the wing-like member 460 toward the retracted state is not prepared, but due to the shapes of the forming portions 464L and 464R, the center of gravity is located laterally outward from the rotation axis. It is maintained in a retracted position by its own weight.

In the second intermediate state shown in FIG. 37, the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 enters the curve changing portion 491b, thereby causing a load in the left-right direction to the cylindrical overhanging portion 467, and the wing-like member 460 starts rotationally displacing. Explaining from the perspective of the driving force transmission path, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted from the fixed transmission plate 490 to the left wing-like member 460 via the cylindrical projection 467, and then to the right wing-like member 460. communicated. That is, compared to the wing-like member 460 on the right side, the wing-like member 460 on the left side is located on the upstream side in the driving force transmission path.

In this embodiment, the forming portion 464L of the left wing-like member 460, which is located on the upstream side in the driving force transmission path, is formed slightly larger (heavier) than the forming portion 464R. Therefore, the movable members can be arranged so that they become lighter in order toward the downstream side of the driving force transmission path. Thereby, it is possible to achieve good transmission of the driving force, and it is also possible to prevent each component from rebounding and displacing after being displaced to the terminal position.

One of the reasons why the cylindrical portion 433 serving as a guide path for the electric wiring DH1 is arranged on the forming portion 464R side is the difference in weight between the forming portions 464L and 464R. To be more specific, the positions of the formed parts 464L and 464R after displacement are determined by the meshing of the arcuate gear 462 and the abutment of the opposing surfaces of the formed parts 464L and 464R. Due to errors, deformation over time of the long hole portion 491 that defines the rotation angle of the wing-like member 460, etc., the positions of the forming portions 464L and 464R after displacement may change slightly.

In this case, the change in position after displacement largely depends on the weight balance of the forming portions 464L and 464R. That is, there is a high possibility that the forming part 464L is pushed down so that the forming part 464L rides on the forming part 464R.

In consideration of this, in this embodiment, the extending portion 463 of the wing-like member 460 is provided below the cylindrical portion 433 through which the electric wiring DH1 passes. In addition, a recessed portion 463a is provided so that the cylindrical portion 433 and the extended portion 463 overlap less. Thereby, even if the formation part 464L is unintentionally pushed down, the possibility of interference between the electrical wiring DH1 and the formation part 464L can be reduced.

Further, since the side where the forming portion 464L is likely to be displaced can be assumed, it is possible to design the position where the cylindrical portion 433 and the recessed portion 463 partially interfere with each other when viewed from the rear (see FIG. 38). Thereby, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In this embodiment, the formation range of the recessed portion 463a is set to a range in which the lower side of the cylindrical portion 433 can be particularly opened. This makes it possible to minimize the difference in shape between the pair of left and right extending portions 463 while avoiding contact between the electrical wiring DH1, which tends to sag due to its own weight inside the cylindrical portion 433, and the extending portion 463.

That is, it is possible to prevent the recessed portion 463 from coming too close to the forming portion 464 side, and thereby, when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state or the first intermediate state, the recessed portion 463a is moved toward the back side of the auxiliary member 470. The recessed portion 463a can be partially hidden by the auxiliary member 470 (see FIG. 31).

Thereby, the recessed portion 463a can be partially hidden by the auxiliary member 470 in any state of the first operating unit 400 from the retracted state to the extended state. Therefore, the lower edges of the extending portions 463 and the forming portions 464L, 464R of the pair of left and right wing-like members 460 can be easily seen symmetrically, so that the symmetrically displaced members are configured asymmetrically. It is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Transmission of the driving force from the fixed transmission plate 490 to the cylindrical extension part 467 occurs when the fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced downward away from the cylindrical part 461 of the wing-like member 460. As the driving force is transmitted, the cylindrical projecting portion 467 is rotated around the cylindrical portion 461 by the fixed transmission plate 490, but assuming that the fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced at a constant speed, the cylindrical projecting portion 467 is It is configured so that there is no displacement at constant velocity (configured so that the angular velocity changes).

Specifically, since the initial position of the cylindrical projecting portion 467 is set near the left and right sides of the cylindrical portion 461 (see FIG. 35), it is assumed that the curved portion 491b is a long hole extending in the horizontal direction (left-right direction). In this case, as the cylindrical protrusion 467 is displaced downward, the angle of rotational displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 467 with respect to the displacement width in the vertical direction becomes larger. Therefore, when the fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced at a constant velocity, the rotational displacement speed (angular velocity) of the cylindrical projecting portion 467 gradually increases.

Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the pair of wing-like members 460 decelerates during displacement, it is possible to create an impressive effect in which the pair of wing-like members 460 are displaced at high speed and combined.

On the other hand, a gradual increase in the angular velocity of the cylindrical protruding portion 467 will lead to an increase in the speed of the pair of feather-like members 460 just before the pair of feather-like members 460 are brought into close proximity and combined, but if the speed increases too much, the combination will be delayed. There is a possibility that the pair of wing-like members 460 will bounce back significantly due to the actual impact, and there is a possibility that the production effect of this embodiment, in which the pair of wing-like members 460 are combined to make a series of decorative patterns visible, may be degraded.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curve changing portion 491b is directed toward the rotation axis side of the wing-like member 460 (left-hand wing-like member 460) including the cylindrical projecting portion 467 in the horizontal direction (left-right direction). It is formed as a long hole extending in an upwardly inclined direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the speed of rotational displacement (angular velocity) of the cylindrical projecting portion 467.

The degree of suppression is the amount of upward displacement (hereinafter also referred to as "upward correction amount") of the curve change portion 491b with respect to the long hole parallel to the horizontal direction (left-right direction) at the location where the cylindrical overhang portion 467 is arranged. It corresponds to

As in the present embodiment, when the curve change portion 491b is configured as a long hole extending in a direction that is inclined upward toward the rotating shaft side, the more the cylindrical projecting portion 467 is displaced downward (the pair of wing-like members 460 (The closer they get to the state of merging), the larger the above-mentioned upward correction amount becomes. Therefore, the extent (decrease width) of suppressing the increase in the rotational displacement speed (angular velocity) of the cylindrical overhang 467 can be gradually increased as the arrangement of the cylindrical overhang 467 changes downward.

Therefore, compared to a configuration exemplified by a brake structure that maintains the same frictional state, it is possible to moderately suppress an increase in speed. Note that the actual displacement speed of the wing-like member 460 will be described later.

39(a) to 39(c) are schematic diagrams schematically illustrating the displacement relationship of the first operating unit 400. FIG. 39(a) to 39(c), the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is shown on the horizontal axis, and in FIG. 39(a), the downward displacement amount of the elevating plate 430 is shown on the vertical axis. In b), the amount of rotation (change in angle) of the auxiliary arm member 444 is shown on the vertical axis, and in FIG. 39(c), the amount of rotation (change in angle) of the wing-like member 460 is shown on the vertical axis.

Here, assume that the drive motor MT1 is rotated at a constant speed. In this case, while the terminal gear 413 rotates at a constant speed, the rotational movement of the arm member 414 does not rotate at a constant speed, and the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 also does not change at a constant speed.

In other words, a discrepancy occurs between the control mode of the drive motor MT1 (for example, constant speed rotation) and the control mode of the lifting plate 430 (non-uniform displacement), and the movement of the lifting plate 430 in the driving force transmission path is caused. The displacement pattern on the downstream side is affected by this shift. Therefore, even if the drive motor MT1 was rotated at a constant speed, it was difficult to uniformly displace the constituent members disposed on the downstream side of the transmission path.

For example, even if a fixed rack gear-shaped portion is formed on the main body plate portion 401 and the rack gear-shaped portion is configured to mesh with the rotating gear 441 of the synchronous operation unit 440, the vertical displacement of the relative displacement member 442 is Since it depends on the manner in which the elevating plate 430 is moved up and down, it is not a constant displacement.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the vertical displacement of the relative displacement member 442 is not defined by a fixed rack gear-like part, but the rotational displacement of the arm member 414 is the vertical displacement (vertical displacement) of the vertical displacement member 430. A configuration is adopted in which the rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 is converted into the vertical displacement (vertical displacement) of the relative displacement member 442 in the same way as the rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 is converted into the vertical displacement.

That is, a predetermined rule (for example, according to the horizontal axis in FIG. The conversion formula for converting a numerical value into a numerical value on the vertical axis) is applied in reverse to convert the vertical displacement of the cylindrical portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 due to the vertical displacement of the vertical axis to the rotational displacement of the rotary gear 441. By doing so, it is possible to partially offset the deviation in the displacement manner and approximate the displacement manner of the terminal gear 413 and the rotation gear 441.

In other words, the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 begins to deviate from the displacement mode of the end gear 413 when the rotation angle of the end gear 413 is around 90 degrees or 140 degrees (see FIG. 39(a)). The rotation angle of the auxiliary arm member 444 is suppressed from deviation from the displacement mode of the terminal gear 413 when the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 ranges from 30 degrees to around 170 degrees (see FIG. 39(b)).

Thereby, for example, as the drive motor MT1 and the terminal gear 413 are rotated at a constant speed, most of the auxiliary arm member 444 can be rotated at a constant speed (see FIG. 39(b)). can be vertically displaced with respect to the elevating plate 430 at approximately constant speed.

This makes it easier to link the speed control of the drive motor MT1 with the displacement mode of the relative displacement member 442, so that the speed control of the drive motor MT1 can be easily linked to the displacement mode of the relative displacement member 442. The speed of the drive motor MT1 can be easily set.

Further, according to the configuration of this embodiment, the configuration that produces an advantageous effect only on the drive device side in the driving force transmission path can reduce the influence on the distal end side of the transmission path. Here, the description will be made assuming that the drive motor MT1 side is the drive device side of the transmission path, and the opposite side is the tip side of the transmission path, with the elevating plate 430 as a reference.

On the drive device side of the transmission path, the fact that the rotation angle of the arm member 414 relative to the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is suppressed when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state or in the extended state allows the arm member 414 to be started or stopped quickly. However, on the distal end side of the transmission path, the speed of the arm member 414 immediately before reaching the retracted state or the extended state becomes extremely small, so there is a problem in that the displacement tends to be slow. was there.

From this point of view, in order to configure the displacement mode on the distal end side of the transmission path to be unaffected by the deceleration of the arm member 414, the operating speed of the drive motor MT1 must be adjusted before the arm member 414 reaches the end of displacement. This can be dealt with by controlling the arm member 414 to stop before the arm member 414 decelerates (sufficiently before reaching the retracted state or the extended state).

However, according to the former, complicated control is required, and according to the latter, the rotation angle of the arm member 414 that can be used for displacing the distal end side of the transmission path becomes small, resulting in a narrowing of the range of displacement modes. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the displacement mode on the tip side of the transmission path can be approximated to the displacement mode of the drive motor MT1 and the end gear 413, synchronization can be performed immediately before reaching the retracted state or the extended state. The degree to which the relative displacement member 442 of the operating unit 440 decelerates can be easily reduced. Therefore, while making maximum use of the rotation angle of the arm member 414, the relative displacement member 442 disposed on the distal end side of the transmission path (and the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 disposed on the downstream side thereof) It is possible to avoid the displacement from becoming slow.

What is visually recognized by the player is the displacement of the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470. As shown in FIG. 39(c), when the terminal gear 413 is rotated at a constant speed, the rotational angular velocities of the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 tend to increase (at least constant speed) until just before the stop, and immediately before the stop. , the speed is reduced in accordance with the shape of the curved portion 491b of the elongated hole portion 491 described above.

Thereby, compared to the case where the displacement mode of the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 is determined depending on the displacement mode of the elevating plate 430, the displacement of the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 can be made more rapid. Therefore, impressive displacement can be realized and the production effect can be improved.

On the other hand, instead of stopping the rotational angular velocities of the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 while they continue to increase (combining the wing-like members 460), by providing a section in which they are decelerated immediately before, the wing-like member 460 It is possible to suppress rebound displacement after merging.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the displacement mode of the elevating plate 430 that is continuously displaced by the driving force of the drive motor MT1, and the relative displacement member 442 of the synchronous operation unit 440 and the fixed transmission plate 490 that are displaced on the downstream side thereof are as follows. , the displacement mode of the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 can be made different.

In particular, the displacement mode that once changed while moving downstream along the driving force transmission path can be changed back to its original state. Thereby, in a configuration in which a plurality of members are synchronously displaced, a unique displacement mode can be configured.

Although a case has been described in which the drive motor MT1 is displaced from the retracted state to the extended state as a control mode, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be controlled to reverse at an intermediate position. That is, for example, the rotation direction of the drive motor MT1 may be reversely controlled so that the first operation unit 400 is reciprocated (repeatedly reciprocated) between the retracted state and the first intermediate state.

In this case, after the elevating plate 430 starts descending and before the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 start rotating, the elevating plate 430 is raised to return to the retracted state, so that the player can visually recognize the elevating plate 430. The displacement of the first operating unit 400 can be limited to vertical displacement, and rotational displacement can be excluded.

Note that even if the displacement is to the first intermediate state, the fixed transmission plate 490 and the decorative portion 493 are vertically displaced relative to the elevating plate 430, so that the appearance of the first operating unit 400 is likely to change. can do.

FIG. 40 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 300. In FIG. 40, the game board 13 is shown removed from the operating unit 300 and placed on the front side, and illustration of the upper part of the operating unit 300 and the game board 13 is omitted. Further, in FIG. 40, the outline of a transparent cover member 790 disposed along the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 and made of a colorless, light-transmitting resin is illustrated with imaginary lines, and the configuration below the transparent cover member 790 is illustrated with imaginary lines. is visibly illustrated.

When the game board 13 and the operating unit 300 are fastened and fixed and used for a game, the lower front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is passed through the window section defined by the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). The light guiding member 714 and the upper surface of the second operating unit 700 are arranged so as to be visible. Further, since the light emitted to the front side by the illumination board 777 passes through the light transmission hole 60c, it is made visible from the front side of the base plate 60.

41 is a front perspective view of the second operating unit 700, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the second operating unit 700. As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the second operation unit 700 includes a plurality of light guide members 714 (eight in this embodiment) arranged in a row in the left and right direction, and light guide members 714 arranged in the left and right directions. A substrate 777 is provided.

Each of the light guiding members 714 is configured to be able to guide irradiated light emitted from below, and transmits the irradiated light from the upper end portion. The illumination board 777 includes a light emitting means 778 such as an LED that is configured to emit light to the front side. In this way, the second operating unit 700 can emit light upward through the light guide member 714 and emit light toward the front side through the illumination board 777.

43 and 44 are exploded front perspective views of the second operating unit 700, and FIG. 45 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operating unit 700. In FIG. 43, it is illustrated in a directional view looking down from above, and in FIGS. 44 and 45, it is illustrated in a directional view looking up from below. Moreover, in FIG. 45, the protruding holding portion 724 is illustrated in an enlarged manner.

As shown in FIGS. 43, 44, and 45, the second operating unit 700 includes a base member 701 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall 311 of the back case 310 (see FIG. 40), and a A cover member 720 that is placed over the base member 701 and fastened to the base member 701, and a plate-shaped displacement member that is sandwiched between the cover member 720 and the base member 701 and is pivotally supported for rotational displacement (rotation displacement is possible at a rotation angle of approximately 6 degrees). 730, a plurality (eight in this embodiment) of hollow members 740, which are hollow members placed on the upper surface of the plate-like displacement member 730 and configured to be able to move at least vertically; A plurality (three in this embodiment) of variable decoration members 750 are placed on the upper surface of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 on the front side and configured to be able to move at least up and down, and each of the variable decoration members 750 is arranged on the left and right lower sides of the base member 701. However, a pair of drive units 760 that have a configuration that is approximately line symmetrical with respect to a straight line along the vertical direction and are configured to be able to apply a load to the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and a transparent cover member 790 (see FIG. 40). Be prepared.

The transparent cover member 790 is a colorless and transparent resin member shaped to cover the upper surface and front surface of the cover member 720 of the second operation unit 700, and is used to prevent dust and fine particles from reaching the cover member 720, and to prevent dust and particles from reaching the cover member 720. Even if any component of the operating unit 400 malfunctions, it acts to prevent the first operating unit 400 from colliding with the cover member 720 and the light guide member 714.

Since the upper surface of the transparent cover 790 is inclined downward toward the back side, a portion of the light emitted directly upward from the upper end of the light guide member 714 can be refracted toward the back side. As a result, the light emitted from the light guide member 714 can be easily reflected on the third symbol display device 81, so even if the player is paying attention to the third symbol display device 81, the light emitted from the light guide member 714 can be easily reflected. Changes in the lighting state of the light member 714 (including changes in brightness and darkness, vibrations of light, and changes based on displacement of the hollow member 740) can be made easier to notice.

Note that illustration of the transparent cover member 790 is omitted in FIGS. 43, 44, and 45. First, the base member 701 forming the skeleton of the second operating unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 46.

FIG. 46 is an exploded front perspective view of the base member 701. As shown in FIG. 46, the base member 701 includes a plate-like member 702 formed to have sufficient strength, an illumination board 705 that is fastened and fixed to the upper surface of the plate-like member 702, and A partition member 708 that is arranged opposite to the top surface of the illumination board 705 and fastened to the plate-like member 702, and a thin film cover that is a member that is covered over the partition member 708 and is formed in a thin film shape from resin. A member 712, a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) light guide members 714 placed in contact with the thin film cover member 712, and a plate-like member placed over the light guide members 714. It includes a displacement regulating member 716 that regulates the upward movement and horizontal displacement of the light guiding member 714.

The plate-like member 702 has an engaging part 702a that is formed to be able to engage with the hook-like part 721c of the cover member 720, and a pair of engaging parts 702a formed on the left and right sides of the plate-like member 702, and a pair of engaging parts 702a that are formed on the left and right sides of the plate-like member 702 and serve as pivoted supports of the plate-like displacement member 730. A fastening screw can be screwed into a receiving recess 702b that is formed to be able to pivotally support the plate-shaped displacement member 731, and a regulating protrusion 702c that projects upward from the front edge and is formed to be able to regulate the rotation of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. A plurality of fastening portions 703a are formed in the fastening portions 703a, and a plurality of columnar protrusions 703b are formed to project upwardly beyond the fastening portions 703a in a columnar manner so that a fastening screw can be screwed into the tip of the protruding portions. , and a plurality of through holes 704 formed in the vertical direction.

The plurality of fastening portions 703a are for fastening and fixing fastening screws inserted into the illumination board 705, and are formed at three locations at the left and right center and at both left and right ends.In particular, the fastening portions 703a at both left and right ends have A protruding pin for positioning is also provided.

By arranging the illumination board 705 so that the protrusion pins are inserted into through holes drilled in the illumination board 705 in correspondence with the positioning protrusion pins, the fastening screws can be inserted into the illumination board 705. Since the through hole drilled for the purpose of connection is continuously connected to the fastening portion 703a, the illumination board 705 can be fastened and fixed to the plate member 702 by screwing the fastening screw there.

The columnar protruding portion 703b is a portion into which a fastening screw is inserted through the displacement regulating member 716, the thin film cover member 712, and the partition member 708 in this order, and the proximal end side thereof is sloped in a trapezoid shape. Thereby, it is possible to easily arrange the illumination board 705 at an appropriate position.

The through hole 704 has a size that allows a connector (not shown) provided on the lower surface of the illumination board 705 and an electric wire connected to the connector to pass therethrough. Therefore, in this embodiment, the electrical wiring connected to the illumination board 705 is arranged on the lower surface side of the illumination board 705, and does not protrude above the illumination board 705. Thereby, the entire upper surface of the illumination board 705 can be utilized as a region where a light emitting means 706 such as an LED can be arranged.

The illumination board 705 includes a plurality of light emitting means 706 composed of LEDs, etc., and an open part formed so as to leave a slight gap with the columnar protrusion 703b when the base member 701 is assembled (see FIG. 43). 707.

The light emitting means 706 includes a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) individual light emitting means 706a arranged along a straight line facing in the left-right direction, and a plurality of overall light emitting means arranged at different positions from the individual light emitting means 706a. means 706b.

The open portion 707 is formed at a position corresponding to the columnar protrusion 703b, and the protrusion end position of the columnar protrusion 703b is above the position where the illumination board 705 is placed in the assembled state. Therefore, when the illumination board 705 is moved downward to the position where it is placed in the assembled state, the open portion 707 will move along the columnar protrusion 703b.

In this embodiment, the proximal end side of the columnar protrusion 703b is formed into a circular shape in a top view and a trapezoidal shape in a front view, narrowing upward. The side surfaces are inclined with respect to the vertical direction. When displacing the illumination board 705 downward, if the illumination board 705 is significantly displaced in the front-back direction from the position where it is disposed in the assembled state, the illumination board 705 is moved along the slope of the side surface of the base end side of the columnar protrusion 703b. Since the positional deviation of the illumination board 705 can be corrected by using the above method, it is possible to easily arrange the illumination board 705 at a desired position.

The partition member 708 is made of a colored (in this embodiment, black) hard resin material that does not easily transmit light, and has a plurality of transparent holes 709 bored at positions corresponding to the individual light emitting means 706a, and a columnar projection. A plurality of through holes 710a are formed with an inner diameter that allows the distal end of the installation portion 703b to be inserted therethrough, and a plurality of fastening portions 710b are formed so that fastening screws inserted through the displacement regulating member 716 can be screwed therein; A plurality of receiving portions 710c are provided that are recessed (or drilled) so as to be able to receive protruding pins 716b protruding from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 at positions shifted in the front-back direction with respect to the portion 710b.

The light-transmitting hole 709 is formed with a longitudinally elongated crystal-shaped (approximately elliptical or tortoise-shell-shaped) cross section, and its elongated direction faces in different directions depending on its position from the left and right center. That is, the closer the transparent hole 709 is to the center, the smaller the deviation between the longitudinal direction and the front-back direction (in this embodiment, they are matched), and the closer it is to the left and right ends, the closer the longitudinal direction is toward the front side toward the center of the left and right sides. It is considered to be the direction of inclination.

That is, the longitudinal direction of the light-transmitting hole 709 is set to be inclined toward the front side toward the center of the left and right sides, and the angle of the inclination is designed to become larger toward the left and right ends. In this embodiment, the inclination angle is configured to have a constant increment (approximately 5 degrees).

The thin film cover member 712 is a thin film-like colorless and transparent resin member with low rigidity, is formed to have a raised central portion, is open on the lower side, and is perforated vertically at the left and right ends of the upper base. A pair of large through-holes 712a, a plurality of middle through-holes 712b that are vertically bored inside the outer through-hole 712a in the left-right direction, and a plurality of middle through-holes 712b that are vertically displaced from the middle through-holes 712b in the front-back direction. A plurality of small through holes 712c are provided.

The large through hole 712a is formed with a diameter longer than the diameter of a protrusion 716e (see FIG. 72) that protrudes from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 in an annular shape surrounding the insertion hole 716a. The protruding portion 716e protrudes from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 with a protruding length exceeding the thickness of the thin film cover member 712. load) can be avoided.

One of the middle through holes 712b is disposed at a position corresponding to the columnar protrusion 703b at the central position on the front side, and the other one is disposed at a position corresponding to the fastening section 710b.

The small through hole 712c is disposed offset in the front-rear direction with respect to the middle through hole 712b disposed at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 710b, and protrudes from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 to form a partition member. The protruding pin 716b that is received in the receiving portion 710c of 708 can be inserted therethrough.

Therefore, after covering the partition member 708 with the thin film cover member 712 and placing the displacement regulating member 716 on top of the thin film cover member 712, each member is fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screws into various places. Since the protruding pin 716b is inserted into the small through hole 712c and the receiving portion 710c, it is possible to align the thin film cover member 712 and the displacement regulating member 716 with respect to the partition member 708 before screwing in the fastening screw. This can be done easily (at the same time), and the efficiency of the subsequent work of screwing in the fastening screws can be improved.

The light guide member 714 is formed from a colorless, light-transmitting resin material into a cylindrical shape with a bottom at the top, and has a crystal shape (approximately elliptical shape, approximately tortoise shell shape) that is elongated from front to back when viewed from above. The main body part 714a includes a main body part 714a, a projecting edge part 714b projecting left and right and forward from the lower edge of the main body part 714a, and an inclined surface part 714c that slopes downward toward the front side at the upper end part of the main body part 714a.

Since the upper outer surface of the main body portion 714a is textured, the light emitted from the single individual light emitting means 706a, traveling inside the light guide member 714, and reaching the upper end portion can be visually recognized by the player. , it can be visually recognized as if the light is being emitted from a surface rather than from a point.

On the other hand, the main body portion 714a is not textured in portions other than the upper outer surface (such as the middle portion), and a smooth surface is formed. This makes it possible to prevent diffuse reflection from occurring when light traveling inside the light guide member 714 enters the inner wall surface of the main body 714a, and allows the light to be totally reflected on the smooth surface and Since the light can be directed toward the upper end of the main body 714a, energy loss of light at intermediate positions of the main body 714a can be reduced.

The longitudinal direction of the main body portion 714a of each light guide member 714 when viewed from above follows the setting of the longitudinal direction of the transparent hole 709 described above. That is, the closer the light guide member 714 is to the center, the smaller the deviation between the longitudinal direction and the front-back direction is (in this embodiment, they are matched), and the closer the light guide member 714 is to the left and right ends, the closer the longitudinal direction is toward the front side and closer to the center of the left and right sides. It is considered to be the direction of inclination.

That is, the longitudinal direction of the light guide member 714 is set to be inclined toward the front side toward the center of the left and right, and the angle of the inclination is designed to become larger as it approaches the left and right ends. In this embodiment, the inclination angle is configured to have a constant increment (approximately 5 degrees).

With this configuration, the front end of the light guide member 714 in the longitudinal direction when viewed from above (the part on the side closer to the player as the part that irradiates light toward the player) is located at the center in the longitudinal direction. It can be made to face the player side (front side left and right center) compared to the position. That is, it is possible to make the player feel that the light emitted from the light guide member 714 toward the player is concentrated toward the player.

The overhanging edge portion 714b is formed to have a constant thickness from top to bottom and functions as a portion for stabilizing the position and posture of the light guide member 714, and the inclined surface portion 714c directs light incident from below the light guide member 714 to It functions to emit light toward the side, but the details will be described later.

The displacement regulating member 716 is made of a colored (in this embodiment, black) hard resin material that does not easily transmit light, and has a plurality of insertion holes 716a formed through which fastening screws can be inserted, and a plurality of insertion holes 716a protruding from the lower surface. The inner shape of the plurality of protruding pins 716b, the plurality of receiving cylindrical parts 716c formed in a cylindrical shape that penetrate vertically at positions corresponding to the light guide member 714, and the lower edge of the receiving cylindrical part 716c is enlarged. The light guiding member 714 includes a plurality of recessed portions 716d which are stepped and recessed so as to have a shape capable of receiving the projecting edge portion 714b of the light guide member 714.

The receiving cylindrical portion 716c has an inner shape that is substantially the same as the inner shape of the light-transmitting hole 709 when viewed from above, and the light guide member 714 is inserted inside thereof. Furthermore, since the depth of the recessed portion 716d is equal to the thickness of the protruding edge 714b of the light guide member 714, in the assembled state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 40), The upper surface of the thin film cover member 712 and the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 (the lower surface of the recessed portion 716d) can stably support the projecting edge 714b between the surfaces thereof.

The projecting edge portions 714b are formed to project from the left and right and the front side, and are not formed on the back side. Correspondingly, the recessed portions 716d of the displacement regulating member 716 are also recessed on the left and right sides and the front side, and the recessed portions 716d on the back side are omitted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 714 from being assembled in the reverse direction.

That is, even if the light guiding member 714 is arranged in the front and rear directions in reverse and the displacement regulating member 716 is assembled, the arrangement of the recessed portion 716d and the overhanging edge 714b is misaligned, so that the overhanging edge is attached to the recessed portion 716d. The portion 714b cannot be inserted, and the protruding edge portion 714b protrudes from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716. A gap equal to the thickness of the overhanging edge 714b is created between the thin film cover member 712 and the displacement regulating member 716, making it difficult for the assembly worker (or automatic assembly machine) This allows the user to notice that the light guide member 714 is oriented in the opposite direction.

In the assembled state of the base member 701 (see FIG. 43), the projecting edge 714b is vertically sandwiched between the recessed portion 716d and the thin film cover member 712, thereby stabilizing the position and posture of the light guide member 714. Fixed.

The procedure for assembling the base member 701 will be explained. First, the illumination board 705 is passed through the columnar protrusion 703b and placed at a fastening position, and is fastened and fixed to the plate member 702. Next, each component is arranged above the illumination board 705 in the order of the partition member 708, the thin film cover member 712, the light guide member 714, and the displacement regulating member 716.

At that time, the partition member 708 is positioned on the plate member 702 by passing the tip of the columnar protrusion 703b through the through hole 710a of the partition member 708, and the protrusion pin 716b is passed through the receiving portion 710c and the small through hole 712c. Then, the displacement regulating member 716 and the thin film cover member 712 are positioned on the partition member 708. Moreover, the light guide member 714 is positioned on the displacement regulating member 716 by passing the main body portion 714a through the receiving cylinder portion 716c. In this way, the respective constituent members are positioned relative to each other before the fastening screws are screwed in, so that it is possible to improve the efficiency of the work of screwing in the fastening screws.

Finally, each component can be fastened and fixed by inserting a fastening screw into the insertion hole 716a and screwing it into the fastening portion 710b and the columnar projection 703b. According to this embodiment, after each component placed above the illumination board 705 is placed in an appropriate position, a plurality of fastening screws can be screwed together, which simplifies the work process. be able to. In addition, it is possible to automate the process of screwing in the fastening screws (using an automatic screwdriver).

In this embodiment, the partition member 708 cannot be removed when the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 716a is screwed into the columnar projection 703b. By doing so, the partition member 708 can be brought closer to the displacement regulating member 716 side.

As a result, although the light guide member 714 is placed on the thin film cover member 712, it can be substantially the same as the structure in which the light guide member 714 is placed on the partition member 708, and the rigidity of the partition member 708 makes the light guide member 714 By supporting the light guide member 714, the support of the light guide member 714 can be stabilized.

In addition, since the vertical separation between the displacement regulating member 716 and the partition member 708 can be reduced by sandwiching the thin film cover member 712, light leakage from between the displacement regulating member 716 and the partition member 708 can be prevented. can be achieved.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 43, 44, and 45. The cover member 720 is made of a colored (in this embodiment, blue) light-transmitting resin material, and is a member fastened and fixed to the base member 701, and is disposed at the peripheral edge in a bottom view and is connected to the base member 701. A plurality of coupling parts 721 used for coupling, a plurality of rear through holes 722 formed in a shape larger than the light guide member 714 corresponding to the position of the light guide member 714 of the base member 701, and a rear side A plurality of front through holes 723 are formed at multiple locations (three locations in this embodiment) as a pair of left and right through holes on the front side of the through hole 722, and left and right outer portions of the rear side of the rear through hole 722. and a plurality of protruding holding portions 724 protruding downward from the left and right inner portions of the front side.

The coupling part 721 includes a plurality of insertion holes 721a drilled through which fastening screws can be inserted from above, a plurality of fastening parts 721b into which fastening screws inserted into the base member 701 from below are screwed, and left and right outer parts. A plurality of hook-shaped parts 721c are formed on the back surface and engaged with the base member 701.

The rear through-holes 722 have different vertical positions of their lower edges at four locations closer to the center and four locations closer to the left and right sides. In this embodiment, it is formed higher toward the center. This is due to the design of the top surface shape of the cover member 720. That is, in order to give the upper surface shape of the cover member 720 a three-dimensional effect, the central portion is curved upward so as to appear raised, and the upper and lower positions of the lower edge of the rear through hole 722 are has been adjusted.

The length of the protruding holding portion 724 is adjusted so as to partially offset the difference in the vertical position of the lower edge of the rear through hole 722. That is, by making the protruding holding portion 724 disposed closer to the center have a longer protruding length, the vertical displacement width of the hollow member 740 is adjusted equally on the left and right sides. Note that both the front side protruding holding part 724 and the back side protruding holding part 724 are disposed at positions overlapping with the protruding columnar part 743 of the hollow member 740 when viewed in the vertical direction. Even if the posture collapses, the protruding columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 can be prevented from falling off from the small receiving portion 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

In this embodiment, compared to the vertical position of the lower end of the protruding holding part 724 on the front side, the vertical position of the lower end of the protruding holding part 724 on the back side is arranged lower. Thereby, even when the hollow member 740 comes into contact with the protruding holding portion 724, the attitude of the hollow member 740 can be brought to the rearward tilted attitude. Thereby, the shape and pattern of the front side of the cylindrical main body portion 741 of the hollow member 740 can be easily seen by the player who views the hollow member 740 from the front side looking down.

The plate-shaped displacement member 730 is formed from a colorless, light-transmitting resin material, and is rotatably supported by a shaft in a pair of receiving recesses 702b formed on the left and right sides of the plate-shaped member 702 and on the lower surface of the cover member 720. A pair of pivoted supports 731 that protrude coaxially from both left and right ends with a circular cross section, light transmission holes 732 that are vertically bored at multiple locations, and A pair of loaded parts 733 that extend in a plate shape toward the front side and receive a push-up load from below, and a plurality of light guides that are perforated in the vertical direction with a size that allows the light guide member 714 of the base member 701 to be inserted therethrough. An insertion hole 734, a plurality of small receiving portions 735 that are arranged in pairs on the diagonal line of the light guide insertion hole 734 and protrude in a ring shape when viewed from above, and the center of the front side through hole 723 of the cover member 720 when viewed from above. It is provided with a plurality of large receiving portions 736 arranged at positions and projecting in a ring shape when viewed from above.

FIG. 47 is a top view of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The loaded portion 733 is disposed on the front side of the rotating shaft passing through the center of the shafted support 731, and separate drive units 760 correspond to the left and right sides, and a load is applied from below.

The plate-shaped displacement member 730 differs in the manner of the load applied to the loaded portion 733 (for example, whether the load is applied only to one side or both sides, or whether the load is applied at short time intervals). The rotational displacement about the pivoted support 731 will occur in different manners depending on whether a load is applied or a continuous load is applied, etc., but the details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 47, the shape of the light guide insertion hole 734 is formed following the shape of the light transmission hole 709 described above. That is, the light guide insertion hole 734 is bored in the front and back in an elongated crystal shape (approximately elliptical shape, approximately tortoiseshell shape), and its elongated direction faces different directions depending on the position from the left and right center. .

That is, the closer the light guide insertion hole 734 is to the center, the smaller the deviation between the longitudinal direction and the front-back direction is (in this embodiment, they are matched), and the closer the light guide insertion hole 734 is to the left and right ends, the closer the longitudinal direction is to the front side and the closer to the center of the left and right. It is assumed that the direction is inclined to .

That is, the longitudinal direction of the light guide insertion hole 734 is set to be inclined toward the front side toward the left and right center, and the angle of the inclination is designed to become larger as it approaches the left and right ends. In this embodiment, the inclination angle is configured to have a constant increment (approximately 5 degrees).

The small receiving part 735 is a part that supports the hollow member 740 while allowing rattling, and is arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line CL1 passing through the center position of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the left-right direction. The relationship with respect to the longitudinal direction of the insertion hole 734 (the interval between the pair of small receivers 735 and the angle between the straight line connecting the pair of small receivers 735 and the longitudinal direction of the light guide insertion hole 734) is maintained.

As a result, while the plurality of hollow members 740 disposed on one side of the center line CL1 have the same shape (while having a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the hollow members 740 disposed on the other side), the assembled state of the second operation unit 700 (See FIG. 40) The posture of the hollow member 740 can be made different.

That is, similarly to the shape of the light guide insertion hole 734, the closer the hollow member 740 is to the center, the smaller the deviation between the longitudinal direction and the front-rear direction becomes. It is assumed that the direction is inclined to .

That is, the longitudinal direction of the hollow member 740 is set to be inclined toward the front side toward the center of the left and right sides, and the angle of the inclination is designed to become larger toward the left and right ends. In this embodiment, the inclination angle is configured to have a constant increment (approximately 5 degrees).

The pair of small receiving parts 735 include a front small receiving part 735a which is arranged on the front side with respect to the reference O1 and is formed in the shape of a cylinder with a circular cross section and a bottom, and a front small receiving part 735a which is arranged on the back side with respect to the reference O1 and has a circular cross section. and a rear small receiving part 735b formed in the shape of a cylinder with a bottom.

In this embodiment, the diameter of the inner cylinder of the rear small receiving part 735b is designed to be longer than the diameter of the inner cylinder of the front small receiving part 735a. Specifically, the cross-sectional diameter of the protruding columnar part 743 of the hollow member 740 is designed to be 3 [mm], the diameter of the inner cylinder of the front small receiving part 735a is designed to be 4.8 [mm], and the rear small receiving part 735a is designed to have a diameter of 4.8 [mm]. The diameter of the inner cylinder of the receiving portion 735b is designed to be 5.0 [mm].

That is, the gap size that occurs in the opposing direction between the small receiving part 735 and the protruding columnar part 743 is larger than that between the front small receiving part 735a and the protruding columnar part 743 than that between the rear small receiving part 735b and the protruding columnar part 743. The gap size is smaller than that with the portion 743.

Thereby, order can be given to the displacement mode of the hollow member 740 that is supported while allowing wobbling. That is, in this embodiment, rotational displacement about the front small receiving part 735a can be made more likely to occur than rotational displacement about the rear small receiving part 735b.

In other words, it is possible to easily maintain the arrangement of the hollow member 740 in the vicinity of the front small receiving portion 735a, while the arrangement of the hollow member 740 is likely to be misaligned in the vicinity of the rear small receiving portion 735b. The direction of the displacement of the hollow member 740 accompanying the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, which will be described later, can be adjusted to the direction of expanding outward to the left and right toward the back side.

The large receiving portions 736 are portions that support the variable decorative member 750 while allowing wobbling, and are arranged on both left and right sides compared to the large receiving portions 736 arranged on the center line CL1. The portion 736 is formed at a longer distance from the rotating shaft passing through the center of the shafted support 731, and is also formed at a different vertical position, but the details will be described later.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 43, 44, and 45. The hollow member 740 is arranged on the right side because four members of the same shape arranged side by side on the left side and four members arranged side by side on the right side have a symmetrical shape. The hollow member 740 located on the left side will be described in detail, and the description of the hollow member 740 disposed on the left side will be omitted.

FIG. 48 is a front perspective view of hollow member 740. As shown in FIG. 48, the hollow member 740 is arranged to surround the front, rear, left, and right sides of the light guide member 714, thereby shielding the light leaking from the front, rear, left, and right sides of the light guide member 714 so that it is not (difficult) to be seen by the player. It is a member configured to draw the player's line of sight to the upper tip of the light guide member 714, where the light is easily visible, and has a long crystal shape (approximately elliptical shape, approximately tortoise shell shape) on the front and back. A cylindrical main body part 741 whose frame is designed and formed into a cylindrical shape with an open top and bottom, and a flat plate extension part 742 which extends from the lower edge of the cylindrical main body part 741 in a flat plate shape in the front, rear, left and right directions. , and a pair of protruding columnar portions 743 that protrude downward from the lower surface of the flat plate extending portion 742 in a columnar manner.

The outer shape of the cylindrical main body portion 741 when viewed from above is slightly smaller than the inner shape of the rear through hole 722 of the cover member 720 when viewed from above, while the outer shape of the flat plate extension portion 742 when viewed from above is smaller than the inner shape of the rear through hole 722 of the cover member 720 when viewed from above. 720 is formed to be larger than the inner shape of the rear through hole 722 when viewed from above. That is, in the assembled state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 40), the hollow member 740 is inserted into the rear through hole 722 and can be vertically displaced and pulled out above the cover member 720. is regulated.

The upper edge of the cylindrical main body 741 is lowered toward the front side. Thereby, the light that has reached the upper end of the light guide member 714 can be intensively radiated upward on the front side. On the other hand, most of the light directed upward on the back side is blocked by the cylindrical main body portion 741. Therefore, the light that has reached the upper end of the light guide member 714 can be delivered to the player's eyes well, and a large amount of the light that has reached the upper end of the light guide member 714 transfers to the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the display from worsening due to the display being hidden away.

The flat plate extending portion 742 also functions as a portion whose upward displacement is regulated by the protruding pressing portion 724 (see FIG. 45). That is, the protruding holding portion 724 is formed at a position corresponding to the protruding columnar portion 743 on the back side, and restricts upward displacement of the hollow member 740. In this way, by forming the protruding holding part 724 and the protruding columnar part 743 at corresponding positions, even when the attitude of the hollow member 740 changes, the protruding columnar part 743 acts as a plate-like displacement member. Since it is possible to prevent the hollow member 740 from slipping out from the small receiving portion 735 of the hollow member 740, it is possible to stably support the hollow member 740.

The protruding columnar portion 743 has a hemispherical tip and is arranged in accordance with the spacing of the small receiving portions 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 (see FIG. 43), so that the second operation unit 700 is not assembled. (see FIG. 40), it is received in the small receiving portion 735.

The pair of protruding columnar parts 743 and the cylindrical main body part 741 are configured not to be rotationally symmetrical, so that the positional relationship with the light guide member 714 can be changed when assembled in reverse order. , it is possible to prevent incorrect installation. In addition, since the hollow members 740, which are arranged four on each side, are formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape, it is possible to prevent the hollow members 740, which are assembled on the left side of the left-right center position, from being assembled on the right side. (This can help prevent incorrect installation).

Here, the small receiving part 735 is rotationally displaced around the rotation axis that faces in the left-right direction in the same way as the displacement mode of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, while the protruding columnar part 743 is mainly displaced in the vertical direction allowed by the hollow member 740. Since the protruding tip of the protruding columnar portion 743 is formed in a hemispherical shape, the hollow member 740 can be displaced with less resistance. Here, the manner in which the hollow member 740 is displaced in accordance with the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described.

49(a), 49(b), and 49(c) are cross-sectional views of the light guide member 714, the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and the hollow member 740 taken along the line XLIX-XLIX in FIG. 47. In FIG. 49(a), the lower end posture (initial posture) of the plate-like displacement member 730 is illustrated, in FIG. 49(b), the horizontal posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 is illustrated, and in FIG. 49(c), The upper terminal position of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is illustrated. Note that the horizontal attitude corresponds to an attitude in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 rotates (raised displacement) by about 2.1 degrees about the reference O1 from the lower end attitude, and the upper end attitude corresponds to the attitude in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 rotates from the horizontal attitude to 730 corresponds to a posture rotated (raised displacement) by about 4 degrees around the reference O1.

As shown in FIG. 49(a), when the drive unit 760 is not operating, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is tilted forward by about 2.1 degrees from the horizontal position (lower end position (initial position)). ), the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is stably supported. In the present embodiment, by recessing the rear small receiving part 735b deeper than the front small receiving part 735a, the supporting position of the front small receiving part 735a in the lower end attitude (initial attitude) of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 ( (bottom) and the support position (bottom) of the rear small receiving portion 735b are prevented from shifting in the vertical direction.

Thereby, the attitude of the hollow member 740 supported by the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the lower terminal attitude (initial attitude) can be prevented from becoming the forward-inclined attitude. Further, the surfaces of the support positions (bottom parts) of the front small receiving part 735a and the rear small receiving part 735b are configured to be inclined downward toward the front side, similar to the inclination of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, so that the hollow member 740 Even if the hollow member 740 is displaced to the back side, the hollow member 740 can be returned to the front side by sliding the hollow member 740 using the slope of the support position (bottom).

Therefore, for example, even if the hollow member 740 is displaced due to the load generated when opening and closing the front frame 14, the position of the hollow member 740 can be changed to a position closer to the front (initial position) before the drive unit 760 operates. can be stably maintained.

As shown in FIG. 49(b), when the plate-like displacement member 730 is in a horizontal position, the protruding columnar part 743 of the hollow member 740 can secure a sufficient clearance with the small receiving part 735 both at the front and the rear. . Therefore, for example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 slightly vibrates in a posture near the horizontal posture, the mode of vibration inside the small receiving part 735 of the protruding columnar part 743 is large in the front and rear protruding columnar parts 743. There is no difference, and the hollow member 740 tends to be disorderly displaced back and forth and left and right.

As shown in FIG. 49(c), in the process of displacing the plate-like displacement member 730 to the upper end position, the protruding columnar part 743 on the front side of the hollow member 740 comes into contact with the front small receiving part 735a and is pushed toward the back side. will be advanced.

Therefore, for example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 slightly vibrates based on the upper end position (near the upper end position), the hollow member 740 rotates around the protruding columnar part 743 supported by the front small receiving part 735a. is prone to rotational displacement. In other words, the configuration is such that the manner of displacement that is likely to occur in the hollow member 740 can be changed in accordance with the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, which is a reference for small vibrations.

The light guide member 714 is inserted into the hollow member 740 inside the cylindrical main body 741, and the pair of protruding columnar parts 743 are received and supported by the small receiving parts 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Therefore, since the displacement of the hollow member 740 corresponds to the displacement of the small receiving part 735, the manner in which the small receiving part 735 is displaced will be described first.

Since the small receiving portion 735 is a part of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, it is displaced following the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Since the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced around the reference O1, which is a straight line connecting the shafted supports 731 (a straight line facing in the left-right direction), the small receiving part 735 is not displaced in the reference O1 direction (left-right direction). Instead, it is displaced on a plane perpendicular to the reference O1. Accordingly, the degree of inclination of the straight line connecting the pair of small receivers 735 arranged on the left and right sides of the light guide member 714 with respect to the center line CL1 changes. Therefore, the hollow member 740 is also encouraged to change the degree of inclination with respect to the center line CL1.

Due to the change in the degree of inclination described above, the hollow member 740 supported by the pair of small receiving portions 735 is subject to not only displacement on a plane perpendicular to the reference O1 but also displacement in the longitudinal and lateral directions (horizontal direction). Posture changes are allowed.

Since the arrangement of the small receiving portions 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is symmetrical with respect to the center line CL1, the change in the degree of inclination described above is also symmetrical with respect to the center line CL1. Displacement or posture change of 740 in the front, back, left and right directions (horizontal direction) can be caused symmetrically.

Further, since the change in the degree of inclination with respect to the center line CL1 corresponds to the arrangement of the pair of small receivers 735 in the state before the change, the inclination of the pair of small receivers 735 on the side closer to the center line CL1 (center side) The change in the degree of inclination is different from the change in the degree of inclination of the pair of small receiving portions 735 on the sides far from the center line CL1 (left and right outer sides). In this embodiment, since the displacement in the direction parallel to the center line CL1 is maintained, the degree of change in the inclination of the pair of left and right outer small receiving portions 735, which has a large inclination angle with respect to the center line CL1 in the state before change. is larger than the degree of change in the inclination of the pair of small receiving portions 735 on the center side (see FIG. 47). Thereby, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is displaced in a fixed manner, the amount of attitude change of the hollow member 740 can be changed depending on whether it is closer to or farther from the center line CL1.

The relationship between the hollow member 740 and the light guide member 714 when displacement occurs will be explained. In order to suppress the resistance when the hollow member 740 is displaced, the arrangement of the small receiving part 735 and the position of the hollow member 740 are adjusted so that a gap is created between the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light guide member 714. The shape and the shape of the light guide member 714 are designed.

Here, the designed gap is different between the longitudinal direction of the light guide member 714 when viewed from above and the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction. That is, the gap in the longitudinal direction is larger than the gap in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, the larger the inclination angle of the light guide member 714 with respect to the center line CL1 in the longitudinal direction when viewed from above (the more the light guide member 714 is disposed on the left and right outer sides), the more the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light guide member 714 This will narrow the space between them in the front and back direction.

Therefore, if the hollow member 740 is displaced by the same amount in the front-back direction due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the hollow members 740 disposed on the left and right sides will be pressed against the light guide member 714, causing friction or large There is a possibility that the load will be applied more easily and it will be damaged. On the other hand, as a countermeasure, if the gap in the front and rear direction between the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light guide member 714 is set to be large in advance, the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 will be separated too much. Therefore, the effect of shielding the light guide member 714 other than the tip portion with the hollow member 740 and focusing the player's line of sight on the tip portion of the light guide member 714 is diminished.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction of the hollow member 740 disposed on the left and right outer sides is made smaller than the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction of the hollow member 740 disposed on the left and right center sides. It is configured as follows.

That is, in this embodiment, in a configuration in which a plurality of small receiving parts 735 are arranged on the same plane parallel to the reference O1, the small receiving parts 735 arranged on the left and right outer sides are closer to the left and right center side. The front small receiving part 735 and the reference O1 are arranged so that the distance in the front-rear direction is shorter than that of the small receiving part 735.

As a result, the small receiving portion 735 on the front side is displaced rearward with the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and the amount of longitudinal displacement of the hollow member 740, which is pushed and displaced rearward, is adjusted to the left and right center side. It is possible to geometrically define the members disposed on the left and right outer sides to be slightly smaller than the members disposed on the left and right sides.

In the initial posture of the plate-like displacement member 730, the gap between the small receiving portion 735 and the protruding columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 is approximately equal on the front, rear, left, and right sides, and the hollow member 740 is parallel to the horizontal direction. It is provided to such an extent that even if it moves, the gap between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 will not be filled.

Therefore, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the initial position (the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is in the de-energized state), an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 when a player hits the pachinko machine 10 or tries to shake it. Even if the hollow member 740 is displaced when the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 are moved, the displacement is suppressed to less than the gap size between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740. Therefore, the load transmitted between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 can be reduced.

As the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotated, the distance between the pair of small receivers 735 arranged on the left and right sides of the light guide insertion hole 734 changes in a top view. It is unlikely that the hollow member 740 will be displaced in the front-rear direction while the center of the protruding columnar portion 743 of the member 740 remains aligned.

At least, since the arrangement of the protruding columnar part 743 with respect to the small receiving part 735 changes in the gap between the small receiving part 735 and the protruding columnar part 743, this change causes the displacement and posture of the hollow member 740 in the left-right direction. Changes can occur.

The manner in which the hollow member 740 is pushed will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, during the rotational displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730, the front side of the inner surface of the front small receiving part 735a (the small receiving part 735 on the side where the longitudinal displacement is large) is It starts contacting the front side and is pushed toward the back side.

At this time, due to the above-mentioned dimensional relationship, a gap is maintained between the front part of the inner surface of the rear small receiving part 735b and the front part of the protruding columnar part 743. Therefore, wobbling in the rotational direction about the protruding columnar part 743 supported by the front small receiving part 735a is allowed. The structure is such that it is possible to cope with a change in the distance between the small receiving portions 735 when viewed from above by displacement using this rattling.

In this way, the small receiving portion 735 is configured to displace the hollow member 740 toward the back side, and the rear small receiving portion is configured to prevent backlash to an extent that allows rotational displacement around the front protruding columnar portion 743. It is configured to be provided between the portion 735b and the protruding columnar portion 743. Therefore, even if the hollow member 740 and the light guide member 714 collide during the displacement of the hollow member 740 based on the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 using the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 as a driving source, the hollow member 740 and the light guide member Since the load generated between the hollow member 740 and the light guide member 714 can be kept small, it is possible to prevent the hollow member 740 or the light guide member 714 from cracking or chipping.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 43, 44, and 45. The variable decorative member 750 includes a bifurcated support member 751 supported between the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and a decorative member 756 fastened and fixed to the bifurcated support member 751 and disposed above the cover member 720. Equipped with.

The bifurcated support member 751 includes a columnar protrusion 752 that projects downward from the central lower surface of the plate-like main body formed in a left and right long plate shape, and a columnar protrusion 752 that projects downward from the center bottom surface of the plate-like main body formed in a left and right elongated plate shape, and a columnar protrusion 752 that is provided at both left and right ends of the plate-like main body. A pair of cylindrical protrusions 753 (different lengths) that protrude upward in a cylindrical shape, and a plate-shaped extension part that extends in a plate-like manner from the center of the plate-shaped main body to the back side. 754.

The protruding tip of the columnar protruding portion 752 is formed in a hemispherical shape, and is received in the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The cylindrical protruding portion 753 of the bifurcated support member 751 is formed so as to be inserted into the front through hole 723, and the front through hole 723 allows vertical displacement of the bifurcated support member 751. 731 is rotated around an axis passing through the center. Therefore, although the directions of displacement are different from each other, since the protruding tips of the columnar protrusions 752 are formed in a hemispherical shape, the variable decorative member 750 can be displaced with less resistance as the plate-shaped displaceable member 730 is displaced. can.

The plate-like extending portion 754 acts to position the center of gravity of the variable decorative member 750 closer to the back side than the center of the columnar protruding portion 752 . That is, the posture in which the variable decorative member 750 is stabilized by its own weight can be set to the backward tilting posture. As a result, the abutment position between the columnar protrusion 752 and the plate-like displacement member 730 when the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the initial position can be compared with that when the variable decorative member 750 stands upright without tilting. Since the variable decoration member 750 can be moved toward the front side, the amount of displacement of the variable decorative member 750 near the time when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 starts changing its attitude can be increased.

The decorative member 756 includes a pair of protruding legs 757 that protrude downward in correspondence with the cylindrical protruding part 753, and a female thread is formed at the tip of the protruding legs 757. The protruding leg portion 757 is inserted inside the cylindrical protruding portion 753.

An insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted is formed in the plate-like main body of the bifurcated support member 751 along the center position of the cylindrical protrusion 753. By inserting a fastening screw into the insertion hole and screwing the fastening screw into the female thread at the tip of the protruding leg portion 757, the bifurcated support member 751 and the decorative member 757 are fastened and fixed.

The assembly process of the second operation unit 700 will be explained. First, the variable decorative member 750 is assembled to the cover member 720. That is, the cylindrical protrusion 753 of the bifurcated support member 751 is passed through the front through hole 723 of the cover member 720 from below, the protrusion leg 757 of the decorative member 756 is inserted into the cylindrical protrusion 753, and the protrusion is removed. A fastening screw is screwed into the female thread at the tip of the leg portion 757.

Next, the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the hollow member 740, and the cover member 720 are placed on the base member 701 in this order, and the cover member 720 is fastened and fixed to the base member 701. When assembling the cover member 720 to the base member 701, insert the fastening screw into the insertion hole 721a from above while the hook-shaped part 721c is engaged with the engaging part 702a formed on the back side of the plate-like member 702. After the insertion cover member 720 and the base member 701 are fastened and fixed, they are turned upside down and a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 721b.

As a result, although a plurality of members are disposed in a non-fixed manner between the base member 701 and the cover member 720, and fastening screws are screwed into multiple locations from the bottom surface, each component may be removed during assembly. can be prevented from falling off between the base member 701 and the cover member 720.

Finally, the drive unit 760 is placed below the base member 701, and a fastening screw is inserted from below and fastened and fixed. When the second operating unit 700 is assembled (see FIG. 40), the advancing direction of the fastening screw screwed in from below interferes with the outer wall 312 of the rear case 310. It is said to be difficult to remove the fastening screws while they are accommodated. Therefore, even if the front side of the operating unit 300 is illegally opened, it is possible to prevent the drive unit 760 from being taken out independently from the rear case 310.

Furthermore, a fastening portion 766 is formed on the back side of the drive unit 760 to which a fastening screw inserted into the bottom wall portion 311 of the back case 310 is fastened and fixed. Therefore, when the second operating unit 700 is assembled to the rear case 310 without the drive unit 760 assembled, the second operating unit 700 is fastened and fixed by inserting a fastening screw into the bottom wall portion 311. Since there will be places where the fastening screws cannot be fastened at this stage, it is possible to make the operator aware that the drive unit 760 is insufficient. Thereby, forgetting to assemble the drive unit 760 can be suppressed.

FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive unit 760. In FIG. 50, a drive unit 760 disposed on the right side when viewed from the front is illustrated. Although the drive unit 760 has a slightly different appearance, the components are symmetrical, so the drive unit 760 on the right side will be described in detail, and the explanation on the drive unit 760 on the left side will be omitted.

The drive unit 760 includes a load member 761 configured to be able to apply a load to the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and a metal (in this embodiment, brass) member that rotatably supports the base end side of the load member 761. A shaft portion 762 formed in a cylindrical shape, a support case 763 to which the shaft portion 762 is fixed and configured as a case as a whole, an electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 disposed inside the support case 763, and a support case 763 having a cylindrical shape. It includes a front cover member 770 disposed on the front side of the case 763 and fastened and fixed to the support case 763, and an illumination board 777 fastened and fixed to the front side of the front cover member 770.

The load member 761 is made of a resin material, has a base end 761a formed with a through hole through which the shaft portion 762 is inserted, and extends outward from the base end 761a. A bar-shaped extending portion 761b is bent in the shape of a square, a vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c is bent upward from the extending tip of the bar-shaped extending portion 761b toward the front side, and a vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c is bent toward the front side. An overhanging portion 761d that overhangs from the extending tip of the extending portion 761b along the extending direction of the rod-like extending portion 761b, and a centering point of the shaft rod portion 762 at the boundary between the overhanging portion 761d and the rod-like extending portion 761b. The front cover member 770 includes an opposing curved portion 761e formed in an arc shape and arranged to face the curved protruding portion 774 of the front lid member 770.

A metal plate member MB2 made of metal (magnetic material) is disposed on the upper surface of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b. In the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB2 is fixed to the rod-shaped extension portion 761b by engagement with the elastic claw, similarly to the metal plate member MB1 described above.

To be more specific, rail portions for guiding the front and back slide of the metal plate member MB2 are provided on both longitudinal sides of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b, and these rail portions are configured to guide the metal plate member MB2 only from the back side. (only the back side is fully open). When sliding the metal plate member MB2 along the rail part, the elastic claw is pushed down by the metal plate member MB2, and when the metal plate member MB2 is slid as it is, the metal plate member MB2 hits the front side wall of the rail part. This restricts the sliding, and at this position, the pressing down of the elastic claw by the metal plate member MB2 is released (it has risen to a position facing the side surface of the metal plate member MB1), and the elastic claw is pushed down by the metal plate member MB2. engages to restrict retraction to the rear side.

Note that the method of fixing the metal plate member MB2 to the rod-shaped extension portion 761b is not limited to this. For example, the metal plate member MB2 may be fastened and fixed to the rod-shaped extension portion 761b, may be tied with a binding band, or may be attached with adhesive tape or the like.

The front lid member 770 includes a projecting frame portion 771 that projects toward the front side in a frame shape, and a plurality of projecting portions that project toward the front side in a small-diameter cylindrical shape inside the projecting frame portion 771. A cylindrical part 772, a wiring passage recess 773 recessed at the lower edge so that the electrical wiring connected to the illumination board 777 or a connector connected to the end of the electrical wiring can pass through, and It includes a curved protruding portion 774 that protrudes in a curved plate shape along an arc shape centered on the shaft portion 762 .

The protruding frame portion 771 is formed to face the periphery of the illumination board 777, and is a portion that prevents loads from being applied to the illumination board 777 from the top, bottom, left and right directions.

The protruding cylindrical part 772 includes a gourd-shaped seat in front view and a small-diameter insertion part that further protrudes from the seat. By assembling, the back surface of the illumination board 777 is supported by the seat, and the arrangement of the illumination board 777 can be stabilized. A female screw portion into which a fastening screw can be screwed is provided on the seat portion along with the insertion portion, and the illumination board 777 is fastened and fixed to the front cover member 770 by the fastening screw screwed into this female screw portion.

The illumination board 777 includes a light emitting means 778 composed of a plurality of LEDs arranged at positions designed in consideration of presentation, and a plurality of through holes 779 formed in the illumination board 777 for assembly. Equipped with.

The through-holes 779 are formed at a plurality of locations (in this embodiment, two locations), each pair of circular through-holes corresponding to the insertion portion and the female screw portion of the protruding cylindrical portion 772.

In this embodiment, the illumination board 777 is directly fastened and fixed to the front lid member 770. That is, this corresponds to a case where the front cover member 770 and the illumination board 777, which are arranged close to the front side of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, are configured as a single rigid body. Therefore, the illumination board 777 can be made to easily vibrate due to the vibration generated by the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means 778 can be made to vibrate due to the vibration generated by the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. Can be configured.

In this embodiment, a curved protrusion 774 is provided between the load member 761 that is displaced by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the back surface of the front lid member 770. That is, since the load member 761 as the vibration source side and the front cover member 770 are separated by at least the width dimension of the curved protrusion 774, excessive transmission of vibration can be prevented.

Note that the width dimension of the curved protrusion 774 can be set arbitrarily. Therefore, the setting of the width dimension of the curved protrusion 774 can be changed depending on whether the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means 778 is desired to be vibrated or maintained without being vibrated. If it is the former, the width dimension may be shortened, and if it is the latter, the width dimension may be lengthened.

The support case 763 includes a lower regulating part 764 arranged below the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, an upper regulating part 765 arranged on the opposite side of the shaft part 762 with respect to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and a rear case 310. It includes a fastening portion 766 (see FIG. 45) into which a fastening screw inserted into the bottom wall portion 311 (see FIG. 6) is screwed.

The load member 761 normally tilts due to its own weight (see FIG. 51(a)), but when electricity is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, magnetic force (electromagnetic force) is generated, and the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) causes the metal The plate member MB2 is attracted and displaced upward.

That is, in this embodiment, as the metal plate member MB2 is displaced between the raised position where it is placed as a result of being raised by electromagnetic force and the lowered position where it is placed as a result of the electromagnetic force disappearing and it being lowered by its own weight, , the plate-shaped displacement member 730 (see FIG. 43), which receives the load from the load member 761, is displaced in the rotational direction around the shafted support 731. The rotational displacement will be described below with reference to FIG. 51.

51(a) and 51(b) are front views of the drive unit 760. In addition, in FIGS. 51(a) and 51(b), illustrations of the front lid member 770 and the illumination board 777 are omitted except for the curved protrusion 774, and the outer shape of the curved protrusion 774 is shown by imaginary lines. Illustrated.

Further, FIG. 51(a) shows a state in which no current is flowing through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the load member 761 is placed in the lowered position due to its own weight, and FIG. 51(b) shows a state in which no current is flowing through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. A state in which the metal plate member MB2 is attracted by the electromagnetic force generated by the flow and the load member 761 is placed in the raised position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 51(a) and 51(b), in the lowered position, the load member 761 abuts against the lower regulating part 764 and its downward displacement is regulated, and in the raised position, the load member 761 abuts against the upper regulating part 765. Rising displacement is regulated.

Here, the lower regulating part 764 and the upper regulating part 765 are configured to have different positions (distances from the shaft part 762) with respect to the shaft part 762, and the effects caused by this will be explained. .

First, the load applied to the lower regulating portion 764 via the load member 761 is mainly a load generated by the load member 761's own weight, so by supporting the center of gravity of the load member 761, the load member 761 is stably supported. can do. For this reason, the lower regulating portion 764 is disposed at the center of gravity of the load member 761.

In the above description of the window movable unit 150, since the driven member 163 is formed in a straight rod shape, the center of gravity is approximately at the center of the member. Since the vertical bar-shaped extension part 761c and the overhanging part 761d extend in two from the extension tip side of the bar-shaped extension part 761b, the center of gravity is located closer to the extension tip side than the approximate center position of the bar-shaped extension part 761b. .

Taking this into consideration, in this embodiment, the lower regulating portion 764 is arranged at a position corresponding to the center of gravity of the load member 761, which is closer to the extending tip than the approximately central position of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. .

On the other hand, since the load applied to the upper regulating part 765 via the load member 761 is mainly due to the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the upper regulating part 765 is arranged at the center of gravity of the load member 761. There are few advantages associated with location. In this embodiment, the load transmitted to the upper regulating part 765 via the load member 761 is reduced by arranging the upper regulating part 765 to face the rotating tip of the load member 761.

In other words, when a moment of force of the same magnitude is generated, the load transmitted through the load member 761 is greater at a position farther from the rotation axis of the load member 761 (a position where the arm related to the moment is longer). Since it is smaller, the load transmitted to the upper regulating portion 765 can be reduced.

In this way, since it is desirable that the load transmission to the upper regulating member 765 occurs at the rotating tip of the load member 761, in this embodiment, the overhanging portion 761d is further extended from the extending tip of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. It is configured to project toward the outer diameter side of a circle centered on the shaft portion 762, and the projecting portion 761d is configured to abut against the upper regulating member 765. Thereby, load transmission at the intermediate portion of the load member 761 can be avoided, and load transmission can be stably caused at the rotating tip side.

In this embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is not configured to push the load member 761 forward, but is configured to pull it up using an attractive force. That is, the magnetic force generated in the iron core disposed in the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 attracts the metal plate member MB2, thereby pulling up the load member 761.

According to this configuration, compared to a configuration in which the load member 761 is pushed by a member moved by electromagnetic force, even if the load member 761 is displaced due to the load applied to the load member 761, overload (localized Therefore, damage to the structure of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be easily avoided. This makes it possible to extend the service life of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 even in a configuration in which the load member 761 receives a varying load as in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 51(b), when the load member 761 receives the attraction force from the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (in the raised position), the upper surface of the metal plate member MB2 is in surface contact (a predetermined contact with the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2). The structure is such that a gap is provided between the metal plate member MB2 and the main body (the part containing the coil) of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the above-mentioned surfaces that make surface contact The upper regulating portion 765 and the projecting portion 761d are configured to abut on a plane parallel to the upper regulating portion 765 and the projecting portion 761d.

As a result, the load generated by the electromagnetic force is transferred to the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 while avoiding overloading the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 by avoiding the load member 761 colliding with the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. It can be dispersed and received at the lower edge or the lower surface (contact surface) of the upper regulating portion 765. It is possible to avoid generating a large load locally.

In addition, in the raised position of the load member 761, there is a gap not only between the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the metal plate member MB2, but also between the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the metal plate member MB2. Alternatively, the load from the load member 761 may be received only by the upper regulating portion 765. In this case, physical load transmission between the load member 761 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be interrupted, so that the durability of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be improved.

In this case, since the load is likely to concentrate on the overhanging portion 761d of the load member 761, the overhanging portion 761d will be damaged (ruptured) preferentially; Even if the metal plate member MB2 is configured to abut the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 at multiple points on a predetermined plane, concentration of the load on one point can be avoided. .

Furthermore, in this case, if the overhanging portion 761d is damaged (broken), the metal plate member MB2 will come into contact with the lower edge of the metal case at multiple points, so a detection sensor may be separately configured to be able to detect this contact. Accordingly, damage (breakage) to the overhanging portion 761d can be easily determined.

In addition, since the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 continues to be generated in the raised position, it is difficult to imagine that the load member 761 bounces back after colliding with the upper regulating portion 765. Therefore, the arrangement and posture of the upper regulating part 765 can be designed considering only the efficiency of reducing the load transmitted to the upper regulating part 765 (the width of the straight line passing through the center of the shaft part 762 and the upper regulating part 765). (The angle with the straight line along the direction can be designed to be small.)

On the other hand, since the straight line along the width direction of the lower regulating part 764 is inclined with respect to the straight line rL1 passing through the lower regulating part 764 and passing through the center of the shaft part 762, the lower regulating part 764 Compared to the case where the straight line along the width direction and the straight line rL1 are parallel or on the same straight line, the direction in which the repulsive force is generated can be dispersed (force decomposition). Thereby, bouncing (bound) of the load member 761 after colliding with the lower regulating portion 764 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the lower regulating portion 764 is formed to have a longer width dimension (width along the radial direction), it is possible to secure a large area of the surface receiving the load, and the load due to the own weight of the load member 761 is reduced. The pressure (stress) generated in the lower regulating portion 764 can be reduced.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the rebound (bound) of the load member 761 is reduced while reducing the load transmitted to the lower regulating part 764 and the upper regulating part 765 via the load member 761 during displacement in both the up and down directions. Can be suppressed.

Note that the materials of the upper regulating part 765 and the lower regulating part 764 are not limited at all. For example, it may be a general-purpose plastic such as polypropylene or polystyrene, an engineering plastic such as polycarbonate, a thermosetting resin such as melamine resin, polyurethane, or epoxy resin, or a rubber material. Further, the upper regulating part 765 and the lower regulating part 764 may be made of the same material or may be made of different materials.

For example, when providing the upper regulating portion 765 with a function of suppressing displacement in the front-rear direction that may occur in the load member 761 due to the load that the load member 761 may receive from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the raised position, As the material of the upper regulating portion 765, a material or structure having excellent not only damping properties but also excellent frictional resistance may be used.

In this case, displacement of the load member 761 in the front-rear direction (axial direction) due to the load applied to the load member 761 from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is limited to the state in which the overhanging portion 761d and the upper regulating portion 765 are in contact with each other. This can be easily prevented.

When the load member 761 is displaced, the opposing curved portion 761e displaces the back side of the curved protrusion 774. Since both the opposing curved portion 761e and the curved protruding portion 774 have an arc shape centered on the shaft portion 762, the load member 761 is displaced to the front side, and the opposing curved portion 761e and the curved protruding portion 774 come into contact. Even if the load member 761 is rotationally displaced in this state, the opposing curved portion 761e and the curved protrusion 774 only slide along the rotational direction, so the resistance to rotational displacement can be reduced.

Further, by forming the opposing curved portion 761e at the lower end of the load member 761, sufficient space can be secured above the opposing curved portion 761e. In this embodiment, a vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c is provided in this secured space.

The vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c extends above the opposing curved portion 761e, but unlike the opposing curved portion 761e which is formed in a curved manner, it extends straight in a front view. That is, when the load member 761 is placed in the raised position, it is formed into a rod shape that extends in the vertical direction when viewed from the front.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the load member 761 from bending and deforming in the left and right directions due to the load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, so that the tip of the load member 761 is upwardly displaced while being slightly displaced left and right, as in the present embodiment. Even with this configuration, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be pushed up stably. Note that the load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the manner of support will be described later.

Note that the vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c is formed in a bar shape that extends straight in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, but when viewed from the side, the vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c is positioned halfway (axially) so that the upper end is located closer to the front than the lower end. The rod portion 762 is bent (bent at an obtuse angle) at the left position of the rod portion 762.

As a result, the area occupied by the load member 761 below the vicinity of the shaft portion 762 can be moved toward the back side, and an area for the members to be placed on the front side thereof can be secured. That is, since the arrangement position of the illumination board 777 can be moved toward the rear side, by increasing the distance between the game board 13 (see FIG. 40) and the illumination board 777, the illumination board 777 is irradiated with light from the light emitting means 778, and the downstream surface configuration is The light seen through the members 91 and 92 can be easily seen as spread light. In other words, it is possible to make it easier to see by using surface emitting light, in which light reaches a circular shape centered on the optical axis and shines in a planar shape, instead of point emitting light that is visually recognized with a size similar to the external shape of the LED.

Furthermore, since the load member 761 can be easily bent and deformed back and forth due to the load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, local overload can be avoided when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by a single load member 761. Even if this occurs, the load can be released by bending and deforming the load member 761. Thereby, the durability of the load member 761 can be improved.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by making the ease of deflection of the load member 761 different in the front, rear, left and right directions, it is possible to improve the stability of pushing up the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the durability of the load member 761. It is possible to achieve the effect that it is possible.

When the load member 761 is placed in the raised position, the load member 761 receives an upward electromagnetic force generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and a downward load generated between the shaft rod portion 762 and the upper regulating portion 765 at both left and right ends of the load member 761. It is stably supported by

Therefore, as will be described later, even when a load is applied to the load member 761 from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the area from the base end 761a to the overhanging portion 761d remains stably supported. The range in which the deflection occurs can be limited to the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c.

Thereby, the load member 761 is entirely displaced in the front-rear direction due to the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and it is possible to avoid contact with the support case 763 and the front lid member 770. In other words, it is possible to prevent the load member 761 from being damaged by rubbing against other members or from requiring extra driving force to drive the load member 761.

<Action of second operation unit 700>
The operation mode of the second operation unit 700 will be explained. In the second operation unit 700, the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 differs depending on the drive mode of the drive units 760 arranged on the left and right sides, so that the hollow member 740 supported on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 accordingly The displacement of the variable decorative member 750 is also configured to be different. Below, the displacement mode of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be explained first, and then the displacement mode of the variable decoration member 750 and the hollow member 740 will be explained.

52, 53, and 54 are front views of the second operating unit 700. In FIG. 52, the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are both arranged in the lowered position, and in FIG. 53, only the load members 761 of the left drive unit 760 are arranged in the lowered position, and the right drive A state in which the load member 761 of the unit 760 is upwardly displaced from a lowered position toward a raised position is illustrated, and FIG. 54 shows a state in which the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are both arranged in the raised position. .

The state shown in FIG. 52 corresponds to a state in which no current flows through the electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the left and right drive units 760 (de-energized state). In this state, the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the load member 761 are not in contact with each other, and the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is maintained by contact with the base member 701. posture).

The state shown in FIG. 53 corresponds to a state (one-side excitation state) in which current is controlled to flow through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the drive unit 760 on one side (right side). In this state, the load member 761 on the right side pushes up the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes its posture in the rising direction and takes an intermediate posture. In addition, in this embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced by about 1.3 degrees from the horizontal position in the intermediate position.

In the state shown in FIG. 53, the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and variable decorative member 750 placed thereon is concentrated on the load member 761 on the right side. In this embodiment, the load member 761 is formed into a small-diameter rod shape, and is bent in the front-rear direction, so that it can be easily bent in the lateral direction (front-rear direction), and the load member 761 is bent in the front-rear direction. It is formed with enough strength (rigidity) to be able to be bent and deformed by the weight of the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 on which it rests.

In this embodiment, since the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and variable decorative member 750 placed thereon is applied in a direction including a front-rear component at the position of contact with the load member 761. (See FIG. 55), the load member 761 is configured to be easily deformed, and the load can be released by this deformation. That is, the state shown in FIG. 53 corresponds to a state in which the load member 761 is flexibly deformed.

Note that the difference in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the rising direction between the state shown in FIG. 53 and the state shown in FIG. 54 described below can be explained as being due to the degree of deflection of the load member 761. That is, by appropriately setting the elastic modulus of the load member 761, it is possible to design different postures of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Note that the elastic modulus of the load member 761 may be designed to be equal on the left and right sides, or may be designed to be different.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the shapes of the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are symmetrical, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the left drive unit 760 (see FIG. 50 Even if current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the right drive unit 760 and no current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the right drive unit 760, the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is the same as that shown in FIG. Therefore, hereinafter, the state shown in FIG. 53 will be referred to as a one-sided excitation state, and a description of the state in which the excitation relationship of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is symmetrical will be omitted.

In the state shown in FIG. 54, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by both the left and right drive units 760. Therefore, since the load of the own weight applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is reduced by half, the deflection displacement of the load member 761 can be reduced.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 54, compared to the state shown in FIG. The difference is that the degree of deflection of 761 is about half.

55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along the line LVa-LVa in FIG. 53, and FIG. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along the line LVb-LVb in FIG. be.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), when the left and right pair of electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 are in an excited state, the load applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is divided into two, so the load member The plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be raised and displaced in a state where the bending deformation of the plate 761 is small (bending deformation is about half).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55(a), when one side of the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 is in an excited state, the load applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is applied to the load member 761 on one side. Concentrate on. This load increases the deflection deformation that occurs in the load member 761, so even if the rotation angle of the load member 761 is the same, the amount of rising displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is suppressed by the deflection deformation.

In this embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is configured to be rotationally displaced about the reference O1. In the state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by the regulating protrusion 702c (initial position, shown by phantom lines in FIG. 55(a)), the load-bearing portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is It comes into contact with the load member 761 of the drive unit 760 with the extending normal extending downward in the rear direction.

That is, since the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the load member 761 via the loaded portion 733 is generated along the direction in which the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c extends, the bending deformation occurring in the load member 761 is suppressed to a small level. . Therefore, in this state, the driving force transmitted via the load member 761 is mainly used for the rising displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

On the other hand, in the mid-position (see FIG. 55(a)), the normal line extending from the contact surface (lower surface) of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is lower than the reference O1 in the front direction. The load member 761 of the drive unit 760 is brought into contact with the load member 761 of the drive unit 760 in the extended state.

That is, in the vicinity of the intermediate position (see FIG. 55(a)) where the amount of deflection deformation of the load member 761 tends to increase due to the large displacement of the load member 761, the load member 761 is directed through the lower surface of the loaded portion 733. The load applied by the load has a frontal component and a downward component. In this embodiment, since the load member 761 is formed into a rod shape extending in a direction that is tilted upward toward the front, a load having a frontal component and a downward component acts as a load that bends and deforms the load member 761. do. Therefore, in this state, the driving force transmitted via the load member 761 is used not only for the rising displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 but also for the deflection deformation of the load member 761 (used for the deflection deformation of the load member 761). (The percentage of

As described above, according to the present embodiment, as the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes, the ease with which the load member 761 is bent and deformed due to the load applied to the load member 761 changes. That is, in the posture in which the load member 761 starts to apply a load to the loaded portion 733 (lower end posture (initial posture)), a rear side load is generated in the direction in which the load member 761 is less susceptible to bending deformation, and from the horizontal posture, A load (downward load or frontward load) is generated in a direction in which the load member 761 is more likely to undergo deflection deformation than in the direction of the rear load.

As a result, even if the arrangement of the drive unit 760, the displacement width of the load member 761, and the generated force of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 are the same, the shape of the load member 761 (particularly the shape of the vertical bar-like extension portion 761c) and the load Depending on the design of the portion 733, the timing at which the load member 761 is likely to be deflected (attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730) and the amount of deflection deformation can be adjusted, so that the second operation when the drive unit 760 is driven can be adjusted. The operational aspects of unit 700 can be designed differently.

In this embodiment, since the vertical bar-like extending portion 761c is shaped to extend upward while protruding toward the front side, it is possible to cause the vertical bar-like extending portion 761c to undergo bending deformation from an early stage. That is, even when the plate-like displacement member 730 is in a horizontal position and a vertically downward load is applied to the load member 761, the vertical bar-like extension portion 761c is flexibly deformed (deformed in the forward tilting direction) by the load. be able to. In other words, the load of the own weight transmitted via the plate-like displacement member 730 can begin to be used for the deflection deformation of the load member 761 before the plate-like displacement member 730 reaches the horizontal position.

In this way, by configuring the usage of the driving force transmitted to the plate-shaped displacement member 730 via the load member 761 to be balanced between the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the deformation of the load member 761, the load can be reduced. Even if the member 761 is over- or under-displaced, fluctuations in the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be reduced.

For example, if the load member 761 hardly bends or deforms, the difference in the amount of displacement of the load member 761 or the difference in the height of the upper end of the load member 761 will directly affect the attitude change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Therefore, unless the displacement amount of the load member 761 and the height of the upper end of the load member 761 are precisely designed to prevent deviations, the change in the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 cannot be stabilized. In this case, high precision is required both in the manufacturing stage of the parts and in the assembly stage, resulting in increased manufacturing costs.

On the other hand, when the load member 761 bends and deforms, even if there is a slight difference in the amount of displacement of the load member 761 or a difference in the height of the upper end of the load member 761, the design is such that the bending deformation of the load member 761 cancels it out. By doing so, changes in the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be stabilized. Therefore, it is possible to keep the accuracy required in the manufacturing and assembly stages low in order to stabilize the change in attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and therefore, the manufacturing cost can be kept down.

This applies not only to the load member 761 alone, but also to the displacement of the left and right load members 761 in combination. That is, in the case where the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 have a symmetrical shape as in the present embodiment, the displacement amount of the load members 761 and the upper end portion of the load members 761 are controlled by the left and right drive units 760. Even if there is a slight difference in height, the difference can be used for bending and deforming the load member 761.

Thereby, regardless of which of the left and right drive units 760 is driven to cause the one-sided excitation state, the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the one-sided excitation state can be stabilized at an intermediate attitude.

Furthermore, the direction of deflection that occurs in the load member 761 due to the load applied to the load member 761 via the loaded portion 733 can be limited to the front side. This direction coincides with the direction of displacement in the longitudinal direction set in the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c with respect to the bar-shaped extending portion 761b. Accordingly, it is possible to configure the load member 761 so that the load that causes the load member 761 to undergo bending deformation is directed away from the rod-shaped extension portion 761b.

Therefore, most of the load applied from the loaded part 733 to the loaded member 761 can be absorbed by the bending deformation of the loaded member 761, and the rod-shaped extension part 761b is affected by the load applied from the loaded part 733. can be made smaller. In other words, the influence exerted on the load member 761 can be suppressed to the vicinity of the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c.

That is, friction and deformation occurring at other contact parts of the load member 761 (for example, the base end 761a and the shaft part 762, the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the curved protrusion 774 and the opposing curved part 761e, etc.) can be suppressed. This makes it easier to predict the mode of deflection deformation of the load member 761, so the structure of the load member 761 and the displacement mode of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 are designed on the assumption that the load member 761 will deflect and deform. It can be done easily.

In addition, the direction of deflection that occurs in the load member 761 can be limited to the front side (it is possible to avoid the same point being deflected to the front side or to the back side depending on the situation). ), it is possible to establish a one-to-one relationship between the position of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the amount of deflection of the load member 761, and the durability of the load member 761 is reduced compared to the case where the load member 761 can be deflected both forward and backward. can improve sexual performance.

In FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b), the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes depending on the degree of deformation of the vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c, and the load member 761 is both in the raised position. (See Figure 51(b)).

Therefore, as described above, the longitudinal displacement of the load member 761 due to the load applied to the load member 761 due to the bending deformation of the vertical bar-like extension portion 761c occurs between the overhang portion 761d and the upper regulating portion 765. It can be suppressed by friction.

Therefore, even if control is performed so that the vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c is repeatedly bent and released (for example, one electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is maintained in an excited state, and the other electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is kept in an excited state). (control mode in which the control mode is repeatedly switched between the non-excited state and the non-excited state), it is possible to suppress the entire load member 761 from displacing in the front-rear direction.

This can be favorably realized by a configuration in which the load member 761 is supported not only by the shaft portion 762 but also by the shaft portion 762 and the upper regulating portion 765 as in the present embodiment. More specifically, instead of receiving the load from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 with the load member 761 disposed between the lowered position and the raised position, the plate-shaped displacement is applied with the load member 761 fixed in the raised position. This can be realized precisely because of the mode in which the load is received from the member 730.

That is, when the load member 761 is supported only by the shaft portion 762, the base end portion 761a and the rod-like extension portion 761b, which are the portions on the shaft portion 762 side, are When the rod-shaped extension portion 761b is twisted or displaced in the front-rear direction due to the load from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, a gap is created between the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. there is a possibility.

If the gap between the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 exceeds a distance that effectively generates electromagnetic force, the electromagnetic force will rapidly weaken, making it difficult to maintain the load member 761 in the raised position. As a countermeasure, it is possible to take measures by increasing the rigidity of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b or by increasing the resistance between the shaft rod portion 762 and the load member 761, but in the former case, the load member 761 becomes heavier. In the latter case, an excessive driving force is required to rotate the load member 761, which leads to an increase in the size of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, which is not preferable.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c is bent, the load member 761 is stably held not only at the shaft portion 762 but also at both left and right end positions of the shaft portion 762 and the upper regulating portion 765. I support it. As a result, in addition to being able to suppress torsional deformation of the rod-shaped extension part 761b compared to the case where it is supported on one side of the left and right sides, the axial displacement of the load member 761 is suppressed due to the frictional resistance generated between it and the upper regulating part 765. Can be suppressed.

Therefore, when controlling the vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c to repeatedly deflect and release, the entire load member 761 is prevented from displacing in the front-rear direction without increasing the size of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. be able to.

In addition, in this embodiment, the metal plate member MB2 functions as a reinforcing material for the rod-shaped extension portion 761b due to the supporting aspect of the metal plate member MB2 (see FIG. 51). That is, the rigidity of the metal plate member MB2 can prevent torsional deformation of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 54. The state shown in FIG. 54 corresponds to a state in which current is flowing through the electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the left and right drive units 760 (excitation state). In this state, the loaded parts 733 on both the left and right sides of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 are pushed up by the load members 761 on both the left and right sides, so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes its posture in the rising direction, and assumes the upper end posture. . In this embodiment, in the upper end position, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced by about 2.7 degrees from the halfway position (about 6.1 degrees from the lower end position, and about 4 degrees from the horizontal position).

In the state shown in FIG. 54, compared to the state shown in FIG. 53, the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and variable decorative member 750 placed thereon is divided into the load members 761 on both the left and right sides. As a result, the deflection occurring in the load member 761 is alleviated.

In addition, in FIG. 54, for convenience, the deflection of the left and right load members 761 is shown as being so small that it cannot be distinguished. That is, it is shown in the same shape as the load member 761 shown in FIG. 52.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, in this embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be placed in a plurality of postures (at least three) by switching the conduction state to the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (see FIG. 50). You can switch with .

Note that in order to switch the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 from FIG. 53 to FIG. Since it is only necessary to excite SOL2, it is possible to easily and smoothly switch the posture.

56(a), FIG. 56(b), FIG. 57(a), and FIG. 57(b) are schematic diagrams showing examples of time-measured changes in conduction of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 and changes in the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. It is a diagram. In FIGS. 56(a), 56(b), 57(a), and 57(b), the upper timing chart shows the conduction state of the left electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the middle timing chart shows the conduction state of the right electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. The conduction state of SOL2 is shown, and the lower timing chart shows the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

Note that, due to the structure, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is not displaced at the same time as the timing when electricity is made conductive to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (a slight time difference occurs); For convenience, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is illustrated as being displaced simultaneously with the conduction of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 56(a) is the same as the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 53 are alternately switched. The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 56(b) is the same as the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 53 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched. The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 57(a) is the same as the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched.

The conduction state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 57(b) is such that the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 53 are alternately switched, and the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched. The mode of switching is the same as the mode of repeating.

In this way, the switching patterns of the states described above with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54 are not unique, but occur in multiple patterns by different combinations of conduction modes of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2.

Therefore, since a plurality of patterns of switching the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 occur, the patterns of displacement of the hollow member 740 that rests on the plate-like displacement member 730 and the variable decoration member 750 (see FIG. 43) can be configured in multiple ways, details of which will be described later.

Note that in FIGS. 56(a), 56(b), 57(a), and 57(b), for convenience, the short-time conduction length and conduction interval of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 are shown as constant. , this is just one example. For example, the short-time conduction intervals may be set randomly, or may be configured to gradually become longer or shorter, and can be set arbitrarily.

In addition, by shortening the short-time conduction length of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the attitude change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be caused instantaneously (pulse-like), while by increasing the conduction length, , can maintain posture changes for a sufficient length of time. Further, by shortening the conduction interval of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be changed as if the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is vibrating.

FIG. 58 is a top view of the second operating unit 700. As shown in FIG. 58, the second operating unit 700 is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape when viewed from above. In the following, the part on the right side from the axis of symmetry will be explained in detail, and the explanation on the left side will be omitted.

59, 60, 61, and 62 are partial sectional views of the second operating unit 700 taken along the line LIX-LIX in FIG. 58. 59, FIG. 60, FIG. 61, and FIG. 62, the displacement of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated in chronological order, and in FIG. 59, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower terminal position (initial position). 60 shows the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in a horizontal position, FIG. 61 shows the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in an intermediate position, and FIG. 62 shows the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in a horizontal position. A state in which the displacement member 730 is in the upper end position is illustrated.

In FIGS. 59 to 62, a straight line connecting the centers of a pair of shafted supports 731 (see FIG. 43) is illustrated as a reference O1 as the axis of rotation for the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The reference O1 is illustrated with the same meaning in subsequent drawings. 59 to 62, a cross section at the center in the left-right direction of the variable decorative member 750 at the center in the left-right direction is illustrated.

The variable decoration member 750 located at the center of the left and right sides is allowed to be displaced vertically by the front through hole 723 (see FIG. 43), and the displacement in the front, rear, right and left directions is caused by the gap between the front through hole 723 and the cylindrical protrusion 753. It is supported by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-like displacement member 730, and is displaced as the large receiving portion 736 is displaced due to a change in the attitude of the plate-like displacement member 730.

In the following, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 (at the center in the left-right direction) due to the change in the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be explained. Note that, for ease of understanding, the change in attitude of the variable decorative member 750 in the direction of gravity is omitted in the illustration.

In the state changes shown in FIGS. 59, 60, and 61, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 has not been displaced (not retreated) to the position where it comes into contact with the side surface of the columnar projection 752 of the variable decorative member 750. . That is, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 is limited to vertical displacement.

On the other hand, in the state change between FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, the front side of the large receiving part 736 is displaced (retracted) to a position where it comes into contact with the front side of the columnar projection 752 of the variable decorative member 750, and the load in the front and rear direction is Transmission occurs. That is, the variable decorative member 750 is displaced not only in the up-down direction but also in the front-back direction.

Therefore, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 (at the center in the left-right direction) due to the change in the attitude of the plate-like displacement member 730 mainly occurs in the vertical direction (the change in attitude from the initial attitude of the plate-like displacement member 730 is small). 59, 60, and 61), and a second stage (a stage in which the attitude change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 from the initial attitude is large from the initial attitude, which occurs in a direction resulting from a combination of the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, Figs. 61 and 61). 62). Thereby, variations in the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 (at the center in the left-right direction) can be increased.

Here, the state shown in FIG. 61 corresponds to the one-sided excitation state, and the state shown in FIG. 62 corresponds to the excitation state, so by switching the driving mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the variable decorative member 750 The displacement mode can be switched between multiple variations.

As shown in FIG. 62, a gap is maintained between the upper surface of the plate-like main body of the bifurcated support member 751 and the lower end of the cylindrical portion forming the front through hole 723. Therefore, since the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 do not sandwich the variable decorative member 750 from above and below, the generation of load is suppressed, and the posture of the variable decorative member 750 can be maintained in an unstable state. Can be done.

63, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, and FIG. 66 are partial sectional views of the second operating unit 700 taken along the line LXIII-LXIII in FIG. 58. 63, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, and FIG. 66, the displacement of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated in chronological order, and in FIG. 63, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower terminal position (initial position). 64 shows the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in a horizontal position, FIG. 65 shows the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in an intermediate position, and FIG. 66 shows the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in a horizontal position. A state in which the displacement member 730 is in the upper end position is illustrated. 63 to 66, a cross section of the right variable decorative member 750 at the center in the left-right direction is illustrated.

The variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides are allowed to be displaced in the vertical direction by the front through hole 723 (see FIG. 43), and the displacement in the front, rear, right, and left directions is caused by the gap between the front through hole 723 and the cylindrical protrusion 753. It is supported by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-like displacement member 730, and is displaced as the large receiving portion 736 is displaced due to a change in the attitude of the plate-like displacement member 730.

The large receiving portions 736 on both the left and right sides are disposed at positions closer to the reference O1 in the vertical direction and farther from the reference O1 in the front-back direction than the large receiving portion 736a at the center left and right.

In the following, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 (on both the left and right sides) due to the change in the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be explained. Note that for ease of understanding, the change in attitude of the variable decorative member 750 in the direction of gravity is omitted from the illustration.

In the state changes shown in FIGS. 63, 64, and 65, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 has not been displaced (not retreated) to the position where it comes into contact with the side surface of the columnar projection 752 of the variable decorative member 750. . That is, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 is limited to vertical displacement.

On the other hand, in the state change between FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, the front side of the large receiving part 736 has been displaced to the extent that it comes into contact with the front side of the columnar projection 752 of the variable decorative member 750 (although it has retreated). ), the relationship does not push the vehicle any further, and load transmission in the longitudinal direction is suppressed.

That is, the load applied to the variable decorative member 750 from the large receiving portion 736 mainly consists of only the load in the vertical direction, and when only the vertical component of displacement is compared, the load applied to the variable decorative member 750 at the center in the left-right direction is The displacement amount of the variable decorative members 750 on both sides in the left-right direction is configured to be larger than the displacement amount of the variable decorative members 750 on both sides in the left-right direction.

In this way, while the displacement of the variable decoration member 750 (at the center in the left-right direction) due to the change in the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is configured to be different for each stage, the variable decoration member 750 on both sides in the left-right direction is Displacement of the decorative member 750 mainly occurs in the vertical direction. Thereby, depending on the degree of attitude change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 at the center in the left-right direction and the variable decorative member 750 on both sides in the left-right direction can be made different.

As described above, since the vertical displacement of the variable decorative members 750 on both sides in the left-right direction is largely ensured, as shown in FIG. The gap between the upper surface of the plate-like main body of the member 751 and the lower end of the cylindrical part forming the front through-hole 723 disappears, and in the same front-rear position, the plate-like main body of the bifurcated support member 751 forms the front through-hole 723. The dimensions are such that it bites into the cylindrical part.

In FIG. 66, on the premise that the plate-shaped main body of the bifurcated support member 751 does not deform, the state after the bifurcated support member 751 has moved parallel to the back side after contacting the lower end of the cylindrical portion constituting the front through hole 723 is shown. Illustrated.

Therefore, since the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 sandwich the variable decoration member 750 from above and below, the load in the vertical compression direction from the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is applied to the variable decoration member 750. Given. This increases the force for holding the posture of the variable decorative member 750, and the posture of the variable decorative member 750 can be stabilized.

Therefore, when the drive units 760 on both the left and right sides are in the excited state and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the upper end position, the variable decoration member 750 in the center of the left and right sides is supported in an unstable state (see FIG. 62). Thus, the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides are stably supported. Therefore, the appearance of the plurality of variable decorative members 750 can be made different after the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the upper end position.

That is, the variable decorative member 750 at the center of the left and right sides is configured to allow slight displacement (loosely supported) as a remnant of the attitude change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, while the variable decorative members 750 at both the left and right sides are By being configured (firmly supported) to suppress displacement, the player's attention can be drawn to the variable decorative member 750 located at the center of the left and right sides.

As described above, the displacement in the vertical direction due to the change in the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is larger for the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides than for the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right. While the player's attention is likely to be drawn to the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is maintained in the upper terminal position, the player's attention is drawn to the variable decorative members 750 in the center of the left and right sides. It can be made easier to collect.

Therefore, when setting the driving state of the drive unit 760 so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 does not reach the upper end position or repeatedly changes its position so as not to hold (do not stop) at the upper end position, It is possible to easily draw the player's line of sight to the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides, and when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is set to be slightly held in the upper end position, the player's eyes can be drawn to the variable decorative members 750 at the center of the left and right sides. This can make it easier to attract people's attention.

With this, when there is a specific light guide member 714 among the plurality of light guide members 714 that the player particularly wants to draw attention to, the player's line of sight is easily drawn to the variable decorative member 750 near that light guide member 714. By controlling the drive unit 760 to drive at a specific light guide member 714 (by controlling the light emission mode of the light guide member 714 in relation to the drive mode of the drive unit 760), the player's line of sight is directed to a specific light guide member 714. can be collected in.

FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the rotational displacement of the large receiving portion 736. In FIG. 67, a direction view of the reference O1 is illustrated, and the arrangement of the central large receiving portion 736a and the left and right outer left and right large receiving portions 736b in the horizontal attitude and the upper end attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is illustrated.

Since the central large receiving portion 736a is disposed above the front side of the reference O1, at a slight angle (approximately 4 degrees) at which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced, the longitudinal displacement is smaller than the vertical displacement. growing.

Since the left and right large receiving portions 736b are farther from the reference O1 than the central large receiving portion 736a, the displacement itself due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is larger than that of the central large receiving portion 736a. On the other hand, since the left and right large receiving portions 736b are disposed directly in front of the reference O1 (as they are disposed on the horizontal line), at a slight angle (approximately 4 degrees) at which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced, , the vertical displacement is larger than the longitudinal displacement.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by rotationally displacing the plate-shaped displacement member 730 around the reference O1, the displacement manner of the central large receiving portion 736a and the displacement manner of the left and right large receiving portions 736b can be made different. I can do it. Therefore, the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 displaceably supported by the large receiving portion 736 can be made different between the member disposed in the left-right center and the member disposed on the left-right outer side.

68, FIG. 69, FIG. 70, and FIG. 71 are partial sectional views of the second operating unit 700 taken along the line LXVIII-LXVIII in FIG. 58. 68, FIG. 69, FIG. 70, and FIG. 71, the displacement of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated in chronological order, and in FIG. 68, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower terminal position (initial position). 69 shows the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in a horizontal position, FIG. 70 shows the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in an intermediate position, and FIG. 71 shows the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in a horizontal position. A state in which the displacement member 730 is in the upper end position is illustrated.

68 to 71 illustrate a cross section of the light guide member 714 at the center in the left-right direction. As described above, until the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the middle position (see FIG. 70), the front part of the inner surface of the front small receiving part 735a and the front side part of the protruding columnar part 743 do not come into contact with each other, and the hollow member 740 The displacement is mainly in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, between the halfway position and the upper end position of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the front part of the inner surface of the front small receiving part 735a and the front side part of the protruding columnar part 743 come into contact with each other, and after the contact, the hollow member 740 is pushed toward the back side as the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is displaced. In this way, a time difference can be provided between the start timing of the vertical displacement of the hollow member 740 caused by being pushed along with the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the horizontal displacement.

As shown in FIGS. 68 and 71, the effect caused by the change in the width of light refracted through the upper end portion of the light guide member 714 as the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is displaced will be described.

When the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the lower end position (initial position), the width of the light emitted from the light guide member 714 to the player side is width LH1a, whereas when the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the upper terminal position In the case of the terminal position, the width of the light emitted from the light guide member 714 to the player side changes to the width LH1b (LH1a>LH1b).

On the other hand, even if the plate-like displacement member 730 is displaced, the width of the light emitted from the light guide member 714 to the third symbol display device 81 side (back side) is maintained at the width LH2. Therefore, as the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes, the balance between the amount of light emitted from the light guide member 714 toward the player and the amount of light emitted toward the back side can be changed.

That is, by driving the drive unit 760 and changing the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the upper end position, the plate-like displacement member 730 is directed toward the player compared to the case where the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the lower end position (initial position). Since the light becomes weaker, the light guide member 714 can be viewed directly (easier to see), and in a similar comparison, the light directed toward the third symbol display device 81 becomes stronger, so the light emitted from the light guide member 714 can be easily transferred to the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, when the player is paying attention to the third symbol display device 81, the player's line of sight can be drawn toward the light guide member 714.

FIG. 72 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along the line LXXII-LXXII in FIG. 58. A gap is formed between the partition member 708 and the illumination board 705 as described above, but in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, light emitted from the light emitting means 706 leaks through this gap. It is configured to suppress this.

That is, in this embodiment, there is a slight gap between the partition member 708 and the illumination board 705, and the size of the gap is equal to the emission surface (upper end surface) of the LED constituting the light emitting means 706 of the illumination board 705. Since it is shorter than the height dimension, the light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706a can be directed toward the light guide member 714 side with almost no leakage (see the enlarged view in FIG. 72).

Further, the light emitted from each individual light emitting means 706a is emitted toward a separate light guide member 714, but when focusing on the other light guide member 714 (one individual light emitting means 706a), the light emitted from each individual light emitting means 706a is It is configured to prevent the light from flowing toward light guide members 714 other than the light guide member 714 disposed above. That is, since the light guide members 714 are separated at their base ends by the displacement regulating member 716, it is possible to prevent light from passing through the inside of the light guide member 714 and going to other light guide members 714 (Fig. 72 (See enlarged image).

Further, although the light guide members 714 are configured to be indirectly connected to each other via the thin film cover member 712, the thin film cover member 712 is configured to be thin along the optical axis direction (vertical direction) of the individual light emitting means 706a. Therefore, the light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706a can be prevented from reaching other light guide members 714.

Therefore, when performing an effect in which the color and intensity of the light emitted from each individual light emitting means 706a are different, the light reaches the other light guide members 714 and the appearance of the other light guide members 714 changes. influence can be avoided. In other words, it is possible to prevent the light guiding member 714 from emitting light unintentionally or from seeing the light emitted from the separate individual light emitting means 706a in a mixed state through the light guiding member 714. .

Note that when the light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706a leaks from the gap between the illumination board 705 and the partition member 708, the light is mixed with the light from the overall light emitting means 706b and made visible to the player. I can do it.

As described above, the second operation unit 700 can be displaced in different manners by changing the driving manners (see FIGS. 56 and 57) of the drive units 760 disposed on the left and right lower sides of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, respectively. do.

For example, when displacing the plate-shaped displacement member 730 repeatedly, as a first displacement mode, one of the drive units 760 is repeatedly operated to reciprocate the plate-shaped displacement member 730 between the lower terminal position and the intermediate position. can be done. In addition, as a second displacement mode, by maintaining one drive unit 760 in an excited state and repeatedly operating the other drive unit 760, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is moved between the intermediate position and the upper end position. It can be displaced back and forth.

Further, for example, when stopping the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in a posture different from the lower end posture (initial posture), as a first stopping mode, one drive unit 760 is maintained in an excited state, thereby causing the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to The member 730 can be stopped in an intermediate position. Furthermore, as a second stopping mode, one drive unit 760 is maintained in an excited state, and the other drive unit 760 is maintained in an excited state, thereby stopping the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the upper end position. I can do it.

In particular, in this embodiment, the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the load member 761 when only one drive unit 760 is in an excited state is not provided with a structural difference between the left and right drive units 760. The posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is adjusted under the influence of the deflection generated in the load member 761 (see FIG. 55(a)).

Therefore, in the above-mentioned first displacement mode (stop mode) or second displacement mode (stop mode), one drive unit 760 and the other drive unit 760 are fixed as either the left or right drive unit 760. Rather, they can be replaced depending on the situation.

Therefore, unlike the case where one drive unit 760 and the other drive unit 760 are fixed as either the left or right drive unit 760, the drive unit 760 that is maintained in an excited state or the drive unit 760 that is repeatedly operated is By alternately switching according to the number of operations or switching for each period, the degree of fatigue of the constituent materials of the pair of left and right drive units 760 can be matched (adjusted). Thereby, the left and right drive units 760 can be replaced at the same time, and as a result, the service life of the second operating unit 700 can be maintained for a long time.

Note that the degree of deflection that occurs in the load member 761 is only an example and can be set arbitrarily, and it is sufficient that the deflection occurs regardless of the magnitude of the deflection. That is, any configuration that can create even a slight difference in whether one or both of the drive units 760 is drive-controlled is sufficient.

The second operation unit 700 is visibly disposed at a position between the third symbol display device 81 and the first winning hole 64 from the player's perspective through a window defined by the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). ). The control mode of the second operation unit 700 can be set arbitrarily, but for example, it controls the entry of game balls into the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the specific winning hole 65a, and the control of the drive unit 760. The control mode and the control mode of the lighting state of the light emitting means 706 of the illumination board 705 may be controlled in a manner that corresponds to the control mode.

For example, as for the correspondence with the control mode of the lighting state, when a plurality of game balls enter the first prize opening 64, the individual light emitting means 706a arranged on the left side is turned on according to the number of pending balls whose fluctuation is pending. When a plurality of game balls enter the second prize opening 140, the individual light emitting means 706a arranged on the right side may be controlled to light up in accordance with the number of reserved balls that are pending fluctuation. .

In this case, the player can be configured to be able to grasp the number of reserved balls by checking the light emitting mode of the light guide member 714. Furthermore, by associating the entry of the game ball with the control mode of the drive unit 760, the player's line of sight can be focused on the light guide member second operation unit 700.

For example, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 64, while driving the drive unit 760 in the first displacement mode described above, it is more advantageous for the player than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. When a game ball enters the second winning hole 140, which is often the case, by driving and controlling the drive unit 760 in the second displacement mode described above, the game ball The player can easily understand whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140.

Further, as another example of associating the entry of game balls with the control mode of the drive unit 760, the drive unit 760 may be drive-controlled in relation to the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls. That is, for example, if a game ball enters the first winning hole 64 when the number of reserved balls in the first winning hole 64 is at the upper limit, the player will get the prize ball, but the player will not have the opportunity to change the ball. Therefore, if the number of reserved balls in the first winning hole 64 is close to the upper limit, it is desirable to notify the player of this fact.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 of the second operating unit 700 can be displaced by driving and controlling the drive unit 760, and the appearance of the second operating unit 700 can be changed. This allows it to attract the attention of players. Therefore, by controlling the drive unit 760 when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is close to the upper limit (or is at the upper limit), the player can ) can be easily noticed.

In addition, as another example of associating the entry of a game ball with the control mode of the drive unit 760 and the control mode of the lighting state of the light emitting means 706 of the illumination board 705, the entry of a game ball into the specific winning opening 65a and It is also possible to make a correspondence.

In this case, for example, it may be associated with the game ball entering the specific winning hole 65a, or the number of balls expected to enter when the specific winning hole 65a is opened (maximum count number per jackpot round). It may be associated with the fact that more game balls have entered the specific winning hole 65a (so-called over-winning).

As a result, by visually confirming the state of the second operation unit 700, it is possible to confirm that a game ball has entered the specific winning hole 65a or that a number of game balls that exceed the expected number have entered the specific winning hole 65a. The player can be made to understand this.

The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 73. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the attraction force of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 acts in the vertical direction, but in the second embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 of the window movable unit 2150 is configured so that the attraction force acts in the horizontal direction. be done. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

73(a) and 73(b) are rear views of the window movable unit 2150 in the second embodiment. FIG. 73(a) shows a state where the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is energized and an electromagnetic force is generated, and FIG. 73(b) shows a state where the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is de-energized and the electromagnetic force disappears.

The window movable unit 2150 includes a contact member 2190 that is supported coaxially with the auxiliary device 160 and is disposed so as to be able to come into contact with the driven member 163 in the rotational direction, and a biasing spring SP21 that biases the contact member 2190. Equipped with.

A weight part W21 for adjusting the center of gravity position is formed at the upper end of the arm part 163c of the driven member 163, and the driven member 163 is configured to rotate due to its own weight when the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is in a non-excited state. (See FIG. 73(b)).

The contact member 2190 includes a cushion portion 175a disposed so as to be able to come into contact with the driven member 163, and a rotating member 2191 that supports the cushion portion 175a.

The rotating member 2191 is arranged to face the urging spring SP21, and the urging force of the urging spring SP21 is generated in a direction that pushes the rotating member 2191 back toward the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1.

The displacement mode of the driven member 163 and the rotating member 2191 will be explained. In the excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, the driven member 163 is maintained in a state of being attracted to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 by electromagnetic force.

On the other hand, in the non-energized state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, the driven member 163 rotates due to its own weight, and through the state shown in FIG. Rotate and displace. That is, until the state shown in FIG. 73(b), the driven member 163 is displaced alone, and from the state shown in FIG. 73(b), the driven member 163 and the rotating member 2191 are integrally displaced. That is, the displacement speed of the driven member 163 can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 73(b).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 73(b), the driven member 163 can be vibrated and displaced by the varying urging force. Thereby, variations in displacement of the driven member 163 can be increased.

A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 78. In the first embodiment, the case where the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced in conjunction with the rotational displacement of the arm member 414 has been described, but in the first operation unit 3400 of the third embodiment, the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced at a constant speed. A transmission means 3410 (for example, a transmission mechanism using a rack and pinion (not shown)) is provided to transmit the driving force so as to perform the driving force. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

74 to 77 are front views of the first operating unit 3400 in the third embodiment. 74 to 77, the downward displacement of the elevating plate 430 is illustrated in chronological order.

78(a) to 78(c) are schematic diagrams schematically illustrating the displacement relationship of the first operating unit 3400. 78(a) to 78(c), the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is shown on the horizontal axis, and in FIG. 78(a), the downward displacement amount of the elevating plate 430 is shown on the vertical axis. In b), the amount of rotation (angle change) of the auxiliary arm member 444 is shown on the vertical axis, and in FIG. 78(c), the amount of displacement of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 is shown on the vertical axis. .

In the first operating unit 3400, a long hole 3406 having an L-shape (a shape formed by integrating rectangles whose long sides are perpendicular to each other) is formed through the main body plate portion 401. The elongated hole portion 3406 is formed to have a size that allows the cylindrical portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 to be displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions.

In FIG. 74, the cylindrical portion 444d is disposed at the upper end position of the vertically long opening of the elongated hole portion 3406, and the displacement up to FIG. 75 causes the vertically long opening to be downwardly displaced. do. That is, in the displacement from FIG. 74 to FIG. 75, the lateral position of the cylindrical portion 444d has not changed, so no rotation occurs in the auxiliary arm member 444.

On the other hand, in FIGS. 75 to 77, the auxiliary arm member 444 is rotationally displaced in conjunction with the downward displacement of the elevating plate 430. That is, according to the present embodiment, there is a section in which the auxiliary arm member 444 is rotationally displaced as the elevating plate 430 is displaced in the vertical direction, and a section in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even if the elevating plate 430 is displaced in the vertical direction. can be configured.

By configuring a section in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even if the elevating plate 430 is displaced in the vertical direction, transmission of the driving force to the downstream side with respect to the auxiliary arm member 444 is cut off. This role is similar to that of the vertical portion 491a of the fixed transmission plate 490 described in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35). According to this embodiment, since the vertical portion 491a can be omitted from the fixed transmission plate 490, the vertical dimension of the fixed transmission plate 490 can be reduced (improving the degree of freedom in designing the fixed transmission plate 490). be able to).

Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the fixed transmission plate 490 can be improved while maintaining the effect of being able to shift the timing of the operation of the elevating plate 430 and the wing-like member 460.

In this embodiment, the transmission means 3410 makes it easy to vertically displace the elevating plate 430 in a uniform linear motion (see FIG. 78(a)). If the configuration of the operating unit 440 is used as is, the speed of rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 changes significantly during the displacement.

To be more specific, the angular velocity of the rotational displacement of the first operating unit 4300 near the second intermediate state is lower than the angular velocity of the rotational displacement near the retracted state or extended state of the first operating unit 3400. (The amount of angular change with respect to the amount of displacement of the base end side portion 444a becomes smaller).

Therefore, it becomes impossible to displace the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 at a substantially constant speed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as a substitute for the lower left rotary gear 441, a gear having the same gear ratio as the arcuate gear portion 444d is provided, which meshes with the upper right rotary gear 441 and is connected to the relative displacement member 442. A rotary gear 3441 with an arm is provided with an extending portion. Thereby, the change in the angular velocity of the auxiliary arm member 444 can be partially offset, and the difference in the displacement mode between the elevating plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 can be eliminated.

That is, instead of the configuration of the first embodiment in which the relative displacement member 442 is vertically displaced in accordance with (proportional to) the amount of angular change with respect to the amount of vertical displacement of the base end side portion 444a, the amount of vertical displacement of the base end side portion 444a is changed. By converting the amount of angular change to the amount of vertical displacement of the arm tip of the arm-equipped rotary gear 3441 again, and vertically displacing the relative displacement member 442 in accordance with the amount of vertical displacement of the arm tip. , it is possible to partially eliminate (cancel out) the difference in displacement mode between the elevating plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442.

Therefore, the displacement mode of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 can be made similar to the displacement mode of the elevating plate 430.

In this embodiment, the electrical wiring DH1 may be configured to pass through the rotation axis of the arm-equipped rotation gear 3441 and be guided by the relative displacement member 442. That is, by continuously forming the path of the electrical wiring DH1 in the order of the auxiliary arm member 444, the lifting plate 430, the rotary gear with arm 3441, and the relative displacement member 442, the electrical wiring DH1 can be routed in the order of the auxiliary arm member 444, the lifting plate 430, the rotary gear with arm 3441, and the relative displacement member 442. It is possible to avoid large fluctuations in the path length of DH1.

In this case, since the electrical wiring DH1 can be easily connected to the decoration part 493, it is possible to arrange an illumination board in the decoration part 493 and easily perform a light emitting effect using a light emitting means such as an LED. I can do it.

The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a detection sensor for detecting the state of the second operating unit 700 is not arranged, but the second operating unit 4700 of the fourth embodiment detects the state of the drive unit 4760. It is equipped with a detection device 4780 for detecting. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

79(a) and 79(b) are front views of the drive unit 4760 of the second operation unit 4700 in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 79(a) and 79(b), illustrations of the front lid member 770 and the illumination board 777 are omitted except for the curved protrusion 774, and the outer shape of the curved protrusion 774 is shown by imaginary lines. Illustrated.

Further, FIG. 79(a) shows a state in which no current is flowing through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the load member 4761 is placed in the lowered position due to its own weight, and FIG. 79(b) shows a state in which no current is flowing through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. A state in which the metal plate member MB2 is attracted by the electromagnetic force generated by the flow and the load member 4761 is placed in the raised position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 79(a) and 79(b), the load member 4761 comes into contact with the lower regulating part 764 in the lowered position and is regulated from downward displacement, and in the raised position it contacts the upper regulating part 765. Rising displacement is regulated.

As a comparison with the load member 761 described in the first embodiment, the load member 4761 has other features except that the overhang portion 761d is changed to a thick overhang portion 4761f and a thin overhang portion 4761g. The configuration is the same.

The thick protruding portion 4761f is a portion that protrudes from the extending tip of the rod-like extending portion 761b along the extending direction of the rod-like extending portion 761b with the same wall thickness (front-rear width) as the rod-like extending portion 761b. The load member 4761 comes into contact with the upper regulating portion 765 in the process of being placed in the raised position, and corresponds to a stop portion that receives a load.

The thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g has a thinner plate shape (shorter longitudinal width) than the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f from the overhanging tip of the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f, and overhangs along the extending direction of the rod-like extension portion 761b. It is a part. The upper and lower surfaces of the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) and the upper and lower surfaces (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) of the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f are formed flush with each other.

The thin-walled projecting portion 4761g is configured to abut against the upper regulating portion 765 in the same way as the thick-walled projecting portion 4761f during the process in which the load member 4761 is placed in the raised position. Since it is thin and thin, it is damaged preferentially compared to the thick protruding portion 4761f due to accumulation of fatigue due to repeated excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

From this point of view, the upper and lower surfaces of the thin overhanging portion 4761g (the upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) and the upper and lower surfaces of the thick overhanging portion 4761f (the upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) are They do not need to be formed flush; it is sufficient that at least the upper surface is flush, and the position of the lower surface can be set arbitrarily. For example, by making the vertical width of the thin-walled overhang 4761g shorter than the vertical width of the thick-walled overhang 4761f, the number of repeated excitations of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 before the thin-walled overhang 4761g is damaged can be reduced. It is possible to adjust the period until the thin overhanging portion 4761g is damaged.

The drive unit 4760 includes a detection device 4780. The detection device 4780 includes a printed circuit board 4781 fixed to the lower part of the support case 763, and a detection sensor 4782 arranged on the printed circuit board 4781 so that a thin protrusion 4761g can be inserted into and removed from a detection groove.

The detection sensor 4782 is a photocoupler type detection device, and when the load member 4761 is in the lowered position, the thin wall protrusion 4761g blocks the detection light (see FIG. 79(a)), and when the load member 4761 is in the upper position, the thin wall protrusion 4761g blocks the detection light. The projecting portion 4761g is arranged above so as not to block the detection light (see FIG. 79(b)).

The function of the detection sensor 4782 will be explained. Since the detection result of the detection sensor 4782 and the position of the load member 4761 usually correspond, it is possible to confirm whether the load member 4761 is operating appropriately based on the detection result of the detection sensor 4782. The MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) performs this confirmation, and if it is determined that there is a malfunction, it generates an alarm or displays an error message on the display device, so that the malfunction of the second operation unit 4700 can be detected by the player or the user. This can make it easier for the hall clerk to notice.

In addition, if the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g is damaged (broken) and falls, the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g and the load member 4761 will no longer operate synchronously, so that changes in the position of the load member 4761 and detection by the detection sensor 4782 The results no longer correspond. When the position change of the load member 4761 and the detection result of the detection sensor 4782 no longer correspond, the thin wall overhang can be prevented by generating an alarm in the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) or displaying an error message on the display device. It is possible to make it easier for players and hall staff to notice that the portion 4761g has been damaged (broken).

In this way, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 4782 can be used both as a position detection means for detecting the position of the load member 4761 and as a damage detection means for detecting damage (breakage) of the load member 4761. .

According to this embodiment, even if the thin-walled projecting portion 4761g is damaged, the load member 4761 can be stopped at the raised position by the thick-walled projecting portion 4761f coming into contact with the upper regulating portion 765. Therefore, the load member 4761 can be displaced in the same manner as before the thin-walled protruding portion 4761g was damaged. Therefore, even if the thin-walled protruding portion 4761g is damaged, it is not necessary to immediately stop the game and enter a maintenance state, and the game can be continued for a while, thereby preventing unexpected disadvantages to the player. can be avoided.

In this way, by providing a portion that is preferentially damaged (broken) among the portions that come into contact with the upper regulating portion 765 and detecting the breakage (breakage) with the detection sensor 4782, the thick protruding portion 4761f is damaged. The load member can be replaced before fatigue accumulates to the point of (rupture).

The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c bends and deforms in relation to the rigidity of itself, but the second operation unit 5700 of the fifth embodiment applies a load to the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c. A deflection adjustment device 5780 is provided to adjust deflection deformation. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

80(a) and 80(b) are cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 5700 of the fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the LVa-LVa line in FIG. 53. The deflection adjustment device 5780 includes a box-shaped base member 5781 in which a metal coil is built-in, and an iron bar that is supported by the base member 5781 so as to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction, and is arranged to protrude above the base member 5781. adjustment member 5782.

As shown in FIG. 80(b), even if the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 are in the unilaterally excited state, the deflection adjustment device 5780 is driven, so that the deflection deformation of the load member 761 is small (the deflection deformation is approximately half). state). In other words, the deflection adjustment device 5780 is adopted as an alternative to the configuration in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is changed to the upper end position by energizing the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (both left and right) in the first embodiment. ing.

That is, while the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is kept in the energized state on one side (see FIG. 80(a)), a metal coil (not shown) built in the base member 5781 of the deflection adjustment device 5780 moves around the adjustment member 5782. By energizing the metal coil in the coiled state to form an electromagnet and driving the adjustment member 5782 upward, the load in the direction of returning (recovering) the deflection of the vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c is applied. It can be provided to the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c (see FIG. 80(b)).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by cooperatively driving the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 on either the left or right side of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the adjustment device 5780 disposed on the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 side, the plate-shaped It becomes possible to maintain the displacement member 730 in the lower end position (initial position), the intermediate position, and the upper end position.

As a result, the arrangement of the driving means can be more rigid than in the case where the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 needs to be arranged as a pair of left and right. For example, since the arrangement of the electrical wiring connected to each device of the driving means can be fixed, it is possible to avoid dispersing the area required as a route for the wiring to various locations (for example, left and right).

Next, the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 81 to 121. In the sixth embodiment, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the specific winning hole 65a are formed in a winning hole unit 930 configured as one unit. The same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the following, similarly to the first embodiment, the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is taken as the gravitational direction, and the left and right rear of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 10 will be described as the front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 as the back side (or rear side).

First, with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82, the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 disposed on the base plate of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 82, illustration of units (for example, center frame 86 (refer FIG. 81) etc.) other than the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arrange|positioned on the base board 60 is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 82, the base plate 60 has a through hole 60a extending in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 at the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 82) of the central opening where the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81) is attached. is formed by router processing.

The through hole 60a is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940, which will be described later, when viewed from the front, and a drive unit 960 and a specific winning a prize unit 950 arranged in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

On the base plate 60, a winning opening unit 930 is arranged from the gaming area (front) side, and a ball throwing unit 970 is arranged from the opposite (back) side from the gaming area, and each is fastened and fixed with a tapping screw or the like. In addition, the detailed structure of the prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described later.

Next, the overall configuration of the winning a prize opening unit 930 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 83 to 86. FIG. 83(a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 83(b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 84(a) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 84(b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930.

As shown in FIGS. 83 to 86, the winning opening unit 930 includes a front unit 940, a specific winning opening unit 950 disposed on the back side of the front unit 940 (front of the page in FIG. 83(b)), and Mainly includes a drive unit 960 disposed on the back side (front side of the paper in FIG. 83(b)) of the specific winning a prize unit 950, and a displacement member 966 disposed between the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940. Formed in preparation for.

As described above, the front unit 940 has an outer shape larger than the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 when viewed from the front. Therefore, by arranging the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) on the base plate 60, the opening of the through hole 60a can be closed. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can pass through a path other than the game ball passing path (the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the specific winning hole 65a) formed in the front unit 940, which will be described later. Passing through the through hole 60a from the space can be suppressed.

Part of the specific winning opening unit 950 is inserted inside the specific winning opening 65a formed in the front unit 940, and the game ball can be thrown inside the specific winning opening unit 950 through the specific winning opening 65a. be done. In addition, detailed explanation about the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 will be mentioned later.

The drive unit 960 is arranged on the back side of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, and a part of it (insertion part 965e of the transmission member 965) is connected to the wing member 945 arranged in the front unit via the displacement member 966. Concatenated. Thereby, the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 can be operated to rotationally displace the wing member 945. Note that a detailed explanation of the operation of the wing member 945 will be given later.

Next, the front unit 940 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. 87(a) is a front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 87(b) is a rear view of the front unit 940. 88 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit 940. Note that in FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b), the outer shape of the wing member 945 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the front unit 940 includes a back base 941 fastened to the base plate 60, and a front base 943 disposed on the back base 941 at a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. and two (a pair) wing members 945 rotatably disposed between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other.

The rear base 941 has an approximately T-shape with an upside-down outer shape when viewed from the front, and is formed from a plate-shaped body having a predetermined thickness. In addition, the back base 941 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and when the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) is disposed on the base plate 60, the base plate 60 is penetrated through the back base 941. The inside of the hole 60a can be visually recognized.

The back base 941 has a first out port 71 cut out on the downstream side of the game ball (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 87(b)), and an upper side of the first out port 71 (see FIG. 87(b)). b) A specific winning opening 65a which is located in the upper part and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and a second winning opening 140 which is formed through and passing above the specific winning opening 65a, which is opposite to the first out opening 71. It mainly includes a first prize opening 64 formed with a notch on the side edge.

Further, the back base 941 includes a plurality of through holes 941a that penetrate in the thickness direction at the outer edge. The through-hole 941a has a first through-hole 941a1 whose diameter decreases from the front side (the front side in FIG. 87(a) on the paper) toward the back side (the front side on the paper in FIG. 87(b)), and a first through-hole 941a1 that decreases in diameter from the back side toward the front side. The second through hole 941a2 is formed by a second through hole 941a2 whose diameter is reduced.

The first through hole 941a1 is a hole through which a tapping screw for fastening and fixing the back base 941 (winning port unit 930) to the base plate 60 is inserted, and the inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the threaded part of the tapping screw. be done. Further, as described above, the first through hole 941a1 is formed so as to decrease in diameter from the front side toward the back side, so that the head of the tapping screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the head of the tapping screw from protruding into the game area. Furthermore, a positioning protrusion 942a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the back surface of the back base 941 is formed near the first through hole 941a1.

The positioning protrusion 942a is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 60b (see FIG. 82) formed around the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and has an outer diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the positioning hole 60b. Ru. Thereby, the back base 941 (winning a prize opening unit 930) can be positioned and disposed with respect to the base plate 60.

The second through hole 941a2 is a hole through which a screw for fastening the back base 941 and the front base 943 is inserted from the back base 941 side, and the inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the threaded portion of the screw. That is, the front base 943 is fastened to the rear base 941 from the rear side with screws. In this case, when removing the front base 943 from the back base 941, it is necessary to remove the winning opening unit 930 from the base plate 60. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from fraudulently removing only the front base 943 from the front side (playing area side) of the game board 13.

Further, as described above, the second through hole 941a2 is formed so as to decrease in diameter from the back side toward the front side, so that the head of the screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the back side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heads of the screws from protruding toward the back side of the back base 941. As a result, when the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 described later is arranged on the back side of the back base 941, it is possible to suppress the head of the screw from coming into contact with the specific winning a prize opening unit 950.

The outer shape of the lower end in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87(b)) of the back base 941 is formed along the inner edge of the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 81) of the game board 13. The first out port 71 is formed in such a size that the edge of the bottom of the notch (the upper edge in the direction of gravity) is spaced apart from the inner edge of the inner rail 61 by at least the diameter of the game ball. As a result, among the game balls flowing down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 (base board 60), the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, the specific winning hole 65a, and the general winning hole 63() are Game balls that have not flown into either can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 (the side opposite to the game area (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)) through the first out port 71.

The first winning opening 64 is formed by cutting out the end of the upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 87(b)) opposite to the first out opening 71 in a semicircular shape. Further, the first prize opening 64 is formed to have an inner edge larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving part 941g, which will be described later, can be sent to the back side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)) via the first prize opening 64.

At the edge of the first winning a prize opening 64, there is a first receiving part 941g formed in a cup shape and protruding toward the gaming area side (the front side in FIG. 87(a)), and a first receiving part 941g on the side opposite to the gaming area (see FIG. b) A first ball throwing portion 942g projecting in a U-shaped cross section is formed on the front side in the drawing.

The first receiving portion 941g is formed in a size that can receive one game ball inside. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area from the upper side of the first receiving part 941g (first winning opening 64) in the direction of gravity can be made to flow into the inside of the first receiving part 941g.

Further, the first receiving portion 941g is formed such that the bottom surface thereof is inclined downward toward the back side (the side opposite to the gaming area (the front side in FIG. 87(b))). Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the first receiving part 941g can be thrown to the back side (first ball throwing part 942g side) through the first prize opening 64.

Furthermore, the first receiving portion 941g extends from the upper end of both ends of the base plate 60 in the transverse direction (left-right direction in FIG. 87) toward the second winning opening side (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 87(a))). The base plate 60 is provided with a guide portion 941g1 that is inclined and erected outward in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. The guide portion 941g1 is formed into a plate-shaped body having a predetermined thickness, and the side surface opposite to the gaming area (back side) is connected to the front side of the back base 941. Thereby, the rigidity of the first receiving part 941g can be increased, and it is possible to suppress damage to the first receiving part 941g due to the game ball flowing down the downstream area colliding with the first receiving part 941g.

In addition, if the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the specific winning hole 65 are integrally formed on the back base 941, there will be insufficient placement of game nails that change the game balls flowing down the game area. It becomes difficult to change the direction of flow. Therefore, where there is a risk that the player's interest may be lost, by causing the game ball to collide with the guide portion 941g1, it is possible to change the flowing direction of the game ball, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being lost. .

Furthermore, since the guide part 941g1 is formed to be inclined outward in the lateral direction of the base plate 60 (both sides in the left-right direction in FIG. 87(a)) toward the second winning opening 140 side, the game that collides with the guide part 941g1 The ball can be guided to the outside of the rear base 941 in the horizontal direction. Thereby, the game ball can collide again with a game nail (not shown) arranged on the base plate 60, and it is possible to easily change the direction of the game ball flowing down. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

The first ball throwing portion 942g is formed in a U-shape with an open upper side in the direction of gravity, and the distance between opposing inner edges thereof is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first ball throwing section 942g is formed such that the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the back side (the side opposite to the gaming area (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)), and the protruding tip side is formed by a ball throwing unit, which will be described later. It abuts against the edge of the inlet 982d of 970. Thereby, the game ball thrown from the inside of the first receiving part 941g to the first ball throwing part 942g via the first prize opening 64 can be rolled to the back side and thrown to the ball throwing unit 970.

The first ball throwing portion 942g includes a first recessed cutout portion 942g1 in which the upper end of the protruding tip is cut out in a rectangular shape when viewed from the side. The first recessed cutout 942g1 is a notch on which a second protrusion 982d1 of a ball throwing unit 970, which will be described later, is placed, and is recessed to have substantially the same size as the side view shape of the second protrusion 982d1. Note that a detailed explanation of the arrangement of the first ball throwing section 942g and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described later.

The second winning hole 140 is formed through the hole in a substantially D-shape with an upward curve when viewed from the front, and has an inner edge larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, a game ball thrown between the opposing wing members 945, which will be described later, can be thrown to the back side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)) via the second prize opening 140.

The second winning opening 140 has a front side wall part 941b that protrudes toward the front side (game area side (front side of the paper in FIG. 87(a))) and a back side (opposite side to the game area (FIG. 87(a))). (b) A second ball throwing portion 942c that protrudes toward the front side)) is formed.

The front side wall portion 941b is formed along both side edges of the second winning opening in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. The front side wall portion 941b is set to a size such that its protruding tip surface comes into contact with a ball throwing guide portion 943d of the front base 943, which will be described later.

The second ball throwing portion 942c is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the back, and is formed at each of both ends of the lower edge of the second winning opening 140. The second ball throwing portion 942c is set to have a dimension larger in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 87(b)) than the radius of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the rolling part 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later, can be prevented from falling from the upper surface of the rolling part 943a.

The pair of second ball throwing parts 942c are arranged such that the distance between the opposing sides in the lateral direction of the base plate 60 (the left-right direction in FIG. 87(b)) is the width direction of the base plate 60 of the rolling part 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later. The length is set to be approximately the same as the length in the left-right direction (FIG. 87(b)), and a rolling portion 943a is disposed inside. Further, in the second ball throwing portion 942c, a second recessed cutout portion 942c1 is cut out on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 87(b)) of the protruding tip portion. The second recessed notch 942c1 is a portion on which a projection 981b1 of a passage unit, which will be described later, is placed, and its detailed description will be described later.

The back base 941 extends from the gaming area side of the back base 941 toward the other side in the gravity direction near the second winning opening 140 (first winning opening 64 side (upper side in FIG. 87(b))), and from the gaming area side of the back base 941 to the side opposite to the gaming area. a first shaft hole 941d recessed in two places in a circular shape, two first openings 941e curved around the axis of the first shaft hole 941d and penetrating through the back base 941; A first guide wall 942b located on the outside in the opposing direction of the two first openings 941e and protruding from the back side, and a protruding part 941c protruding between the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140. It is formed with the following.

The first shaft hole 941d is capable of supporting a shaft member 945a that pivotally supports a wing member 945, which will be described later, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as an outer diameter of the shaft member 945a. Thereby, one end of the shaft member 945a can be inserted into the first shaft hole 941d and supported.

The first opening 941e has an arc shape with the center of the first shaft hole 941d as its axis. Further, the first opening 941e allows the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 to be inserted therethrough, and is set larger than the maximum width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. This can prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with the inner surface of the first opening 941e when the wing member 945 rotates.

The protruding portion 941c has an isosceles triangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and the corner of the isosceles connecting portion is located on substantially the same plane as the center position between opposing wing members 945, which will be described later. Further, the scalene side of the protruding portion 941c is formed to extend parallel to the facing direction of the wing member 945, and its length is set to be slightly larger than the dimension between the opposing wings of the wing member 945 in the closed state. Ru. Further, the protruding portion 941c is formed at a position where the shortest distance from the feather member 945 in the closed state is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being thrown into the second winning a prize opening 140 (between the pair of wing members 945 facing each other). Note that a detailed explanation of the closed state of the wing member 945 will be given later.

The pair of first guide walls 942b are walls that guide the displacement of the displacement member 966 when the displacement member 966, which will be described later, is displaced. 966 is set to be slightly larger than the distance dimension in the short direction.

Further, the pair of first guide walls 942b are formed into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the rear, and extend in a direction in which bent portions approach each other. Thereby, the protruding portion 966a of the displacement member 966 can be brought into contact with the bent portion of the first guide wall 942b, and the displacement distance of the displacement member 966 can be regulated.

The specific winning opening 65a is formed into a long rectangular opening in the direction in which the pair of feather members 945 face each other (left and right direction in FIG. 87(b)), and a plate member 951 of the specific winning opening unit 950, which will be described later, is placed inside the opening. can be inserted. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area can be sent into the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 via the specific winning a prize opening 65a.

In addition, the back base 941 includes an upright portion 942f that surrounds the specific winning opening 65a and is erected on the back side (on the opposite side to the gaming area), and a recessed part from the back side at both longitudinal ends of the specific winning opening 65a. A recessed portion 941h is provided.

The shape of the inner edge of the upright portion 942f is set to be substantially the same as the front view shape of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, which will be described later. Thereby, the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 can be easily positioned and arranged inside the upright portion 942f.

The concave portion 941h is located at a position corresponding to the wall portion 953d into which the rod member 952 that becomes the rotation axis of the plate member 951 of the specific winning a prize port unit 950 is inserted when the specific winning a prize port unit 950 is disposed on the back base 941. It is formed. Thereby, when the rod member 952 is displaced in the direction of coming out of the plate member 951, the end surface of the rod member 952 can be brought into contact with the inner edge of the recess 941h, and the rod member 952 can be prevented from coming out of the plate member 951.

Further, the front base 942 has a bulging portion 942h that bulges out between the facing portion 942f and the second ball throwing portion 942c, and a bulging portion 942h that bulges out between the facing portion 942f and the second ball throwing portion 942c, and a side of the first guide wall 942b from the outer circumferential surface of the standing portion 942f (Fig. 87(b) ) a second guide wall 942d protruding upward).

The bulging portion 942h bulges toward the back side of the back base 941 and is connected to the upright portion 942f and the second ball throwing portion 942c. As a result, when a displacement member 966 (see FIG. 90), which will be described later, is arranged on the back side of the back base 941 (on the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)), there is a gap between the displacement member 966 and the back of the back base 941 A predetermined gap can be formed. As a result, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the friction (sliding) resistance of the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

The second guide wall 942d is a wall surface that guides the displacement of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966, and the distance between the pair of opposing second guide walls 942d is slightly larger than the distance in the width direction of the displacement member 966. Set. Therefore, when the displacement member 966 is disposed between the pair of second guide walls 942d facing each other, the displacement distance of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction can be restricted.

The back base 941 has a half-shaped structure attached to the edge of the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) at both longitudinal ends (left and right direction in FIG. 87(b)) of the specific winning opening 65a toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). A second outlet 941f formed by cutting out a circular shape is provided. The second out port 941f is a notch for throwing the game ball that has entered the third receiving part 944a formed in the front base 943 to the back side of the base plate 60 (the side opposite to the game area), formed into a shape larger than the diameter of the

Further, a third ball throwing portion 942e that is formed in a substantially U-shape when viewed from the rear and protrudes toward the rear side is formed at the edge of the second out port 941f. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the back side through the inside of the second out port 941f can be thrown to the inside of the third ball throwing section 942e.

The third ball throwing part 942e is formed so that the curved part (lower part) of a U-shape in rear view is inclined downward in the direction of gravity as it protrudes to the back side, and the third ball throwing part 942e is formed to be inclined downward in the direction of gravity as the curved part (lower part) of the U-shape in rear view protrudes to the back side. can be rolled to the back side. A detailed explanation of the game ball rolling on the inner surface of the third ball throwing section 942e will be given later.

The front base 943 is formed into an upside-down substantially T-shape whose outer shape in front view is smaller than that of the back base. Further, the front base 943 is formed from a colorless and transparent plate-shaped body. This allows the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the opposing front base 943 and back base 941.

The front base 943 mainly includes a second receiving part 943c and a third receiving part 944a protrudingly provided at positions corresponding to the second winning opening 140 and the second out opening 941f of the above-mentioned back base 941. It is formed.

The second receiving portion 943c is formed into a substantially U-shape when viewed from the back, and the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 is arranged inside when viewed from the front. Furthermore, a pair of wing members 945, which will be described later, are provided on the open side of the second receiving portion 943c (the open side of the U-shape). Furthermore, the protrusion distance of the second receiving portion 943c toward the rear base 941 side is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to throw a game ball between the opposing sides of the back base 941 and the front base 943, and the game ball is suppressed from flowing into the second prize opening 140 from the outside between the opposing sides of a pair of wing members 945, which will be described later. can.

The second receiving portion 943c also includes a ball throwing guide portion 943d protruding inward from its inner edge, and a first recessed portion recessed in a circular shape from the rear base 941 side (the front side in FIG. 87(b)). 943ca, and a rolling portion 943a that protrudes from the inside of the curved portion toward the back base.

A pair of ball throwing guide portions 943d are formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the pair of wing members 945 (lower side in FIG. 87(b)). Further, the pair of ball throwing guide portions 943d are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the front side wall portions 941b of the back base 941, and when the back base 941 and the front base 943 are combined, their end surfaces come into contact with each other. . As a result, the game ball that has flowed between the pair of opposing wing members 945 can be thrown between the opposing ball throwing guide portions 943d.

The rolling portion 943a is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) between the pair of opposing ball throwing guide portions 943d, and an end surface 943a1 on the upper side in the gravity direction is inclined downward toward the rear base 941 side. It is formed. Further, as described above, the rolling portion 943a is disposed inside the recess 941j in a state where the back base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (combined), and the tip thereof is located on the back surface of the back base 941. side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)).

As a result, the game ball thrown between the pair of opposing ball throwing guide parts 943d can be thrown to the end face 943a1 of the rolling part, and the game ball can be rolled on the upper part of the end face 943a1 to the back side of the back base 941. He can throw the ball to.

Further, the front base 943 includes an annular protrusion 943b that protrudes in an annular shape at a position facing the first shaft hole 941d of the back base 941 on the opening side (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the second receiving portion 943c. The annular projection 943b has a second shaft hole 943b1 at its inner edge, into which the other end of a shaft member 945a that pivotally supports a wing member 945, which will be described later, can be inserted. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the first shaft hole 941d of the back base 941. Therefore, the shaft member 945a can be held and supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943, which face each other.

The third receiving portion 944a has a substantially U-shape when viewed from the rear, and the second outlet 941f of the rear base 941 is disposed inside the third receiving portion 944a. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be made to flow into the inside of the third receiving part 944a, and the game balls that have flowed into the third receiving part 944a can be passed through the second outlet 941f to the rear surface. You can throw the ball to the side (opposite the playing area).

Further, in the second receiving part 943c and the third receiving part 944a, a first recessed part 943ca and a second recessed part 944a1 are recessed in a circular shape from the back base 941 side (the near side in the paper surface of FIG. 87(b)). The first recess 943ca and the second recess 944a1 are fastened parts into which the screw inserted into the second through hole 941a2 described above is screwed, and are formed coaxially with the axis of the second through hole 941a2 of the back base 941. be done. Thereby, the back base 941 and the front base 943 can be fastened together.

A pair of feather members 945 are arranged with the second prize opening 140 formed in the back base 941 sandwiched therebetween when viewed from the front. The wing member 945 is made of a colored translucent material and is visible to the player through the front base 943.

The wing member 945 is formed into a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a thickness smaller than that between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. The wing member 945 mainly includes an insertion hole 945c formed through the thickness direction (from the back base 941 side to the front base 943 side) and a protrusion 945b protruding from the surface (back surface) on the back base 941 side.

The insertion hole 945c is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. Therefore, when fastening (assembling) the back base 941 and the front base 943, by inserting the shaft member 945a into the insertion hole 945c, the back base 941 and the front base 943 can be connected to each other while the wing member 945 is rotatable. Can be placed between opposite sides. Thereby, the wing member 945 can be displaced between a closed state in which the opposing side surfaces are parallel to the direction of gravity, and an open state in which one side of the side surfaces is displaced outward in the opposing direction.

The protrusion 945b is connected to a displacement member 966, which will be described later, and is a transmission part that transmits the drive of the drive unit 960 to the wing member 945, and the distal end thereof is connected to the displacement member 966 through the first opening 941e of the back base 941. The dimensions are set such that it protrudes toward the back side of the back base 941 (the side opposite to the gaming area). Note that a detailed explanation of the connection state between the protrusion 945b and the displacement member 966 will be given later.

Next, the displacement member 966 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 90. 90(a) is a front view of the displacement member 966, FIG. 90(b) is a side view of the displacement member 966, and FIG. 90(c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 966 is formed from a plate-shaped body having a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c formed therethrough in the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 90(b)) at a substantially central position when viewed from the front. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c when viewed from the front is larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above, and the second winning opening 140 is arranged inside. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area via the second winning opening 140 can be suppressed from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 966 has a protruding portion 966a that protrudes from one end side (upper side in FIG. 90(a)) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 90(a)) in the lateral direction (left-right direction in FIG. 90(a)), and It has a bulging portion 966b that bulges from the end side (lower side in FIG. 90(b)) to the back side (back side base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The protruding portion 966a includes a sliding groove 966a2 formed to penetrate the displacement member 966 in the thickness direction, and a contact portion 966a1 located on both outer sides of the displacement member 966 in the transverse direction and extending in the longitudinal direction. Equipped with

The sliding groove 966a2 is an elongated hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 described above is inserted, and is formed as an elongated hole that is long in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. Further, the width of the sliding groove 966a2 is set to be larger than the width of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. Thereby, when the wing member 945 rotates, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with both widthwise opposing inner surfaces of the sliding groove 966a2 and restricting the operation of the wing member 945.

The contact portion 966a1 is formed to bulge out on the front side (front base 943 side (see FIG. 85)) and the back side (back base 941 side). Thereby, the area in which the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the front base 943 and the drive unit 960, which will be described later, can be reduced. As a result, the resistance when the displacement member 966 is driven can be reduced.

The bulging portion 966b is formed to bulge toward the back side (back side base 941 side), and a horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 966b1 is formed in the inner portion when viewed from the back. The connection hole 966b1 is an opening into which a tip (insertion portion 965e) of a transmission member 965 of a drive unit 960 described later is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965. Note that a detailed explanation of the connection state between the connection hole 966b1 and the transmission member 965 will be given later.

The connecting hole 966b1 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the transverse direction of the displacement member 966, and is connected to one side abutted portion 966b2 of the inner circumferential surface on the other side in the gravity direction (the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 90(a))). , and a contact portion 966b3 on the other side of the inner circumferential surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 90(a))).

The one-side abutted portion 966b2 is a surface that is abutted by a bulging portion 965e1 of an insertion portion 965e of a transmission member 965, which will be described later. The displacement member 966 can displace the wing member 945 to the open state (see FIG. 92) by slidingly displacing the bulging portion 965e1 in contact with the one side abutted portion 966b2.

The other side abutted portion 966b3 is a surface that is abutted by a side surface opposite to a bulged portion 965e1 of an insertion portion 965e of a transmission member 965, which will be described later. The displacement member 966 can displace the wing member 945 to the closed state (see FIG. 91) by being slid and displaced by the side surface opposite to the bulging portion 965e1 being brought into contact with the other side abutted portion 966b3. I can do it.

Next, the connection state between the displacement member 966 and the wing member 945 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. 91 and 92 are rear views of the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the displacement member 966 in the range XCI of FIG. 87(b). In addition, in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, the outer shape of the wing member 945 is illustrated by a chain line. Further, FIG. 91 shows the wing member 945 in a closed state, and FIG. 92 shows the wing member 945 in an open state.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in rear view, and the first protrusion 945b is formed parallel to the opposing surfaces of the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state. Mainly includes a surface 945b1, a third surface 945b3 that is connected to the first surface 945b1 and located on one side in the gravity direction (specific winning opening 65a side), and a second surface 945b2 that is connected to the first surface 945b1 and the third surface 945b3. Prepare for.

The sliding groove 966a2 has a lower inner surface 966a4 located on one side in the direction of gravity (the side of the connecting hole 966b1) and abuts against the protrusion 945b to displace the wing member 945 to the open state, and a lower inner surface 966a4 that faces the lower inner surface 966a4 and has a protrusion. 945b to displace the wing member 945 to the closed state, and an inner surface in the transverse direction of the displacement member 966 from the outer side in the transverse direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 91) toward the lower inner surface 966a4 side of the displacement member 966. and an inclined surface 966a5 that is inclined to.

Note that the displacement member 966 is disposed so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 91) with respect to the back base 941 by a transmission member 965, which will be described later. The feather member 945 is closed when the displacement member 966 is displaced toward the specific winning opening 65a side (lower side in FIG. 91), and when the displacement member 966 is displaced toward the second winning opening 140 side (upper side in FIG. 91). It is assumed to be in an open state.

Next, the connection between the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 and the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 will be explained. As described above, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is arranged inside the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the protrusion 945b is arranged on the inclined surface 966a5 side of the sliding groove 966a2 (on the outside in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966). From this state, when the displacement member 966 is displaced to the second winning opening 140 side (the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 91)), the lower inner surface 966a4 of the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the third surface 945b3 of the protrusion 945b. The protrusion 945b is displaced in contact with the protrusion 945b. Thereby, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

Here, a ball entry hole formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members that are rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry hole and open or close the ball entry hole, and a pair of wing members that open or close the ball entry hole. 2. Description of the Related Art A game machine is known that includes a drive unit that generates a driving force for rotating a wing member, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of the drive unit to a pair of wing members. The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is connected to a protrusion that protrudes from the back surface of the pair of wing members. Specifically, opposing portions are formed on one end of the rotating member and are vertically opposed to each other at a predetermined interval, and the protruding portion of the wing member is inserted between the opposing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or pushed down by the opposing portion of the rotating member, thereby opening or closing the wing member.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to set a large gap between the opposing part and the protruding part, so there is a problem that the opening and closing operation of the wing member is unstable. That is, when the rotary member is rotated for opening and closing operations of the wing member, the attitude of the facing part is inclined with respect to the protruding part, and the facing interval of the facing part is equal to the outer shape of the protruding part. If so, the protruding portion interferes between the opposing portions, making it impossible for the rotating member to rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the spacing between the opposing parts to a size that does not interfere with the protruding parts, and the gap between the opposing parts and the protruding parts increases accordingly. As a result, the wing members tend to wobble, making the opening and closing operations of the wing members unstable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism includes a transmission member 965 that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means (drive unit 960), and a displacement member 966 that is slid and displaced as the transmission member 965 rotates. A projection 945b is provided protruding from the pair of wing members 945, and a sliding groove 966a2 through which the projection 945b is slidably inserted is recessed in the displacement member 966, so that the sliding groove 966a2 is The groove width can be suppressed. That is, the displacement of the displacement member 966 is a sliding displacement, and the posture of the sliding groove 966a2 is not inclined with respect to the protrusion 945b, so there is no need to avoid interference with the protrusion when rotating unlike the conventional product. Therefore, the groove width of the sliding groove 966a2 can be approximated to the size of the protrusion 945b, and the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b can be reduced. As a result, rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized. Furthermore, since the direction of displacement of the displacement member 966 is substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 966 can be disposed substantially parallel to the wing members 945. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member 945 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. That is, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, since the displacement member 966 is not displaced in the direction of the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945, the space required for disposing the displacement member in the direction of the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945 is suppressed. can. As a result, space for arranging other members can be secured.

Here, unlike the conventional product in which a rotating member is directly connected to a pair of wing members, in the present invention, the displacement member 966 is interposed between the wing member 945 and the transmission member 965, so that the displacement member 966 is moved in the direction of gravity. When operating in the direction of sliding upward (to the other side in the direction of gravity), the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, so the inertial force increases, and the driving force required for the driving means (the solenoid 610 described later) increases. . Therefore, it is difficult to smoothly perform an initial operation when starting the drive of the wing member 945 in the stopped state and displacing it to the open state or the closed state.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, the protrusion 945b is located below the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945 in the gravity direction (one side in the gravity direction). be located. That is, the position of the protrusion 945b when the displacement member 966 starts sliding displacement toward the upper side in the gravity direction (the other side in the gravity direction) is set below the rotation axis of the wing member 945 along the gravity direction. Thereby, the displacement component of the protrusion 945b that pushes up the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 can be increased in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 91) and decreased in the gravity direction (downward in FIG. 91). Therefore, even in the present invention where the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the initial operation when starting to drive the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) to open or close it can be performed smoothly.

Further, the center of gravity of the wing member 945 is set on the opposite side of the protrusion 945b with the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) interposed therebetween. Thereby, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state using its own weight. That is, when the displacement member 966 starts sliding displacement toward the upper side in the direction of gravity (one side in the direction of gravity), the wing member 945 is rotated in the direction in which it is released, so that the wing member 945 is rotated by its weight (its own weight). can be done. Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the initial operation when starting to drive the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) and opening it can be performed smoothly.

Further, the above-described inclined surface 966a5 is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 91)) of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, even if the position of the protrusion 945b is set downward along the gravity direction of the rotation axis of the wing member 945, the protrusion 945b is guided along the inclination direction of the inclined surface 966a5, and the displacement member The sliding displacement of 966 toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) can be started smoothly.

Furthermore, by forming the inclined surface 966a5 on the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2, not only can the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the projection 945b be reduced, but also the projection 945b on the inclined surface 966a5 can be made smaller. Due to this contact, not only the displacement of the protrusion 945b in the direction of gravity but also the displacement in the horizontal direction can be restricted. Therefore, rattling of the wing member 945 when the wing member 945 is in the closed state can be easily suppressed. That is, even when affected by vibrations caused by the falling of game balls, the wing member 945 can be easily maintained in the open or closed position.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the feather member 945 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the displacement member 966 moves from the second winning opening 140 side to the specific winning opening 65a side (one side in the gravity direction (bottom side in FIG. 92). side)). As a result, the upper inner surface 966a3 of the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the first surface 945b1 of the protrusion 945b, and the protrusion 945b is displaced. Thereby, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

Moreover, the displacement direction of the displacement member 966 from the second winning a prize opening 140 side to the specific winning a prize opening 65a side is set to the direction of gravity (downward in FIG. 92). Thereby, when closing the wing member 945, the wing member 945 can be displaced using the weight of the displacement member 966. As a result, the wing member 945 can be easily displaced from the open state to the closed state.

Next, the drive unit 960 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. 93(a) is a side view of the drive unit 960, FIG. 93(b) is a top view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 93(c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 960. 94 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective rear view of the drive unit 960.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the drive unit 960 includes a first accommodating part 962 and a second accommodating part 963, which are formed in a box shape and are arranged facing each other. 963 , a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610 , and a connecting member 964 that is pivotally supported by the first accommodating part 962 and the second accommodating part 963 and connected to the connecting member 964 . The transmission member 965 is mainly formed.

The first accommodating part 962 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and includes a covering part 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (the upper side in FIG. (see).

The covered portion 962a is formed in a substantially box shape with the solenoid 610 side (lower side in FIG. 93(a)) and the guide portion 962b side open. Further, the covering portion 962a includes an engaged portion 962c formed by cutting out a part of the opposing wall surface, and a fastening portion 962d protruding in a direction facing the outside of the opposing wall surface.

The engaged portion 962c is a notch that engages an engaging portion 963c of a second accommodating portion 963, which will be described later, and is formed into a shape larger than the outer shape of the engaging portion 963c when viewed from the side. As a result, the engaging portion 963c can be engaged with the engaged portion 962c before the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are fastened together. The workability of fastening can be improved.

The fastening portion 962d is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 963b1 of the second accommodating portion 963 when the drive unit 960 is assembled, and is located on the second accommodating portion 963 side (lower side in FIG. 93(a)). A through hole 962da is provided that penetrates toward the front.

The through hole 962da is a hole through which a screw (not shown) that is screwed into the fastening hole 963b1 of the second housing part 963 is inserted, and is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 963b1 and has an inner diameter larger than the fastening hole 963b1. is formed. Thereby, the first accommodating part 962 and the second accommodating part 963 can be fastened and fixed.

The guide portion 962b is connected to a pair of arm portions 962e that are connected to the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a and formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the side, and is connected to the pair of arm portions 962e, and has a gate shape when viewed from the front. It is formed to include a wall portion 962f, and a protrusion portion 962g that protrudes from the wall portion 962f to the side opposite to the covered portion 962a (back side base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

In side view, the arm portion 962e protrudes from each of the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a toward the rear base 941 (see FIG. 85), and its protruding tip side is bent toward the other side in the gravity direction (opposite to the solenoid 610 side). It is formed into an approximately L shape. Further, the pair of arm portions 962e are set so that the distance between the opposing sides is approximately the same as the distance between both horizontal ends of the side wall portion 981b (see FIG. 109(a)) of the distribution unit 980, which will be described later. 981b is inserted.

The wall portion 962f is formed by connecting the distal side (bent side) side surfaces of the arm portion 962e described above, and its shape in front view is larger than the shape of the displacement member 966 in front view. Further, the wall portion 962f has an outer distance dimension L3 (see FIG. 93(b)) in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)) in the opposing direction of the pair of first guide walls 942b of the back base 941. (L3=L4) is set to be substantially the same as the outer distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 91). Furthermore, the wall portion 962f has a distance dimension L5 (see FIG. 93(a)) in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(a)) from the upper end surface of the first guide wall 942b of the back base 941 to the upright portion 942f. It is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension L6 (see FIG. 91) to the outer surface (L5=L6). Thereby, the displacement member 966 can be disposed between the wall portion 962f and the rear base 941, and the displacement member 966 can be accommodated between the opposed first guide walls 942b. Furthermore, the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966, which is disposed between the wall portion 962f and the rear base 941, can be arranged between the opposing surfaces.

The protruding portion 962g is formed to protrude from the outer side of the pair of arm portions 962e of the wall portion 962f in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. It is set to be approximately the same as the protrusion dimension of the first guide wall 942b. Furthermore, the inner dimension L7 of the protruding portion 962g in the opposing direction (FIG. 93(b) vertical direction) is slightly larger than the outer dimension L8 of the pair of second guide walls 942d of the rear base 941 in the opposing direction (see FIG. 91). It is set large. Furthermore, the dimension of the protruding portion 962g in the direction of gravity is set to be approximately the same as the dimension between the opposing first guide wall 942b and the standing portion 942f.

Accordingly, when disposing the drive unit 960 in the assembled state on the back base 941 (front unit 940), the second guide wall 942d is inserted between the opposing protrusions 962g, and the first guide wall 942b and The drive unit 960 can be positioned and disposed with respect to the back base 941 by inserting the protruding portion 962g between the opposing upright portions 942f.

The second accommodating portion 963 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is formed into a box-shaped body that covers the other side of the solenoid 610 (lower side in FIG. 93(a)). The second accommodating portion 963 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the driving direction of the solenoid 610 (left-right direction in FIG. 93(b)), which will be described later, when viewed from above. Further, the second accommodating portion 963 is provided with recessed portions 963e recessed in a plurality of locations on both walls extending in the longitudinal direction, and from between the recessed portions 963e at the plurality of locations toward the first accommodating portion 962. an engaging portion 963c that protrudes from the side, a protrusion portion 963b that protrudes from both walls extending in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction, and one side (back base 941 side (see FIG. 85) extending in the lateral direction). ) is provided with a bearing part 963d recessed in the wall part.

The protruding portion 963b is formed to protrude outward in the transverse direction of the second accommodating portion 963 in a semicircular arc shape, and includes a fastening hole 963b1 coaxial with the through hole 962da of the first accommodating portion 962. Thereby, the first accommodating part 962 and the second accommodating part 963 can be fastened and fixed by screwing a screw inserted from the through hole 962da side of the first accommodating part 962 into the fastening hole 963b1.

The recessed portion 963e is an opening that circulates air in a space formed between the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 facing each other. By circulating air through the recessed portion 963e, the solenoid 610 disposed between the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 facing each other can be cooled.

The engaging portion 963c protrudes toward the first accommodating portion 962 from between the plurality of recessed portions 963e arranged in parallel, and has a hook-shaped tip that is bent inward in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963. Ru. Further, as described above, the engaging portion 963c is formed at a position corresponding to the engaged portion 962c of the first accommodating portion 962, and when the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined, The engaging portion 963c is disposed inside the engaged portion 962c, and a bent portion of the engaging portion 963c is engaged with one end surface of the first accommodating portion 962.

Further, since the engaging portion 963c is formed between the recessed portions 963e, the distance from the base end to the distal end of the engaging portion 963c can be increased. Therefore, when the engaging portion 963c is disposed in the first accommodating portion 962, the engaging portion 963c can be easily bent, and the engaging portion 963c can be easily engaged with the first accommodating portion 962.

The bearing portion 963d is a recess that accommodates a rotating shaft 965c of a transmission member 965, which will be described later, and is recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the rotating shaft 965c. Further, the end surface of the bearing portion 963d on the first accommodating portion 962 side is covered with the side surface of the first accommodating portion 962 on one side in the gravity direction, so that the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined. In this state, the rotating shaft 965c accommodated in the bearing portion 963d can be prevented from coming off outside the bearing portion 963d.

The solenoid 610 includes a main body 961a formed into a rectangular parallelepiped, a shaft 961b that is inserted into the inside of the main body 961a and is movable with respect to the main body 961a, and a side of the shaft 961b opposite to the main body 961a. It includes an annular portion 961c disposed at the end of the annular portion 961c, and a coil spring SP1 disposed between the annular portion 961c and the main body portion 961a.

The main body part 961a is a coil part that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the shaft part 961b to be inserted into the main body part 961a can be drawn inward and inserted by the magnetism.

The shaft portion 961b is made of a magnetic metal material and has a cylindrical shape. The shaft portion 961b is arranged with its axial direction facing the back base 941 side, and is arranged with a part of the back base 941 side protruding from the main body portion 961a.

The annular portion 961c is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 961b protruding from the main body portion 961a. A connecting member 964, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 961c. Thereby, when the shaft portion 961b is displaced with respect to the main body portion 961a, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 961c to the connecting member 964, and the connecting member 964 can be displaced.

The coil spring SP1 is a spring member that is spirally wound a plurality of times. The coil spring SP1 is disposed around the shaft portion 961b, and is disposed in a slightly compressed state between the annular portion 961c and the main body portion 961a facing each other. Thereby, the annular portion 961c can be biased in a direction away from the main body portion 961a. Therefore, when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body part 961a, the annular part 961c can be maintained separated from the main body part 961a. Further, after power is applied (supplied) to the main body part 961a, when the application (supply) of power is cut off, the annular part 961c can be quickly separated from the main body part 961a.

The connecting member 964 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 964 has a base portion 964a formed in a plate-shaped body parallel to a plane perpendicular to the axis of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and a base portion 964a that extends from the other side of the base portion 964a in the gravity direction to the back base 941 side (FIG. 85 (see) an upright portion 964b bent toward the side.

The base portion 964a is a portion connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and is recessed from the end surface on one side in the gravity direction (the back side of the paper in FIG. 93(b)) with a dimension larger than the diameter of the annular portion 961c. and a second recessed portion 964d located on the solenoid 610 side of the first recessed portion 964c and recessed with a dimension larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 961b.

The first recessed portion 964c is a groove into which the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U-shape with one side open in the direction of gravity when viewed in cross section. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 964c is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 961c. Thereby, the annular portion 961c can be inserted into the first recessed portion 964c.

The second recessed portion 964d is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 961b and the base portion 964a when the annular portion 961c is disposed inside the first recessed portion 964c as described above. It is formed in a substantially U-shape with its lower side open when viewed from the rear, and is formed to open from the first recessed portion 964c side to the solenoid 610 side.

The upright portion 964b includes an insertion hole 964e penetrating in the direction of gravity, into which a protruding portion 965d of a transmission member 965, which will be described later, is inserted. Accordingly, when the connecting member 964 is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 610, the protrusion 965d comes into contact with the inner edge of the insertion hole 964e, and the transmission member 965 is displaced. Note that a detailed explanation of the displacement of the transmission member 965 will be given later.

The transmission member 965 is bent when viewed from the side, and includes a distal end portion 965a that extends in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and a rotational distal end portion 965a that is continuous with the distal end portion 965a and extends toward the connecting member 964 side. 965b.

The rotating part 965b is formed so that the width dimension in the lateral direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)) of the second accommodating part 963 is smaller than the dimension between opposing bearing parts 963d formed in a pair in the second accommodating part 963. be done. The rotating part 965b also has a rotating shaft 965c that protrudes in a cylindrical shape on both sides of the second housing part 963 in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)) at the end on the 964 side, and and a protrusion 965d that protrudes toward one end in the gravity direction.

As described above, the rotating shaft 965c is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the groove width of the bearing portion 963d. Furthermore, the distance between the protruding tips of the pair of rotating shafts 965c is set to be larger than the distance between the opposing bearing parts 963d formed in the second accommodating part 963. Thereby, the pair of rotating shafts 965c can be inserted and disposed inside the bearing portion 963d. Therefore, by inserting the rotating shaft 965c into the bearing portion 963d and fastening the second accommodating portion 963 and the first accommodating portion 962, the transmission member 965 can be supported in a rotatable state about the rotating shaft 965c.

As described above, the protrusion 965d is a protrusion inserted into the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964, and its outer shape is set smaller than the inner edge shape of the insertion hole 964e when viewed from above. Furthermore, in the state before the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is displaced (power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a), the protruding portion 965d has a width dimension in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610. The width of the insertion hole 964e is set to be sufficiently larger than the width of the insertion hole 964e (in this embodiment, the width of the insertion hole 964e is set to be twice the width of the protrusion 965d). As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced around the rotating shaft 965c, the projections 965d on both end faces in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b come into contact with the insertion hole 964e, and the rotation of the transmission member 965 is restricted. This can be suppressed.

The width of the tip portion 965a in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c is formed to become smaller as the tip portion 965a becomes farther away from the solenoid 610. Further, the distal end portion 965a has an insertion portion 965e inserted into the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 described above, and an upright portion 965f protruding from the connection side with the rotating portion 965b in one side in the gravity direction. It is formed with

The insertion portion 965e has an outer shape smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 when viewed from the front, and is inserted and disposed inside the connecting hole 966b1. As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced, the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 come into contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is displaced. Note that a detailed explanation of the displacement between the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966 will be given later.

Next, the displacement operation of the drive unit 960 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. 96(a) and 96(b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 960 taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 93(b). Note that FIG. 96(a) shows the state of the solenoid 610 before operation, and FIG. 96(b) shows the state of the solenoid 610 after the operation. Further, in FIGS. 96(a) and 96(b), the outer shape of the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 965 is illustrated with a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 96(a), when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a of the solenoid 610, the coil spring SP1 disposed between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c is The force causes the annular portion 961c to be separated from the main body portion 961a. As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is pushed out in the direction away from the main body portion 961a (to the left in FIG. 96(a)).

When the connecting member 964 is pushed out in the direction away from the main body portion 961a, the surface of the protruding portion 965d of the transmitting member 965 on the solenoid 610 side (the right side in FIG. 96(a)) and the surface of the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964 on the solenoid 610 side is in contact with the inner surface of the As a result, the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed down to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 96(a)) about the rotating shaft 965c. Further, the displacement of the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to one side in the gravity direction is regulated by the contact portion 965g contacting the second housing portion 963.

As shown in FIG. 96(b), when power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, the shaft 961b is drawn into the main body 961a by the magnetic force generated in the main body 961a, and the The ring portion 961c and the main body portion 961a are brought closer to each other (than in a state where power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a). As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is displaced in a direction approaching the main body portion 961a (to the right in FIG. 96(a)).

When the connecting member 964 is displaced in the direction approaching the main body portion 961a, the surface of the protruding portion 965d of the transmitting member 965 on the opposite side to the solenoid 610 (the left side in FIG. 96(b)) and the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964 The solenoid 610 side and the inner surface of the opposite side (the left side in FIG. 96(b)) are in contact with each other. As a result, the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed up toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 96(b)) about the rotating shaft 965c. Further, the displacement of the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to the other side in the gravity direction is regulated by the connection portion between the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 and the rotating portion 965b coming into contact with the first accommodating portion 962.

Therefore, by displacing the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to either the other side in the gravity direction or to the one side in the gravity direction, the transmission member 965 can be moved to either the first accommodating part 962 or the second accommodating part 963. It can be brought into contact. This makes it possible to suppress fraudulent acts by players.

For example, when a player inserts a piano wire or the like into the gap between the transmission member 965 and the first accommodating part 962 or the second accommodating part 963 from the player side (gaming area side) to the solenoid 610, the thickness of the piano wire etc. Accordingly, the displacement distance of the transmission member 965 can be reduced. Therefore, since an abnormality occurs in the displacement operation of the wing member 945 that is displaced by the transmission member 965, it is easy for the store operator to discover the fraud.

Further, as described above, the transmission member 965 includes a tip portion 965a and a rotating portion 965b that extend from the rotating shaft 965c and are connected to the displacement member 966, and a distal end portion 965a and a rotating portion 965b that extend from the rotating shaft 965c and are connected to the solenoid 610. Since the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are bent into a substantially doglegged shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, the amount of displacement of the displacement member 966 can be ensured. , the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

That is, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed in a straight line when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimension distance between the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is the same as that of the distal end portion 965a of this embodiment. If the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 is set to be approximately equal to the total distance, the amount of sliding displacement of the displacement member 966 can be made equal to that of the present embodiment, but the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 is increased. The whole thing becomes larger.

On the other hand, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed in a straight line when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimension distance between the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is set by rotation from the insertion portion 965e of this embodiment. When the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 is set to be approximately the same as the distance to the shaft 965c (the distance between the tip end 965a and the rotating section 965b is shortened), the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be made the same as in this embodiment. However, the amount of displacement of the displacement member 966 becomes smaller.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are bent in a substantially doglegged shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, so that the sliding displacement of the displacement member 966 The distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed while ensuring the amount. Further, the protruding portion 965d is formed on the rear side (right side in FIG. 96(a)) of the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b, which are opposite to the displacement member 966. Thereby, the space created by bending the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b can be effectively utilized, and the transmission member 965 can be downsized. That is, the transmission member 965 is efficiently arranged in the space between the rolling part 943a of the front unit 940 (ball throwing unit 970 described later) and the passage member 955 of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, thereby reducing the overall size. can be achieved.

Next, the connection between the drive unit 960 and the displacement member 966 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a sectional view of the winning a prize opening unit 930 taken along the line XCVII-XCVII in FIG. 83. 98(a) and 98(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit 930 taken along the line XCVIII-XCVIII in FIG. 97. Note that FIG. 98(a) shows the state of the solenoid 610 before operation, and FIG. 98(b) shows the state of the solenoid 610 after the operation.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, when the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940 are assembled, the distal end 965a of the transmission member 965 is inserted into the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966.

Therefore, as described above, when the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 is driven and the tip end 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upward in FIG. 98(a)), as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 98(b), the bulging portion 965e1 of the insertion portion 965e and the abutted portion 966b2 on one side of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 come into contact, and the displacement member 966 is slid to the other side in the direction of gravity. be done.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slid to the other side in the gravity direction (toward the second winning port 140 side), the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is displaced, and the feather member 945 is brought into an open state. That is, by applying electric power to the main body portion 961a of the solenoid 610, the wing member 945 is brought into an open state.

On the other hand, when the application (supply) of power to the main body portion 961a of the solenoid 610 is cut off, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is aligned in the gravity direction due to the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 disposed in the solenoid 610 as described above. side (lower side in FIG. 98(a)). As a result, as shown in FIG. 98(a), the opposite surface of the bulging portion 965e1 contacts the other side abutted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and the displacement member 966 moves to one side in the gravity direction. The slide is displaced.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slid to one side in the gravity direction (towards the specific winning port 65a), the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is displaced, and the feather member 945 is brought into the closed state. That is, by cutting off the application (supply) of electric power to the main body portion 961a of the solenoid 610, the wing member 945 is brought into the closed state.

In this case, the wing member 945 can be closed while power is not applied (supplied) to the main body 961a, so if the wiring of the main body 961a is disconnected or due to a player's misconduct, the main body 961a is closed. When the wiring is cut, the wing member 945 becomes open, and it is possible to prevent game balls from easily flowing into the second prize opening 140.

Further, the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965 is transmitted to the displacement member 966 through a connecting hole 966b1 formed at a substantially intermediate position in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. Thereby, it is possible to easily allow a change in the posture of the displacement member between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965. Therefore, as the transmission member rotates, the displacement member 966 can be smoothly slid and displaced. As a result, the wing member 945 can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, during the operation of slidingly displacing the displacement member 966 and opening or closing the pair of wing members 945 as the transmission member 965 rotates, the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members 945. When actuated, the attitude of the displacement member 966 is changed, and the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two places, and is also connected to the transmission member 965 at two places. If this is the case, it is difficult to allow a change in the posture of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965, and the resistance when sliding the displacement member 966 (that is, rotating the transmission member 965) is high. This occurs and prevents the wing member from opening or closing. On the other hand, according to the present invention, the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two places, and is connected to the transmission member 965 at one place, so that the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at one place. Even if the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the blade members 945, the attitude change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

Furthermore, the width dimension D1 (see FIG. 98(a)) of the contact surface between the one side abutted part 966b2 and the other side abutted part 966b3 of the insertion part 965e is the maximum external dimension D2 (see FIG. 98(a)) of the protrusion 945b. (see (a)) is set to be smaller than three times. Thereby, the change in attitude of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated. That is, when the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is set large, when the posture of the displacement member 966 changes between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965, the connection between the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 By setting the width D1 of the insertion portion 965e to be smaller than three times the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b, the posture of the displacement member 966 is controlled. Change can be prevented from being regulated. As a result, the change in attitude of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

Note that the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is preferably set to be smaller than twice the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b. According to this, when the posture of the displacement member 966 changes, it is possible to easily prevent the insertion portion 965e and the connection hole 966b1 from coming into contact with each other. As a result, the change in attitude of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

Next, the specific winning a prize unit 950 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. 99(a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, FIG. 99(b) is a rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 99(c) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit 950. It is a diagram. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950.

As shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 includes a ball entering member 953 formed in a box-like body that is opened by the player side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 99), and an opening of the ball entering member 953. A plate member 951 disposed to cover the ball, a passage member 955 disposed on the opposite side of the plate member 951 with the ball entry member 953 in between, and a drive unit 957 for operating the plate member 951. It is formed.

The plate member 951 is formed from a colored and translucent resin material, and allows the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the ball entry member 953 side via the plate member 951. The plate member 951 includes a main body part 951a formed in a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a shaft hole 951b recessed in a cylindrical shape on both longitudinally outer sides of the main body part 951a, and a shaft hole 951b recessed in a longitudinal direction of the main body part 951a. The main body portion 951a has a protrusion 951c that projects toward the ball-entering member 953 from one end thereof, and an engaging portion 951d that projects toward the ball-entering member 953 from the other longitudinal end of the main body portion 951a.

The main body portion 951a is formed in a size that covers the open side of the ball entry member 953, which will be described later, when viewed from the front, and has a shape that is slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the specific winning opening 65a of the front unit 940 described above. .

The shaft hole 951b is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the main body portion 951a, and both ends of the shaft hole 951b in the longitudinal direction are set coaxially. Moreover, the shaft hole 951b is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of a rod member 952, which will be described later, so that the rod member 952 can be inserted into the shaft hole 951b. Therefore, by supporting the ball entry member 953 while the rod member 952 is inserted into the shaft hole 951b, the plate member 951 can be pivotally supported with respect to the ball entry member 953.

The protrusion 951c is formed to protrude toward one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a. As a result, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced around the shaft hole 951b by the drive of the drive unit 957, which will be described later, and the other side of the plate member 951 in the gravity direction is inclined toward the game area, the main body portion 951a It is possible to suppress the game balls that have flown down from falling from one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a.

The engaging portion 951d includes a recessed portion 951d1 partially recessed at the protruding tip. A distal end portion 958c of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, is connected to the inside of the recessed portion 951d1, and the operation of the drive unit 957 is transmitted thereto. In addition, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 951b, a part of the engaging portion 951d protrudes toward the downstream area, so that the game ball that has flowed down to the main body portion 951a can be prevented from falling from the other side in the longitudinal direction.

The ball entry member 953 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The ball entry member 953 includes a main body 953a formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular box when viewed from the front, an erected wall 953b erected on a surface opposite to the open side of the main body 953a, and an open side wall 953b of the main body 953a. An engaging portion 953f protrudes from the surface opposite to the opening side, an annular projection 953c protrudes in an annular shape from the surface opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and an annular protrusion 953c protrudes from the open side of the main body portion 953a. A wall portion 953d protrudes toward the plate member 951 side from both longitudinally outer sides of the edge, an insertion hole 953e penetrating from the passage member 955 side to the plate member 951 side on the other longitudinal side of the main body portion 953a, and the main body. A protruding part 953g protrudes from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the part 953a, a protrusion 953h protrudes from the open side edge of the main body part 953a toward the plate member 951, and two parts formed through the bottom surface of the main part 953a. and an inlet 953j.

The main body part 953a is formed in a size that allows a game ball to be inserted into the box-shaped inner part, and has an opening 953a1 that opens on the plate member 951 side, and a rolling surface that rolls the game ball that flows in from the opening 953a1. 953a2. Further, the outer shape of the main body portion 953a when viewed from the front is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the upright portion 942f of the front unit 940 described above. Thereby, the main body portion 953a (ball entry member 953) can be inserted into the upright portion 942f and fastened and fixed to the front unit 940. Note that a detailed description of the inner shape of the main body portion 953a will be given later.

Further, the longitudinal dimension of the main body portion 953a is set to be larger than the distance between the above-mentioned pair of wing members 945 on the outside in the opposing direction. Thereby, even if the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the outer circumferential surface of the pair of feather members 945, the game ball can be made to flow into the main body part 953a via the specific winning opening 65a.

The opening 953a1 has an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of the game ball, and when the plate member 951 is in an open state, the game ball can flow into the inside of the main body portion 953a through the opening 953a1. can.

The rolling surface 953a2 is a lower inner edge of the main body portion 953a in the direction of gravity, and is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from above. Further, the dimension in the direction (short side direction) from the back side (passage member 955 side) to the front side (plate member 951 side) is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball thrown into the inside of the main body portion 953a from the opening 953a1 can be rolled on the rolling surface 953a2.

The standing wall 953b is a wall that holds the detection device SE1 disposed on the opposite side to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and surrounds the outer circumferential surface in three directions of the detection device SE1, which is formed into a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. formed to size.

The engaging portion 953f is formed along the outer peripheral surface of the detection device SE1 in directions other than the three directions surrounded by the standing wall 953b. Thereby, the detection device SE1 can be disposed inside the portion surrounded by the standing wall 953b and the engaging portion 953f. Further, the distal end portion of the engaging portion 953f is bent toward the upright wall 953b, which is separated from the proximal end by a distance equal to the thickness of the detection device SE1. Therefore, the detection device SE1 and the engagement portion 953f are engaged with each other, and it is possible to suppress the detection device SE1 disposed on the main body portion 953a from falling off.

The detection device SE1 is a device that detects passage of a game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the game ball is formed in the thickness direction thereof. The detection hole SE1a is formed biased toward one or the other of the longitudinal directions of the detection device SE1 arranged in a horizontally long rectangular state when viewed from the rear, and the detection hole SE1a is formed biased toward one or the other of the longitudinal directions where the detection hole SE1a is not formed. Alternatively, a detection board SE1b for controlling the detection device SE1 is disposed on one side. Further, the detection hole SE1a is arranged at a position corresponding to an inflow port 953j to be described later, and can allow game balls flowing into the inflow port 953j to pass through.

The annular protrusion 953c is formed to protrude from a plurality of locations in an annular shape on the side opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and a screw for fastening and fixing the passage member 955 and the ball entry member 953 is screwed into the inner edge portion of the annular protrusion 953c.

A pair of wall portions 953d are formed on both longitudinally outer sides of the main body portion 953a, and the distance between the opposing walls is shorter than the lengthwise dimension of the plate member 951. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be disposed between the pair of wall portions 953d facing each other.

Further, a shaft hole 953d1 is formed in the wall portion 953d and extends in a circular shape in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 99(a)) of the main body portion 953a. The shaft hole 953d1 is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner diameter of the shaft hole 951b of the plate member 951. Therefore, after arranging the plate member 951 between the pair of opposing walls 953d, the rod members 952 are inserted into the shaft holes 953d1 and 951b from both longitudinally outer sides of the plate member 951. It can be pivotally supported by the ball entry member 953.

Further, the wall portion 953d is formed to have a protrusion dimension smaller than the recess distance of the recess portion 941h formed in the back base 941 of the front unit 940 described above. Therefore, by combining the front unit 940 and the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, the wall portion 953d can be accommodated inside the recessed portion 941h. Thereby, the rod member 952 inserted into the shaft hole 953d1 and the shaft hole 951b can be prevented from coming out.

The insertion hole 953e is a hole through which a part of a transmission member 965 disposed in a passage member 955 (described later) is inserted into the plate member 951 side, and is formed at a position corresponding to the transmission member 965 disposed in the passage member 955. be done.

The protruding portion 953g is formed to protrude on the axis of the connecting protrusion 942j of the front unit 940. In addition, in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 are combined, the inner circle 942j1 of the connecting protrusion 942j and the insertion hole 953g1 formed through the protrusion 953g are arranged coaxially, and the protrusion The installation portion 953g and the connecting protrusion 942j are in contact with each other. Thereby, the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 and the front unit 940 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw inserted into the insertion hole 953g1 from the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 side into the inner circle 942j1.

The protrusion 953h is formed to protrude toward the plate member 951 side. Thereby, when the plate member 951 is displaced by the drive unit 957, which will be described later, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the plate member 951 and the edge of the main body portion 953a.

Further, the protrusion 953h is formed at substantially the same position as the protrusion 951c of the plate member 951 and the engagement portion 951d in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951 (left-right direction in FIG. 99(a)). This makes it difficult for the game ball to roll toward the protruding side of the protrusion 953h. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced, the game ball is less likely to be caught between the plate member 951 and the protrusion 951c.

The inflow port 953j is formed to open from the plate member 951 side to the passage member 955 side with an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of the game ball. The inflow port 953j is a hole through which the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the main body part 953a is sent to the passage member 955, and a pair of inflow ports 953j are formed in the longitudinal direction of the main body part 953a.

Here, a game comprising a ball entrance formed to allow a game ball to enter, an opening/closing member for opening and closing the ball entrance, and a passage member forming a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entrance. machine is known. The ball entrance is formed in a size that allows multiple game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that have entered the ball entrance are collected in the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and are collected in the passage member. One ball at a time. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the ball entrance is made larger, the rolling distance of the game ball (the length of the rolling surface) from the end of the ball entrance to the passage member increases accordingly. Therefore, it takes time for the ball to arrive at the passage member, and by the time the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, another game ball may enter the ball from the entrance, making it easy for over-winning to occur. Ta.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a pair of inflow ports 953j (at two locations) are formed at a predetermined interval, so even if the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a is enlarged, the flow up to the inflow port 953j is The rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the game ball can be shortened. Therefore, the time required to reach the inflow port 953j is shortened by that amount, and the water can be made to flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Further, a detection device SE1 that detects the inflow of game balls into the ball entry member 953 is arranged at a connecting portion between the inflow port 953j and a recessed portion 955a of a passage member 955, which will be described later. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a can be detected in a shorter time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being entered until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In addition, the inflow port 953j is formed at a position that does not overlap in the direction of gravity with the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning a prize port unit 950 are fastened. That is, a pair of closed wing members 945 are arranged between a pair of inflow ports 953j.

Here, as described above, the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 is arranged below the second winning a prize opening 140 (a pair of wing members 945) in the direction of gravity. Further, since the pair of wing members 945 is arranged in the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area is difficult to flow down below the pair of wing members 945 in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the inflow position of the game balls flowing into the ball entry member 953 of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 is biased. In this embodiment, as described above, since the inflow port 953j is formed at a position that does not overlap the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in the direction of gravity, the inflow port 953j is formed at a position where many game balls flow into the ball entry member 953. The inlet 953j can be brought closer. Thereby, the game balls flowing into the ball entry member 953 can be made to flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive winning of game balls to the ball entering member 953.

The passage member 955 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and its outer shape when viewed from the front is approximately the same as the outer shape of the above-mentioned ball entry member 953 when viewed from the front. Further, the passage member 955 has a pair of recessed portions 955a recessed at a position facing the detection hole SE1a of each detection device SE1, and a pair of recessed portions 955a located on the other side in the longitudinal direction from the drive unit 957 side to the ball entry member 953 side. A pair of third openings 955c are formed through the drive unit 957 side to the ball entry member 953 side at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and a recess is formed on the other side in the gravity direction of the third openings 955c. The second recessed portion 955f is located between the pair of recessed portions 955a and recessed from the drive unit 957 side.

The recessed portion 955a is a passage that guides the game ball inserted through the detection hole SE1a, and the recess dimension in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 and the recess dimension on the drive unit 957 side are set larger than the diameter of the game ball. be done.

The second opening 955b is a space in which a connecting member 957c and a transmission member 958 of a drive unit 957, which will be described later, are arranged. Further, a shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102(a)) that protrudes in a cylindrical shape in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 is formed on the inner circumferential surface of the second opening 955b. The shaft portion 955b1 is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 958b of the transmission member 958, and the transmission member 958 can be pivotally supported by inserting the shaft portion 955b1 into the shaft hole 958b.

The third opening 955c is a space in which the detection device SE2, in which the insertion direction of the detection hole SE1a is arranged parallel to the direction of gravity, is arranged, and is set to be approximately the same as the external shape of the detection device SE2 when viewed from the front. . Thereby, the detection device SE2 can be arranged inside the third opening 955c. Further, in the detection device SE2, the detection hole SE1 projects toward the ball entry member 953 side in a state arranged inside the third opening 955c.

Furthermore, an engaging portion 955e protrudes toward the drive unit 957 at the edge of the third opening 955c. The protruding tip of the engaging portion 955e is bent inside the third opening 955c. When the detection device SE2 is disposed in the third opening 955c, the bent portion of the engaging portion 955e is engaged with the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE2. Thereby, the detection device SE2 inserted inside the third opening 955c can be prevented from slipping out to the drive unit 957 side.

The rolling portion 955d is curved into an arc shape. Further, the end of the rolling portion 955d on the plate member 951 side is connected to the third ball throwing portion 942e of the front unit 940 in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the second out port 941f of the front unit 940 can be sent to the rolling portion 955d of the specific winning a prize port unit 950.

Further, the other end side of the rolling portion 955d is located on the other side in the gravity direction of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2 disposed in the third opening 955c. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 955d can be dropped from the other end side and inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2. Thereby, the number of game balls that have flowed into the second out port 941f can be measured by the detection device SE2.

The second recessed portion 955f is formed between the pair of recessed portions 955a that serve as a passage for the game ball as described above. The second recessed portion 955f is a recess in which the above-mentioned drive unit 960 is disposed, and the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 99(c) left-right direction) of the passage member 955 is the second recess of the above-mentioned drive unit 960. It is set larger than the distance dimension of the accommodating portion 963 in the transverse direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)).

The second recessed portion 955f is formed with an insertion hole 955h that is formed through the passage member 955 at an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, and a projection 955g that projects toward the drive unit 957 side. The insertion hole 955h is a hole through which a screw that fastens the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw.

The projection 955g is formed in a cylindrical shape, and has a circular fastening hole 955g1 recessed in the center. The fastening hole 955g1 is a hole into which a screw that fastens the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific winning a prize opening unit 950) is screwed together, and is opposite to the elongated hole 963f formed in the second accommodating part 963 of the drive unit 960. It is formed in the position where Thereby, the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific winning a prize opening unit 950) can be fastened and fixed.

The drive unit 957 includes a solenoid 957a, a case member 957b that covers the solenoid 957a, and a connecting member 957c disposed at a displaced portion of the solenoid 957a.

The solenoid 957a includes a main body 957a1 formed in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, a shaft 957a2 that is inserted into the inside of the main body 957a1 and is displaceable with respect to the main body 957a1, and a side of the shaft 957a2 opposite to the main body 957a1. It includes an annular portion 957a3 disposed at the end of the annular portion 957a3, and a coil spring SP2 disposed between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1.

The main body part 957a1 is a coil part that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and due to the magnetism, the shaft part 957a2 to be inserted into the main body part 957a1 is drawn to the inside of the main body part 957a1, so that it can be inserted. be done.

The shaft portion 957a2 is made of a magnetic metal material and has a cylindrical shape. The shaft portion 957a2 is arranged with its axial direction facing the passage member 955, and is arranged with a portion on the back base 941 side protruding from the main body portion 957a1.

The annular portion 957a3 is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 957a2 protruding from the main body portion 957a1. A connecting member 957c, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 957a3. Thereby, when the shaft portion 957a2 is displaced relative to the main body portion 957a1, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 957a3 to the connecting member 957c, and the connecting member 957c can be displaced.

The coil spring SP2 is a spring member that is spirally wound a plurality of times. The coil spring SP2 is disposed around the shaft portion 957a2, and is disposed in a slightly compressed state between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1. Thereby, the annular portion 957a3 can be biased in a direction away from the main body portion 957a1. Therefore, when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be maintained separated from the main body portion 957a1. Moreover, when the application (supply) of power is cut off after power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be quickly separated from the main body portion 957a1.

The case member 957b is formed into a box-like body that covers the main body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, and one side of the case member 957b into which the shaft portion 957a2 is inserted is open. Further, the case member 957b is formed with an insertion hole 957b1 that penetrates in the axial direction of the shaft portion 957a2, and an opening 957b2 that penetrates on the side opposite to the open side.

The insertion hole 957b1 is a screw hole through which a screw that fastens the passage member 955 and the case member 957b (drive unit 957) is inserted, and is formed larger than the outer shape of the tip of the screw. Further, the screw inserted through the insertion hole 957b1 is screwed into the passage member 955.

The opening 957b2 is formed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 957a2. Thereby, the wiring HS1 (see FIG. 105) can be connected to the main body portion 957a1 via the opening 957b2.

The connecting member 957c is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 957c is formed into a plate-shaped body parallel to a plane perpendicular to the axis of the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a. The connecting member 957c has a first recessed portion 957c1 recessed from an end surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 99(b)) with a dimension larger than the diameter of the annular portion 957a3, and the first recessed portion. It is provided with a second recessed part 957c2 located on the solenoid 957a side of 957c1 and recessed to a size larger than the diameter of the shaft part 957a2, and an engaging part 957c3 protruding toward the ball entry member 953 side.

The first recessed portion 957c1 is a groove into which the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U-shape with one side open in the gravity direction when viewed in cross section. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 957c1 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 957a3. Thereby, the annular portion 957a3 can be inserted into the first recessed portion 957c1.

The second recessed portion 957c2 is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 957a2 and the connecting member 957c when the annular portion 957a3 is disposed inside the first recessed portion 957c1 as described above. It is formed in a substantially U-shape with one side open in the direction of gravity when viewed from the rear, and is opened from the first recessed portion 957c1 side to the solenoid 957a side.

The engaging portion 957c3 is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side. In the engaging portion 957c3, a connecting portion 958a of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, is provided inside the bent portion. As a result, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3, and the transmission member 958 is displaced. Note that a detailed explanation of the displacement of the transmission member 958 will be given later.

The transmission member 958 is formed into a plate-shaped body that is approximately triangular in side view. The transmission member 958 has a shaft hole 958b that penetrates circularly in the plate thickness direction, a coupling portion 958a that protrudes cylindrical in the plate thickness direction from an end on the coupling member 957c side, and a tip portion that protrudes toward the plate member 951 side. 958c.

As described above, the shaft hole 958b is a through hole into which the shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102(a)) is inserted. Further, the shaft hole 958b is formed so that its inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 955b1. Thereby, the transmission member 958 is rotatably supported by the passage member 955.

As described above, the connecting portion 958a is arranged inside the bent portion of the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3, and the transmitting member 958 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 958b.

The tip portion 958c is inserted into the recessed portion 951d1 of the plate member 951. Therefore, when the solenoid 957a is operated and the transmission member 958 is rotated around the axis of the shaft hole 958b, the engagement portion 951d can be pushed up by displacing the tip portion 958c. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be rotated.

Next, displacement of the plate member 951 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. 102(a) and 102(b) are cross-sectional views of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 along the CII-CII line of FIG. 99(c). FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b) are perspective front views of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950.

Note that FIGS. 102(a) and 103(a) show the plate member 951 in a closed state, and FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b) show the plate member 951 in an open state. The closed state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body 951a covers the opening of the main body 953a of the ball entry member 953, and the open state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body 951a covers the main body 953a of the ball entry member 953. It is in a state separated from the opening of the portion 953a.

As shown in FIGS. 102(a) and 103(a), when the application (supply) of power to the main body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a is cut off, the urging force of the coil spring SP2 causes the shaft portion 957a2 to become a member of the plate member. 951 side (left side in FIG. 102(a)). Accordingly, the connecting member 957c disposed on the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is similarly disposed on the plate member 951 side that is spaced apart from the main body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmitting member 958 is disposed inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, so the connecting portion 958a is pushed toward the plate member 951 side. As a result, force is transmitted to the distal end portion 958c of the transmission member 958 in the direction of rotation about the shaft hole 958b to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 102(a)).

When the tip portion 958c is pushed down to one side in the gravity direction, the tip portion 958c and the recessed portion 951d1 come into contact, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 approaches the opening 953a1 side of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953. is rotated to Thereby, the plate member 951 can be maintained in a closed state.

Further, when the plate member 951 is in the closed state, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side and the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side are in contact with each other. As a result, if a player makes an unauthorized operation and forcibly opens the plate member 951 side, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side can be pushed out by the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the force of unauthorized operation from being applied to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, damage to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 103(b), when power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, the shaft portion 957a2 is drawn (adsorbed) inside the main body portion 957a1. It is said to be in a state of Accordingly, the connecting member 957c disposed on the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is similarly disposed on the main body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmitting member 958 is disposed inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, so as the connecting member 957c is displaced, the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) (to the right in FIG. 102(b)). As a result, a force is transmitted to the transmission member 965 in the direction of rotating the distal end portion 958c around the shaft hole 958b in the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 102(b)).

When the tip portion 958c is pushed up to the other side in the gravity direction, the tip portion 958c and the recessed portion 951d1 come into contact, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 is separated from the opening side of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953. rotated in the direction of This allows the plate member 951 to be in an open state.

Further, when the plate member 951 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the plate member 951 can be displaced in the opening direction using its own weight, so that the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 It is possible to suppress the force applied to the As a result, damage to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the inner portion of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953 will be described. FIG. 104(a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 104(b) is a sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 along the CIVb-CIVb line of FIG. 104(a). Note that FIG. 104(a) shows a state in which the plate member 951 is removed, and FIG. 104(b) shows a state in which the plate member 951 is attached. Moreover, in FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b), the plate member 951 is shown in a closed state.

As shown in FIG. 104, inside the main body part 953a, there is an inclined surface 954a that is inclined toward one side in the direction of gravity toward the outside from an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 104(a)) of the main body part 953a. A recess 954b recessed at the end of the slope 954a, a protrusion 954c protruding from the connecting portion of the slope 954a and the recess 954b, and a projection 954c provided at each end of the longitudinal direction and a surface on the passage member 955 side. It is formed with an upright wall 954d that stands in series.

The inclined surface 954a is a rolling surface for game balls that rolls the game balls flowing between the pair of opposing inflow ports 953j toward the inflow port 953j, and is formed to be inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j side. . Thereby, the game ball flowing between the opposing inflow ports 953j can be rolled to the inflow port 953j.

The recess 954b is located in front of the inlet 953j (lower side in FIG. 104(b)) and is recessed toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). In addition, the concave portion 954b is formed such that the concave distal end surface is inclined downward toward the inlet 953j, and receives the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 of the main body portion 953a. can be guided to the recessed portion 955a). Therefore, the game ball that enters from the opening 953a1 of the main body part 953a can be made to flow into the recessed part 955a of the passage member 955 in a short time, and as a result, before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, the game ball can be made to flow into the recessed part 955a of the passage member 955. It is possible to suppress over-winning by suppressing the number of game balls being entered into the ball.

Further, the recess 954b extends linearly in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (vertical direction in FIG. 104(b)). This allows the rolling surface 953a2 to easily receive game balls rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (left-right direction in FIG. It is possible to guide (inflow) by time. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Furthermore, the width dimension L9 (see FIG. 104(b)) of the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the recessed portion 954b is set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, when a plurality of game balls are received in the recess 954b, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member 955 in an aligned state. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Furthermore, the width of the recess 954b in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is reduced from the passage member 955 side toward the opening 953a1 side (plate member 951 side). Thereby, when a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is received in the recess 954b, the game ball can easily flow toward the passage member 955 side. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The second inclined surface 954e is formed on the opposite side of the above-mentioned inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 across the recess 954b, and is inclined downward toward the inlet 953j (passage member 955). It is formed by As a result, the game balls that have entered the second inclined surface 954e are rolled in front of the inflow port 953j by utilizing the downward slope of the second inclined surface 954e, and quickly rolled toward the passage member 955. can be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The standing wall 954d is formed at a position spaced a predetermined distance from the second inclined surface 954e, and also directs the rolling direction of the game balls flowing into the second inclined surface 954e toward the inlet 953j (path member 955) side. 2 guide surface 954d1.

The second guide surface 954d1 is an end surface on the opening 953a1 side, and is formed to be inclined from the opening 953a1 side toward the inlet 953j side toward the recess 954b side in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. That is, the second guide surface 954d1 is inclined from the opening 953a1 toward the passage member 955, and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2, and also forms a contact with the longitudinal end of the rolling surface 953a2. It is arranged between the passage member 955 and the passage member 955. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the main body part 953a from the longitudinal end of the opening 953a1 can be quickly rolled toward the passage member 955. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The protruding portions 954c are formed at both longitudinal ends of the rolling surface 953a2 of the inclined surface 954a, and protrude toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). Thereby, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling outward on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 104(b)) of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced before the concave portion 954b (path member 955). . That is, while increasing the rolling speed of the game ball up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is slowed down before (immediately before) the recess 954b, and the game ball passes from the slope 954a through the recess 954b. Rolling up to the second inclined surface 954e can be suppressed. Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a shorter time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The protrusion 954c is formed into a substantially triangular shape when viewed from above, and one surface is connected to the surface opposite to the opening 953a1, and one of the remaining two surfaces is connected to the side edge 954c3 on the side of the recess 954b. is connected to the side surface of the recess 954b, and the remaining guide surface 954c1 is an opening 953a1 toward the rolling direction of the game ball (the longitudinally outward direction of the rolling surface 953a2) of the inclined surface 954a of the game ball. Formed with a slant to the side. Thereby, the rolling speed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced before the recess 954b (path member 955).

That is, while increasing the rolling speed of the game ball in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is slowed down before (immediately before) the recess 954b. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball from rolling from the slope 954a to the second slope 954e through the recess 954b. Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a shorter time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Further, as described above, the rotation axis of the plate member 951 is formed between both ends in the width direction of the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a, so when the plate member 951 is in an open state, The end of the plate member 951 can be located on one end (upper side in the gravity direction) in the gravity direction than the rolling surface 953a2. Thereby, when the plate member 951 is in the open state, it is possible to suppress the game balls that have flowed into the inside of the main body part 951a from jumping out from the opening 953a1 side of the main body part 951a.

Furthermore, since the game ball guided toward the opening 953a1 by the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the plate member 951, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be decelerated before the recess 954b (passage member 955). That is, while increasing the rolling speed of the game ball up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is slowed down before (immediately before) the recess 954b, and the game ball passes from the slope 954a through the recess 954b. Rolling up to the second inclined surface 954e can be suppressed. Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a shorter time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Further, the guide surface 954c1 is formed in a downwardly inclined shape from the connecting portion between the side edge portion 954c3 and the inlet 953j to the side portion 954c2 at the connecting portion with the inclined surface 954a. This allows the game balls rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 to flow into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) in a short time while suppressing the game balls from jumping out from the opening 953a1. I can do it.

That is, among the game balls that are rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 with the inclined surface 954a facing the passage member 955, the opening 933a1 is used for game balls whose rolling speed is relatively low (slow). Since there is a low risk of it flying out from the surface, by making it contact the guide surface 954c1 and guiding it toward the opening 953a1, it is possible to prevent it from rolling from the slope 954a through the recess 954b to the second slope 954e. Therefore, it is possible to flow into the passage member 955 in a shorter time. On the other hand, a game ball with a relatively high (fast) rolling speed can be guided over the guide surface 954c1 to the standing wall 954d formed on the second slope 954e side. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball is consumed by climbing over the guide surface 954c1 and colliding with the erected wall 954d, and it is possible to reliably decelerate the game ball. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be prevented from jumping out from the opening 953a1, and can be made to quickly flow into the inlet 953j (path member 955). As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In addition, a side edge 954c3 of the end face of the protruding portion 954c opposite to the standing wall 954d extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. A second side edge 954d2 of the end surface of the standing wall 954d opposite to the protrusion 954c extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The side edge portion 954c3 has a length L30 (see FIG. 104(b)) in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the second side edge portion 954d2. It is set smaller than the length dimension L31 in the direction of Thereby, the game ball that has climbed over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge 954d2 of the standing wall 954d, and can be reliably decelerated, and can be easily positioned near the passage member 955. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Further, the distance L32 (see FIG. 104(a)) between the intermediate position of the standing wall 954d in its thickness direction and the second inclined surface 954e is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball that has climbed over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge 954d2 of the upright wall 954d, and can be reliably decelerated. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The protruding portion 954c is located on the extension line of the second guide surface 954d1 of the standing wall 954d in the inclination direction, and the game ball guided toward the recess 954b (path member 955) by the second guide surface 954d1 is rolled. Even if the dynamic speed is relatively high (low), the game ball can be brought into contact with the protrusion 954c and decelerated. Therefore, game balls can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The distance L33 (see FIG. 104(a)) from the concave surface of the concave portion 954b to the protruding tip of the protruding portion 954c is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. In addition, as described above, the protruding portion 954c is formed in a continuous manner with the side surface of the recessed portion 954b, so that the game ball guided toward the passage member 955 by the second guide surface 954d1 of the standing wall 954d is rolled. Even when the speed is relatively high (fast), the game ball can easily come into contact with the protruding portion 954c. Therefore, such game balls can be decelerated and can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106, the assembled state of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 will be described. FIG. 105(a) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960, and FIG. 105(b) is a side view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the driving unit 960. FIG. 106(a) is a sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 along the CVIa-CVIa line in FIG. 105(a), and FIG. 106(b) is a sectional view on the CVIb-CVIb line in FIG. 106(a). It is a sectional view of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 in .

In addition, in FIGS. 105(a) and 105(b), the wiring HS1 is connected to the solenoid 957a that operates the plate member 951, and the wiring HS1 is connected to the solenoid 610 that operates the pair of wing members (see FIG. 83(a)). A part of the wiring HS2 is shown in the figure. Further, in FIG. 106(b), a part of the wiring HS3 connected to the detection device SE1 that detects the number of game balls that have flowed into the specific winning hole 65a is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the drive unit 960 that drives the wing member 945 (see FIG. 83(a)) of the winning opening unit 930 is located at a position where a part thereof overlaps with the specific winning opening unit 950 when viewed from the front. is formed. Thereby, a space can be formed on the side opposite to the gaming area (back side) of the second winning opening 140 (a pair of wing members 945).

Here, conventionally, the second winning opening 140, a pair of wing members 945 that open or close the second winning opening 140, a first driving means that drives the pair of wing members 945, and a specific winning opening 65a. A gaming machine is known that includes a board member 951 that opens or closes the specific winning opening 65a, and a second drive means that drives the board member 951. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first driving means and the second driving means are respectively disposed on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 and the plate member 951, so that the pair of wing members 945 and the plate member There is a problem in that it is difficult to arrange other members or devices on the back side of the member 951, and it is difficult to utilize the space effectively.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 is arranged on the back side of the plate member 951, it is possible to form a space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945. Yes (see Figure 97). That is, by consolidating the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning opening 65a), other members and devices can be arranged. A space for this can be secured on the back side of the pair of feather members 945 (second prize opening 140), and the space can be used effectively accordingly.

Further, the operating means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 disposed near the central opening formed in the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82) (where the center frame 86 is disposed) is moved far from the central opening. By disposing it on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning a prize opening unit 950) disposed on the base plate, the movable body of the operation unit that is visible to the player through the inside of the center opening (center frame 86) is attached to the base plate. 60 (opposite side to the gaming area) to make it difficult for players to see.

That is, the movable body of the operating unit is disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 when normally (retracted), making it difficult for players to see, and when movable (extended) the movable body of the operating unit is disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 (center frame 86). ), which makes it easier for players to see, the operation means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 disposed near the central opening can be moved to the specific winning opening located far from the central opening. By disposing the movable body at a position horizontally overlapping with the unit 950, the movable body can be easily disposed at a position away from the central opening when retreating. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body of the operating unit during normal (retreat) mode. As a result, when the movable body is operated to be in an extended state, it is possible to easily provide interest to the player.

Further, the projected area of the plate member 951 when viewed from the front is set to be larger than the projected area of the pair of wing members 945. Therefore, the dead space on the back side of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized. That is, in the game board 13 that includes two displacement members (a plate member 951 and a pair of wing members 945), respective driving means (a driving unit 957 and a Since the drive unit 960) is disposed, it is possible to easily dispose each drive means on the back side of one displacement member (plate member 951), and also on the back side of the other displacement member (pair of wing members 945). You can create a space.

Furthermore, since the plate member 951 is formed to have a larger projected area when viewed from the front than the projected area when viewed from the front of the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951, The dead space on the back side of the prize opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105(a), a drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and a drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are operated in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951 (in the left-right direction in FIG. 105(a)). are arranged in parallel along the Therefore, the dead space on the back side of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

In this case, as described above, the plate member 951 (specific winning a prize opening unit 950) is disposed at a position farther from the central opening of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 81) than the pair of wing members 945, and The longitudinal direction is arranged perpendicular to the separation direction. This makes it easier to secure a space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945. As a result, the space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 can be effectively utilized.

As described above, the rolling part 943a is formed on the front base 943 of the front unit 940, the rolling part 943a is disposed through the second prize opening 140 of the back base 941, and the drive unit 960 is formed on the front base 943 of the front unit 940. 941, the drive unit 960 can be held (disposed) on the front base 943 at the same time as the rear base 941 is fastened and fixed to the front base 943. This can prevent forgetting to attach the drive unit 960 when attaching the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (gaming board 13).

The solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 are set at substantially the same position on the opposite side (back side) to the plate member 951 side of the specific winning opening unit 950, and the drive unit Wiring HS1 and wiring HS2 connected to the solenoid 957a of 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 are connected from the end of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 on the side opposite to the plate member 951 (back side). Thereby, the wiring of the solenoid 957a and the solenoid 610 can be easily arranged together. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wiring from coming apart on the side opposite to the gaming area (back side) of the game board 13, and it is possible to suppress the wiring HS1 and HS2 from interfering with other devices and accessories.

That is, the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 that drives the wing member 945 and the solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are arranged with the axial directions of the shaft portion 961b and the shaft portion 957a2 facing in the same direction. At the same time, the wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 are connected (pulled out) to the sides of the main body portion 961a and the shaft portion 957a2 opposite to the shaft portions 961b and 957a2. This makes it easier to combine the wiring HS1 of the drive unit 960 and the wiring HS2 of the drive unit 957.

The drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are arranged at positions where both side surfaces in the direction of gravity are substantially flush with each other. This makes it possible to simplify the shape of a partitioning member (not shown) that partitions the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 and limits the flow of an electromagnetic field to the area where the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 are disposed.

That is, the side surfaces of the main body portion 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body portion 957a1 of the drive unit 957 are formed to have different sizes, or the side surfaces of the main body portion 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body portion 957a1 of the drive unit 957 are formed on both sides in the direction of gravity. When the surfaces are arranged at different positions in the direction of gravity, both side surfaces of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 in the direction of gravity form a step, so the sections are divided according to the step. It becomes necessary to form a member, and the shape of such a partition member becomes complicated.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are disposed at positions where both side surfaces of the main body part 961a and the main body part 957a1 in the direction of gravity are substantially flush with each other, and the outer surfaces form a step. Therefore, the partition member can have a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the partition member can be simplified.

Note that the partition member is a conductive barrier that partitions the area where the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are installed from other areas and restricts the flow of electromagnetic waves between these two areas. It is formed from a metal plate.

Moreover, the transmission member 965 is arranged between the passage member 955 of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 and the rolling part 943a of the front unit 940 (see FIG. 97), and the transmission member 965 is provided at the tip (insertion part 965e). Since a displacement member 966 is disposed that slides to open and close the pair of wing members 945 as the pair of wing members 945 rotates, compared to a conventional product in which the pair of wing members 945 is opened and closed only by a rotating member, the second prize is achieved. Space can be secured on the back side of the opening 140 and on both sides (lateral sides) of the rolling portion 943a. In addition, unlike conventional products, there is no need to bend the throwing path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning port 140 toward the specific winning port unit 950 in order to avoid interference with the rotating member, so the second The winning hole 140 can be brought close to the specific winning hole 65a.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 106(a) and 106(b), the drive unit 960 is arranged at a position overlapping with the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE2 arranged in a pair on the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 in front view. will be established. That is, the detection device SE2 is arranged between the plate member 951 and the drive unit 960. As a result, if, for example, the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with from the specific winning opening 65a, the drive unit 960 can be hidden by the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE1, so that such illicit act cannot be carried out. It can be made difficult.

Here, as described above, when the drive means (drive unit 960) that drives the wing member 945 is disposed on the back side of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, a piano wire or the like is inserted through the gap in the pachinko machine 10. If a hole is formed in the ball entry member 953 from the gaming area side to the drive unit 960 with a drill or the like for the purpose of fraudulently operating the gaming machine, it will be difficult for store staff to discover the fraudulent activity. There was a risk of being exposed.

That is, since the plate member 951 is disposed on the gaming area (player) side of the ball entry member 953, the ball entry member 953 is hidden by the plate member 951, and the store staff cannot prevent fraud caused by the ball entry member 953. is said to be difficult to discover.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in order to secure the path from the specific prize opening 65a to the first driving means, if a tool such as a drill is used to perform hole-drilling, the detection Since the detection board SE1b of the device SE1 can be destroyed, fraudulent activity can be discovered by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the plate member 951 is opened and tampering is done to the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a, the drive unit 960 can be moved to the plate member 951 by closing the plate member 951. Since the location where the fraud has been committed cannot be seen, it is particularly effective to be able to detect fraud by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1.

In addition, since the detection device SE1 is a reused item (ready-made product) that is the same as the detection devices that detect other game balls (for example, the detection device SE2 and the detection device SE3), a degree of freedom is ensured in its external size. Can not. Therefore, a gap is formed between the opposing detection devices SE1. Therefore, if the player drills a hole in the ball entry member 953 with a drill or the like, aiming at the gap, there is a risk that the player's fraudulent activity may not be reported to the clerk.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the wiring HS3 is connected to opposite sides of the pair of detection devices SE1. Thereby, the wiring HS3 can be arranged in the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. Therefore, when a player penetrates the gap between the pair of detection devices SE1 with a drill or the like, the wire HS3 can be broken by the drill. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 notifies the error, making it easier for the clerk to discover fraud.

That is, the wiring is relatively susceptible to damage. Therefore, in order to secure the path from the specific prize opening 65a to the drive unit, for example, if a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole, the wiring HS3 may be damaged (disconnected) due to the fraudulent act. ) can be easily done. Alternatively, it is possible to make the user recognize that it is difficult to commit fraudulent acts without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring HS3, thereby making it easier to deter fraudulent acts.

Moreover, an annular protrusion 953c into which a screw for fastening the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is screwed is formed between the pair of opposing detection devices SE1. As a result, when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with from the open side (E10(a) lower side) of the ball entry member 953, the drive unit 960 can be hidden, making it more difficult to commit such fraudulent acts. That is, as described above, it is difficult to shield the front surface of the drive unit 960 with the pair of detection devices SE1, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of opposing detection devices SE1. By setting the fastening position to , the unshielded area in the front of the drive unit 960 can be compensated for by the screw, making it more difficult for fraudulent acts to occur.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 106(b), the wiring HS3 is arranged so as to be wound around the annular projection 953c of the ball entry member 953. Thereby, the wiring HS3 can be routed (positioned) over a wider range of the gap formed between the pair of opposing detection devices SE1. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the wiring HS3. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with from the open side of the ball entry member 953, such tampering can be made more difficult. Alternatively, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that it is difficult to commit fraudulent acts without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring HS3, thereby making it easier to deter fraudulent acts.

Therefore, when the player aims a drill or the like to penetrate the gap between the opposing detection devices SE1, the wire HS3 can be easily broken by the drill. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 notifies the error, making it easier for the clerk to discover fraud.

Further, the wiring HS3 is arranged so as to be wound around the annular projection 953c. This makes it difficult for force in the shearing direction to act on the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS. That is, when the wiring HS3 is not wound around the annular protrusion 953c and is discharged to the outside of the specific winning opening unit 950, the wiring HS3 is pulled by the specific winning opening unit 950 in the discharge direction, and the detection is performed. A force in the shearing direction acts on the connecting portion between the device SE1 and the wiring HS. Since the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS3 is formed by an insertion type connector, it is easily cut by force in the shearing direction.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular projection 953c, when the wiring HS3 is pulled in the ejection direction of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, the connecting portion with the detection device SE1 The direction of the force acting on the wiring HS3 can be made to act in the direction in which the wiring HS3 is connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring HS3 from being cut at the connection portion with the detection device SE1.

Further, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other is formed at a position that is biased towards the end of the wiring HS3 of the detection device SE1 on the opposite side to the discharge side. Therefore, the wiring HS3 of the pair of detection devices SE1 is pulled out to the side opposite to the screw engagement position (annular protrusion 953c), so the wiring HS3 is routed (positioned) over a wider range in front of the drive unit 960. be able to. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the screws and wiring. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened to tamper with the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a, such tampering can be made more difficult.

Next, the overall configuration of the ball throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. 107(a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 107(b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit 970. 108(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 108(b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the ball throwing unit 970.

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the ball throwing unit 970 includes a distribution unit 980 that is disposed on the player side (game area side) and has a space inside which a game ball can be inserted, and a game area of the distribution unit 980. and a passage unit 990 disposed on the opposite side.

The sorting unit 980 includes an opening (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) that is continuous with the first winning port 64 and second winning port 140 of the winning port unit 930 described above, and the opening (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b). ) can be received inside the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the gaming area via the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. Note that a detailed explanation of the distribution unit 980 will be given later.

The passage unit 990 is disposed on the other end side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 980 in the gravity direction. The passage unit 990 has a plurality of openings (first through hole 991a to second through hole 991d) on the surface facing the distribution unit 980, and receives game balls thrown inside the distribution unit 980 through the openings. A detailed explanation of the passage unit 990 will be given later.

Next, the configuration of the distribution unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 109 to 112. 109(a) is a front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 109(b) is a side view of the distribution unit 980. 110 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 980. 112(a) is a sectional view of the distribution unit 980 taken along the line CXIIa-CXIIa in FIG. 109(a), and FIG. 112(b) is a sectional view of the distribution unit 980 taken along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a). It is.

As shown in FIGS. 109 to 112, the sorting unit 980 has a rear base 985, a front base 981 disposed on the player side of the rear base 985, and a rotating unit between the front base 981 and the rear base. It is formed mainly of a distribution section 983 disposed in a possible state and a cover member 987 disposed on the back side of the rear base 985 at a position corresponding to the distribution section 983.

The back base 985 is made of a colored semi-transparent (in this embodiment, blue) resin material, and includes a base portion 985a formed in a plate shape, and a plurality of openings (openings) passing through the base portion 985a in the thickness direction. 985b to 985g), a recessed portion 985h recessed on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the plurality of openings, and a housing portion 986b and a protruding portion 986e protruding from the opposite surface of the recessed portion 985h. be prepared and formed.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of circular fastening holes 986c and 986d penetrating the outer edge of the base portion 985a, and an inclined surface that slopes toward one side in the direction of gravity on the side opposite to the front base 981 side. 986a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole into which a screw inserted through the front base 981, which will be described later, is screwed. Thereby, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 986d is a hole into which a screw passing through a passage unit 990 described later is screwed. Thereby, the back base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the passage unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position overlapping a portion of openings 985b to 985f, which will be described later, on the other side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined surface 986a is formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Thereby, the downward direction of the game balls flowing down in the direction of gravity can be guided toward the openings 985b to 985f. As a result, game balls can easily flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The recessed portion 985h is recessed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 (the front side in FIG. 109(b)), and is formed approximately at the center of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (left-right direction in FIG. 109(b)). be done. Further, the recess 985h is formed to a size that can accommodate a portion of a distribution section 983, which will be described later, inside, and is provided with a bearing section 985j that protrudes in an annular shape from the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than an outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The opening 985b and the opening 985c are respectively formed at both ends in the lateral direction of the base portion 985a, and the size of the inner edge is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the openings 985b and 985c are formed such that the inner surfaces on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) are inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985d is formed at approximately the center of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (FIG. 109(b) left-right direction), and its position in the gravity direction (FIG. 109(b) vertical direction) is approximately the same as the openings 985b and 985c. set to the position. Further, like the openings 985b and 985c, the opening 985d is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward as it goes toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985e is formed between the opening 985b and the opening 985d, and the opening 985f is formed between the opening 985c and the opening 985d. In addition, the openings 985e and 985f extend in the direction of gravity into inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1, which are spaces that open on the front base 981 side, and discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3, which have spaces that open on the side opposite to the front base 981 side. It is formed mainly by intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 that communicate the passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between the facing sides of a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through. Ru. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage can be made to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed to extend in the gravity direction, and the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) communicates with the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1, and is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. . Thereby, the game balls passing through the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 can be made to flow into the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2.

Furthermore, a recessed portion 985f4 is formed in the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, which is recessed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the throwing direction (direction of gravity) of the game ball. The recessed portion 985f4 is a cutout for arranging a detection device SE3, which will be described later, inside the recessed portion 985f4, and is set to have substantially the same external shape as the detection device SE3 when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the detection device SE3 can be inserted and disposed from the back side of the base portion 985a (the side opposite to the front base 981).

Further, in the detection device SE3, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set parallel to the extending direction of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the space of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 substantially coincide with each other. placed in position. As a result, when the game ball flows down from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 to the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), it is possible to allow the game ball to pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. can. Thereby, game balls passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be detected.

Further, in the detection device SE3, since the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is formed parallel to the direction of gravity, the dead weight of the game ball can be easily utilized when throwing the game ball to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from getting caught in the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 and the connecting portion with the detection hole SE1a. Note that the detailed configuration of the detection device SE3 is the same as that of the detection device SE1 described above, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The recessed portions 985e4 and 985f4 are formed in a continuous manner with the spaces of the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3. That is, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed using the detection device SE3. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the length dimension of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 in the direction of gravity from increasing. As a result, it is possible to suppress the back base 985 from increasing in size in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passages 985e3, 985f3 are connected to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. In addition, the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d of the passage unit 990, which will be described later, when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game balls passing through the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 can flow into the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3, and the balls can be passed through the spaces and sent to the passage unit 990.

The opening 985g is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the opening 985d. Further, like the opening 985d, the opening 985g is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between the facing sides of a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through. Ru. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be made to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The housing portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings. Further, the accommodating portion 986b is a portion that accommodates a magnetic body 988b, which will be described later, inside, and its inner diameter is set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed in a cylindrical body. Further, the protruding dimension of the accommodating portion 986b is set larger than the axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b. Thereby, the magnetic body 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b. Furthermore, since the housing portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular bodies, even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is slightly increased due to manufacturing errors, the pair of semicircular bodies can be elastically deformed. A magnetic body 988b can be provided.

The protruding portion 986e is provided in a cylindrical shape from a position opposite to the above-described bearing portion 985j with the base portion 985a interposed therebetween. The protruding portion 986e also includes a circular fastening hole formed in the shaft thereof. The fastening hole is a hole into which the tip of a screw inserted through a cover member 987 (described later) is screwed together, and by screwing the screw while the cover member 987 is in contact with the cover member 987, the cover member 987 is fastened to the back base 985. Can be fixed.

The magnetic body 988b is made of a magnet, and by being disposed in the housing portion 986b, it is possible to generate a magnetic field toward the front base 981 via the base portion 985a. This makes it possible to repel a magnetic body 988c disposed in the distribution section 983, which will be described later, to facilitate the displacement of the distribution section 983.

The front base 981 is formed from a colored semi-transparent (in this embodiment, blue) resin material. The front base 981 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape that is larger than the back base 985 when viewed from the front, and includes a base plate 981a and a bulge that bulges out from the base plate 981a toward the player (opposite side to the back base 986). It is formed mainly with a protruding part 982.

The base plate 981a is formed as a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of insertion holes 981g extending through the plate thickness direction at its outer peripheral edge, and a first guide wall protruding toward the rear base 985 side. 981f and a second guide wall 981d, a second insertion hole 981e penetrating near the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and a plate on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulge 982. It is formed mainly with a through hole 981c penetrating in the thickness direction.

The insertion hole 981g is a hole through which a screw (not shown) for fastening the assembled ball throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82) is inserted, and is set to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw. .

The first guide walls 981f are formed in a semicircular annular shape, and are formed in pairs in the lateral direction with a bulge 982, which will be described later, sandwiched therebetween. Further, the first guide wall 981f is formed with a semicircular open portion facing substantially the center in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a.

The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed at two locations in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a. Further, the second guide wall 981d is formed below a bulge 982, which will be described later, in the direction of gravity, and a through hole 981c is formed between the two locations.

The first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d have an inner edge shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the periphery of the fastening hole 986c of the back base 985 described above. As a result, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined, the wall around the fastening hole 986c can be inserted inside the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981f and the second The guide wall 981d can be positioned.

The second insertion hole 981e is formed at the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and at the center of the second guide wall 981d. The second insertion hole 981e is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 986c when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are assembled, and a screw is inserted from the front base 981 side and screwed into the fastening hole 986d. By doing so, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened together.

The through hole 981c is formed in a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the through hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b that stands up along the edge thereof on the side opposite to the rear base 985 side (on the near side in the paper of FIG. 109(a)). In addition, the through hole 981c is a part that communicates with the second winning hole 140 of the winning hole unit 930 described above, and when the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60, the second winning hole 140 It is formed at a position that overlaps with the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the ball.

The side wall portion 981b is formed in such a size that the upright end surface contacts the second ball throwing portion 942c of the winning hole unit 930 in a state where the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. In addition, the side wall portion 981b has a rolling surface 981c1 on the inner surface on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is located closer to the other end side in the gravity direction than the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a, and the back base 985 It is formed with a downward slope towards the side.

Further, the side wall portion 981b includes a projection 981b1 projecting from the erected tip surface. The protrusion 981b1 is formed at a position spaced apart from the rolling surface 981c1 by a radius of the game ball in the direction of gravity. Thereby, when the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling part 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be made less likely to be caught between the rolling part 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed explanation of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges out from the base plate 981a, and is set to a size that allows a game ball to be inserted into the inside thereof, and a game ball flowing into the inside from the inflow port 982d passes through the bulging portion 982. The ball-throwing path TR0 includes a first path TR1 and a second path TR2 that branch from the ball-throwing path TR0. The bulging portion 982 is formed into a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is bent toward the rear base 985 side and stands approximately halfway between the inlet 982d, which is formed by cutting out the upper end in the direction of gravity. It is formed mainly of an upright wall 982a and recesses 982e to 982j recessed at a plurality of locations on the other side in the direction of gravity.

The inlet 982d is cut out and has a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the inflow port 982d has an inner edge portion that corresponds to the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the first winning port 64 of the winning port unit 930 when the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. Formed in overlapping positions.

The inlet 982d also includes a second protrusion 982d1 that protrudes toward the side opposite to the rear base 985 at the edge on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the shape of the inner edge of the first recessed notch 942g1 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are disposed on the base plate 60, the second protrusion 982d1 The second protrusion 982d1 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the recessed notch 942g1.

Further, the distance L34 (see FIG. 109(a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the end face of the inflow port 982d on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is from the inner edge of the first concave notch 942g1 to the first thrown ball. The distance L35 (see FIG. 87(b)) to the inner edge of the portion 942g on one side in the gravity direction is set larger than the distance L35 (see FIG. 87(b)). As a result, when the game ball thrown to the first ball throwing part 942g via the first winning opening 64 flows into the inflow port 982d, the inflow port 982d (bulging part 982) and the first ball throwing part 942g are connected to each other. You can avoid getting caught in between.

The erected wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape that is separated from the outer edge shape of the bulged portion 982 by a predetermined distance when viewed from the front. Further, the standing wall 982a is formed below the inflow port 982d in the gravity direction, and includes an abutment portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the standing direction above the gravity direction.

The standing wall 982a has a horizontal separation distance L36 (see FIG. 112(b)) from the inner edge of the outer circumferential portion of the bulging portion 982 that is set larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can be placed between the opposing sides. A first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 are formed as spaces through which the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can pass.

The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed on the downstream side of the distribution section 983, which will be described later, and game balls passing through the distribution section 983 are thrown to either direction. The distribution section 983 is configured to be able to alternately send game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the throwing of the game balls flowing into the first winning opening 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

On the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the standing wall 982a, a bearing portion 982c is formed which protrudes in an annular shape from the inner surface of the bulge portion 982 toward the rear base 985 side. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports a distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and has an inner diameter set to be approximately the same as an outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

Furthermore, as described above, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j of the back base 985, so when combining the front base 981 and the back base 985, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j. By inserting the other end of the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985.

The contact portion 982a1 is formed on the rotation locus of the distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and the amount of rotational displacement of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by contacting the action portion 983a of the distribution portion 983. Note that a detailed explanation of the contact state between the contact portion 982a1 and the distribution portion 983 will be given later.

The recessed portion 982e and the recessed portion 982f are recessed from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Further, inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2, which is a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, is formed.

The first branch passage BK1 communicates with the opening 985b of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch passage BK1 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985b of the back base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed to be able to receive the game balls flowing down the second passage TR2, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985c of the back base 985.

The recessed portion 982h and the recessed portion 982j are recessed from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. That is, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 extend on one side in the direction of gravity by the distance of the recess 982h and the recess 982j.

The first passage TR1 communicates with the opening 985e of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d are allowed to flow into the first passage TR1, and the game balls that have flowed in can also flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d are allowed to flow into the first passage TR1, and the game balls that have flowed in can also flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

The recessed portion 982g is formed between the recessed portion 982h and the recessed portion 982j, and the recessed direction is set parallel to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Furthermore, a third branch passage BK3, which is a space communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, is formed inside the recess 982g. Therefore, since the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, it is possible to downsize the distribution unit 980. .

The third branch passage BK3 communicates with the opening 985d of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the third branch passage is formed to be able to receive the game balls flowing down the first passage or the second passage, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985d of the back base 985.

The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side of the bulging portion 982 in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and extends obliquely toward the back base 985 side toward the one side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined portion 982b is formed at a position facing from the opening 985b to the opening 985f when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, the second passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2, and the third branch passage BK3 are brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b. can be guided toward the openings 985b to 985f to make it easier to flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1 are connected to the recessed portions 982h and 982j, and the inclined portion 982b, and the erected end surfaces thereof descend toward the rear base 985 side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 109(b)). tilted. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are brought into contact with the upright end surfaces of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1, and are guided toward the openings 985e and 985f, It is possible to easily flow into the opening 985e and the opening 985f.

Further, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed to be connected to the inclined portion 982b. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b and guided toward the rear base 985 side, and collided with the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1, thereby causing the game balls to flow through the opening 985e. and can easily flow into the opening 985f. Further, since the distance between the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be reduced by the slope of the slope portion 982b, the rigidity of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be increased and durability can be improved.

Here, as described above, the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is visible to the player via the front unit 940 (winning port unit 930) arranged on the player side. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through the front unit 940 become difficult to visually recognize from the player side. Furthermore, when the guide parts 982h1 and 982j1 are set up on the front side of the opening 985e and the opening 985f, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are There was a problem that it became difficult for people to see it.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b, so that the vertical dimension of the inclined portion 982b can be reduced. Therefore, the game balls thrown into the openings 985e and 985f (the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) can be easily recognized even through the front unit 940. That is, in the present embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be located on the back base 985 side as it goes in the downward direction of the game ball, thereby ensuring rigidity and guiding the game ball. Since the thickness of the portions 982h1 and 982j1 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner, visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

The distribution part 983 is set to have a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the facing front base 981 and the rear base 985, and is formed in a substantially T-shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the distribution part 983 penetrates through the T-shaped acting part 983a on one side, an intermediate plate 983b protruding from a substantially central position in the extending direction of the acting part 983a, and a connecting part between the acting part 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. a through hole 983c, a contact portion 983d that bulges out in a circular shape around the axis of the through hole 983c, and a wall portion 983e that is connected to the working portion 983a and the back base 985 side of the intermediate plate 983b. It is formed mainly by

The through-hole 983c is a hole into which a shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the rear base 985 is inserted, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. As a result, when assembling the front base 981 and the rear base 985, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the through hole 983c of the distribution part 983, the front base 981 and the rear base can be assembled while the distribution part 983 is rotatable. 985.

The intermediate plate 983b is formed to extend toward the outside in the radial direction of the through hole 983c, and when the displacement of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by rotating in one direction or the other, the intermediate plate 983b is formed from its tip. The distance L37 (see FIG. 112(b)) to the inside is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the throwing of the game ball is restricted to one or the other of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. In addition, the intermediate plate 983b allows the distribution portion 983 to be rotated around the through hole 983c, so that the throwing of the game ball from one side of the first passage TR1 is regulated to the other side of the second passage TR2. can be switched to a state where it is regulated.

The acting portion 983a is formed to extend in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b when viewed from the front. Moreover, the connection position of the action part 983a with the contact part 983d is set to the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position with the contact part 983d of the intermediate plate 983b. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the distribution part 983 via the inlet 982d is placed in a state where a load is applied to the action part 983a side. As a result, the distribution section 983 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and is formed into a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed in the axial direction of the through hole 983c. The wall portion 983e is formed to protrude outward from the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the through hole 983c, and has a thickness larger than the recess dimension of the recess portion 985h of the back base 985. is set small. Therefore, in a state where the distribution part 983 is arranged between the rear base 985 and the front base 981 facing each other, the wall part 983e can be arranged inside the recessed part 985h. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the distribution unit 980 from the inlet 982d can be prevented from being caught inside the recess 985h, thereby preventing the game ball from flowing down.

Further, the wall portion 983e includes an accommodating portion 983e1 that is recessed toward the intermediate plate 983b side from the through hole 983c at the radially outer end portion on the back side of the intermediate plate 983b. The accommodating portion 983e1 is a portion that accommodates the magnetic body 988c formed in a cylindrical body inside, and is recessed into a circular shape having an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. Further, the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed from the back base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is accommodated therein from the back base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is made of a magnet and is disposed in a state where it repels the magnetic body 988b disposed on the rear base 985. As a result, the magnetic body 988c of the distributing part 983 is rotated about the through hole 983c as an axis by the magnetic force acting on the magnetic body 988b disposed on the rear base 985, so that the magnetic body 988c rotates in one direction or the other direction in which the acting part 983a extends. It can be placed in a tilted position.

Further, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a state where they are repelled, and the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, the magnetic body 988c inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 is You can prevent yourself from getting out of it. That is, since a portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the housing section 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distribution section 983 can be simplified, and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c in the distribution section 983 can be simplified.

In addition, the magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c is set to a magnetic force smaller than the load of the game ball. Thereby, the game balls thrown inside the distribution unit 980 can be prevented from being magnetically attracted to the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c and staying inside the distribution unit 980.

The cover member 987 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from above, and is disposed on the side opposite to the front base 981 side of the recess 985h of the rear base 985. Further, the cover member 987 is formed with two first recesses 987a and a second recess 987b, which are circular in shape when viewed from the front and are recessed in parallel in the direction of gravity.

The first recess 987a is a portion that accommodates the above-mentioned accommodating portion 986b of the back base 985 inside, and is set to have an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the accommodating portion 986b. Therefore, by accommodating the tip of the accommodating part 986b in the first recess 987a with the magnetic body 988b accommodated inside the accommodating part 986b as described above, the magnetic substance 988b accommodated inside the accommodating part 986b is accommodated. It can be suppressed from slipping out of the portion 986b.

The second recess 987b includes a through hole 987b1 on the bottom surface thereof for fastening and fixing to the back base 985. Further, the second recessed portion 987b has an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the protruding portion 986e of the rear base 985 described above. As a result, the cover member 987 can accommodate and position the second recess 987b in the protruding part 986e of the rear base 985, and in the positioned state, screws can be inserted into the fastening hole of the protruding part 986e through the through hole 987b1. Can be concluded.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the operation of the distribution section 983 when game balls flow into the distribution unit 980 from the inlet 982d will be described. 113(a) and 113(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the distribution unit 980 in range CXIII of FIG. 112(b). In addition, below, the action part 983a of the distribution part 983 is displaced from the state which regulates the throwing of a game ball to one side of 1st path|passage TR1 to the state which restricts the throwing of a game ball to the other side of 2nd path|passage TR2. Only the case will be explained, and a description of the case where the throwing of the game ball from the state of regulating the throwing of the game ball to the other side of the second passage TR2 to the one side of the first passage TR1 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 113(a) and 113(b), before the game ball is thrown to the distribution section 983 (before the game ball contacts the action section 983a), as described above, the game ball is distributed to the distribution section 983. The provided magnetic body 988c repels the magnetic body 988b (see FIG. 110), so that the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the second passage TR2 side. Note that the amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the second passage TR2 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981 (see FIG. 113(a)).

When the game ball is thrown to the distribution section 983 in this state, the game ball is thrown between the intermediate plate 983b and the action section 983a on the first passage TR1 side. As described above, the connecting position of the acting part 983a with the abutting part 983d is set on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connecting position with the abutting part 983d of the intermediate plate 983b. , the load of the game ball can be applied to the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side.

As a result, the distribution part 983 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c, and the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the first passage TR1 side, as shown in FIG. 113(b). It is said that Note that the amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981. Further, in this case, the repulsion direction of the magnetic body 988c is switched from a state in which the intermediate plate 983b on the radially outer side of the through hole 983c acts on the second passage TR2 side to a state in which it acts on the first passage TR1 side.

Therefore, the distribution section 983 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c by using the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. Furthermore, since the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c is switched, the rotating state of the distribution section 983 can be maintained. Therefore, each time a game ball is thrown, the distribution section 983 can displace the inclination direction of the intermediate plate 983b and throw the game ball one ball to the first path TR1 and the second path TR2.

Next, the configuration of the passage unit 990 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. 114(a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 114(b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 990.

As shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings that are opened on the sorting unit 980 side, and a first passage member 991 disposed in the first passage member 991. A second passage member 992 that throws a passing game ball; a third passage member 993 that is disposed in the second passage member 992 and that throws a game ball that has passed through the second passage member 992; The detection device SE4 is disposed between three passage members 993.

The first passage member 991 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with a predetermined width on the second passage member 992 side. The first passage member 991 also has a first insertion hole 991a formed through the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 980 side, and a first insertion hole 991a formed through the other side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the first insertion hole 991a. a second insertion hole 991b formed through the second insertion hole 991b, a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d formed on both sides of the second insertion hole 991b in the horizontal direction, and the outer periphery in front view. It is formed mainly by having a plurality of circular through holes 991f formed therethrough.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed into a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, game balls flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

Furthermore, an annular annular protrusion 991g, which has a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw inserted through the second passage member 992 is screwed, is formed in the first insertion hole 991a and connected to the outer peripheral portion thereof. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985g can be received into the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the third insertion hole 991c is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 is continuous when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 (first passage TR1) and passing through the opening 985e can be received in the third insertion hole 991c.

Further, the third insertion hole 991c includes recessed portions 991c1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991c1 is a portion that accommodates therein the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991c1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being tampered with from the outside in a state in which the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. can.

Furthermore, when combining the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990, the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980 can be received inside the recessed part 991c1 of the passage unit 990, so that the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a portion of the detection device SE3 from protruding to the outside, and to reduce the size of the ball throwing unit 970 as a whole.

The third insertion hole 991c has a protruding portion 991c2 on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side that protrudes from the second insertion hole 991b side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction. The second insertion hole 991b is formed to be inclined downward in a direction away from the matching second insertion hole 991b. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the third insertion hole 991c can collide with the protruding portion 991c2 and can be rolled in the direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (to the left in FIG. 114(a)).

The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 is continuous when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 (second passage TR2) and passing through the opening 985f can be received in the fourth insertion hole 991d.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d includes recessed portions 991d1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991d1 is a portion that accommodates therein the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991d1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being tampered with from the outside in a state in which the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. can.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d has a protruding portion 991c2 on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side that protrudes from the second insertion hole 991b side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is oriented horizontally. The second insertion hole 991b is formed to be inclined downward in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b adjacent to the second insertion hole 991b. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the fourth insertion hole 991d can collide with the protruding portion 991d2 and can be rolled in the direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (rightward in FIG. 114(a)).

The second passage member 992 is formed in a substantially T-shaped plate shape that is upside down when viewed from the front, and has a fifth insertion hole 922 that penetrates to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), and the fifth insertion hole The fifth insertion hole 922 mainly includes a sixth insertion hole 992c penetrating on one side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the fifth insertion hole 922 in the gravity direction, and an upright wall 992a erected on the inner peripheral edge of the fifth insertion hole 922.

The fifth insertion hole 922 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fifth insertion hole 991e is formed at a position where the inner space of the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 is continuous when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 can be received in the fifth insertion hole 922.

The erected wall 992a is erected from the entire edge of the fifth insertion hole 922 toward the third passage member 993 side. Further, the standing wall 992a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the fifth insertion hole 922 can be rolled toward the third passage member 993 side (the right side in FIG. 114(b)).

The outer peripheral surface of the standing wall 992a is formed with an engaging portion 992d that projects horizontally, and a projecting wall 992e that projects horizontally from the end on the first passage member 991 side. The engaging portion 992d is formed in an L-shape that protrudes in the horizontal direction and has a tip bent toward the third passage member 993. Wiring for a detection device SE4 and a detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980, which will be described later, are inserted between the engagement portion 992d and the vertical wall 992a. Thereby, the wiring of the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be locked, so that the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be prevented from slipping out from the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990.

The protruding wall 992e is formed to protrude from both horizontal sides of the upright wall 992a in a semicircular shape when viewed from the front, and includes a through hole 992e1 penetrating the axis of the semicircle. Further, the protruding wall 992e is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined, and the through hole 992e1 is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of the first passage member 991. It is located coaxially with the fastening hole 991g1. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed by inserting a screw into the through hole 992e1 from the second passage member 992 side and screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1.

The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed into a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the sixth insertion hole 992c is formed at a position where its internal space is continuous with the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. Ru. Thereby, the game ball passing through the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 can be received into the sixth insertion hole 992c.

Further, a guide wall 992c1 that stands upright toward the third passage member 993 is formed around the sixth insertion hole 992c. The guide wall 992c1 is connected to a first wall portion 992c2 that stands upright on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the sixth insertion hole 992c, and an end in the extending direction of the first wall portion 992c2, and and a second wall portion 992c3 extending in the direction.

The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are wall surfaces for positioning the detection device SE4, and are located between the standing wall 993e formed in the third passage member 993 and the engaging portion 993d. The dimensions are set to be substantially the same as the dimensions on the opposite side of the detection device SE4.

Further, the detection device SE4 is arranged at a position where the inner space of the detection hole SE1a is continuous with the inner space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. Thereby, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a and is detected by the detection device SE4, and is also thrown toward the third passage member 993 side.

Further, the second passage member 992 includes an annular projection 992f that projects toward the third passage member 993 at a position spaced apart from the sixth insertion hole 992c in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 114(a)). The annular projection 992f has a circular fastening hole 992f1 on its axis. The fastening hole 992f1 is a hole into which a screw inserted through the third passage member 993 is screwed, and thereby the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed into a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, game balls flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

Furthermore, an annular annular protrusion 991g, which has a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw inserted through the second passage member 992 is screwed, is formed in the first insertion hole 991a and connected to the outer peripheral portion thereof. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985g can be received into the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

The third passage member 993 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front. The third passage member 993 includes a seventh insertion hole 993a formed in a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, a guide wall 993b erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a, and an edge on the other side in the gravity direction. It mainly includes an erected wall 993e erected on the second passage member 992 side, an engaging portion 993d projecting in the longitudinal direction, and a recess 993c recessed on the side surface on the second passage member 992 side. It is formed.

The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Moreover, the seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a position continuous with the internal space of the detection device SE4 disposed in the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined. Thereby, the game ball that has passed through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 can be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

The guide wall 993b is erected from the edges of the seventh insertion hole 993a in three directions excluding the other side in the gravity direction (the upper side in the gravity direction) toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side. Further, the guide wall 993b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 side (inclined downward toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side). be done. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the seventh insertion hole 992g can be rolled to the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side (the right side in FIG. 114(b)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 114(b), the third passage member 993 is disposed on one side in the gravity direction of the upright wall 992a of the second passage member 992 (lower side in FIG. 114(b)). As described above, since the third passage member 993 is open on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 114(b)), the third passage member 993 can be arranged closer to the standing wall 992a. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 described above can be brought close to each other, and the external shapes of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 in the direction of gravity can be reduced in size.

The standing wall 993e is such that when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance between the second passage member 992 and the first wall 992c2 is equal to the detection hole of the detection device SE4. It is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension on the shorter side in the direction perpendicular to the axis of SE1a. This allows positioning of the detection device SE4 in the direction of gravity.

Further, a first wall portion 992c2 is formed on the upstream side (on the second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown, for positioning the detection device SE4 on the lower side in the direction of gravity. Thereby, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

That is, the detection hole SE1a is formed to have a size slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball in order to prevent fraud by the player, so a slight positional deviation in the height of the rolling surface of the game ball may cause damage to the inside of the hole SE1a. In this embodiment, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the gravity direction is provided on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the heights of the sixth insertion hole 992c, the detection hole SE1a, and the rolling surface from being misaligned. As a result, the game ball inserted through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a.

The engaging portion 993d is formed to protrude in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and includes a bent portion 993d1 bent toward the second passage member 992 at the protruding tip. When the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the bent portion 993d1 has a distance dimension between the second passage member 992 and the second wall portion 992c3 that is equal to the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. The distance dimension on the longitudinal side in the direction perpendicular to the axis of Thereby, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the horizontal direction.

The recess 993c is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, and is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f. It is formed with a larger inner edge shape. Further, the recess 993c includes a through hole 993c1 formed coaxially with the fastening hole 992f1 of the annular projection 992f on the bottom surface thereof. As a result, the annular protrusion 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the recess 993c, and the screw is inserted from the third passage member 993 side through the through hole 993c1 and screwed into the fastening hole 992f1. The member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

According to the ball throwing unit 970 configured as above, the ball throwing unit 970 is formed from a unit different from the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140, and the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 Since the ball throwing unit 970 (distributing unit 980) can be replaced with another unit and a different unit can be installed, the game that flows down the game area can be A different game format can be played without affecting the flow of the ball.

Another unit (replacement unit 1980) of the distribution unit 980 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. 117(a) is a front view of the replacement unit 1980, and FIG. 117(b) is a rear view of the replacement unit 1980. 118(a) is a cross-sectional view of the replacement unit 1980 taken along the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line in FIG. 117(a), and FIG. 118(b) is a cross-sectional view of the replacement unit 1980 taken along the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line in FIG. It is a diagram. Note that the same parts as those of the above-mentioned distribution unit 980 are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the exchange unit 1980 mainly includes a front base 1981 disposed on the gaming area side and a back base 1985 disposed on the opposite side of the front base 1981 to the gaming area side. Formed in preparation for.

The front base 1981 is formed from a colored semi-transparent resin material. Further, the front base 1981 is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the front base 981 of the sorting unit 980 when viewed from the front. The front base 1981 mainly includes a base plate 981a and a bulging portion 1982 that bulges from the base plate 981a toward the player side (the side opposite to the back base 1985).

Further, the front base 1981 is formed from a material whose color is different from the color of the front base 981 of the sorting unit 980 (in this embodiment, yellow). This makes it easy for the player to recognize whether the game board 13 is provided with the distribution unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980.

In other words, when the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) with the specifications in which the sorting unit 980 is installed and the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) with the specifications in which the exchange unit 1980 is installed are introduced into the same store. As will be described later, both specifications have the same shape of the gaming area (the front of the game board 13), making it difficult for the player to determine which specification it is. This makes it easier for players to recognize which specification of the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) it has.

The outer shape of the base plate 1981a when viewed from the front is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the base plate 981a of the sorting unit 980. Therefore, when the distribution unit 980 is replaced with the replacement unit 1980 (the specifications are changed), the front base 1981 (replacement unit 1980) can be placed on the base plate 60 without changing the shape of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60. Can be set. Therefore, there is no need to change the shape of the base plate 60 when specifications are changed by replacing the distribution unit 980 with the replacement unit 1980, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges out from the base plate 1981a, and is set to a size that allows a game ball to be inserted into the inside of the bulging portion 1982. The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an inlet 982d formed by cutting out the upper end in the direction of gravity.

The width dimension in the horizontal direction of the bulging portion 1982 is set to a size that allows only one game ball to pass through, and the game ball that flows in from the inflow port 982d can pass through the inside thereof and flow down. . Furthermore, the inner surface of the bulging portion 1982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is set at substantially the same position in the gravity direction as the inner surface of the opening 985d formed in the rear base 1985 on one side in the gravity direction. Thereby, the game balls that have flowed into the exchange unit 1980 from the inflow port 982d can be thrown to the opening 985d in the order in which they flow into the inflow port 982d.

The outer shape of the back base 1985 when viewed from the front is set to be approximately the same as the outer shape of the back base 985 of the sorting unit 980, and the opening 985d that communicates with the inner space of the bulging portion 1982 and the inner space of the through hole 981c communicate with each other. It is formed with an opening 985g.

According to the exchange unit 1980 configured as described above, as described above, the outer shape of the base plate 1981a when viewed from the front is substantially the same as the base plate 981a of the distribution unit 980. can be easily replaced (change of specifications).

Here, a game comprising a ball entrance unit formed to allow a game ball to enter therein and a passage connected to the ball entrance, and a game board on which the ball entrance unit is arranged. machine is known. According to such a gaming machine, by replacing the ball entry unit with another ball entry unit (for example, one with a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the gaming machine while reusing the game board. can. However, in the game machine described above, since the ball entry unit is arranged in front of the game board, it is necessary to secure a space in advance in front of the game board, for example, according to the maximum number of passages. Therefore, when using a ball entry unit with a small number of passages, there is a problem in that space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the distribution unit 980 (ball entry unit) has an inlet 982d, a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 connected to the inlet 982d, and A winning opening unit 930 is arranged on the front side, and a winning opening unit 930 is arranged on the back side of the winning opening unit 930 through the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and is connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Since the passage unit 990 is provided with a passage unit 990, it is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the winning slot unit 930 on the front of the game board 13, and a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages is secured on the front of the game board. There's no need. Therefore, by replacing the sorting unit 980 with the replacement unit 1980, the game board 13 (base board 60 and front unit 940) can be used (commonly used) and the front side of the game board 13 can be changed when changing the specifications of the game board 13. space can be used effectively.

In addition, as described above, the front unit 940 is formed from a colorless and transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material, and the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed to have a smaller external shape than the winning opening unit. In addition, since it is disposed at a position overlapping the front unit 940 when viewed from the front, the player can see the distribution unit 980 through the front unit 940, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, in order to make the sorting unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980 visible to the player, it is not essential that the base plate 60 be made of a light-transmitting material; for example, the base plate 60 may be made of a plywood board. , a sticker is attached to the base plate 60. Alternatively, since it is also permissible to paint the base plate 60, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

Further, since the sorting unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is made of a colored semi-transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material, the flow passes through the front unit 940 and flows down the inside (passage) of the sorting unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980. The game ball can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest in the game can be increased.

Further, since the front unit 940 is formed from a colorless and transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material, and the sorting unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980 is formed from a colored semi-transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material, the front Through the unit 940, the player can easily grasp the positional relationship in the front-rear direction (overlapping direction) with the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980. That is, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball changes its position in the front-back direction and flows down, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Further, the game ball passage of the distribution unit 980 is formed to include a ball throwing passage TR0 communicating with the inflow port 982d, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branching from the ball throwing passage TR0. Further, the sorting unit 980 is provided with a detection device SE3 that detects game balls passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Therefore, when manufacturing a game machine with a different specification by changing from the distribution unit 980 with many passing paths for game balls to the replacement unit 1980 with fewer passages, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of detection devices SE3.

That is, in a structure in which the detection device SE3 is disposed in the passage unit 990 disposed downstream of the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980, the detection device SE3 can be disposed for the passage of the distribution unit 980, but the downstream passage When changing from the distribution unit 980 with two flow passages to the replacement unit 1980 with one flow passage, it is sufficient to install one detection sensor in the passage unit 990, but the number of flow passages in the distribution unit 980 is There is a possibility that the detection device SE3 will be provided accordingly. On the other hand, if the detection device SE3 is arranged in a path branching from the ball throwing path TR0, when changing the distribution unit 980 to the replacement unit 1980, the number of detection devices SE3 corresponding to the unit is installed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in determining the number of locations.

On the other hand, the detection device SE4 that detects the inflow of game balls into the second winning opening 140 is arranged in the passage unit 990, as described above. Therefore, the detection devices disposed in the sorting unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 can be distributed, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the passages can be increased accordingly.

Further, the exchange unit 1980 is formed with a side wall portion 981b that throws the game ball flowing in from the second prize opening 140 at the same position as the distribution unit 980. Therefore, similarly to the sorting unit 980, when disposing the exchange unit 1980 in the front unit 940 (winning port unit 930), the side wall portion 981b can be used to position the exchange unit 1980. That is, regardless of the form of the replacement unit 1980, the position where the rolling part 943a and the side wall part 981b are connected is the same, so by positioning the side wall part 981b with respect to the rolling part 943a, the replacement unit 1980 However, positioning can be performed with respect to the front unit 940.

Furthermore, similarly to the distribution unit 980, the purpose of positioning the replacement unit 1980 with respect to the front unit 940 is to suppress positional deviation (step) from occurring at the connecting portion between the rolling portion 943a and the side wall portion 981b. Since the target portion can be positioned, the occurrence of positional deviations (steps) can be more effectively suppressed compared to the case where other portions are positioned. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the arrangement of the prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described. FIG. 119 is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 81.

As shown in FIG. 119, the passages of the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 are connected to each other in a state where they are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 119), and the convex portion formed on the ball throwing unit 970 is It is inserted into a protrusion formed on the front unit 940.

To explain in detail, in the first ball throwing section 942g and the inflow port 982d, the second protrusion 982d1 formed at the inflow port 982d is arranged inside the first recessed notch 942g1 formed at the first ball throwing section 942g. Further, in the second ball throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b, a protrusion 981b1 formed on the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside a second recessed notch 942c1 formed on the second ball throwing portion 942c.

Further, the second ball throwing section 942c of the front unit 940 and the side wall section 981b of the distribution unit 980 are arranged in an internal space surrounded by an arm section 962e formed in the drive unit 960 and a wall section 962f.

Here, conventionally, a game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes, and a first member communicating with the first passage of the first member. A game machine is known that has two passages and a second member disposed on the back side of the game board. The game ball that flows down the front side of the game board and flows into the first passage of the first member passes through the first passage, flows into the second passage of the second member, and flows into the second passage on the back side of the game board. Pass through 2 passages. Thereby, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front and back direction, which can provide interest to the player.

In this case, if there is a positional deviation (step) in the connecting part between the first passage and the second passage, the smooth flow of the game ball will be inhibited, so the positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member will be ensured. You are requested to do so. However, the gaming machine described above has a problem in that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having passages and decorative members are arranged on the front of the game board, positioning holes for positioning each of these members are provided on the game board. While the positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed in the process of forming the first member, in order to form the positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back of the game board, it is necessary to invert the game board. This requires a separate step of forming a positioning hole just for the second member, which is not practical.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, when the drive unit 960 is disposed on the front unit 940, the pair of second guides of the front unit 940 are placed between the opposing projections 962g of the drive unit 960. Wall 942d is inserted. When the ball throwing unit 970 is disposed in the front unit 940, the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 970 is inserted between the opposing arm portions 962e from which the protruding portion 962g is protruded.

That is, the drive unit 960 includes a protruding portion 962g (guide portion 962b) that engages with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940, and an arm portion 962e (guide portion 962b) that engages with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970. Equipped with. Thereby, the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 can be positioned using the guide portion 962b of the drive unit 960.

The arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b is located on the outer side of the pair of second ball throwing portions 942c of the front unit 940 in the opposing direction. As a result, the protruding portion 962g of the arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b is engaged with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940, and the arm portion 962e is engaged with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970, so that the front unit The positioning of the ball throwing unit 970 relative to the ball throwing unit 940 can be effectively performed. That is, the purpose of positioning the ball throwing unit 970 with respect to the front unit 940 is to suppress positional deviation (level difference) from occurring at the connecting portion between the second ball throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. (The connecting part between the second ball throwing part 942c and the side wall part 981b) can be directly positioned by the guide part 962b (arm part 962e), compared to the case where other parts are positioned by the guide part 962b. The occurrence of positional deviations (level differences) can be effectively suppressed.

Further, the drive unit 960 including the guide portion 962b is disposed in the inner space of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 while being disposed in the front unit 940. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide an opening for arranging the drive unit 960. In other words, the through hole 60a for arranging the connecting portion between the second ball sending part 942c and the side wall part 981b of the front unit 940 can also be used as an arrangement space, so that the number of processing steps can be reduced accordingly. , it is possible to reduce product costs.

As described above, since the drive unit 960 including the guide portion 962b is disposed (formed so as to be able to be held) in the front unit 940 including the second ball throwing portion 942c, the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 are provided on the front and back surfaces of the game board 13. When attaching each ball throwing unit 970, there is no need to separately attach the drive unit 960, and by attaching the front unit 940, the drive unit 960 can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of attachment can be improved accordingly.

Furthermore, when the drive unit 960 is disposed on the front unit 940, the protruding portion 962g and arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 are engaged with the second guide wall 942d and the second ball throwing portion 942c, respectively. Ru. Therefore, after attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 to the base plate 60, it is necessary to engage the projecting part 962g and the arm part 962e of the drive unit 960 with the second guide wall 942d and the second ball throwing part 942c, respectively. There is no need to do this separately. Therefore, the installation workability can be improved accordingly.

Further, when the drive unit 960 is disposed on the front unit 940, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is formed to be able to engage with the ball throwing unit 970 from the opposite side of the front unit 940, so that By attaching the drive unit 960 to the back of the base plate 60 after attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 at the same time, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 can be engaged with the throwing unit 970 at the same time as the attachment operation. can. Therefore, the workability of the installation work can be improved accordingly.

As described above, the wall portion 962f is connected between the pair of arm portions 962e facing each other, and when the front unit 940 and drive unit 960 are combined, the arm portion 962e and the wall portion 962f are connected to the front unit 940. The above-mentioned displacement member 966 is disposed between facing the back base 941. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the displacement of the displacement member 966. Therefore, the structure of the front unit 940 can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, in this case, the wall portion 962f of the guide portion 962b is arranged at a position facing the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 into which the projections 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are inserted, in the opening direction thereof. Therefore, the opening of the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 can be blocked from the outside by the wall portion 962f of the drive unit 960, and it is possible to suppress dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, the sliding movement of the protruding portion 966a is prevented from being hindered by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove 966a2, and the pair of wing members can be stably opened or closed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121, the connection state between the second ball throwing section 942c and the side wall section 981b will be described as a representative example. 120(a) and 121(a) are partially enlarged sectional views of the game board 13 in range CXXa in FIG. 119, and FIG. 120(b) and FIG. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 along the line -CXXb. In addition, in FIGS. 121(a) and 121(b), a state in which the prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are separated by a predetermined amount from the positions shown in FIGS. 120(a) and 120(b) is illustrated. Ru.

As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, a distance L38 between the protrusion 981b1 and the second recessed portion 942c1 and the rolling surface 981c1 is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the game ball.

Here, a game comprising a first passage member through which the game ball passes, and a second passage member whose upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and through which the game ball flowed down from the first passage member passes. machine is known. However, in this structure in which the first passage member and the second passage member are connected, misalignment between them is unavoidable, so that the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member There was a problem in that a step was formed at the connecting part, which could impede the smooth flow of the game balls.

Moreover, the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are fastened and fixed to both sides of the base plate 60, respectively, as described above. Therefore, if there is an error in the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 (thickness is increased), there is a risk that the prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 may become separated in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 (the left-right direction in FIG. 120(a)). There is. In that case, there was a problem in that a gap was formed between the second ball throwing part 942c and the side wall part 981b, which could hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b and the upstream end of the protrusion 981b1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball can It is possible to make the timing of passing through the step and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and to disperse those influences, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. can.

That is, as shown in FIG. 121, the gap K1 of the space formed between the game ball rolling part 943a of the second ball sending part 942c and the game ball rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall part 981b, and the second ball sending part The gap K2 of the space formed between the second recessed part 942c1 of 942c and the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall part 981b is formed at a different position in the rolling direction of the game ball (left and right direction in FIG. 121(a)). . Thereby, the game ball rolled from the second ball throwing part 942c to the side wall part 981b can be suppressed from entering both the gap K1 and the gap K2. Therefore, the maximum value of the resistance that the game ball receives can be reduced by the gap formed in the connecting portion between the second ball throwing part 942c and the side wall part 981b. As a result, the game ball can be prevented from stopping in the gap between the second ball throwing section 942c and the side wall section 981b.

Next, referring to FIG. 122, a displacement member 8966 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the sliding groove 966a2 is formed linearly, but the sliding groove 8966a2 of the displacement member 8966 in the seventh embodiment is formed on both outer sides in the lateral direction of the displacement member 8966. It is provided with a recessed portion 8966a6 recessed toward the other side in the gravity direction (the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 122)), and is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the rear. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 122 is a rear view of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 8966 in the seventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 122 corresponds to FIG. 91. As shown in FIG. 122, the displacement member 8966 in the seventh embodiment is formed in the shape of a vertically elongated rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and a second opening 966c is formed extending through the plate in the thickness direction at approximately the center position when viewed from the front. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c in front view is formed larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941, and when the displacement member 8966 is disposed in the front unit 940, a Two winning openings 140 are arranged.

The displacement member 8966 also has a protrusion 966a that protrudes from one end (top in FIG. 122) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 122) in the transverse direction (horizontal direction in FIG. ) and a bulging portion 966b that bulges out from the back side (toward the front side in FIG. 122).

The protruding portion 966a has a sliding groove 8966a2 formed to penetrate the displacement member 8966 in the thickness direction, and contact portions 966a1 located on both outer sides of the displacement member 8966 in the transverse direction and extending in the longitudinal direction. Be prepared.

The sliding groove 8966a2 is a hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is inserted, and extends in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966, and has a recess 8966a6 on the outside in the lateral direction on the other side in the gravity direction (gravitational direction). It is recessed toward the upper side (upper side in FIG. 122).

The width dimension of the concave portion 8966a6 in the short direction is set to be larger than the maximum dimension between the opposing outer peripheral surfaces of the protrusion 945b. Further, the moving side side surface of the protrusion 945b extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the moving direction of the protrusion 945b (left-right direction in FIG. 122), and the extending direction is the same as that of the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 in the closed state. It is parallel to the first surface 945b1.

Therefore, when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, at least a part of the protrusion 945b can be accommodated inside the recess 8966a6, and when the wing member 945 side is rotated, the first surface 945b1 is connected to the inner surface of the recess 8966a6. The displacement of the protrusion 945b can be restricted by contacting the protrusion 945b.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 (solenoid 610) side, the displacement member 8966 is slid to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), so that the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is moved to the recess 8966a6. It can be extracted from inside. Thereby, the protrusion 945b can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the sliding groove 8966a2, and the protrusion 945b can be displaced.

That is, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945, it is possible to restrict the drive from being transmitted to the transmission member 965 side, and when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 side, the protrusion 945b and the recess 8966a6 By releasing the engagement with the protrusion 945b, the protrusion 945b can be displaced. As a result, the wing member 945 can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

Further, when the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, the displacement member 8966 is slid to one side in the gravity direction (downward in the gravity direction). Furthermore, since the recessed portion 8966a6 is recessed toward the other side in the direction of gravity (the direction of gravity), it can receive the protrusion 945b as the displacement member 8966 slides. Therefore, the state in which the protrusion 945b is received in the recess 8966a6 can be easily maintained by using the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 8966.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 of the eighth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the distal end of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 is disposed inside the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, but in the eighth embodiment, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is The tip of the connecting hole 966b1 protrudes from the connecting hole 966b1. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b) are cross-sectional views of a drive unit 8960 and a displacement member 966 in the eighth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b) correspond to FIG. 96(a). Further, in FIG. 123(a), the closed state of the wing member 945 is illustrated, and in FIG. 123(b), the wing member 945 in the closed state is illegally operated (forcibly opened) by the player and changed from the closed state to the open state. An engaged state in the middle of displacement is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 123, the transmission member 9965 in the eighth embodiment is bent when viewed from the side, and has a distal end 9965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and a distal end 9965a. The rotary portion 965b is connected to the rotary portion 965b and extends toward the connecting member 964.

As in the sixth embodiment, the width of the tip portion 9965a in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c decreases as it moves away from the solenoid 610. Further, the distal end portion 9965a has an insertion portion 9965e inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 at the distal end, and an upstanding portion protruding from the connecting side with the rotating shaft 965c toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). 965f.

The insertion portion 9965e has an outer shape smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 when viewed from the front, and is inserted and disposed inside the connecting hole 966b1, and the tip end thereof is formed in the connecting hole 966b1. Projected from 966b1. In addition, the insertion portion 9966e includes an engaging portion 9965e3 that protrudes from the connecting hole 966b1 to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and an engaging portion 9965e3 that bulges out from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the inner surface side of the connecting hole 966b1. A bulging portion 965e1 is formed.

The engaging portion 9965e3 is formed to protrude in the displacement direction (gravity direction) of the displacement member 966, and is formed at a position where the abutting surface 9965e4 on the side surface on the rotating shaft 965c side is separated from the front surface of the displacement member 966 by a slight gap. be done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123(b), when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of arrow Y (the other side in the gravity direction), the front surface of the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 are brought into contact and the transmission is transmitted. Displacement of member 9965 can be regulated.

To explain in detail, when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of arrow Y, the abutted portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 abuts the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965, and the transmission member 9965 is rotationally displaced. . In this case, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is displaced in the direction of arrow Y due to rotational displacement and is also displaced toward the rotation axis 965c. Therefore, the contact surface 9965e4 can be brought into contact with the front surface of the displacement member 966 by displacing the insertion portion 9965e toward the rotating shaft 965c. This restricts the displacement of the transmission member 9965, and therefore the displacement of the displacement member 966 in the direction of arrow Y is similarly restricted.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the solenoid 610 (the coupling member 964 is displaced), the transmission member 965 rotates before the displacement member 966, so that the insertion portion 9965e and the displacement member 966 are connected to each other. Contact can be suppressed. Therefore, by rotationally displacing the transmission member 965, the displacement member 966 can be displaced.

As described above, the projections 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are connected to the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945 side, the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 come into contact with each other, so that rotation of the transmission member 9965 can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member 945 from being forcibly opened from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 9965 in the eighth embodiment includes an insertion portion 9965e and an engagement portion 9965e3 protruding from the tip of the insertion portion 9965e, and allows the displacement member 966 to be displaced with the wing member 945 closed. When one side of the insertion portion 9965e is brought into contact with the other side abutted portion 966b3 of the displacement member 966, the engaging portion 9965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the wing member 945 is forcibly opened from the outside, the engaging portion 9965e3 and the displacement member 966 can be engaged with each other. As a result, the wing member 945 can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, a transmission member 10965 and a displacement member 10966 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 has a distal end disposed only inside the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966. However, in the ninth embodiment, the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 The tip of the portion 10965e is engaged with the connecting hole 10966b. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

124(a) and 124(b) are cross-sectional views of a drive unit 10960 and a displacement member 10966 in the ninth embodiment. Note that FIG. 124(a) corresponds to FIG. 96(a), and FIG. 124(b) corresponds to FIG. 96(b). Further, FIG. 124(a) shows the wing member 945 in a closed state, and FIG. 124(b) shows the wing member 945 in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 124, the transmission member 10965 in the ninth embodiment is bent when viewed from the side, and has a distal end portion 10965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and a distal end portion 10965a. It is formed from a rotating part that is connected to the connecting member 964 and extends toward the connecting member 964 side.

As in the sixth embodiment, the width of the tip portion 10965a in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c decreases as the tip portion 10965a moves away from the solenoid 610. Further, the distal end portion 10965a has an insertion portion 10965e inserted into a connecting hole 10966b of a displacement member 10966, which will be described later, and a rotating shaft 965c that protrudes toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). It is formed with an upright portion 965f.

The insertion portion 10965e has an outer shape smaller than the inner edge shape of the connection hole 10966b of the displacement member 10966 when viewed from the front, and is inserted and disposed inside the connection hole 10966b. In addition, the insertion portion 10965e includes an engaging portion 10965e3 that protrudes from one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and a bulging portion that bulges toward the inner surface of the connecting hole 966b1 from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). 964d1.

The engaging portion 10965e3 is formed into a plate shape that is curved around the axis of the rotating shaft 965c, and is disposed inside a recessed portion 10966d of a displacement member 10966, which will be described later, when the wing member 945 is closed. Further, the displacement member 10966 includes an abutment surface 10965e4 on the side surface (inner surface) on the rotating shaft 965c side. The contact surface 10966d4 is disposed to face a contact surface 10966dc of a displacement member 10966, which will be described later, with a predetermined gap in between when the wing member 945 is closed.

The displacement member 10966 is formed from a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c formed therethrough in the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 124(a)) at approximately the center position when viewed from the front. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c when viewed from the front is larger than the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 and the second ball throwing section 942c (see FIG. 88), and the second opening 966c is in a state where the second ball throwing section 942c is inserted inside. It will be placed in Thereby, the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area via the second winning opening 140 can be suppressed from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 10966 also has a protrusion 966a that protrudes from one end in the longitudinal direction in the transverse direction, a protrusion 966b that protrudes from the other end in the longitudinal direction toward the back side, and a protrusion 966b on the opposite surface of the protrusion 966b. It mainly includes a recessed portion 10966d.

The recessed portion 10966d is recessed so as to be continuous with the other side abutted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1, and includes an abutted surface 10966d1 on the side surface on the bulging portion 966b side. The contact surface 10966d1 is formed by being curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 10965 described above when the wing member 945 is closed, and has a slight gap with the contact surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965. They are placed facing each other and separated from each other. Further, the abutted surface 10966d1 includes an inclined surface 10966d2 at an end connected to the connecting hole 966b1.

The inclined surface 10966d2 is formed to be inclined toward the back side toward the one side abutted portion 966b2 side. Further, the inclined surface 10966d2 is formed radially inward from the abutted surface 10966d1 centered on the rotating shaft 965c.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the distance dimension between the opposing portions from the other side abutted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 to the one side abutted portion 966b2 is the insertion portion in a front view with the wing member 945 closed. It is set larger than the width dimension L39 in the gravity direction of 10965e (see FIG. 124(a)). As a result, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated, the abutment surface 10965e4 is displaced toward the back side, and the abutment surface 10965e4 and the abutted surface 10966d1 come into contact with each other, thereby restricting the rotation of the transmission member 10965. This can be suppressed.

According to the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 configured as described above, when the solenoid 610 is driven to displace the wing member 945 to the open state, the drive is transmitted from the connecting member 964 to the transmission member 10965. be done. As a result, the transmission member 10965 is rotated about the rotating shaft 965c. As described above, the contact surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965 and the contact surface 10966d1 of the displacement member 10966 are formed to be curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c, so that the transmission member 10965 rotates around the rotation shaft 965c. When the contact surface 10965e4 is rotated, the contact surface 10965e4 is displaced while maintaining a slight gap from the contact surface 10966d1. That is, the contact surface 10965e4 and the contact surface 10966d1 are displaced without interfering with each other.

As described above, since the distance between the opposite contact portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 and the one side contact portion 966b2 is formed to be larger than the width L36 of the transmission member 10965, the transmission member By rotating 10965, insertion portion 10965e disposed inside recess 10966d of displacement member 10966 can be brought out to the outside of recess 10966d. Thereby, the bulging portion 965e1 of the transmission member 10965 can be brought into contact with the other side abutted portion 10966b3, and the displacement member 10966 can be slid and displaced. Therefore, the pair of wing members 945 can be displaced to the open state.

Further, when displacing the pair of wing members 945 from the open state to the closed state, the tip of the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 slides along the inclined surface 10966d2 formed on the abutted surface 10966d1. By doing so, it is possible to displace the engaging portion 10965e3 inside the recessed portion 10966d while displacing the displacement member 10966 to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction).

On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 is displaced to the open state, when the drive is transmitted from the pair of wing members 945, the drive is transmitted from the displacement member 10966 to the transmission member 10965. In this case, the displacement member 10966 is slid and displaced with the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 disposed inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966. Therefore, since the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced along with the sliding displacement of the displacement member 10966, the engagement portion 10965e3 is displaced toward the back side due to the rotational displacement. Therefore, the contact surface 10965e4 of the engaging portion 10965e3 contacts the contact surface 10966d1 of the recessed portion 10966d, and rotational displacement of the transmission member 10965 is regulated. As a result, the wing member 945 can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 10965 in the ninth embodiment includes an insertion portion 10965e and an engagement portion 10965e3 protruding from the tip of the insertion portion 10965e, and when the wing member 945 is closed, one side abutted portion One side of the insertion portion 10965e in the gravity direction is brought into contact with the insertion portion 966b2, the engaging portion 10965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 10966, and the other side of the insertion portion 10965e in the gravity direction (bulging portion When the transmission member 10965 is rotated to the other side in the gravity direction to the position where the transmission member 965e1) comes into contact, the engagement of the engagement portion 10965e3 with the displacement member 10966 is released, so that the transmission member 10965 can be displaced without rotating. Slide displacement of the member 10966 to the other side in the direction of gravity is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly protected from the outside.

On the other hand, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated to a position where the engagement portion 10965e3 comes out from the inside of the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966, the engagement of the engagement portion 10965e3 with the displacement member 10966 is released. By further rotating the member 10965 to the other side in the gravity direction, the displacement member 10966 can be slid to the other side in the gravity direction, and the wing member 945 can be opened.

Next, the displacement member 11966 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged in the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140 has been explained, but the displacement member 11966 in the tenth embodiment is arranged from the second winning opening 140. The ball is placed on the rolling path of the game ball. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 11966 in the tenth embodiment. 126(a) and 126(b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 11966. Note that FIG. 126(a) shows the wing member 945 in a closed state, and FIG. 126(b) shows the wing member 945 in an open state.

As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the front unit 940 in the tenth embodiment has a pair of second guide walls 11942b extending in the direction of gravity on both horizontally outer sides of the second winning opening 140. Further, in the tenth embodiment, the tip position of the rolling portion 943a disposed between the opposing second ball throwing portions 942c is set to be substantially the same as the protruding tip position of the second ball throwing portion 942c.

The pair of second guide walls 11942b have first tooth surfaces 11942b1, which are gear tooth surfaces, formed on opposing sides thereof. Further, the pair of second guide walls 11942b are set so that the distance between them facing each other is larger than the width dimension in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 126(a)) of the displacement member 11966, which will be described later. will be placed.

The first tooth surface 11942b1 is meshed with a first gear GY1 that is pivotally supported by a displacement member 11966, which will be described later. Thereby, by slidingly displacing the displacement member 11966, the first gear GY1 that meshes with the first tooth surface 11942b1 can be rotated.

The displacement member 11966 includes a first member 11967 formed as a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a second member 11968 disposed in a displaceable state on the first member 11967, and an axis attached to the first member 11967. The first gear GY1 is supported and meshed with the second member 11968.

The first member 11967 has a second opening 966c formed therethrough in the thickness direction at a substantially central position when viewed from the front. The first member 11967 also has a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 11966 and a second opening 966c on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second opening 966c. It is formed with a support portion 11966d and a sliding protrusion 11966e that protrude in an annular shape on both sides in the lateral direction.

The support portion 11966d is provided to protrude toward the first member 11967, and its tip is inserted into the shaft hole of the first gear GY1. Thereby, the first gear GY1 can be rotatably supported by the first member 11967.

The sliding protrusion 11966e is provided to protrude toward the first member 11967, and its tip is inserted into the sliding groove 11968b of the second member 11968. Thereby, the second member 11968 can be disposed on the first member 11967.

The second member 11968 is formed of a metal material into a plate-like body that is substantially gate-shaped when viewed from the front, and has a second tooth surface 11968a1 of a gear tooth surface on both end surfaces in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 126(a)), and a A sliding groove 11968b formed through the plate thickness direction in the form of a long hole along the extension direction of the two tooth surfaces 11968a1 (vertical direction in FIG. 126(a)) and a horizontal direction of the inner edge formed in a gate shape. The blade portion 11968c is formed to include a blade portion 11968c that is inclined in the plate thickness direction on the end face extending from the side.

The pair of second tooth surfaces 11968a1 are meshed with the first gear GY1, respectively. Thereby, the rotation of the first gear GY1 can be transmitted from both horizontal sides of the second member 11968 where the second tooth surface 11968a1 is formed.

As described above, the sliding groove 11968b is formed in the shape of a long hole along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1, and the sliding protrusion 11966e of the first member 11967 is inserted into the sliding groove 11968b. Therefore, the second member 11968 can be slid relative to the first member 11967 by the gap between the sliding groove 11968b and the sliding protrusion 11966e.

Therefore, as described above, when the pair of first gears GY1 is rotationally displaced by the displacement of the first member 11967, the rotation of the first gear GY1 is transmitted from the second tooth surface 11968a1 to the second member 11968, and The second member 11968 is displaced in the direction in which the second tooth surface 11968a1 extends.

The blade portion 11968c is formed to be inclined downward toward the first member 11967 side, and its lower end portion is lower than the inner surface of the second ball throwing portion 942c on the other end side in the gravity direction when the wing member 945 is closed. , is placed on the other end side in the direction of gravity. Thereby, the tip of the blade part 11968c can be placed on the other end side in the direction of gravity than the rolling surface of the game ball flowing in from the second prize opening 140.

Further, the protruding distance of the second ball throwing portion 942c is set to a length such that the second ball throwing portion 942c comes into contact with the back side of the second member 11968. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the tip position of the rolling portion 943a disposed between the opposing second ball throwing portions 942c is set to approximately the same position as the tip position of the second ball throwing portion 942c. Thereby, the end of the rolling surface flowing from the second winning opening 140, the blade part, and 11968c can cut the foreign matter inserted into the inside of the second winning opening 140.

According to the displacement member 11966 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 126(a), when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the blade portion 11968c of the second member 11968 is moved to the rolling portion 943a. Since the tip of the second ball sending part 942c can be disposed lower than the tip of the second ball throwing part 942c in the direction of gravity, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 may be cut off by unauthorized operation while no drive is being transmitted from the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960. When 945b is forcibly opened, the displacement member 11966 can restrict the flow of game balls entering from the second prize opening 140.

On the other hand, when the wing member 945 is in the open state, the first member 11967 of the displacement member 11966 is displaced upward by the transmission member 965, thereby displacing the second member 11968. Note that the amount of displacement of the first member 11967 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. As a result, as described above, the second member 11968 is displaced twice as much as the first member 11967 with respect to the back base 941, so the game ball that enters from the second prize opening 140 The ball can be separated from the rolling portion 943a, which is the rolling surface of the ball, by a distance greater than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the wing member 945 is in the open state, it is possible to allow the game ball that enters from the second prize opening 140 to flow down.

That is, the second member 11968 crosses the path of the game ball flowing down from the second prize opening 140 when the displacement member 11966 is slid from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where it is closed, and also crosses the edge of the path. (the ends of the rolling part 943a and the second ball throwing part 942c), so it is possible to cut the illegal object that is illegally inserted into the rolling path of the game ball from the second prize opening 140. Can be done.

For example, a detection device SE4 (see FIG. 114) that glues the tip of a thread to a game ball, causes the game ball to enter from the second winning opening 140, and passes through the rolling part 943a, detecting the passage of the game ball. ), there is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 detects the player multiple times by manipulating the other end of the string (feeding out, pulling) and causing the game ball to reciprocate. In response to such fraudulent acts, according to the tenth embodiment, even if the game ball described above enters the ball with the wing member 945 open, the displacement member moves from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where the wing member 945 is closed. 11966 (second member 11968) is slid and the blade part 11968c crosses the path of the rolling part 943a and the second ball throwing part 942c, the blade part 11968c cuts the middle part of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball. At the same time, when the blade part 11968c is brought into frictional contact with the edges of the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c, the blade part 11968c and The thread can be cut between the rolling part 943a or the edge of the second ball throwing part 942c. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Next, the displacement member 12966 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not placed on the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning hole 140 has been explained, but the displacement member 12966 in the eleventh embodiment is moved from the second winning hole 140. The ball is placed on the rolling path of the game ball. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 12966 in the eleventh embodiment. 128(a) and 128(b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 12966. Note that FIG. 128(a) shows the wing member 945 in a closed state, and FIG. 128(b) shows the wing member 945 in an open state.

As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the front unit 940 in the eleventh embodiment has a pair of second guide walls 12942b extending in the direction of gravity on both horizontally outer sides of the second winning opening 140. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the protruding distance of the second ball throwing part 942c and the rolling part 943a is set short, and the protruding tip surface is set at a position where it comes into contact with the front surface of the first member 12967 of the displacement member 12966, which will be described later. Ru.

Further, on both horizontally outer sides of the second winning opening 140 of the front unit 940, there are provided a first support portion 12942k1 and a second support portion 12942k2 that protrude toward the displacement member 12966 side. The first support portion 12942k1 and the second support portion 12942k2 are inserted into shafts of a first gear GY1 and a second gear GY2, which will be described later, respectively, and can pivotally support the first gear GY1 and the second gear GY2.

The pair of second guide walls 12942b has contact portions 12942b2 protruding in opposite directions on one end side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) of opposing side surfaces thereof. The distance between the pair of opposing contact portions 12942b2 is set to be slightly larger than the width in the lateral direction of the first member 12967, which will be described later. Thereby, the first member 12967 can be disposed between the pair of abutting portions 12942b2 facing each other, and the sliding displacement of the first member 12967 can be guided.

The displacement member 12966 includes a first member 12967 formed from a plate-shaped body having a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a second member 12968 disposed in a displaceable manner on the first member 12967, and a pivot support on the rear base 941. It is formed mainly of a first gear GY1 that is rotated and meshed with the first member 12967, and a second gear GY2 that is pivotally supported by the rear base 941 and meshed with the second member 12968.

The first gear GY1 is a gear having a tooth surface on its outer peripheral surface, and as described above, is pivotally supported by the first support portion 12942k1 of the back base 941, and the tooth surface is connected to the first member 12967 and the second gear. It meshes with GY2.

The second gear GY2 is a multi-stage gear composed of two stages of gears each having a different size, and is formed with a small-diameter gear GY2a on the small-diameter side and a large-diameter gear GY2b on the large-diameter side. Further, the second gear GY2 is pivotally supported by the second support portion 12942k2 of the rear base 941 as described above, and the tooth surface of the small diameter gear GY2a is meshed with the first gear GY1, and the teeth of the large diameter gear GY2b are engaged with the first gear GY1. The surface is mated to second member 12968.

The first member 12967 is formed from a metal material, and has a second opening 12966c formed therethrough in the thickness direction at approximately the center position when viewed from the front. The first member 12967 also has a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the short direction of the first member 12967 on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second opening 12966c, and a second opening. It is formed with sliding protrusions 12966e projecting in an annular shape on both sides of 12966c in the lateral direction, and third gear tooth surfaces 12966f on both side surfaces extending in the longitudinal direction.

The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 12966c when viewed from the front is set larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above. Further, the second opening 12966c is provided with a second blade portion 12966c2 on the inner surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction).

The second blade portion 12966c2 is formed to be inclined downward from the rear base 941 side toward the second member 12968 side, which will be described later. The second opening 12966c is such that when the pair of wing members 945 is closed, the second blade portion 12966c2 is disposed on the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140, and the pair of wing members 945 is closed. In the open state, the second blade part 12966c2 is arranged outside the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140.

The sliding protrusion 12966e is provided to protrude toward the second member 12968, and its tip is inserted into the inside of the sliding groove 12968b of the second member 12968. Thereby, the second member 12968 can be disposed on the first member 12967.

The pair of third tooth surfaces 12966f are meshed with the first gear GY1, respectively. Thereby, the first member 12967 of the first gear GY1 is slidably displaced in accordance with the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965, so that the first gear GY1 can be rotated. Moreover, as described above, the small diameter gear GY2a of the second gear GY2 is meshed with the first gear GY1, thereby allowing the second gear GY2 to rotate.

The second member 12968 is formed from a metal material into a substantially H-shaped plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is disposed with a pair of extended portions oriented in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 128(a)). Further, the second member 12968 has a second tooth surface 12968a of the gear tooth surface on the outside in the opposing direction of the pair of extending portions, and a second tooth surface 12968a of the gear tooth surface along the extending direction (vertical direction in FIG. 128(a)). A sliding groove 12968b formed in the form of a long hole penetrating the plate in the thickness direction, and a blade part 6683 on the end surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the connecting part that connects the pair of extended parts. be done.

As described above, the sliding groove 12968b is formed in the shape of a long hole along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 12968a, and the sliding protrusion 12966e of the first member 12967 is inserted into the sliding groove 12968b. Therefore, the second member 12968 can be slid in the direction of gravity relative to the first member 12967 by the gap between the sliding groove 12968b and the sliding protrusion 12966e.

The pair of second tooth surfaces 12968a are meshed with the large diameter gear GY2b of the second gear GY2, respectively. Therefore, by rotating the second gear GY2, the second member 12968 is slid. As described above, the second gear GY2 is rotated by the sliding displacement of the first member 12967 by the transmission member 965. Therefore, the second member 12968 can be displaced as the first member 12967 is displaced.

Note that the directions of sliding displacement of the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 are set to be opposite to each other, and the amount of displacement of the second member 12968 is set to be large due to the displacement of the second member 12968 via the second gear GY2 having a small diameter.

The blade portion 6683 is formed to be inclined upward toward the first member 12967 side, and its upper end portion is located on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the second ball throwing portion 942c when the wing member 945 is closed. ) on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). That is, the second member 12968 is arranged at a position where the blade portion 6683 overlaps the first member 12967 when viewed from the front with the wing member 945 closed.

Therefore, when the pair of wing members 945 are displaced from the open position to the closed position, they cross the rolling path of the game ball in the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c, and also rub their edges against each other. Since the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 (displaceable member 12966) are provided with the second blade part 12966c2 and the blade part 6683, it is possible to cut the illegal object that is illegally inserted into the passage from the second prize opening 140. can.

For example, the tip of a thread is glued to a game ball, and the game ball enters from the second prize opening 140 and passes through the rolling path of the game ball of the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c, and the detection device SE4 There is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 is detected multiple times by manipulating the other end of the string (feeding out, pulling) to make the game ball reciprocate in a state where the game ball has reached the detection position. In order to deal with such fraudulent acts, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is entered with the pair of wing members 945 open, the pair of wing members 945 will be displaced from the open position to the closed position. When the second blade part 12966c2 and the blade part 6683 cross the path of the passage member, the middle part of the thread whose tip is glued to the game ball is inserted between the pair of second blade part 12966c2 and the blade part 6683. Can be pinched and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the second member 12968 has the blade part 6683 on the other side in the gravity direction than the rolling surface (rolling part 943a) of the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 140 when the wing member 945 is open. Placed. As described above, when the feather member 945 is open, the second blade portion 12966c2 of the first member 12967 is arranged outside the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second prize opening 140. Therefore, in the state where the pair of wing members 945 are opened, the game ball flowing into the second prize opening 140 can be passed between the blade part 6683 and the second blade part 966c2.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 can close the rolling path of the game balls flowing into the second winning opening 140, so the displacement distance of the second member 12968 is The number can be smaller than the second member 11968 in the embodiment. As a result, the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second prize opening 140 can be closed in a short time, and the game ball flowing in can flow into the rolling path at the timing when the pair of wing members 945 are closed. can be suppressed.

Next, a drive unit 13960 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 129. In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the drive is transmitted from the solenoid 610 to the wing member 945 via three members, the connecting member 964, the transmission member 965, and the displacement member 966. However, in the twelfth embodiment, the solenoid 610 Transmission of drive from the blade member 945 to the wing member 945 is performed by one member. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 129(a) is a rear view of the front unit 940 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 129(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXIXb-CXXIXb in FIG. 129(a). In addition, in FIG. 129(b), only the external shape of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 is illustrated with a chain line for easy understanding. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, when the shaft portion 961b is pulled into the main body portion 961a, the pair of wing members 945 is closed, and the shaft portion 961b is extended from the main body portion 961a. In this case, the pair of wing members 945 are opened.

As shown in FIG. 129, the drive unit 13960 in the twelfth embodiment is disposed on the back side of the specific winning a prize unit 950 (right side in FIG. 129(b)), and the axis of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is (vertical direction in FIG. 129(b)). Further, a transmission member 13965 is connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610.

The transmission member 13965 includes a base portion 7658 extending from the solenoid 610 side toward the front unit 940 side, and an end portion of the base portion 7658 on the front unit 940 side that is erected toward the protrusion 945b side of the wing member 945. and an engaging portion 13965j.

An annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is connected to the base 7658 at an end opposite to the engaging portion 13965j. Thereby, by driving the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 in its axial direction, the transmission member 13965 can be slid.

The engaging portion 13965j is formed at a position that overlaps the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 129(a)) in a rear view (or front view). Furthermore, the length of the engagement portion 13965j is set to exceed the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945, so that the engagement portion 13965j overlaps the protrusion 945b when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, a supporting portion 13965j1 having a substantially C-shape in side view projects from the upright end of the engaging portion 13965j. In the support portion 13965j1, the dimension between opposing sides inside the opening is set to be larger than the maximum dimension of the outer shape of the protrusion 945b. Further, the width dimension of the support portion 13965j1 in the opposing direction of the pair of engaging portions 13965j (left-right direction in FIG. 129(a)) is set to be larger than the displacement distance of the protrusion 945b. Therefore, the protrusion 945b can be disposed inside the opening of the support portion 13965j1.

Therefore, as described above, when the connecting portion 10965h is slid in the direction of gravity, the engaging portion 9965j is slid in the direction of gravity, and the projection 945b is displaced in accordance with the displacement. By displacing the protrusion 945b, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state.

According to the drive unit 13960 configured as described above, the drive unit 13960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are disposed on the back side of the plate member 951. A space can be formed on the back side of the wing member 945 (second winning opening 140). That is, by consolidating the installation space for the drive unit 13960 and the drive unit 957 on the back side of the pair of wing members 945, space for arranging other members and devices can be created on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 (second prize winner). It can be secured on the back side of the opening 140), and the space can be used more effectively.

Next, a displacement member 14966 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. In the sixth embodiment, the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape in front view of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965. A case will be described in which the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the member 14966 is formed to be sufficiently larger than the outer shape of the transmission member 965. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 130(a) and 131(a) are rear views of the winning a prize opening unit 930 in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 130(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXXb-CXXXb in FIG. FIG.

In addition, in FIG. 130(a) and FIG. 131(a), the outer shape of the pair of wing members 945 is illustrated by a chain line. Further, in FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b), the closed state of the pair of wing members 945 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b), the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is cut. The open state of the pair of wing members 945 in the case where the blade member 945 is opened is illustrated. Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the specific winning hole 65a is formed at a position farther away from the second winning hole 140 than in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b), the displacement member 14966 in the thirteenth embodiment is formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c at approximately the center position when viewed from the front. It is formed to penetrate in the plate thickness direction (left and right direction in FIG. 130(b)).

The displacement member 14966 has a protruding portion 966a that protrudes from one end side (upper side in FIG. 130(a)) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 130(a)) in the lateral direction (left-right direction in FIG. 130(a)), and It includes a bulging portion 14966b that bulges from the end side (lower side in FIG. 130(b)) to the back side (back side base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The bulging portion 14966b is formed to bulge toward the back side (back side base 941 side), and a horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 14966b1 is formed in the inner portion when viewed from the back. The connecting hole 14966b1 is an opening into which a tip (insertion portion 965e) of a transmission member 965 of a drive unit 960, which will be described later, is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965.

The connecting hole 14966b1 has an inner edge having a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and is connected to a contact portion 966b2 on one side of the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 130(a))). , and a contact portion 966b3 on the other side of the inner circumferential surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 90(a))).

The connecting hole 14966b1 is formed so that the separation distance L40 between opposing sides in the gravity direction (from the other side abutted part 966b3 to the one side abutted part 14966b2) is sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 of the insertion part 965e in the gravitational direction. When the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, the insertion portion 965e is brought into contact with the other side abutted portion 966b3.

In addition, the connection hole 14966b1 has a dimension obtained by subtracting the width L41 of the insertion portion 965e in the gravity direction from the separation distance L40 between the opposing sides in the gravity direction (from the other side abutted part 966b3 to the one side abutted part 14966b2). It is set larger than the distance L42 from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling part 943a to the inner edge of the second opening 966c of the displacement member 14966 minus the diameter of the game ball (L40-L41)>(L42-Game ball) diameter). Thereby, when the displacement member 14966 falls to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), the rolling path of the game ball flowing in from the second prize opening 140 can be blocked by the edge of the displacement member 14966.

Next, a case where the protrusions 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut will be described with reference to FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b). As described above, when the separation distance L40 of the connecting hole 14966b1 is formed to be sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 965e, and when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, the other side cover is Since the insertion portion 965e is brought into contact with the contact portion 966b3, as shown in FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b), when the protrusions 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut, one side is abutted. The displacement member 14966 is allowed to fall freely to one side in the gravity direction by the gap between the portion 966b2 and the insertion portion 965e.

As described above, the connection hole 14966b1 is set so that the dimension obtained by subtracting the width dimension L41 from the separation distance L40 is set larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the separation distance L42 (L40-L41)>(L42 - the diameter of the game ball), by allowing the displacement member 14966 to fall freely, the rolling path of the game ball flowing in from the second prize opening 140 can be blocked by the edge of the displacement member 14966.

That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 are not in communication with the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 14966 (the state shown in FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b)), the displacement member 14966 Since a part of the game ball is placed in the path of the game balls flowing in from the second prize opening 140, for example, even if the projection 945b of the feather member 945 is cut and the feather member 945 is forcibly opened from the outside, the second The flow of the game ball entered from the prize opening 140 can be regulated by the displacement member 14966.

Next, a drive unit 15960 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is positioned outside the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980, but in the fourteenth embodiment, the second arm portion 15962j is positioned on the side wall portion 981b. It is arranged and positioned inside the portion 981b. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

132(a) is a side view of the drive unit 15960 in the fourteenth embodiment, FIG. 132(b) is a top view of the drive unit 15960, and FIG. 132(c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 15960. It is a diagram. FIG. 133(a) is a sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 133(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb in FIG. 133(a). Note that FIG. 133(a) corresponds to FIG. 120(a).

First, a drive unit 15960 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132. As shown in FIG. 132, the drive unit 15960 in the fourteenth embodiment is formed into a box shape, and includes a first accommodating part 15962 and a second accommodating part 963, which are arranged opposite to each other. A solenoid 610 disposed in the space between the second housing part 963, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a connecting member 964 that is pivotally supported by the first housing part 15962 and the second housing part 963. The transmission member 965 is connected to the transmission member 965.

The first accommodating part 15962 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and includes a covering part 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (the upper side in FIG. (see).

The drive unit 15960 is arranged in a space between a first accommodating part 962 and a second accommodating part 963 that are formed in a box shape and are arranged facing each other, and between the first accommodating part 962 and the second accommodating part 963. Mainly includes a solenoid 610, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a transmission member 965 pivotally supported by a first housing part 962 and a second housing part 963 and connected to the connecting member 964. be done.

The first accommodating part 962 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and includes a covering part 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (the upper side in FIG. (see).

The guide portion 15962b includes a pair of arm portions 15962e formed in a substantially L-shape in side view, a wall portion 962f connected to the pair of arm portions 15962e, and a wall portion 962f formed in a gate shape in front view. A protruding part 962g protrudes from the covering part 962a on the opposite side (back base 941 side (see FIG. 125)), and a protruding part 962g protrudes from the wall part 962f on the other side in the gravity direction of the pair of arm parts 15962e. The third arm portion 15962h is formed to protrude from the opposite side of the second arm portion 15962j with the wall portion 962f in between.

The arm portion 15962e protrudes from each of the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a toward the rear base 941 (see FIG. 85), and the protruding tip side is bent toward the other side in the gravity direction (opposite to the solenoid 610 side) when viewed from the side. It is formed into an approximately L shape. Further, the protruding position of the arm portion 15962e in the direction of gravity is set below the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 when the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 970 are combined.

The second arm 15962j is connected to the inner edge of the wall 962f, and the distance L43 between the pair of opposing arms is set smaller than the width between the opposing arms 962e. In addition, the diameter is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the distance dimension of the second arm portion 15962j in the direction of gravity is set smaller than the dimension between the opposing sides in the direction of gravity of the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980, and when the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 980 are combined, It is inserted inside the side wall portion 981b.

Further, the distance dimension of the pair of second arm portions 15962j on the outside in the opposing direction is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension between the opposing sides in the horizontal direction of the side wall portions 981b. Thereby, when arranging the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) in the winning a prize opening unit 930, it can be positioned by arranging the second arm part 15962j inside the side wall part 981b.

The distance dimension between the third arm portions 15962h facing each other is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension between the opposing arm portions 15962e. Further, a protrusion 15962h1 is formed on the third arm 15962h to be connected to the end of the second arm 15962j on the back base 941 side.

The protruding distance of the protruding portion 15962h1 from the end of the second arm portion 15962j toward the rear base 941 (see FIG. 85) is set to be approximately the same as the concave dimension of the second concave notch 942c1. Further, the protruding portion 15962h1 is formed at a position corresponding to the second recessed notch 942c1 when the front unit 940 and the drive unit 15960 are combined, and is arranged inside the second recessed notch 942c1.

Therefore, since the protruding portion 15962h1 and the upstream end of the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, the timing when the game ball passes the step on the bottom side and the side surface The timing of passing the step on the side can be made different. Therefore, the game ball is prevented from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and the influence of both is dispersed, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. can.

Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment, the drive unit 15960 can serve both the positioning of the front unit 940 and the positioning of the distribution unit 980, and is also a part of the passage path of the game balls flowing in from the second prize opening 140. becomes. Therefore, the distribution unit 980 side can also easily tolerate dimensional effects or mounting overlaps.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134(a), the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second ball throwing portion 16942c of the winning a prize opening unit 930 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside the second recessed portion 942c1 of the second ball throwing portion 942c, but in the fifteenth embodiment, the second ball throwing portion 16942c The protrusion 16942c2 is arranged inside the recessed part 16981b2 of the side wall part 16981b. The same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134(a) is a sectional view of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 134(a) corresponds to FIG. 120(a). As shown in FIG. 134(a), in the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 in the fifteenth embodiment, in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate, the upright end surface is the winning opening unit. It is formed in a size that makes contact with the tip of the second ball throwing section 16942c of the ball 930.

Further, the side wall portion 16981b includes a recessed notch 16981b2 recessed on the proximal end side of the protruding distal end surface. The concave notch 16981b2 is formed at a position spaced apart from the rolling surface 981c1 by a radius of the game ball in the direction of gravity, and its concave shape when viewed from the side corresponds to the side view shape of the protrusion 16942c2 of the second ball throwing section 16942c, which will be described later. is set almost the same as .

Thereby, when a game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling part 943a to the rolling surface of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be made less likely to be caught between the rolling part 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed explanation of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

Further, the recessed notch 16981b2 is recessed in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the side, and the inner surface of the proximal end of the side wall 16981b is formed to be inclined downward along the rolling direction of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the through hole 981c can be suppressed from bouncing upward at the switching portion of the rolling path of the game ball.

That is, in the fifteenth embodiment, the recessed end surface of the recessed notch 16981b2 is formed to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball that collides with the recessed end surface of the recessed notch 16981b2 can be pressed toward the rolling surface 981c1 (bottom surface) side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball from jumping up and bouncing on the recessed end surface of the recessed notch 16981b2. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to pass through (flow down) smoothly.

The protrusion 16942c2 is formed to protrude from the protruding distal end surface of the second ball throwing part 16942c, and its outer shape in side view is set to be substantially the same as the recessed notch 16981b2 of the side wall part 16981b. As a result, when a game ball rolling on the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 is thrown to the rolling surface 981c1 of the distribution unit 980, the game ball is transferred to the concave notch 16981b2 of the distribution unit 980. This can prevent it from getting caught inside. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game balls to smoothly pass (flow down) from the rolling portion 943a of the prize opening unit 930 to the rolling surface 981c1 of the distribution unit 980.

In addition, in the fifteenth embodiment, the recessed part 16981b2 of the side wall part 16981b and the upstream end of the rolling surface 981c1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball is placed on the bottom side. The timing at which the vehicle passes through the step on the side can be made different from the timing at which the vehicle passes through the step on the side surface. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and to disperse those influences, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. can.

Furthermore, according to the fifteenth embodiment, the recessed part 16981b2 is formed on the downstream side in the rolling direction of the game ball, and the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side, so that the downstream end of the side surface of the second ball sending part 942c and the rolling The downstream end of the bottom surface of the moving part 943a can be brought close to the upstream end of the side surface and the upstream bottom surface of the side wall section 16981b. That is, when the upstream end of the side surface of the second ball throwing section 942c is formed at a different position on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball with respect to the upstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling section 943a, the upstream end of the side surface of the side wall section 16981b Until the game ball reaches the end, the game ball can be guided by the protrusion 16942c2 of the second ball throwing section 942c. Therefore, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down (passed).

On the other hand, the protrusion 16942c2 has relatively low rigidity and may break. However, according to the fifteenth embodiment, the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side in the direction in which the game ball passes, so if the protrusion 16942c2 breaks. Even in the case of The timing of passing through a step can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and to disperse the influence of both, allowing the game ball to flow down (pass) smoothly. be able to.

In addition, since the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the winning opening unit 930 side and the recessed notch 16981b2 is formed on the distribution unit 980 side, the side surface of the recessed notch 16981b2 is brought into contact with the protrusion 16942c2, so that the rolling portion 943a It is possible to prevent the distribution unit 980 from shifting upward in the direction of gravity. That is, at a step where the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b is at a higher position than the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a, the game ball is likely to be bounced up when riding on it. Compared to the opposite step, it tends to impede the smooth flow down (passage) of game balls. Therefore, being able to prevent the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b from shifting upward in the direction of gravity relative to the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a is particularly effective for the smooth flow of the game ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134(b), the side wall portion 17981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second ball throwing portion 17942c of the winning a prize opening unit 930 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, when the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall part 981b and the end of the second recessed part 942c1 of the second ball throwing part 942c are formed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the rolling direction of the game ball when viewed from the side. However, in the sixteenth embodiment, the end portions of the second ball throwing portion 17942c and the side wall portion 17981b are formed to be inclined in side view. The same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 in the sixteenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 134(b) corresponds to FIG. 120(a). As shown in FIG. 134(b), the side wall portion 17981b of the distributing unit 980 in the sixteenth embodiment has a distal end surface 17981b3 at its upright distal end inclined downwardly from the proximal end toward the distal end. . In other words, the tip surface 17981b3 is formed to be inclined upward along the rolling direction of the game ball of the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 17981b.

On the other hand, the second ball sending part 17942c of the winning a prize opening unit 930 is formed such that a tip end surface 17942c3 of its protruding tip surface is inclined upwardly along the rolling direction of the game ball of the rolling part 943a. In addition, the tip surface 17942c3 of the second ball throwing section 17942c is in a state substantially parallel to the tip surface 17981b3 of the protruding tip of the side wall section 17981b mentioned above when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate. will be placed.

Therefore, since the side upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, the side upstream end of the side wall portion 17981b is formed perpendicular to the passing direction of the game ball. Compared to the case of (sixth embodiment), the game ball that collides with the upper end surface of the side surface of the side wall portion 17981b can be made to slide along the slope and be less likely to be bounced back. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to pass through (flow down) smoothly.

Furthermore, since the entire side upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b is formed to be inclined, compared to the case where the side wall portion 17981b is formed in a shape having a concave cutout portion 16981b2 as in the fifteenth embodiment, for example. , stress concentration can be suppressed and the durability of the side wall portion 17981b can be ensured. In addition, when the side wall portion 17981b is formed from a resin material, the shape of the injection mold cavity (hollow portion) can be gently changed, suppressing air bubbles and filling defects, and improving moldability. You can improve your performance.

Next, a displacement member 18966 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 137. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not placed on the rolling path of the game ball entering from the second winning opening 140 has been described, but the displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment is It is arranged on the rolling path of the game ball that enters from the prize opening 140. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

135(a), FIG. 136(a), and FIG. 137(a) are schematic diagrams of the winning opening unit 930 in the seventeenth embodiment viewed from the back, and FIG. 135(b) is the same as that of FIG. 135(a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the winning a prize opening unit 930 along the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line. FIG. 136(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb of FIG. 136(a). FIG. 137(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb in FIG. 137(a).

Note that FIG. 135 shows the closed state of the pair of wing members 945, FIG. 136 shows the open state of the pair of wing members 945, and FIG. 137 shows the pair of wing members 945 in the open state. The condition is illustrated. Moreover, in FIGS. 135(a), 136(a), and 137(a), only the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 18966, and the second winning hole 140 are illustrated. In FIGS. 135(b), 136(b), and 137(b), only the pair of wing members 945, the back base 941, the front base 943, the displacement member 18966, the transmission member 19958, and the solenoid 961 are schematically illustrated. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 135, the displacement member 18966 in the seventeenth embodiment has a larger outer shape in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 135(a)) than the displacement member 966 in the sixth embodiment. The sliding groove 18966a of the displacement member 18966 has a non-transmission portion 18966a6 that is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the rear, and extends in the gravity direction, and a sliding groove 18966a that extends from the lower end of the non-transmission portion 18966a6 in the gravity direction. A transmission portion 18966a7 is provided, which is bent and extended toward the center in the left-right direction.

In addition, in the displacement member 18966, when the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, the through hole 966c1 is arranged lower than the second prize opening 140 in the direction of gravity. Thereby, when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, it is possible to restrict the game ball passing through the second prize opening 140 from flowing into the through hole 981c of the ball throwing unit 970 from the rolling part 943a.

Furthermore, the displacement member 18966 includes a blade portion 1896g that is inclined toward the front side as it goes downward, on the inner peripheral edge on the upper side in the direction of gravity of the through hole 966c1. The front side of the blade portion 1896g is brought into contact with the protruding tip portion of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding tip portion of the second ball throwing portion 942c. That is, in a rear view, when the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, the blade portion 1896g, the rolling portion 943a, and the second ball throwing portion 942c are arranged at a position where they overlap.

Furthermore, the transmission member 18958 in the seventeenth embodiment has a larger rotation range on the tip end 965a side when the solenoid 961 is driven than in the first embodiment. That is, the displacement dimension of the tip portion 965a side in the gravity direction is set large, and the displacement dimension is set larger than the opening dimension of the second winning a prize opening 140 in the gravity direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, when the solenoid 961 is driven, the blade part 1896g can be placed above the second winning opening 140, and the second winning opening can be placed inside the through hole 966c1 of the displacement member 18966 in rear view. A mouth 140 opening may be located.

Further, as the displacement member 18966 is displaced in the direction of gravity due to the displacement of the transmission member 18958, the protrusion 945b is slid inside the sliding groove 18966a. When the projection 945b slides inside the sliding groove 18966a, the projection 945b first slides inside the non-transmission portion 18966a6, and then slides inside the transmission portion 18966a7. In this case, since the extending direction of the non-transmission part 18966 and the displacement direction of the displacement member 18966 are set to be substantially the same, the position of the protrusion 945b with respect to the back base 942 changes when sliding on the non-transmission part 18966a6. It slides inside the non-transmission part 18966a6 without being transmitted. On the other hand, when the projection 945b slides on the transmission section 18966a7, it is pushed out and displaced (rotated) by the inner peripheral edge of the transmission section 18966a7. Thereby, the pair of wing members 945 are displaced to the open state.

Therefore, when the pair of wing members are in the open state, the game ball passing through the second prize opening 140 can be allowed to flow into the through hole 981c of the ball throwing unit 970 from the rolling part 943a.

On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 slides on the transmission portion 18966a7, thereby rotating the wing member 945. In this case, as described above, the blade part 18966g of the displacement member 18966 is disposed below the inner peripheral edge of the second winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity, and the front side surface is the protruding tip of the rolling part 943a and Since it comes into contact with the protruding tip of the second ball throwing part 942c, as the blade part 18966g moves downward in the direction of gravity, the second winning ball is generated between the blade part 18966g, the rolling part 943a, and the second ball throwing part 942c. The biasing object inserted onto the rolling path of the game ball from the mouth 140 can be cut off.

That is, when the displacement member 18966 is slid from the position where the pair of wing members 945 is opened to the position where it is closed, the displacement member 18966 crosses the path of the game ball flowing down from the second prize opening 140, and Since it is equipped with a blade part 18966g that rubs against the edge of the passageway (ends of the rolling part 943a and the second ball throwing part 942c), it is possible to avoid any damage caused by unauthorized insertion of the game ball from the second prize opening 140 into the passageway where the game ball is placed. You can cut off power.

For example, a detection device SE4 (Fig. 114 There is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 is detected multiple times by manipulating the other end of the thread (feeding out, pulling) and causing the game ball to reciprocate when the game ball reaches the point (see). In response to such fraudulent acts, according to the seventeenth embodiment, even if the game ball mentioned above is entered with the wing member 945 open, the displacement member moves from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where it is closed. 18966 is slid and displaced, and when the blade part 18966g crosses the path of the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c, the middle part of the thread whose tip is glued to the game ball is displaced together with the blade part 18966g and rolled. 18966g and the rolling part 943a or the second ball sending part 942c are pressed against the edge of the part 943a or the second ball sending part 942c, and when the 18966g is rubbed against the edge of the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c. The thread can be cut between the edges. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 137, if the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is cut (broken) due to a fraudulent act by the player, the through hole of the displacement member 18966 966c1 is placed on the lower side in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the player forcibly opens the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 18966 can restrict the flow of the game ball that enters from the second prize opening 140.

In this case, the transmission member 18965 is biased by the solenoid 961 by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 94) in a direction in which the distal end portion 18965a side is displaced downward in the direction of gravity. That is, the displacement member 18966 is biased in the direction of closing the second winning opening 140. Therefore, when the pair of wing members 945 are forcibly opened due to a fraudulent act by the player, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 18966 from being forcibly opened in the same way. As a result, fraudulent acts by players can be suppressed.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the lower regulating part 175 and the upper regulating part 176 are disposed facing each other in the displacement direction of the driven member 163, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower regulating part 175 and the upper regulating part 176 may be arranged to face the driven member 163 in the radial direction of the rotational displacement of the driven member 163, or in the rotational axis direction (when the driven member 163 is displaced The drive member 163 may be arranged to face the driven member 163 in a direction intersecting a plane. In this case, a frictional force is generated between the driven member 163 and the driven member 163 can be decelerated by the frictional force.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the lower regulating part 175 and the upper regulating part 176 are always arranged opposite to each other in the displacement direction of the driven member 163, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the lower regulating part 175 and the upper regulating part 176 is configured to be displaceable in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the driven member 163, and at the timing when the driven member 163 is desired to be decelerated, the displacement of the driven member 163 is changed. It may be arranged such that it is disposed opposite to the driven member 163 at certain times, and is retracted out of the displacement locus of the driven member 163 at other times. Thereby, a plurality of types of displacement modes of the driven member 163 can be configured.

In the first embodiment, an example of the arrangement of the lower regulating section 175 and the upper regulating section 176 has been described, but the arrangement is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper regulating part 176 may be arranged at a position that overlaps the driven member 163 when viewed in the displacement direction, or the upper regulating part 176 may be arranged closer to the rotation axis of the driven member 163 than the lower regulating part 175 is. Also good.

Further, the lower regulating part 175 and the upper regulating part 176 are not limited to the case where the lower regulating part 175 and the upper regulating part 176 are disposed on either side of the rotation axis of the driven member 163. may be arranged on the right side.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 applies electromagnetic force in a direction to pull up the driven member 163, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 may be arranged below the driven member 163 to generate an electromagnetic force for pushing it up. Furthermore, instead of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, a rotary motor may be used to drive the driven member 163.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the light emitting means 181 is constituted by an LED, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a miniature light bulb, a laser, an illumination plate, or a small liquid crystal display surface may be used.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which vibration transmission to the illumination board 180 is suppressed by forming a gap between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illumination board 180, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, instead of closing the gap, a high-attenuation resin member may be filled in the area between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illumination board 180. In this case, vibration transmission can be suppressed while narrowing the space for arranging the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illumination board 180.

Conversely, the gap between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illumination board 180 may be closed and filling with the resin member may be omitted. In this case, since it is possible to promote vibration transmission to the illumination board 180 when the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is driven, it is possible to perform an effect in which the light emitted from the light emitting means 181 is swayed in accordance with the vibration of the illumination board 180. can.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the light transmission hole 60c is composed of one large opening, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a material having a plurality of through holes, such as punched metal, may be used.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the outer portion 94 is configured in a thin plate shape, but the outer portion 94 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a partial opening may be formed. In this case, by forming an opening at a position that matches the arrangement of the light emitting means 181 in a front view, it is possible to avoid the plate portion of the illumination board 180 from being seen while exposing the light emitting means 181 in a front view. can.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the driving force is transmitted to the elevating plate 430 by the arm member 414, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be transmitted by an endless gear belt or by a cam mechanism.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the rotation angle width of the auxiliary arm member 444 is vertically symmetrical with respect to the horizontal, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be asymmetrical in the upper and lower directions, or it may be configured to have a rotation angle width only in one direction above and below the horizontal.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the long hole portion 406 is a horizontally long hole, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a long hole that extends obliquely with respect to the horizontal direction, a long hole that has a curved shape, or a long hole that has a portion that extends in the vertical direction. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the auxiliary arm member 444 can be improved.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the pair of wing-like members 460 abut each other and form a symmetrical shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the structure may be such that a slight gap is provided from the design stage. As a result, compared to the case where the wing-like members 460 abut each other, fatigue accumulated in the wing-like members 460 due to contact can be reduced, so that the durability of the wing-like members 460 can be increased. Note that the pattern formed on the back side of the gap and the light emitted from the light emitting means may be configured to be visible to the player through this gap.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the displacement amounts and displacement speeds of the pair of wing-like members 460 are the same, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the size of the arcuate gears 462 of the wing-like members 460 may be made different on the left and right sides and the gear ratio may be adjusted so that the displacement amounts and displacement speeds of the pair of wing-like members 460 are different. Thereby, even if the shapes of the sides of the pair of wing-like members 460 that come into contact with each other are bilaterally symmetrical, the contact surface S1 can be shifted from the left-right center position.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the wing-like member 460 is visually recognized in a symmetrical shape when in contact, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, most parts may be left-right symmetrical, but some parts may be configured differently. For example, a part of the shape may be asymmetrical, a pattern drawn on the front side may be asymmetrical, or the color may be asymmetrical. Even in this case, since the shape of most of the wing-like members 460 is bilaterally symmetrical, the player can be made to think that the wing-like members 460 form a bilaterally symmetrical shape.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the wing-like members 460 that come into contact with each other are rotationally displaced, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the pair of wing-like members 460 may be moved in parallel in the left-right direction and brought into contact with each other. In this case, in comparison with the shape of the back case 310, the wing-like member 460 on the left side can be formed to have a larger area than the wing-like member 460 on the right side.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the wing-like members 460 that are supported and displaced by the elevating plate 430 form a series of shapes, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the wing-like member 460 and an unchanging predetermined member (for example, the center frame 86 of the game board 13) may be combined to form a symmetrical shape when viewed from the front. This allows the player to visually recognize the shape that is completed only by the wing-like member 460 and the shape that is completed by the other predetermined member and the wing-like member 460, thereby improving the performance effect of the wing-like member 460. I can do it.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the light emitting effect member LA1, the wing-like member 460, and the auxiliary member 470 evoke the concept of "shellfish and pearls," but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting effect member LA1 may be provided with a decorative pattern representing a bullet hole driven into a wall, and the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 may be configured to have a shape representing the force of the bullet. In this case, it can be realized by reusing the shape of the wing-like member 460 and configuring the light emitting producing member LA1 and the auxiliary member 470 as decorations or separate members with different shapes. That is, it is possible to reuse some of the members to construct a new, separate operating unit, thereby reducing development costs.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the elevating plate 430 slides in a linear direction, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the cylindrical portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 may be configured to be pivotally supported in a fixed position, and the elevating plate 430 may be configured to be movable in an arcuate trajectory centered on this axis.

Further, in the case where the cylindrical portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to be fixedly arranged and pivotally supported, the elevating plate 430 may be configured to still be displaced in one direction. In this case, the relative displacement member 442 may be configured to be slidable in the left and right directions so that the displacement of the arcuate gear portion 444b in the left and right directions can be absorbed by the relative displacement member 442 side. For example, by providing a biasing means or an electromagnetic solenoid that biases the relative displacement member 442 toward the arcuate gear portion 444b in the left-right direction, the meshing between the arcuate gear portion 444b and the relative displacement member 442 is stabilized. be able to.

Note that the arcuate gear portion 444b may be made of a flexible resin material used in gear belts, etc., instead of being made of a highly rigid resin material. In this case, the horizontal displacement of the arcuate gear portion 444b can be absorbed by the deformation of the material.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the window section defined by the center frame 86 in the center of the game board 13 has a substantially symmetrical shape, but the window section is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inner shape of the center frame 86 may be asymmetrical depending on the size of the wing-like member 460. Thereby, it is possible to provide the game board 13 with a function of hiding the back side by shielding and a function of improving the degree of freedom in the shape of the game area.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the illumination board 777 is disposed on the back side of the light transmission hole 60c, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the illumination board 777 may be arranged inside the light transmission hole 60c. In this case, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the outer part 94 of the downstream surface component 91 can be brought close to each other, so by forming the outer part 94 thin, the outer part 94 vibrates in response to the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. It is possible to perform a waving effect.

In other words, the portion that is displaced by the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the second operating unit 700 and visible to the player is arranged not only inside the window defined by the center frame 86 but also outside the window. be able to.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the concave portions of the base plate 60 disposed on the front side of the illumination board 777 are disposed at the lower left and right sides of the game area, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as long as it does not affect the flow of game balls, it may be placed inside the center frame 86, below the outer rail 62, or inside the opening of the specific prize opening 65a. You may do so.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the partition member 708 is made of a resin material with little flexure (highly rigid resin material), but the partition member 708 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the partition member 708 may be formed from a rubber resin material. In this case, elastic deformation of the partition member 708 allows the partition member 708 to be brought into close contact with the illumination board 705 and the thin film cover member 712, thereby preventing light leakage.

In the first embodiment, the distance between the position where the left and right load members 761 abut against the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the reference O1 is the same, and the left and right load members 761 are arranged on the front side of the reference O1. Although explained above, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distance between the position where the load member 761 abuts the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the reference O1 may be made different between the left and right sides, or the arrangement of the load member 761 with respect to the reference O1 may be made different between the left and right sides.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the front inclined portion of the load member 761 is configured so as not to collide with the front lid member 770, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper wall of the front cover member 770 and the front surface of the load member 761 may come into contact with each other by displacing the load member 761 toward the front side. In this case, even if the load member 761 is displaced toward the front side due to the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the load member 761 can be returned to the rear side due to the load applied from the front cover member 770.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the left and right drive units 760 have a substantially symmetrical shape, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ease of deflection of the load member 761 may be changed by (locally) changing the density, thickness, or material of the vertical rod-shaped extension portions 761c of the left and right load members 761. good. Thereby, when the left and right drive units 760 are brought into a one-sided excited state, the posture in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 stops can be changed depending on which drive unit 760, left or right, is driven. That is, the number of postures in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be stopped can be increased.

Note that even if the left and right drive units 760 are left and right in a substantially symmetrical configuration, by making the shape of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 bilaterally asymmetric (for example, the loaded portion 733 on one side A similar effect can be achieved by providing extra wall thickness on the bottom side of the base.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be configured to move up and down while maintaining its posture, while the load member 761 may be configured to change its posture. Thereby, even if the plate-shaped displacement member 730 does not change its posture, it is possible to configure a state (posture) in which the load member 761 is easily bent and a state (posture) in which the load member 761 is difficult to bend.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the overhanging portion 761d is integrally formed with the load member 761, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the overhanging portion 761d is configured to be able to be assembled to the vertical bar-like extending portion 761c by fastening, engaging, fitting, fitting, sandwiching, etc. may be configured separately. In this case, even if the overhanging portion 761d is damaged, it is sufficient to reuse the load member 761 up to the vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c and replacing only the overhanging portion 761d, so when replacing the entire load member 761, In comparison, the size of the maintenance member can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the front small receiving part 735a and the rear small receiving part 735b are misaligned in the direction of the rotation axis of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the centers of the front small receiving part 735a and the rear small receiving part 735b may be arranged at positions overlapping the same plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

In this case, since the direction of change in the interval between the front small receiving part 735a and the rear small receiving part 735b based on the rotational displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730 can be made orthogonal to the rotation axis of the plate-like displacement member 730, The change in the distance between the small receiving part 735a and the rear small receiving part 735b can be used to change the holding force of the hollow member 740, rather than to change the posture of the hollow member 740.

That is, as the inclination angle of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 increases, the distance between the front small receiving part 735a and the rear small receiving part 735b becomes mechanically narrower. It can be used to pinch from. Therefore, as the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes, the manner in which the hollow member 740 is held (ease of vibration) can be changed.

In this case, the clearance between the front small receiving part 735a and the protruding columnar part 743 may be made equal to the clearance between the rear small receiving part 735b and the protruding columnar part 743. In this case, since the holding force of the front and rear protruding columnar parts 743 increases in the same way, the posture of the hollow member 740 is lower than that in the case where the side with the larger clearance is allowed to rotate around the side with the smaller clearance. Changes can be easily suppressed.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the small receiving portions 735 that support the pair of protruding columnar portions 743 of the hollow member 740 are arranged on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in front and behind the reference O1. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair may be arranged together on the front side or the rear side of the reference O1.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be configured to slide in the left-right direction, and the small receiving portion 735 may be configured as a long groove extending in a direction inclined with respect to the sliding direction. In this case, by providing the slope of the front small receiving part 735a and the slope of the rear small receiving part 735b on opposite sides with respect to the sliding direction, the projecting columnar part 743 and The clearance with the small receiving portion 735 can be changed. Thereby, the manner in which the hollow member 740 is held (easiness of vibration) can be changed.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported and displaced by the left-right axis, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be supported in a manner that is rotatable also on the longitudinal axis (for example, in a manner in which it is supported by a ball joint).

Further, the plate main body (a long plate extending in the left-right direction) of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be supported as a separate body above the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. In this case, depending on the driving mode of the drive unit 760, the plate main body of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be displaced by a combination of rotation about the left-right axis and rotation about the front-rear axis.

Alternatively, the shaft support may be configured to have an elongated hole shape that is elongated in the vertical direction, so that vertical displacement of the shafted support 731 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is permitted. In this case, the attitude change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 caused not only by the rotational movement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 but also by vertical displacement of one of the left and right shafted supports 731 compared to the other (centered on the longitudinal axis) (corresponding to the rotational displacement), it is possible to further diversify the manner in which the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 are displaced in response to the displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the deflection of the load member 761 is caused by a change in the load direction based on a change in the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a core material extending along the direction of displacement of the load member 761 is configured to be passed through the load member 761, and the length of the core inserted into the load member 761 changes as the load member 761 is displaced. (It may be configured so that the core material falls out.) In this case, since the rigidity of the load member 761 changes based on the presence or absence of the core material, the load member 761 may be deflected in accordance with this change in rigidity.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which one of the parts that decelerates the driven member 163 is configured to be displaceable, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, both of the parts that decelerate the driven member 163 may be configured to be displaceable. In this case, both of the parts to be decelerated (the lower regulating part 175 and the upper regulating part 176) may be made of the same member.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the biasing spring SP21 does not directly contact the driven member 163, but applies biasing force via the contact member 2190 in between, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, the biasing spring SP21 may be configured to directly contact the driven member 163.

Further, in this case, the arrangement (contact location) of the biasing spring SP21 with respect to the driven member 163 can be set arbitrarily. For example, a plurality of contact points between the biasing spring SP21 (single or plural) and the driven member 163 may be provided, and the contact points are placed on the rotating shaft side and the rotating tip side with the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 in between. It may be configured separately.

In the third embodiment described above, by extending the shape of the elongated hole portion 3406 in the direction of displacement of the elevating plate 430, a section is configured in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even while the elevating plate 430 is being displaced. Although a case has been described in which the transmission of the driving force to the downstream side of the auxiliary arm member 444 in that section is cut off, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a sliding portion (an angular region where the gear teeth are not in mesh) is provided between the arcuate gear portion 444b and the rotary gear 441, so that the rotary gear 441 does not rotate even if the arcuate gear portion 444b rotates. By configuring , transmission of the driving force to the downstream side of the auxiliary arm member 444 may be cut off.

In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement width of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 corresponds to the vertical position of the arm tip of the arm-equipped rotary gear 3441, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the arm-equipped rotating gear 3441 is not a gear in which gear teeth are formed around the entire circumference, but is configured to have an overhang partially formed so that it can function as a cam, and the overhang applies a load to the relative displacement member 442. The configuration may be such that the relative displacement member 442 is displaced by this. In this case, the displacement mode (displacement speed, displacement width) of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 can be arbitrarily designed depending on the design of the overhang of the rotary gear with arm 3441 and the relative displacement member 442.

In the fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which the detection sensor 4782 is configured to detect the easily damaged thin protruding portion 4761g that is a part of the load member 4761, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to detect the thick protruding portion 4761f.

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the adjustment member 5782 protrudes upward from the lower side of the load member 761 and presses the front side of the load member 761, but the adjustment member 5782 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the adjustment member 5782 may be configured to project forward from the rear side of the load member 761.

Further, for example, an opening may be formed on the inner side of the load member 761, and the adjustment member 5782 may enter the opening to function as a core. In this case, the ease with which the load member 761 bends can be changed depending on the degree of entry of the adjustment member 5782.

In the first and fifth embodiments described above, the case where the load member 761 is driven by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive device that drives the load member 761 may be configured with a motor such as a DC motor. Thereby, the load member 761 can be driven without being limited to an instantaneous driving mode.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion 945b is formed into a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the rear, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusion 945b may be formed into a circular shape when viewed from the rear. In this case, rattling of the wing member 945 during the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

That is, when the protrusion 945b is formed in an irregular shape in rear view or the sliding groove 966a2 is formed in a curved manner, the protrusion 945b slides on the sliding groove 966a2, so that the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b changes. Therefore, when the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b is increased, the protrusion 945b becomes easier to move by the gap, and the wing member 945 becomes more likely to wobble.

On the other hand, by forming the protrusion 945b in a circular shape in rear view and by extending the sliding groove 966a2 linearly in the displacement member 966, the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 during the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 is formed. The gap between the projection 945b and the projection 945b can always be kept constant. Therefore, rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

Furthermore, since the sliding groove 966a2 extends linearly along the direction perpendicular to the displacement direction of the displacement member 966, the length of the sliding groove 966a2 can be minimized. As a result, the amount of lightening caused by recessing the sliding groove 966a2 can be suppressed, and the rigidity of the displacement member 966 can be improved.

In the sixth embodiment, the screw threaded into the annular protrusion 953c formed between the opposing detection devices SE1 is for fastening and fixing the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a screw may be used to fasten and fix the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 and the front unit 940.

In the sixth embodiment described above, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the opposing pair of detection devices SE1 of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 is formed to protrude in an annular shape, but it is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of opposing detection devices SE1 may be formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases as it moves away from the ball entry member 953 toward the passage member 955.

In this case, in order to secure a crossroads from the specific prize opening 65a to the drive unit 960, for example, when drilling is performed using a tool such as a drill, the direction of advance of the drill is set at the outer circumference of the annular protrusion 953c. The wiring HS3 can be easily damaged (disconnected) by causing the wiring HS3 to shift (sideways) in the lateral direction (the direction away from the axis of the annular protrusion 953c in the radial direction) on the surface (the outer circumferential surface of the enlarged diameter portion).

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the game area (front) side of the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980 is visible to the player, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the game area (front) of the distribution unit 980 is visible to the player. A sticker on which information consisting of text or figures is displayed may be attached to the side.

In this case, since information consisting of characters or figures is displayed on the gaming area (front) side of the ball throwing path TR0, first path TR1, and second path TR2 of the sorting unit 980, the front unit 940 (winning port unit 930 ), even when viewing the distribution unit 980, the player can easily recognize the position of the distribution unit 980 by using the display as a landmark (reference position). Note that the form of information display is not limited to the attachment of a sticker, but may also be ink printing, two-color printing, or the like.

In the tenth embodiment, the displacement member 11966 is formed from two members, the first member 11967 and the second member 11968, and the blade portion 11968c is formed as the second member 11968 having a larger displacement amount than the first member 11967. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. The displacement member 11966 may be formed from one member, and the amount of displacement of the one member (displacement member 11966) by the transmission member 965 may be increased, and the blade portion 11968c may be formed in the through hole 966c1 of the one member.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 is extended from the main body portion 961a by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. Although explained above, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, power may be applied to the main body portion 961a, and the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 may be in a state drawn inside the main body portion.

In this case, the displacement members 11966, 12966 have blade parts 11968c, 6683 and second blade part 12966c2 inserted into the rolling path of the rolling game ball of rolling part 943a and second ball sending part 942c. The illegal object (thread) can be cut using the electromagnetic force of the drive unit 960 (solenoid 610). That is, since the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2 are displaced in the cutting direction (pinching direction) using electromagnetic force, the driving force thereof can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an unauthorized object using the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the coil spring SP1 is disposed in a compressed state between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960, and electric power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a. Although a case has been described in which the annular portion 961c is displaced toward the main body portion 961a (the shaft portion 961b is drawn into the interior of the main body portion 961a), the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by disposing a spring in an expanded state between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960 and applying electric power to the main body portion 961a, the annular portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a. It may also be displaced in the direction.

In this case, similarly to the above, the displacement of the blade parts 11968c, 6683 and the second blade part 12966c2 in the cutting direction (pinching direction) is performed using electromagnetic force, so that the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an unauthorized object using the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Prevention of banging with solenoid. Use of cushion>
a displacing means configured to be displaceable; a driving means disposed on a predetermined direction side of the displacing means and configured to be able to generate a driving force for driving the displacing means in the predetermined direction; and a resistance means configured to be able to generate resistance to displacement in the predetermined direction, the resistance means being configured to be able to reduce a load applied from the displacement means to the drive means. Game machine A1.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines configured to displace a displacement member using an electromagnetic solenoid (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, the part that receives the load from the displacement member is limited to the electromagnetic solenoid, and because the electromagnetic solenoid receives excessive load, the electromagnetic solenoid is likely to fail early. There was a problem. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of improving the durability of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the resistance means is configured to generate resistance to the displacement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction (toward the drive means) and to reduce the load applied from the displacement means to the drive means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid applying an excessive load to the driving means. Thereby, the durability of the gaming machine can be improved.

Note that the manner in which the load applied to the drive means is reduced is not limited at all. For example, the load may be suppressed by dispersing the load by increasing the number of locations that receive the load, or the load may be transmitted by creating a gap between the displacement means and the drive means using resistance means. Alternatively, the surface of the resistance means acting on the displacement means may be increased to reduce the load per unit area.

A game machine A2 comprising a support means for supporting the displacement means in the game machine A1, wherein the drive means is arranged closer to the support means than the resistance means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, by keeping the arm length between the support means and the driving means short (the arm length of the moment of force), the load applied to the resistance means can be reduced. Excessive amounts can be avoided.

In the game machine A2, the support means rotatably supports the displacement means about a predetermined axis, and the predetermined axis is disposed on the side in the predetermined direction with respect to the resistance means. .

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, it is possible to avoid reversing the load generated between the predetermined shaft and the displacement means in the direction (left and right direction) intersecting the predetermined direction, Since it is possible to limit the side where rubbing of the portion covering the rotating shaft occurs to one side (avoiding slight displacement to the left and right), it is possible to limit the portion that needs to be formed thickly.

A gaming machine A3 includes a first resistance means that generates a load against displacement in the predetermined direction, and a second resistance means that generates a load against displacement in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the first resistance means and the second resistance means include misaligned portions arranged at different positions when viewed in the predetermined direction, and the first resistance means are arranged farther from the predetermined axis than the second resistance means. A game machine A4 characterized in that:

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A3, it is possible to reduce the load applied from the first resistance means to the displacement means. In other words, the magnitude of the load can be reduced by increasing the arm length of the moment of force generated on the displacement means due to the load from the first resistance means.

Furthermore, by separating the location where the load occurs between the first resistance means and the displacement means and the location where the load occurs between the second resistance means and the displacement means, concentration of the load can be avoided. Therefore, the durability of the displacement means can be improved.

In gaming machine A3 or A4, the displacement means includes a transmission section for transmitting a driving force to a predetermined displacement means, and an attached section extending radially outward of the transmission section, and A gaming machine A5 characterized in that the means is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the attached part.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3 or A4, even if the attached part is damaged, the driving force can be transmitted to the displacement means, so the drive control can be maintained until maintenance. The displacement of the displacement means can be continued.

Note that the form of the transmission section is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be configured in a position close to the drive means, or it may be configured on the opposite side in the axial direction to the side where the drive means is disposed with reference to a shaft member disposed along a predetermined axis. But it's okay.

Further, with respect to the shaft member, the aspect on the axially opposite side to the side on which the driving means is disposed is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the drive means and the transmission part may be configured at opposite positions with respect to a plane perpendicular to a predetermined portion of the shaft member, or even if the positions with respect to the plane are not opposite front and back, the shaft In the transmission path of the driving force through the member, the transmission section may be configured on the opposite side of the driving means with the shaft member in between.

A gaming machine A6, which is any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, and includes a load applying means for applying a load to the displacement means in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines A1 to A5, the displacement means can be quickly returned from the drive displacement side.

A gaming machine A7 in the gaming machine A6, wherein the load applying means is arranged on both sides of the driving means along a direction intersecting the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A6, it is possible to avoid imbalances in the posture of the load applying means and the generated load due to the influence of the driving force.

A game machine A8, which is any one of the game machines A1 to A7, wherein the resistance means is configured to be able to apply a reaction force while in contact with the displacement means.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines A1 to A7, a frictional force can be generated at the contact surface between the displacement means and the resistance means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the displacement means from being displaced in a direction other than the predetermined direction.

The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the displacement means is configured to receive an external force, and a contact surface between the displacement means and the resistance means is arranged parallel to at least one directional component of the external force. Game machine A9.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A8, it is possible to prevent the displacement means from shifting due to external force by using frictional resistance.

<Rack, pinion, gear arm (irregular double rack)>
a base means, an intermediate means slidably supported by the base means, a distal end means displaceably supported by the intermediate means, and a distal end means supported by the intermediate means, the intermediate means being supported by the base means. and a displacement configuration means configured to be able to displace the distal end means with respect to the intermediate means as the base means is displaced by the intermediate means, wherein the base means is displaceable in a manner incompatible with the displacement mode of the intermediate means. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, have a structure in which a pinion is sandwiched between a plurality of racks (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-153095). According to this structure, the rack is displaced in the opposite direction as the pinion rotates, so the displacement speed of one rack relative to the other rack can be increased, and it is possible to construct a performance object that moves at high speed. It is possible.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is necessary to separately prepare a shielding member to hide the fixed rack, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the presentation body may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the base means is configured to be displaceable, by displacing the base means in accordance with the displacement of the distal end means or the intermediate means, the base means can be moved by the distal end means or the intermediate means. can be hidden. Thereby, it is not necessary to separately prepare a shielding member, and the degree of freedom in designing the distal end means can be improved.

A gaming machine B2 characterized in that the basic means is configured to be rotatable in the gaming machine B1.

Here, if both members (base means and tip side means) that sandwich the pinion are racks that slide in parallel, and when the pinion and rack are arranged on the same plane, the rack should be moved in order to avoid interference between the members. Since the pinion cannot be placed in a position that overlaps the rack when viewed in the displacement direction, the space for placing the rack increases in the direction crossing the pinion's rotation axis, making it difficult to design compactly. There was a problem that.

In addition, it is necessary to provide supports at multiple points to maintain the rack's posture and optimize the meshing with the pinion, which may complicate the component structure and increase assembly man-hours. There was a problem. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of space saving and structural simplification.

At the retracted position, the protruding portion of the base means side and the recessed portion of the distal end means overlapped in the slide displacement direction, so that the shielding width at the retracted position was bulky.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, since the base means is configured to be rotationally displaced, the base means and the displacement forming means can be arranged at overlapping positions when viewed from the slide displacement direction of the intermediate means, thereby saving space. In addition, the structure can be simplified since it is sufficient to have a structure for pivoting the foundation means.

Moreover, since the overhang on the foundation means side can be placed on the back side by utilizing the curvature, the shielding width at the retracted position can be narrowed.

In gaming machine B2, a part of the base means is rotatably supported by the intermediate means, and by rotating the other part about the other part, the attitude of the base means is reversed along the slide displacement direction of the intermediate means. A gaming machine B3, wherein the other part is configured to be movable in a direction intersecting the slide displacement direction.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B2, since a part of the base means and the displacement configuring means are both supported by the intermediate means, the difference between the part of the base means and the displacement configuring means is Load transfer can be stabilized.

In addition, by displacing the other parts of the foundation means in a direction that intersects the slide displacement direction, the displacement can be balanced by the displacement of one part of the foundation means and the other part, and the amount of displacement of the entire foundation means (up and down) can be balanced. (both left and right) can be suppressed.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B3, when the tip side means is disposed at the end position on one side (overhanging side) of the displacement range, the base means is moved from a direction intersecting the direction of the slide displacement. A game machine B4 is characterized in that it receives a load for maintaining posture.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines B1 to B3, the load necessary for the slide displacement is reduced compared to the case where the load for maintaining the posture is applied in the direction of the slide displacement. I can do it. Furthermore, the arrangement of the intermediate means and the distal means can be stabilized by utilizing the fact that the base means maintains its posture with the distal means disposed at one end position.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B4, in a state in which the tip side means is disposed at the other end position (retreat side) of the displacement range, the base means is such that the load applied from the intermediate means is applied to the base means. Game machine B5 is characterized in that it takes a posture facing in a direction in which displacement is possible.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines B1 to B4, the basic means, intermediate means, and displaceable means can be started smoothly.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, when the tip side means is disposed at the other end (retracted side) end position of the displacement range, the base means has a bulge extending toward the retracted position side than the intermediate means. A gaming machine B6 characterized by having an exit part.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines B1 to B5, by adopting a configuration in which the projecting portion protrudes from the intermediate means at the other side (retracted side) terminal position where it is difficult for the player to see, the intermediate means It is possible to configure the base means to be hidden by the intermediate means at the end position on one side (overhanging side) while suppressing the vertical dimension of the base means to be less than the dimension of the base means.

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B6, the base means is partially rotatably supported by the intermediate means, and at least one of the intermediate means or the tip side means has electrical wiring guided to the base means. A gaming machine B7 characterized in that: is connected to the gaming machine B7.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the displacement of a part of the base means is suppressed to easily secure a passage route for the electrical wiring and to easily secure the electrical wiring. It is possible to suppress the load applied to the vehicle.

A gaming machine B8, in the gaming machine B7, wherein the tip side means is configured to be slidably displaceable, and the electric wiring is arranged outside the tip side means.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B7, the load applied to the electrical wiring can be reduced compared to the case where the electrical wiring is connected to the distal end means that is displaced by sliding displacement, which tends to put a load on the electrical wiring. Can be suppressed.

Thereby, it is possible to increase the amount of deviation (positional deviation, speed difference, etc.) that occurs in the operation of the distal end means and the intermediate means, while keeping the load applied to the electric wiring small. For example, a driving means for driving the intermediate means with reference to the base means and a driving means for driving the distal end means with respect to the intermediate means can be separately configured while keeping the load applied to the electric wiring small.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the displacement configuration means is configured to be able to displace the tip side means with respect to the intermediate means by a predetermined amount corresponding to the displacement amount of the intermediate means. Game machine B9.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines B1 to B8, the distal end means can be stably displaced at high speed (higher speed displacement than the intermediate means).

<A pair of left and right members are configured asymmetrically>
The plurality of displacement means are configured to be able to displace a first relative position and a second relative position disposed further apart from each other than the first relative position, and the plurality of displacement means Alternatively, at least one of the second relative positions is configured to be visually recognized in a series of predetermined shapes, and the plurality of displacement means includes a first displacement means and a second displacement means smaller than the first displacement means. A gaming machine C1 comprising:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which a plurality of operating parts having substantially the same shape are arranged in close proximity to form a series of shapes (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-153095). According to this structure, in addition to being able to easily construct a large performance object by combining small operating parts, the construction of the operating parts themselves are approximately the same, so the difficulty of assembly work can be reduced. can.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, since the shapes of the operating parts are almost the same, the space required to realize the displacement of each operating part is common to each operating part, so it is limited. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the perspective of increasing the degree of freedom in design so that the available space could be utilized.

For example, when the operating part displaces the right side of a display device, such as a liquid crystal display device placed in the center of the gaming area, the side closer to the display device attracts more attention from players. Nevertheless, the space required for the displacement of the moving part is symmetrical with respect to the moving part, so the amount of possible displacement on the left side of the moving part (the side where the player's attention is high) is equal to the displacement on the right side of the moving part. There was a problem in that it was limited by the allowable amount.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the first displacement means and the second displacement means, which are visually recognized as a series of shapes, are configured with different sizes, the amount of displacement of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is Even if they are the same, the space required to realize the displacement can be different, so the limited space can be used favorably and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

A gaming machine C2 in the gaming machine C1, wherein the first displacement means and the second displacement means have external shapes set according to an arrangement possible area at the second relative position.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the first displacement means and the second displacement means make the area visible at the first relative position regardless of the difference in the size of the placeable area at the second relative position. The degree of freedom in designing the shape can be improved.

Further, the decorativeness can be improved when the first displacement means and the second displacement means are used instead of the decoration of the area at the second relative position, as in the case where the game board is formed of a light-transmitting resin.

The gaming machine C1 or C2 is provided with a guide means disposed on the back side of the plurality of displacement means to guide the displacement of the plurality of displacement means, and the position between the guide means and the displacement means is different from each other when viewed in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that it is configured to be displaced.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C1 or C2, it is possible to avoid the guide means from being visually recognized through the gap between the plurality of displacement means. As a result, it is possible to make effective use of the gap, such as by making decorative parts other than the guide means visible through the gap instead.

In the gaming machine C3, the guide means is configured to be displaceable in a predetermined direction, and the positions between the plurality of displacement means are determined from a reference line passing through the center of the guide means and along the predetermined direction when viewed in the predetermined direction. A game machine C4 characterized in that it is arranged at a shifted position.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, in consideration of load balance, etc., the area where the player expects that the guiding means for guiding the plurality of displacement means will be arranged (standard A deterioration in design quality can be avoided by configuring the player (equivalent to a line) to be hidden by a plurality of displacement means so as to be difficult to see from the player.

Any one of the game machines C1 to C4 includes a driving means for generating a driving force, the first displacement means is disposed at a predetermined position in the driving force transmission path of the driving means, and the second displacement means A gaming machine C5 characterized in that it is disposed downstream of the predetermined position in the driving force transmission path.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, by configuring the driving force transmission path so that the members become smaller as they go downstream, It is possible to prevent excessive burden from occurring.

In the game machine C5, the drive means and the transmission means for transmitting the driving force are arranged at the upper left of the back case, and the first displacement means and the second displacement means are arranged at the upper left of the back case. A game machine C6 characterized in that the first displacement means is configured to be larger than the second displacement means disposed at a position different from the upper left.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, due to the configuration and arrangement of the payout device, the driving means and drive means are arranged in the upper left part where it is easier to secure a larger internal area of the back case than the upper right part. Since the transmission means can be easily hidden by the first displacement means similarly arranged at the upper left, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the driving means and the transmission means. This makes it unnecessary to construct a separate cover for hiding the driving means and the transmission means.

In the gaming machine C5 or C6, the first displacement means is configured to be in a posture where gravity acts in a tilting direction on the side of the first relative position, and to come close to the second displacement means by tilting displacement. Characteristic game machine C7.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C5 or C6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are set in a dimensional relationship that allows them to come into contact with each other, but the clearance ( When a gap is created due to non-contact due to misalignment (play between gear teeth that mesh, gap between the guide rail and the guided part, etc.), the gap can be easily filled by tilting displacement of the first displacement means due to gravity. can do.

This makes it possible to avoid maintaining a gap between the first displacement means and the second displacement means, so that the first displacement means and the second displacement means come into contact with each other and the series of The design quality when configuring the shape can be improved.

A game machine C8, which is any one of the game machines C5 to C7, characterized in that an electric wiring runs between the first displacement means and the second displacement means on the second displacement means side.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C5 to C7, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are prevented from over-displacement by passing the electrical wiring to the second displacement means side where over-displacement is less likely to occur. It is possible to reduce the load that occurs on the electrical wiring when displacement occurs.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the predetermined shape is a symmetrical shape, and the split surface forming part that forms the split surface that separates the first displacement means and the second displacement means is located at the center of the gaming area. A gaming machine C9 characterized in that it is placed on a side far from the position.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the asymmetrical split surface is arranged on the side far from the field of view (the side that is difficult to see from the player), so that the first displacement means Also, it is possible to avoid deterioration in the appearance of the second displacement means.

The appearance of the plurality of displacement means can be improved by making the shape of the opposite side, the central position side of the gaming area (the side closer to the field of view, the side that is easier for the player to see), symmetrical.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the plurality of displacement means are arranged such that the sides on which the size of the displaceable area is restricted at the second relative position are opposed to each other at the first relative position. Machine C10.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, it is possible to easily make the plurality of displacement means each having an asymmetrical shape visible as a series of symmetrical shapes at the first relative position. can do.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C10, the plurality of displacement means includes a first displacement in which the displacement from the second relative position to the first relative position is a downward displacement, and the first displacement is A gaming machine C11 comprising a different second displacement, and configured such that the second displacement does not occur during a predetermined section from the start of the displacement.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C10, the player's interest can be improved by complicating the displacement mode of the plurality of displacement means.

In addition, if the upper inner surface of the back case is vertically misaligned on the left and right sides due to the shape of the dispensing device, the multiple displacement means can be moved to an extent that the vertical misalignment of the back case does not affect (corresponding to a predetermined section) By starting the second displacement after descending by Even when the displacement modes of the displacement means are the same, collision of the plurality of displacement means with the rear case can be easily avoided.

<Movable accessory that changes relative displacement by placement>
A first displacement means configured to be displaceable, and a plurality of second displacement means displaceably supported by the first displacement means, the first displacement means supporting one of the second displacement means. a first support part that supports the other second displacement means, and a second support part that supports the second displacement means, and the first support part that is supported by the first support part as a predetermined displacement occurs in the first displacement means. 2. A displacement mode with respect to the first displacement means that occurs in the displacement means, and the first displacement means that occurs in the second displacement means supported by the second support part as a predetermined displacement occurs in the first displacement means. A gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the gaming machine D1 is configured to have a different displacement mode.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are configured so that the second displacement means (353) is displaced in accordance with the displacement of predetermined first displacement means (351 and 352) (for example, in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-2015- (See Publication No. 231434). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the displacement between the first displacement means and the second displacement means is monotonous, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of performance effects.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the second displacement means that is displaced as the first displacement means is displaced depends on whether the second displacement means is supported by the first support part or the second support part. Since the displacement manners for the first displacement means can be made different, the displacement manners of the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be complicated, and the performance effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1, the gap between the one second displacement means and the first support part is configured to be smaller than the gap between the other second displacement means and the second support part, and The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the displacement means has a larger displacement amount on the side of the first support part than on the side of the second support part.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D1, the gap between the first support parts can be eliminated by the displacement of the first displacement means, so that the difference in the displacement mode can be increased.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes a load applying means configured to apply a load to the first displacement means, and the first displacement means is supported on one side in a predetermined direction and can be displaced on the one side. and the displacement amount of the other side portion are different from each other, the load applying means is configured to apply a load to the other side portion of the first displacement means, and the second displacement means is configured to apply a load to the other side portion of the first displacement means. A gaming machine D3 comprising a one-side second displacement means arranged on one side and an other-side second displacement means arranged on the other side.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D1 or D2, the displacement of the second displacement means is arranged on one side regardless of where on the first displacement means the load applying means applies the load. It can be made different depending on whether it is placed on the opposite side or on the other side.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3 includes a load applying means configured to be able to apply a load to the first displacement means, and the load applying means is arranged at a plurality of positions and each independently adjusts the first displacement. A gaming machine D4 characterized in that it is configured such that a load can be applied to the means.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines D1 to D3, an auxiliary drive means for displacing the load applying means can be made unnecessary.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4 includes a load applying means configured to be able to apply a load to the first displacement means, and includes a light emitting board having a light emitting surface, and the load applying means is configured to apply at least one load to the light emitting board. A gaming machine D5 characterized in that a portion is shielded when viewed in a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines D1 to D4, the load applying means can be hidden by the light emitting board. That is, it is possible to avoid the load applying means from being visible to the player by using a light emitting board which is necessary for the light emitting effect. In this case, by irradiating strong light from the light emitting surface of the light emitting board, visibility of the vicinity of the light emitting board can be reduced, so that other parts of the load applying means that are not shielded from the light emitting board when viewed in a predetermined direction are It can also be made difficult for players to see.

In addition, when the light emitting board and the load applying means are arranged close to each other, electricity is supplied to a drive device (for example, an electromagnetic solenoid) that drives the load applying means by using the path of the electric wiring connected to the light emitting board. Since electrical wiring can be passed through, it is not necessary to create a separate gap for passing electrical wiring.

In the gaming machine D5, the light-emitting board is arranged on the back side of the game board, and the game board is provided with a recessed part whose opposite side is recessed at a position facing the light-emitting board. Machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D5, an area for arranging the light-emitting board can be secured between the game board and the load from the load applying means is transmitted to the game board. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

A gaming machine D7 in the gaming machine D6, wherein the recessed portion is disposed outward with respect to the outer shape of the gaming area when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D6, even if the membrane member formed on the front side of the recessed portion is displaced, the displacement can be prevented from affecting the gaming area. I can do it.

A game characterized in that any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7 is provided with a guide means for guiding the displacement of the second displacement means, and the guide means is disposed on the one side of the first displacement means. Machine D8.

According to the gaming machine 8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the displacement of the second displacement means can be regulated by the guiding means, and when the guiding means is disposed closer to the other side. Since the amount of displacement of the first displacement means in the vicinity of the guide means can be reduced compared to the above, it is possible to suppress friction between the first displacement means and the guide means.

In the gaming machine D8, a support plate that supports the guide means, a thin film member fixed in a predetermined area to the support plate, and a light emitting board disposed on the opposite side of the support plate with respect to the thin film member and having a light emitting section. A game machine D9, wherein the thin film member is configured to partition the guide means and the light emitting board without a gap.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D8, by partitioning the guide means and the light emitting board with a thin film member, it is possible to prevent dust from rubbing on the guide means from entering the light emitting board side. can.

A gaming machine D10 in the gaming machine D9, wherein the thin film member is configured with a size that allows it to avoid contact with other displacement means.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effects achieved by the game machine D9, it is not necessary to ensure the rigidity of the thin film member, so by forming it as thin as possible, the light from the light emitting board can be weakened by the thin film member. can be kept to a minimum.

<Use of deflection. The key is to communicate>
A displacement means configured to be displaceable, a drive means for generating a driving force for displacing the displacement means, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement means, the transmission means comprising a driving force. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to change its state so as to change the manner in which force is transmitted.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine configured such that a transmission means for transmitting driving force is inserted into a deformation groove of a displacement means, and the transmission means displaces the displacement means by displacing the deformation groove ( For example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-234152). According to this gaming machine, since the deformation groove is formed to extend along the displacement locus of the transmission means, it is possible to absorb some excessive displacement of the transmission means. However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the deformation groove is configured to absorb excessive displacement of the transmission means, extra wall thickness and length are required to constitute the deformation groove. This increases the restrictions on the shape of the displacement means. Therefore, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the configuration of the displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the transmission mode of the driving force can be changed by changing the state of the transmitting means, it is possible to absorb excessive displacement of the transmitting means by changing the state of the transmitting means. can. Therefore, since there is no need to add any extra configuration to the displacement means, the configuration of the displacement means can be improved.

Note that the change in the transmission mode is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the driving force transmission efficiency may be changed by changing the rigidity of the transmission means or by adjusting the direction of the load applied to the transmission means, or the change may be caused by increasing or decreasing the number of transmission means. .

In the gaming machine E1, the gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the change in the state of the transmission means occurs during displacement of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, a load for changing the state of the transmission means can be generated from the displacement means. This eliminates the need for a separate load source for changing the state of the transmission means.

Note that the mode of change in the state of the transmission means is not limited at all. For example, it may be due to deformation of the transmission means, or it may be due to a change in the rigidity (strength) of the transmission means.

Furthermore, examples of the mode of deformation of the transmission means include elastic (continuous) deformation such as bending, deflection, and twisting, and deformation that causes boundaries such as bending and positional displacement. Furthermore, examples of the manner in which the rigidity (strength) changes include a manner in which the thickness of the transmission means changes, and a manner in which a core inserted through the transmission means comes out.

In the gaming machine E2, the transmission means has a shape that has a bendability that differs depending on the direction, and the direction of the reaction force received from the displacement means before and after the displacement means passes a predetermined reference position as the displacement means is displaced; A game machine E3 characterized in that it is configured so that the angle formed by the direction in which it is easy to bend changes.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, it is possible to utilize the fact that the direction of the reaction force received from the displacement means changes during the displacement of the displacement means to change the shape of the transmission means. It is possible to divide the reference position into a range in which the driving force mainly displaces the displacement means and a range in which the driving force mainly bends and deforms the transmission means.

In the game machine E3, the displacement means is driven so as to stop at a predetermined mid-position, and the transmission means transmits a reaction force from the displacement means when the displacement means is set to the mid-position. A gaming machine E4 characterized in that the direction of is configured to be along a direction in which it is easy to bend.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine E3, the displacement means can be easily kept in the halfway position by the deflection of the transmission means, so the amount of driving force generated by the driving means and the generation period can be roughly controlled. Even if the setting is made, it is possible to easily keep the displacement means in an intermediate position.

In the game machine E4, the drive means applies a driving force so that the pushing part of the transmission means that pushes the displacement means passes through the abutment position of the displacement means in the middle position before being bent. A gaming machine E5 characterized in that it is controlled to generate a game.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine E4, even after the displacement means takes an intermediate position, driving energy can be internalized, and this can be used to vibrate the displacement means.

That is, since the transmission means is in a position where it is easy to flex, it is possible to cause the transmission means to generate vibrations using the flexure, without having to generate the driving force of the drive means in a manner to generate vibrations. This allows vibration to be generated with a simple mechanism.

A gaming machine E6, which is any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, and includes a range setting means configured to be able to set a range in which the state of the transmission means changes.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the range in which the state of the transmitting means changes can be set by the range setting means, so that the degree of change in the state of the transmitting means can be determined depending on the situation. You can adjust it depending on your needs.

In the gaming machine E6, the range setting means is configured to limit the range in which the state of the transmission means changes to the downstream side of the driving force transmission path with respect to a predetermined position. .

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E6, the range in which the state of the transmission path changes can be limited to the range on the opposite side of the drive means, so that the transmission of the driving force on the upstream side of the transmission path is improved. It is possible to suppress a decrease in efficiency.

Furthermore, by narrowing the range in which the state changes, the degree of state change that occurs in the transmission means can be reduced, so that the influence on the displacement mode of the displacement means can be reduced. Therefore, even if the drive means cannot be precisely controlled, deviations in the displacement mode of the displacement means (for example, deviations in the stop position) can be suppressed to a small level.

<Wiring route for movable accessories>
A game machine comprising a rotational displacement means configured to be rotatably displaced, and an electricity supply means configured to be able to supply electricity to the rotational displacement means and arranged along a line connecting a rotating shaft and a radial outside, The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the electricity supply means includes a disposed portion disposed on the rotating shaft portion of the rotational displacement means.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there are game machines in which electrical wiring is fixed to an arm-shaped member that is rotatably supported, and the electrical wiring is connected to a displacement member that is connected to the arm-shaped member (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Publication No. 2012-157474). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the electrical wiring is only held loosely due to the rotational displacement of the arm-shaped member, and there is a risk that the electrical wiring will expand or contract with the rotational displacement of the arm-shaped member. There was a problem in that there was room for improvement from the perspective of suppressing the load.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, since the disposed part of the electricity supply means (electrical wiring) is arranged on the rotation shaft of the rotational displacement means, when rotational displacement of the rotational displacement means occurs, the rotational displacement means It is possible to suppress the relative displacement of the arranged portion that occurs with respect to the electrical wiring, and it is possible to suppress the load applied to the electric wiring.

The gaming machine F1 includes a displacing means movably disposed near the electricity supply means, and a suppressing means for suppressing displacement of the electricity supply means in a direction approaching the displacing means. Gaming machine F2 is characterized by the following.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F1, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the arrangement displacement means, so that the distance between the arrangement displacement means and the electric wiring can be shortened. .

In the gaming machine F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the arrangement displacement means is configured to be easily separated from the electricity supply means when an unexpected displacement occurs.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F2, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the displacing means can be improved, so that the distance between the displacing means and the electric wiring can be shortened. .

In the game machine F3, the arrangement displacement means includes a first arrangement displacement means that is displaced close to the electricity supply means and stops, and a position where the arrangement displacement means is displaced close to the electricity supply means and stops, and a position of the first arrangement displacement means is such that the arrangement displacement means moves close to the electricity supply means and stops. a second arrangement displacement means set at a position away from the electricity supply means compared to a stop position, the first arrangement displacement means and the second arrangement displacement means moving toward the electricity supply means. A game machine F4 characterized in that the game machine F4 is configured to come into contact with each other by being displaced close to each other, and to apply a load to each other in a direction away from the electricity supply means.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F3, even if the first disposed displacement means and the second disposed displacement means are displaced too much, it is possible to avoid applying a load to the electricity supply means. can do.

In the gaming machine F4, the gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the first disposed displacement means is configured to have a smaller inertia than the second disposed displacement means.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F4, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the electricity supply means when the first arrangement means unintentionally comes into contact with the electricity supply means.

Note that the manner in which the magnitude of inertia is determined is not limited at all. For example, the magnitude of the inertia may be configured by configuring the first displacement means to be lighter and smaller than the second displacement means, or the aspect of the support portion may be made different. The magnitude of inertia may be determined by varying the displacement resistance.

Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5 is provided with a support means for supporting the rotary displacement means, the support means having an open portion that is opened along the circumferential direction of a predetermined rotation axis of the rotary displacement means, A gaming machine F6, wherein the electricity supply means passes through the opening.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines F1 to F5, the axial width occupied by the rotational displacement means is suppressed compared to the case where the electricity supply means is passed inside a predetermined rotating shaft. be able to.

The gaming machines F1 to F6 each include a displacing means movably disposed near the electricity supply means, and a driving means for generating a driving force for driving the displacing means, the driving means comprising: A gaming machine F7 characterized in that it is arranged on a side where the rotational displacement means is not arranged.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F2 to F6, it is possible to improve the layout efficiency.

A game machine F8, characterized in that in any of the game machines F1 to F7, the rotational displacement means is configured to be able to transmit a driving force to the disposed displacement means.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines F1 to F7, the means for guiding the electric wiring has a driving force transmission function, so that the member can be used for multiple purposes. The number can be reduced.

<About the concept of the invention using the drive unit 600 as an example>
A ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry port to open or close the ball entry port, and the pair of wing members. In the game machine, the transmission mechanism includes a drive unit that generates a drive force for rotating the drive unit, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of the drive unit to the pair of wing members, wherein the transmission mechanism generates a drive force of the drive unit. a rotating member that is rotated by a rotating member; and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates; a protruding portion is provided protruding from one of the sliding member or the pair of wing members; A gaming machine G1 characterized in that a sliding groove into which the installation part is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members.

Here, a ball entry hole formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members that are rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry hole and open or close the ball entry hole, and a pair of wing members that open or close the ball entry hole. A game machine is known that includes a drive means that generates a driving force for rotating a wing member, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of the drive means to a pair of wing members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20111- 234009). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is connected to a protrusion that protrudes from the back surface of the pair of wing members. Specifically, opposing portions are formed on one end of the rotating member and are vertically opposed to each other at a predetermined interval, and the protruding portion of the wing member is inserted between the opposing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or pushed down by the opposing portion of the rotating member, thereby opening or closing the wing member.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there was a problem that the opening and closing operation of the wing member was unstable because it was necessary to set a large gap between the opposing part and the protruding part. That is, when the rotary member is rotated for the opening/closing operation of the wing member, the attitude of the facing part is inclined with respect to the protruding part, and the distance between the facing parts is determined by the outer shape (thickness) of the protruding part. If it is equivalent to (a), the protrusion will interfere between the opposing parts, and the rotating member will not be able to rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the spacing between the opposing parts to a size that does not interfere with the protruding parts, and the gap between the opposing parts and the protruding parts increases accordingly. As a result, the wing members tend to wobble, making the opening and closing operations of the wing members unstable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member that is slidably displaced in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member, and includes a sliding member or a pair of sliding members. A protrusion is provided protruding from one of the wing members, and a sliding groove into which the protrusion is slidably inserted is recessed in the slide member or the other of the pair of wing members, so that the sliding The groove width of the groove can be suppressed. That is, since the displacement of the sliding member is a sliding displacement and the attitude of the sliding groove is not inclined with respect to the protruding part, there is no need to avoid interference with the protruding part when rotating unlike the conventional product. Therefore, for example, by setting the width of the sliding groove to be equal to the size (thickness) of the protruding part, the groove width can be suppressed, so the gap between the sliding groove and the protruding part can be reduced. . As a result, rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening/closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized.

Note that the sliding groove may be a concave groove (indentation) or a through groove (opening). That is, the sliding groove may be formed such that the inserted protrusion can slide along the extending direction of the sliding groove (direction perpendicular to the groove width direction).

A gaming machine G2 in the gaming machine G1, wherein the direction of sliding displacement of the sliding member is substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G1, the direction of the sliding displacement of the sliding member is approximately orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, so that the sliding member is substantially displaced relative to the wing members. Can be arranged in parallel. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the protruding portion protrudes from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the sliding member and extends in a straight line along a direction perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement of the sliding member. Game machine G3 is characterized in that it is extended in a shape.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine G1 or G2, the protruding portion is provided protruding from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member and extends linearly. The gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove and the protrusion can always be kept constant during the opening and closing operations of the wing member. Therefore, rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening/closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized. Moreover, since the sliding groove extends linearly along the direction perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member, the length of the sliding groove can be minimized. As a result, the amount of lightening caused by recessing the sliding groove can be suppressed, and the rigidity of the sliding member can be improved.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G3, the protruding portion is provided protruding from the wing member, the sliding groove is recessed in the sliding member, and the sliding member is slid upward in the direction of gravity. A gaming machine G4 characterized in that the position of the protruding portion at the time of starting is set below along the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the wing member.

Here, unlike the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the wing member, in the present invention, the sliding member is interposed between the wing member and the rotating member, so that the sliding member is slid upward in the direction of gravity. At the time of operation, the weight of the slide member is added, and the inertial force becomes large, and the driving force required for the driving means increases. Therefore, it becomes difficult to smoothly perform an initial operation when starting to drive the wing member in a stopped state to open or close the wing member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines G1 to G3, the protruding portion is provided protruding from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member, so that the slide The position of the protruding part when the member starts sliding upward in the direction of gravity is set downward along the direction of gravity of the rotating shaft of the wing member, so the protruding part is pushed up by the inner wall of the sliding groove. It is possible to increase the horizontal direction component and reduce (minimize) the gravitational direction component of the displacement component of the part. Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, the initial operation when starting to drive the wing member in a stopped state and opening or closing it can be performed smoothly.

A game machine G5 in the game machine G4, wherein when the slide member starts sliding upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in a direction in which it is released.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4, when the sliding member starts sliding upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in the direction in which it is released. It can be rotated by its own weight. Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, the initial operation when starting to drive the wing member in the stopped state (closed position) and opening it can be performed smoothly.

In gaming machine G4 or G5, the inner wall of the sliding groove that the protruding portion comes into contact with when the sliding member starts sliding upward in the direction of gravity includes the rotation axis of the wing member and A gaming machine G6 characterized in that an inclined surface is formed that is inclined with respect to a plane perpendicular to the direction.

According to the gaming machine G6, in either the gaming machine G4 or G5, the inner wall of the sliding groove that the protrusion comes into contact with when the sliding member starts sliding upward in the direction of gravity has a wing member. Since an inclined surface is formed that includes the rotation axis and is inclined with respect to a plane that is orthogonal to the direction of gravity, even if the position of the protrusion is set below the rotation axis of the wing member in the direction of gravity. By guiding the protrusion along the direction of the slope of the slope, it is possible to smoothly start the slide displacement of the slide member upward in the direction of gravity.

In addition, by forming an inclined surface on the inner wall of the sliding groove, not only can the gap between the inner wall and the protrusion be made smaller, but also the protrusion can be brought into contact with the inclined surface. In addition to the displacement of the installation part in the direction of gravity, it is also possible to restrict displacement in the horizontal direction. Therefore, rattling of the wing member in the open or closed stopped state can be easily suppressed. That is, even when affected by vibrations caused by the falling of game balls, the wing member can be easily maintained in the open or closed position.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G6, a receiving portion is recessed in the inner wall of the sliding groove to receive the protruding portion when the sliding member is slid to a position where the wing member is closed; A game machine G7 characterized in that rotation of the wing member is restricted in a state in which the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion.

According to gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines G1 to G6, the inner wall of the sliding groove receives a protrusion when the sliding member is slid to a position where the wing member is closed. When the receiving portion is recessed and the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion, rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member is prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

A gaming machine G8 in the gaming machine G7, wherein the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion by slidingly displacing the sliding member downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G7, since the sliding member is slid downward in the direction of gravity, the protruding part is received in the receiving part, so that the weight of the sliding member (self-weight) is reduced. ), it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the protruding part is received in the receiving part.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G8, the rotating member includes an abutting portion and a projecting portion extending from the tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member is configured to close the wing member. a one-side abutted part with which one side of the abutting part comes into contact when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, and a predetermined interval apart from the one-side abutted part in the direction of the sliding displacement. the other side abutted part that is arranged oppositely to the other side and is abutted by the other side of the abutting part when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing member, the wing member In the closed state, one side of the abutting part is brought into contact with the one side abutted part, the projecting part is engaged with the slide member, and at least the other side abutted part is brought into contact with the other side abutted part. A game machine G9 characterized in that when the rotary member is rotated to the other side to a position where the other side of the abutting portion abuts, the engagement of the overhanging portion with the slide member is released.

According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, the rotating member includes an abutting portion and a projecting portion extending from the tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member has the following effects: One side abutted part that comes into contact with one side of the abutting part when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and the one side abutted part and the direction of sliding displacement. and the other side abutted part which is arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval and is abutted by the other side of the abutment part when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the one-side abutted part is pushed by the one side of the abutting part, and the sliding member is slid toward the one side, causing the wings to While the member is closed, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the other side abutted part is pushed by the other side of the abutting part and the sliding member slides towards the other side. By being displaced, the wing member is opened.

In this case, when the wing member is closed, one side of the abutting part is in contact with the one-side abutted part and the overhanging part is engaged with the slide member, so the rotating member is not rotated. Slide displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side to a position where the other side of the abutting part abuts at least the other side abutted part, the engagement of the overhanging part with the sliding member is released, so the rotation By further rotating the member toward the other side, the slide member can be slid toward the other side, and the wing member can be opened.

In the gaming machines G1 to G8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, and the transmission mechanism A protrusion is provided protruding from one of the wing members, and a sliding groove into which the protrusion is slidably inserted is recessed in the slide member or the other of the pair of wing members, and the rotation The member includes an abutting portion and a projecting portion extending from the tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member is configured to rotate when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. a one-side abutted part against which one side of the abutting part is abutted, and a one-side abutted part and the one-side abutted part arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the sliding displacement for opening the wing member. and an abutted part on the other side with which the other side of the abutting part abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side, and when the wing member is closed, the protruding part The slide member is disengaged from the slide member and is slid from a state in which the wing member is closed to a position where the one side abutment portion abuts one side of the abutment portion. The gaming machine G10 is characterized in that the projecting portion is engaged with the sliding member.

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, the rotating member includes an abutting part and an overhanging part extending from the tip of the abutting part, and the sliding member has the following effects: One side abutted part that comes into contact with one side of the abutting part when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and the one side abutted part and the direction of sliding displacement. and the other side abutted part which is arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval and is abutted by the other side of the abutment part when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the one-side abutted part is pushed by the one side of the abutting part, and the sliding member is slid toward the one side, causing the wings to While the member is closed, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the other side abutted part is pushed by the other side of the abutting part and the sliding member slides towards the other side. By being displaced, the wing member is opened.

In this case, when the slide member is slid from the state in which the wing member is closed to a position where the one-side abutment portion abuts one side of the abutment portion, the overhang portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, sliding displacement of the sliding member to the other side without rotating the rotating member is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

On the other hand, when the wing member is closed, the overhang portion is not engaged with the slide member, so by further rotating the rotary member toward the other side, the slide member is slid toward the other side, The wing member can be opened. Here, when the wing member is closed and the overhang part is engaged with the slide member, the shape of the overhang part and one side contact part can be changed to allow rotation of the rotating member to the other side. It is necessary to form it into a specific shape, which makes the shape complicated. Therefore, not only the strength may decrease, but also the engagement may become more likely to be released. On the other hand, in the present invention, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, so that the shape of the overhanging portion and one side contact portion can be rotated. There is no need to shape the member to allow rotation to the other side. Therefore, not only can the shape be simplified to ensure strength, but also a shape that is easy to maintain engagement can be adopted, making it difficult for the engagement to be released.

Any of the game machines G1 to G10 is provided with a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and when the protruding portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, the A gaming machine G11 characterized in that a part of the slide member is disposed within the passage of the passage member.

According to the game machine G11, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines G1 to G10, it is provided with a passage member that forms a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and the protruding part is not disposed in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is placed in the passage of the passage member, so even if the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside by cutting the protruding part, the ball will not enter from the ball entrance. The sliding member can restrict the flow of the game ball.

Any of the game machines G1 to G11 includes a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and the slide member slides the wing member from a position where it is opened to a position where it is closed. A game machine G12 characterized by comprising a friction contact portion that crosses the path of the passage member and rubs against the edge of the passage member when the member is slid and displaced.

According to the gaming machine G12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G11, when the sliding member is slid from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed, the sliding member crosses the passage of the passage member and the passage member Since the slide member is provided with a rubbing portion that rubs against the edge of the ball, it is possible to cut off an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the ball entrance.

For example, the end of a thread is glued to a game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entrance and passed through the path of the passage member, and when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor, the other end of the thread is There is a fraudulent act in which the detection sensor detects multiple times by manipulating (feeding out, pulling in) and moving the game ball back and forth. In response to such fraudulent acts, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is entered with the wing member open, the slide member is slid from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed. When the rubbing part crosses the path of the passage member, the middle part of the thread whose tip is glued to the game ball is displaced together with the rubbing part and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and the rubbing part crosses the passage member. When rubbed against the edge, the thread can be cut between the rubbed part and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Note that the frictional contact portion of the slide member is preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a portion of the slide member (friction portion) may be formed from a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be formed from a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the portion with which the friction contact portion is rubbed) may be formed from a metal material. Further, it is preferable that the frictional contact portion and the portion (edge of the passage member) with which the frictional contact portion comes into contact with each other are formed as a blade (cutting blade).

Any of the game machines G1 to G11 includes a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and the transmission mechanism is configured to displace the wing member from an open position to a closed position. A game machine G13 characterized in that it includes a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and bring their edges into frictional contact with each other.

According to the game machine G13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines G1 to G11, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, it crosses the passage of the passage member and touches each other's edges. Since the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members that come into frictional contact with each other, it is possible to cut off an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the ball entrance.

For example, the end of a thread is glued to a game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entrance and passed through the path of the passage member, and when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor, the other end of the thread is There is a fraudulent act in which the detection sensor detects multiple times by manipulating (feeding out, pulling in) and moving the game ball back and forth. In response to such fraudulent acts, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is entered with the wing member open, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and the pair of cutting members When the thread crosses the path of the passage member, the middle portion of the thread whose tip end is adhered to the game ball can be sandwiched between the pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Note that it is preferable that the pair of cutting members be formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a portion of the slide member (edges that rub against each other) may be formed from a metal material. Moreover, it is preferable that the portions of the pair of cutting members that rub against each other are formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the gaming machine G12 or G13, the drive means is configured to displace the drive shaft in a first direction by electromagnetic force, and also displace the drive shaft in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The actuator is formed as a solenoid actuator that is actuated by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement of the wing member from the open position to the closed position is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. A gaming machine G14 featuring:

According to the game machine G14, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine G12 or G13, the blade member is displaced from the open position to the closed position by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an unauthorized object (for example, a thread) between the frictional contact portion of the slide member and the edge of the passage member.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G14, the rotating member includes an abutting portion, and the sliding member is configured to engage the abutting portion when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. one side abutted part with which one side of the contact part abuts, and when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member arranged opposite to the one side abutted part. A game characterized in that the other side abutted part is abutted by the other side of the abutting part, and the one side abutted part and the other side abutted part are formed approximately at the center in the width direction. Machine G15.

According to the gaming machine G15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G14, the rotating member includes a contact portion, and the sliding member has an effect when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. One side of the abutted part is in contact with one side of the abutting part, and when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, which is arranged opposite to the one side of the abutted part. The other side of the abutting part is provided with an abutted part on the other side, and the abutted part on the one side and the abutted part on the other side are formed approximately at the center in the width direction, so that rotation with the pair of wing members is provided. Changes in the posture of the slide member relative to the other members can be easily tolerated. Therefore, as the rotating member rotates, the sliding member can be smoothly slid and displaced, and as a result, the wing member can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, when the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members during the operation of slidingly displacing the slide member with the rotation of the rotating member to open or close the pair of wing members, When the attitude of the slide member is changed, if the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two places and is also connected to the rotating member at two places, the slide member rotates with the pair of wing members. Changes in the attitude of the slide member with respect to the member are difficult to tolerate, and resistance occurs when sliding the slide member (i.e., rotating the rotating member), which prevents the wing member from opening or closing. . On the other hand, according to the present invention, the sliding member is connected to the pair of wing members at two locations and is connected to the rotating member at one location, so that one of the pair of wing members is connected to the sliding member at two locations. Even if the load from the game ball is applied to only one side, the change in attitude of the slide member between the pair of wing members and the rotating member can be easily tolerated.

Note that the approximate center in the width direction where the one-side abutted part and the other-side abutted part are formed is defined as passing through the approximate center between the pair of protruding parts when the pair of wing members are open or closed. , and means a position on an imaginary line along the direction of sliding displacement.

A gaming machine G16, in the gaming machine G15, characterized in that the width dimensions of one side and the other side of the abutting part are set to be at least three times or less the maximum external dimension of the protruding part.

According to the gaming machine G16, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G15, the width dimensions of one side and the other side of the abutting part are set to at least three times the maximum external dimension of the protruding part. Changes in the posture of the slide member between the wing member and the rotating member can be easily tolerated. In addition, it is preferable that the width dimensions of one side and the other side of the contact part are set to twice or less the maximum external dimension of the protruding part. This is because the above-mentioned attitude change tolerance can be more easily achieved.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 as an example>
a first ball entrance, a first opening/closing member for opening or closing the first ball entrance, a first driving means for driving the first opening/closing member, a second ball entrance, and a second ball entrance. In a gaming machine comprising a second opening/closing member that opens or closes a mouth, and a second driving means for driving the second opening/closing member, the first driving means and the second driving means are configured to drive the second opening/closing member. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that it is arranged on the back side.

Here, a first ball entrance, a first opening/closing member for opening or closing the first ball entrance, a first driving means for driving the first opening/closing member, a second ball entrance, and a first opening/closing member for opening or closing the first ball entrance; A game machine is known that includes a second opening/closing member that opens or closes a second ball entrance and a second driving means that drives the second opening/closing member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-177416). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the first opening/closing member and the second opening/closing member, so the first opening/closing member and the second opening/closing member There was a problem in that it was difficult to arrange other members and devices on the back side of the device, and it was difficult to use the space effectively.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the second opening/closing member, so that space can be formed. That is, by consolidating the installation space for the first drive means and the second drive means on the back side of the second opening/closing member, the space for installing other members and devices is freed up from the first opening/closing member (first entrance). It can be secured at the back of the ball opening), allowing for effective use of space.

A gaming machine H2 in the gaming machine H1, wherein a front projected area of the second opening/closing member is larger than a front projected area of the first opening/closing member.

A gaming machine H3 in the gaming machine H1 or H2, wherein a front projected area of the second opening/closing member is larger than a total front projected area of the first driving means and the second driving means.

According to the gaming machine H2 or H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the front projected area of the second opening/closing member is made larger than the front projected area of the first opening/closing member, or the first driving means Since the total front projected area of the second driving means is larger than that of the second driving means, the dead space on the back surface of the second ball entrance (second opening/closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In the gaming machine H3, the second opening/closing member is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front with one direction being the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are connected to the second opening and closing member on the back side of the second ball entrance. A gaming machine H4 characterized in that opening/closing members are arranged in parallel along the longitudinal direction.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H3, the second opening/closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in front view with one direction as the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are connected to the second ball entering ball. Since they are arranged in parallel along the longitudinal direction of the second opening/closing member on the back side of the mouth, the dead space on the back side of the second ball entry opening (second opening/closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In any of gaming machines H1 to H4, the first drive means and the second drive means include a main body, a drive shaft disposed on one side of the main body, and a drive shaft that drives the drive shaft and drives the main body. a drive unit housed in the main unit, and wiring that supplies power to the drive unit and is drawn out from the other side of the main unit, and the first drive unit and the second drive unit move the drive shaft to the second drive unit. A gaming machine H5 characterized in that it is arranged in a posture facing an opening/closing member.

According to the gaming machine H5, in any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the first driving means and the second driving means include a main body, a drive shaft disposed on one side of the main body, and a drive shaft thereof. The first driving means and the second driving means move the drive shaft to the second drive shaft. Since it is disposed in a posture facing the second opening/closing member, the wiring of the first driving means and the wiring of the second driving means can be easily integrated.

In the gaming machine H5, the main body portion of the first driving means and the main body portion of the second driving means are each formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the driving shaft and wiring are disposed on the outer surface of the main body portion. A game machine H6 characterized in that the first driving means and the second driving means are disposed at positions where one outer surface, excluding the outer surface, is substantially flush with each other.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H5, the main body of the first driving means and the main body of the second driving means are each formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the driving portion of the outer surface of the main body Since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where the outer surfaces of the one excluding the outer surfaces on which the shaft and the wiring are arranged are substantially flush with each other, for example, the first driving means and the second driving means Even if the two drive means have different outputs and the sizes of their main bodies are different, the shape of the shield plate for separating the first drive means and the second drive means from other regions can be simplified.

That is, when the main body portion of the first driving means and the main body portion of the second driving means are formed to have different sizes, the outer surfaces of one main body portion and the other main body portion form a step. It becomes necessary to form a shield plate by bending it along the step, and the shape of such a shield plate becomes complicated. In contrast, according to the present invention, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where the outer surfaces of the main body are substantially flush with each other, and the outer surfaces do not form a step, so that the shield plate can be made into a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the shield plate can be simplified.

Note that the shield plate is a shield plate that separates the area where the first drive means and the second drive means are disposed from other areas (for example, the area where the detection sensor and control board are disposed), and between the two areas. A barrier made of a conductor for restricting (suppressing) the flow of electromagnetic fields, and is formed, for example, as a metal plate.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a first passage member forming a passage for a game ball entered into the first ball entry port and a passage for a game ball entered into the second ball entry port are provided. and a first transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the first driving means to the first opening/closing member, and the first opening/closing member is rotated to a position sandwiching the ball entrance. The first transmission mechanism includes a pair of wing members that are pivotably supported to open or close the ball entrance, and the first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first drive means and is configured to rotate the first passage member and the second passage. A gaming machine H7 comprising: a rotating member disposed between the members; and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of wing members.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means, and the transmission mechanism between the first passage member and the second passage member is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means. Compare this with conventional products in which the pair of wing members are opened and closed only by the rotating member, as it is equipped with a rotating member disposed in the rotary member and a sliding member that is slid and displaced as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of wing members. Thus, space can be secured on both sides (lateral sides) of the first passage member on the back side of the first ball entry port. In addition, unlike conventional products, there is no need to bend the first passage member toward the second passage to avoid interference with the rotating member, so the first ball entrance can be moved closer to the second ball entrance. I can do it.

In the game machine H7, the rotating member includes a first portion extending from the rotating shaft and connected to the sliding member, and a second portion extending from the rotating shaft and driven by the first driving means. A game machine H8, wherein the first part is bent into a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H7, the rotating member includes a first portion extending from the rotating shaft and connected to the slide member, and a first portion extending from the rotating shaft and connected to the sliding member. Since the first part is bent in a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, the sliding amount of the slide member can be secured while the first part is driven by the first drive means. The distance between the slide member and the slide member can be suppressed.

That is, the first portion is formed in a straight line, and the length dimension (distance from the rotating shaft to the portion connected to the sliding member) of the first portion is determined by the distance from the rotating shaft to the sliding member in the present invention. If the distance is set equal to the straight line distance to the part where the sliding member is located, the amount of sliding of the sliding member can be made equivalent to that of the present invention, but the distance between the first driving means and the sliding member increases and the overall size increases. . On the other hand, when the first portion is formed linearly and the length of the first portion is shorter than the linear distance from the rotating shaft to the portion connected to the slide member in the present invention, Although the distance between the drive means and the slide member can be made the same as in the present invention, the amount by which the slide member slides becomes smaller.

On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first portion is bent in a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, so that the sliding amount of the sliding member is ensured, and the sliding distance between the first driving means and the sliding member is secured. The distance between the members can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine H8, the second part of the rotating member is formed on the back side of the first part, which is opposite to the sliding member.

According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H8, the second portion of the rotating member is formed on the back side of the first portion opposite to the sliding member, so that the first portion is bent. By effectively utilizing the space created by this, it is possible to downsize the rotating member. That is, the rotating member can be efficiently disposed in the space between the first passage member and the second passage member, and the overall size can be reduced.

Any one of the game machines H1 to H9 includes a detection sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the second ball entrance, and at least a part of the detection sensor is connected to the second opening/closing member and the first drive means. A gaming machine H10 characterized in that it is arranged between.

According to the game machine H10, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines H1 to H9, the game machine H10 includes a detection sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the second ball entrance, and at least a part of the detection sensor is configured to open and close the second ball. Since it is disposed between the member and the first drive means, for example, if the second opening/closing member is opened and the first drive means is tampered with from the second ball entrance, a part of the detection sensor will detect the first drive means. Since the drive means can be hidden, such fraudulent acts can be made difficult.

In this case, if a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole in order to secure the path from the second ball entrance to the first drive means, the detection sensor may be destroyed. Therefore, fraud can be detected by monitoring the state of such detection sensors. In addition, in the present invention in which the first driving means is disposed on the back side of the second opening/closing member, even if the second opening/closing member is opened and tampering is done to the first driving means from the second ball entrance, By closing the second opening/closing member, the first drive means is shielded by the second opening/closing member, making it impossible to see the location where fraud has been committed, and therefore fraud can be detected by monitoring the state of the detection sensor described above. is particularly effective.

The gaming machine H10 includes a case member that accommodates the detection sensor, and a screw member fastened to the case member, and a pair of the detection sensors are provided, and at least a portion of each of the pair of detection sensors is provided. is disposed between the second opening/closing member and the first driving means, and the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices facing each other.

According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H10, at least a portion of each of the pair of detection sensors is disposed between the second opening/closing member and the first driving means, and is fastened to the case member. Since the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices facing each other, when the second opening/closing member is opened to tamper with the first drive means from the second ball entrance, the first drive means cannot be hidden by the screw member. This makes it more difficult for such fraudulent acts to occur. That is, it is difficult to shield the entire front surface of the first driving means with the pair of detection sensors, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of opposing detection sensors. By setting this as the fastening position of the screw member, the unshielded area in front of the first drive means can be supplemented by the screw member, thereby making it more difficult for fraudulent acts to occur.

Note that the case member may consist of two members and the screw member may be for fastening and fixing these two members together, or it may be for fastening and fixing another member to the case member. good. Moreover, it is preferable that the screw member is made of metal.

A gaming machine H12 characterized in that, in the gaming machine H11, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other.

According to the gaming machine H12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H11, since the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other, for example, the second opening/closing member can be opened to open the second input. When tampering with the first driving means is attempted from the ball mouth, such tampering can be made more difficult.

That is, the wiring is relatively susceptible to damage. Therefore, if a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole in order to secure the path from the second ball entry port to the first drive means, the wiring may be damaged due to the unauthorized act. (disconnection) can be easily caused. Alternatively, it is possible to make the user recognize that it is difficult to commit fraudulent acts without damaging (breaking) the wiring, thereby making it easier to deter fraudulent acts.

In the gaming machine H12, the gaming machine H13 is characterized in that the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wirings of the pair of detection sensors are wound around the seat portion.

According to the gaming machine H13, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H12, the case member includes a seat to which the screw member is fastened, and the wiring for the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat. , can be routed (positioned) over a wider range in front of the first drive means. That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening/closing member is opened to tamper with the first drive means from the second ball entrance, such tampering can be made more difficult.

In the gaming machine H12 or H13, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the seat portion is formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases as the distance from the second opening/closing member increases. Game machine H14.

According to the game machine H14, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H12 or H13, the case member includes a seat portion to which a screw member is fastened, and the seat portion has a conical shape whose diameter increases as the distance from the second opening/closing member increases. Therefore, in order to secure a path from the second ball entry port to the first drive means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform hole-drilling, the direction of advance of the drill is set to the seat. Wiring can be easily damaged (broken) by causing it to shift laterally (slip) on the outer peripheral surface of the wire.

A game machine H15 characterized in that, in any of the game machines H12 to H14, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the opposite side to the fastening position of the screw member.

According to the gaming machine H15, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H12 to H14, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member, so that the wiring is connected to the first driving means. can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of the That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by the screw member and the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening/closing member is opened to tamper with the first drive means from the second ball entrance, such tampering can be made more difficult.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing ball unit 970 as an example>
a game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes; a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member; a second member disposed on the back side of a game board; a first engaging part that engages with the first member; and a second engaging part that engages with the second member. A gaming machine I1 characterized by comprising a third member having:

Here, a game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member. A gaming machine is known that includes a second member disposed on the back side of the gaming board (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-5783). The game ball that flows down the front side of the game board and flows into the first passage of the first member passes through the first passage, flows into the second passage of the second member, and flows into the second passage on the back side of the game board. Pass through 2 passages. Thereby, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front and back direction, which can provide interest to the player.

In this case, if there is a positional deviation (step) in the connecting part between the first passage and the second passage, the smooth flow of the game ball will be inhibited, so the positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member will be ensured. You are requested to do so. However, the gaming machine described above has a problem in that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having passages and decorative members are arranged on the front of the game board, positioning holes for positioning each of these members are provided on the game board. While the positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed in the process of forming the first member, in order to form the positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back of the game board, it is necessary to invert the game board. This requires a separate step of forming a positioning hole just for the second member, which is not practical.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the third member has the first engaging part that engages with the first member and the second engaging part that engages with the second member, the third member It is possible to position the second member with respect to the first member using the following.

In the game machine I1, the game board is formed with an opening, and includes an opening in which a connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is disposed in the internal space, and the opening A gaming machine I2 characterized in that the third member is disposed in an internal space of the gaming machine I2.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I1, the gaming board is formed with an opening, and the connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is disposed in the internal space. Since the third member is disposed in the internal space of the opening, there is no need to separately provide an opening for disposing the third member. In other words, since the opening for arranging the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage is also used as the arranging space for the third member, the number of processing steps can be reduced accordingly, leading to a reduction in product cost. can be achieved.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the third member is configured such that the first engaging portion engages with the first passage of the first member, and the second engaging portion engages with the second passage of the second member, respectively. A game machine I3 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine I3, in the gaming machine I1 or I2, the third member has the first engaging part in the first passage of the first member, and the second engaging part in the second passage of the second member, respectively. Since they are engaged, the second member can be effectively positioned relative to the first member. That is, the purpose of positioning the second member with respect to the first member is to suppress positional deviation (level difference) from occurring in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, but the purpose of positioning the second member with respect to the first member is Since the connecting part between the first passage and the second passage can be directly positioned by the third member, positional deviations (level differences) can be effectively prevented compared to the case where other parts are positioned by the third part. can be suppressed to As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down.

A gaming machine I4 in the gaming machine I3, wherein a part of the inner wall of at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed by the third member.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I3, a part of the inner wall in at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed by the third member, so that the dimensions of the first passage and the second passage are reduced. Tolerances or installation tolerances can be more easily tolerated.

A gaming machine I5, which is any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, wherein the first member is formed to be able to hold the third member.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines I1 to I4, the first member is formed to be able to hold the third member, so the first member and the second member are attached to the front and back of the game board. When attaching each member, there is no need to separately attach the third member, and by attaching the first member, the third member can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of the installation work can be improved accordingly.

In the gaming machine I5, a first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member when the third member is held by the first member. .

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I5, when the third member is held by the first member, the first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. After the first member and the third member are attached to the game board, there is no need to perform a separate operation to engage the first engaging portion of the third member with the first member. Therefore, the workability of the installation work can be improved accordingly.

In the game machine I6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member is formed to be able to engage with the second member from the opposite side to the first member. A gaming machine I7 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member engages the second member from the side opposite to the first member. Therefore, by attaching the second member to the back of the game board after simultaneously attaching the first member and the third member to the game board, the second member of the third member can be engaged with the third member at the same time as the attachment operation. The two engaging portions can be engaged with the second member. Therefore, the workability of the installation work can be improved accordingly.

In any one of gaming machines I5 to I7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is disposed, and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member, and the third A gaming machine I8 characterized in that the members are fixed or integrally formed.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I5 to I7, the first member has a main body member in which the first passage is arranged and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member. Since the third member is fixed to or integrally formed with the fixing member, the third member can be held (arranged) in the first member at the same time as the fixing member is fastened and fixed to the main body member. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent forgetting to attach the third member when attaching the first member and the second member to the game board.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I8, the first member is formed to allow a game ball to enter therein and is rotated to a position sandwiching the ball entrance, which is communicated with the first passage. a pair of wing members that are rotatably supported and open or close the ball entrance; a drive means that generates a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members; and a drive means that generates a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members; a transmission mechanism for transmitting transmission to the member; the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means; and a sliding member that is slid and displaced as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of wing members. A gaming machine I9, characterized in that the third member is formed to be able to guide the sliding displacement of the sliding member.

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a pair of rotating members that are slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates. Since it is equipped with a slide member that opens and closes the pair of wing members, compared to the conventional product in which the pair of wing members are opened and closed only by a rotating member, the blade members can be opened and closed on the back side of the ball entrance and on both sides (sides) of the first passage. space can be secured. In this case, since the third member is formed to be able to guide the sliding displacement of the sliding member, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the sliding displacement of the sliding member. Therefore, the structure of the first member can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the game machine I9, the pair of wing members include a protruding portion that protrudes toward the slide member, and the slide member includes a sliding groove into which the protruding portion is slidably inserted, A game machine I10 characterized in that the third member includes a covered surface portion facing an opening on the opposite side of the wing member in the sliding groove of the slide member.

According to the game machine I10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine I9, the pair of wing members are provided with a protruding portion that protrudes toward the slide member, and a slide member through which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is provided. Since the slide member includes a sliding groove, and the third member includes a covering surface facing the opening on the opposite side of the wing member in the sliding groove of the sliding member, the sliding of the slide member is prevented by the covering surface of the third member. By shielding the opening of the groove from the outside, it is possible to suppress dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, the pair of wing members can be stably opened or closed while preventing the sliding movement of the protrusion from being obstructed by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove.

<About the concept of the invention using the specific winning opening unit 950 as an example>
A ball entrance formed to allow a game ball to enter, an opening/closing member for opening and closing the ball entrance, a rolling surface on which a game ball rolled after entering the ball entrance, and the rolling surface thereof. A gaming machine J1 comprising a passage member into which game balls rolling on a surface flow, wherein a plurality of said passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals.

Here, the ball entrance is formed such that a game ball can enter therein, an opening/closing member that opens and closes the ball entrance, and a passage member that forms a passage for the game ball that has entered the ball entrance. Gaming machines are known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-3092). The ball entrance is formed in a size that allows multiple game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that have entered the ball entrance are collected in the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and are collected in the passage member. One ball is poured into the ball. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the ball entrance is enlarged, the rolling distance of the game ball (length of the rolling surface) from the end of the ball entrance to the passage member increases accordingly. Therefore, it takes time for the ball to reach the passage member, and by the time the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, another game ball may enter the ball from the entrance, which causes the problem that over-winning is likely to occur. there were.

On the other hand, according to the game machine J1, since a plurality of passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals, even when the ball entrance is enlarged, the rolling distance of the game ball to the passage member (rolling surface (length) can be shortened. Therefore, the time it takes to reach the passage member is shortened by that amount, and the water can flow into the passage member quickly. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A game machine J1 comprising a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entry hole, and the detection sensor is disposed at a connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Machine J2.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J1, it is equipped with a detection sensor that detects a game ball that enters the ball entrance, and the detection sensor is arranged at the connection part between the rolling surface and the passage member. Therefore, the game ball entering the ball entrance can be detected more quickly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the ball entrance is closed by the opening/closing member, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

The gaming machine J1 or J2 includes a first guide means having a first inclined surface that is inclined from the ball entry hole toward the passage member and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with a game ball rolling on the rolling surface. , the ball entry port is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rolling surface extends along the longitudinal direction of the ball entry port, and the first guide means is located at one end of the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction. and the passage member.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the first inclined surface is inclined from the ball entrance toward the passage member and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface. The ball entry port is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rolling surface extends along the longitudinal direction of the ball entry port, and the first guide means extends along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since it is disposed between the side end and the passage member, when a game ball enters from near the longitudinal end of the ball entrance, the game ball is guided by the first inclined surface of the first guiding means. By guiding it to the passage member, it is possible to prevent it from getting stuck at the longitudinal end of the rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball that enters from the ball entrance can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the ball entrance is closed by the opening/closing member. This can prevent over-winning.

A game machine J4, which is any one of the game machines J1 to J3, and includes a guide groove formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and slopes downward from the ball entry hole toward the passage member. .

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines J1 to J3, the game machine J4 includes a guide groove formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and slopes downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member. Therefore, the rolling surface can receive game balls rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface and guide them to the passage member. That is, when the game ball rolls in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, it can be suppressed from passing through the passage member. Therefore, the game ball that enters from the ball entrance can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the ball entrance is closed by the opening/closing member. This can prevent over-winning.

A gaming machine J5 in the gaming machine J4, wherein the guide groove extends linearly in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J4, the guide groove extends linearly in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, so that the rolling surface is aligned with the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The game ball rolling in the direction can be easily received into the guide groove, and the received game ball can be quickly guided (flowed) into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A gaming machine J4 or J5, characterized in that the groove width of the guide groove is set to be approximately equal to the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J4 or J5, the groove width of the guide groove is set to be approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball, so when a plurality of game balls are accepted in the guide groove, The game balls can be guided to the passage member in an aligned state. Therefore, each game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In any of gaming machines J3 to J6, the rolling surface is on the opposite side of the passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with respect to the first region where the first guide means is disposed. A gaming machine J7 characterized in that the second area is formed with a downward slope toward the first area.

According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J3 to J6, the rolling surface has a passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with respect to the first region where the first guide means is disposed. The second area on the opposite side of the area is formed with a downward slope toward the first area, so a game ball that enters the second area or a game ball that rolls from the first area to the second area. can be quickly rolled toward the passage member by utilizing the downward slope of the second region. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A gaming machine J8 characterized in that the gaming machine J7 includes a second guide means protruding from the second region of the rolling surface.

According to the game machine J8, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J7, since it is provided with the second guide means protruding from the second region of the rolling surface, the rolling speed is increased due to the downward slope of the second region. The game ball can be decelerated before the passage member. That is, by increasing the rolling speed up to the passage member and decelerating it before (just before) the passage member, it is possible to suppress the game ball from rolling from the second area through the passage member to the first area. . Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member faster. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In the game machine J7 or J8, the game is arranged in a second region of the rolling surface and is rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface in the second region of the rolling surface toward the passage member. A gaming machine J9 comprising a second guide means formed to be able to guide a ball toward the ball entry opening.

According to the game machine J9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J7 or J8, the second area of the rolling surface is disposed in the second area of the rolling surface, and the second area of the rolling surface is directed toward the passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since the second guide means is formed to be able to guide the game balls rolling along the path toward the ball entrance side, the game balls whose rolling speed has been increased due to the downward slope of the second area are guided in front of the passage member. It can be slowed down. That is, by increasing the rolling speed up to the passage member and decelerating it before (just before) the passage member, it is possible to suppress the game ball from rolling from the second area through the passage member to the first area. . Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member faster. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A game machine J10 in the game machine J9, wherein the opening/closing member is disposed at a position where the game ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact when the ball entry opening is open.

According to the game machine J10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J9, when the ball entrance is open, the opening/closing member is disposed at a position where the game balls rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact. The game ball guided toward the ball entrance by the second guide means can be brought into contact with the opening/closing member and bounced toward the passage member. Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member faster. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In the game machine J9 or J10, the second guide means has a side edge portion opposite to the first guide means that is inclined in a direction away from the ball entry hole as the side edge portion thereof is spaced apart from the first guide means; A gaming machine J11 characterized in that its upper surface is sloped downward toward the side opposite to the first guide means.

According to the game machine J11, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J9 or J10, the second guide means is spaced apart from the ball entrance as the side edge on the opposite side from the first guide means is spaced apart from the first guide means. Since the upper surface is tilted downward toward the side edge opposite to the first guide means, the game ball can be prevented from flying out from the ball entry hole and quickly flow into the passage member. can be done.

That is, among the game balls that are rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with the second region facing the passage member, for game balls whose rolling speed is relatively low (slow), the ball is rolled from the ball entrance. Since the risk of the ball flying out to the outside is low, by making it come into contact with the side edge of the second guide means and guiding it toward the ball entrance side, it is possible to prevent the ball from rolling from the second region through the passage member to the first region. By suppressing this, it is possible to flow into the passage member faster. On the other hand, a game ball with a relatively high (fast) rolling speed can be guided to the first area (first guide means) by being made to climb over the upper surface of the second guide means. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball is consumed by climbing over the second guide means and colliding with the first guide member, and it is possible to reliably decelerate the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from jumping out of the entrance hole and to quickly flow into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In the gaming machine J11, the second guide means has a side edge on the side facing the first guide means extending in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, The dimension of the side edge of the first guide means in the orthogonal direction is larger than the dimension of the side edge of the second guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Game machine J12.

According to the gaming machine J12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J11, the dimension of the side edge of the first guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface is larger than that in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since the size is larger than the side edge of the second guide means, the game ball that has climbed over the top surface of the second guide means can come into contact (collide) with the first guide means and be reliably decelerated. At the same time, it can be easily located near the passage member. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

A game machine J13, in the game machine J11 or J12, characterized in that a position spaced apart from the rolling surface by the radius of the game ball is included in the side edge of the second guide means.

According to the game machine J13, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J11 or J12, since the side edge of the second guide means includes a position spaced apart from the rolling surface by the radius of the game ball, the upper surface of the second guide means The game ball that has climbed over can be brought into contact (collision) with the side edge of the first guide means, thereby being able to be reliably decelerated and easily positioned near the passage member. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

A gaming machine J14, which is any one of the gaming machines J8 to J13, wherein the second guiding means is located on an extension of the first inclined surface of the first guiding means in the inclined direction.

According to the game machine J14, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines J8 to J13, the second guide means is located on the extension of the inclined direction on the first inclined surface of the first guide means, so that the first guide means Even if the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of , can be decelerated and can be easily located near the passage member. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

The gaming machine J14 is provided with a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and sloping downward from the ball entry hole toward the passage member, and the second guide means is connected from the bottom surface of the guide groove. A game machine J15 characterized in that the height dimension to the top is larger than the radius of the game ball.

According to the game machine J15, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J14, it is provided with a guide groove formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and slopes downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member, and the bottom surface of the guide groove is Since the height dimension from to the top of the second guide means is made larger than the radius of the game ball, the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the first guide means is increased. When the ball is relatively high (fast), the game ball can easily come into contact with (collide with) the second guide means. Therefore, such a game ball can be decelerated, and can be easily positioned near the passage member, and can be caused to quickly flow into the passage member.

Any one of gaming machines J1 to J15 includes a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and sloping downward from the ball entry hole toward the passage member, and the guide groove has a groove width. A game machine J16 characterized in that the size becomes smaller toward the passage member.

According to the game machine J16, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines J1 to J15, the game machine J16 includes a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and sloping downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member. Since the groove width of the guide groove becomes smaller toward the passage member, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface comes into contact with (collides with) the side wall of the guide groove, causing The rolling direction of the game ball can be easily changed to the direction toward the passage member. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing ball unit 970 as an example>
A game machine comprising a ball entry unit having a ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter and a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged, The game board has an opening formed in the board thickness direction, and the ball entry unit has the ball entry port and a first passage connected to the ball entry port, and is disposed on the front side of the game board. and a second unit having a second passage disposed on the back side of the first unit through an opening of the game board and connected to the first passage. Gaming machine K1 is characterized by:

Here, a game comprising a ball entrance unit formed to allow a game ball to enter therein and a passage connected to the ball entrance, and a game board on which the ball entrance unit is arranged. A machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-131046). According to such a gaming machine, by replacing the ball entry unit with another ball entry unit (for example, one with a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the gaming machine while reusing the game board. can. However, in the game machine described above, since the ball entry unit is arranged in front of the game board, it is necessary to secure a space in advance in front of the game board, for example, according to the maximum number of passages. Therefore, when using a ball entry unit with a small number of passages, there is a problem in that space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, the ball entry unit has a ball entrance and a first passage connected to the ball entrance, and a first passage disposed on the front side of the game board. The second unit is provided on the back side of the first unit through the opening of the game board and has a second passage connected to the first passage. It is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the first unit, and there is no need to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages (second passages) in front of the game board. Therefore, by replacing the second unit with another second unit (for example, one with a different number of second passages), you can reuse the game board and change the specifications of the game board. The space in front of the can be used effectively.

In the gaming machine K1, at least a portion of the first unit is formed from a light-transmitting material, and the second unit is formed to have a smaller external shape than the first unit, and the second unit is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the first unit, and the second unit has a smaller outer shape than the first unit. A gaming machine K2 is characterized in that it is arranged in an overlapping position.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1, the first unit is formed from a light-transmitting material, the second unit is formed to have a smaller external shape than the first unit, and the second unit has a smaller outer shape than the first unit. Since it is disposed at a position overlapping one unit, the second unit can be seen by the player through the first unit, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, in order to make the second unit visible to the player, it is not essential that the game board be made of a light-transmitting material; for example, the game board may be made of plywood, or a sticker may be pasted on the game board. Since it is also permissible to attach or paint the game board, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

A gaming machine K3 in the gaming machine K2, wherein at least the front side of the second unit in the second passage is formed of a light-transmitting material.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K2, at least the front side of the second passage of the second unit is formed of a light-transmitting material, so that the flow of light through the first unit and down the second passage of the second unit is made of a light-transmitting material. It is possible to make the game ball visible to the player and increase the interest of the game.

Note that the first unit may be entirely formed from a light-transmitting material. Furthermore, when only a portion of the first unit is made of a light-transmitting material, it is preferable that at least a portion of the second unit that overlaps with the second passageway is formed of a light-transmitting material when viewed from the front. This is because the falling of the game ball can be visually recognized, increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine K4 characterized in that the first unit is formed from a colorless light-transmitting material, and the second unit is formed from a colored light-transmitting material.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K3, since the first unit is formed from a colorless light-transmitting material and the second unit is formed from a colored light-transmitting material, When the second unit is made visible to the player, the player can easily understand the positional relationship in the front and back direction between the first unit and the second unit. That is, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball changes its position in the front-back direction and flows down, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine K4, a gaming machine K5 is characterized in that information consisting of characters or figures is displayed on the front side of the second passage of the second unit.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K4, information consisting of characters or figures is displayed on the front of the second passage of the second unit, so that the second unit can be visually recognized through the first unit. Even in such a case, the player can easily recognize the position of the second passage (front-back direction position) by using the display as a landmark (reference position). Note that examples of the display mode include printing with ink, pasting of a sticker, two-color molding, and the like.

In any of gaming machines K1 to K5, the second passage includes a second upstream passage connected to the first passage, and a plurality of second branch passages branched into a plurality of passages from the second upstream passage. and a plurality of second connection passages connected to each of the plurality of second branch passages, the second unit being disposed on the back side of the first unit and connected to the second upstream passage. and a second upstream unit in which the plurality of second branch passages are formed, and a second downstream unit disposed in the second upstream unit and in which the plurality of second connection passages are formed, A gaming machine K6 characterized in that detection sensors for detecting passage of game balls are arranged in a plurality of second branch passages.

According to the gaming machine K6, in any of the gaming machines K1 to K5, the second unit is disposed on the back side of the first unit, and a second upstream passage and a plurality of second branch passages are formed. a second downstream unit disposed in the second upstream unit and in which a plurality of second connecting passages are formed, and detects passage of game balls through the plurality of second branch passages. Since detection sensors are installed, for example, when changing the second upstream unit to another unit with fewer second branch passages to manufacture a game machine with different specifications, the number of detection sensors installed can be reduced. It can prevent workers from making mistakes.

That is, in the structure in which the detection sensors are disposed in the second connecting passages, it is possible to arrange the detection sensors for the number of second connecting passages, but for example, in the second upstream unit in which two second branch passages are formed, When changing to another unit that connects the first passage and the second connecting passage with only one passage, it would be sufficient to install one detection sensor, but only one detection sensor would be required for the number of second connecting passages. There is a possibility that a detection sensor will be installed. On the other hand, if the structure is such that a detection sensor is installed in the second branch passage, when changing the second upstream unit to another unit, the number of detection sensors that correspond to the unit will be installed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of the arrangement.

In the gaming machine K6, the first unit includes a second ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter, and a third passage through which the game ball entered into the second ball entry port passes. A detection sensor is formed across each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and detects a game ball in a portion of the third passage that is formed in the second downstream unit. A gaming machine K7 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K6, the first unit is provided with a second ball entrance formed to allow a game ball to enter, and when a game ball is inserted into the second ball entrance. A third passage through which the game ball passes is formed across each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and the game ball is passed through a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit. Since the detection sensors for detection are arranged, the detection sensors arranged in the second unit can be distributed, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the passages can be increased accordingly.

In the gaming machine K7, the second passage directly or indirectly engages with the first passage, or the third passages of the first unit and the second unit directly or indirectly engage with each other. A gaming machine K8, wherein the second unit is positioned with respect to the first unit by aligning the second unit with the first unit.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K7, the second passage directly or indirectly engages with the first passage, or the third passages of the first unit and the second unit are connected to each other. Since the second unit is positioned with respect to the first unit by engaging directly or indirectly, positioning can be performed even when the second upstream unit of the second unit is changed to another unit. That is, regardless of the form of another unit, the position where the first passage and the second passage are connected or the position where the third passages are connected is the same, so the position where the second passage is connected to the first passage is the same. By directly or indirectly engaging the or the third passages with each other for positioning, it is possible to position the first unit even if it is a separate unit.

In addition, the purpose of positioning the second unit with respect to the first unit is to prevent positional deviation (level difference) from occurring at the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting portion between the third passages. Since the target part (the connecting part between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting part between the third passages) can be positioned, the positional deviation ( (steps) can be effectively suppressed. As a result, the game balls can be caused to flow down smoothly.

In any of gaming machines K6 to K8, a part of the detection sensor disposed in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage protrudes toward the second downstream unit, and the protruding A gaming machine K9 characterized in that a receiving portion for receiving a portion of the detection sensor is formed in the second downstream unit.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K6 to K8, a part of the detection sensor disposed in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage protrudes toward the second downstream unit. At the same time, since a receiving part is formed in the second downstream passage to receive a part of the protruded detection sensor, the positioning of the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit is performed by the engagement of the detection sensor and the receiving part. It is possible to reduce the size of the second unit as a whole by suppressing a portion of the detection sensor from protruding outside.

In the gaming machines K1 to K6, the first unit includes a second ball entrance formed to allow a game ball to enter, and a third passage through which the game ball entered into the second ball entrance passes. is formed at least between the second branch passages in the second unit.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines K1 to K9, the third passage through which the game ball entered into the second ball entry port passes is located between at least the second branch passage in the second unit. Therefore, the second unit can be made smaller.

In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K10, the second passage has a bent portion bent from the front side to the back side of the second unit, and an inner surface of a wall portion on the outside of the bent portion in the bent portion. A gaming machine K11, characterized in that an upright part is erected from above, and the bent outer wall part is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the downward direction of the game ball.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K10, a bent portion that is bent from the front to the back of the second unit is formed in the second passage, and the bending portion is bent from the front to the back of the second unit. An upright portion is erected from the inner surface of the wall portion on the outside of the bend in the portion, and the wall portion on the outside of the bend is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the downstream direction of the game ball. To make it easier for a player to visually recognize a game ball flowing down a curved part of a passage. In other words, by erecting the erected portion from the inner surface of the wall on the outside of the bent portion, the rigidity of the passage is increased and durability is improved, and the game ball is placed along the tip of the erected portion. While the curved part can be guided and flowed down smoothly, the upright part is located in front of the game ball when viewed from the front, so the game ball is hidden by the upright part and the visibility of the game ball is reduced. decreases. On the other hand, by slanting the curved outer wall so that it is located on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the downward direction of the game ball, it is possible to ensure rigidity and guide the game ball while also allowing the wall to stand upright. Since the thickness of the installation part in the front and back direction can be reduced, visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing ball unit 970 as an example>
A game machine comprising a first passage member through which game balls pass, and a second passage member whose upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and through which game balls flowed down from the first passage member pass. , a gaming machine L1 characterized in that at least a bottom upstream end on the bottom side and a side upstream end on the side side of the upstream ends of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. .

Here, a game comprising a first passage member through which the game ball passes, and a second passage member whose upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and through which the game ball flowed down from the first passage member passes. A machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-5783). However, in this structure in which the first passage member and the second passage member are connected, misalignment between them is unavoidable, so that the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member There was a problem in that a step was formed at the connecting part, which could impede the smooth flow of the game balls.

On the other hand, in the game machine L1, at least the bottom upstream end on the bottom side and the side upstream end on the side surface of the upstream ends of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. , the timing at which the game ball passes the step on the bottom side (the upstream end of the bottom surface) and the timing at which the game ball passes the step on the side surface side (the upstream end of the side surface) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and to disperse those influences, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. can.

In the gaming machine L1, the gaming machine L2 is characterized in that a position spaced apart by the radius of the game ball from the upstream end of the bottom surface is included in the upstream end of the side surface.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, since the side upstream end includes a position spaced apart from the bottom upstream end by the radius of the gaming ball, the gaming ball is transferred from the first passage member to the second passage member. When rolling (flowing down), such a game ball can be inscribed in the upstream end of the side surface. That is, the position of the step on the bottom surface side and the position of the step on the side surface side, which are affected by the game ball, can be reliably made different in the direction of passage of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to reliably avoid the game ball being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and it is easier to disperse these influences, so the game ball can flow down (pass through) smoothly. ) can be done.

In the gaming machine L1 or L2, of the downstream ends of the first passage member, a bottom downstream end on the bottom side and a side downstream end on the side side are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, and the first The passage member includes a protruding piece that protrudes from its downstream end toward the upstream end of the second passage member, and whose protruding tip is the downstream end of the side surface; A game machine L3 characterized in that the game machine L3 is provided with a recess that is recessed in the side wall and receives the protruding piece, and a portion facing the protruding tip of the protruding piece is an upstream end of the side wall.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the first passage member projects from its downstream end toward the upstream end of the second passage member, and its protruding tip is connected to the side downstream end. In addition, the second passage member includes a recess provided at its upstream end to receive the protrusion piece, and the portion facing the protruding tip of the protrusion piece is the upstream end of the side wall. A side downstream end and a bottom downstream end of the member can be proximate to a side upstream end and a downstream side end of the second channel member. That is, when the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed at a different position on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball with respect to the upstream end of the bottom surface, the game ball reaches the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member. Until then, the game ball can be guided by the protruding piece of the first passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down (passed).

On the other hand, the protruding piece has relatively low rigidity and there is a risk of breakage, but according to the game machine L3, the protruding piece is formed on the first passage member (i.e., on the upstream side in the direction of passage of the game ball). Even if the protruding piece is broken, the bottom upstream end and the side upstream end of the second passage member can be maintained at different positions in the direction in which the game ball passes, and the game ball can The timing of passing through the upstream end) and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface (the upstream end of the side surface) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and to disperse those influences, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. can.

Furthermore, according to the game machine L3, the game machine projecting piece is formed in the first passage member, and the recess is formed in the second passage member, so that when the side surface of the recess comes into contact with the projecting piece, the first passage member It is possible to restrict upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the passage member. In other words, at a level difference where the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member, the game ball is likely to be bounced up when riding on it. Compared to a step in which the upstream end of the second passage member is at a lower position, the smooth flow down (passage) of the game ball is likely to be inhibited. Therefore, as in game machine L3, the ability to restrict upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the first passage member means that the upstream end of the second passage member is at a higher position than the downstream end of the first passage member. It is possible to suppress the formation of steps, and it is particularly effective for the smooth flow of game balls.

In the gaming machine L3, the gaming machine L4 is characterized in that the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the gaming ball.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine L3, the side upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, so that the side upstream end of the second passage member Compared to the case where the game ball is formed perpendicular to the passing direction of the game machine, the game ball that collides with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member can be made to slide along the slope, making it difficult to bounce back. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to pass through (flow down) smoothly.

In the gaming machine L1 or L2, a gaming machine L5 is characterized in that at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L1 or L2, at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, so that the second passage member The side upstream end of the upstream ends can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. Therefore, compared to the case where the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed perpendicular to the passing direction of the game machine, the game ball that collides with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member is not allowed to slide along the slope. You can make it harder to bounce back. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to pass through (flow down) smoothly.

In this case, according to the gaming machine L5, the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined, so compared to, for example, a case where it is formed in a shape (step-like) having a protruding piece or a recessed part. , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of stress concentration and ensure the durability of the passage member. In addition, when the second passage member is made of a resin material, the shape of the injection mold cavity (hollow part) can be gradually changed, suppressing air bubbles (air trapping) and filling defects, and molding. It is possible to improve sexual performance.

A gaming machine L6, in the gaming machine L4 or L5, characterized in that the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L4 or L5, since the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the gaming machine, the side surface of the second passage member The game ball that collides with the upstream end can be pushed toward the bottom side. That is, it is possible to suppress the game ball from jumping up and bouncing at the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to pass through (flow down) smoothly.

<About the concept of the invention using the specific winning opening unit 550 as an example>
A ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry port to open or close the ball entry port, and the pair of wing members. In the game machine, the game machine includes a drive means that generates a driving force for rotating the drive means, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive means to the pair of wing members, wherein the pair of wing members move from the outside in an opening direction. A gaming machine M1, wherein the transmission mechanism is configured to be able to regulate displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction when the wing members are displaced.

Here, a ball entry hole formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members disposed across the ball entry hole, and a driving force applied to the pair of wing members to open or close the ball entry hole. When the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the drive means, the pair of wing members are placed in a permissible position that allows entry of the game ball into the ball entrance, and the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the drive means. A gaming machine is known that includes a regulating means disposed at a regulating position that regulates the entry of game balls into the ball entrance when the member is closed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-172833).

According to this game machine, when the pair of wing members is opened by the driving force of the drive means, the regulating means is arranged at the permissible position, thereby preventing the game ball that has passed between the pair of wing members from entering the ball entrance. You can let the ball enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of wing members is closed by the driving force of the drive means, the regulating means is placed in the regulating position, so that when the pair of wing members are forcibly opened from the outside, the game ball will be directed to the ball entrance. It is possible to restrict the ball being thrown into the ball.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the displacement of the regulating means is not regulated, so for example, after forcibly opening the pair of wing members from the outside, it is possible to displace the regulating means from the regulating position to the permissible position. Therefore, there was a problem in that the effect of regulating game balls from being illegally entered into the ball entrance was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, when the pair of wing members are displaced from the outside in the opening direction, the transmission mechanism is formed to be able to regulate the displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction. It is possible to prevent the wing member from being forced open. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent game balls from being illegally entered into the ball entrance.

In the gaming machine M1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, and the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, A protruding portion is protruded from one of the members, and a sliding groove into which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the sliding member or the pair of wing members, and the sliding groove is recessed in the other of the sliding member or the pair of wing members. A receiving part is recessed in the inner wall of the blade member to receive the protruding part when the slide member is slid to a position where the wing member is closed, and when the protruding part is received in the receiving part, the receiving part is recessed. , a gaming machine M2 characterized in that rotation of the wing member is regulated.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M1, the inner wall of the sliding groove is recessed with a receiving part that receives the protruding part when the sliding member is slid to a position where the wing member is closed. When the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion, the rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

In the game machine M2, the game machine M3 is characterized in that the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member is substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M2, since the sliding direction of the sliding member is substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, the wing member is displaced from the outside in the opening direction. Therefore, even when the external force is transmitted to the slide member via the protruding portion and the receiving portion, a sliding displacement component of the slide member is less likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forced to open.

Further, the slide member can be arranged substantially parallel to the wing member. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

A gaming machine M4, which is the gaming machine M2 or M3, wherein the protruding part is received in the receiving part by sliding the sliding member downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M2 or M3, the sliding member is slid downward in the direction of gravity, so that the protruding part is received in the receiving part, so that the weight of the sliding member is reduced. (self-weight) can be used to easily maintain the state in which the protruding part is received in the receiving part.

In the gaming machine M1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, and the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, A protruding portion is protruded from one of the members, and a sliding groove into which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the sliding member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is , comprising an abutting portion and an overhanging portion protruding from a tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member is configured to rotate the rotating member toward one side in order to close the wing member. One side of the abutted part is in contact with one side of the abutting part, and the one side of the abutted part and the one-side abutted part are arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the sliding displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the wing member. the other side abutted part with which the other side of the abutment part abuts when the member is rotated toward the other side, and when the wing member is closed, the one side abutted part to a position where one side of the abutting part is abutted and the overhanging part is engaged with the slide member, and at least the other side of the abutting part abuts the other side abutted part. A gaming machine M5 characterized in that when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the engagement of the projecting portion with the sliding member is released.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M1, the rotating member includes an abutting part and a projecting part extending from the tip of the abutting part, and the sliding member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the abutting part comes into contact with the one side abutted part, and the one side abutted part is spaced apart from the one side abutted part by a predetermined interval in the direction of sliding displacement. and the other side abutted part which is arranged facing each other and which is abutted by the other side of the abutting part when the rotating member is rotated towards the other side in order to open the wing member, so that the rotating member is on one side. When the wing member is rotated to , the one-side abutted part is pushed by the one side of the abutting part, and the slide member is slid toward the one side, thereby closing the wing member. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the other side abutted part is pushed by the other side of the abutting part and the sliding member is slid towards the other side. , the wing member is released.

In this case, when the wing member is closed, one side of the abutting part is in contact with the one-side abutted part and the overhanging part is engaged with the slide member, so the rotating member is not rotated. Slide displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side to a position where the other side of the abutting part abuts at least the other side abutted part, the engagement of the overhanging part with the sliding member is released, so the rotation By further rotating the member toward the other side, the slide member can be slid toward the other side, and the wing member can be opened.

In the gaming machine M1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, and the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, A protruding portion is protruded from one of the members, and a sliding groove into which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the sliding member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is , comprising an abutting portion and an overhanging portion protruding from a tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member is configured to rotate the rotating member toward one side in order to close the wing member. One side of the abutted part is in contact with one side of the abutting part, and the one side of the abutted part and the one-side abutted part are arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the sliding displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the wing member. and an abutted part on the other side with which the other side of the abutting part abuts when the member is rotated toward the other side, and when the wing member is closed, the protruding part When the sliding member is disengaged from the member and is slid from the closed state of the wing member to a position where the one-side abutting portion abuts one side of the abutting portion. , a game machine M6, wherein the projecting portion is engaged with the slide member.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M1, the rotating member includes an abutting portion and a projecting portion extending from the tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the abutting part comes into contact with the one side abutted part, and the one side abutted part is spaced apart from the one side abutted part by a predetermined interval in the direction of sliding displacement. and the other side abutted part which is arranged facing each other and which is abutted by the other side of the abutting part when the rotating member is rotated towards the other side in order to open the wing member, so that the rotating member is on one side. When the wing member is rotated to , the one-side abutted part is pushed by the one side of the abutting part, and the slide member is slid toward the one side, thereby closing the wing member. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the other side abutted part is pushed by the other side of the abutting part and the sliding member is slid towards the other side. , the wing member is released.

In this case, when the slide member is slid from the state in which the wing member is closed to a position where the one-side abutment portion abuts one side of the abutment portion, the overhang portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, sliding displacement of the sliding member to the other side without rotating the rotating member is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

On the other hand, when the wing member is closed, the overhang portion is not engaged with the slide member, so by further rotating the rotary member toward the other side, the slide member is slid toward the other side, The wing member can be opened. Here, when the wing member is closed and the overhang part is engaged with the slide member, the shape of the overhang part and one side contact part can be changed to allow rotation of the rotating member to the other side. It is necessary to form it into a specific shape, which makes the shape complicated. Therefore, not only the strength may decrease, but also the engagement may become more likely to be released. On the other hand, in the present invention, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, so that the shape of the overhanging portion and one side contact portion can be rotated. There is no need to shape the member to allow rotation to the other side. Therefore, not only can the shape be simplified to ensure strength, but also a shape that is easy to maintain engagement can be adopted, making it difficult for the engagement to be released.

Any of the game machines M2 to M6 is provided with a passage member that forms a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and when the protruding portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, the A gaming machine M7 characterized in that a part of the slide member is disposed within the passage of the passage member.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M2 to M6, the gaming machine M7 includes a passage member that forms a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and the protruding portion is not disposed in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is placed in the passage of the passage member, so even if the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside by cutting the protruding part, the ball will not enter from the ball entrance. The sliding member can restrict the flow of the game ball.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 as an example>
A ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry port to open or close the ball entry port, and the pair of wing members. In a game machine comprising a drive means for generating a drive force for rotating the ball, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the pair of wing members, the game ball inserted into the ball entry hole. A game machine N1 comprising a passage member forming a passage, and a part of the transmission mechanism crossing the passage of the passage member when displacing the wing member from an open position to a closed position.

Here, a ball entry hole formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members that are rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry hole and open or close the ball entry hole, and a pair of wing members that open or close the ball entry hole. A game machine is known that includes a drive means that generates a driving force for rotating a wing member, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of the drive means to a pair of wing members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20111- 234009). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and as the rotating member is rotated toward one side or the other side, the wing member is opened or closed.

In this case, for example, the end of the thread is glued to the game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entrance and passed through the passage of the passage member, and when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor, the thread is There is a fraudulent act in which the detection sensor detects the ball multiple times by manipulating the other end (pulling out or pulling it) to move the game ball back and forth. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem in that it is difficult to effectively suppress fraudulent activity in which the tip of the thread is glued to the game ball and the detection sensor is detected multiple times.

On the other hand, according to the game machine N1, when displacing the wing member from the open position to the closed position, a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member, so that the thread whose tip end is glued to the game ball The transmission mechanism can at least interfere with the portion. As a result, by reciprocating the game balls, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that are caused to be detected by the detection sensor multiple times.

In the game machine N1, the transmission mechanism causes the slide member to cross the path of the passage member and rub against the edge of the passage member when displacing the wing member from the open position to the closed position. A gaming machine N2 characterized by having a frictional contact portion.

According to the game machine N2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine N1, the transmission mechanism allows the slide member to cross the passage of the passage member when displacing the wing member from the open position to the closed position, and the slide member to cross the passage of the passage member. Since the ball is provided with a rubbing portion that rubs against the edge, it is possible to cut off an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the ball entrance.

That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball enters the ball with the wing member open, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position and the friction portion of the slide member crosses the path of the passage member, The middle part of the thread whose tip is glued to the game ball is displaced together with the friction contact part and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and when the friction contact part is rubbed against the edge of the passage member, the friction contact part and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Note that the frictional contact portion of the slide member is preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a portion of the slide member (friction portion) may be formed from a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be formed from a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the portion with which the friction contact portion is rubbed) may be formed from a metal material. Further, it is preferable that the frictional contact portion and the portion (edge of the passage member) with which the frictional contact portion comes into contact with each other are formed as a blade (cutting blade).

In the game machine N1, the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub their edges against each other when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position. Gaming machine N3 is characterized by the following.

According to the game machine N3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine N1, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, a pair of blades that cross the passage of the passage member and rub their edges against each other are provided. Since the transmission mechanism is provided with the cutting member, it is possible to cut off an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the ball entrance.

That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball is entered with the wing member open, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position and the pair of cutting members cross the path of the passage member, The middle part of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball can be cut by sandwiching it between a pair of cutting members. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Note that it is preferable that the pair of cutting members be formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a portion of the slide member (edges that rub against each other) may be formed from a metal material. Moreover, it is preferable that the portions of the pair of cutting members that rub against each other are formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the gaming machine N2 or N3, the drive means is configured to displace the drive shaft in a first direction by electromagnetic force and to displace the drive shaft in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The actuator is formed as a solenoid actuator that is actuated by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement of the wing member from the open position to the closed position is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. Gaming machine N4 is characterized by

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine N2 or N3, the blade member is displaced from the open position to the closed position by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an unauthorized object (for example, a thread) between the frictional contact portion of the slide member and the edge of the passage member.

Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B9, C1 to C11, D1 to D10, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, G1 to G16, H1 to H15, I1 to I10, J1 to J16, K1 to K11, L1 to L6, A gaming machine K1 characterized in that in any one of M1 to M7 and N1 to N4, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B9, C1 to C11, D1 to D10, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, G1 to G16, H1 to H15, I1 to I10, J1 to J16, K1 to K11, L1 to L6, A gaming machine K2 characterized in that in any one of M1 to M7 and N1 to N4, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B9, C1 to C11, D1 to D10, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, G1 to G16, H1 to H15, I1 to I10, J1 to J16, K1 to K11, L1 to L6, A gaming machine K3 in any of M1 to M7 and N1 to N4, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board 60 Base board (game board)
60a Through hole (opening)
60c Light transmission hole (recessed part)
64 1st prize opening (1st aisle)
140 2nd prize opening (ball entrance, 1st ball entrance)
65a Specified prize opening (second ball entrance)
162 Transmission shaft rod part (support means)
163 Driven member (displacement means)
175 Lower regulating part (second resistance means)
176 Upper regulating part (resistance means, first resistance means)
310 Rear case 405 Metal rail (guiding means)
410,3410 Transmission unit (transmission means)
411 Drive gear (part of transmission means)
412 Transmission gear (part of transmission means)
413 Terminal gear (part of transmission means)
414 Arm member (part of transmission means)
425 Accommodating plate part (part of support means)
425b Omitted part (part of open part)
427 Through hole (part of suppressing means)
428 Closure plate (part of support means, part of restraint means)
430 Elevating plate (part of foundation means, part of intermediate means)
433 Cylindrical part (part of suppressing means)
441 Rotating gear (part of displacement configuration means)
442 Relative displacement member (part of intermediate means, part of distal means)
444 Auxiliary arm member (part of foundation means, rotational displacement means)
444a Proximal side part (part of the rotating shaft part)
444b Arc-shaped gear part (projection part)
444d Cylindrical part (other part, part of rotating shaft part)
460 Feather-like member (part of tip side means, displacement means, first displacement means, second displacement means, disposed displacement means)
464L Formation part (first displacement means, first disposed displacement means)
464R Formation part (second displacement means, second disposed displacement means)
490 Fixed transmission plate (part of displacement configuration means)
708 Partition member (support plate)
712 Thin film cover member (thin film member)
714 Light guiding member (guiding means)
730 Plate-shaped displacement member (displacement means, first displacement means)
735 Small receiving part (first support part, second support part)
736 Large receiving part (first support part, second support part)
740 Hollow member (second displacement means)
743 Projecting columnar part (second displacement means, part of second displacement means)
750 Variable decorative member (second displacement means)
761,4761 Load member (displacement means, part of load applying means, transmission means)
761c Vertical bar-shaped extension part (pushing part)
761d Overhanging part (attached part, part of range setting means)
762 Axial rod part (supporting means)
764 Lower regulating part (second resistance means)
765 Upper regulating part (resistance means, first resistance means, part of range setting means)
777 Illumination board (light emitting board)
DH1 Electric wiring (electricity supply means)
MT1 Drive motor (drive means)
S1 Contact surface (split surface)
SOL1 Electromagnetic solenoid (drive means)
SOL2 Electromagnetic solenoid (drive means, part of load applying means, part of range setting means)
SP21 Biasing spring (load applying means)
3441 Rotating gear with arm (part of displacement configuration means)
940 Front unit (first member, first unit)
941 Back base (fixing member)
942c Second ball throwing part (part of first passage member)
943 Front base (main body member)
943a Rolling part (first passage, part of first passage member)
945 Wing member (first opening/closing member)
945b Protrusion (Protrusion)
951 Plate member (second opening/closing member, opening/closing member)
953a1 Opening (ball entrance)
953a2 Rolling surface 953c Annular projection (seat)
954b Recess (guide groove)
954c Projection part (second guide means)
954c2 Side portion 954c3 Side edge portion 954d Standing wall (first guide means)
954d1 Second guide surface (first inclined surface)
954d2 Second side edge (side edge)
955 Passage member (case member)
955a Recessed portion (passage member)
957a1 Main body part 957a2 Shaft part (drive shaft)
960 Drive unit (third member)
961a Main body 961b Shaft (drive shaft)
962e Arm part (second engaging part)
962f Wall part (covered surface part)
962g Projection part (first engagement part)
140 2nd prize opening (ball entrance, 2nd ball entrance)
965,18965 Transmission member (rotating member, part of first transmission mechanism)
965a Tip (part of the first part)
965b Rotating part (part of the first part)
965c Rotating shaft 965d Projection part (second part)
965e Insertion part (contact part)
966, 8966, 11966, 12966, 14966, 18966 Displacement member (slide member, part of first transmission mechanism)
966a2, 8966a2 Sliding groove 966a5 Inclined surface 8966a6 Recess (receiving part)
966b2 One side abutted part 966b3 Other side abutted part 11968c, 18996g Blade part (rubbing part)
12966c2 Second blade part (part of cutting member)
6683 Blade (part of cutting member)
970 Throwing unit (second unit)
980 Sorting unit (second member, second upstream unit)
981b Side wall part (second passage, second passage member, third passage)
982b Inclined part (bending part)
982h1, 982j1 Guide part (erected part)
985e1, 985f1 Inflow passage (second connection passage)
900 Passage unit (second downstream unit)
991c1, 991d1 Recessed part (receiving part)
TR0 Ball throwing passage (part of the second passage, second upstream passage)
TR1 1st passage (part of 2nd passage, 2nd branch passage)
TR2 2nd passage (part of 2nd passage, 2nd branch passage)
SE1 Detection device (detection sensor)
SE3 Detection device (detection sensor)
SE4 Detection device (detection sensor)
HS1 Wiring HS2 Wiring HS3 Wiring SP Biasing spring (elastic member)
S1, S2 Screw C Collar (support ring)
θ1 1st drive range (outer range)
θ2 2nd drive range (center range)

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

There is a game machine configured to displace a displacement member using an electromagnetic solenoid (Patent Document 1).

JP2015-231434A

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of improving the durability of the gaming machine. The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve durability.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a displacing means configured to be displaceable, and a drive disposed on the side of the displacing means in a predetermined direction for driving the displacing means in the predetermined direction. A driving means configured to be able to generate a force, and a resistance means configured to be able to generate a resistance against displacement of the displacement means in the predetermined direction, the resistance means being configured to move the force from the displacement means to the driving means. It is configured to be able to reduce the load applied to.

According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect, durability can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary device. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the window movable unit taken along line XX in FIG. 2. FIG. (a) is a rear view of the window movable unit, and (b) is a front view of the window movable unit. (a) is a rear view of the window movable unit, and (b) is a front view of the window movable unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-like member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-like member. FIG. 3 is a partial front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a partial front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the wing-like member and the auxiliary member, showing the meshing state of the wing-like member and the auxiliary member. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a top view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the first operating unit. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a wing-like member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission board. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a wing-like member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission board. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a wing-like member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission board. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a wing-like member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission board. (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically illustrating the displacement relationship of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the second operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the second operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operating unit. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the base member. It is a top view of a plate-shaped displacement member. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of a hollow member 740. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the light guide member, the plate-shaped displacement member, and the hollow member taken along the line XLIX-XLIX in FIG. 47. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the drive unit. It is a front view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a front view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a front view of a 2nd operation unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LVa-LVa in FIG. 53, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LVb-LVb in FIG. 54. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of time-measured changes in conduction between left and right electromagnetic solenoids and changes in attitude of a plate-shaped displacement member. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of time-measured changes in conduction between left and right electromagnetic solenoids and changes in attitude of a plate-shaped displacement member. It is a top view of a 2nd operation unit. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LIX-LIX in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LIX-LIX in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LIX-LIX in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LIX-LIX in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LXIII-LXIII in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LXIII-LXIII in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LXIII-LXIII in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LXIII-LXIII in FIG. 58. FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the rotational displacement of a large receiving part. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXVIII-LXVIII in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXVIII-LXVIII in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXVIII-LXVIII in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line LXVIII-LXVIII in FIG. 58. FIG. 59 is a sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LXXII-LXXII in FIG. 58. FIG. (a) and (b) are rear views of the window movable unit in the second embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the first operating unit. (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically illustrating the displacement relationship of the first operating unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the drive unit of the second operation unit in the fourth embodiment. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second operating unit of the fifth embodiment along a line corresponding to the LVa-LVa line in FIG. 53. It is a front view of the game board in 6th embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a base board, a winning opening unit, and a throwing unit. (a) is a front view of the winning a prize mouth unit, and (b) is a rear view of the winning a prize mouth unit. (a) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a perspective back view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a winning a prize mouth unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning a prize opening unit. (a) is a front view of the front unit, and (b) is a rear view of the front unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit. (a) is a front view of the displacement member, (b) is a side view of the displacement member, and (c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member. It is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87(b). It is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87(b). (a) is a side view of the drive unit, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the drive unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 93(b). It is a sectional view of the winning a prize opening unit taken along the XCVII-XCVII line in FIG. 83. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit taken along the line XCVIII-XCVIII in FIG. 97. (a) is a front view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit, (b) is a back view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit, and (c) is a top view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of specific winning a prize mouth unit 950. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the specific winning a prize mouth unit along the CII-CII line of FIG. 99(c). (a) and (b) are perspective front views of a specific winning a prize opening unit. (a) is a front view of the specific winning a prize mouth unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the specific winning a prize mouth unit taken along the line CIVb-CIVb of FIG. 104(a). (a) is a top view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit and a drive unit, (b) is a side view of a specific winning a prize mouth unit and a drive unit. (a) is a sectional view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit along the CVIa-CVIa line in FIG. 105(a), and (b) is a sectional view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit along the CVIb-CVIb line in FIG. 106(a). It is a sectional view of a drive unit. (a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit, and (b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit. (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball throwing unit, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the ball throwing unit. (a) is a front view of the distribution unit, and (b) is a side view of the distribution unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit. (a) is a sectional view of the distribution unit taken along the line CXIIa-CXIIa in FIG. 109(a), and FIG. 112(b) is a sectional view of the distribution unit taken along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a). (a) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the distribution unit in range CXIII of FIG. 112(b). (a) is a front view of the passage unit, and (b) is a side view of the passage unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit. (a) is a front view of the replacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the replacement unit. (a) is a sectional view of the replacement unit taken along the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line in FIG. 117(a), and (b) is a sectional view of the replacement unit taken along the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line in FIG. 118(a). 82 is a sectional view of the game board taken along the line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 81. FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board along the line CXXb-CXXb of FIG. 120(a). (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board along the line CXXb-CXXb of FIG. 120(a). It is a rear view of a front unit and a displacement member in a 7th embodiment. (a) and (b) are sectional views of a drive unit in an eighth embodiment. (a) and (b) are sectional views of a drive unit and a displacement member in a ninth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective back view of a back base and a displacement member in a 10th embodiment. (a) and (b) are rear views of the front unit and the displacement member. It is an exploded perspective back view of a back base and a displacement member in an 11th embodiment. (a) and (b) are rear views of the front unit and the displacement member. (a) is a rear view of the front unit in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the CXXIXb-CXXIXb line in FIG. 129(a). (a) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line CXXXb-CXXXb of FIG. 130(a). (a) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the CXXXIb-CXXXIb line of FIG. 131(a). (a) is a side view of a drive unit in a fourteenth embodiment, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. 133(a) is a sectional view of the game board, and FIG. 133(b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along the line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb in FIG. 133(a). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the sixteenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic rear view of the winning opening unit in the seventeenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along the line CXXXVb-CXXXVb in FIG. 135(a). (a) is a schematic diagram of the winning opening unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 136(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb of FIG. 136(a). (a) is a schematic diagram of the winning opening unit viewed from the back, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb of FIG. 137(a).

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 44, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface on its left side for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the player's operation, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a rail 61 in addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for guiding balls. , 62, a general winning hole 63, a first winning hole 64, a second winning hole 140, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, etc. (see 1).

The base plate 60 is formed from a wooden board member. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are screwed from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Note that the base plate 60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to winnings in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, after which the jackpot transitions to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (during probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 140. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) among the "low probability states" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability is the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 140 is increased. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

During the probability change or time saving period, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the feather member 945 (electric accessory) attached to the second winning hole 140 is opened is changed, compared to the normal period. A long time is set. When the wing member 945 is in an open state (open state), it is easier for a ball to enter the second prize opening 140 than when the wing member 945 is in a closed state (closed state). becomes. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the feather member 945 attached to the second winning hole 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, the feather member 945 is changed in one win. It is also possible to make a change to increase the number of times that 945 is opened compared to normal times. In addition, during probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the time for which the feather member 945 attached to the second winning hole 140 is opened and the number of times the feather member 945 is opened in one win are changed. At least one of them may be changed. In addition, during probability change or time saving, the time when the feather member 945 attached to the second winning hole 140 is released or the number of times the feather member 945 is released in one win are not calculated, but only the winning probability of the second symbol. may be changed to be higher than normal.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting winning) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a variable display, and an LED that displays a second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the feather member 945 attached to the second winning hole 140 remains for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened).

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more chances to have the wing member 945 of the second winning opening 140 in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 140.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, there are other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the open time or number of openings of the feather member 945 for one win, etc. When the state is such that it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the wing member 945 may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a portion of the balls fired at the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and displayed on a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be located below the variable display unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 140 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 140, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning port switch. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 140 may be five.

A feather member 945 is attached to the second prize opening 140. This wing member 945 is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the wing member 945 is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the feather member 945 is in the open state (enlarged state). ), making it easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 140.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the wing member 945 is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the wing member 945 is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during the probability change and time saving period, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 140 compared to the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 140, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 140 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have a feather member like the second winning hole 140, so that balls can always be won.

Therefore, under normal circumstances, the feather member attached to the second winning hole 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second winning hole 140, so if you turn to the first winning hole 64 without the feather member, The player fires the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first winning slot 64, he or she can obtain many opportunities for a jackpot lottery and win the jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the feather member 945 attached to the second winning hole 140 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning hole 140 is in a state where it is easy to win. , fire the ball toward the second prize opening 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed shot"), and let it pass through the through gate 67 to open the wing member. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability jackpot by winning into the second winning hole 140.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is left-right symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning hole 64 by "hitting right" or aiming at the second winning hole 140 by "hitting left". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment tells the player how to shoot the ball depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the game into "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the trouble of changing the way the ball is hit can be eliminated.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the first winning hole 64, and a specific winning hole 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, a jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position may also be the lower right side of the first winning hole 64 or the first The location is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be located to the left of the variable display unit 80, for example.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out openings 71 are arranged as a pair on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving the wing member is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include a drive motor MT1 and electromagnetic solenoids SOL1 and SOL2.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the structures of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 will be explained. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 300, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 300. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate. Further, in FIG. 6, illustration of the third symbol display device 81 is omitted.

As described above, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and has rails 61 and 62 in addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for guiding balls. , the general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, the through gate 67, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, the pair of left and right window movable units 150, and the balls ejected from the gaming area. It is constructed by assembling a ball flow down unit 290 etc. that is configured to be able to flow down, and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

As mentioned above, the base board 60 is formed from plywood made by stacking plywood boards. 60 and is formed so as to be shieldable.

As shown in FIG. 6, the base plate 60 has a through hole formed at approximately the center position so that the variable display unit 80 can be disposed therein, as well as a through hole formed to allow the electrical wiring connected to the through gate 67 to pass therethrough. A plurality of (two in this embodiment) small through-holes 60a are provided, and a plurality (three in this embodiment) of fitting recesses 60b are provided so as to be able to fit into the front end of the operating unit 300 in a concave-convex manner. , a plurality of (two in this embodiment) light transmission holes 60c are provided in the left and right lower portions in the front-rear direction.

The light transmission hole 60c is formed at a position through which light emitted from the operating unit 300 side can pass, and is intended to improve the performance effect of the game board 13 from the viewpoint of light emission performance. This will be explained in detail.

On the front side of the light passage hole 60c, downstream surface constituent members 91 and 92 formed from a light-transmitting resin material are arranged, and the outer portions 94 of the downstream surface constituent members 91 and 92 form the light passage hole. The downstream surface forming members 91 and 92 are fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 in a manner that covers the downstream surface 60c.

The left and right flow surface components 91 and 92 are constructed in a substantially symmetrical shape, except that the covering plate FB is provided on the front side of the right flow surface component 92, so that the left flow surface structure is similar to that of the left flow surface structure. The member 91 will be described in detail, and the description of the downstream surface forming member 92 on the right side will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 5, the downstream surface forming member 91 has a plate-like part disposed along the front surface of the base plate 60, and a strip-like part 93 formed in a strip-like shape with the same width as the inner rail 61. The game area is divided into a strip part 93, an outer part 94 which is an outer part (outer part in front view) of the game area partitioned by the band part 93, and a game area partitioned by the band part 93. An inner part 95 is an inner part of the area (inner part in front view).

As described above, the outer portion 94 is located outside the gaming area, and therefore is configured as a portion that does not easily affect the flow of the ball. Therefore, since there is no need to consider the effect on the sphere due to the displacement of the outer plate part 94, the wall thickness of the outer part 94 can be designed to be thin.

Furthermore, even if the thickness of the inner part 95 is reduced as a result of designing the outer part 94 to be thin, the rigidity of the base plate 60 is Displacement of the inner portion 95 in the front-rear direction (deformation in the thickness direction) can be suppressed by using this. Furthermore, by designing the outer part 94 and the inner part 95 to be thin, it is possible to ensure a sufficient front-to-back width of the gaming area.

In this way, the outer part 94 can be designed to be thin without impairing the functions required of the inner part 95, and as a result, the light emitted from the operating unit 300 side and passing through the light transmission hole 60c can be reduced. , can be easily seen by the player through the outer part 94.

In this embodiment, since the base board 60 is formed from a wooden board member, it is difficult for the player to see the light emitted from the back side through the thickness of the base board 60. On the other hand, by forming the light transmission hole 60c (see FIG. 6) and arranging the light emitting means on the back side of the hole 60c as in this embodiment, the base plate 60 can be made of a wooden board member. You can easily change the brightness that is visible through the screen.

For example, in the case of forming a decorative pattern that is visually recognized as being continuous with the outer part 94 and other parts when viewed from the front, an illumination board 777 disposed on the back side of the outer part 94 may be provided. By changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means 778 in multiple types and changing the brightness of the outer part 94, even the same decorative pattern can be seen in multiple types.

Further, for example, a decorative member whose visible pattern changes depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means 778 may be attached to the outer part 94. In this case, the appearance (image) of the game board 13 can be greatly changed depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means 778.

Note that the mode of the decorative member that changes the visible pattern depending on the light emission mode is not limited at all. For example, it may be a member that is designed so that different patterns can be visually recognized depending on the angle at which light is applied, such as an illumination plate. Alternatively, for example, it may be a member that is designed to change the visible pattern by changing the emitted color, provided that the pattern is drawn in multiple colors and the irradiated light is available in multiple colors. .

The inner part 95 is arranged inside the gaming area as described above. If the inner part 95 is displaced (deformed), there is a risk that it will affect the ball flowing down the game area, but in this embodiment, the flesh part of the pace board 60 is arranged on the back side of the inner part 95. (Since the light transmission hole 60c is configured to fit on the outer part 94 side with respect to the strip part 93 when viewed from the front), the rigidity of the base plate 60 is used to reduce the displacement of the inner part 95 ( deformation) can be prevented. This makes it possible to stabilize the flow of the ball.

A general prize opening 63 is arranged in the inner part 95, and the general prize opening 63 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the downstream surface constituent member 91 is located on the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by being fixed from the side with a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

As described above, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with the center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, and the window movable unit 150 is provided at the upper left and right corners of the center frame 86. is installed.

FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 7, illustration of the lower part of the game board 13 is omitted, and the auxiliary device 160 is shown in an exploded front perspective view.

The window movable unit 150 includes a displacement member 151 that is rotatably displaceable and configured to be visible to the player in the window inside the center frame 86, and a displacement member 151 disposed on the back side of the displacement member 151. The displacement member 151 is provided with an auxiliary device 160 that generates a driving force to drive the displacement member 151 and irradiates light toward the displacement member 151.

The displacement member 151 is formed into a bifurcated shape when viewed from the front and back, and includes a bifurcated portion 152 that is pivotally supported at the base end formed near the bent portion, and is disposed at both distal ends of the bifurcated portion 152 and has an open back side. The bifurcated portion 152 has a distal end portion 153 formed in a box shape (bag shape, cup shape), and an overhang portion 154 that protrudes in the radial direction from the base end portion of the bifurcated portion 152.

The tip part 153 is formed into a box shape (bag-like, cup-like) with the bottom side facing the front side and is arranged so that the player can see it, and is fastened to the opening side of the presentation part 153a. It is provided with a ring-shaped part 153b which is a fixed ring-shaped part and has a shape that is narrower on the opposite side of the production part 153a compared to the production part 153a side.

The production part 153a has a light diffusion shape (jagged shape) formed on the inner surface, and can diffuse the light irradiated from the back side to the inside of the open part, so that the actual light irradiated is in a narrow range. Even if it is irradiated with light, it is possible to make the entire effect section 153a appear to be (dimly) shining to a player viewing the effect section 153a from the front side.

A movable range of the projecting portion 154 in both directions of rotation is defined by a pair of claw portions 86a protruding from the center frame 86 side. That is, the displacement member 151 is configured to be rotatably displaceable at an angle (an angle less than 360 degrees) defined by the arrangement of the claw portion 86a and the relationship with the overhang portion 154.

8 is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary device 160, and FIG. 9 is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary device 160. The auxiliary device 160 includes a contact member 161 disposed at a position where it can come into contact with the displacement member 151 (see FIG. 7), and a metal member whose one end (front side end) is connected to the contact member 161 so as not to be relatively rotatable. (in this embodiment, made of brass), a driven member 163 that is connected to the other end (rear side end) of the transmission shaft rod 162 in a relatively non-rotatable manner, and a transmission shaft rod 162 made of brass (in this embodiment, made of brass). A known E-ring 164 is fitted into both ends of the transmission shaft 162 from the radial direction, a support case 170 that is configured to be able to pivotally support the transmission shaft rod portion 162 and has a case-like structure as a whole, and a support case 170 that is disposed inside the support case 170. An illumination board 180 is provided.

The transmission shaft rod portion 162 is a cylindrical member whose outer shape is a perfect circle when viewed in the axial direction (front-back direction) of the mid-abdominal region, and is cut into a planar shape from a predetermined radial direction at both ends. The tip has a substantially D-shaped cross section. By fitting these both end portions into the inserted hole 161b of the contact member 161 and the inserted hole 163b of the driven member 163, the contact member 161, the transmission shaft rod portion 162, and the driven member 163 are moved relative to each other. Non-rotatably (integrally) connected.

The abutting member 161 is made of a resin material, and has a base end 161a in which an inserted hole 161b, which is a through hole through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted and has a D-shaped cross section, is bored. , and an arm portion 161c extending outward from the base end portion 161a and having a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front.

The driven member 163 is made of a resin material, and has a base end 163a in which an inserted hole 163b, which is a through hole through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted and has a D-shaped cross section, is bored. , and an arm portion 163c extending straight outward from the base end portion 161a and having a substantially flat plate shape.

A metal plate member MB1 made of metal (magnetic material) is disposed on the upper surface of the driven member 163. In this embodiment, the metal plate member MB1 is fixed to the driven member 163 by engagement with the elastic claw 163d.

To be more specific, a rail portion is provided at both radial end portions of the arm portion 163c to guide the back and forth slide of the metal plate member MB1, and this rail portion is configured to guide the metal plate member MB1 only from the front side. (only the front side is fully open). When sliding the metal plate member MB1 along the rail portion, the elastic claw 163d is pressed down by the metal plate member MB1, and when the metal plate member MB1 is slid as it is, the metal plate member MB1 is attached to the rear side wall of the rail portion. The slide is regulated by the contact, and at this position, the pressing down of the elastic claw 163d by the metal plate member MB1 is released (it has risen to a position facing the side surface of the metal plate member MB1), and the elastic claw 163d is pressed against the metal plate member MB1. The plate member MB1 is engaged with the plate member MB1 so as to restrict its retraction toward the front side.

Note that the method of fixing the metal plate member MB1 to the driven member 163 is not limited to this. For example, the metal plate member MB1 may be fastened and fixed to the driven member 163, may be tied with a binding band, or may be attached with adhesive tape or the like.

The support case 170 includes a rear member 170B, a middle member 170M that is disposed on the front side of the rear member 170B and has a support hole 174 through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted, and a middle member 170M that is disposed on the front side of the middle member 170M. A front member 170F is provided with a decorative shape (wave pattern) formed on the front side, and a plurality of these (three in this embodiment) plate-like members are stacked one on top of the other and fastened and fixed.

The illumination board 180 is formed into a substantially L-shaped plate shape when viewed from the front in accordance with the shape of the front member 170F, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs and the like arranged at positions designed in consideration of presentation. It includes a light emitting means 181, a connector 182 provided as a part to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of through holes 183 formed in the illumination board 180 for assembly.

The light emitting means 181 includes a strong light emitting means 181a arranged inside the light transmission hole 177 when viewed from the front, and a weak light emitting means 181a arranged outside the light transmission hole 177 (opposing the back surface of the plate of the front member 170F). 181b.

The through hole 183 is formed in an elongated oval shape along the direction of inclination. This makes it easy to assemble the through hole 183 to the protruding cylindrical portion 172 whose outer shape is a perfect circle when viewed from the front.

That is, while the posture of the illumination board 180 is inclined (see FIG. 10), the protruding direction of the protruding cylindrical portion 172 is not inclined (front-back direction), so compared to when assembled in the same direction. Although poor assembly (not assembled or loosely assembled) is likely to occur, in this embodiment, the through hole 183 is formed in an elongated oval shape along the direction in which the orientation of the illumination board 180 is inclined. A larger allowance can be made for the through hole 183 along the direction of inclination, and the through hole 183 can be easily assembled to the protruding cylindrical portion 172.

The illumination board 180 is housed between the front member 170F and the middle member 170M, but at this time, the illumination board 180 is placed in a posture in which the front surface of the board faces diagonally downward (the normal line is inclined downward to the front side). be done. This will be explained in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the window movable unit 150 taken along the line XX in FIG. Note that, for ease of understanding, illustration of the rear member 170B is omitted, and the outer shape of the displacement member 151 is illustrated with imaginary lines. Note that the XX line is arranged to pass through the center of the upper protruding cylindrical portion 172. In addition, in the following description, FIGS. 8 and 9 will be referred to as appropriate.

In the middle member 170M, the aspect of the wall portion on the front side is different between the upper wall portion 170MU and the lower wall portion 170MD. That is, the upper wall portion 170MU is configured as a non-sloping wall portion (the normal line faces in the horizontal direction), and the lower wall portion 170MD is configured as a wall portion that slopes (the normal line faces downward on the front side). Constructed as.

In this manner, the illumination board 180 is supported with respect to the wall portions having different normal lines such that the back surface of the plate is in a posture along the lower wall portion 170MD (a posture in which the normal line is inclined downward to the front side). That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), the direction of the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means 181 of the illumination board 180 is inclined downward on the front side.

The middle member 170M includes a protruding frame portion 171 that protrudes in a frame shape toward the front side, and a plurality of protruding columnar portions that protrude in a small-diameter cylindrical shape toward the front side inside the protruding frame portion 171. 172, and a wiring through hole 173 that is bored in the front and back direction in a position that surrounds the connector 182 at the left and right outer (left side) corners.

The protruding frame portion 171 seals the entire periphery of the illumination board 180 by abutting the outer frame portion of the front member 170F front and back. Thereby, the illumination board 180 can be prevented from being visible from between the front member 170F and the middle member 170M, and light leakage from the same position can be prevented.

The protruding cylindrical portion 172 includes a large-diameter seat and a small-diameter insertion portion that further protrudes from the seat, and is assembled so that the insertion portion enters the through hole 183 of the illumination board 180. The rear surface of the illumination board 180 is supported by the seat, and the arrangement of the illumination board 180 can be stabilized.

Here, the seat portion of the protruding columnar portion 172 disposed on the upper wall portion 170MU is higher than the seat portion of the protruding columnar portion 172 disposed on the lower wall portion 170MD. Thereby, it is possible to stably support the illumination board 180 assembled in the above-mentioned inclined position, and to ensure a gap between the upper wall portion 170MU and the illumination board 180.

The protruding tip of the seat of the protruding cylindrical portion 172 is formed as an inclined surface that matches the attitude of the illumination board 180 (an inclined surface configured such that the protruding length becomes shorter as it goes downward). . Thereby, the protruding cylindrical portion 172 can be given not only the function of stabilizing the arrangement of the illumination board 180 but also the function of stabilizing the posture of the illumination board 180.

The wiring through hole 173 is a through hole for passing an electric wiring connected to the connector 182 of the illumination board 180. Since the posture of the illumination substrate 180 can be maintained by the load applied to the illumination substrate 180 through this electrical wiring, the posture of the illumination substrate 180 can be stably supported without fastening and fixing the illumination substrate 180. can do.

The front member 170F is made of a colored (white in this embodiment) and light-transmissive resin material and has a shape in which the back surface is substantially parallel to the lower wall portion 170MD, and is circularly perforated in the front-rear direction. A plurality of light transmitting holes 177, a plurality of protruding cylindrical parts 178 protruding toward the back side in a small diameter cylindrical shape, and a frame part forming the outer periphery of the back surface of the plate are connected to each other when viewed in the left-right direction L. An L-shaped support portion 179 is provided.

The light transmission hole 177 is formed so as to surround one of the LEDs constituting the light emitting means 181 when viewed from the front. As a result, the appearance of the light emitting means 181 disposed on the back side of the light transmission hole 177 and the other light emitting means 181 when viewed from the front side of the front member 170F changes. That is, it can be visually recognized that the inside of the light transmission hole 177 emits more intense light than the other parts.

A plurality of the protruding cylindrical portions 178 are formed with substantially the same protruding length. As a result, the distance between the main body plate portion of the front member 170F and the illumination board 180 is made uniform over the entire arrangement range of the illumination board 180, and the illumination board 180 in an inclined position is surface-supported at a plurality of positions. Therefore, the stability of supporting the illumination board 180 can be improved while maintaining the degree of freedom in arrangement of the light emitting means 181 and suppressing unevenness in the light emission mode.

That is, since the illumination board 180 is placed in an inclined position with the front side of the board facing downward, in order to maintain that position it is preferable to support it from the front side. If the illumination board 180 is supported by the illumination board 180, the area in which the light emitting means 181 disposed on the front side of the illumination board 180 can be arranged tends to be restricted. If the area of the support part is reduced with priority given to the area where the light emitting means 181 can be arranged, the posture of the illumination board 180 will collapse, and the distance between the main body plate part of the front member 170F and the illumination board 180 will be reduced. It tends to vary within the range, and there is a possibility that the light emission pattern becomes uneven.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a plurality of small-diameter protruding cylindrical portions 178 having the same protruding height are provided so that the front surface of the illumination board 180 can be supported simultaneously at a plurality of points. Therefore, a plurality of protruding cylindrical portions 178 that support the illumination board 180 can be arranged in a plurality of small gap positions that occur between adjacent light emitting means 181. Thereby, the stability of supporting the illumination board 180 can be improved while maintaining the degree of freedom in arranging the light emitting means 181 and suppressing unevenness in the light emission mode.

In the assembled state, the L-shaped support portion 179 is disposed to face the top and front surface of the illumination board 180 and functions to suppress displacement of the illumination board 180. That is, the lower part of the L-shaped support portion 179, which is disposed to face the front surface of the illumination board 180, supports the illumination board 180 and prevents it from falling forward due to its own weight.

In addition, the rear part of the L-shaped support part 179 and the illumination board 180, which are arranged to face the top surface of the illumination board 180, are normally arranged with a gap between them, so that the illumination board 180 can be loosely supported. The vertical displacement of the illumination board 180 can be suppressed to a minimum.

Note that a support portion having the same shape as the L-shaped support portion 179 is also formed on the front side of the lower wall portion 170MD of the middle member 170M (formed at two positions on the left and right), and on the lower surface of the illumination board 180. and the rear surface, and function to suppress displacement of the illumination board 180. That is, in this embodiment, the L-shaped support parts arranged above and below the illumination board 180 are configured to suppress displacement of the illumination board 180 in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction.

Thus, in this embodiment, the illumination board 180 is not directly fastened and fixed, but is supported stably by being sandwiched between the front member 170F and the middle member 170M from the front and back. There is. This is because, for example, if the middle member 170M and the illumination board 180 are fastened and fixed and configured as a single rigid body, the light board 180 may vibrate under the influence of vibrations generated in the middle member 170M. This is a countermeasure that takes this into consideration.

That is, according to the present embodiment, since the illumination board 180 is not fastened and fixed to the middle member 170M or the front member 170F, even if vibration occurs in the middle member 170M or the front member 170F, it will not be affected by the vibration. The arrangement of the illumination board 180 can be easily maintained independently.

Here, it is considered that the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 disposed on the back side of the middle member 170M is likely to cause the vibration of the middle member 170M, but in this embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is It is disposed on the opposite side (back side) of the illumination board 180 across a gap created on the front side of the portion 170MU.

With this configuration, the vibration of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is transmitted to the illumination board 180 via the small-diameter protruding cylindrical portion 172, so that the vibration of the vibration solenoid SOL1 is alleviated by the deformation of the protruding cylindrical portion 172. Therefore, transmission of vibration to the illumination board 180 can be suppressed. Therefore, direct transmission of vibration from the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 as a vibration source to the illumination board 180 can be avoided.

The middle member 170M has a support hole 174 that is bored in the front-rear direction with a diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the transmission shaft rod portion 162 and is configured to rotatably support the transmission shaft rod portion 162, and a support hole 174 located below the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1. A lower regulating portion 175 is provided, and an upper regulating portion 176 is provided on the opposite side of the support hole 174 with respect to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1.

The driven member 163 is normally tilted due to its own weight (see FIG. 11(a)), but when electricity is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, magnetic force (electromagnetic force) is generated, and this magnetic force (electromagnetic force) The metal plate member MB1 is attracted and displaced upward. That is, in the present embodiment, as the metal plate member MB1 is displaced between the raised position where it is placed as a result of being raised by electromagnetic force and the lowered position where it is placed as a result of the electromagnetic force disappearing and it being lowered by its own weight, The contact member 161 and the driven member 163 are rotationally displaced. The rotational displacement will be explained below with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12.

11(a) is a rear view of the window movable unit 150, and FIG. 11(b) is a front view of the window movable unit 150. 12(a) is a rear view of the window movable unit 150, and FIG. 12(b) is a front view of the window movable unit 150.

Note that FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b) illustrate a state in which electricity is not supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the driven member 163 is tilted by its own weight (lower position state), and FIG. 12(a) and 12(b) illustrate a state in which the metal plate member MB1 and the driven member 163 are raised (in the raised position) by the electromagnetic force generated when electricity is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1.

In addition, in FIGS. 11(a) and 12(a), illustration of the rear member 170B is omitted for easy understanding, and in FIGS. 11(b) and 12(b), the outer shape of the displacement member 151 is The shape of the opening on the back side is illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 11(a) and 12(a), in the lowered position, the driven member 163 comes into contact with a cushion portion 175a attached to the upper surface of the lower regulating portion 175, and is regulated from downward displacement. In this position, it comes into contact with a cushion part 176a attached to the lower surface of the upper regulating part 176, and upward displacement is regulated.

Note that the material of the cushion portions 175a and 176a is not limited at all. For example, it may be a general-purpose plastic such as polypropylene or polystyrene, an engineering plastic such as polycarbonate, a thermosetting resin such as melamine resin, polyurethane, or epoxy resin, or a rubber material. Further, the cushion parts 175a and 176a may be made of the same material or may be made of different materials.

Here, the lower regulating part 175 and the upper regulating part 176 are configured to have different positions (distances from the transmitting shaft bar part 162) with respect to the transmission shaft bar part 162. explain.

First, since the load applied to the lower regulating portion 175 via the driven member 163 is mainly a load generated by the own weight of the driven member 163, the driven member 163 is supported by supporting the center of gravity of the driven member 163. It can be stably supported. For this reason, the lower regulating portion 175 is disposed at the center of gravity of the driven member 163 (approximately at the center of the arm length).

On the other hand, since the load applied to the upper regulating part 176 via the driven member 163 is mainly due to the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, the arrangement of the upper regulating member 176 is There are few benefits associated with the location of the center of gravity. In this embodiment, the load transmitted to the upper regulating member 176 via the driven member 163 is reduced by arranging the upper regulating member 176 to face the rotating tip of the driven member 163.

That is, when a moment of force of the same magnitude is generated, the force is transmitted via the driven member 163 at a position farther from the rotation axis of the driven member 163 (a position where the arm related to the moment is longer). Since the load is reduced, the load transmitted to the upper regulating member 176 can be reduced.

In this way, it is desirable that the load transmission to the upper regulating member 176 occurs at the rotating tip of the driven member 163, so in this embodiment, the width dimension (radial width) of the cushion portion 176a is shortened (the cushion 175a). Thereby, load transmission at the intermediate portion of the driven member 163 can be avoided, and load transmission can be stably caused at the rotating tip.

Moreover, since the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 continues to be generated in the raised position, it is difficult to imagine that the driven member 163 will bounce back after colliding with the cushion portion 176a.

On the other hand, by increasing the width (radial width) of the cushion portion 175a of the lower regulating portion 175 (longer than the width of the cushion portion 176a), the area of the surface receiving the load can be increased. The pressure (stress) generated in the cushion portion 175a due to the load due to the own weight of the drive member 163 can be reduced. Thereby, bouncing of the driven member 163 after colliding with the cushion portion 175a can be suppressed.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, bouncing of the driven member 163 can be suppressed while reducing the load transmitted to the cushion parts 175a, 176a via the driven member 163 during displacement in both the vertical directions.

A protruding part 176b is formed below the upper regulating part 176 and protrudes in a curved shape from the back side of the middle member 170M. The protruding portion 176b is disposed to face the rotating tip of the driven member 163, and when the driven member 163 is displaced to the front side, the protruding portion 176b suppresses contact with the driven member 163 in a small area and rotates the driven member 163. guides the rotation of the

As shown in FIGS. 11(b) and 12(b), the distal end portion 153 of the displacement member 151 is disposed on the front side of the strong light emitting means 181a disposed inside the light transmission hole 177 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the light emitted from the strong light emitting means 181a is visible to the player via the tip portion 153.

As described above, the internal shape of the effect section 153a allows the player who views the effect section 153a from the front side to see the entire effect section 153a as if it were (faintly) shining. Even in a situation where the displacement member 151 is displaced while the actual arrangement of the means 181a does not change, it is possible to suppress a change in the light emission mode of the effect portion 153a.

In other words, the player can see the light that is visually recognized through the effect section 153a as if it is being displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the effect section 153a, so that it is as if there is an LED or the like inside the effect section 153a. A light emitting means is provided, and it is possible to create an illusion as if the display section 153a is being displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the presentation section 153a.

On the other hand, since the weak light emitting means 181b can appear to emit light at a fixed position, the weak light emitting means 181b arranged on the illumination board 180 can be The strong light emitting means 181a, which is also arranged on the illumination board 180, can be visually recognized as emitting light while being displaced.

As a result, the light emitting effect that is often achieved by adopting multiple illumination boards, with the first board in a fixed arrangement and the second board in a movable configuration, can be achieved by using a single electrical board with a fixed arrangement. This can be achieved using a decorative board. As a result, the number of illumination boards can be reduced while producing the same presentation effect.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 5. The operation unit 300 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside.

FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 300. The operation unit 300 includes a bottom wall 311 and a box-shaped back case 310 whose front side is open from an outer wall 312 that stands up from the outer edge of the bottom wall 311 .

The back case 310 is formed into a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 311a in the center of the bottom wall portion 311. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, it is possible to divide the display region of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view).

The operating unit 300 includes a first operating unit 400 in which a movable device is disposed in the internal space of the rear case 310 so as to be displaceable along a path including above the opening 311a, and a first operating unit 400 which is disposed on both left and right sides of the opening 311a to produce light emission. A left and right effect unit 600 for performing the above operations, etc., and a second operation unit 700 disposed below the opening 311a are housed, respectively, and are configured as one unit.

Specifically, the first operating unit 400 is disposed above the opening 311a, and the second operating unit 700 is disposed below the opening 311a, respectively, on the bottom wall 311 of the back case 310. Note that FIG. 5 shows a state in which the first operating unit 400 and the second operating unit 700 are attached to the back case 310.

The back case 310 extends from the front end of the outer wall 312 as a flat plate along (for example, arranged parallel to) the back of the game board 13, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), the back case 310 extends from the front end of the outer wall 312 to the front end of the game board 13. A support plate portion 313 for support is provided.

The support plate portion 313 is fastened to the base plate 60 with a positioning convex portion 313a that has a shape capable of fitting into a fitting recess 60b formed on the base plate 60 of the game board 13 and protrudes toward the front side. A plurality of insertion holes 313b are provided through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The rear case 310 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning protrusion 313a into the fitting recess 60b (see FIG. 6), and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 313b and screwed into the base plate 60. As a result, the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 can be integrally fixed, so that the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 as a whole can be improved.

Note that the shape of the positioning convex portion 313a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, a convex portion with an outer shape slightly smaller than the internal shape (in this embodiment, circular or oval) of the fitting recess 60b may be used, or a convex portion with a larger fitting gap may be used in consideration of workability during assembly. It may also be a protrusion of any shape (even smaller external shape). Moreover, when the inner shape of the fitting recess 60b is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex part 313a is also made into a rectangular shape correspondingly.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 13, in this embodiment, many support plate portions 313 are densely arranged on the left side and upper side of the back case 310, and fewer support plate portions 313 are formed on the right side and lower side. However, this is the result of a design that takes into consideration the balance between improving the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operating unit 300 as a whole and space efficiency.

That is, when the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is formed of plywood made by stacking plywood boards as in this embodiment, the movable member disposed on the back side of the game board 13 passes through the flesh of the base board 60. Since the movable members are not visible, the entire back side of the area where openings can be formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13 (recessed from the side) is effective as a performance area where the movable members are visibly disposed.

On the other hand, at the location where the support plate part 313 is formed, the internal space of the back case 310 is eroded inward by the area of the support plate part 313 in front view, so the movable member is moved by that amount. The area where it can be installed will be narrowed. Therefore, if the strength problem can be maintained even if the support plate part 313 is omitted, the restriction on the arrangement range of the movable member can be avoided by omitting the support plate part 313. That's true.

In this embodiment, the reason why many support plate portions 313 are disposed on the left side and upper side of the back case 310 is related to the range of the area where the player can visually recognize the ball shot into the game area or the like. That is, the support plate portion 313 is formed at a location other than the range where the shot ball is visually recognized.

To explain in more detail, in this embodiment, the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (FIG. 4) passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and passes through the return ball prevention member 68 to the game area. It was introduced in 1992, and from then on it was configured to flow down the gaming area. In a pinball game, the area that is thought to attract the most attention is the area where the ball passes, and other outer areas (for example, the area on the opposite side of the third symbol display device 81 across the outer rail 62 and inner rail 61). ) usually receives less attention.

Therefore, the lower left and upper left, based on the arc convex to the left formed by the outer rail 62, and the upper left and upper right, based on the arc convex upward, as ranges that the ball cannot reach. It is thought that players' attention to the game will be lower.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned outer edge member 73 and the surfaces facing the outer rail 62 at the lower left and upper left of the outer rail 62 are formed in a shape that follows the outer rail 62, and are arranged on the front side of the game board 13. The block-shaped member 74 is made of a resin material that does not transmit light, and in addition to the fact that the game board 13 is made of a plywood board that does not easily transmit light, the outer edge member 73 can be viewed from the front side of the game board 13. It is configured such that the back side of the game board 13 cannot be viewed through the block-like member 74.

In the present embodiment, the support plate portions 313 are preferentially disposed at locations where attention is low and locations where visibility is not possible. In fact, even in the left side and upper side where many support plate parts 313 are formed, the support plate parts 313 are formed near the corners of the back case 310, avoiding the central part as the overhanging end of the outer rail 62. be done.

In other words, the rigidity of the operation unit 300 and the game board 13 as a whole can be reduced by selecting the locations where the space will be eroded by forming the support plate portion 313 from locations with low visibility (low performance performance). A high degree of freedom in designing the area within the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the ball can be ensured while achieving the effect of aiming to secure the ball.

From this point of view, since there is a common configuration in pachinko machines in which the balls fired by the ball firing unit 112a roll along the outer rail 62 and are introduced into the gaming area, the range where the balls do not fall is the lower left, upper left It can be easily placed in the upper right corner.

Approximately the lower half of the right outer wall 312 is provided with a notch 312a that is cut out (formed) toward the back side. This notch 312a is cut out below the belt-shaped part 93 (see FIG. 5) of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and leaves a gap between it and the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). Form.

By forming the cutout portion 312a in this manner, the following effects can be achieved. For example, the gap formed by the notch 312a can be made to function as a wiring passage through which the electrical wiring connected to the variable prize winning device 65 passes to the outside of the back case 310. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the electrical wiring will interfere with other components, compared to the case where the wiring is routed up and down.

Furthermore, the gap formed by the notch 312a can be used as a space for arranging the configuration required for the variable prize winning device 65. The components necessary for the variable prize winning device 65 include, for example, a solenoid that generates a driving force, a channel for flowing a ball, a board for a light-emitting effect, a detection sensor for detecting a ball, and other structures. is exemplified.

Further, by arranging a light emitting means such as an LED near the notch 312a, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be easily seen by the player as light with a blurred outline. In other words, compared to the case where the entire circumference of the back case 310 is connected to the game board 13 (the boundary of the light emitted from the back side of the game board 13 is formed along the shape of the back case 310). This makes it possible to blur the boundaries of the light visible through the game board 13. Thereby, it is possible to avoid that the boundary of the light that is visually recognized through the game board 13 depends on the shape of the back case 310, and the degree of freedom in producing light emission can be improved.

Furthermore, compared to the case where the electrical wiring connected to a light emitting means such as an LED is arranged so as to extend to the outside of the operating unit 300 along the back surface of the game board 13, it is easier to operate the electrical wiring through the notch 312a. A configuration like this embodiment in which the light is output outside the unit 300 can reduce the possibility that the electric wiring will block the light emitted from the LED.

That is, by configuring the electrical wiring so that it can be brought out of the operating unit 300 without passing it around to the front side of the LED, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the electrical wiring blocks the light emitted from the LED. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing effects using light emitted from light emitting means such as LEDs.

Note that the shape and length (vertical length) of the cutout portion 312a is not limited at all. For example, the notch portion 312a may be formed over the entire area (vertical width) between the upper and lower support plate portions 313.

As described above, in this embodiment, the right side of the back case 310 is not fastened to the game board 13, so when considering the rigidity of the right side of the game board 13, it is not necessary to rely on the rigidity of the operating unit 300. I can't.

As a countermeasure against this, in this embodiment, a metal plate-like member 75 is provided on the outer edge portion 73 at a position corresponding to the right end portion of the game board 13. The metal plate member 75 will be explained below.

FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, outer edge member 73, and metal plate member 75, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13, outer edge member 73, and metal plate member 75. In addition, in FIGS. 14 and 15, in order to facilitate understanding, the game board 13 is shown alone, and illustrations of other members arranged on the game board 13 are omitted.

The outer edge member 73 is made of a resin material, and includes an arcuate wall portion 73a that constitutes an upper side and has an arcuate inner surface, and a thin wall extending downward from the lower end of the arcuate wall portion 73a. The vertical wall portion 73b includes a vertical wall portion 73b, and an inclined wall portion 73c formed with an upper surface that slopes downward toward the left from the lower end portion of the vertical wall portion 73b. In this way, by configuring the outer edge member 73 with a single member that covers almost the entire area in the vertical direction, the outer edge member 73 is made of a single member that covers almost the entire area in the vertical direction. The number of man-hours required for assembling the game board 13 can be reduced.

The vertical wall portion 73b includes a plurality of plate-like protruding portions 73b1 that protrude in a plate-like manner toward the back side along the right side portion, and is bent from the front side edge of the right side portion into a U-shape when viewed in the vertical direction. A cylindrical protruding part 73b3 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the back side at the joint between the plurality of bent parts 73b2, the arcuate wall part 73a and the inclined wall part 73c, and a cylindrical protruding part 73b3 that is attached to and fastened to the cylindrical protruding part 73b3. A fastening portion 73b4 formed into which a screw can be inserted is provided.

The bent portion 73b2 is arranged at an intermediate position between the arrangement intervals of the plate-like protruding portions 73b1. As a result, in relation to the metal plate member 75, which will be described later, the holding force of the metal plate member 75 to the vertical wall portion 73b is suppressed while suppressing the number of seam penetration portions 75c formed in the metal plate member 75. can be improved.

In other words, compared to the case where the plate-like protrusions 73b1 at three locations resist the bending of the metal plate-like member 75, the plate-like protrusions 73b1 and the bent portion 73b2 prevent the metal plate-like member 75 from bending. Since resistance to bending can be generated, the load generated at one location can be reduced. In addition, by arranging the plate-shaped protruding portions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 at equal intervals, the load generated when the metal plate-shaped member 75 bends can be equally distributed, so that the load generated when the metal plate-shaped member 75 bends can be equally distributed. Excessive load can be prevented from occurring.

The metal plate-like member 75 has a main body plate portion 75a which is folded back multiple times in the transverse direction and has no creases in the longitudinal direction, and is bent leftward at the back side edge of the main body plate portion 75a. A plurality of seam penetrating portions 75c are formed to penetrate in the front-back direction at the joint between the bent portion 75b, the main body plate portion 75a and the bent portion 75b, and a plurality of joint penetration portions 75c are formed to penetrate in the front-back direction at the upper and lower ends of the bent portion 75b. A through hole 75d is provided along with the plate portion in which the through hole 75d is formed, and an insertion hole 75e is formed in a stepped plate portion toward the front side so that a fastening screw can be inserted therethrough.

The metal plate-like member 75 generates particularly strong resistance to bending in the longitudinal direction because the bent portion 75b is formed in the vertical direction in addition to the way the main body plate portion 75a is creased. Therefore, by disposing it integrally with the vertical wall portion 73b, which is easily curved in the longitudinal direction, the vertical wall portion 73b can be efficiently reinforced.

The seam penetrating portion 75c is formed in a size that allows the plate-like protruding portion 73b1 of the vertical wall portion 73b to be inserted therethrough. In this embodiment, the vertical wall portion 73b and the metal plate-like member 75 can be integrated by inserting the plate-like protruding portion 73b1 into the joint penetration portion 75c.

When the metal plate member 75 is assembled to be integrated with the vertical wall portion 73b, the front side edge of the main body plate portion 75a is sandwiched between the bent portion 73b2 and the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 73b, and a cylindrical protrusion is formed. The portion 73b3 is inserted into the through hole 75d. In this way, the metal plate-like member 75 and the vertical wall portion 73b are positioned relative to each other at a plurality of locations in the vertical direction. In this state, the outer edge member 73 and the metal plate member 75 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 75e into the fastening portion 73b4.

With the above configuration, the metal plate member 75 is disposed above and below the vertical wall portion 73b, so that the entire vertical wall portion 73b can be reinforced. Here, the plate-shaped protruding part 73b1 and the cylindrical protruding part 73b3 of the vertical wall part 73b penetrate through the metal plate-like member 75 and extend to the back side, and their tips engage with the game board 13. The engagement between the metal plate member 75 and the game board 13 will be described below.

The game board 13 has a plurality of recesses 13e recessed on the right side edge of the front surface so as to be able to receive the plate-like projections 73b1, and a cylindrical projection 73b3 on the upper and lower sides of the recesses 13e. A plurality of positioning holes 13f are provided which are formed as recesses.

When the outer edge member 73 and the metal plate-like member 75 are assembled into the game board 13 in an integrated state, the plate-like protrusion 73b1 is received in the recessed part 13e, and the circular protrusion 73b3 is received in the positioning hole 13f, respectively. and positioned. That is, the plate-like protruding portion 73b1 and the circular protruding portion 73b3 are used not only for positioning with the metal plate-like member 75 but also for positioning with the game board 13. Thereby, the number of positioning objects can be reduced.

In this embodiment, as described above, since the metal plate member 75 is assembled to suppress the curvature of the vertical wall portion 73b, there is no need to provide sufficient rigidity to the vertical wall portion 73b alone, and the vertical wall The portion 73b can be formed so thin that it can be easily curved in the left-right direction when used alone.

Furthermore, the rigidity of the metal plate member 75 can suppress the deformation of the game board 13 (improve the rigidity), so even if there is a gap between the game board 13 and the back case 310, the game board 13 can be It can maintain its shape.

The explanation will be given by returning to FIGS. 5 and 13. A first operating unit 400 is disposed above the third symbol display device 81 of the operating unit 300. The first operation unit 400 includes a light emitting production device LA1 that can be displaced from the state shown in FIGS. 5 and 13 to a position on the front side of the third symbol display device 81, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 and This device visually entertains the player by controlling the displacement in synchronization with the operation of the frame button 22 that can be operated by the player. The details of the first operating unit 400 will be explained below.

16 and 17 are partial front views of the operating unit 300. In FIG. 16, a retracted state in which each component of the first operating unit 400 is retracted to the upper side of the third symbol display device 81 is illustrated, and in FIG. The overhanging state of overhanging (downward) toward the 3-symbol display device 81 side is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the internal shape of the back case 310 is not made symmetrically. In particular, regarding the upper wall (ceiling surface), the right side in front view is lower than the left side in front view due to the relationship with the shape of tank 130 of dispensing unit 93 (see FIG. 3). That is, where the tank 130 is arranged on the upper right side of the operating unit 300, in order to secure the installation area, the upper wall of the rear case 310 is arranged in a lower position on the right side than on the left side. (arranged along the wall schematic line UL).

In this way, it is easier to secure a larger area on the left side than on the right side (there is more room in the ceiling height) inside the rear case 310, so in this embodiment, the drive motor MT1 and the coil spring Auxiliary devices that do not directly affect the appearance of performances such as SP1 (not intended for players to see) are arranged on the left side.

As a result, the drive motor MT1 and the coil spring SP1 can be disposed by effectively utilizing the depression (gap) created by the asymmetrical shape of the upper wall of the rear case 310, and the lower edge of the first operating unit 400 can be made to have a symmetrical shape. However, since it can be moved as far upward as possible, it is possible to easily ensure a large vertical dimension of the display viewing area of the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in accordance with the left-right asymmetrical shape of the upper wall of the back case 310, the shape of the wing-like member 460 (see FIG. 16) of the first operating unit 400 is adjusted in the retracted state of the first operating unit 400. The shape of the side facing the upper wall of the rear case 310 is designed. That is, the wing-like member 460 on the left side is designed to protrude toward the upper wall side of the back case 310 compared to the wing-like member 460 on the right side.

Note that the wing-like members 460 are configured to unite and be visually recognized as one body when the state of the first operating unit 400 changes from the retracted state to the extended state, and are designed to have a bilaterally symmetrical shape in this state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the left and right wing-like members 460 are configured in an asymmetrical shape.

In this embodiment, when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state, the asymmetrically shaped portion (the upper side that contacts when combined) of the wing-like member 460 is hidden by the game board 13 (see FIG. 2), so the left and right wing members It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the shaped member 460 is configured in an asymmetrical shape.

18 and 19 are front perspective views of the first operating unit 400, and FIGS. 20 and 21 are rear perspective views of the first operating unit 400. 18 and 20 illustrate the retracted state of the first operating unit 400, and FIGS. 19 and 21 illustrate the extended state of the first operating unit 400.

In the first operation unit 400, when the drive motor MT1 is rotationally driven, the arm member 414 rotates through a plurality of gears interposed therebetween, and the elevating plate 430 moves up and down in synchronization with the rotational movement.

The elevating plate 430 is supported by a metal rail 405 that is disposed approximately in the center of the left and right and is configured to be vertically expandable and retractable, and an auxiliary arm member 444 that is disposed on the opposite left and right side of the arm member 414. Ru.

A relative displacement member 442 that relatively displaces in the vertical direction in synchronization with the change in attitude of the auxiliary arm member 444 is disposed on the elevating plate 430. In synchronization with the displacement of the relative displacement member 442, the relative displacement member 442 rotates symmetrically. The plurality of displaced wing-like members 460 are displaced.

Accordingly, the constituent members of the first operating unit 400 are displaced between the retracted state and the extended state in a displacement manner that combines elevation and rotation with the drive of the drive motor MT1. Thereby, although only a single drive motor MT1 is used, it is possible to displace the constituent members in multiple directions, so that the performance effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 20, when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state, the upper end portion of the arcuate upper gear portion 444b of the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to protrude upward from the upper edge of the elevating plate 430. Ru. When the first operation unit 400 is in the retracted state, the upper edge of the elevating plate 430 is shielded by the base plate 60 of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) and is difficult to see. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the gear portion 444b is protruding.

On the other hand, since the auxiliary arm member 444 rotates in conjunction with the downward displacement of the elevating plate 430 from the retracted state to the extended state of the first operating unit 400, the upper edge of the elevating plate 430 in the retracted state The arcuate gear portion 444b, which had been projecting upward (see FIG. 27), is displaced downward with the downward movement of the elevating plate 430, and is hidden below the upper edge of the elevating plate 430 (see FIG. 28).

In this way, the arc-shaped gear portion 444b of the auxiliary arm member 444 is allowed to protrude from the elevating plate 430 at the location where it is shielded by the base plate 60 due to the arrangement, and the position where the elevating plate 430 is not shielded by the base plate 60 is allowed. By configuring the auxiliary arm member 444 to be displaced so that the overhang portion is hidden on the back side of the elevating plate 430 until the elevating plate 430 is displaced, the auxiliary arm member 444 is always hidden on the back side of the elevating plate 430. The degree of freedom in designing the auxiliary arm member 444 and the elevating plate 430 can be improved compared to the case in which the auxiliary arm member 444 and the lifting plate 430 are designed.

For example, since the upper edge of the elevating plate 430 can be placed further down, interference between the upper edge of the elevating plate 430 and the upper outer wall 312 of the rear case 310 can be avoided (see FIG. 16).

Furthermore, by configuring the auxiliary arm member 444 to be rotationally displaced, a rack gear-shaped portion (a portion having gear teeth formed along a straight line) is maintained protruding toward the third symbol display device 81 side. While avoiding this, it is possible to ensure a sufficient length of the elevating plate 430 extending toward the third symbol display device 81 side.

That is, even if a fixed rack gear-shaped portion is formed on the elevating plate 430 side of the main body plate portion 401 and configured to mesh with the rotary gear 441, the portion will not move relative to the elevating plate 430 as the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced. Although the relative displacement member 442 can be vertically displaced, in this case, it is necessary to always dispose a fixed rack gear-like portion along the position where the elevating plate 430 is arranged. Therefore, if a configuration in which a large part of the lifting plate 430 protrudes downward from the lower edge of the main body plate part 401 as in the lifting plate 430 of this embodiment is used, the fixed rack gear-like part is moved from the lower edge of the main body plate part 401. It was necessary to form it so as to protrude from the side toward the third symbol display device 81 side.

Therefore, there may be problems such as poor visibility of the third symbol display device 81 due to the third symbol display device 81 being blocked by a fixed rack gear-shaped portion, or a problem in which the third symbol display device 81 is blocked by a fixed rack gear-shaped portion, and the rack gear is not connected to the elevator plate 430 when the first operation unit 400 is in the retracted state. There is a possibility that problems such as a reduction in the degree of freedom in designing the elevating plate 430 may occur due to the purpose of hiding the shaped portion.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a variable auxiliary arm member 444 is used instead of the fixed rack gear-like part, so that it can be placed on the back side (hidden) according to the displacement of the elevating plate 430. ) An auxiliary arm member 444 can be placed. Therefore, while avoiding a situation in which the rack gear-shaped portion is kept protruding toward the third symbol display device 81 side, the length (displacement amount) of the elevating plate 430 toward the third symbol display device 81 side can be sufficiently adjusted. can be secured.

22(a) and 23 are exploded front perspective views of the first operating unit 400, and FIG. 22(b) shows the meshing state of the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470. 24 and 25 are exploded rear perspective views of the first operating unit 400. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 22(a), 23, 24, and 25, the first operating unit 400 is formed from a resin material into a horizontally elongated plate shape, and is located at the bottom of the rear case 310 (see FIG. 16). A transmission unit 410 composed of a main body plate 401 fastened and fixed to the wall 311, a plurality of members rotatably supported by the main body plate 401, and connected to the tip of an arm member 414 of the transmission unit 410. A back arrangement plate 420 is composed of a plurality of plate-shaped parts arranged on the same plane including a connecting plate part 421 which is connected to The device includes an elevating plate 430, and a synchronous operation unit 440 supported between the elevating plate 430 and the accommodation plate portion 425 of the rear arrangement plate 420 (see FIGS. 23 and 25).

In addition, the first operation unit 400 includes a plate-shaped support plate portion 450 fastened and fixed to the elevating plate 430, rotatably supported by the support plate portion 450, and fastened and fixed to the front side of the synchronous movement unit 440. A set of left and right wing-like members 460 that rotationally displaces due to a load applied by the displacement of a fixed transmission plate 490, and an auxiliary member 470 that rotates in synchronization with the wing-like members 460 (FIG. 22(a), FIG. 22( b) and Figure 24).

The main body plate section 401 includes a shaft support section 402 that pivotally supports a transmission gear 412, an end support section 403 that is disposed on the lower right side of the shaft support section that supports an end gear 413, and an arm support section that is a columnar section that supports an arm member 414. 404, a metal rail 405 which is arranged at the left and right center part and whose rear side part is fixed so that the front side part can be vertically displaced; a long hole portion 406, a cover portion 407 formed in a plate shape from a light-transmissive resin material and covering the area where the long hole portion 406 is formed from the back side, and a detection sensor SC1 for detecting the state. Equipped with

The terminal support portion 403 includes an axial support portion 403a formed in the same shape as the axial support portion 402, an annular protrusion 403b protruding along a circle centered on the axial support portion 403a, and A stopper portion 403c is provided that projects toward the front side in a fan shape at a position between the protrusion 403b and the shaft support portion 403a. The stopper portion 403c is formed by general compression molding, and the side opposite to the protruding portion is formed as a recessed portion.

The lid portion 407 closes the area where the elongated hole portion 406 is formed. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the electrical wiring DH1 passing through the wiring through hole 401a formed through the main body plate part 401 from the front side of the main body plate part 401 and reaching the back side of the elongated hole part 406 is inserted into the elongated hole. It is guided to the front side through the section 406. Therefore, in a situation where there is no lid part 407 and the back side is open, the electrical wiring DH1 protrudes to the back side, and during the assembly work, the electrical wiring DH1 is between the bottom wall part 311 of the back case 310 (see FIG. 13) and the main body plate part 401. There is a risk of getting caught. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the area where the electrical wiring DH1 is arranged is partitioned off by the lid part 407, so that the electrical wiring DH1 is prevented from being pinched between the bottom wall part 311 and the main body plate part 401. I can do it.

Thereby, the first operating unit 400 can be assembled into the rear case 310 without checking the arrangement of the electrical wiring DH1, so that the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

The transmission unit 410 includes a drive gear 411 that is non-rotatably connected to the rotating shaft of the drive motor MT1, a transmission gear 412 that is meshed with the drive gear 411 and rotatably supported on the shaft support portion 402, and A terminal gear 413 is meshed with the transmission gear 412 and rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 403a, and an arm member 414 is pivotally supported by the arm support portion 404 so that its attitude can change as the terminal gear 413 rotates. Be prepared.

The terminal gear 413 has a gap between an annular protrusion 413a that has an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the annular protrusion 403b and protrudes toward the back side, and an inner surface of the annular protrusion 413a. A stoppered part 413b protrudes in a fan-like manner similar to the stopper part 403c with a gap between the two, a cylindrical protruding part 413c that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the front at an eccentric position away from the shaft support part 403a, and a front face of the gear part. A detected portion 413d is provided which extends in a fan shape in the outer diameter direction from a flange portion formed in a flange shape on the side.

The annular protrusion 413a is disposed such that the side surface on the shaft side faces the annular protrusion 403b, and the annular protrusion 403b is sandwiched between the annular protrusion 403b and the stopped portion 413b. That is, the annular protrusion 403b serves as a guide rail that guides the rotation of the terminal gear 413.

The stopped portion 413b is formed by general compression molding, and the side opposite to the protruding portion is formed as a recessed portion. The stopped portion 413b interferes with the stopper portion 403c in its rotational direction. That is, in this embodiment, the rotation angle of the end gear 413 is limited by the circumferential dimension of the stopper portion 403c and the stopped portion 413b. That is, the terminal gear 413 is rotationally displaced by a rotation angle of less than 360 degrees.

In addition, when designing the shapes of the stopper part 403c and the stopped part 413b, calculate the rotation angle required for the end gear 413, and calculate the remaining angle (the angle obtained by subtracting the rotation angle of the end gear 413 from 360 degrees). The shapes of the stopper portion 403c and the stopped portion 413b may be designed respectively at an angle divided into two equal parts. As a result, it is possible to prevent either the stopper portion 403c or the stopped portion 413b from becoming weak in strength, thereby extending the service life of the first operating unit 400.

The cylindrical projecting portion 413c is a metal rod made of brass, and is fitted and fixed to the terminal gear 413 made of resin. A ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction and a known E-ring E1 are arranged at the tip of the bulge, and the arm member 414 is connected and supported to the cylindrical bulge 413c so as not to fall off.

The detected portion 413d is formed with a thickness that allows it to pass through the detection gap of the detection sensor SC1, and when the detected portion 413d is detected by the detection sensor SC1, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is activated by the first operating unit. 400 can be determined to be in the evacuation state.

The arm member 414 includes an annular portion 414a that is rotatably supported by the arm support portion 404, a plate portion 414b that extends in the radial direction from the front side of the annular portion 414a, and a plate portion 414b that extends from the front side of the annular portion 414a. An intermediate plate portion 414c that is arranged parallel to the rear surface of the portion 414b and connected to the extending end of the plate portion 414b, and a long hole portion formed in the intermediate plate portion 414c in the shape of a long hole. 414d, a tip plate portion 414e arranged parallel to the rear side with respect to the intermediate plate portion 414c and connected to the extending end of the intermediate plate portion 414c, and a front side from the extending tip of the tip plate portion 414e. A cylindrical protruding portion 414f that protrudes in a cylindrical shape is provided.

The elongated hole portion 414d is formed in a size that allows the cylindrical protruding portion 413c of the terminal gear 413 to be inserted therethrough, and the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted through the elongated hole portion 414d.

The cylindrical projecting portion 414f is a metal rod made of brass, and is fitted and fixed to the tip plate portion 414e made of resin. A ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction and a known E-ring E1 are disposed at the protruding tip of the cylindrical protruding part 414f, and the connecting plate part 421 of the back arrangement plate 420 is attached to the column so that it cannot fall off. It is connected and supported by the projecting portion 414f.

FIG. 26 is a top view of the first operating unit 400. In FIG. 26, a second intermediate position of the first operating unit 400 is illustrated, and for ease of understanding, a coil spring SP1, a fixed pulley on which the coil spring SP1 is guided, a drive motor MT1 and the drive motor MT1 The illustration of the base plate to which is fastened and fixed is omitted.

According to FIG. 26, in this embodiment, the shape of the arm member 414 is designed so that a large area on the front side of the arm member 414 can be secured. That is, by forming the arm member 414 in a shape bent back and forth, interference with other members can be functionally avoided. This will be explained below.

The plate-shaped portion 414b is arranged closer to the front than the detection sensor SC1 in order to avoid interference with the detection sensor SC1. In other words, the restriction on the front and rear positions of the plate-shaped portion 414b is due to its relationship with the detection sensor SC1, so it is limited to a location that is not related to the detection sensor SC1 (a location on the opposite side of the rotation axis (arm support portion 404) with respect to the detection sensor SC1). Now, you can design the front and rear positions as you like.

In this embodiment, the intermediate plate part 414c, which is disposed on the opposite side of the rotation axis (arm support part 404) with respect to the detection sensor SC1, is disposed on the back side compared to the plate part 414b. As a result, the front-to-back distance between the front surface of the terminal gear 413 and the arm member 414 can be narrowed, and the load can be transmitted to the arm member 414 at the base side of the cylindrical projecting portion 413c. It is possible to avoid a decrease in load transmission efficiency due to deformation of the cylindrical projecting portion 413c.

Furthermore, since this is due to the relationship between the front and back positions of the intermediate plate portion 414c and the end gear 413, at a location that is not related to the end gear 413 (a location on the opposite side of the rotation axis (arm support portion 404) with respect to the end gear 413), The front and rear positions can be designed as desired.

In the present embodiment, the tip plate portion 414e, which is disposed on the opposite side of the rotating shaft (arm support portion 404) with respect to the end gear 413, is disposed on the back side compared to the intermediate plate portion 414c. As a result, a large space can be secured on the front side of the tip plate part 414e, so that the rear arrangement plate 420 and It is possible to easily ensure the longitudinal dimensions of the constituent members such as the synchronous operation unit 440.

As described above, in this embodiment, the shape of the arm member 414 is set with the aim of making it possible to avoid interference with other members, but there are other structural effects as well. For example, by bending the arm member 414 in stages, it is possible to prevent the load generated on the arm member 414 from concentrating locally (at one point) (stress concentration can be alleviated), and the arm member 414 can be bent in stages. 414 can be improved.

Furthermore, by configuring the minimum necessary gap to avoid interference with other members, it is possible to configure a large gap on the opposite side of the arm member 414 with respect to the other member that secures the gap. Therefore, using the gap, it is possible to run an electric wiring (an electric wiring different from the electric wiring DH1) or to arrange an additional presentation member (such as an illumination board).

Further, according to FIG. 26, in this embodiment, the electrical wiring DH1 arranged to reach the light emitting device LA1 from the main body plate part 401 side may be unintentionally pinched by the wing-like member 460 or rotated. It is configured such that it can be prevented from being bitten by the gear teeth of the gear 441 and the relative displacement member 442. This will be explained below. In addition, in this description, FIG. 25 will be referred to as appropriate.

The electrical wiring DH1 is first guided from the main body plate portion 401 side to the auxiliary arm member 444 through the long hole portion 406. At this time, the electric wiring DH1 is inserted into the through hole 448a of the end side plate 448 and passed inside the extension portion 444c.

Inside the extending portion 444c, the electric wiring DH1 is guided to the proximal end portion 444a while being prevented from falling off by the retaining portion 444c1. Thereafter, the electrical wiring DH1 is guided from the base end side part 444a to the back side of the accommodation plate part 425, and is an L-shaped area partitioned by the frame part protruding toward the back side of the accommodation plate part 425 and the closing plate 428. It passes through and reaches the through hole 427.

The frame portion protruding toward the back side of the housing plate portion 425 is provided with an omitted portion 425b that is omitted from protruding approximately halfway around the insertion hole 425a. The omitted portion 425b allows the electric wiring DH1 to be guided to the front side of the closing plate 428 at an angle of 180 degrees. This can reduce the possibility that the electrical wiring DH1 will bend near the insertion hole 425a when the auxiliary arm member 444 rotates.

The electric wiring DH1 is passed through the through hole 427 to the front side, passes through a cylindrical portion 433 formed at a position overlapping the through hole 427 in the front and back, and is guided to the front side of the lifting plate 430, and is guided to the front side of the lifting plate 430. While being temporarily fastened to the fastening portion 451 of 450 with a binding band or the like, it is connected to a connector provided on the illumination board of the light emitting display device LA1.

In this way, the electrical wiring DH1 is disposed inside the constituent members (auxiliary arm member 444 and rear placement board 420) for most of its route, so the electrical wiring does not follow the route like in a conventional pachinko machine. Compared to the case where most of the electrical wiring DH1 is exposed (exposed), the possibility that the electrical wiring DH1 collides with other movable members and receives a load can be reduced.

Further, in this embodiment, the guide path of the electric wiring DH1 and the relative displacement member 442 that slides are separated. That is, it is only the rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 (rotational displacement accompanied by sliding displacement of the rotating shaft) that can cause deformation such as bending or curving in the electric wiring DH1.

As a result, even if the vertical displacement speed of the elevating plate 430 and the displacement speed of the relative displacement member 442 are configured to be significantly different, the relationship between the deformation of the electrical wiring DH1 and the displacement speed of the relative displacement member 442 can be maintained. By disconnecting it, it is possible to avoid an increase in the load applied to the electric wiring DH1.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 22(a), FIG. 23, FIG. 24, and FIG. 25. The back arrangement plate 420 includes a plate-shaped connecting plate portion 421 that is connected to the cylindrical projecting portion 414f of the arm member 414 and fastened to the elevating plate 430, and a plate-shaped connecting plate portion 421 that is disposed on the right side of the connecting plate portion 421 and is connected to the elevating plate 430. An accommodating plate part 425 to which the front side member of the metal rail 405 is fastened and fixed, and an L-shaped plate which is fastened and fixed to the accommodating plate part 425 and partially closes the back side of the accommodating plate part 425. It is provided with a block plate 428 having a shape.

The connecting plate portion 421 includes an insertion elongated hole 422 formed in the main body plate portion in the form of a long elongated hole in the left-right direction so that the cylindrical projecting portion 414f can be inserted therethrough, and a front side and an elongated insertion hole below the insertion elongated hole 422. It includes a support box part 423 formed in a box shape with an open upper side.

Since the support box portion 423 is formed to be elongated downward with respect to the long insertion hole 422, the rigidity of the accommodation plate portion 425 can be reinforced using the support box portion 423. That is, the support box part 423 is arranged to face the support wall part 426 on the left and right, and when the support wall part 426 is largely bent and deformed to the left and comes into contact with the support box part 423, the deformation is corrected by the support box. This can be suppressed by the rigidity of the portion 423.

The accommodation plate part 425 includes a support wall part 426 provided on the left edge of the main body plate part in a linear plate shape extending in the vertical direction and protruding toward the front side, and a through hole bored on the front side of the closing plate 428. hole 427.

In this embodiment, the electrical wiring DH1 is inserted into the through hole 427. That is, the through hole 427 is formed with an inner diameter that allows the connector disposed at the end of the electrical wiring DH1 to be inserted therethrough.

The closing plate 428 is formed so that the front surface of the plate comes into contact with a frame portion projecting in a frame shape from the back side of the accommodation plate portion 425, and is configured to partition an area between the accommodation plate portion 425 and the closing plate 428. configured. In this embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 is arranged only on the inside of the frame of the accommodation plate 425 (on the front side of the closing plate 428). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring DH1 from entering the metal rail 405 side (left side of the frame).

An irregularly shaped hole 428a is formed through the closing plate 428 so that a temporary fixing part 425c, which is a U-shaped part projecting toward the back side at a position closer to the through hole 427 than the omitted part 425b, can be seen when viewed from the rear. Ru.

The irregularly shaped hole 428a is made up of a horizontally elongated portion whose horizontal width is slightly longer than the horizontal width of the temporary fastening portion 425c, and a vertically elongated portion that is provided to intersect with the horizontally elongated portion to ensure an area through which the binding band can be passed. It is formed.

The temporary fastening part 425c has a role as a fastening part of the binding band. By temporarily securing the electrical wiring DH1 with a binding band, the arrangement of the electrical wiring DH1 can be stabilized. In this case, by tightening the cable tie, the path of the electrical wiring DH1 guided from the auxiliary arm member 444 to the closing plate 428 can be brought closer to the closing plate 428, so that the insertion hole 425a of the accommodation plate 425 is centered. A gap can be provided between the edge portion of the semicircular plate portion and the electric wiring DH1 (see FIGS. 25 and 26). This can prevent the electrical wiring DH1 from rubbing against the edge portion of the housing plate portion 425, thereby extending the service life of the electrical wiring DH1.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the binding band that temporarily fastens the electrical wiring DH1 (see FIG. 26) guided between the omitted portions 425b can be exposed from the irregularly shaped hole 428a of the closing plate 428, so that the binding band can be exposed from the irregularly shaped hole 428a of the closing plate 428. Replacement or assembly can be performed without removing the closing plate 428.

As a result, the temporary fixing position of the electrical wiring DH1 is a position between the accommodation plate part 425 and the closing plate 428, which is a location where the position of the electrical wiring DH1 with respect to the constituent members of the first operating unit 400 is fixed (i.e., the position where the electrical wiring DH1 is fixed) The base end side part of the auxiliary arm member 444 is the first part that displaces the electric wiring DH1 with respect to the lifting plate 430 when the electric wiring DH1 travels along the path from the light emitting display device LA1 to which one end of DH1 is connected. The binding band can be replaced without removing the closure plate 428 while temporarily fixing the electrical wiring DH1 at the location (overlapping the route up to 444a). Therefore, it is possible to improve the service life of the electrical wiring DH1, and also to improve the maintainability of the binding band related to the electrical wiring DH1.

In this embodiment, the electrical wiring DH1 is made to run along the front side of the blocking plate 428 along the shape of the blocking plate 428, and since the blocking plate 428 has an L-shape in rear view, the electrical wiring DH1 is Curving along a first plane perpendicular to the front-back direction on the front side of the plate 428, and curving along a second plane (a plane perpendicular to the first plane) perpendicular to the left-right direction near the through hole 427. become. Thereby, the holding force for holding the electrical wiring DH1 on the closing plate 428 and the accommodation plate 425 can be improved, and the position of the electrical wiring DH1 can be stabilized.

The elevating plate 430 includes a fastening part 431 made up of a plurality of parts related to fastening and fixing the rear arrangement plate 420, a support part 432 made up of a plurality of parts related to supporting the synchronous operation unit 440, and an electric wiring DH1. A cylindrical part 433 formed to be inserted through, a fastening part 434 composed of a plurality of parts related to fastening and fixing of the support plate part 450, and a plurality of parts formed in the main body plate part to avoid interference between members. It includes a coping part 435 and a decoration part 436 in which a substantially bilaterally symmetrical pattern is applied to the front surface of the plate.

The fastening portion 431 includes at least a pair of gourd-shaped protrusions 431a that are arranged at the lower end of the elevating plate 430 and support vertical displacement of the relative displacement member 442 (slide rack). The gourd-shaped protrusion 431a is a part that supports the relative displacement member 442, but has a female screw shape formed from its tip, into which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the accommodation plate part 425 to the elevating plate 430 is screwed. Ru. That is, it is used both as a part related to fastening and fixing the rear arrangement plate 420 and a part related to supporting the synchronous operation unit 440.

The cylindrical part 433 extends to the back side through the gap between the constituent members of the synchronous operation unit 440, and its back end comes into contact with the front surface of the housing plate part 425, and in this abutting state, the tubular part 433 connects with the through hole 427. The inside of the cylindrical portion 433 is continuously connected. The electrical wiring DH1 is inserted back and forth through this continuously connected portion.

The coping portion 435 may include, for example, a portion of the main body plate portion in order to avoid interference with the connecting portion between the fixed transmission plate 490 and the relative displacement member 442 (in this embodiment, raised fastening portions arranged vertically). A notch 435a that is cut upward from the lower edge, and an arcuate gear part that is recessed in a wall that is formed in a wall shape to protect the upper part of the axis of the arcuate gear part 444b of the auxiliary arm member 444. An example is a recessed portion 435b formed to avoid interference with the recessed portion 435b.

The decorative portion 436 is arranged on the back side of the feather-like member 460, and is configured to cooperate with the feather-like member 460 to make a series of patterns visible as the feather-like member 460 is displaced. This will be explained later.

The synchronous operation unit 440 includes a pair of rotating gears 441 that mesh with each other, a relative displacement member 442 that meshes with one of the rotating gears 441 and is formed to be movable in the vertical direction, and a long hole in the relative displacement member 442. an auxiliary arm member 444 having a pair of elongated holes 443 drilled in the shape of a shape, a rotating gear tooth that meshes with the other rotating gear 441, and an end fastened and fixed to the rotating tip of the auxiliary arm member 444 from the back side. and a side plate 448.

The gourd-shaped protrusion 431a is inserted into the elongated hole 443. By arranging the longitudinal direction of the gourd shape and the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole 443 substantially parallel to each other, the posture of the relative displacement member 442 can be stabilized.

In addition, compared to the case where the gourd-shaped protrusion 431a is formed in an oval shape, the area in contact with the elongated hole 443 can be made smaller, so that the relationship between the gourd-shaped protrusion 431a and the relative displacement member 442 can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the frictional resistance that occurs between the two.

The auxiliary arm member 444 includes a ring-shaped proximal end portion 444a that is pivotally supported by the large-diameter protrusion 432a of the support portion 432, and a circular arc in which gear teeth are formed concentrically with the ring shape of the proximal end portion 444a. A gear portion 444b, an extending portion 444c extending in a ring-shaped radial direction from the base end side portion 444a, and a substantially semi-cylindrical shape disposed at the extending tip of the extending portion 444c. It is provided with a cylindrical member 444d whose open part on the inner side of the cylinder is continuously connected to the open part of the extension part 444c.

The proximal side portion 444a has an insertion hole 425a into which a fastening screw is inserted, which is inserted into the female threaded portion formed at the tip of the large diameter protrusion 432a while being inserted into the large diameter protrusion 432a. Movement toward the back side is restricted by the accommodation plate portion 425. That is, the base end side portion 444a is pivotally supported in such a manner that it faces the elevating plate 430 and the accommodation plate portion 425 from the front and back so that it cannot fall off.

The extension part 444c is formed in a box shape with an open back side, extends from one side in the short direction to the other side on the back side, and connects the short side of the electrical wiring DH1 with the other side. A retaining portion 444c1 formed with a gap slightly longer than the direction dimension (width dimension) is provided. This retaining portion 444c1 plays a role of preventing the electrical wiring DH1 that is passed between the other side of the extending portion 444c in the lateral direction and is disposed inside the extending portion 444c from falling off later. have.

Note that the form of the retaining portion 444c1 is not limited to this. For example, the gap between the extending portion 444c and the retaining portion 444c1 may be configured to be shorter than the short side dimension (width dimension) of the electric wiring DH1. In this case, when assembling (inserting) the electrical wiring DH1 into the gap between the extension part 444c and the retaining part 444c1, it is necessary to bend the retaining part 444c1 to widen the gap. The effect of preventing the electrical wiring DH1 from falling off can be improved.

As long as the electrical wiring DH1 is disposed inside the extension portion 444c, expansion and contraction of the electrical wiring DH1 when the first operating unit 400 moves up and down can be suppressed to a minimum. This will be described later with reference to No. 30.

The cylindrical member 444d is designed so that its outer diameter is slightly shorter than the transverse dimension of the elongated hole 406, and when inserted into the elongated hole 406, This enables sliding movement of the auxiliary arm member 444 along and rotational movement of the auxiliary arm member 444.

The end side plate 448 has a through hole 448a through which the electric wiring DH1 can be inserted, and the electric wiring DH1 inserted into the through hole 448a is inserted into the cylindrical portion 444d inserted into the elongated hole portion 406. It passes through the inside, passes inside the extension portion 444c, is guided to the back side of the proximal end portion 444a, and enters between the closing plate 428 and the accommodation plate portion 425. Then, it passes through the through hole 427 and the cylindrical portion 433 and is guided to the front side.

Because the electrical wiring DH1 is passed through the through hole 448a, the inner shape of the through hole 448a is larger than the outer diameter of the connector connected to the end of the electrical wiring DH1. In other words, the through hole 448a is formed with a size that allows the connector to be inserted therethrough.

The through hole 448a is formed in an irregular shape that includes not only the central portion of the end side plate 448 but also a region eccentric to the outside of the diameter, and in particular, is formed to have a large opening on the extended portion 444c side. Therefore, regardless of the attitude of the auxiliary arm member 444, the electrical wiring DH1 can be brought closer to the extension portion 444c, so that as the attitude of the auxiliary arm member 444 changes, the arrangement of the electrical wiring DH1 with respect to the auxiliary arm member 444 becomes larger. You can avoid changing (outraging).

In addition, the through hole 448a extends counterclockwise in rear view from the extending portion 444c side at the outer diameter side of the end side plate 448. Due to this extension, the opening range of the through hole 448a when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state can be expanded to the right, so that the horizontal displacement width required for the electric wiring DH1 can be suppressed.

In this case, even in the configuration of this embodiment in which the end side plate 448 is displaced left and right when the elevating plate 430 is moved up and down, the direction of the through hole 448a is changed to prevent the left and right displacement of the end side plate 448. It can be used to provide relief. Therefore, since the displacement width required for the electric wiring DH1 can be made shorter than the displacement width of the end side plate 448, the extra length of the wiring set in consideration of the displacement of the electric wiring DH1 can be shortened. At the same time, the load applied from the end side plate 448 to the electrical wiring DH1 can be reduced.

A fixed transmission plate 490 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the relative displacement member 442. That is, in the same way that the elevating plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 undergo relative displacement, the support plate portion 450 fastened and fixed to the elevating plate 430 and the fixed transmission plate 490 fastened and fixed to the relative displacement member 442 undergo relative displacement. do.

The support plate part 450 is a plate-shaped member to which the light-emitting display device LA1, which is formed in a disc shape and has a light-emitting board disposed on the back side, is fastened and fixed to the front side, and is a plate-like member that is fastened to the front side by fastening screws that are inserted into the elevating plate 430. a plurality of fastening portions 451 into which are screwed, and a pair of left and right fastening shaft support portions 452 into which fastening screws that are inserted into the cylindrical portion 461 of the wing-like member 460 and are inserted into the elevating plate 430 are screwed. , a pair of left and right through holes 453 are formed below the fastening shaft support part 452, and a support part 454 that hooks and supports the upper protrusion LA1b of the light emitting production device LA1.

The light emitting display device LA1 includes a pair of fastening parts LA1a on the lower part into which fastening screws inserted into the support plate part 450 are screwed, and a pair of protrusions on the upper part that are protrudingly provided so as to be insertable into the support part 454. It is equipped with LA1b. In this way, by supporting the lower part of the light emitting display device LA1 by fastening and fixing, and supporting the upper part by engaging, it is possible to secure sufficient support strength and to prevent the shadow of the fastening screws from appearing on the upper rear side of the illumination board. This can be avoided.

A three-dimensional or two-dimensional decorative pattern is provided on the front side of the light emitting production device LA1 so as to be visible to the player. This decorative pattern is configured so that it can be visually recognized as an integral decoration with the feather-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 in a situation where it is not hidden by the feather-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 (FIG. 34 reference).

In this embodiment, the shape of the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 is shaped like a shellfish (for example, a scallop shell), and the shape of the light-emitting device LA1 arranged between them is shaped like a pearl. It is formed from a visually recognizable approximately circular shape when viewed from the front. That is, by making the light-emitting production member LA1, the wing-like member 460, and the auxiliary member 470 visible as one, it is possible to construct an appearance that evokes the series of concepts of "a pearl placed inside an open shell". .

The wing-like member 460 is composed of a plurality of members supported by the fastening shaft support portion 452, and includes a cylindrical portion 461 that is rotatably supported by the fastening shaft support portion 452, and a cylindrical portion 461 that is rotatably supported by the fastening shaft support portion 452. An arc-shaped gear 462 formed in an arc shape and meshed with each other, an extension part 463 extending in a plate shape from the cylindrical part 461 to the opposite side of the arc-shaped gear 462, and the extension part 463 of the extension part 463. Formed portions 464L and 464R formed on the extending end side and configured to be able to reflect light intensely by applying plating to the front surface of the plate, and an arcuate gear along an arc smaller in diameter than the arcuate gear 462. A downstream gear 465 formed on the front side of the arc gear 462, a flange portion 466 formed in a flange shape covering the back side of the arcuate gear 462, and an extension end portion where the flange portion 466 extends in the outer direction. A cylindrical protruding portion 467 is provided that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the back side.

The arcuate gear 462 is formed as a gear tooth formed into an arc with the same diameter that meshes with the pair of cylindrical portions 461 at an intermediate position. That is, the rotation angles of the plurality of (left and right) wing-like members 460 rotated by the meshing of the arcuate gears 462 are the same (symmetrical).

The extending portion 463 includes a recessed portion 463a that is recessed only on the right side. The recessed portion 463a is a shaped portion that facilitates avoiding interference with the electrical wiring that passes through the cylindrical portion 433 and is guided to the front side of the elevating plate 430, and the details will be described later.

The forming portions 464L and 464R are combined when the first operation unit 400 is extended and configured as a series of approximately semicircular (approximately semielliptical) decorative bodies (see FIG. 17). When the unit 400 is in the retracted state, it is arranged to be left and right, and its size is asymmetrical (see FIG. 16).

Specifically, while the lower side is formed symmetrically, in the shape of the upper side that comes into contact when combined, the left forming part 464L is formed to protrude in the rotational direction compared to the right forming part 464R. By doing so, it is formed in a large size. In other words, when the first operating unit 400 is in the extended state, the contact surfaces S1 of the forming portions 464L and 464R are arranged on the right side (see FIG. 17).

The shapes of the upper end portions of the wing-like members 464L and 464R, which are arranged opposite to each other, differ depending on the distance from the cylindrical portion 461. In other words, the side closer to the cylindrical portion 461 (the side closer to the rotation axis, the inner diameter side) of the wing-like members 464L, 464R is arranged so that when the wing-like members 464L, 464R come closest to each other, they can overlap each other in a front view. It has a shape in which an interference portion 464a is disposed with a positional shift in the direction of the rotation axis.

In this embodiment, the side closer to the cylindrical portion 461 corresponds to a portion where a decorative pattern that is visually recognized as a series of patterns is formed when the wing-like members 464L and 464R are brought closest to each other. The above-mentioned interference portion 464a can prevent cuts from occurring in the contact surfaces S1 of the wing-like members 464L, 464R when the wing-like members 464L, 464R come closest to each other, so that the decorative pattern can be seen by the player. It can be visually recognized without any discomfort.

On the other hand, on the side far from the cylindrical part 461 (the side far from the rotation axis, the outer diameter side), the rotation axis of the wing-like members 464L, 464R is set so that the rotation of the wing-like members 464L, 464R can be stopped by contact. The shape is such that the contact surfaces are arranged at positions that match in direction.

By providing the part where the load occurs when the wing-shaped members 464L, 464R stop due to contact with each other at the outermost diameter part where the arm length in calculating the moment of force is the longest, the wing-shaped members 464L, 464R can be reduced due to contact. The load on the system can be minimized.

In this way, by changing the shape of the wing-like members 464L, 464R depending on the distance from the cylindrical part 461, the series of decorative patterns formed when the wing-like members 464L, 464R come closest to each other can be made to look strange to the player. In addition, it is possible to minimize the load that may be generated on the wing-like members 464L, 464R when the wing-like members 464L, 464R come closest to each other.

The flange portion 466 serves both to suppress displacement of the arcuate gear 462 in the front-rear direction and to partition the arcuate gear 462 and the fixed transmission plate 490. This makes it possible to optimize the meshing state of the arcuate gear 462 and to prevent the arcuate gear 462 from coming into contact with and getting caught on the fixed transmission plate 490 and causing excessive resistance.

The cylindrical projecting portion 467 is inserted into the elongated hole 491 of the fixed transmission plate 490, and a ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction is inserted into the projecting tip. In addition, a female thread is formed on the protruding tip, and a fastening screw is inserted through the collar C1 and has a cap larger than the inner diameter of the collar C1. Thereby, the fixed transmission plate 490 is irremovably connected to the cylindrical projecting portion 467.

The auxiliary member 470 is composed of a pair of left and right plate-like members that are rotatably supported, and includes a supported part 471 formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom, and a supported part 471 that is inserted through a through hole 453 and is not rotatable. A gear portion 473 having gear teeth that are non-rotatably fitted to the end of the insertion metal rod 472 and formed on an arc centered on the insertion metal rod 472. Equipped with.

A female thread is formed in the front side of the insertion metal rod 472 in the radial direction, and a through hole is provided at the corresponding position of the supported portion 471 into which the threaded part of the fastening screw that is screwed into the female thread can be inserted. is formed. After the insertion metal rod 472 is inserted into the supported part 471, a fastening screw is screwed into the female screw through the through hole, thereby preventing the insertion metal rod 472 from falling off from the supported part 471.

The gear portion 473 is rotatably supported around the through hole 453 as the insertion metal rod 472 is supported by the through hole 453 . Since the gear portion 473 meshes with the downstream gear 465 (see FIG. 22(b)), it rotates in synchronization with the rotation angle of the wing-like member 460.

The fixed transmission plate 490 has a plate-like part fastened and fixed to the front side of the relative displacement member 442, a long hole part 491 bored as a curved long hole in the plate-like part, and a long hole part 491 formed in the lower end of the plate-like part. It includes a metal rod 492 that is a non-rotatably supported metal rod-shaped member and projects toward the front side, and a decorative portion 493 that is non-rotatably fixed to the projecting tip of the metal rod 492.

The elongated hole portion 491 includes a vertical portion 491a formed along the vertical direction, and a curved portion 491b bent laterally than the vertical portion 491a. By dividing the elongated hole portion 491 in this manner, the vertical displacement of the fixed transmission plate 490 and the accompanying rotational displacement of the wing-like member 460 are not completely synchronized, but a deviation is provided in the synchronization mode. However, the details will be described later.

The manner in which the metal rod 492 and the decorative portion 493 are connected and fixed is similar to the manner in which the insertion metal rod 472 and the supported portion 471 are connected. Thereby, the metal rod 492 can be prevented from falling off the decorative portion 493.

Next, the operation mode of the first operation unit 400 will be explained. 27, 28, 29, and 30 are rear views of the first operating unit 400. 27 to 30 illustrate the displacement of each component as the drive motor MT1 rotates. In FIG. 27, the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state, and in FIG. 28, the wall schematic line UL ( In FIG. 29, the first intermediate state of the first operating unit 400 is shown in which the elevating plate 430 has descended from the retracted state by a distance slightly longer than the vertical shift dimension (see FIG. 16), where the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary arm member 444 is A second intermediate state of the facing first operating unit 400 is illustrated in FIG. 30, and an extended state of the first operating unit 400, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state, the attitude of the end gear 413 is determined by the detected portion 413d entering the detection gap of the detection sensor SC1. In this embodiment, the state detected by the detection sensor SC1 is only the retracted state, and the other states (first intermediate state, second intermediate state, extended state) are only a preset displacement amount from the retracted state. This is the state after the displacement, and is not detected by the detection sensor SC1.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state, a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413 and the cylindrical projecting portion 413c and a longitudinal direction of the elongated hole portion 414d of the arm member 414 (arm member radial direction of rotation of 414) are orthogonal to each other. As a result, the load applied from the arm member 414 to the end gear 413 is generated along the linear direction passing through the rotation axis of the end gear 413, so even when the power of the drive motor MT1 is cut off, the arm member 414 can maintain this posture (use of dead center).

The tip plate portion 414e of the arm member 414 is disposed outside an arc MXS that circumscribes the disc portion of the end gear 413 with the rotation axis of the arm member 414 as the center. Thereby, it is possible to avoid interference between the tip plate portion 414e and the end gear 413 during the rotational displacement of the arm member 414.

The auxiliary arm member 444 functions to prevent the right side of the elevating plate 430 from descending. Although the auxiliary arm member 444 is supported so as to be able to slide in the elongated hole 406, it is not resistive, and due to the contact friction generated between the cylindrical portion 444d (see FIG. 25) and the elongated hole 406. Dynamic resistance occurs. That is, the right side of the elevating section 430 can be supported by the auxiliary arm member 444 due to the effect of this motion resistance.

As shown in FIG. 28, the rotational displacement of the arm member 414 causes the lifting plate 430 to move downward, and the relative displacement member 442 moves up and down as the rotating gear 441 meshes with the auxiliary arm member 444 that is displaced accordingly. It is displaced downward with an amount of displacement exceeding the amount of displacement of the plate 430.

Although it has a complicated shape, the transmission of the driving force from the auxiliary arm member 444 to the relative displacement member 442 is based on the meshing of gears, so the amount of displacement of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 and the amount of displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 There is a one-to-one correspondence with the rotation angle of .

As shown in FIG. 28, while the arm member 414, the auxiliary arm member 444, the elevating plate 430, and the relative displacement member 442 are displaced as described above, the wing-like member 460 maintains the same posture as in the retracted state. maintain.

That is, according to the present embodiment, there is a time lag between the timing at which the elevating plate 430 starts descending from the retracted state of the first operating unit 400 and the timing at which the wing-like member 460 starts rotating. The cause of this time lag will be described later.

In this embodiment, the elevating plate 430 is lowered by the vertical dimension of the wall schematic line UL (see FIG. 16) before the wing-like member 460 starts rotating. It is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of a problem in which the rear case 310 collides with the upper wall portion during displacement.

In other words, the displacement mode in which the wing-like member 460 is rotationally displaced after descending by the vertical dimension of the wall schematic line UL is such that the upper wall portion of the back case 310 is formed so that there is no deviation in height between the left and right sides. This is the same condition as the displacement mode (conventional displacement mode) in which the wing-like member 460 is rotated at the same time as the elevating plate 430 is lowered. Therefore, the operation of the first operation unit 400 of this embodiment can be realized by utilizing the operating conditions of the conventional displacement mode (parameters such as gear ratio and displacement amount). Thereby, the cost required for design can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 27, the arm member 414, which was hidden on the back side of the elevating plate 430 in the retracted state, extends above the elevating plate 430 as the elevating plate 430 descends, as shown in FIG. Displaced like this.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the wing-like member 460 is configured to be movable with respect to the elevating plate 430 so as to hide the arm member 414 (see FIG. 29). That is, the wing-shaped member 460 not only serves as a presentation means for enlivening the game by making the decorative pattern formed on the surface side visible to the player, but also serves as an effect that the arm member 414 for power transmission is used as the lift plate 430. It also functions as a means of collective concealment.

In particular, in this embodiment, the formed portion 464L of the wing-like member 460 on the side where the arm member 414 having the function of transmitting driving force is disposed is larger than the formed portion 464R of the wing-like member 460 on the opposite side. Since the arm member 414 has a large shape, the arm member 414 can be easily hidden from the player's view.

Note that, similarly to this, the forming portion 464R is configured to hide the auxiliary arm member 444 (see FIG. 30). In this embodiment, due to its configuration, in the second intermediate state, the arm member 414 protrudes above the elevating plate 430, while the auxiliary arm member 444 is still hidden behind the elevating plate 430. That is, after the arm member 414 extends above the elevating plate 430, the auxiliary arm member 444 extends above the elevating plate 430 (see FIG. 30).

Therefore, even when using the forming part 464R, which has a smaller shape than the forming part 464L (the amount of upward protrusion of the elevating plate 430 at the same time is smaller than the forming part 464L), there is no problem in using the auxiliary arm member. 444 can be hidden from the player's view.

As shown in FIG. 29, at a position slightly past the state where the cylindrical projecting portion 414f is farthest to the left from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, the auxiliary arm member 444 assumes a posture with its longitudinal direction facing the left-right direction. Become. When the cylindrical projecting portion 414f is farthest to the left from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, the rightward load applied from the arm member 414 to the elevating plate 430 tends to be large; When the auxiliary arm member 444 applies a leftward load to the lifting plate 430, the displacement resistance of the lifting plate 430 becomes large.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is tilted slightly past the state where the cylindrical protruding portion 414f is farthest to the left from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, and the cylindrical portion 444d (see FIG. 25) at the right end of the elongated hole portion 406 so that a leftward load can be applied to the elevating plate 430 via the auxiliary arm member 444, thereby reducing the displacement resistance of the elevating plate 430. While suppressing this, it is possible to suppress displacement of the elevating plate 430 in the left-right direction due to the load applied to the elevating plate 430 in the left-right direction.

Note that in the state shown in FIG. 29, the cylindrical projecting portion 413c of the end gear 413 is arranged outside the arc MXS, but since the tip plate portion 414e has already gone too far below the cylindrical projecting portion 413c, Interference between the tip plate portion 414e and the end gear 413 can be avoided.

In other words, the arc MXS is only defined as a reference position, and the design of the end gear 413 and arm member 414 depends on whether or not interference will occur when the end gear 413 and arm member 414 are actually interlocked. This is done by dynamically considering whether

As shown in FIG. 30, in the extended state of the first operating unit 400, the end gear 413 rotates with the end point being a position where the stopped portion 413b of the end gear 413 contacts the stopper portion 403c of the main body plate portion 401. Note that the control is such that the drive motor MT1 is driven so that the end gear 413 stops at a position slightly before the position where the stopped portion 413b contacts the stopper portion 403c. Thereby, it is possible to structurally prevent the terminal gear 413 from over-rotating while avoiding early damage to the stopped portion 413b and the stopper portion 403c.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the extended state of the first operating unit 400, a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413 and the cylindrical projecting portion 413c and the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole 414d of the arm member 414 (arm (radial direction of rotation of member 414) are orthogonal to each other. As a result, the load applied from the arm member 414 to the end gear 413 is generated along the linear direction passing through the rotation axis of the end gear 413, so even when the power of the drive motor MT1 is cut off, the arm member 414 can maintain this posture (use of dead center).

Note that the posture is maintained in both directions along the rotation direction of the arm member 414. That is, it is possible to prevent not only displacement in the direction of gravity but also upward displacement of the first operating unit 400 from the extended state to the retracted state.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the lifting plate 430 connected to the arm member 414 from rebounding and moving upward after reaching the extended state. It is possible to prevent the members (synchronous operation unit 440, wing-like member 460, auxiliary member 470, etc.) from being displaced. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the contact state of the wing-like member 460.

The auxiliary arm member 444 functions to prevent the right side of the elevating plate 430 from rising. Although the auxiliary arm member 444 is supported so as to be able to slide in the elongated hole 406, it is not resistive, and due to the contact friction generated between the cylindrical portion 444d (see FIG. 25) and the elongated hole 406. Dynamic resistance occurs. That is, the right side of the elevating section 430 can be supported by the auxiliary arm member 444 due to the effect of this motion resistance.

In addition, the auxiliary arm member 444 suspends and supports the elevating plate 430. As a result, although the driving force from the drive motor MT1 and the biasing force from the coil spring SP1 are generated only on one side (the left side), it is possible to prevent the posture of the elevating plate 430 from becoming unstable on the left and right sides of the metal rail 405. It can be avoided.

Here, as described above, as long as the electrical wiring DH1 is disposed inside the extension portion 444c, the expansion and contraction of the electrical wiring DH1 due to the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 of the first operating unit 400 can be suppressed to a minimum. Explain what you can do.

When the route of the electric wiring DH1 is traced from the light emitting production device LA1 side, the route is fixed to the elevating plate 430 until it reaches the auxiliary arm member 444, and the route becomes variable only at the auxiliary arm member 444. On the other hand, since the shape of the extension portion 444c in which the electric wiring DH1 is disposed is fixed even when the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the electric wiring DH1 will undergo expansion/contraction displacement. can.

At the position where the electrical wiring DH1 exits from the through hole 448a to the rear side, a horizontal displacement occurs in the electric wiring DH1 due to a horizontal displacement of the end side plate 448. In this way, the displacement that may cause expansion and contraction of the electrical wiring DH1 is limited to that caused by the displacement of the end side plate 448, so in this embodiment, the horizontal displacement of the end side plate 448 is measured and the necessary amount is After calculating the extra length of the electrical wiring DH1 and adding the extra length to the electrical wiring DH1 in the route from the fixed position of the electrical wiring DH1 to the end side plate 448 (with the electrical wiring DH1 loosened), is fixed to the main body plate portion 401.

In other words, the location where the electrical wiring DH1 may expand or contract due to the vertical displacement of the lifting plate 430 can be limited to the vicinity of the end side plate 448. The amount of vertical displacement can be suppressed to less than half.

Furthermore, as described above, the shape of the through hole 448a of the end side plate 448 allows the displacement width of the electrical wiring DH1 to be reduced compared to the displacement width of the end side plate 448, so that the excess electrical wiring DH1 can be reduced. The length can be shortened.

31, 32, 33, and 34 are front views of the first operating unit 400. 31 to 34 illustrate how each component is displaced as the drive motor MT1 rotates. In FIG. 31, the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state, and in FIG. 32, the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state. 33 shows the second intermediate state of the first operating unit 400, and FIG. 34 shows the extended state of the first operating unit 400.

As shown in FIG. 31, the lower edge of the wing-like member 460 is formed symmetrically. Therefore, when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state, the first operating unit 400 that enters the field of view where the third symbol display device 81 is viewed can be visually recognized by the player as a symmetrical movable member.

As shown in FIG. 32, when the elevating plate 430 is slightly displaced downward, the posture of the wing-like member 460 is maintained. Therefore, even in the state shown in FIG. 32, the first operating unit 400 that enters the visual field of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player as a symmetrical movable member.

In the first intermediate state shown in FIG. 32, compared to the retracted state shown in FIG. The decorative portion 493 is displaced downward by an amount of displacement that exceeds the amount of downward displacement.

Therefore, when changing the first operating unit 400 from the retracted state to the first intermediate state, the player who visually recognizes the elevating plate 430 not only sees that the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced, but also that the elevating plate Since the decoration part 493, which is displaced by an amount of vertical displacement different from the amount of vertical displacement of 430, can be visually recognized as being displaced vertically, the presentation effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the second intermediate state, compared to the first intermediate state, the difference between the displacement amount of the elevating plate 430 and the displacement amount of the decorative part 493 increases, and in addition, 470 changes its posture.

FIG. 34 shows a state in which the wing-like members 460 abut each other at opposing positions. The wing-like member 460 is visually recognized as if it were a single, approximately semicircular (semi-elliptical) decorative member by combining a pair of left and right members. It is formed at a position shifted to the right from the horizontal center position where the rail 405 is arranged.

In this embodiment, the upper edge side of the forming part 464L is configured in advance to be extra on the forming part 464R side than the upper edge side of the forming part 464R, so that the abutment surface S1 in the extended state is shifted from the left and right center. It is composed of

Since the upper edges of the forming portions 464L and 464R are disposed in a position where they are shielded by the base plate 60 of the game board 13 when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state (see FIG. 2), the upper edges of the forming portions 464L and 464R are It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the 464R is configured in a laterally asymmetrical shape. Thereby, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the asymmetrical shapes of the forming portions 464L and 464R.

Furthermore, since the abutment surface S1 is deviated from the metal rail 405 in front view, even if the wing-like member 460 rebounds due to the impact at the time of contact and a gap is created again, the rail member can be removed from the gap. 405 can be avoided from being visually recognized, and only the decorative shape formed on the front surface of the main body plate portion 401 can be visually recognized.

As a result, compared to the case where the inorganic metal rail 405 (in other words, a member that is essential for realizing the displacement of the movable accessory and is not intended for decoration) is visible from the gap, , it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation effect.

Further, the contact surface S1 is disposed at a position offset from the center position between the left and right sides, which is generally assumed by a player to be a break between a pair of movable members that come into contact with each other on the left and right sides. In other words, the player does not create a gap at the location where the player expects a gap to occur (left and right center position), but instead places the contact surface S1 at a position shifted from that location where there is a possibility of a gap occurring. By arranging them, even if a gap occurs, the gap can be made less noticeable.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 34, the visibility of the decorative portion 436 changes depending on the arrangement of the wing-like members 460. That is, from the retracted state (see FIG. 31) to the second intermediate state (see FIG. 33) of the first operating unit 400, the outer shape of the decorative portion 436 is shielded by the wing-like member 460, and the player cannot see the entire appearance. The structure is difficult to understand.

On the other hand, in the extended state of the first operating unit 400 (see FIG. 34), the outer shape of the decorative portion 436 disposed below the wing-like member 460 is visible; It is formed so that it is continuous with the outer shape of the main body when viewed from the front.

That is, a series of decorative shapes (in this embodiment, a "shell" shape) that are visible when the pair of wing-like members 460 extend from the first operating unit 400 are further extended downward from the lower edge. A decorative portion 436 is formed. Therefore, a series of decorative shapes larger than the series of decorative shapes (see FIG. 38) formed by combining the pair of wing-like members 460 can be constructed, and can be visually recognized by the player.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the process of displacement of the wing-like member 460 to form a series of decorative shapes is not the same. That is, the first displacement process includes a process in which the pair of wing-like members 460, which constitute a series of decorative shapes, are displaced in a manner close to each other and combined to form a series of decorative shapes.

On the other hand, as part of the second displacement process, the wing-like member 460 and the decorative part 436, which are one component of a series of decorative shapes, overlap in the front view when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state, and the overhanging As the condition approaches, the feather-like member 460 is displaced in a direction in which the overlapping margin becomes smaller (in a direction in which the feather-like member 460 moves away from the decorative portion 436), thereby configuring a series of decorative shapes.

Through these different processes, while the displacement of the wing-like member 460 is a simple displacement mode of proximity displacement, the shapes can be connected at both end edges along the displacement direction of the wing-like member 460, and a series of decorative shapes can be formed. Can be configured. Therefore, while suppressing the shape of the wing-like members 460 that are individually displaced, the series of decorative shapes that are combined in the extended state of the first operating unit 400 is made large compared to the size thereof. can do.

35, 36, 37, and 38 are rear views of the support plate portion 450, the wing-like member 460, the auxiliary member 470, and the fixed transmission plate 490. 35 to 38 illustrate how each component is displaced as the drive motor MT1 rotates. In FIG. 35, the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state, and in FIG. 36, the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state. In FIG. 37, the second intermediate state of the first operating unit 400 is illustrated, and in FIG. 38, the extended state of the first operating unit 400 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 35, a plurality of through holes LA1c are formed on the back side of the light emitting display device LA1 and are distributed along an arc shape, and light leaks to the back side through the through holes LA1c. It is configured as follows. In the extended state of the first operating unit 400, the wing-like member 460 is arranged so as to cover the back side of the through-hole LA1c, so that the light leaking from the through-hole LA1c is transmitted to the formation portions 464L, 464R of the wing-like member 460. can be reflected to the front.

The rotational displacement of the wing-like member 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38. Since the rotational displacement of the wing-like member 460 is caused by the relationship between the cylindrical projecting portion 467 and the elongated hole portion 491 of the fixed transmission plate 490, this portion will be explained in particular detail.

From the retracted state illustrated in FIG. 35 to the first intermediate state illustrated in FIG. 36, the direction in which the vertical portion 491a of the elongated hole portion 491 through which the cylindrical projecting portion 467 is inserted is opened (vertical direction) Since this and the displacement direction of the fixed transmission plate 490 are the same, rotational displacement of the wing-like member 460 due to the load applied to the cylindrical projecting portion 467 can be prevented.

Note that in this embodiment, a separate member for biasing the wing-like member 460 toward the retracted state is not prepared, but due to the shapes of the forming portions 464L and 464R, the center of gravity is located laterally outward from the rotation axis. It is maintained in a retracted position by its own weight.

In the second intermediate state shown in FIG. 37, the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 enters the curve changing portion 491b, thereby causing a load in the left-right direction to the cylindrical overhanging portion 467, and the wing-like member 460 starts rotationally displacing. Explaining from the perspective of the driving force transmission path, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted from the fixed transmission plate 490 to the left wing-like member 460 via the cylindrical projection 467, and then to the right wing-like member 460. communicated. That is, compared to the wing-like member 460 on the right side, the wing-like member 460 on the left side is located on the upstream side in the driving force transmission path.

In this embodiment, the forming portion 464L of the left wing-like member 460, which is located on the upstream side in the driving force transmission path, is formed slightly larger (heavier) than the forming portion 464R. Therefore, the movable members can be arranged so that they become lighter in order toward the downstream side of the driving force transmission path. Thereby, it is possible to achieve good transmission of the driving force, and it is also possible to prevent each component from rebounding and displacing after being displaced to the terminal position.

One of the reasons why the cylindrical portion 433 serving as a guide path for the electric wiring DH1 is arranged on the forming portion 464R side is the difference in weight between the forming portions 464L and 464R. To be more specific, the positions of the formed parts 464L and 464R after displacement are determined by the meshing of the arcuate gear 462 and the abutment of the opposing surfaces of the formed parts 464L and 464R. Due to errors, deformation over time of the long hole portion 491 that defines the rotation angle of the wing-like member 460, etc., the positions of the forming portions 464L and 464R after displacement may change slightly.

In this case, the change in position after displacement largely depends on the weight balance of the forming portions 464L and 464R. That is, there is a high possibility that the forming part 464L is pushed down so that the forming part 464L rides on the forming part 464R.

In consideration of this, in this embodiment, the extending portion 463 of the wing-like member 460 is provided below the cylindrical portion 433 through which the electric wiring DH1 passes. In addition, a recessed portion 463a is provided so that the cylindrical portion 433 and the extended portion 463 overlap less. Thereby, even if the formation part 464L is unintentionally pushed down, the possibility of interference between the electrical wiring DH1 and the formation part 464L can be reduced.

Further, since the side where the forming portion 464L is likely to be displaced can be assumed, it is possible to design the position where the cylindrical portion 433 and the recessed portion 463 partially interfere with each other when viewed from the rear (see FIG. 38). Thereby, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In this embodiment, the formation range of the recessed portion 463a is set to a range in which the lower side of the cylindrical portion 433 can be particularly opened. This makes it possible to minimize the difference in shape between the pair of left and right extending portions 463 while avoiding contact between the electrical wiring DH1, which tends to sag due to its own weight inside the cylindrical portion 433, and the extending portion 463.

That is, it is possible to prevent the recessed portion 463 from coming too close to the forming portion 464 side, and thereby, when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state or the first intermediate state, the recessed portion 463a is moved toward the back side of the auxiliary member 470. The recessed portion 463a can be partially hidden by the auxiliary member 470 (see FIG. 31).

Thereby, the recessed portion 463a can be partially hidden by the auxiliary member 470 in any state of the first operating unit 400 from the retracted state to the extended state. Therefore, the lower edges of the extending portions 463 and the forming portions 464L, 464R of the pair of left and right wing-like members 460 can be easily seen symmetrically, so that the symmetrically displaced members are configured asymmetrically. It is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Transmission of the driving force from the fixed transmission plate 490 to the cylindrical extension part 467 occurs when the fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced downward away from the cylindrical part 461 of the wing-like member 460. As the driving force is transmitted, the cylindrical projecting portion 467 is rotated around the cylindrical portion 461 by the fixed transmission plate 490, but assuming that the fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced at a constant speed, the cylindrical projecting portion 467 is It is configured so that there is no displacement at constant velocity (configured so that the angular velocity changes).

Specifically, since the initial position of the cylindrical projecting portion 467 is set near the left and right sides of the cylindrical portion 461 (see FIG. 35), it is assumed that the curved portion 491b is a long hole extending in the horizontal direction (left-right direction). In this case, as the cylindrical protrusion 467 is displaced downward, the angle of rotational displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 467 with respect to the displacement width in the vertical direction becomes larger. Therefore, when the fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced at a constant velocity, the rotational displacement speed (angular velocity) of the cylindrical projecting portion 467 gradually increases.

Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the pair of wing-like members 460 decelerates during displacement, it is possible to create an impressive effect in which the pair of wing-like members 460 are displaced at high speed and combined.

On the other hand, a gradual increase in the angular velocity of the cylindrical protruding portion 467 will lead to an increase in the speed of the pair of feather-like members 460 just before the pair of feather-like members 460 are brought into close proximity and combined, but if the speed increases too much, the combination will be delayed. There is a possibility that the pair of wing-like members 460 will bounce back significantly due to the actual impact, and there is a possibility that the production effect of this embodiment, in which the pair of wing-like members 460 are combined to make a series of decorative patterns visible, may be degraded.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curve changing portion 491b is directed toward the rotation axis side of the wing-like member 460 (left-hand wing-like member 460) including the cylindrical projecting portion 467 in the horizontal direction (left-right direction). It is formed as a long hole extending in an upwardly inclined direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the speed of rotational displacement (angular velocity) of the cylindrical projecting portion 467.

The degree of suppression is the amount of upward displacement (hereinafter also referred to as "upward correction amount") of the curve change portion 491b with respect to the long hole parallel to the horizontal direction (left-right direction) at the location where the cylindrical overhang portion 467 is arranged. It corresponds to

As in the present embodiment, when the curve change portion 491b is configured as a long hole extending in a direction that is inclined upward toward the rotating shaft side, the more the cylindrical projecting portion 467 is displaced downward (the pair of wing-like members 460 (The closer they get to the state of merging), the larger the above-mentioned upward correction amount becomes. Therefore, the extent (decrease width) of suppressing the increase in the rotational displacement speed (angular velocity) of the cylindrical overhang 467 can be gradually increased as the arrangement of the cylindrical overhang 467 changes downward.

Therefore, compared to a configuration exemplified by a brake structure that maintains the same frictional state, it is possible to moderately suppress an increase in speed. Note that the actual displacement speed of the wing-like member 460 will be described later.

39(a) to 39(c) are schematic diagrams schematically illustrating the displacement relationship of the first operating unit 400. FIG. 39(a) to 39(c), the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is shown on the horizontal axis, and in FIG. 39(a), the downward displacement amount of the elevating plate 430 is shown on the vertical axis. In b), the amount of rotation (change in angle) of the auxiliary arm member 444 is shown on the vertical axis, and in FIG. 39(c), the amount of rotation (change in angle) of the wing-like member 460 is shown on the vertical axis.

Here, assume that the drive motor MT1 is rotated at a constant speed. In this case, while the terminal gear 413 rotates at a constant speed, the rotational movement of the arm member 414 does not rotate at a constant speed, and the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 also does not change at a constant speed.

In other words, a discrepancy occurs between the control mode of the drive motor MT1 (for example, constant speed rotation) and the control mode of the lifting plate 430 (non-uniform displacement), and the movement of the lifting plate 430 in the driving force transmission path is caused. The displacement pattern on the downstream side is affected by this shift. Therefore, even if the drive motor MT1 was rotated at a constant speed, it was difficult to uniformly displace the constituent members disposed on the downstream side of the transmission path.

For example, even if a fixed rack gear-shaped portion is formed on the main body plate portion 401 and the rack gear-shaped portion is configured to mesh with the rotating gear 441 of the synchronous operation unit 440, the vertical displacement of the relative displacement member 442 is Since it depends on the manner in which the elevating plate 430 is moved up and down, it is not a constant displacement.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the vertical displacement of the relative displacement member 442 is not defined by a fixed rack gear-like part, but the rotational displacement of the arm member 414 is the vertical displacement (vertical displacement) of the vertical displacement member 430. A configuration is adopted in which the rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 is converted into the vertical displacement (vertical displacement) of the relative displacement member 442 in the same way as the rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 is converted into the vertical displacement.

That is, a predetermined rule (for example, according to the horizontal axis in FIG. The conversion formula for converting a numerical value into a numerical value on the vertical axis) is applied in reverse to convert the vertical displacement of the cylindrical portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 due to the vertical displacement of the vertical axis to the rotational displacement of the rotary gear 441. By doing so, it is possible to partially offset the deviation in the displacement manner and approximate the displacement manner of the terminal gear 413 and the rotation gear 441.

In other words, the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 begins to deviate from the displacement mode of the end gear 413 when the rotation angle of the end gear 413 is around 90 degrees or 140 degrees (see FIG. 39(a)). The rotation angle of the auxiliary arm member 444 is suppressed from deviation from the displacement mode of the terminal gear 413 when the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 ranges from 30 degrees to around 170 degrees (see FIG. 39(b)).

Thereby, for example, as the drive motor MT1 and the terminal gear 413 are rotated at a constant speed, most of the auxiliary arm member 444 can be rotated at a constant speed (see FIG. 39(b)). can be vertically displaced with respect to the elevating plate 430 at approximately constant speed.

This makes it easier to link the speed control of the drive motor MT1 with the displacement mode of the relative displacement member 442, so that the speed control of the drive motor MT1 can be easily linked to the displacement mode of the relative displacement member 442. The speed of the drive motor MT1 can be easily set.

Further, according to the configuration of this embodiment, the configuration that produces an advantageous effect only on the drive device side in the driving force transmission path can reduce the influence on the distal end side of the transmission path. Here, the description will be made assuming that the drive motor MT1 side is the drive device side of the transmission path, and the opposite side is the tip side of the transmission path, with the elevating plate 430 as a reference.

On the drive device side of the transmission path, the fact that the rotation angle of the arm member 414 relative to the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is suppressed when the first operating unit 400 is in the retracted state or in the extended state allows the arm member 414 to be started or stopped quickly. However, on the distal end side of the transmission path, the speed of the arm member 414 immediately before reaching the retracted state or the extended state becomes extremely small, so there is a problem in that the displacement tends to be slow. was there.

From this point of view, in order to configure the displacement mode on the distal end side of the transmission path to be unaffected by the deceleration of the arm member 414, the operating speed of the drive motor MT1 must be adjusted before the arm member 414 reaches the end of displacement. This can be dealt with by controlling the arm member 414 to stop before the arm member 414 decelerates (sufficiently before reaching the retracted state or the extended state).

However, according to the former, complicated control is required, and according to the latter, the rotation angle of the arm member 414 that can be used for displacing the distal end side of the transmission path becomes small, resulting in a narrowing of the range of displacement modes. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the displacement mode on the tip side of the transmission path can be approximated to the displacement mode of the drive motor MT1 and the end gear 413, synchronization can be performed immediately before reaching the retracted state or the extended state. The degree to which the relative displacement member 442 of the operating unit 440 decelerates can be easily reduced. Therefore, while making maximum use of the rotation angle of the arm member 414, the relative displacement member 442 disposed on the distal end side of the transmission path (and the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 disposed on the downstream side thereof) It is possible to avoid the displacement from becoming slow.

What is visually recognized by the player is the displacement of the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470. As shown in FIG. 39(c), when the terminal gear 413 is rotated at a constant speed, the rotational angular velocities of the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 tend to increase (at least constant speed) until just before the stop, and immediately before the stop. , the speed is reduced in accordance with the shape of the curved portion 491b of the elongated hole portion 491 described above.

Thereby, compared to the case where the displacement mode of the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 is determined depending on the displacement mode of the elevating plate 430, the displacement of the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 can be made more rapid. Therefore, impressive displacement can be realized and the production effect can be improved.

On the other hand, instead of stopping the rotational angular velocities of the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 while they continue to increase (combining the wing-like members 460), by providing a section in which they are decelerated immediately before, the wing-like member 460 It is possible to suppress rebound displacement after merging.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the displacement mode of the elevating plate 430 that is continuously displaced by the driving force of the drive motor MT1, and the relative displacement member 442 of the synchronous operation unit 440 and the fixed transmission plate 490 that are displaced on the downstream side thereof are as follows. , the displacement mode of the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 can be made different.

In particular, the displacement mode that once changed while moving downstream along the driving force transmission path can be changed back to its original state. Thereby, in a configuration in which a plurality of members are synchronously displaced, a unique displacement mode can be configured.

Although a case has been described in which the drive motor MT1 is displaced from the retracted state to the extended state as a control mode, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be controlled to reverse at an intermediate position. That is, for example, the rotation direction of the drive motor MT1 may be reversely controlled so that the first operation unit 400 is reciprocated (repeatedly reciprocated) between the retracted state and the first intermediate state.

In this case, after the elevating plate 430 starts descending and before the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 start rotating, the elevating plate 430 is raised to return to the retracted state, so that the player can visually recognize the elevating plate 430. The displacement of the first operating unit 400 can be limited to vertical displacement, and rotational displacement can be excluded.

Note that even if the displacement is to the first intermediate state, the fixed transmission plate 490 and the decorative portion 493 are vertically displaced relative to the elevating plate 430, so that the appearance of the first operating unit 400 is likely to change. can do.

FIG. 40 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 300. In FIG. 40, the game board 13 is shown removed from the operating unit 300 and placed on the front side, and illustration of the upper part of the operating unit 300 and the game board 13 is omitted. Further, in FIG. 40, the outline of a transparent cover member 790 disposed along the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 and made of a colorless, light-transmitting resin is illustrated with imaginary lines, and the configuration below the transparent cover member 790 is illustrated with imaginary lines. is visibly illustrated.

When the game board 13 and the operating unit 300 are fastened and fixed and used for a game, the lower front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is passed through the window section defined by the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). The light guiding member 714 and the upper surface of the second operating unit 700 are arranged so as to be visible. Further, since the light emitted to the front side by the illumination board 777 passes through the light transmission hole 60c, it is made visible from the front side of the base plate 60.

41 is a front perspective view of the second operating unit 700, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the second operating unit 700. As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the second operation unit 700 includes a plurality of light guide members 714 (eight in this embodiment) arranged in a row in the left and right direction, and light guide members 714 arranged in the left and right directions. A substrate 777 is provided.

Each of the light guiding members 714 is configured to be able to guide irradiated light emitted from below, and transmits the irradiated light from the upper end portion. The illumination board 777 includes a light emitting means 778 such as an LED that is configured to emit light to the front side. In this way, the second operating unit 700 can emit light upward through the light guide member 714 and emit light toward the front side through the illumination board 777.

43 and 44 are exploded front perspective views of the second operating unit 700, and FIG. 45 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operating unit 700. In FIG. 43, it is illustrated in a directional view looking down from above, and in FIGS. 44 and 45, it is illustrated in a directional view looking up from below. Moreover, in FIG. 45, the protruding holding portion 724 is illustrated in an enlarged manner.

As shown in FIGS. 43, 44, and 45, the second operating unit 700 includes a base member 701 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall 311 of the back case 310 (see FIG. 40), and a A cover member 720 that is placed over the base member 701 and fastened to the base member 701, and a plate-shaped displacement member that is sandwiched between the cover member 720 and the base member 701 and is pivotally supported for rotational displacement (rotation displacement is possible at a rotation angle of approximately 6 degrees). 730, a plurality (eight in this embodiment) of hollow members 740, which are hollow members placed on the upper surface of the plate-like displacement member 730 and configured to be able to move at least vertically; A plurality (three in this embodiment) of variable decoration members 750 are placed on the upper surface of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 on the front side and configured to be able to move at least up and down, and each of the variable decoration members 750 is arranged on the left and right lower sides of the base member 701. However, a pair of drive units 760 that have a configuration that is approximately line symmetrical with respect to a straight line along the vertical direction and are configured to be able to apply a load to the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and a transparent cover member 790 (see FIG. 40). Be prepared.

The transparent cover member 790 is a colorless and transparent resin member shaped to cover the upper surface and front surface of the cover member 720 of the second operation unit 700, and is used to prevent dust and fine particles from reaching the cover member 720, and to prevent dust and particles from reaching the cover member 720. Even if any component of the operating unit 400 malfunctions, it acts to prevent the first operating unit 400 from colliding with the cover member 720 and the light guide member 714.

Since the upper surface of the transparent cover 790 is inclined downward toward the back side, a portion of the light emitted directly upward from the upper end of the light guide member 714 can be refracted toward the back side. As a result, the light emitted from the light guide member 714 can be easily reflected on the third symbol display device 81, so even if the player is paying attention to the third symbol display device 81, the light emitted from the light guide member 714 can be easily reflected. Changes in the lighting state of the light member 714 (including changes in brightness and darkness, vibrations of light, and changes based on displacement of the hollow member 740) can be made easier to notice.

Note that illustration of the transparent cover member 790 is omitted in FIGS. 43, 44, and 45. First, the base member 701 forming the skeleton of the second operating unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 46.

FIG. 46 is an exploded front perspective view of the base member 701. As shown in FIG. 46, the base member 701 includes a plate-like member 702 formed to have sufficient strength, an illumination board 705 that is fastened and fixed to the upper surface of the plate-like member 702, and A partition member 708 that is arranged opposite to the top surface of the illumination board 705 and fastened to the plate-like member 702, and a thin film cover that is a member that is covered over the partition member 708 and is formed in a thin film shape from resin. A member 712, a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) light guide members 714 placed in contact with the thin film cover member 712, and a plate-like member placed over the light guide members 714. It includes a displacement regulating member 716 that regulates the upward movement and horizontal displacement of the light guiding member 714.

The plate-like member 702 has an engaging part 702a that is formed to be able to engage with the hook-like part 721c of the cover member 720, and a pair of engaging parts 702a formed on the left and right sides of the plate-like member 702, and a pair of engaging parts 702a that are formed on the left and right sides of the plate-like member 702 and serve as pivoted supports of the plate-like displacement member 730. A fastening screw can be screwed into a receiving recess 702b that is formed to be able to pivotally support the plate-shaped displacement member 731, and a regulating protrusion 702c that projects upward from the front edge and is formed to be able to regulate the rotation of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. A plurality of fastening portions 703a are formed in the fastening portions 703a, and a plurality of columnar protrusions 703b are formed to project upwardly beyond the fastening portions 703a in a columnar manner so that a fastening screw can be screwed into the tip of the protruding portions. , and a plurality of through holes 704 formed in the vertical direction.

The plurality of fastening portions 703a are for fastening and fixing fastening screws inserted into the illumination board 705, and are formed at three locations at the left and right center and at both left and right ends.In particular, the fastening portions 703a at both left and right ends have A protruding pin for positioning is also provided.

By arranging the illumination board 705 so that the protrusion pins are inserted into through holes drilled in the illumination board 705 in correspondence with the positioning protrusion pins, the fastening screws can be inserted into the illumination board 705. Since the through hole drilled for the purpose of connection is continuously connected to the fastening portion 703a, the illumination board 705 can be fastened and fixed to the plate member 702 by screwing the fastening screw there.

The columnar protruding portion 703b is a portion into which a fastening screw is inserted through the displacement regulating member 716, the thin film cover member 712, and the partition member 708 in this order, and the proximal end side thereof is sloped in a trapezoid shape. Thereby, it is possible to easily arrange the illumination board 705 at an appropriate position.

The through hole 704 has a size that allows a connector (not shown) provided on the lower surface of the illumination board 705 and an electric wire connected to the connector to pass therethrough. Therefore, in this embodiment, the electrical wiring connected to the illumination board 705 is arranged on the lower surface side of the illumination board 705, and does not protrude above the illumination board 705. Thereby, the entire upper surface of the illumination board 705 can be utilized as a region where a light emitting means 706 such as an LED can be arranged.

The illumination board 705 includes a plurality of light emitting means 706 composed of LEDs, etc., and an open part formed so as to leave a slight gap with the columnar protrusion 703b when the base member 701 is assembled (see FIG. 43). 707.

The light emitting means 706 includes a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) individual light emitting means 706a arranged along a straight line facing in the left-right direction, and a plurality of overall light emitting means arranged at different positions from the individual light emitting means 706a. means 706b.

The open portion 707 is formed at a position corresponding to the columnar protrusion 703b, and the protrusion end position of the columnar protrusion 703b is above the position where the illumination board 705 is placed in the assembled state. Therefore, when the illumination board 705 is moved downward to the position where it is placed in the assembled state, the open portion 707 will move along the columnar protrusion 703b.

In this embodiment, the proximal end side of the columnar protrusion 703b is formed into a circular shape in a top view and a trapezoidal shape in a front view, narrowing upward. The side surfaces are inclined with respect to the vertical direction. When displacing the illumination board 705 downward, if the illumination board 705 is significantly displaced in the front-back direction from the position where it is disposed in the assembled state, the illumination board 705 is moved along the slope of the side surface of the base end side of the columnar protrusion 703b. Since the positional deviation of the illumination board 705 can be corrected by using the above method, it is possible to easily arrange the illumination board 705 at a desired position.

The partition member 708 is made of a colored (in this embodiment, black) hard resin material that does not easily transmit light, and has a plurality of transparent holes 709 bored at positions corresponding to the individual light emitting means 706a, and a columnar projection. A plurality of through holes 710a are formed with an inner diameter that allows the distal end of the installation portion 703b to be inserted therethrough, and a plurality of fastening portions 710b are formed so that fastening screws inserted through the displacement regulating member 716 can be screwed therein; A plurality of receiving portions 710c are provided that are recessed (or drilled) so as to be able to receive protruding pins 716b protruding from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 at positions shifted in the front-back direction with respect to the portion 710b.

The light-transmitting hole 709 is formed with a longitudinally elongated crystal-shaped (approximately elliptical or tortoise-shell-shaped) cross section, and its elongated direction faces in different directions depending on its position from the left and right center. That is, the closer the transparent hole 709 is to the center, the smaller the deviation between the longitudinal direction and the front-back direction (in this embodiment, they are matched), and the closer it is to the left and right ends, the closer the longitudinal direction is toward the front side toward the center of the left and right sides. It is considered to be the direction of inclination.

That is, the longitudinal direction of the light-transmitting hole 709 is set to be inclined toward the front side toward the center of the left and right sides, and the angle of the inclination is designed to become larger toward the left and right ends. In this embodiment, the inclination angle is configured to have a constant increment (approximately 5 degrees).

The thin film cover member 712 is a thin film-like colorless and transparent resin member with low rigidity, is formed to have a raised central portion, is open on the lower side, and is perforated vertically at the left and right ends of the upper base. A pair of large through-holes 712a, a plurality of middle through-holes 712b that are vertically bored inside the outer through-hole 712a in the left-right direction, and a plurality of middle through-holes 712b that are vertically displaced from the middle through-holes 712b in the front-back direction. A plurality of small through holes 712c are provided.

The large through hole 712a is formed with a diameter longer than the diameter of a protrusion 716e (see FIG. 72) that protrudes from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 in an annular shape surrounding the insertion hole 716a. The protruding portion 716e protrudes from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 with a protruding length exceeding the thickness of the thin film cover member 712. load) can be avoided.

One of the middle through holes 712b is disposed at a position corresponding to the columnar protrusion 703b at the central position on the front side, and the other one is disposed at a position corresponding to the fastening section 710b.

The small through hole 712c is disposed offset in the front-rear direction with respect to the middle through hole 712b disposed at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 710b, and protrudes from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 to form a partition member. The protruding pin 716b that is received in the receiving portion 710c of 708 can be inserted therethrough.

Therefore, after covering the partition member 708 with the thin film cover member 712 and placing the displacement regulating member 716 on top of the thin film cover member 712, each member is fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screws into various places. Since the protruding pin 716b is inserted into the small through hole 712c and the receiving portion 710c, it is possible to align the thin film cover member 712 and the displacement regulating member 716 with respect to the partition member 708 before screwing in the fastening screw. This can be done easily (at the same time), and the efficiency of the subsequent work of screwing in the fastening screws can be improved.

The light guide member 714 is formed from a colorless, light-transmitting resin material into a cylindrical shape with a bottom at the top, and has a crystal shape (approximately elliptical shape, approximately tortoise shell shape) that is elongated from front to back when viewed from above. The main body part 714a includes a main body part 714a, a projecting edge part 714b projecting left and right and forward from the lower edge of the main body part 714a, and an inclined surface part 714c that slopes downward toward the front side at the upper end part of the main body part 714a.

Since the upper outer surface of the main body portion 714a is textured, the light emitted from the single individual light emitting means 706a, traveling inside the light guide member 714, and reaching the upper end portion can be visually recognized by the player. , it can be visually recognized as if the light is being emitted from a surface rather than from a point.

On the other hand, the main body portion 714a is not textured in portions other than the upper outer surface (such as the middle portion), and a smooth surface is formed. This makes it possible to prevent diffuse reflection from occurring when light traveling inside the light guide member 714 enters the inner wall surface of the main body 714a, and allows the light to be totally reflected on the smooth surface and Since the light can be directed toward the upper end of the main body 714a, energy loss of light at intermediate positions of the main body 714a can be reduced.

The longitudinal direction of the main body portion 714a of each light guide member 714 when viewed from above follows the setting of the longitudinal direction of the transparent hole 709 described above. That is, the closer the light guide member 714 is to the center, the smaller the deviation between the longitudinal direction and the front-back direction is (in this embodiment, they are matched), and the closer the light guide member 714 is to the left and right ends, the closer the longitudinal direction is toward the front side and closer to the center of the left and right sides. It is considered to be the direction of inclination.

That is, the longitudinal direction of the light guide member 714 is set to be inclined toward the front side toward the center of the left and right, and the angle of the inclination is designed to become larger as it approaches the left and right ends. In this embodiment, the inclination angle is configured to have a constant increment (approximately 5 degrees).

With this configuration, the front end of the light guide member 714 in the longitudinal direction when viewed from above (the part on the side closer to the player as the part that irradiates light toward the player) is located at the center in the longitudinal direction. It can be made to face the player side (front side left and right center) compared to the position. That is, it is possible to make the player feel that the light emitted from the light guide member 714 toward the player is concentrated toward the player.

The overhanging edge portion 714b is formed to have a constant thickness from top to bottom and functions as a portion for stabilizing the position and posture of the light guide member 714, and the inclined surface portion 714c directs light incident from below the light guide member 714 to It functions to emit light toward the side, but the details will be described later.

The displacement regulating member 716 is made of a colored (in this embodiment, black) hard resin material that does not easily transmit light, and has a plurality of insertion holes 716a formed through which fastening screws can be inserted, and a plurality of insertion holes 716a protruding from the lower surface. The inner shape of the plurality of protruding pins 716b, the plurality of receiving cylindrical parts 716c formed in a cylindrical shape that penetrate vertically at positions corresponding to the light guide member 714, and the lower edge of the receiving cylindrical part 716c is enlarged. The light guiding member 714 includes a plurality of recessed portions 716d which are stepped and recessed so as to have a shape capable of receiving the projecting edge portion 714b of the light guide member 714.

The receiving cylindrical portion 716c has an inner shape that is substantially the same as the inner shape of the light-transmitting hole 709 when viewed from above, and the light guide member 714 is inserted inside thereof. Furthermore, since the depth of the recessed portion 716d is equal to the thickness of the protruding edge 714b of the light guide member 714, in the assembled state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 40), The upper surface of the thin film cover member 712 and the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 (the lower surface of the recessed portion 716d) can stably support the projecting edge 714b between the surfaces thereof.

The projecting edge portions 714b are formed to project from the left and right and the front side, and are not formed on the back side. Correspondingly, the recessed portions 716d of the displacement regulating member 716 are also recessed on the left and right sides and the front side, and the recessed portions 716d on the back side are omitted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 714 from being assembled in the reverse direction.

That is, even if the light guiding member 714 is arranged in the front and rear directions in reverse and the displacement regulating member 716 is assembled, the arrangement of the recessed portion 716d and the overhanging edge 714b is misaligned, so that the overhanging edge is attached to the recessed portion 716d. The portion 714b cannot be inserted, and the protruding edge portion 714b protrudes from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716. A gap equal to the thickness of the overhanging edge 714b is created between the thin film cover member 712 and the displacement regulating member 716, making it difficult for the assembly worker (or automatic assembly machine) This allows the user to notice that the light guide member 714 is oriented in the opposite direction.

In the assembled state of the base member 701 (see FIG. 43), the projecting edge 714b is vertically sandwiched between the recessed portion 716d and the thin film cover member 712, thereby stabilizing the position and posture of the light guide member 714. Fixed.

The procedure for assembling the base member 701 will be explained. First, the illumination board 705 is passed through the columnar protrusion 703b and placed at a fastening position, and is fastened and fixed to the plate member 702. Next, each component is arranged above the illumination board 705 in the order of the partition member 708, the thin film cover member 712, the light guide member 714, and the displacement regulating member 716.

At that time, the partition member 708 is positioned on the plate member 702 by passing the tip of the columnar protrusion 703b through the through hole 710a of the partition member 708, and the protrusion pin 716b is passed through the receiving portion 710c and the small through hole 712c. Then, the displacement regulating member 716 and the thin film cover member 712 are positioned on the partition member 708. Moreover, the light guide member 714 is positioned on the displacement regulating member 716 by passing the main body portion 714a through the receiving cylinder portion 716c. In this way, the respective constituent members are positioned relative to each other before the fastening screws are screwed in, so that it is possible to improve the efficiency of the work of screwing in the fastening screws.

Finally, each component can be fastened and fixed by inserting a fastening screw into the insertion hole 716a and screwing it into the fastening portion 710b and the columnar projection 703b. According to this embodiment, after each component placed above the illumination board 705 is placed in an appropriate position, a plurality of fastening screws can be screwed together, which simplifies the work process. be able to. In addition, it is possible to automate the process of screwing in the fastening screws (using an automatic screwdriver).

In this embodiment, the partition member 708 cannot be removed when the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 716a is screwed into the columnar projection 703b. By doing so, the partition member 708 can be brought closer to the displacement regulating member 716 side.

As a result, although the light guide member 714 is placed on the thin film cover member 712, it can be substantially the same as the structure in which the light guide member 714 is placed on the partition member 708, and the rigidity of the partition member 708 makes the light guide member 714 By supporting the light guide member 714, the support of the light guide member 714 can be stabilized.

In addition, since the vertical separation between the displacement regulating member 716 and the partition member 708 can be reduced by sandwiching the thin film cover member 712, light leakage from between the displacement regulating member 716 and the partition member 708 can be prevented. can be achieved.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 43, 44, and 45. The cover member 720 is made of a colored (in this embodiment, blue) light-transmitting resin material, and is a member fastened and fixed to the base member 701, and is disposed at the peripheral edge in a bottom view and is connected to the base member 701. A plurality of coupling parts 721 used for coupling, a plurality of rear through holes 722 formed in a shape larger than the light guide member 714 corresponding to the position of the light guide member 714 of the base member 701, and a rear side A plurality of front through holes 723 are formed at multiple locations (three locations in this embodiment) as a pair of left and right through holes on the front side of the through hole 722, and left and right outer portions of the rear side of the rear through hole 722. and a plurality of protruding holding portions 724 protruding downward from the left and right inner portions of the front side.

The coupling part 721 includes a plurality of insertion holes 721a drilled through which fastening screws can be inserted from above, a plurality of fastening parts 721b into which fastening screws inserted into the base member 701 from below are screwed, and left and right outer parts. A plurality of hook-shaped parts 721c are formed on the back surface and engaged with the base member 701.

The rear through-holes 722 have different vertical positions of their lower edges at four locations closer to the center and four locations closer to the left and right sides. In this embodiment, it is formed higher toward the center. This is due to the design of the top surface shape of the cover member 720. That is, in order to give the upper surface shape of the cover member 720 a three-dimensional effect, the central portion is curved upward so as to appear raised, and the upper and lower positions of the lower edge of the rear through hole 722 are has been adjusted.

The length of the protruding holding portion 724 is adjusted so as to partially offset the difference in the vertical position of the lower edge of the rear through hole 722. That is, by making the protruding holding portion 724 disposed closer to the center have a longer protruding length, the vertical displacement width of the hollow member 740 is adjusted equally on the left and right sides. Note that both the front side protruding holding part 724 and the back side protruding holding part 724 are disposed at positions overlapping with the protruding columnar part 743 of the hollow member 740 when viewed in the vertical direction. Even if the posture collapses, the protruding columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 can be prevented from falling off from the small receiving portion 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

In this embodiment, compared to the vertical position of the lower end of the protruding holding part 724 on the front side, the vertical position of the lower end of the protruding holding part 724 on the back side is arranged lower. Thereby, even when the hollow member 740 comes into contact with the protruding holding portion 724, the attitude of the hollow member 740 can be brought to the rearward tilted attitude. Thereby, the shape and pattern of the front side of the cylindrical main body portion 741 of the hollow member 740 can be easily seen by the player who views the hollow member 740 from the front side looking down.

The plate-shaped displacement member 730 is formed from a colorless, light-transmitting resin material, and is rotatably supported by a shaft in a pair of receiving recesses 702b formed on the left and right sides of the plate-shaped member 702 and on the lower surface of the cover member 720. A pair of pivoted supports 731 that protrude coaxially from both left and right ends with a circular cross section, light transmission holes 732 that are vertically bored at multiple locations, and A pair of loaded parts 733 that extend in a plate shape toward the front side and receive a push-up load from below, and a plurality of light guides that are perforated in the vertical direction with a size that allows the light guide member 714 of the base member 701 to be inserted therethrough. An insertion hole 734, a plurality of small receiving portions 735 that are arranged in pairs on the diagonal line of the light guide insertion hole 734 and protrude in a ring shape when viewed from above, and the center of the front side through hole 723 of the cover member 720 when viewed from above. It is provided with a plurality of large receiving portions 736 arranged at positions and projecting in a ring shape when viewed from above.

FIG. 47 is a top view of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The loaded portion 733 is disposed on the front side of the rotating shaft passing through the center of the shafted support 731, and separate drive units 760 correspond to the left and right sides, and a load is applied from below.

The plate-shaped displacement member 730 differs in the manner of the load applied to the loaded portion 733 (for example, whether the load is applied only to one side or both sides, or whether the load is applied at short time intervals). The rotational displacement about the pivoted support 731 will occur in different manners depending on whether a load is applied or a continuous load is applied, etc., but the details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 47, the shape of the light guide insertion hole 734 is formed following the shape of the light transmission hole 709 described above. That is, the light guide insertion hole 734 is bored in the front and back in an elongated crystal shape (approximately elliptical shape, approximately tortoiseshell shape), and its elongated direction faces different directions depending on the position from the left and right center. .

That is, the closer the light guide insertion hole 734 is to the center, the smaller the deviation between the longitudinal direction and the front-back direction is (in this embodiment, they are matched), and the closer the light guide insertion hole 734 is to the left and right ends, the closer the longitudinal direction is to the front side and the closer to the center of the left and right. It is assumed that the direction is inclined to .

That is, the longitudinal direction of the light guide insertion hole 734 is set to be inclined toward the front side toward the left and right center, and the angle of the inclination is designed to become larger as it approaches the left and right ends. In this embodiment, the inclination angle is configured to have a constant increment (approximately 5 degrees).

The small receiving part 735 is a part that supports the hollow member 740 while allowing rattling, and is arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line CL1 passing through the center position of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the left-right direction. The relationship with respect to the longitudinal direction of the insertion hole 734 (the interval between the pair of small receivers 735 and the angle between the straight line connecting the pair of small receivers 735 and the longitudinal direction of the light guide insertion hole 734) is maintained.

As a result, while the plurality of hollow members 740 disposed on one side of the center line CL1 have the same shape (while having a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the hollow members 740 disposed on the other side), the assembled state of the second operation unit 700 (See FIG. 40) The posture of the hollow member 740 can be made different.

That is, similarly to the shape of the light guide insertion hole 734, the closer the hollow member 740 is to the center, the smaller the deviation between the longitudinal direction and the front-rear direction becomes. It is assumed that the direction is inclined to .

That is, the longitudinal direction of the hollow member 740 is set to be inclined toward the front side toward the center of the left and right sides, and the angle of the inclination is designed to become larger toward the left and right ends. In this embodiment, the inclination angle is configured to have a constant increment (approximately 5 degrees).

The pair of small receiving parts 735 include a front small receiving part 735a which is arranged on the front side with respect to the reference O1 and is formed in the shape of a cylinder with a circular cross section and a bottom, and a front small receiving part 735a which is arranged on the back side with respect to the reference O1 and has a circular cross section. and a rear small receiving part 735b formed in the shape of a cylinder with a bottom.

In this embodiment, the diameter of the inner cylinder of the rear small receiving part 735b is designed to be longer than the diameter of the inner cylinder of the front small receiving part 735a. Specifically, the cross-sectional diameter of the protruding columnar part 743 of the hollow member 740 is designed to be 3 [mm], the diameter of the inner cylinder of the front small receiving part 735a is designed to be 4.8 [mm], and the rear small receiving part 735a is designed to have a diameter of 4.8 [mm]. The diameter of the inner cylinder of the receiving portion 735b is designed to be 5.0 [mm].

That is, the gap size that occurs in the opposing direction between the small receiving part 735 and the protruding columnar part 743 is larger than that between the front small receiving part 735a and the protruding columnar part 743 than that between the rear small receiving part 735b and the protruding columnar part 743. The gap size is smaller than that with the portion 743.

Thereby, order can be given to the displacement mode of the hollow member 740 that is supported while allowing wobbling. That is, in this embodiment, rotational displacement about the front small receiving part 735a can be made more likely to occur than rotational displacement about the rear small receiving part 735b.

In other words, it is possible to easily maintain the arrangement of the hollow member 740 in the vicinity of the front small receiving portion 735a, while the arrangement of the hollow member 740 is likely to be misaligned in the vicinity of the rear small receiving portion 735b. The direction of the displacement of the hollow member 740 accompanying the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, which will be described later, can be adjusted to the direction of expanding outward to the left and right toward the back side.

The large receiving portions 736 are portions that support the variable decorative member 750 while allowing wobbling, and are arranged on both left and right sides compared to the large receiving portions 736 arranged on the center line CL1. The portion 736 is formed at a longer distance from the rotating shaft passing through the center of the shafted support 731, and is also formed at a different vertical position, but the details will be described later.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 43, 44, and 45. The hollow member 740 is arranged on the right side because four members of the same shape arranged side by side on the left side and four members arranged side by side on the right side have a symmetrical shape. The hollow member 740 located on the left side will be described in detail, and the description of the hollow member 740 disposed on the left side will be omitted.

FIG. 48 is a front perspective view of hollow member 740. As shown in FIG. 48, the hollow member 740 is arranged to surround the front, rear, left, and right sides of the light guide member 714, thereby shielding the light leaking from the front, rear, left, and right sides of the light guide member 714 so that it is not (difficult) to be seen by the player. It is a member configured to draw the player's line of sight to the upper tip of the light guide member 714, where the light is easily visible, and has a long crystal shape (approximately elliptical shape, approximately tortoise shell shape) on the front and back. A cylindrical main body part 741 whose frame is designed and formed into a cylindrical shape with an open top and bottom, and a flat plate extension part 742 which extends from the lower edge of the cylindrical main body part 741 in a flat plate shape in the front, rear, left and right directions. , and a pair of protruding columnar portions 743 that protrude downward from the lower surface of the flat plate extending portion 742 in a columnar manner.

The outer shape of the cylindrical main body portion 741 when viewed from above is slightly smaller than the inner shape of the rear through hole 722 of the cover member 720 when viewed from above, while the outer shape of the flat plate extension portion 742 when viewed from above is smaller than the inner shape of the rear through hole 722 of the cover member 720 when viewed from above. 720 is formed to be larger than the inner shape of the rear through hole 722 when viewed from above. That is, in the assembled state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 40), the hollow member 740 is inserted into the rear through hole 722 and can be vertically displaced and pulled out above the cover member 720. is regulated.

The upper edge of the cylindrical main body 741 is lowered toward the front side. Thereby, the light that has reached the upper end of the light guide member 714 can be intensively radiated upward on the front side. On the other hand, most of the light directed upward on the back side is blocked by the cylindrical main body portion 741. Therefore, the light that has reached the upper end of the light guide member 714 can be delivered to the player's eyes well, and a large amount of the light that has reached the upper end of the light guide member 714 transfers to the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the display from worsening due to the display being hidden away.

The flat plate extending portion 742 also functions as a portion whose upward displacement is regulated by the protruding pressing portion 724 (see FIG. 45). That is, the protruding holding portion 724 is formed at a position corresponding to the protruding columnar portion 743 on the back side, and restricts upward displacement of the hollow member 740. In this way, by forming the protruding holding part 724 and the protruding columnar part 743 at corresponding positions, even when the attitude of the hollow member 740 changes, the protruding columnar part 743 acts as a plate-like displacement member. Since it is possible to prevent the hollow member 740 from slipping out from the small receiving portion 735 of the hollow member 740, it is possible to stably support the hollow member 740.

The protruding columnar portion 743 has a hemispherical tip and is arranged in accordance with the spacing of the small receiving portions 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 (see FIG. 43), so that the second operation unit 700 is not assembled. (see FIG. 40), it is received in the small receiving portion 735.

The pair of protruding columnar parts 743 and the cylindrical main body part 741 are configured not to be rotationally symmetrical, so that the positional relationship with the light guide member 714 can be changed when assembled in reverse order. , it is possible to prevent incorrect installation. In addition, since the hollow members 740, which are arranged four on each side, are formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape, it is possible to prevent the hollow members 740, which are assembled on the left side of the left-right center position, from being assembled on the right side. (This can help prevent incorrect installation).

Here, the small receiving part 735 is rotationally displaced around the rotation axis that faces in the left-right direction in the same way as the displacement mode of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, while the protruding columnar part 743 is mainly displaced in the vertical direction allowed by the hollow member 740. Since the protruding tip of the protruding columnar portion 743 is formed in a hemispherical shape, the hollow member 740 can be displaced with less resistance. Here, the manner in which the hollow member 740 is displaced in accordance with the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described.

49(a), 49(b), and 49(c) are cross-sectional views of the light guide member 714, the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and the hollow member 740 taken along the line XLIX-XLIX in FIG. 47. In FIG. 49(a), the lower end posture (initial posture) of the plate-like displacement member 730 is illustrated, in FIG. 49(b), the horizontal posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 is illustrated, and in FIG. 49(c), The upper terminal position of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is illustrated. Note that the horizontal attitude corresponds to an attitude in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 rotates (raised displacement) by about 2.1 degrees about the reference O1 from the lower end attitude, and the upper end attitude corresponds to the attitude in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 rotates from the horizontal attitude to 730 corresponds to a posture rotated (raised displacement) by about 4 degrees around the reference O1.

As shown in FIG. 49(a), when the drive unit 760 is not operating, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is tilted forward by about 2.1 degrees from the horizontal position (lower end position (initial position)). ), the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is stably supported. In the present embodiment, by recessing the rear small receiving part 735b deeper than the front small receiving part 735a, the supporting position of the front small receiving part 735a in the lower end attitude (initial attitude) of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 ( (bottom) and the support position (bottom) of the rear small receiving portion 735b are prevented from shifting in the vertical direction.

Thereby, the attitude of the hollow member 740 supported by the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the lower terminal attitude (initial attitude) can be prevented from becoming the forward-inclined attitude. Further, the surfaces of the support positions (bottom parts) of the front small receiving part 735a and the rear small receiving part 735b are configured to be inclined downward toward the front side, similar to the inclination of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, so that the hollow member 740 Even if the hollow member 740 is displaced to the back side, the hollow member 740 can be returned to the front side by sliding the hollow member 740 using the slope of the support position (bottom).

Therefore, for example, even if the hollow member 740 is displaced due to the load generated when opening and closing the front frame 14, the position of the hollow member 740 can be changed to a position closer to the front (initial position) before the drive unit 760 operates. can be stably maintained.

As shown in FIG. 49(b), when the plate-like displacement member 730 is in a horizontal position, the protruding columnar part 743 of the hollow member 740 can secure a sufficient clearance with the small receiving part 735 both at the front and the rear. . Therefore, for example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 slightly vibrates in a posture near the horizontal posture, the mode of vibration inside the small receiving part 735 of the protruding columnar part 743 is large in the front and rear protruding columnar parts 743. There is no difference, and the hollow member 740 tends to be disorderly displaced back and forth and left and right.

As shown in FIG. 49(c), in the process of displacing the plate-like displacement member 730 to the upper end position, the protruding columnar part 743 on the front side of the hollow member 740 comes into contact with the front small receiving part 735a and is pushed toward the back side. will be advanced.

Therefore, for example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 slightly vibrates based on the upper end position (near the upper end position), the hollow member 740 rotates around the protruding columnar part 743 supported by the front small receiving part 735a. is prone to rotational displacement. In other words, the configuration is such that the manner of displacement that is likely to occur in the hollow member 740 can be changed in accordance with the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, which is a reference for small vibrations.

The light guide member 714 is inserted into the hollow member 740 inside the cylindrical main body 741, and the pair of protruding columnar parts 743 are received and supported by the small receiving parts 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Therefore, since the displacement of the hollow member 740 corresponds to the displacement of the small receiving part 735, the manner in which the small receiving part 735 is displaced will be described first.

Since the small receiving portion 735 is a part of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, it is displaced following the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Since the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced around the reference O1, which is a straight line connecting the shafted supports 731 (a straight line facing in the left-right direction), the small receiving part 735 is not displaced in the reference O1 direction (left-right direction). Instead, it is displaced on a plane perpendicular to the reference O1. Accordingly, the degree of inclination of the straight line connecting the pair of small receivers 735 arranged on the left and right sides of the light guide member 714 with respect to the center line CL1 changes. Therefore, the hollow member 740 is also encouraged to change the degree of inclination with respect to the center line CL1.

Due to the change in the degree of inclination described above, the hollow member 740 supported by the pair of small receiving portions 735 is subject to not only displacement on a plane perpendicular to the reference O1 but also displacement in the longitudinal and lateral directions (horizontal direction). Posture changes are allowed.

Since the arrangement of the small receiving portions 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is symmetrical with respect to the center line CL1, the change in the degree of inclination described above is also symmetrical with respect to the center line CL1. Displacement or posture change of 740 in the front, back, left and right directions (horizontal direction) can be caused symmetrically.

Further, since the change in the degree of inclination with respect to the center line CL1 corresponds to the arrangement of the pair of small receivers 735 in the state before the change, the inclination of the pair of small receivers 735 on the side closer to the center line CL1 (center side) The change in the degree of inclination is different from the change in the degree of inclination of the pair of small receiving portions 735 on the sides far from the center line CL1 (left and right outer sides). In this embodiment, since the displacement in the direction parallel to the center line CL1 is maintained, the degree of change in the inclination of the pair of left and right outer small receiving portions 735, which has a large inclination angle with respect to the center line CL1 in the state before change. is larger than the degree of change in the inclination of the pair of small receiving portions 735 on the center side (see FIG. 47). Thereby, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is displaced in a fixed manner, the amount of attitude change of the hollow member 740 can be changed depending on whether it is closer to or farther from the center line CL1.

The relationship between the hollow member 740 and the light guide member 714 when displacement occurs will be explained. In order to suppress the resistance when the hollow member 740 is displaced, the arrangement of the small receiving portion 735 and the size of the hollow member 740 are adjusted so that a gap is created between the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light guide member 714. The shape and the shape of the light guide member 714 are designed.

Here, the designed gap is different between the longitudinal direction of the light guide member 714 when viewed from above and the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. That is, the gap in the longitudinal direction is larger than the gap in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, the larger the inclination angle of the light guide member 714 with respect to the center line CL1 in the longitudinal direction when viewed from above (the more the light guide member 714 is disposed on the left and right outer sides), the more the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light guide member 714 This will narrow the space between them in the front and back direction.

Therefore, if the hollow member 740 is displaced by the same amount in the front-back direction due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the hollow members 740 disposed on the left and right sides will be pressed against the light guide member 714, causing friction or large There is a possibility that the load will be applied more easily and it will be damaged. On the other hand, as a countermeasure, if the gap in the front and back direction between the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light guide member 714 is set to be large in advance, the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 will be separated too much. Therefore, the effect of shielding the light guide member 714 other than the tip portion with the hollow member 740 and focusing the player's line of sight on the tip portion of the light guide member 714 is diminished.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction of the hollow member 740 disposed on the left and right outer sides is made smaller than the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction of the hollow member 740 disposed on the left and right center sides. It is configured as follows.

That is, in this embodiment, in a configuration in which a plurality of small receiving parts 735 are arranged on the same plane parallel to the reference O1, the small receiving parts 735 arranged on the left and right outer sides are closer to the left and right center side. The front small receiving part 735 and the reference O1 are arranged so that the distance in the front-rear direction is shorter than that of the small receiving part 735.

As a result, the small receiving portion 735 on the front side is displaced rearward with the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and the amount of longitudinal displacement of the hollow member 740, which is pushed and displaced rearward, is adjusted to the left and right center side. It is possible to geometrically define the members disposed on the left and right outer sides to be slightly smaller than the members disposed on the left and right sides.

In the initial posture of the plate-like displacement member 730, the gap between the small receiving portion 735 and the protruding columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 is approximately equal on the front, rear, left, and right sides, and the hollow member 740 is parallel to the horizontal direction. It is provided to such an extent that even if it moves, the gap between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 will not be filled.

Therefore, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the initial position (the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is in the de-energized state), an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 when a player hits the pachinko machine 10 or tries to shake it. Even if the hollow member 740 is displaced when the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 are moved, the displacement is suppressed to less than the gap size between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740. Therefore, the load transmitted between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 can be reduced.

As the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotated, the distance between the pair of small receivers 735 arranged on the left and right sides of the light guide insertion hole 734 changes in a top view. It is unlikely that the hollow member 740 will be displaced in the front-rear direction while the center of the protruding columnar portion 743 of the member 740 remains aligned.

At least, since the arrangement of the protruding columnar part 743 with respect to the small receiving part 735 changes in the gap between the small receiving part 735 and the protruding columnar part 743, this change causes the displacement and posture of the hollow member 740 in the left-right direction. Changes can occur.

The manner in which the hollow member 740 is pushed will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, during the rotational displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730, the front side of the inner surface of the front small receiving part 735a (the small receiving part 735 on the side where the longitudinal displacement is large) is It starts contacting the front side and is pushed toward the back side.

At this time, due to the above-mentioned dimensional relationship, a gap is maintained between the front part of the inner surface of the rear small receiving part 735b and the front part of the protruding columnar part 743. Therefore, wobbling in the rotational direction about the protruding columnar part 743 supported by the front small receiving part 735a is allowed. The structure is such that it is possible to cope with a change in the distance between the small receiving portions 735 when viewed from above by displacement using this rattling.

In this way, the small receiving portion 735 is configured to displace the hollow member 740 toward the back side, and the rear small receiving portion is configured to prevent backlash to an extent that allows rotational displacement around the front protruding columnar portion 743. It is configured to be provided between the portion 735b and the protruding columnar portion 743. Therefore, even if the hollow member 740 and the light guide member 714 collide during the displacement of the hollow member 740 based on the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 using the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 as a driving source, the hollow member 740 and the light guide member Since the load generated between the hollow member 740 and the light guide member 714 can be kept small, it is possible to prevent the hollow member 740 or the light guide member 714 from cracking or chipping.

The explanation will be returned to FIGS. 43, 44, and 45. The variable decorative member 750 includes a bifurcated support member 751 supported between the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and a decorative member 756 fastened and fixed to the bifurcated support member 751 and disposed above the cover member 720. Equipped with.

The bifurcated support member 751 includes a columnar protrusion 752 that projects downward from the central lower surface of the plate-like main body formed in a left and right long plate shape, and a columnar protrusion 752 that projects downward from the center bottom surface of the plate-like main body formed in a left and right elongated plate shape, and a columnar protrusion 752 that is provided at both left and right ends of the plate-like main body. A pair of cylindrical protrusions 753 (different lengths) that protrude upward in a cylindrical shape, and a plate-shaped extension part that extends in a plate-like manner from the center of the plate-shaped main body to the back side. 754.

The protruding tip of the columnar protruding portion 752 is formed in a hemispherical shape, and is received in the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The cylindrical protruding portion 753 of the bifurcated support member 751 is formed so as to be inserted into the front through hole 723, and the front through hole 723 allows vertical displacement of the bifurcated support member 751. 731 is rotated around an axis passing through the center. Therefore, although the directions of displacement are different from each other, since the protruding tips of the columnar protrusions 752 are formed in a hemispherical shape, the variable decorative member 750 can be displaced with less resistance as the plate-shaped displaceable member 730 is displaced. can.

The plate-like extending portion 754 acts to position the center of gravity of the variable decorative member 750 closer to the back side than the center of the columnar protruding portion 752 . That is, the posture in which the variable decorative member 750 is stabilized by its own weight can be set to the backward tilting posture. As a result, the abutment position between the columnar protrusion 752 and the plate-like displacement member 730 when the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the initial position can be compared with that when the variable decorative member 750 stands upright without tilting. Since the variable decoration member 750 can be moved toward the front side, the amount of displacement of the variable decorative member 750 near the time when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 starts changing its attitude can be increased.

The decorative member 756 includes a pair of protruding legs 757 that protrude downward in correspondence with the cylindrical protruding part 753, and a female thread is formed at the tip of the protruding legs 757. The protruding leg portion 757 is inserted inside the cylindrical protruding portion 753.

An insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted is formed in the plate-like main body of the bifurcated support member 751 along the center position of the cylindrical protrusion 753. By inserting a fastening screw into the insertion hole and screwing the fastening screw into the female thread at the tip of the protruding leg portion 757, the bifurcated support member 751 and the decorative member 757 are fastened and fixed.

The assembly process of the second operation unit 700 will be explained. First, the variable decorative member 750 is assembled to the cover member 720. That is, the cylindrical protrusion 753 of the bifurcated support member 751 is passed through the front through hole 723 of the cover member 720 from below, the protrusion leg 757 of the decorative member 756 is inserted into the cylindrical protrusion 753, and the protrusion is removed. A fastening screw is screwed into the female thread at the tip of the leg portion 757.

Next, the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the hollow member 740, and the cover member 720 are placed on the base member 701 in this order, and the cover member 720 is fastened and fixed to the base member 701. When assembling the cover member 720 to the base member 701, insert the fastening screw into the insertion hole 721a from above while the hook-shaped part 721c is engaged with the engaging part 702a formed on the back side of the plate-like member 702. After the insertion cover member 720 and the base member 701 are fastened and fixed, they are turned upside down and a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 721b.

As a result, although a plurality of members are disposed in a non-fixed manner between the base member 701 and the cover member 720, and fastening screws are screwed into multiple locations from the bottom surface, each component may be removed during assembly. can be prevented from falling off between the base member 701 and the cover member 720.

Finally, the drive unit 760 is placed below the base member 701, and a fastening screw is inserted from below and fastened and fixed. When the second operating unit 700 is assembled (see FIG. 40), the advancing direction of the fastening screw screwed in from below interferes with the outer wall 312 of the rear case 310. It is said to be difficult to remove the fastening screws while they are accommodated. Therefore, even if the front side of the operating unit 300 is illegally opened, it is possible to prevent the drive unit 760 from being taken out independently from the rear case 310.

Furthermore, a fastening portion 766 is formed on the back side of the drive unit 760 to which a fastening screw inserted into the bottom wall portion 311 of the back case 310 is fastened and fixed. Therefore, when the second operating unit 700 is assembled to the rear case 310 without the drive unit 760 assembled, the second operating unit 700 is fastened and fixed by inserting a fastening screw into the bottom wall portion 311. Since there will be places where the fastening screws cannot be fastened at this stage, it is possible to make the operator aware that the drive unit 760 is insufficient. Thereby, forgetting to assemble the drive unit 760 can be suppressed.

FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive unit 760. In FIG. 50, a drive unit 760 disposed on the right side when viewed from the front is illustrated. Although the drive unit 760 has a slightly different appearance, the components are symmetrical, so the drive unit 760 on the right side will be described in detail, and the explanation on the drive unit 760 on the left side will be omitted.

The drive unit 760 includes a load member 761 configured to be able to apply a load to the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and a metal (in this embodiment, brass) member that rotatably supports the base end side of the load member 761. A shaft portion 762 formed in a cylindrical shape, a support case 763 to which the shaft portion 762 is fixed and configured as a case as a whole, an electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 disposed inside the support case 763, and a support case 763 having a cylindrical shape. It includes a front cover member 770 disposed on the front side of the case 763 and fastened and fixed to the support case 763, and an illumination board 777 fastened and fixed to the front side of the front cover member 770.

The load member 761 is made of a resin material, has a base end 761a formed with a through hole through which the shaft portion 762 is inserted, and extends outward from the base end 761a. A bar-shaped extending portion 761b is bent in the shape of a square, a vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c is bent upward from the extending tip of the bar-shaped extending portion 761b toward the front side, and a vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c is bent toward the front side. An overhanging portion 761d that overhangs from the extending tip of the extending portion 761b along the extending direction of the rod-like extending portion 761b, and a centering point of the shaft rod portion 762 at the boundary between the overhanging portion 761d and the rod-like extending portion 761b. The front cover member 770 includes an opposing curved portion 761e formed in an arc shape and arranged to face the curved protruding portion 774 of the front lid member 770.

A metal plate member MB2 made of metal (magnetic material) is disposed on the upper surface of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b. In the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB2 is fixed to the rod-shaped extension portion 761b by engagement with the elastic claw, similarly to the metal plate member MB1 described above.

To be more specific, rail portions for guiding the front and back slide of the metal plate member MB2 are provided on both longitudinal sides of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b, and these rail portions are configured to guide the metal plate member MB2 only from the back side. (only the back side is fully open). When sliding the metal plate member MB2 along the rail part, the elastic claw is pushed down by the metal plate member MB2, and when the metal plate member MB2 is slid as it is, the metal plate member MB2 hits the front side wall of the rail part. This restricts the sliding, and at this position, the pressing down of the elastic claw by the metal plate member MB2 is released (it has risen to a position facing the side surface of the metal plate member MB1), and the elastic claw is pushed down by the metal plate member MB2. engages to restrict retraction to the rear side.

Note that the method of fixing the metal plate member MB2 to the rod-shaped extension portion 761b is not limited to this. For example, the metal plate member MB2 may be fastened and fixed to the rod-shaped extension portion 761b, may be tied with a binding band, or may be attached with adhesive tape or the like.

The front lid member 770 includes a projecting frame portion 771 that projects toward the front side in a frame shape, and a plurality of projecting portions that project toward the front side in a small-diameter cylindrical shape inside the projecting frame portion 771. A cylindrical part 772, a wiring passage recess 773 recessed at the lower edge so that the electrical wiring connected to the illumination board 777 or a connector connected to the end of the electrical wiring can pass through, and It includes a curved protruding portion 774 that protrudes in a curved plate shape along an arc shape centered on the shaft portion 762 .

The protruding frame portion 771 is formed to face the periphery of the illumination board 777, and is a portion that prevents loads from being applied to the illumination board 777 from the top, bottom, left and right directions.

The protruding cylindrical part 772 includes a gourd-shaped seat in front view and a small-diameter insertion part that further protrudes from the seat. By assembling, the back surface of the illumination board 777 is supported by the seat, and the arrangement of the illumination board 777 can be stabilized. A female screw portion into which a fastening screw can be screwed is provided on the seat portion along with the insertion portion, and the illumination board 777 is fastened and fixed to the front cover member 770 by the fastening screw screwed into this female screw portion.

The illumination board 777 includes a light emitting means 778 composed of a plurality of LEDs arranged at positions designed in consideration of presentation, and a plurality of through holes 779 formed in the illumination board 777 for assembly. Equipped with.

The through-holes 779 are formed at a plurality of locations (in this embodiment, two locations), each pair of circular through-holes corresponding to the insertion portion and the female screw portion of the protruding cylindrical portion 772.

In this embodiment, the illumination board 777 is directly fastened and fixed to the front lid member 770. That is, this corresponds to a case where the front cover member 770 and the illumination board 777, which are arranged close to the front side of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, are configured as a single rigid body. Therefore, the illumination board 777 can be made to easily vibrate due to the vibration generated by the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means 778 can be made to vibrate due to the vibration generated by the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. Can be configured.

In this embodiment, a curved protrusion 774 is provided between the load member 761 that is displaced by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the back surface of the front lid member 770. That is, since the load member 761 as the vibration source side and the front cover member 770 are separated by at least the width dimension of the curved protrusion 774, excessive transmission of vibration can be prevented.

Note that the width dimension of the curved protrusion 774 can be set arbitrarily. Therefore, the setting of the width dimension of the curved protrusion 774 can be changed depending on whether the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means 778 is desired to be vibrated or maintained without being vibrated. If it is the former, the width dimension may be shortened, and if it is the latter, the width dimension may be lengthened.

The support case 763 includes a lower regulating part 764 arranged below the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, an upper regulating part 765 arranged on the opposite side of the shaft part 762 with respect to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and a rear case 310. It includes a fastening portion 766 (see FIG. 45) into which a fastening screw inserted into the bottom wall portion 311 (see FIG. 6) is screwed.

The load member 761 normally tilts due to its own weight (see FIG. 51(a)), but when electricity is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, magnetic force (electromagnetic force) is generated, and the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) causes the metal The plate member MB2 is attracted and displaced upward.

That is, in this embodiment, as the metal plate member MB2 is displaced between the raised position where it is placed as a result of being raised by electromagnetic force and the lowered position where it is placed as a result of the electromagnetic force disappearing and it being lowered by its own weight, , the plate-shaped displacement member 730 (see FIG. 43), which receives the load from the load member 761, is displaced in the rotational direction around the shafted support 731. The rotational displacement will be described below with reference to FIG. 51.

51(a) and 51(b) are front views of the drive unit 760. In addition, in FIGS. 51(a) and 51(b), illustrations of the front lid member 770 and the illumination board 777 are omitted except for the curved protrusion 774, and the outer shape of the curved protrusion 774 is shown by imaginary lines. Illustrated.

Further, FIG. 51(a) shows a state in which no current is flowing through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the load member 761 is placed in the lowered position due to its own weight, and FIG. 51(b) shows a state in which no current is flowing through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. A state in which the metal plate member MB2 is attracted by the electromagnetic force generated by the flow and the load member 761 is placed in the raised position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 51(a) and 51(b), in the lowered position, the load member 761 abuts against the lower regulating part 764 and its downward displacement is regulated, and in the raised position, the load member 761 abuts against the upper regulating part 765. Rising displacement is regulated.

Here, the lower regulating part 764 and the upper regulating part 765 are configured to have different positions (distances from the shaft part 762) with respect to the shaft part 762, and the effects caused by this will be explained. .

First, the load applied to the lower regulating portion 764 via the load member 761 is mainly a load generated by the load member 761's own weight, so by supporting the center of gravity of the load member 761, the load member 761 is stably supported. can do. For this reason, the lower regulating portion 764 is disposed at the center of gravity of the load member 761.

In the above description of the window movable unit 150, since the driven member 163 is formed in a straight rod shape, the center of gravity is approximately at the center of the member. Since the vertical bar-shaped extension part 761c and the overhanging part 761d extend in two from the extension tip side of the bar-shaped extension part 761b, the center of gravity is located closer to the extension tip side than the approximate center position of the bar-shaped extension part 761b. .

Taking this into consideration, in this embodiment, the lower regulating portion 764 is arranged at a position corresponding to the center of gravity of the load member 761, which is closer to the extending tip than the approximately central position of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. .

On the other hand, since the load applied to the upper regulating part 765 via the load member 761 is mainly due to the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the upper regulating part 765 is arranged at the center of gravity of the load member 761. There are few advantages associated with location. In this embodiment, the load transmitted to the upper regulating part 765 via the load member 761 is reduced by arranging the upper regulating part 765 to face the rotating tip of the load member 761.

In other words, when a moment of force of the same magnitude is generated, the load transmitted through the load member 761 is greater at a position farther from the rotation axis of the load member 761 (a position where the arm related to the moment is longer). Since it is smaller, the load transmitted to the upper regulating portion 765 can be reduced.

In this way, since it is desirable that the load transmission to the upper regulating member 765 occurs at the rotating tip of the load member 761, in this embodiment, the overhanging portion 761d is further extended from the extending tip of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. It is configured to project toward the outer diameter side of a circle centered on the shaft portion 762, and the projecting portion 761d is configured to abut against the upper regulating member 765. Thereby, load transmission at the intermediate portion of the load member 761 can be avoided, and load transmission can be stably caused at the rotating tip side.

In this embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is not configured to push the load member 761 forward, but is configured to pull it up using an attractive force. That is, the magnetic force generated in the iron core disposed in the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 attracts the metal plate member MB2, thereby pulling up the load member 761.

According to this configuration, compared to a configuration in which the load member 761 is pushed by a member moved by electromagnetic force, even if the load member 761 is displaced due to the load applied to the load member 761, overload (localized Therefore, damage to the structure of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be easily avoided. This makes it possible to extend the service life of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 even in a configuration in which the load member 761 receives a varying load as in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 51(b), when the load member 761 receives the attraction force from the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (in the raised position), the upper surface of the metal plate member MB2 is in surface contact (a predetermined contact with the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2). The structure is such that a gap is provided between the metal plate member MB2 and the main body (the part containing the coil) of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the above-mentioned surfaces that make surface contact The upper regulating portion 765 and the projecting portion 761d are configured to abut on a plane parallel to the upper regulating portion 765 and the projecting portion 761d.

As a result, the load generated by the electromagnetic force is transferred to the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 while avoiding overloading the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 by avoiding the load member 761 colliding with the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. It can be dispersed and received at the lower edge or the lower surface (contact surface) of the upper regulating portion 765. It is possible to avoid generating a large load locally.

In addition, in the raised position of the load member 761, there is a gap not only between the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the metal plate member MB2, but also between the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the metal plate member MB2. Alternatively, the load from the load member 761 may be received only by the upper regulating portion 765. In this case, physical load transmission between the load member 761 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be interrupted, so that the durability of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be improved.

In this case, since the load is likely to concentrate on the overhanging portion 761d of the load member 761, the overhanging portion 761d will be damaged (ruptured) preferentially; Even if the metal plate member MB2 is configured to abut the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 at multiple points on a predetermined plane, concentration of the load on one point can be avoided. .

Furthermore, in this case, if the overhanging portion 761d is damaged (broken), the metal plate member MB2 will come into contact with the lower edge of the metal case at multiple points, so a detection sensor may be separately configured to be able to detect this contact. Accordingly, damage (breakage) to the overhanging portion 761d can be easily determined.

In addition, since the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 continues to be generated in the raised position, it is difficult to imagine that the load member 761 bounces back after colliding with the upper regulating portion 765. Therefore, the arrangement and posture of the upper regulating part 765 can be designed considering only the efficiency of reducing the load transmitted to the upper regulating part 765 (the width of the straight line passing through the center of the shaft part 762 and the upper regulating part 765). (The angle with the straight line along the direction can be designed to be small.)

On the other hand, since the straight line along the width direction of the lower regulating part 764 is inclined with respect to the straight line rL1 passing through the lower regulating part 764 and passing through the center of the shaft part 762, the lower regulating part 764 Compared to the case where the straight line along the width direction and the straight line rL1 are parallel or on the same straight line, the direction in which the repulsive force is generated can be dispersed (force decomposition). Thereby, bouncing (bound) of the load member 761 after colliding with the lower regulating portion 764 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the lower regulating portion 764 is formed to have a longer width dimension (width along the radial direction), it is possible to secure a large area of the surface receiving the load, and the load due to the own weight of the load member 761 is reduced. The pressure (stress) generated in the lower regulating portion 764 can be reduced.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the rebound (bound) of the load member 761 is reduced while reducing the load transmitted to the lower regulating part 764 and the upper regulating part 765 via the load member 761 during displacement in both the up and down directions. Can be suppressed.

Note that the materials of the upper regulating part 765 and the lower regulating part 764 are not limited at all. For example, it may be a general-purpose plastic such as polypropylene or polystyrene, an engineering plastic such as polycarbonate, a thermosetting resin such as melamine resin, polyurethane, or epoxy resin, or a rubber material. Further, the upper regulating part 765 and the lower regulating part 764 may be made of the same material or may be made of different materials.

For example, when providing the upper regulating portion 765 with a function of suppressing displacement in the front-rear direction that may occur in the load member 761 due to the load that the load member 761 may receive from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the raised position, As the material of the upper regulating portion 765, a material or structure having excellent not only damping properties but also excellent frictional resistance may be used.

In this case, displacement of the load member 761 in the front-rear direction (axial direction) due to the load applied to the load member 761 from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is limited to the state in which the overhanging portion 761d and the upper regulating portion 765 are in contact with each other. This can be easily prevented.

When the load member 761 is displaced, the opposing curved portion 761e displaces the back side of the curved protrusion 774. Since both the opposing curved portion 761e and the curved protruding portion 774 have an arc shape centered on the shaft portion 762, the load member 761 is displaced to the front side, and the opposing curved portion 761e and the curved protruding portion 774 come into contact. Even if the load member 761 is rotationally displaced in this state, the opposing curved portion 761e and the curved protrusion 774 only slide along the rotational direction, so the resistance to rotational displacement can be reduced.

Further, by forming the opposing curved portion 761e at the lower end of the load member 761, sufficient space can be secured above the opposing curved portion 761e. In this embodiment, a vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c is provided in this secured space.

The vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c extends above the opposing curved portion 761e, but unlike the opposing curved portion 761e which is formed in a curved manner, it extends straight in a front view. That is, when the load member 761 is placed in the raised position, it is formed into a rod shape that extends in the vertical direction when viewed from the front.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the load member 761 from bending and deforming in the left and right directions due to the load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, so that the tip of the load member 761 is upwardly displaced while being slightly displaced left and right, as in the present embodiment. Even with this configuration, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be pushed up stably. Note that the load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the manner of support will be described later.

Note that the vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c is formed in a bar shape that extends straight in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, but when viewed from the side, the vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c is positioned halfway (axially) so that the upper end is located closer to the front than the lower end. The rod portion 762 is bent (bent at an obtuse angle) at the left position of the rod portion 762.

As a result, the area occupied by the load member 761 below the vicinity of the shaft portion 762 can be moved toward the back side, and an area for the members to be placed on the front side thereof can be secured. That is, since the arrangement position of the illumination board 777 can be moved toward the rear side, by increasing the distance between the game board 13 (see FIG. 40) and the illumination board 777, the illumination board 777 is irradiated with light from the light emitting means 778, and the downstream surface configuration is The light seen through the members 91 and 92 can be easily seen as spread light. In other words, it is possible to make it easier to see by using surface emitting light, in which light reaches a circular shape centered on the optical axis and shines in a planar shape, instead of point emitting light that is visually recognized with a size similar to the external shape of the LED.

Furthermore, since the load member 761 can be easily bent and deformed back and forth due to the load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, local overload can be avoided when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by a single load member 761. Even if this occurs, the load can be released by bending and deforming the load member 761. Thereby, the durability of the load member 761 can be improved.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by making the ease of deflection of the load member 761 different in the front, rear, left and right directions, it is possible to improve the stability of pushing up the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the durability of the load member 761. It is possible to achieve the effect that it is possible.

When the load member 761 is placed in the raised position, the load member 761 receives an upward electromagnetic force generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and a downward load generated between the shaft rod portion 762 and the upper regulating portion 765 at both left and right ends of the load member 761. It is stably supported by

Therefore, as will be described later, even when a load is applied to the load member 761 from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the area from the base end 761a to the overhanging portion 761d remains stably supported. The range in which the deflection occurs can be limited to the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c.

Thereby, the load member 761 is entirely displaced in the front-rear direction due to the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and it is possible to avoid contact with the support case 763 and the front lid member 770. In other words, it is possible to prevent the load member 761 from being damaged by rubbing against other members or from requiring extra driving force to drive the load member 761.

<Action of second operation unit 700>
The operation mode of the second operation unit 700 will be explained. In the second operation unit 700, the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 differs depending on the drive mode of the drive units 760 arranged on the left and right sides, so that the hollow member 740 supported on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 accordingly The displacement of the variable decorative member 750 is also configured to be different. Below, the displacement mode of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be explained first, and then the displacement mode of the variable decoration member 750 and the hollow member 740 will be explained.

52, 53, and 54 are front views of the second operating unit 700. In FIG. 52, the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are both arranged in the lowered position, and in FIG. 53, only the load members 761 of the left drive unit 760 are arranged in the lowered position, and the right drive A state in which the load member 761 of the unit 760 is upwardly displaced from a lowered position toward a raised position is illustrated, and FIG. 54 shows a state in which the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are both arranged in the raised position. .

The state shown in FIG. 52 corresponds to a state in which no current flows through the electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the left and right drive units 760 (de-energized state). In this state, the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the load member 761 are not in contact with each other, and the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is maintained by contact with the base member 701. posture).

The state shown in FIG. 53 corresponds to a state (one-side excitation state) in which current is controlled to flow through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the drive unit 760 on one side (right side). In this state, the load member 761 on the right side pushes up the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes its posture in the rising direction and takes an intermediate posture. In addition, in this embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced by about 1.3 degrees from the horizontal position in the intermediate position.

In the state shown in FIG. 53, the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and variable decorative member 750 placed thereon is concentrated on the load member 761 on the right side. In this embodiment, the load member 761 is formed into a small-diameter rod shape, and is bent in the front-rear direction, so that it can be easily bent in the lateral direction (front-rear direction), and the load member 761 is bent in the front-rear direction. It is formed with enough strength (rigidity) to be able to be bent and deformed by the weight of the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 on which it rests.

In this embodiment, since the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and variable decorative member 750 placed thereon is applied in a direction including a front-rear component at the position of contact with the load member 761. (See FIG. 55), the load member 761 is configured to be easily deformed, and the load can be released by this deformation. That is, the state shown in FIG. 53 corresponds to a state in which the load member 761 is flexibly deformed.

Note that the difference in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the rising direction between the state shown in FIG. 53 and the state shown in FIG. 54 described below can be explained as being due to the degree of deflection of the load member 761. That is, by appropriately setting the elastic modulus of the load member 761, it is possible to design different postures of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Note that the elastic modulus of the load member 761 may be designed to be equal on the left and right sides, or may be designed to be different.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the shapes of the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are symmetrical, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the left drive unit 760 (see FIG. 50 Even if current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the right drive unit 760 and no current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the right drive unit 760, the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is the same as that shown in FIG. Therefore, hereinafter, the state shown in FIG. 53 will be referred to as a one-sided excitation state, and a description of the state in which the excitation relationship of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is symmetrical will be omitted.

In the state shown in FIG. 54, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by both the left and right drive units 760. Therefore, since the load of the own weight applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is reduced by half, the deflection displacement of the load member 761 can be reduced.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 54, compared to the state shown in FIG. The difference is that the degree of deflection of 761 is about half.

55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along the line LVa-LVa in FIG. 53, and FIG. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along the line LVb-LVb in FIG. be.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), when the left and right pair of electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 are in an excited state, the load applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is divided into two, so the load member The plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be raised and displaced in a state where the bending deformation of the plate 761 is small (bending deformation is about half).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55(a), when one side of the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 is in an excited state, the load applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is applied to the load member 761 on one side. Concentrate on. This load increases the deflection deformation that occurs in the load member 761, so even if the rotation angle of the load member 761 is the same, the amount of rising displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is suppressed by the deflection deformation.

In this embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is configured to be rotationally displaced about the reference O1. In the state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by the regulating protrusion 702c (initial position, shown by phantom lines in FIG. 55(a)), the load-bearing portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is It comes into contact with the load member 761 of the drive unit 760 with the extending normal extending downward in the rear direction.

That is, since the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the load member 761 via the loaded portion 733 is generated along the direction in which the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c extends, the bending deformation occurring in the load member 761 is suppressed to a small level. . Therefore, in this state, the driving force transmitted via the load member 761 is mainly used for the rising displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

On the other hand, in the mid-position (see FIG. 55(a)), the normal line extending from the contact surface (lower surface) of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is lower than the reference O1 in the front direction. The load member 761 of the drive unit 760 is brought into contact with the load member 761 of the drive unit 760 in the extended state.

That is, in the vicinity of the intermediate position (see FIG. 55(a)) where the amount of deflection deformation of the load member 761 tends to increase due to the large displacement of the load member 761, the load member 761 is directed through the lower surface of the loaded portion 733. The load applied by the load has a frontal component and a downward component. In this embodiment, since the load member 761 is formed into a rod shape extending in a direction that is tilted upward toward the front, a load having a frontal component and a downward component acts as a load that bends and deforms the load member 761. do. Therefore, in this state, the driving force transmitted via the load member 761 is used not only for the rising displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 but also for the deflection deformation of the load member 761 (used for the deflection deformation of the load member 761). (The percentage of

As described above, according to the present embodiment, as the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes, the ease with which the load member 761 is bent and deformed due to the load applied to the load member 761 changes. That is, in the posture in which the load member 761 starts to apply a load to the loaded portion 733 (lower end posture (initial posture)), a rear side load is generated in the direction in which the load member 761 is less susceptible to bending deformation, and from the horizontal posture, A load (downward load or frontward load) is generated in a direction in which the load member 761 is more likely to undergo deflection deformation than in the direction of the rear load.

As a result, even if the arrangement of the drive unit 760, the displacement width of the load member 761, and the generated force of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 are the same, the shape of the load member 761 (particularly the shape of the vertical bar-like extension portion 761c) and the load Depending on the design of the portion 733, the timing at which the load member 761 is likely to be deflected (attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730) and the amount of deflection deformation can be adjusted, so that the second operation when the drive unit 760 is driven can be adjusted. The operational aspects of unit 700 can be designed differently.

In this embodiment, since the vertical bar-like extending portion 761c is shaped to extend upward while protruding toward the front side, it is possible to cause the vertical bar-like extending portion 761c to undergo bending deformation from an early stage. That is, even when the plate-like displacement member 730 is in a horizontal position and a vertically downward load is applied to the load member 761, the vertical bar-like extension portion 761c is flexibly deformed (deformed in the forward tilting direction) by the load. be able to. In other words, the load of the own weight transmitted via the plate-like displacement member 730 can begin to be used for the deflection deformation of the load member 761 before the plate-like displacement member 730 reaches the horizontal position.

In this way, by configuring the usage of the driving force transmitted to the plate-shaped displacement member 730 via the load member 761 to be balanced between the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the deformation of the load member 761, the load can be reduced. Even if the member 761 is over- or under-displaced, fluctuations in the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be reduced.

For example, if the load member 761 hardly bends or deforms, the difference in the amount of displacement of the load member 761 or the difference in the height of the upper end of the load member 761 will directly affect the attitude change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Therefore, unless the displacement amount of the load member 761 and the height of the upper end of the load member 761 are precisely designed to prevent deviations, the change in the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 cannot be stabilized. In this case, high precision is required both in the manufacturing stage of the parts and in the assembly stage, resulting in increased manufacturing costs.

On the other hand, when the load member 761 bends and deforms, even if there is a slight difference in the amount of displacement of the load member 761 or a difference in the height of the upper end of the load member 761, the design is such that the bending deformation of the load member 761 cancels it out. By doing so, changes in the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be stabilized. Therefore, it is possible to keep the accuracy required in the manufacturing and assembly stages low in order to stabilize the change in attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and therefore, the manufacturing cost can be kept down.

This applies not only to the load member 761 alone, but also to the displacement of the left and right load members 761 in combination. That is, in the case where the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 have a symmetrical shape as in the present embodiment, the displacement amount of the load members 761 and the upper end portion of the load members 761 are controlled by the left and right drive units 760. Even if there is a slight difference in height, the difference can be used for bending and deforming the load member 761.

Thereby, regardless of which of the left and right drive units 760 is driven to cause the one-sided excitation state, the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the one-sided excitation state can be stabilized at an intermediate attitude.

Furthermore, the direction of deflection that occurs in the load member 761 due to the load applied to the load member 761 via the loaded portion 733 can be limited to the front side. This direction coincides with the direction of displacement in the longitudinal direction set in the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c with respect to the bar-shaped extending portion 761b. Accordingly, it is possible to configure the load member 761 so that the load that causes the load member 761 to undergo bending deformation is directed away from the rod-shaped extension portion 761b.

Therefore, most of the load applied from the loaded part 733 to the loaded member 761 can be absorbed by the bending deformation of the loaded member 761, and the rod-shaped extension part 761b is affected by the load applied from the loaded part 733. can be made smaller. In other words, the influence exerted on the load member 761 can be suppressed to the vicinity of the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c.

That is, friction and deformation occurring at other contact parts of the load member 761 (for example, the base end 761a and the shaft part 762, the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the curved protrusion 774 and the opposing curved part 761e, etc.) can be suppressed. This makes it easier to predict the mode of deflection deformation of the load member 761, so the structure of the load member 761 and the displacement mode of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 are designed on the assumption that the load member 761 will deflect and deform. It can be done easily.

In addition, the direction of deflection that occurs in the load member 761 can be limited to the front side (it is possible to avoid the same point being deflected to the front side or to the back side depending on the situation). ), it is possible to establish a one-to-one relationship between the position of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the amount of deflection of the load member 761, and the durability of the load member 761 is reduced compared to the case where the load member 761 can be deflected both forward and backward. can improve sexual performance.

In FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b), the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes depending on the degree of deformation of the vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c, and the load member 761 is both in the raised position. (See Figure 51(b)).

Therefore, as described above, the longitudinal displacement of the load member 761 due to the load applied to the load member 761 due to the bending deformation of the vertical bar-like extension portion 761c occurs between the overhang portion 761d and the upper regulating portion 765. It can be suppressed by friction.

Therefore, even if control is performed so that the vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c is repeatedly bent and released (for example, one electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is maintained in an excited state, and the other electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is kept in an excited state). (control mode in which the control mode is repeatedly switched between the non-excited state and the non-excited state), it is possible to suppress the entire load member 761 from displacing in the front-rear direction.

This can be favorably realized by a configuration in which the load member 761 is supported not only by the shaft portion 762 but also by the shaft portion 762 and the upper regulating portion 765 as in the present embodiment. More specifically, instead of receiving the load from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 with the load member 761 disposed between the lowered position and the raised position, the plate-shaped displacement is applied with the load member 761 fixed in the raised position. This can be realized precisely because of the mode in which the load is received from the member 730.

That is, when the load member 761 is supported only by the shaft portion 762, the base end portion 761a and the rod-like extension portion 761b, which are the portions on the shaft portion 762 side, are When the rod-shaped extension portion 761b is twisted or displaced in the front-rear direction due to the load from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, a gap is created between the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. there is a possibility.

If the gap between the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 exceeds a distance that effectively generates electromagnetic force, the electromagnetic force will rapidly weaken, making it difficult to maintain the load member 761 in the raised position. As a countermeasure, it is possible to take measures by increasing the rigidity of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b or by increasing the resistance between the shaft rod portion 762 and the load member 761, but in the former case, the load member 761 becomes heavier. In the latter case, an excessive driving force is required to rotate the load member 761, which leads to an increase in the size of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, which is not preferable.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c is bent, the load member 761 is stably held not only at the shaft portion 762 but also at both left and right end positions of the shaft portion 762 and the upper regulating portion 765. I support it. As a result, in addition to being able to suppress torsional deformation of the rod-shaped extension part 761b compared to the case where it is supported on one side of the left and right sides, the axial displacement of the load member 761 is suppressed due to the frictional resistance generated between it and the upper regulating part 765. Can be suppressed.

Therefore, when controlling the vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c to repeatedly deflect and release, the entire load member 761 is prevented from displacing in the front-rear direction without increasing the size of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. be able to.

In addition, in this embodiment, the metal plate member MB2 functions as a reinforcing material for the rod-shaped extension portion 761b due to the supporting aspect of the metal plate member MB2 (see FIG. 51). That is, the rigidity of the metal plate member MB2 can prevent torsional deformation of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 54. The state shown in FIG. 54 corresponds to a state in which current is flowing through the electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the left and right drive units 760 (excitation state). In this state, the loaded parts 733 on both the left and right sides of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 are pushed up by the load members 761 on both the left and right sides, so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes its posture in the rising direction, and assumes the upper end posture. . In this embodiment, in the upper end position, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced by about 2.7 degrees from the halfway position (about 6.1 degrees from the lower end position, and about 4 degrees from the horizontal position).

In the state shown in FIG. 54, compared to the state shown in FIG. 53, the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and variable decorative member 750 placed thereon is divided into the load members 761 on both the left and right sides. As a result, the deflection occurring in the load member 761 is alleviated.

In addition, in FIG. 54, for convenience, the deflection of the left and right load members 761 is shown as being so small that it cannot be distinguished. That is, it is shown in the same shape as the load member 761 shown in FIG. 52.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, in this embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be placed in a plurality of postures (at least three) by switching the conduction state to the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (see FIG. 50). You can switch with .

Note that in order to switch the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 from FIG. 53 to FIG. Since it is only necessary to excite SOL2, it is possible to easily and smoothly switch the posture.

56(a), FIG. 56(b), FIG. 57(a), and FIG. 57(b) are schematic diagrams showing examples of time-measured changes in conduction of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 and changes in the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. It is a diagram. In FIGS. 56(a), 56(b), 57(a), and 57(b), the upper timing chart shows the conduction state of the left electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the middle timing chart shows the conduction state of the right electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. The conduction state of SOL2 is shown, and the lower timing chart shows the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

Note that, due to the structure, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is not displaced at the same time as the timing when electricity is made conductive to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (a slight time difference occurs); For convenience, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is illustrated as being displaced simultaneously with the conduction of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 56(a) is the same as the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 53 are alternately switched. The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 56(b) is the same as the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 53 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched. The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 57(a) is the same as the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched.

The conduction state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 57(b) is such that the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 53 are alternately switched, and the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched. The mode of switching is the same as the mode of repeating.

In this way, the switching patterns of the states described above with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54 are not unique, but occur in multiple patterns by different combinations of conduction modes of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2.

Therefore, since a plurality of patterns of switching the posture of the plate-like displacement member 730 occur, the patterns of displacement of the hollow member 740 that rests on the plate-like displacement member 730 and the variable decoration member 750 (see FIG. 43) can be configured in multiple ways, details of which will be described later.

Note that in FIGS. 56(a), 56(b), 57(a), and 57(b), for convenience, the short-time conduction length and conduction interval of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 are shown as constant. , this is just one example. For example, the short-time conduction intervals may be set randomly, or may be configured to gradually become longer or shorter, and can be set arbitrarily.

In addition, by shortening the short-time conduction length of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the attitude change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be caused instantaneously (pulse-like), while by increasing the conduction length, , can maintain posture changes for a sufficient length of time. Further, by shortening the conduction interval of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be changed as if the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is vibrating.

FIG. 58 is a top view of the second operating unit 700. As shown in FIG. 58, the second operating unit 700 is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape when viewed from above. In the following, the part on the right side from the axis of symmetry will be explained in detail, and the explanation on the left side will be omitted.

59, 60, 61, and 62 are partial sectional views of the second operating unit 700 taken along the line LIX-LIX in FIG. 58. 59, FIG. 60, FIG. 61, and FIG. 62, the displacement of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated in chronological order, and in FIG. 59, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower terminal position (initial position). 60 shows the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in a horizontal position, FIG. 61 shows the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in an intermediate position, and FIG. 62 shows the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in a horizontal position. A state in which the displacement member 730 is in the upper end position is illustrated.

In FIGS. 59 to 62, a straight line connecting the centers of a pair of shafted supports 731 (see FIG. 43) is illustrated as a reference O1 as the axis of rotation for the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The reference O1 is illustrated with the same meaning in subsequent drawings. 59 to 62, a cross section at the center in the left-right direction of the variable decorative member 750 at the center in the left-right direction is illustrated.

The variable decoration member 750 located at the center of the left and right sides is allowed to be displaced vertically by the front through hole 723 (see FIG. 43), and the displacement in the front, rear, right and left directions is caused by the gap between the front through hole 723 and the cylindrical protrusion 753. It is supported by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-like displacement member 730, and is displaced as the large receiving portion 736 is displaced due to a change in the attitude of the plate-like displacement member 730.

In the following, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 (at the center in the left-right direction) due to the change in the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be explained. Note that, for ease of understanding, the change in attitude of the variable decorative member 750 in the direction of gravity is omitted in the illustration.

In the state changes shown in FIGS. 59, 60, and 61, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 has not been displaced (not retreated) to the position where it comes into contact with the side surface of the columnar projection 752 of the variable decorative member 750. . That is, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 is limited to vertical displacement.

On the other hand, in the state change between FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, the front side of the large receiving part 736 is displaced (retracted) to a position where it comes into contact with the front side of the columnar projection 752 of the variable decorative member 750, and the load in the front and rear direction is Transmission occurs. That is, the variable decorative member 750 is displaced not only in the up-down direction but also in the front-back direction.

Therefore, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 (at the center in the left-right direction) due to the change in the attitude of the plate-like displacement member 730 mainly occurs in the vertical direction (the change in attitude from the initial attitude of the plate-like displacement member 730 is small). 59, 60, and 61), and a second stage (a stage in which the attitude change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 from the initial attitude is large from the initial attitude, which occurs in a direction resulting from a combination of the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, Figs. 61 and 61). 62). Thereby, variations in the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 (at the center in the left-right direction) can be increased.

Here, the state shown in FIG. 61 corresponds to the one-sided excitation state, and the state shown in FIG. 62 corresponds to the excitation state, so by switching the driving mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the variable decorative member 750 The displacement mode can be switched between multiple variations.

As shown in FIG. 62, a gap is maintained between the upper surface of the plate-like main body of the bifurcated support member 751 and the lower end of the cylindrical portion forming the front through hole 723. Therefore, since the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 do not sandwich the variable decorative member 750 from above and below, the generation of load is suppressed, and the posture of the variable decorative member 750 can be maintained in an unstable state. I can do it.

63, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, and FIG. 66 are partial sectional views of the second operating unit 700 taken along the line LXIII-LXIII in FIG. 58. 63, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, and FIG. 66, the displacement of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated in chronological order, and in FIG. 63, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower terminal position (initial position). 64 shows the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in a horizontal position, FIG. 65 shows the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in an intermediate position, and FIG. 66 shows the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in a horizontal position. A state in which the displacement member 730 is in the upper end position is illustrated. 63 to 66, a cross section of the right variable decorative member 750 at the center in the left-right direction is illustrated.

The variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides are allowed to be displaced in the vertical direction by the front through hole 723 (see FIG. 43), and the displacement in the front, rear, right, and left directions is caused by the gap between the front through hole 723 and the cylindrical protrusion 753. It is supported by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-like displacement member 730, and is displaced as the large receiving portion 736 is displaced due to a change in the attitude of the plate-like displacement member 730.

The large receiving portions 736 on both the left and right sides are disposed at positions closer to the reference O1 in the vertical direction and farther from the reference O1 in the front-back direction than the large receiving portion 736a at the center left and right.

In the following, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 (on both the left and right sides) due to the change in the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be explained. Note that for ease of understanding, the change in attitude of the variable decorative member 750 in the direction of gravity is omitted from the illustration.

In the state changes shown in FIGS. 63, 64, and 65, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 has not been displaced (not retreated) to the position where it comes into contact with the side surface of the columnar projection 752 of the variable decorative member 750. . That is, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 is limited to vertical displacement.

On the other hand, in the state change between FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, the front side of the large receiving part 736 has been displaced to the extent that it comes into contact with the front side of the columnar projection 752 of the variable decorative member 750 (although it has retreated). ), the relationship does not push the vehicle any further, and load transmission in the longitudinal direction is suppressed.

That is, the load applied to the variable decorative member 750 from the large receiving portion 736 mainly consists of only the load in the vertical direction, and when only the vertical component of displacement is compared, the load applied to the variable decorative member 750 at the center in the left-right direction is The displacement amount of the variable decorative members 750 on both sides in the left-right direction is configured to be larger than the displacement amount of the variable decorative members 750 on both sides in the left-right direction.

In this way, while the displacement of the variable decoration member 750 (at the center in the left-right direction) due to the change in the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is configured to be different for each stage, the variable decoration member 750 on both sides in the left-right direction is Displacement of the decorative member 750 mainly occurs in the vertical direction. Thereby, depending on the degree of attitude change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 at the center in the left-right direction and the variable decorative member 750 on both sides in the left-right direction can be made different.

As described above, since the vertical displacement of the variable decorative members 750 on both sides in the left-right direction is largely ensured, as shown in FIG. The gap between the upper surface of the plate-like main body of the member 751 and the lower end of the cylindrical part forming the front through-hole 723 disappears, and in the same front-rear position, the plate-like main body of the bifurcated support member 751 forms the front through-hole 723. The dimensions are such that it bites into the cylindrical part.

In FIG. 66, on the premise that the plate-shaped main body of the bifurcated support member 751 does not deform, the state after the bifurcated support member 751 has moved parallel to the back side after contacting the lower end of the cylindrical portion constituting the front through hole 723 is shown. Illustrated.

Therefore, since the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 sandwich the variable decoration member 750 from above and below, the load in the vertical compression direction from the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is applied to the variable decoration member 750. Given. This increases the force for holding the posture of the variable decorative member 750, and the posture of the variable decorative member 750 can be stabilized.

Therefore, when the drive units 760 on both the left and right sides are in the excited state and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the upper end position, the variable decoration member 750 in the center of the left and right sides is supported in an unstable state (see FIG. 62). Thus, the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides are stably supported. Therefore, the appearance of the plurality of variable decorative members 750 can be made different after the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the upper end position.

That is, the variable decorative member 750 at the center of the left and right sides is configured to allow slight displacement (loosely supported) as a remnant of the attitude change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, while the variable decorative members 750 at both the left and right sides are By being configured (firmly supported) to suppress displacement, the player's attention can be drawn to the variable decorative member 750 located at the center of the left and right sides.

As described above, the displacement in the vertical direction due to the change in the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is larger for the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides than for the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right. While the player's attention is likely to be drawn to the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is maintained in the upper terminal position, the player's attention is drawn to the variable decorative members 750 in the center of the left and right sides. It can be made easier to collect.

Therefore, when setting the driving state of the drive unit 760 so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 does not reach the upper end position or repeatedly changes its position so as not to hold (do not stop) at the upper end position, It is possible to easily draw the player's line of sight to the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides, and when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is set to be slightly held in the upper end position, the player's eyes can be drawn to the variable decorative members 750 at the center of the left and right sides. This can make it easier to attract people's attention.

With this, when there is a specific light guide member 714 among the plurality of light guide members 714 that the player particularly wants to draw attention to, the player's line of sight is easily drawn to the variable decorative member 750 near that light guide member 714. By controlling the drive unit 760 to drive at a specific light guide member 714 (by controlling the light emission mode of the light guide member 714 in relation to the drive mode of the drive unit 760), the player's line of sight is directed to a specific light guide member 714. can be collected in.

FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the rotational displacement of the large receiving portion 736. In FIG. 67, a direction view of the reference O1 is illustrated, and the arrangement of the central large receiving portion 736a and the left and right outer left and right large receiving portions 736b in the horizontal attitude and the upper end attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is illustrated.

Since the central large receiving portion 736a is disposed above the front side of the reference O1, at a slight angle (approximately 4 degrees) at which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced, the longitudinal displacement is smaller than the vertical displacement. growing.

Since the left and right large receiving portions 736b are farther from the reference O1 than the central large receiving portion 736a, the displacement itself due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is larger than that of the central large receiving portion 736a. On the other hand, since the left and right large receiving portions 736b are disposed directly in front of the reference O1 (as they are disposed on the horizontal line), at a slight angle (approximately 4 degrees) at which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced, , the vertical displacement is larger than the longitudinal displacement.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by rotationally displacing the plate-shaped displacement member 730 around the reference O1, the displacement manner of the central large receiving portion 736a and the displacement manner of the left and right large receiving portions 736b can be made different. I can do it. Therefore, the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 displaceably supported by the large receiving portion 736 can be made different between the member disposed in the left-right center and the member disposed on the left-right outer side.

68, FIG. 69, FIG. 70, and FIG. 71 are partial sectional views of the second operating unit 700 taken along the line LXVIII-LXVIII in FIG. 58. 68, FIG. 69, FIG. 70, and FIG. 71, the displacement of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated in chronological order, and in FIG. 68, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower terminal position (initial position). 69 shows the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in a horizontal position, FIG. 70 shows the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in an intermediate position, and FIG. 71 shows the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in a horizontal position. A state in which the displacement member 730 is in the upper end position is illustrated.

68 to 71 illustrate a cross section of the light guide member 714 at the center in the left-right direction. As described above, until the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the middle position (see FIG. 70), the front part of the inner surface of the front small receiving part 735a and the front side part of the protruding columnar part 743 do not come into contact with each other, and the hollow member 740 The displacement is mainly in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, between the halfway position and the upper end position of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the front part of the inner surface of the front small receiving part 735a and the front side part of the protruding columnar part 743 come into contact with each other, and after the contact, the hollow member 740 is pushed toward the back side as the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is displaced. In this way, a time difference can be provided between the start timing of the vertical displacement of the hollow member 740 caused by being pushed along with the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the horizontal displacement.

As shown in FIGS. 68 and 71, the effect caused by the change in the width of light refracted through the upper end portion of the light guide member 714 as the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is displaced will be described.

When the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the lower end position (initial position), the width of the light emitted from the light guide member 714 to the player side is width LH1a, whereas when the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the upper terminal position In the case of the terminal position, the width of the light emitted from the light guide member 714 to the player side changes to the width LH1b (LH1a>LH1b).

On the other hand, even if the plate-like displacement member 730 is displaced, the width of the light emitted from the light guide member 714 to the third symbol display device 81 side (back side) is maintained at the width LH2. Therefore, as the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes, the balance between the amount of light emitted from the light guide member 714 toward the player and the amount of light emitted toward the back side can be changed.

That is, by driving the drive unit 760 and changing the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the upper end position, the plate-like displacement member 730 is directed toward the player compared to the case where the plate-like displacement member 730 is in the lower end position (initial position). Since the light becomes weaker, the light guide member 714 can be viewed directly (easier to see), and in a similar comparison, the light directed toward the third symbol display device 81 becomes stronger, so the light emitted from the light guide member 714 can be easily transferred to the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, when the player is paying attention to the third symbol display device 81, the player's line of sight can be drawn toward the light guide member 714.

FIG. 72 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along the line LXXII-LXXII in FIG. 58. A gap is formed between the partition member 708 and the illumination board 705 as described above, but in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, light emitted from the light emitting means 706 leaks through this gap. It is configured to suppress this.

That is, in this embodiment, there is a slight gap between the partition member 708 and the illumination board 705, and the size of the gap is equal to the emission surface (upper end surface) of the LED constituting the light emitting means 706 of the illumination board 705. Since it is shorter than the height dimension, the light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706a can be directed toward the light guide member 714 side with almost no leakage (see the enlarged view in FIG. 72).

Further, the light emitted from each individual light emitting means 706a is emitted toward a separate light guide member 714, but when focusing on the other light guide member 714 (one individual light emitting means 706a), the light emitted from each individual light emitting means 706a is It is configured to prevent the light from flowing toward light guide members 714 other than the light guide member 714 disposed above. That is, since the light guide members 714 are separated at their base ends by the displacement regulating member 716, it is possible to prevent light from passing through the inside of the light guide member 714 and going to other light guide members 714 (Fig. 72 (See enlarged image).

Further, although the light guide members 714 are configured to be indirectly connected to each other via the thin film cover member 712, the thin film cover member 712 is configured to be thin along the optical axis direction (vertical direction) of the individual light emitting means 706a. Therefore, the light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706a can be prevented from reaching other light guide members 714.

Therefore, when performing an effect in which the color and intensity of the light emitted from each individual light emitting means 706a are different, the light reaches the other light guide members 714 and the appearance of the other light guide members 714 changes. influence can be avoided. In other words, it is possible to prevent the light guiding member 714 from emitting light unintentionally or from seeing the light emitted from the separate individual light emitting means 706a in a mixed state through the light guiding member 714. .

Note that when the light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706a leaks from the gap between the illumination board 705 and the partition member 708, the light is mixed with the light from the overall light emitting means 706b and made visible to the player. I can do it.

As described above, the second operation unit 700 can be displaced in different manners by changing the driving manners (see FIGS. 56 and 57) of the drive units 760 disposed on the left and right lower sides of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, respectively. do.

For example, when displacing the plate-shaped displacement member 730 repeatedly, as a first displacement mode, one of the drive units 760 is repeatedly operated to reciprocate the plate-shaped displacement member 730 between the lower terminal position and the intermediate position. can be done. In addition, as a second displacement mode, by maintaining one drive unit 760 in an excited state and repeatedly operating the other drive unit 760, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is moved between the intermediate position and the upper end position. It can be displaced back and forth.

Further, for example, when stopping the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in a posture different from the lower end posture (initial posture), as a first stopping mode, one drive unit 760 is maintained in an excited state, thereby causing the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to The member 730 can be stopped in an intermediate position. Furthermore, as a second stopping mode, one drive unit 760 is maintained in an excited state, and the other drive unit 760 is maintained in an excited state, thereby stopping the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the upper end position. I can do it.

In particular, in this embodiment, the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the load member 761 when only one drive unit 760 is in an excited state is not provided with a structural difference between the left and right drive units 760. The posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is adjusted under the influence of the deflection generated in the load member 761 (see FIG. 55(a)).

Therefore, in the above-mentioned first displacement mode (stop mode) or second displacement mode (stop mode), one drive unit 760 and the other drive unit 760 are fixed as either the left or right drive unit 760. Rather, they can be replaced depending on the situation.

Therefore, unlike the case where one drive unit 760 and the other drive unit 760 are fixed as either the left or right drive unit 760, the drive unit 760 that is maintained in an excited state or the drive unit 760 that is repeatedly operated is By alternately switching according to the number of operations or switching for each period, the degree of fatigue of the constituent materials of the pair of left and right drive units 760 can be matched (adjusted). Thereby, the left and right drive units 760 can be replaced at the same time, and as a result, the service life of the second operating unit 700 can be maintained for a long time.

Note that the degree of deflection that occurs in the load member 761 is only an example and can be set arbitrarily, and it is sufficient that the deflection occurs regardless of the magnitude of the deflection. That is, any configuration that can create even a slight difference in whether one or both of the drive units 760 is drive-controlled is sufficient.

The second operation unit 700 is visibly disposed at a position between the third symbol display device 81 and the first winning hole 64 from the player's perspective through a window defined by the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). ). The control mode of the second operation unit 700 can be set arbitrarily, but for example, it controls the entry of game balls into the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the specific winning hole 65a, and the control of the drive unit 760. The control mode and the control mode of the lighting state of the light emitting means 706 of the illumination board 705 may be controlled in a manner that corresponds to the control mode.

For example, as for the correspondence with the control mode of the lighting state, when a plurality of game balls enter the first prize opening 64, the individual light emitting means 706a arranged on the left side is turned on according to the number of pending balls whose fluctuation is pending. When a plurality of game balls enter the second prize opening 140, the individual light emitting means 706a arranged on the right side may be controlled to light up in accordance with the number of reserved balls that are pending fluctuation. .

In this case, the player can be configured to be able to grasp the number of reserved balls by checking the light emitting mode of the light guide member 714. Furthermore, by associating the entry of the game ball with the control mode of the drive unit 760, the player's line of sight can be focused on the light guide member second operation unit 700.

For example, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 64, while driving the drive unit 760 in the first displacement mode described above, it is more advantageous for the player than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. When a game ball enters the second winning hole 140, which is often the case, by driving and controlling the drive unit 760 in the second displacement mode described above, the game ball The player can easily understand whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140.

Further, as another example of associating the entry of game balls with the control mode of the drive unit 760, the drive unit 760 may be drive-controlled in relation to the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls. That is, for example, if a game ball enters the first winning hole 64 when the number of reserved balls in the first winning hole 64 is at the upper limit, the player will get the prize ball, but the player will not have the opportunity to change the ball. Therefore, if the number of reserved balls in the first winning hole 64 is close to the upper limit, it is desirable to notify the player of this fact.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 of the second operating unit 700 can be displaced by driving and controlling the drive unit 760, and the appearance of the second operating unit 700 can be changed. This allows it to attract the attention of players. Therefore, by controlling the drive unit 760 when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is close to the upper limit (or is at the upper limit), the player can ) can be easily noticed.

In addition, as another example of associating the entry of a game ball with the control mode of the drive unit 760 and the control mode of the lighting state of the light emitting means 706 of the illumination board 705, the entry of a game ball into the specific winning opening 65a and It is also possible to make a correspondence.

In this case, for example, it may be associated with the game ball entering the specific winning hole 65a, or the number of balls expected to enter when the specific winning hole 65a is opened (maximum count number per jackpot round). It may be associated with the fact that more game balls have entered the specific winning hole 65a (so-called over-winning).

As a result, by visually confirming the state of the second operation unit 700, it is possible to confirm that a game ball has entered the specific winning hole 65a or that a number of game balls that exceed the expected number have entered the specific winning hole 65a. The player can be made to understand this.

The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 73. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the attraction force of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 acts in the vertical direction, but in the second embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 of the window movable unit 2150 is configured so that the attraction force acts in the horizontal direction. be done. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

73(a) and 73(b) are rear views of the window movable unit 2150 in the second embodiment. FIG. 73(a) shows a state where the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is energized and an electromagnetic force is generated, and FIG. 73(b) shows a state where the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is de-energized and the electromagnetic force disappears.

The window movable unit 2150 includes a contact member 2190 that is supported coaxially with the auxiliary device 160 and is disposed so as to be able to come into contact with the driven member 163 in the rotational direction, and a biasing spring SP21 that biases the contact member 2190. Equipped with.

A weight part W21 for adjusting the center of gravity position is formed at the upper end of the arm part 163c of the driven member 163, and the driven member 163 is configured to rotate due to its own weight when the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is in a non-excited state. (See FIG. 73(b)).

The contact member 2190 includes a cushion portion 175a disposed so as to be able to come into contact with the driven member 163, and a rotating member 2191 that supports the cushion portion 175a.

The rotating member 2191 is arranged to face the urging spring SP21, and the urging force of the urging spring SP21 is generated in a direction that pushes the rotating member 2191 back toward the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1.

The displacement mode of the driven member 163 and the rotating member 2191 will be explained. In the excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, the driven member 163 is maintained in a state of being attracted to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 by electromagnetic force.

On the other hand, in the non-energized state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, the driven member 163 rotates due to its own weight, and through the state shown in FIG. Rotate and displace. That is, until the state shown in FIG. 73(b), the driven member 163 is displaced alone, and from the state shown in FIG. 73(b), the driven member 163 and the rotating member 2191 are integrally displaced. That is, the displacement speed of the driven member 163 can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 73(b).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 73(b), the driven member 163 can be vibrated and displaced by the varying urging force. Thereby, variations in displacement of the driven member 163 can be increased.

A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 78. In the first embodiment, the case where the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced in conjunction with the rotational displacement of the arm member 414 has been described, but in the first operation unit 3400 of the third embodiment, the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced at a constant speed. A transmission means 3410 (for example, a transmission mechanism using a rack and pinion (not shown)) is provided to transmit the driving force so as to perform the driving force. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

74 to 77 are front views of the first operating unit 3400 in the third embodiment. 74 to 77, the downward displacement of the elevating plate 430 is illustrated in chronological order.

78(a) to 78(c) are schematic diagrams schematically illustrating the displacement relationship of the first operating unit 3400. 78(a) to 78(c), the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is shown on the horizontal axis, and in FIG. 78(a), the downward displacement amount of the elevating plate 430 is shown on the vertical axis. In b), the amount of rotation (angle change) of the auxiliary arm member 444 is shown on the vertical axis, and in FIG. 78(c), the amount of displacement of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 is shown on the vertical axis. .

In the first operating unit 3400, a long hole 3406 having an L-shape (a shape formed by integrating rectangles whose long sides are perpendicular to each other) is formed through the main body plate portion 401. The elongated hole portion 3406 is formed to have a size that allows the cylindrical portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 to be displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions.

In FIG. 74, the cylindrical portion 444d is disposed at the upper end position of the vertically long opening of the elongated hole portion 3406, and the displacement up to FIG. 75 causes the vertically long opening to be downwardly displaced. do. That is, in the displacement from FIG. 74 to FIG. 75, the lateral position of the cylindrical portion 444d has not changed, so no rotation occurs in the auxiliary arm member 444.

On the other hand, in FIGS. 75 to 77, the auxiliary arm member 444 is rotationally displaced in conjunction with the downward displacement of the elevating plate 430. That is, according to the present embodiment, there is a section in which the auxiliary arm member 444 is rotationally displaced as the elevating plate 430 is displaced in the vertical direction, and a section in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even if the elevating plate 430 is displaced in the vertical direction. can be configured.

By configuring a section in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even if the elevating plate 430 is displaced in the vertical direction, transmission of the driving force to the downstream side with respect to the auxiliary arm member 444 is cut off. This role is similar to that of the vertical portion 491a of the fixed transmission plate 490 described in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35). According to this embodiment, since the vertical portion 491a can be omitted from the fixed transmission plate 490, the vertical dimension of the fixed transmission plate 490 can be reduced (improving the degree of freedom in designing the fixed transmission plate 490). be able to).

Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the fixed transmission plate 490 can be improved while maintaining the effect of being able to shift the timing of the operation of the elevating plate 430 and the wing-like member 460.

In this embodiment, the transmission means 3410 makes it easy to vertically displace the elevating plate 430 in a uniform linear motion (see FIG. 78(a)). If the configuration of the operating unit 440 is used as is, the speed of rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 changes significantly during the displacement.

To be more specific, the angular velocity of the rotational displacement of the first operating unit 4300 near the second intermediate state is lower than the angular velocity of the rotational displacement near the retracted state or extended state of the first operating unit 3400. (The amount of angular change with respect to the amount of displacement of the base end side portion 444a becomes smaller).

Therefore, it becomes impossible to displace the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 at a substantially constant speed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as a substitute for the lower left rotary gear 441, a gear having the same gear ratio as the arcuate gear portion 444d is provided, which meshes with the upper right rotary gear 441 and is connected to the relative displacement member 442. A rotary gear 3441 with an arm is provided with an extending portion. Thereby, the change in the angular velocity of the auxiliary arm member 444 can be partially offset, and the difference in the displacement mode between the elevating plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 can be eliminated.

That is, instead of the configuration of the first embodiment in which the relative displacement member 442 is vertically displaced in accordance with (proportional to) the amount of angular change with respect to the amount of vertical displacement of the base end side portion 444a, the amount of vertical displacement of the base end side portion 444a is changed. By converting the amount of angular change to the amount of vertical displacement of the arm tip of the arm-equipped rotary gear 3441 again, and vertically displacing the relative displacement member 442 in accordance with the amount of vertical displacement of the arm tip. , it is possible to partially eliminate (cancel out) the difference in displacement mode between the elevating plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442.

Therefore, the displacement mode of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 can be made similar to the displacement mode of the elevating plate 430.

In this embodiment, the electrical wiring DH1 may be configured to pass through the rotation axis of the arm-equipped rotation gear 3441 and be guided by the relative displacement member 442. That is, by continuously forming the path of the electrical wiring DH1 in the order of the auxiliary arm member 444, the lifting plate 430, the rotary gear with arm 3441, and the relative displacement member 442, the electrical wiring DH1 can be routed in the order of the auxiliary arm member 444, the lifting plate 430, the rotary gear with arm 3441, and the relative displacement member 442. It is possible to avoid large fluctuations in the path length of DH1.

In this case, since the electrical wiring DH1 can be easily connected to the decoration part 493, it is possible to arrange an illumination board in the decoration part 493 and easily perform a light emitting effect using a light emitting means such as an LED. I can do it.

The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a detection sensor for detecting the state of the second operating unit 700 is not arranged, but the second operating unit 4700 of the fourth embodiment detects the state of the drive unit 4760. It is equipped with a detection device 4780 for detecting. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

79(a) and 79(b) are front views of the drive unit 4760 of the second operation unit 4700 in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 79(a) and 79(b), illustrations of the front lid member 770 and the illumination board 777 are omitted except for the curved protrusion 774, and the outer shape of the curved protrusion 774 is shown by imaginary lines. Illustrated.

Further, FIG. 79(a) shows a state in which no current is flowing through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the load member 4761 is placed in the lowered position due to its own weight, and FIG. 79(b) shows a state in which no current is flowing through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. A state in which the metal plate member MB2 is attracted by the electromagnetic force generated by the flow and the load member 4761 is placed in the raised position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 79(a) and 79(b), the load member 4761 comes into contact with the lower regulating part 764 in the lowered position and is regulated from downward displacement, and in the raised position it contacts the upper regulating part 765. Rising displacement is regulated.

As a comparison with the load member 761 described in the first embodiment, the load member 4761 has other features except that the overhang portion 761d is changed to a thick overhang portion 4761f and a thin overhang portion 4761g. The configuration is the same.

The thick protruding portion 4761f is a portion that protrudes from the extending tip of the rod-like extending portion 761b along the extending direction of the rod-like extending portion 761b with the same wall thickness (front-rear width) as the rod-like extending portion 761b. The load member 4761 comes into contact with the upper regulating portion 765 in the process of being placed in the raised position, and corresponds to a stop portion that receives a load.

The thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g has a thinner plate shape (shorter longitudinal width) than the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f from the overhanging tip of the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f, and overhangs along the extending direction of the rod-like extension portion 761b. It is a part. The upper and lower surfaces of the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) and the upper and lower surfaces (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) of the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f are formed flush with each other.

The thin-walled projecting portion 4761g is configured to abut against the upper regulating portion 765 in the same way as the thick-walled projecting portion 4761f during the process in which the load member 4761 is placed in the raised position. Since it is thin and thin, it is damaged preferentially compared to the thick protruding portion 4761f due to accumulation of fatigue due to repeated excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

From this point of view, the upper and lower surfaces of the thin overhanging portion 4761g (the upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) and the upper and lower surfaces of the thick overhanging portion 4761f (the upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) are They do not need to be formed flush; it is sufficient that at least the upper surface is flush, and the position of the lower surface can be set arbitrarily. For example, by making the vertical width of the thin-walled overhang 4761g shorter than the vertical width of the thick-walled overhang 4761f, the number of repeated excitations of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 before the thin-walled overhang 4761g is damaged can be reduced. It is possible to adjust the period until the thin overhanging portion 4761g is damaged.

The drive unit 4760 includes a detection device 4780. The detection device 4780 includes a printed circuit board 4781 fixed to the lower part of the support case 763, and a detection sensor 4782 arranged on the printed circuit board 4781 so that a thin protrusion 4761g can be inserted into and removed from a detection groove.

The detection sensor 4782 is a photocoupler type detection device, and when the load member 4761 is in the lowered position, the thin wall protrusion 4761g blocks the detection light (see FIG. 79(a)), and when the load member 4761 is in the upper position, the thin wall protrusion 4761g blocks the detection light. The projecting portion 4761g is arranged above so as not to block the detection light (see FIG. 79(b)).

The function of the detection sensor 4782 will be explained. Since the detection result of the detection sensor 4782 and the position of the load member 4761 usually correspond, it is possible to confirm whether the load member 4761 is operating appropriately based on the detection result of the detection sensor 4782. The MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) performs this confirmation, and if it is determined that there is a malfunction, it generates an alarm or displays an error message on the display device, so that the malfunction of the second operation unit 4700 can be detected by the player or the user. This can make it easier for the hall clerk to notice.

In addition, if the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g is damaged (broken) and falls, the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g and the load member 4761 will no longer operate synchronously, so that changes in the position of the load member 4761 and detection by the detection sensor 4782 The results no longer correspond. When the position change of the load member 4761 and the detection result of the detection sensor 4782 no longer correspond, the thin wall overhang can be prevented by generating an alarm in the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) or displaying an error message on the display device. It is possible to make it easier for players and hall staff to notice that the portion 4761g has been damaged (broken).

In this way, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 4782 can be used both as a position detection means for detecting the position of the load member 4761 and as a damage detection means for detecting damage (breakage) of the load member 4761. .

According to this embodiment, even if the thin-walled projecting portion 4761g is damaged, the load member 4761 can be stopped at the raised position by the thick-walled projecting portion 4761f coming into contact with the upper regulating portion 765. Therefore, the load member 4761 can be displaced in the same manner as before the thin-walled protruding portion 4761g was damaged. Therefore, even if the thin-walled protruding portion 4761g is damaged, it is not necessary to immediately stop the game and enter a maintenance state, and the game can be continued for a while, thereby preventing unexpected disadvantages to the player. can be avoided.

In this way, by providing a portion that is preferentially damaged (broken) among the portions that come into contact with the upper regulating portion 765 and detecting the breakage (breakage) with the detection sensor 4782, the thick protruding portion 4761f is damaged. The load member can be replaced before fatigue accumulates to the point of (rupture).

The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c bends and deforms in relation to the rigidity of itself, but the second operation unit 5700 of the fifth embodiment applies a load to the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c. A deflection adjustment device 5780 is provided to adjust deflection deformation. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

80(a) and 80(b) are cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 5700 of the fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the LVa-LVa line in FIG. 53. The deflection adjustment device 5780 includes a box-shaped base member 5781 in which a metal coil is built-in, and an iron bar that is supported by the base member 5781 so as to be able to advance and retreat in the vertical direction, and is arranged to protrude above the base member 5781. adjustment member 5782.

As shown in FIG. 80(b), even if the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 are in the unilaterally excited state, the deflection adjustment device 5780 is driven, so that the deflection deformation of the load member 761 is small (the deflection deformation is approximately half). state). In other words, the deflection adjustment device 5780 is adopted as an alternative to the configuration in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is changed to the upper end position by energizing the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (both left and right) in the first embodiment. ing.

That is, while the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is kept in the energized state on one side (see FIG. 80(a)), a metal coil (not shown) built in the base member 5781 of the deflection adjustment device 5780 moves around the adjustment member 5782. By energizing the metal coil in the coiled state to form an electromagnet and driving the adjustment member 5782 upward, the load in the direction of returning (recovering) the deflection of the vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c is applied. It can be provided to the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c (see FIG. 80(b)).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by cooperatively driving the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 on either the left or right side of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the adjustment device 5780 disposed on the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 side, the plate-shaped It becomes possible to maintain the displacement member 730 in the lower end position (initial position), the intermediate position, and the upper end position.

As a result, the arrangement of the driving means can be more rigid than in the case where the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 needs to be arranged as a pair of left and right. For example, since the arrangement of the electrical wiring connected to each device of the driving means can be fixed, it is possible to avoid dispersing the area required as a route for the wiring to various locations (for example, left and right).

Next, the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 81 to 121. In the sixth embodiment, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the specific winning hole 65a are formed in a winning hole unit 930 configured as one unit. The same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the following, similarly to the first embodiment, the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is taken as the gravitational direction, and the left and right rear of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 10 will be described as the front side (or front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 as the back side (or rear side).

First, with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82, the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 disposed on the base plate of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 82, illustration of units (for example, center frame 86 (refer FIG. 81) etc.) other than the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arrange|positioned on the base board 60 is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 82, the base plate 60 has a through hole 60a extending in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 at the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 82) of the central opening where the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81) is attached. is formed by router processing.

The through hole 60a is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940, which will be described later, when viewed from the front, and a drive unit 960 and a specific winning a prize unit 950 arranged in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

On the base plate 60, a winning opening unit 930 is arranged from the gaming area (front) side, and a ball throwing unit 970 is arranged from the opposite (back) side from the gaming area, and each is fastened and fixed with a tapping screw or the like. In addition, the detailed structure of the prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described later.

Next, the overall configuration of the winning a prize opening unit 930 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 83 to 86. FIG. 83(a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 83(b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 84(a) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 84(b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930.

As shown in FIGS. 83 to 86, the winning opening unit 930 includes a front unit 940, a specific winning opening unit 950 disposed on the back side of the front unit 940 (front of the page in FIG. 83(b)), and Mainly includes a drive unit 960 disposed on the back side (front side of the paper in FIG. 83(b)) of the specific winning a prize unit 950, and a displacement member 966 disposed between the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940. Formed in preparation for.

As described above, the front unit 940 has an outer shape larger than the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 when viewed from the front. Therefore, by arranging the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) on the base plate 60, the opening of the through hole 60a can be closed. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can pass through a path other than the game ball passing path (the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the specific winning hole 65a) formed in the front unit 940, which will be described later. Passing through the through hole 60a from the space can be suppressed.

Part of the specific winning opening unit 950 is inserted inside the specific winning opening 65a formed in the front unit 940, and the game ball can be thrown inside the specific winning opening unit 950 through the specific winning opening 65a. be done. In addition, detailed explanation about the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 will be mentioned later.

The drive unit 960 is arranged on the back side of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, and a part of it (insertion part 965e of the transmission member 965) is connected to the wing member 945 arranged in the front unit via the displacement member 966. Concatenated. Thereby, the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 can be operated to rotationally displace the wing member 945. Note that a detailed explanation of the operation of the wing member 945 will be given later.

Next, the front unit 940 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. 87(a) is a front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 87(b) is a rear view of the front unit 940. 88 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit 940. Note that in FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b), the outer shape of the wing member 945 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the front unit 940 includes a back base 941 fastened to the base plate 60, and a front base 943 disposed on the back base 941 at a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. and two (a pair) wing members 945 rotatably disposed between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other.

The rear base 941 has an approximately T-shape with an upside-down outer shape when viewed from the front, and is formed from a plate-shaped body having a predetermined thickness. In addition, the back base 941 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and when the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) is disposed on the base plate 60, the base plate 60 is penetrated through the back base 941. The inside of the hole 60a can be visually recognized.

The back base 941 has a first out port 71 cut out on the downstream side of the game ball (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 87(b)), and an upper side of the first out port 71 (see FIG. 87(b)). b) A specific winning opening 65a which is located in the upper part and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and a second winning opening 140 which is formed through and passing above the specific winning opening 65a, which is opposite to the first out opening 71. It mainly includes a first prize opening 64 formed with a notch on the side edge.

Further, the back base 941 includes a plurality of through holes 941a that penetrate in the thickness direction at the outer edge. The through-hole 941a has a first through-hole 941a1 whose diameter decreases from the front side (the front side in FIG. 87(a) on the paper) toward the back side (the front side on the paper in FIG. 87(b)), and a first through-hole 941a1 that decreases in diameter from the back side toward the front side. The second through hole 941a2 is formed by a second through hole 941a2 whose diameter is reduced.

The first through hole 941a1 is a hole through which a tapping screw for fastening and fixing the back base 941 (winning port unit 930) to the base plate 60 is inserted, and the inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the threaded part of the tapping screw. be done. Further, as described above, the first through hole 941a1 is formed so as to decrease in diameter from the front side toward the back side, so that the head of the tapping screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the head of the tapping screw from protruding into the game area. Furthermore, a positioning protrusion 942a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the back surface of the back base 941 is formed near the first through hole 941a1.

The positioning protrusion 942a is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 60b (see FIG. 82) formed around the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and has an outer diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the positioning hole 60b. Ru. Thereby, the back base 941 (winning a prize opening unit 930) can be positioned and disposed with respect to the base plate 60.

The second through hole 941a2 is a hole through which a screw for fastening the back base 941 and the front base 943 is inserted from the back base 941 side, and the inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the threaded portion of the screw. That is, the front base 943 is fastened to the rear base 941 from the rear side with screws. In this case, when removing the front base 943 from the back base 941, it is necessary to remove the winning opening unit 930 from the base plate 60. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from fraudulently removing only the front base 943 from the front side (playing area side) of the game board 13.

Further, as described above, the second through hole 941a2 is formed so as to decrease in diameter from the back side toward the front side, so that the head of the screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the back side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heads of the screws from protruding toward the back side of the back base 941. As a result, when the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 described later is arranged on the back side of the back base 941, it is possible to suppress the head of the screw from coming into contact with the specific winning a prize opening unit 950.

The outer shape of the lower end in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87(b)) of the back base 941 is formed along the inner edge of the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 81) of the game board 13. The first out port 71 is formed in such a size that the edge of the bottom of the notch (the upper edge in the direction of gravity) is spaced apart from the inner edge of the inner rail 61 by at least the diameter of the game ball. As a result, among the game balls flowing down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 (base board 60), the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, the specific winning hole 65a, and the general winning hole 63() are Game balls that have not flown into either can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 (the side opposite to the game area (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)) through the first out port 71.

The first winning opening 64 is formed by cutting out the end of the upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 87(b)) opposite to the first out opening 71 in a semicircular shape. Further, the first prize opening 64 is formed to have an inner edge larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving part 941g, which will be described later, can be sent to the back side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)) via the first prize opening 64.

At the edge of the first winning opening 64, there is a first receiving part 941g formed in a cup shape and protruding toward the gaming area side (the front side of the page in FIG. 87(a)), and a first receiving part 941g on the side opposite to the gaming area (see FIG. b) A first ball throwing portion 942g projecting in a U-shaped cross section is formed on the front side in the drawing.

The first receiving portion 941g is formed in a size that can receive one game ball inside. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area from the upper side of the first receiving part 941g (first winning opening 64) in the direction of gravity can be made to flow into the inside of the first receiving part 941g.

Further, the first receiving portion 941g is formed such that the bottom surface thereof is inclined downward toward the back side (the side opposite to the gaming area (the front side in FIG. 87(b))). Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the first receiving part 941g can be thrown to the back side (first ball throwing part 942g side) through the first prize opening 64.

Furthermore, the first receiving portion 941g extends from the upper end of both ends of the base plate 60 in the transverse direction (left-right direction in FIG. 87) toward the second winning opening side (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 87(a))). The base plate 60 is provided with a guide portion 941g1 that is inclined and erected outward in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. The guide portion 941g1 is formed into a plate-shaped body having a predetermined thickness, and the side surface opposite to the gaming area (back side) is connected to the front side of the back base 941. Thereby, the rigidity of the first receiving part 941g can be increased, and it is possible to suppress damage to the first receiving part 941g due to the game ball flowing down the downstream area colliding with the first receiving part 941g.

In addition, if the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the specific winning hole 65 are integrally formed on the back base 941, there will be insufficient placement of game nails that change the game balls flowing down the game area. It becomes difficult to change the direction of flow. Therefore, where there is a risk that the player's interest may be lost, by causing the game ball to collide with the guide portion 941g1, it is possible to change the flowing direction of the game ball, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being lost. .

Furthermore, since the guide part 941g1 is formed to be inclined outward in the lateral direction of the base plate 60 (both sides in the left-right direction in FIG. 87(a)) toward the second winning opening 140 side, the game that collides with the guide part 941g1 The ball can be guided to the outside of the rear base 941 in the horizontal direction. Thereby, the game ball can collide again with a game nail (not shown) arranged on the base plate 60, and it is possible to easily change the direction in which the game ball flows down. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

The first ball throwing portion 942g is formed in a U-shape with an open upper side in the direction of gravity, and the distance between opposing inner edges thereof is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first ball throwing section 942g is formed such that the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the back side (the side opposite to the gaming area (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)), and the protruding tip side is formed by a ball throwing unit, which will be described later. It abuts against the edge of the inlet 982d of 970. Thereby, the game ball thrown from the inside of the first receiving part 941g to the first ball throwing part 942g via the first prize opening 64 can be rolled to the back side and thrown to the ball throwing unit 970.

The first ball throwing portion 942g includes a first recessed cutout portion 942g1 in which the upper end of the protruding tip is cut out in a rectangular shape when viewed from the side. The first recessed cutout 942g1 is a notch on which a second protrusion 982d1 of a ball throwing unit 970, which will be described later, is placed, and is recessed to have substantially the same size as the side view shape of the second protrusion 982d1. Note that a detailed explanation of the arrangement of the first ball throwing section 942g and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described later.

The second winning hole 140 is formed through the hole in a substantially D-shape with an upward curve when viewed from the front, and has an inner edge larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, a game ball thrown between the opposing wing members 945, which will be described later, can be thrown to the back side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)) via the second prize opening 140.

The second winning opening 140 has a front side wall part 941b that protrudes toward the front side (game area side (front side of the paper in FIG. 87(a))) and a back side (opposite side to the game area (FIG. 87(a))). (b) A second ball throwing portion 942c that protrudes toward the front side)) is formed.

The front side wall portion 941b is formed along both side edges of the second winning opening in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. The front side wall portion 941b is set to a size such that its protruding tip surface comes into contact with a ball throwing guide portion 943d of the front base 943, which will be described later.

The second ball throwing portion 942c is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the back, and is formed at each of both ends of the lower edge of the second winning opening 140. The second ball throwing portion 942c has a dimension in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 87(b)) set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the rolling part 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later, can be prevented from falling from the upper surface of the rolling part 943a.

The pair of second ball throwing parts 942c are arranged such that the distance between the opposing sides in the lateral direction of the base plate 60 (the left-right direction in FIG. 87(b)) is the width direction of the base plate 60 of the rolling part 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later. The length is set to be approximately the same as the length in the left-right direction (FIG. 87(b)), and a rolling portion 943a is disposed inside. Further, in the second ball throwing portion 942c, a second recessed cutout portion 942c1 is cut out on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 87(b)) of the protruding tip portion. The second recessed notch 942c1 is a portion on which a projection 981b1 of a passage unit, which will be described later, is placed, and its detailed description will be described later.

The back base 941 extends from the gaming area side of the back base 941 toward the other side in the gravity direction near the second winning opening 140 (first winning opening 64 side (upper side in FIG. 87(b))), and from the gaming area side of the back base 941 to the side opposite to the gaming area. a first shaft hole 941d recessed in two places in a circular shape, two first openings 941e curved around the axis of the first shaft hole 941d and penetrating through the back base 941; A first guide wall 942b located on the outside in the opposing direction of the two first openings 941e and protruding from the back side, and a protruding part 941c protruding between the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140. It is formed with the following.

The first shaft hole 941d is capable of supporting a shaft member 945a that pivotally supports a wing member 945, which will be described later, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as an outer diameter of the shaft member 945a. Thereby, one end of the shaft member 945a can be inserted into the first shaft hole 941d and supported.

The first opening 941e has an arc shape with the center of the first shaft hole 941d as its axis. Further, the first opening 941e allows the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 to be inserted therethrough, and is set larger than the maximum width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. This can prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with the inner surface of the first opening 941e when the wing member 945 rotates.

The protruding portion 941c has an isosceles triangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and the corner of the isosceles connecting portion is located on substantially the same plane as the center position between opposing wing members 945, which will be described later. Further, the scalene side of the protruding portion 941c is formed to extend parallel to the facing direction of the wing member 945, and its length is set to be slightly larger than the dimension between the opposing wings of the wing member 945 in the closed state. Ru. Further, the protruding portion 941c is formed at a position where the shortest distance from the feather member 945 in the closed state is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being thrown into the second winning a prize opening 140 (between the pair of wing members 945 facing each other). Note that a detailed explanation of the closed state of the wing member 945 will be given later.

The pair of first guide walls 942b are walls that guide the displacement of the displacement member 966 when the displacement member 966, which will be described later, is displaced. 966 is set to be slightly larger than the distance dimension in the short direction.

Further, the pair of first guide walls 942b are formed into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the rear, and extend in a direction in which bent portions approach each other. Thereby, the protruding portion 966a of the displacement member 966 can be brought into contact with the bent portion of the first guide wall 942b, and the displacement distance of the displacement member 966 can be regulated.

The specific winning opening 65a is formed into a long rectangular opening in the direction in which the pair of feather members 945 face each other (left and right direction in FIG. 87(b)), and a plate member 951 of the specific winning opening unit 950, which will be described later, is placed inside the opening. can be inserted. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area can be sent into the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 via the specific winning a prize opening 65a.

In addition, the back base 941 includes an upright portion 942f that surrounds the specific winning opening 65a and is erected on the back side (on the opposite side to the gaming area), and a recessed part from the back side at both longitudinal ends of the specific winning opening 65a. A recessed portion 941h is provided.

The shape of the inner edge of the upright portion 942f is set to be substantially the same as the front view shape of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, which will be described later. Thereby, the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 can be easily positioned and arranged inside the upright portion 942f.

The concave portion 941h is located at a position corresponding to the wall portion 953d into which the rod member 952 that becomes the rotation axis of the plate member 951 of the specific winning a prize port unit 950 is inserted when the specific winning a prize port unit 950 is disposed on the back base 941. It is formed. Thereby, when the rod member 952 is displaced in the direction of coming out of the plate member 951, the end surface of the rod member 952 can be brought into contact with the inner edge of the recess 941h, and the rod member 952 can be prevented from coming out of the plate member 951.

Further, the front base 942 has a bulging portion 942h that bulges out between the facing portion 942f and the second ball throwing portion 942c, and a bulging portion 942h that bulges out between the facing portion 942f and the second ball throwing portion 942c, and a side of the first guide wall 942b from the outer circumferential surface of the standing portion 942f (Fig. 87(b) ) a second guide wall 942d protruding upward).

The bulging portion 942h bulges toward the back side of the back base 941 and is connected to the upright portion 942f and the second ball throwing portion 942c. As a result, when a displacement member 966 (see FIG. 90), which will be described later, is arranged on the back side of the back base 941 (on the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)), there is a gap between the displacement member 966 and the back of the back base 941 A predetermined gap can be formed. As a result, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the friction (sliding) resistance of the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

The second guide wall 942d is a wall surface that guides the displacement of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966, and the distance between the pair of opposing second guide walls 942d is slightly larger than the distance in the width direction of the displacement member 966. Set. Therefore, when the displacement member 966 is disposed between the pair of second guide walls 942d facing each other, the displacement distance of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction can be restricted.

The back base 941 has a half-shaped structure attached to the edge of the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) at both longitudinal ends (left and right direction in FIG. 87(b)) of the specific winning opening 65a toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). A second outlet 941f formed by cutting out a circular shape is provided. The second out port 941f is a notch for throwing the game ball that has entered the third receiving part 944a formed in the front base 943 to the back side of the base plate 60 (the side opposite to the game area), formed into a shape larger than the diameter of the

Further, a third ball throwing portion 942e that is formed in a substantially U-shape when viewed from the rear and protrudes toward the rear side is formed at the edge of the second out port 941f. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the back side through the inside of the second out port 941f can be thrown to the inside of the third ball throwing section 942e.

The third ball throwing part 942e is formed so that the curved part (lower part) of a U-shape in rear view is inclined downward in the direction of gravity as it protrudes to the back side, and the third ball throwing part 942e is formed to be inclined downward in the direction of gravity as the curved part (lower part) of the U-shape in rear view protrudes to the back side. can be rolled to the back side. A detailed explanation of the game ball rolling on the inner surface of the third ball throwing section 942e will be given later.

The front base 943 is formed into an upside-down substantially T-shape whose outer shape in front view is smaller than that of the back base. Further, the front base 943 is formed from a colorless and transparent plate-shaped body. This allows the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the opposing front base 943 and back base 941.

The front base 943 mainly includes a second receiving part 943c and a third receiving part 944a protrudingly provided at positions corresponding to the second winning opening 140 and the second out opening 941f of the above-mentioned back base 941. It is formed.

The second receiving portion 943c is formed into a substantially U-shape when viewed from the back, and the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 is arranged inside when viewed from the front. Furthermore, a pair of wing members 945, which will be described later, are provided on the open side of the second receiving portion 943c (the open side of the U-shape). Furthermore, the protrusion distance of the second receiving portion 943c toward the rear base 941 side is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to throw a game ball between the opposing sides of the back base 941 and the front base 943, and the game ball is suppressed from flowing into the second prize opening 140 from the outside between the opposing sides of a pair of wing members 945, which will be described later. can.

The second receiving portion 943c also includes a ball throwing guide portion 943d protruding inward from its inner edge, and a first recessed portion recessed in a circular shape from the rear base 941 side (the front side in FIG. 87(b)). 943ca, and a rolling portion 943a that protrudes from the inside of the curved portion toward the back base.

A pair of ball throwing guide portions 943d are formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the pair of wing members 945 (lower side in FIG. 87(b)). Further, the pair of ball throwing guide portions 943d are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the front side wall portions 941b of the back base 941, and when the back base 941 and the front base 943 are combined, their end surfaces come into contact with each other. . As a result, the game ball that has flowed between the pair of opposing wing members 945 can be thrown between the opposing ball throwing guide portions 943d.

The rolling portion 943a is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) between the pair of opposing ball throwing guide portions 943d, and an end surface 943a1 on the upper side in the gravity direction is inclined downward toward the rear base 941 side. It is formed. Further, as described above, the rolling portion 943a is disposed inside the recess 941j in a state where the back base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (combined), and the tip thereof is located on the back surface of the back base 941. side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)).

As a result, the game ball thrown between the pair of opposing ball throwing guide parts 943d can be thrown to the end face 943a1 of the rolling part, and the game ball can be rolled on the upper part of the end face 943a1 to the back side of the back base 941. He can throw the ball to.

Further, the front base 943 includes an annular protrusion 943b that protrudes in an annular shape at a position facing the first shaft hole 941d of the back base 941 on the opening side (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the second receiving portion 943c. The annular projection 943b has a second shaft hole 943b1 at its inner edge, into which the other end of a shaft member 945a that pivotally supports a wing member 945, which will be described later, can be inserted. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the first shaft hole 941d of the back base 941. Therefore, the shaft member 945a can be held and supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943, which face each other.

The third receiving portion 944a has a substantially U-shape when viewed from the rear, and the second outlet 941f of the rear base 941 is disposed inside the third receiving portion 944a. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be made to flow into the inside of the third receiving part 944a, and the game balls that have flowed into the third receiving part 944a can be passed through the second outlet 941f to the rear surface. You can throw the ball to the side (opposite the playing area).

Further, in the second receiving part 943c and the third receiving part 944a, a first recessed part 943ca and a second recessed part 944a1 are recessed in a circular shape from the back base 941 side (the near side in the paper surface of FIG. 87(b)). The first recess 943ca and the second recess 944a1 are fastened parts into which the screw inserted into the second through hole 941a2 described above is screwed, and are formed coaxially with the axis of the second through hole 941a2 of the back base 941. be done. Thereby, the back base 941 and the front base 943 can be fastened together.

A pair of feather members 945 are arranged with the second prize opening 140 formed in the back base 941 sandwiched therebetween when viewed from the front. The wing member 945 is made of a colored translucent material and is visible to the player through the front base 943.

The wing member 945 is formed into a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a thickness smaller than that between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. The wing member 945 mainly includes an insertion hole 945c formed through the thickness direction (from the back base 941 side to the front base 943 side) and a protrusion 945b protruding from the surface (back surface) on the back base 941 side.

The insertion hole 945c is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. Therefore, when fastening (assembling) the back base 941 and the front base 943, by inserting the shaft member 945a into the insertion hole 945c, the back base 941 and the front base 943 can be connected to each other while the wing member 945 is rotatable. Can be placed between opposite sides. Thereby, the wing member 945 can be displaced between a closed state in which the opposing side surfaces are parallel to the direction of gravity, and an open state in which one side of the side surfaces is displaced outward in the opposing direction.

The protrusion 945b is connected to a displacement member 966, which will be described later, and is a transmission part that transmits the drive of the drive unit 960 to the wing member 945, and the distal end thereof is connected to the displacement member 966 through the first opening 941e of the back base 941. The dimensions are set such that it protrudes toward the back side of the back base 941 (the side opposite to the gaming area). Note that a detailed explanation of the connection state between the protrusion 945b and the displacement member 966 will be given later.

Next, the displacement member 966 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 90. 90(a) is a front view of the displacement member 966, FIG. 90(b) is a side view of the displacement member 966, and FIG. 90(c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 966 is formed from a plate-shaped body having a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c formed therethrough in the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 90(b)) at a substantially central position when viewed from the front. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c when viewed from the front is larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above, and the second winning opening 140 is arranged inside. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area via the second winning opening 140 can be suppressed from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 966 has a protruding portion 966a that protrudes from one end side (upper side in FIG. 90(a)) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 90(a)) in the lateral direction (left-right direction in FIG. 90(a)), and It has a bulging portion 966b that bulges from the end side (lower side in FIG. 90(b)) to the back side (back side base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The protruding portion 966a includes a sliding groove 966a2 formed to penetrate the displacement member 966 in the thickness direction, and a contact portion 966a1 located on both outer sides of the displacement member 966 in the transverse direction and extending in the longitudinal direction. Equipped with

The sliding groove 966a2 is an elongated hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 described above is inserted, and is formed as an elongated hole that is long in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. Further, the width of the sliding groove 966a2 is set to be larger than the width of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. Thereby, when the wing member 945 rotates, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with both widthwise opposing inner surfaces of the sliding groove 966a2 and restricting the operation of the wing member 945.

The contact portion 966a1 is formed to bulge out on the front side (front base 943 side (see FIG. 85)) and the back side (back base 941 side). Thereby, the area in which the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the front base 943 and the drive unit 960, which will be described later, can be reduced. As a result, the resistance when the displacement member 966 is driven can be reduced.

The bulging portion 966b is formed to bulge toward the back side (back side base 941 side), and a horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 966b1 is formed in the inner portion when viewed from the back. The connection hole 966b1 is an opening into which a tip (insertion portion 965e) of a transmission member 965 of a drive unit 960 described later is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965. Note that a detailed explanation of the connection state between the connection hole 966b1 and the transmission member 965 will be given later.

The connecting hole 966b1 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the transverse direction of the displacement member 966, and is connected to one side abutted portion 966b2 of the inner circumferential surface on the other side in the gravity direction (the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 90(a))). , and a contact portion 966b3 on the other side of the inner circumferential surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 90(a))).

The one-side abutted portion 966b2 is a surface that is abutted by a bulging portion 965e1 of an insertion portion 965e of a transmission member 965, which will be described later. The displacement member 966 can displace the wing member 945 to the open state (see FIG. 92) by slidingly displacing the bulging portion 965e1 in contact with the one side abutted portion 966b2.

The other side abutted portion 966b3 is a surface that is abutted by a side surface opposite to a bulged portion 965e1 of an insertion portion 965e of a transmission member 965, which will be described later. The displacement member 966 can displace the wing member 945 to the closed state (see FIG. 91) by being slid and displaced by the side surface opposite to the bulging portion 965e1 being brought into contact with the other side abutted portion 966b3. I can do it.

Next, the connection state between the displacement member 966 and the wing member 945 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. 91 and 92 are rear views of the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the displacement member 966 in the range XCI of FIG. 87(b). In addition, in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, the outer shape of the wing member 945 is illustrated by a chain line. Further, FIG. 91 shows the wing member 945 in a closed state, and FIG. 92 shows the wing member 945 in an open state.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in rear view, and the first protrusion 945b is formed parallel to the opposing surfaces of the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state. Mainly includes a surface 945b1, a third surface 945b3 that is connected to the first surface 945b1 and located on one side in the gravity direction (specific winning opening 65a side), and a second surface 945b2 that is connected to the first surface 945b1 and the third surface 945b3. Prepare for.

The sliding groove 966a2 has a lower inner surface 966a4 located on one side in the direction of gravity (the side of the connecting hole 966b1) and abuts against the protrusion 945b to displace the wing member 945 to the open state, and a lower inner surface 966a4 that faces the lower inner surface 966a4 and has a protrusion. 945b to displace the wing member 945 to the closed state, and an inner surface in the transverse direction of the displacement member 966 from the outer side in the transverse direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 91) toward the lower inner surface 966a4 side of the displacement member 966. and an inclined surface 966a5 that is inclined to.

Note that the displacement member 966 is disposed so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 91) with respect to the back base 941 by a transmission member 965, which will be described later. The feather member 945 is closed when the displacement member 966 is displaced toward the specific winning opening 65a side (lower side in FIG. 91), and when the displacement member 966 is displaced toward the second winning opening 140 side (upper side in FIG. 91). It is assumed to be in an open state.

Next, the connection between the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 and the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 will be explained. As described above, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is arranged inside the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the protrusion 945b is arranged on the inclined surface 966a5 side of the sliding groove 966a2 (on the outside in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966). From this state, when the displacement member 966 is displaced to the second winning opening 140 side (the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 91)), the lower inner surface 966a4 of the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the third surface 945b3 of the protrusion 945b. The protrusion 945b is displaced in contact with the protrusion 945b. Thereby, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

Here, a ball entry hole formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members that are rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry hole and open or close the ball entry hole, and a pair of wing members that open or close the ball entry hole. 2. Description of the Related Art A game machine is known that includes a drive unit that generates a driving force for rotating a wing member, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of the drive unit to a pair of wing members. The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is connected to a protrusion that protrudes from the back surface of the pair of wing members. Specifically, opposing portions are formed on one end of the rotating member and are vertically opposed to each other at a predetermined interval, and the protruding portion of the wing member is inserted between the opposing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or pushed down by the opposing portion of the rotating member, thereby opening or closing the wing member.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to set a large gap between the opposing part and the protruding part, so there is a problem that the opening and closing operation of the wing member is unstable. That is, when the rotary member is rotated for opening and closing operations of the wing member, the attitude of the facing part is inclined with respect to the protruding part, and the facing interval of the facing part is equal to the outer shape of the protruding part. If so, the protruding portion interferes between the opposing portions, making it impossible for the rotating member to rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the spacing between the opposing parts to a size that does not interfere with the protruding parts, and the gap between the opposing parts and the protruding parts increases accordingly. As a result, the wing members tend to wobble, making the opening and closing operations of the wing members unstable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism includes a transmission member 965 that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means (drive unit 960), and a displacement member 966 that is slid and displaced as the transmission member 965 rotates. A projection 945b is provided protruding from the pair of wing members 945, and a sliding groove 966a2 through which the projection 945b is slidably inserted is recessed in the displacement member 966, so that the sliding groove 966a2 is The groove width can be suppressed. That is, the displacement of the displacement member 966 is a sliding displacement, and the posture of the sliding groove 966a2 is not inclined with respect to the protrusion 945b, so there is no need to avoid interference with the protrusion when rotating unlike the conventional product. Therefore, the groove width of the sliding groove 966a2 can be approximated to the size of the protrusion 945b, and the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b can be reduced. As a result, rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized. Furthermore, since the direction of displacement of the displacement member 966 is substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 966 can be disposed substantially parallel to the wing members 945. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member 945 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. That is, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, since the displacement member 966 is not displaced in the direction of the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945, the space required for disposing the displacement member in the direction of the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945 is suppressed. can. As a result, space for arranging other members can be secured.

Here, unlike the conventional product in which a rotating member is directly connected to a pair of wing members, in the present invention, the displacement member 966 is interposed between the wing member 945 and the transmission member 965, so that the displacement member 966 is moved in the direction of gravity. When operating in the direction of sliding upward (toward the other side in the direction of gravity), the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, so the inertial force increases, and the driving force required for the driving means (the solenoid 610 described later) increases. . Therefore, it becomes difficult to smoothly perform an initial operation when starting the drive of the wing member 945 in the stopped state and displacing it to the open state or the closed state.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, the protrusion 945b is located below the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945 in the gravity direction (one side in the gravity direction). be located. That is, the position of the protrusion 945b when the displacement member 966 starts sliding displacement toward the upper side in the gravity direction (the other side in the gravity direction) is set below the rotation axis of the wing member 945 along the gravity direction. Thereby, the displacement component of the protrusion 945b that pushes up the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 can be increased in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 91) and decreased in the gravity direction (downward in FIG. 91). Therefore, even in the present invention where the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the initial operation when starting to drive the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) to open or close it can be performed smoothly.

Further, the center of gravity of the wing member 945 is set on the opposite side of the protrusion 945b with the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) interposed therebetween. Thereby, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state using its own weight. That is, when the displacement member 966 starts sliding displacement toward the upper side in the direction of gravity (one side in the direction of gravity), the wing member 945 is rotated in the direction in which it is released, so that the wing member 945 is rotated by its weight (its own weight). can be done. Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the initial operation when starting to drive the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) and opening it can be performed smoothly.

Further, the above-described inclined surface 966a5 is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 91)) of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, even if the position of the protrusion 945b is set downward along the gravity direction of the rotation axis of the wing member 945, the protrusion 945b is guided along the inclination direction of the inclined surface 966a5, and the displacement member The sliding displacement of 966 toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) can be started smoothly.

Furthermore, by forming the inclined surface 966a5 on the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2, not only can the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the projection 945b be reduced, but also the projection 945b on the inclined surface 966a5 can be made smaller. Due to this contact, not only the displacement of the protrusion 945b in the direction of gravity but also the displacement in the horizontal direction can be restricted. Therefore, rattling of the wing member 945 when the wing member 945 is in the closed state can be easily suppressed. That is, even when affected by vibrations caused by the falling of game balls, the wing member 945 can be easily maintained in the open or closed position.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the feather member 945 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the displacement member 966 moves from the second winning opening 140 side to the specific winning opening 65a side (one side in the gravity direction (bottom side in FIG. 92). side)). As a result, the upper inner surface 966a3 of the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the first surface 945b1 of the protrusion 945b, and the protrusion 945b is displaced. Thereby, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

Moreover, the displacement direction of the displacement member 966 from the second winning a prize opening 140 side to the specific winning a prize opening 65a side is set to the direction of gravity (downward in FIG. 92). Thereby, when closing the wing member 945, the wing member 945 can be displaced using the weight of the displacement member 966. As a result, the wing member 945 can be easily displaced from the open state to the closed state.

Next, the drive unit 960 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. 93(a) is a side view of the drive unit 960, FIG. 93(b) is a top view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 93(c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 960. 94 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective rear view of the drive unit 960.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the drive unit 960 includes a first accommodating part 962 and a second accommodating part 963, which are formed in a box shape and are arranged facing each other. 963 , a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610 , and a connecting member 964 that is pivotally supported by the first accommodating part 962 and the second accommodating part 963 and connected to the connecting member 964 . The transmission member 965 is mainly formed.

The first accommodating part 962 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and includes a covering part 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (the upper side in FIG. (see).

The covered portion 962a is formed in a substantially box shape with the solenoid 610 side (lower side in FIG. 93(a)) and the guide portion 962b side open. Further, the covering portion 962a includes an engaged portion 962c formed by cutting out a part of the opposing wall surface, and a fastening portion 962d protruding in a direction facing the outside of the opposing wall surface.

The engaged portion 962c is a notch that engages an engaging portion 963c of a second accommodating portion 963, which will be described later, and is formed into a shape larger than the outer shape of the engaging portion 963c when viewed from the side. As a result, the engaging portion 963c can be engaged with the engaged portion 962c before the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are fastened together. The workability of fastening can be improved.

The fastening portion 962d is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 963b1 of the second accommodating portion 963 when the drive unit 960 is assembled, and is located on the second accommodating portion 963 side (lower side in FIG. 93(a)). A through hole 962da is provided that penetrates toward the front.

The through hole 962da is a hole through which a screw (not shown) that is screwed into the fastening hole 963b1 of the second housing part 963 is inserted, and is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 963b1 and has an inner diameter larger than the fastening hole 963b1. is formed. Thereby, the first accommodating part 962 and the second accommodating part 963 can be fastened and fixed.

The guide portion 962b is connected to a pair of arm portions 962e that are connected to the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a and formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the side, and is connected to the pair of arm portions 962e, and has a gate shape when viewed from the front. It is formed to include a wall portion 962f, and a protrusion portion 962g that protrudes from the wall portion 962f to the side opposite to the covered portion 962a (back side base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

In side view, the arm portion 962e protrudes from each of the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a toward the rear base 941 (see FIG. 85), and its protruding tip side is bent toward the other side in the gravity direction (opposite to the solenoid 610 side). It is formed into an approximately L shape. Further, the pair of arm portions 962e are set so that the distance between the opposing sides is approximately the same as the distance between both horizontal ends of the side wall portion 981b (see FIG. 109(a)) of the distribution unit 980, which will be described later. 981b is inserted.

The wall portion 962f is formed by connecting the distal side (bent side) side surfaces of the arm portion 962e described above, and its shape in front view is larger than the shape of the displacement member 966 in front view. Further, the wall portion 962f has an outer distance dimension L3 (see FIG. 93(b)) in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)) in the opposing direction of the pair of first guide walls 942b of the back base 941. (L3=L4) is set to be substantially the same as the outer distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 91). Furthermore, the wall portion 962f has a distance dimension L5 (see FIG. 93(a)) in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(a)) from the upper end surface of the first guide wall 942b of the back base 941 to the upright portion 942f. It is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension L6 (see FIG. 91) to the outer surface (L5=L6). Thereby, the displacement member 966 can be disposed between the wall portion 962f and the rear base 941, and the displacement member 966 can be accommodated between the first guide walls 942b. Furthermore, the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966, which is disposed between the wall portion 962f and the rear base 941, can be arranged between the opposing surfaces.

The protruding portion 962g is formed to protrude from the outer side of the pair of arm portions 962e of the wall portion 962f in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. It is set to be approximately the same as the protrusion dimension of the first guide wall 942b. Furthermore, the inner dimension L7 of the protruding portion 962g in the opposing direction (FIG. 93(b) vertical direction) is slightly larger than the outer dimension L8 of the pair of second guide walls 942d of the rear base 941 in the opposing direction (see FIG. 91). It is set large. Furthermore, the dimension of the protruding portion 962g in the direction of gravity is set to be approximately the same as the dimension between the opposing first guide wall 942b and the standing portion 942f.

Accordingly, when disposing the drive unit 960 in the assembled state on the back base 941 (front unit 940), the second guide wall 942d is inserted between the opposing protrusions 962g, and the first guide wall 942b and The drive unit 960 can be positioned and disposed with respect to the back base 941 by inserting the protruding portion 962g between the opposing upright portions 942f.

The second accommodating portion 963 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is formed into a box-shaped body that covers the other side of the solenoid 610 (lower side in FIG. 93(a)). The second accommodating portion 963 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the driving direction of the solenoid 610 (left-right direction in FIG. 93(b)), which will be described later, when viewed from above. Further, the second accommodating portion 963 is provided with recessed portions 963e recessed in a plurality of locations on both walls extending in the longitudinal direction, and from between the recessed portions 963e at the plurality of locations toward the first accommodating portion 962. an engaging portion 963c that protrudes from the side, a protrusion portion 963b that protrudes from both walls extending in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction, and one side (back base 941 side (see FIG. 85) extending in the lateral direction). ) is provided with a bearing part 963d recessed in the wall part.

The protruding portion 963b is formed to protrude outward in the transverse direction of the second accommodating portion 963 in a semicircular arc shape, and includes a fastening hole 963b1 coaxial with the through hole 962da of the first accommodating portion 962. Thereby, the first accommodating part 962 and the second accommodating part 963 can be fastened and fixed by screwing a screw inserted from the through hole 962da side of the first accommodating part 962 into the fastening hole 963b1.

The recessed portion 963e is an opening that circulates air in a space formed between the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 facing each other. By circulating air through the recessed portion 963e, the solenoid 610 disposed between the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 facing each other can be cooled.

The engaging portion 963c protrudes toward the first accommodating portion 962 from between the plurality of recessed portions 963e arranged in parallel, and has a hook-shaped tip that is bent inward in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963. Ru. Further, as described above, the engaging portion 963c is formed at a position corresponding to the engaged portion 962c of the first accommodating portion 962, and when the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined, The engaging portion 963c is disposed inside the engaged portion 962c, and a bent portion of the engaging portion 963c is engaged with one end surface of the first accommodating portion 962.

Further, since the engaging portion 963c is formed between the recessed portions 963e, the distance from the base end to the distal end of the engaging portion 963c can be increased. Therefore, when the engaging portion 963c is disposed in the first accommodating portion 962, the engaging portion 963c can be easily bent, and the engaging portion 963c can be easily engaged with the first accommodating portion 962.

The bearing portion 963d is a recess that accommodates a rotating shaft 965c of a transmission member 965, which will be described later, and is recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the rotating shaft 965c. Further, the end surface of the bearing portion 963d on the first accommodating portion 962 side is covered with the side surface of the first accommodating portion 962 on one side in the gravity direction, so that the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined. In this state, the rotating shaft 965c accommodated in the bearing portion 963d can be prevented from coming off outside the bearing portion 963d.

The solenoid 610 includes a main body 961a formed into a rectangular parallelepiped, a shaft 961b that is inserted into the inside of the main body 961a and is movable with respect to the main body 961a, and a side of the shaft 961b opposite to the main body 961a. It includes an annular portion 961c disposed at the end of the annular portion 961c, and a coil spring SP1 disposed between the annular portion 961c and the main body portion 961a.

The main body part 961a is a coil part that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the shaft part 961b to be inserted into the main body part 961a can be drawn inward and inserted by the magnetism.

The shaft portion 961b is made of a magnetic metal material and has a cylindrical shape. The shaft portion 961b is arranged with its axial direction facing the back base 941 side, and is arranged with a part of the back base 941 side protruding from the main body portion 961a.

The annular portion 961c is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 961b protruding from the main body portion 961a. A connecting member 964, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 961c. Thereby, when the shaft portion 961b is displaced with respect to the main body portion 961a, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 961c to the connecting member 964, and the connecting member 964 can be displaced.

The coil spring SP1 is a spring member that is spirally wound a plurality of times. The coil spring SP1 is disposed around the shaft portion 961b, and is disposed in a slightly compressed state between the annular portion 961c and the main body portion 961a facing each other. Thereby, the annular portion 961c can be biased in a direction away from the main body portion 961a. Therefore, when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body part 961a, the annular part 961c can be maintained separated from the main body part 961a. Further, after power is applied (supplied) to the main body part 961a, when the application (supply) of power is cut off, the annular part 961c can be quickly separated from the main body part 961a.

The connecting member 964 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 964 has a base portion 964a formed in a plate-shaped body parallel to a plane perpendicular to the axis of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and a base portion 964a that extends from the other side of the base portion 964a in the gravity direction to the back base 941 side (FIG. 85 (see) an upright portion 964b bent toward the side.

The base portion 964a is a portion connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and is recessed from the end surface on one side in the gravity direction (the back side of the paper in FIG. 93(b)) with a dimension larger than the diameter of the annular portion 961c. and a second recessed portion 964d located on the solenoid 610 side of the first recessed portion 964c and recessed with a dimension larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 961b.

The first recessed portion 964c is a groove into which the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U-shape with one side open in the direction of gravity when viewed in cross section. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 964c is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 961c. Thereby, the annular portion 961c can be inserted into the first recessed portion 964c.

The second recessed portion 964d is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 961b and the base portion 964a when the annular portion 961c is disposed inside the first recessed portion 964c as described above. It is formed in a substantially U-shape with its lower side open when viewed from the rear, and is formed to open from the first recessed portion 964c side to the solenoid 610 side.

The upright portion 964b includes an insertion hole 964e penetrating in the direction of gravity, into which a protruding portion 965d of a transmission member 965, which will be described later, is inserted. Accordingly, when the connecting member 964 is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 610, the protrusion 965d comes into contact with the inner edge of the insertion hole 964e, and the transmission member 965 is displaced. Note that a detailed explanation of the displacement of the transmission member 965 will be given later.

The transmission member 965 is bent when viewed from the side, and includes a distal end portion 965a that extends in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and a rotational distal end portion 965a that is continuous with the distal end portion 965a and extends toward the connecting member 964 side. 965b.

The rotating part 965b is formed so that the width dimension in the lateral direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)) of the second accommodating part 963 is smaller than the dimension between opposing bearing parts 963d formed in a pair in the second accommodating part 963. be done. The rotating part 965b also has a rotating shaft 965c that protrudes in a cylindrical shape on both sides of the second housing part 963 in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)) at the end on the 964 side, and and a protrusion 965d that protrudes toward one end in the gravity direction.

As described above, the rotating shaft 965c is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the groove width of the bearing portion 963d. Furthermore, the distance between the protruding tips of the pair of rotating shafts 965c is set to be larger than the distance between the opposing bearing parts 963d formed in the second accommodating part 963. Thereby, the pair of rotating shafts 965c can be inserted and disposed inside the bearing portion 963d. Therefore, by inserting the rotating shaft 965c into the bearing portion 963d and fastening the second accommodating portion 963 and the first accommodating portion 962, the transmission member 965 can be supported in a rotatable state about the rotating shaft 965c.

As described above, the protrusion 965d is a protrusion inserted into the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964, and its outer shape is set smaller than the inner edge shape of the insertion hole 964e when viewed from above. Furthermore, in the state before the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is displaced (power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a), the protruding portion 965d has a width dimension in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610. The width of the insertion hole 964e is set to be sufficiently larger than the width of the insertion hole 964e (in this embodiment, the width of the insertion hole 964e is set to be twice the width of the protrusion 965d). As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced around the rotating shaft 965c, the projections 965d on both end faces in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b come into contact with the insertion hole 964e, and the rotation of the transmission member 965 is restricted. This can be suppressed.

The width of the tip portion 965a in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c is formed to become smaller as the tip portion 965a becomes farther away from the solenoid 610. Further, the distal end portion 965a has an insertion portion 965e inserted into the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 described above, and an upright portion 965f protruding from the connection side with the rotating portion 965b in one side in the gravity direction. It is formed with

The insertion portion 965e has an outer shape smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 when viewed from the front, and is inserted and disposed inside the connecting hole 966b1. As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced, the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 come into contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is displaced. Note that a detailed explanation of the displacement between the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966 will be given later.

Next, the displacement operation of the drive unit 960 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. 96(a) and 96(b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 960 taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 93(b). Note that FIG. 96(a) shows the state of the solenoid 610 before operation, and FIG. 96(b) shows the state of the solenoid 610 after the operation. Further, in FIGS. 96(a) and 96(b), the outer shape of the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 965 is illustrated with a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 96(a), when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a of the solenoid 610, the coil spring SP1 disposed between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c is The force causes the annular portion 961c to be separated from the main body portion 961a. As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is pushed out in the direction away from the main body portion 961a (to the left in FIG. 96(a)).

When the connecting member 964 is pushed out in the direction away from the main body portion 961a, the surface of the protruding portion 965d of the transmitting member 965 on the solenoid 610 side (the right side in FIG. 96(a)) and the surface of the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964 on the solenoid 610 side is in contact with the inner surface of the As a result, the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed down to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 96(a)) about the rotating shaft 965c. Further, the displacement of the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to one side in the gravity direction is regulated by the contact portion 965g contacting the second housing portion 963.

As shown in FIG. 96(b), when power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, the shaft 961b is drawn into the main body 961a by the magnetic force generated in the main body 961a, and the The ring portion 961c and the main body portion 961a are brought closer to each other (than in a state where power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a). As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is displaced in a direction approaching the main body portion 961a (to the right in FIG. 96(a)).

When the connecting member 964 is displaced in the direction approaching the main body portion 961a, the surface of the protruding portion 965d of the transmitting member 965 on the opposite side to the solenoid 610 (the left side in FIG. 96(b)) and the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964 The solenoid 610 side and the inner surface of the opposite side (the left side in FIG. 96(b)) are in contact with each other. As a result, the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed up toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 96(b)) about the rotating shaft 965c. Further, the displacement of the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to the other side in the gravity direction is regulated by the connection portion between the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 and the rotating portion 965b coming into contact with the first accommodating portion 962.

Therefore, by displacing the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to either the other side in the gravity direction or to the one side in the gravity direction, the transmission member 965 can be moved to either the first accommodating part 962 or the second accommodating part 963. It can be brought into contact. This makes it possible to suppress fraudulent acts by players.

For example, when a player inserts a piano wire or the like into the gap between the transmission member 965 and the first accommodating part 962 or the second accommodating part 963 from the player side (gaming area side) to the solenoid 610, the thickness of the piano wire etc. Accordingly, the displacement distance of the transmission member 965 can be reduced. Therefore, since an abnormality occurs in the displacement operation of the wing member 945 that is displaced by the transmission member 965, it is easy for the store operator to discover the fraud.

Further, as described above, the transmission member 965 includes a tip portion 965a and a rotating portion 965b that extend from the rotating shaft 965c and are connected to the displacement member 966, and a distal end portion 965a and a rotating portion 965b that extend from the rotating shaft 965c and are connected to the solenoid 610. Since the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are bent into a substantially doglegged shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, the amount of displacement of the displacement member 966 can be ensured. , the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

That is, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed in a straight line when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimension distance between the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is the same as that of the distal end portion 965a of this embodiment. If the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 is set to be approximately equal to the total distance, the amount of sliding displacement of the displacement member 966 can be made equal to that of the present embodiment, but the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 is increased. The whole thing becomes larger.

On the other hand, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed in a straight line when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimension distance between the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is set by rotation from the insertion portion 965e of this embodiment. When the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 is set to be approximately the same as the distance to the shaft 965c (the distance between the tip end 965a and the rotating section 965b is shortened), the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be made the same as in this embodiment. However, the amount of displacement of the displacement member 966 becomes smaller.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are bent in a substantially doglegged shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, so that the sliding displacement of the displacement member 966 The distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed while ensuring the amount. Further, the protruding portion 965d is formed on the rear side (right side in FIG. 96(a)) of the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b, which are opposite to the displacement member 966. Thereby, the space created by bending the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b can be effectively utilized, and the transmission member 965 can be downsized. That is, the transmission member 965 is efficiently arranged in the space between the rolling part 943a of the front unit 940 (ball throwing unit 970 described later) and the passage member 955 of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, thereby reducing the overall size. can be achieved.

Next, the connection between the drive unit 960 and the displacement member 966 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a sectional view of the winning a prize opening unit 930 taken along the line XCVII-XCVII in FIG. 83. 98(a) and 98(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning a prize opening unit 930 taken along the line XCVIII-XCVIII in FIG. 97. Note that FIG. 98(a) shows the state of the solenoid 610 before operation, and FIG. 98(b) shows the state of the solenoid 610 after the operation.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, when the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940 are assembled, the distal end 965a of the transmission member 965 is inserted into the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966.

Therefore, as described above, when the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 is driven and the tip end 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upward in FIG. 98(a)), as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 98(b), the bulging portion 965e1 of the insertion portion 965e and the abutted portion 966b2 on one side of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 come into contact, and the displacement member 966 is slid to the other side in the direction of gravity. be done.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slid to the other side in the gravity direction (toward the second winning port 140 side), the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is displaced, and the feather member 945 is brought into an open state. That is, by applying electric power to the main body portion 961a of the solenoid 610, the wing member 945 is brought into an open state.

On the other hand, when the application (supply) of power to the main body portion 961a of the solenoid 610 is cut off, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is aligned in the gravity direction due to the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 disposed in the solenoid 610 as described above. side (lower side in FIG. 98(a)). As a result, as shown in FIG. 98(a), the opposite surface of the bulging portion 965e1 contacts the other side abutted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and the displacement member 966 moves to one side in the gravity direction. The slide is displaced.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slid to one side in the gravity direction (towards the specific winning port 65a), the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is displaced, and the feather member 945 is brought into the closed state. That is, by cutting off the application (supply) of electric power to the main body portion 961a of the solenoid 610, the wing member 945 is brought into the closed state.

In this case, the wing member 945 can be closed while power is not applied (supplied) to the main body 961a, so if the wiring of the main body 961a is disconnected or due to a player's misconduct, the main body 961a is closed. When the wiring is cut, the wing member 945 becomes open, and it is possible to prevent game balls from easily flowing into the second prize opening 140.

Further, the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965 is transmitted to the displacement member 966 through a connecting hole 966b1 formed at a substantially intermediate position in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. Thereby, it is possible to easily allow a change in the posture of the displacement member between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965. Therefore, as the transmission member rotates, the displacement member 966 can be smoothly slid and displaced. As a result, the wing member 945 can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, during the operation of slidingly displacing the displacement member 966 and opening or closing the pair of wing members 945 as the transmission member 965 rotates, the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members 945. When actuated, the attitude of the displacement member 966 is changed, and the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two places, and is also connected to the transmission member 965 at two places. If this is the case, it is difficult to allow a change in the posture of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965, and the resistance when sliding the displacement member 966 (that is, rotating the transmission member 965) is high. This occurs and prevents the wing member from opening or closing. On the other hand, according to the present invention, the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two places, and is connected to the transmission member 965 at one place, so that the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at one place. Even if the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the blade members 945, the attitude change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

Furthermore, the width dimension D1 (see FIG. 98(a)) of the contact surface between the one side abutted part 966b2 and the other side abutted part 966b3 of the insertion part 965e is the maximum external dimension D2 (see FIG. 98(a)) of the protrusion 945b. (see (a)) is set to be smaller than three times. Thereby, the change in attitude of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated. That is, when the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is set large, when the posture of the displacement member 966 changes between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965, the connection between the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 By setting the width D1 of the insertion portion 965e to be smaller than three times the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b, the posture of the displacement member 966 is controlled. Change can be prevented from being regulated. As a result, the change in attitude of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

Note that the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is preferably set to be smaller than twice the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b. According to this, when the posture of the displacement member 966 changes, it is possible to easily prevent the insertion portion 965e and the connection hole 966b1 from coming into contact with each other. As a result, the change in attitude of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

Next, the specific winning a prize unit 950 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. 99(a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, FIG. 99(b) is a rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 99(c) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit 950. It is a diagram. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950.

As shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 includes a ball entering member 953 formed in a box-like body that is opened by the player side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 99), and an opening of the ball entering member 953. A plate member 951 disposed to cover the ball, a passage member 955 disposed on the opposite side of the plate member 951 with the ball entry member 953 in between, and a drive unit 957 for operating the plate member 951. It is formed.

The plate member 951 is formed from a colored and translucent resin material, and allows the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the ball entry member 953 side via the plate member 951. The plate member 951 includes a main body part 951a formed in a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a shaft hole 951b recessed in a cylindrical shape on both longitudinally outer sides of the main body part 951a, and a shaft hole 951b recessed in a longitudinal direction of the main body part 951a. The main body portion 951a has a protrusion 951c that projects toward the ball-entering member 953 from one end thereof, and an engaging portion 951d that projects toward the ball-entering member 953 from the other longitudinal end of the main body portion 951a.

The main body portion 951a is formed in a size that covers the open side of the ball entry member 953, which will be described later, when viewed from the front, and has a shape that is slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the specific winning opening 65a of the front unit 940 described above. .

The shaft hole 951b is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the main body portion 951a, and both ends of the shaft hole 951b in the longitudinal direction are set coaxially. Moreover, the shaft hole 951b is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of a rod member 952, which will be described later, so that the rod member 952 can be inserted into the shaft hole 951b. Therefore, by supporting the ball entry member 953 while the rod member 952 is inserted into the shaft hole 951b, the plate member 951 can be pivotally supported with respect to the ball entry member 953.

The protrusion 951c is formed to protrude toward one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a. As a result, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced around the shaft hole 951b by the drive of the drive unit 957, which will be described later, and the other side of the plate member 951 in the gravity direction is inclined toward the game area, the main body portion 951a It is possible to suppress the game balls that have flown down from falling from one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a.

The engaging portion 951d includes a recessed portion 951d1 partially recessed at the protruding tip. A distal end portion 958c of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, is connected to the inside of the recessed portion 951d1, and the operation of the drive unit 957 is transmitted thereto. In addition, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 951b, a part of the engaging portion 951d protrudes toward the downstream area, so that the game ball that has flowed down to the main body portion 951a can be prevented from falling from the other side in the longitudinal direction.

The ball entry member 953 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The ball entry member 953 includes a main body 953a formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular box when viewed from the front, an erected wall 953b erected on a surface opposite to the open side of the main body 953a, and an open side wall 953b of the main body 953a. An engaging portion 953f protrudes from the surface opposite to the opening side, an annular projection 953c protrudes in an annular shape from the surface opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and an annular protrusion 953c protrudes from the open side of the main body portion 953a. A wall portion 953d protrudes toward the plate member 951 side from both longitudinally outer sides of the edge, an insertion hole 953e penetrating from the passage member 955 side to the plate member 951 side on the other longitudinal side of the main body portion 953a, and the main body. A protruding part 953g protrudes from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the part 953a, a protrusion 953h protrudes from the open side edge of the main body part 953a toward the plate member 951, and two parts formed through the bottom surface of the main part 953a. and an inlet 953j.

The main body part 953a is formed in a size that allows a game ball to be inserted into the box-shaped inner part, and has an opening 953a1 that opens on the plate member 951 side, and a rolling surface that rolls the game ball that flows in from the opening 953a1. 953a2. Further, the outer shape of the main body portion 953a when viewed from the front is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the upright portion 942f of the front unit 940 described above. Thereby, the main body portion 953a (ball entry member 953) can be inserted into the upright portion 942f and fastened and fixed to the front unit 940. Note that a detailed description of the inner shape of the main body portion 953a will be given later.

Further, the longitudinal dimension of the main body portion 953a is set to be larger than the distance between the above-mentioned pair of wing members 945 on the outside in the opposing direction. Thereby, even if the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the outer circumferential surface of the pair of feather members 945, the game ball can be made to flow into the main body part 953a via the specific winning opening 65a.

The opening 953a1 has an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of the game ball, and when the plate member 951 is in an open state, the game ball can flow into the inside of the main body portion 953a through the opening 953a1. can.

The rolling surface 953a2 is a lower inner edge of the main body portion 953a in the direction of gravity, and is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from above. Further, the dimension in the direction (short side direction) from the back side (passage member 955 side) to the front side (plate member 951 side) is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball thrown into the inside of the main body portion 953a from the opening 953a1 can be rolled on the rolling surface 953a2.

The standing wall 953b is a wall that holds the detection device SE1 disposed on the opposite side to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and surrounds the outer circumferential surface in three directions of the detection device SE1, which is formed into a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. formed to size.

The engaging portion 953f is formed along the outer peripheral surface of the detection device SE1 in directions other than the three directions surrounded by the standing wall 953b. Thereby, the detection device SE1 can be disposed inside the portion surrounded by the standing wall 953b and the engaging portion 953f. Further, the distal end portion of the engaging portion 953f is bent toward the upright wall 953b, which is separated from the proximal end by a distance equal to the thickness of the detection device SE1. Therefore, the detection device SE1 and the engagement portion 953f are engaged with each other, and it is possible to suppress the detection device SE1 disposed on the main body portion 953a from falling off.

The detection device SE1 is a device that detects passage of a game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the game ball is formed in the thickness direction thereof. The detection hole SE1a is formed biased toward one or the other of the longitudinal directions of the detection device SE1 arranged in a horizontally long rectangular state when viewed from the rear, and the detection hole SE1a is formed biased toward one or the other of the longitudinal directions where the detection hole SE1a is not formed. Alternatively, a detection board SE1b for controlling the detection device SE1 is disposed on one side. Further, the detection hole SE1a is arranged at a position corresponding to an inflow port 953j to be described later, and can allow game balls flowing into the inflow port 953j to pass through.

The annular protrusion 953c is formed to protrude from a plurality of locations in an annular shape on the side opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and a screw for fastening and fixing the passage member 955 and the ball entry member 953 is screwed into the inner edge portion of the annular protrusion 953c.

A pair of wall portions 953d are formed on both longitudinally outer sides of the main body portion 953a, and the distance between the opposing walls is shorter than the lengthwise dimension of the plate member 951. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be disposed between the pair of wall portions 953d facing each other.

Further, a shaft hole 953d1 is formed in the wall portion 953d and extends in a circular shape in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 99(a)) of the main body portion 953a. The shaft hole 953d1 is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner diameter of the shaft hole 951b of the plate member 951. Therefore, after arranging the plate member 951 between the pair of opposing walls 953d, the rod members 952 are inserted into the shaft holes 953d1 and 951b from both longitudinally outer sides of the plate member 951. It can be pivotally supported by the ball entry member 953.

Further, the wall portion 953d is formed to have a protrusion dimension smaller than the recess distance of the recess portion 941h formed in the back base 941 of the front unit 940 described above. Therefore, by combining the front unit 940 and the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, the wall portion 953d can be accommodated inside the recessed portion 941h. Thereby, the rod member 952 inserted into the shaft hole 953d1 and the shaft hole 951b can be prevented from coming out.

The insertion hole 953e is a hole through which a part of a transmission member 965 disposed in a passage member 955 (described later) is inserted into the plate member 951 side, and is formed at a position corresponding to the transmission member 965 disposed in the passage member 955. be done.

The protruding portion 953g is formed to protrude on the axis of the connecting protrusion 942j of the front unit 940. In addition, in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 are combined, the inner circle 942j1 of the connecting protrusion 942j and the insertion hole 953g1 formed through the protrusion 953g are arranged coaxially, and the protrusion The installation portion 953g and the connecting protrusion 942j are in contact with each other. Thereby, the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 and the front unit 940 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw inserted into the insertion hole 953g1 from the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 side into the inner circle 942j1.

The protrusion 953h is formed to protrude toward the plate member 951 side. Thereby, when the plate member 951 is displaced by the drive unit 957, which will be described later, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the plate member 951 and the edge of the main body portion 953a.

Further, the protrusion 953h is formed at substantially the same position as the protrusion 951c of the plate member 951 and the engagement portion 951d in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951 (left-right direction in FIG. 99(a)). This makes it difficult for the game ball to roll toward the protruding side of the protrusion 953h. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced, the game ball is less likely to be caught between the plate member 951 and the protrusion 951c.

The inflow port 953j is formed to open from the plate member 951 side to the passage member 955 side with an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of the game ball. The inflow port 953j is a hole through which the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the main body part 953a is sent to the passage member 955, and a pair of inflow ports 953j are formed in the longitudinal direction of the main body part 953a.

Here, a game comprising a ball entrance formed to allow a game ball to enter, an opening/closing member for opening and closing the ball entrance, and a passage member forming a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entrance. machine is known. The ball entrance is formed in a size that allows multiple game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that have entered the ball entrance are collected in the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and are collected in the passage member. One ball at a time. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the ball entrance is made larger, the rolling distance of the game ball (the length of the rolling surface) from the end of the ball entrance to the passage member increases accordingly. Therefore, it takes time for the ball to arrive at the passage member, and by the time the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, another game ball may enter the ball from the entrance, making it easy for over-winning to occur. Ta.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a pair of inflow ports 953j (at two locations) are formed at a predetermined interval, so even if the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a is enlarged, the flow up to the inflow port 953j is The rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the game ball can be shortened. Therefore, the time required to reach the inflow port 953j is shortened by that amount, and the water can be made to flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Further, a detection device SE1 that detects the inflow of game balls into the ball entry member 953 is arranged at a connecting portion between the inflow port 953j and a recessed portion 955a of a passage member 955, which will be described later. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a can be detected in a shorter time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being entered until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In addition, the inflow port 953j is formed at a position that does not overlap in the direction of gravity with the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning a prize port unit 950 are fastened. That is, a pair of closed wing members 945 are arranged between a pair of inflow ports 953j.

Here, as described above, the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 is arranged below the second winning a prize opening 140 (a pair of wing members 945) in the direction of gravity. Further, since the pair of wing members 945 is arranged in the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area is difficult to flow down below the pair of wing members 945 in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the inflow position of the game balls flowing into the ball entry member 953 of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 is biased. In this embodiment, as described above, since the inflow port 953j is formed at a position that does not overlap the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in the direction of gravity, the inflow port 953j is formed at a position where many game balls flow into the ball entry member 953. The inlet 953j can be brought closer. Thereby, the game balls flowing into the ball entry member 953 can be made to flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive winning of game balls to the ball entering member 953.

The passage member 955 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and its outer shape when viewed from the front is approximately the same as the outer shape of the above-mentioned ball entry member 953 when viewed from the front. Further, the passage member 955 has a pair of recessed portions 955a recessed at a position facing the detection hole SE1a of each detection device SE1, and a pair of recessed portions 955a located on the other side in the longitudinal direction from the drive unit 957 side to the ball entry member 953 side. A pair of third openings 955c are formed through the drive unit 957 side to the ball entry member 953 side at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and a recess is formed on the other side in the gravity direction of the third openings 955c. The second recessed portion 955f is located between the pair of recessed portions 955a and recessed from the drive unit 957 side.

The recessed portion 955a is a passage that guides the game ball inserted through the detection hole SE1a, and the recess dimension in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 and the recess dimension on the drive unit 957 side are set larger than the diameter of the game ball. be done.

The second opening 955b is a space in which a connecting member 957c and a transmission member 958 of a drive unit 957, which will be described later, are arranged. Further, a shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102(a)) that protrudes in a cylindrical shape in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 is formed on the inner circumferential surface of the second opening 955b. The shaft portion 955b1 is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 958b of the transmission member 958, and the transmission member 958 can be pivotally supported by inserting the shaft portion 955b1 into the shaft hole 958b.

The third opening 955c is a space in which the detection device SE2, in which the insertion direction of the detection hole SE1a is arranged parallel to the direction of gravity, is arranged, and is set to be approximately the same as the external shape of the detection device SE2 when viewed from the front. . Thereby, the detection device SE2 can be arranged inside the third opening 955c. Further, in the detection device SE2, the detection hole SE1 projects toward the ball entry member 953 side in a state arranged inside the third opening 955c.

Furthermore, an engaging portion 955e protrudes toward the drive unit 957 at the edge of the third opening 955c. The protruding tip of the engaging portion 955e is bent inside the third opening 955c. When the detection device SE2 is disposed in the third opening 955c, the bent portion of the engaging portion 955e is engaged with the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE2. Thereby, the detection device SE2 inserted inside the third opening 955c can be prevented from slipping out to the drive unit 957 side.

The rolling portion 955d is curved into an arc shape. Further, the end of the rolling portion 955d on the plate member 951 side is connected to the third ball throwing portion 942e of the front unit 940 in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the second out port 941f of the front unit 940 can be sent to the rolling portion 955d of the specific winning a prize port unit 950.

Further, the other end side of the rolling portion 955d is located on the other side in the gravity direction of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2 disposed in the third opening 955c. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 955d can be dropped from the other end side and inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2. Thereby, the number of game balls that have flowed into the second out port 941f can be measured by the detection device SE2.

The second recessed portion 955f is formed between the pair of recessed portions 955a that serve as a passage for the game ball as described above. The second recessed portion 955f is a recess in which the above-mentioned drive unit 960 is disposed, and the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 99(c) left-right direction) of the passage member 955 is the second recess of the above-mentioned drive unit 960. It is set larger than the distance dimension of the accommodating portion 963 in the transverse direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)).

The second recessed portion 955f is formed with an insertion hole 955h that is formed through the passage member 955 at an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, and a projection 955g that projects toward the drive unit 957 side. The insertion hole 955h is a hole through which a screw that fastens the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw.

The projection 955g is formed in a cylindrical shape, and has a circular fastening hole 955g1 recessed in the center. The fastening hole 955g1 is a hole into which a screw that fastens the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific winning a prize opening unit 950) is screwed together, and is opposite to the elongated hole 963f formed in the second accommodating part 963 of the drive unit 960. It is formed in the position where Thereby, the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific winning a prize opening unit 950) can be fastened and fixed.

The drive unit 957 includes a solenoid 957a, a case member 957b that covers the solenoid 957a, and a connecting member 957c disposed at a displaced portion of the solenoid 957a.

The solenoid 957a includes a main body 957a1 formed in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, a shaft 957a2 that is inserted into the inside of the main body 957a1 and is displaceable with respect to the main body 957a1, and a side of the shaft 957a2 opposite to the main body 957a1. It includes an annular portion 957a3 disposed at the end of the annular portion 957a3, and a coil spring SP2 disposed between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1.

The main body part 957a1 is a coil part that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and due to the magnetism, the shaft part 957a2 to be inserted into the main body part 957a1 is drawn to the inside of the main body part 957a1, so that it can be inserted. be done.

The shaft portion 957a2 is made of a magnetic metal material and has a cylindrical shape. The shaft portion 957a2 is arranged with its axial direction facing the passage member 955, and is arranged with a portion on the back base 941 side protruding from the main body portion 957a1.

The annular portion 957a3 is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 957a2 protruding from the main body portion 957a1. A connecting member 957c, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 957a3. Thereby, when the shaft portion 957a2 is displaced relative to the main body portion 957a1, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 957a3 to the connecting member 957c, and the connecting member 957c can be displaced.

The coil spring SP2 is a spring member that is spirally wound a plurality of times. The coil spring SP2 is disposed around the shaft portion 957a2, and is disposed in a slightly compressed state between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1. Thereby, the annular portion 957a3 can be biased in a direction away from the main body portion 957a1. Therefore, when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be maintained separated from the main body portion 957a1. Moreover, when the application (supply) of power is cut off after power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be quickly separated from the main body portion 957a1.

The case member 957b is formed into a box-like body that covers the main body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, and one side of the case member 957b into which the shaft portion 957a2 is inserted is open. Further, the case member 957b is formed with an insertion hole 957b1 that penetrates in the axial direction of the shaft portion 957a2, and an opening 957b2 that penetrates on the side opposite to the open side.

The insertion hole 957b1 is a screw hole through which a screw that fastens the passage member 955 and the case member 957b (drive unit 957) is inserted, and is formed larger than the outer shape of the tip of the screw. Further, the screw inserted through the insertion hole 957b1 is screwed into the passage member 955.

The opening 957b2 is formed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 957a2. Thereby, the wiring HS1 (see FIG. 105) can be connected to the main body portion 957a1 via the opening 957b2.

The connecting member 957c is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 957c is formed into a plate-shaped body parallel to a plane perpendicular to the axis of the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a. The connecting member 957c has a first recessed portion 957c1 recessed from an end surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 99(b)) with a dimension larger than the diameter of the annular portion 957a3, and the first recessed portion. It is provided with a second recessed part 957c2 located on the solenoid 957a side of 957c1 and recessed to a size larger than the diameter of the shaft part 957a2, and an engaging part 957c3 protruding toward the ball entry member 953 side.

The first recessed portion 957c1 is a groove into which the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U-shape with one side open in the gravity direction when viewed in cross section. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 957c1 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 957a3. Thereby, the annular portion 957a3 can be inserted into the first recessed portion 957c1.

The second recessed portion 957c2 is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 957a2 and the connecting member 957c when the annular portion 957a3 is disposed inside the first recessed portion 957c1 as described above. It is formed in a substantially U-shape with one side open in the direction of gravity when viewed from the rear, and is opened from the first recessed portion 957c1 side to the solenoid 957a side.

The engaging portion 957c3 is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side. In the engaging portion 957c3, a connecting portion 958a of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, is provided inside the bent portion. As a result, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3, and the transmission member 958 is displaced. Note that a detailed explanation of the displacement of the transmission member 958 will be given later.

The transmission member 958 is formed into a plate-shaped body that is approximately triangular in side view. The transmission member 958 has a shaft hole 958b that penetrates circularly in the plate thickness direction, a coupling portion 958a that protrudes cylindrical in the plate thickness direction from an end on the coupling member 957c side, and a tip portion that protrudes toward the plate member 951 side. 958c.

As described above, the shaft hole 958b is a through hole into which the shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102(a)) is inserted. Further, the shaft hole 958b is formed so that its inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 955b1. Thereby, the transmission member 958 is rotatably supported by the passage member 955.

As described above, the connecting portion 958a is arranged inside the bent portion of the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3, and the transmitting member 958 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 958b.

The tip portion 958c is inserted into the recessed portion 951d1 of the plate member 951. Therefore, when the solenoid 957a is operated and the transmission member 958 is rotated around the axis of the shaft hole 958b, the engagement portion 951d can be pushed up by displacing the tip portion 958c. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be rotated.

Next, displacement of the plate member 951 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. 102(a) and 102(b) are cross-sectional views of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 along the CII-CII line of FIG. 99(c). FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b) are perspective front views of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950.

Note that FIGS. 102(a) and 103(a) show the plate member 951 in a closed state, and FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b) show the plate member 951 in an open state. The closed state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body 951a covers the opening of the main body 953a of the ball entry member 953, and the open state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body 951a covers the main body 953a of the ball entry member 953. It is in a state separated from the opening of the portion 953a.

As shown in FIGS. 102(a) and 103(a), when the application (supply) of power to the main body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a is cut off, the urging force of the coil spring SP2 causes the shaft portion 957a2 to become a member of the plate member. 951 side (left side in FIG. 102(a)). Accordingly, the connecting member 957c disposed on the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is similarly disposed on the plate member 951 side that is spaced apart from the main body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmitting member 958 is disposed inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, so the connecting portion 958a is pushed toward the plate member 951 side. As a result, force is transmitted to the distal end portion 958c of the transmission member 958 in the direction of rotation about the shaft hole 958b to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 102(a)).

When the tip portion 958c is pushed down to one side in the gravity direction, the tip portion 958c and the recessed portion 951d1 come into contact, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 approaches the opening 953a1 side of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953. is rotated to Thereby, the plate member 951 can be maintained in a closed state.

Further, when the plate member 951 is in the closed state, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side and the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side are in contact with each other. As a result, if a player makes an unauthorized operation and forcibly opens the plate member 951 side, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side can be pushed out by the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the force of unauthorized operation from being applied to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, damage to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 103(b), when power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, the shaft portion 957a2 is drawn (adsorbed) inside the main body portion 957a1. It is said to be in a state of Accordingly, the connecting member 957c disposed on the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is similarly disposed on the main body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmitting member 958 is disposed inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, so as the connecting member 957c is displaced, the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) (to the right in FIG. 102(b)). As a result, a force is transmitted to the transmission member 965 in the direction of rotating the distal end portion 958c around the shaft hole 958b in the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 102(b)).

When the tip portion 958c is pushed up to the other side in the gravity direction, the tip portion 958c and the recessed portion 951d1 come into contact, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 is separated from the opening side of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953. rotated in the direction of This allows the plate member 951 to be in an open state.

Further, when the plate member 951 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the plate member 951 can be displaced in the opening direction using its own weight, so that the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 It is possible to suppress the force applied to the As a result, damage to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the inner portion of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953 will be described. FIG. 104(a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 104(b) is a sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 along the CIVb-CIVb line of FIG. 104(a). Note that FIG. 104(a) shows a state in which the plate member 951 is removed, and FIG. 104(b) shows a state in which the plate member 951 is attached. Moreover, in FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b), the plate member 951 is shown in a closed state.

As shown in FIG. 104, inside the main body part 953a, there is an inclined surface 954a that is inclined toward one side in the direction of gravity toward the outside from an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 104(a)) of the main body part 953a. A recess 954b recessed at the end of the slope 954a, a protrusion 954c protruding from the connecting portion of the slope 954a and the recess 954b, and a projection 954c provided at each end of the longitudinal direction and a surface on the passage member 955 side. It is formed with an upright wall 954d that stands in series.

The inclined surface 954a is a rolling surface for game balls that rolls the game balls flowing between the pair of opposing inflow ports 953j toward the inflow port 953j, and is formed to be inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j side. . Thereby, the game ball flowing between the opposing inflow ports 953j can be rolled to the inflow port 953j.

The recess 954b is located in front of the inlet 953j (lower side in FIG. 104(b)) and is recessed toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). In addition, the concave portion 954b is formed such that the concave distal end surface is inclined downward toward the inlet 953j, and receives the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 of the main body portion 953a. can be guided to the recessed portion 955a). Therefore, the game ball that enters from the opening 953a1 of the main body part 953a can be made to flow into the recessed part 955a of the passage member 955 in a short time, and as a result, before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, the game ball can be made to flow into the recessed part 955a of the passage member 955. It is possible to suppress over-winning by suppressing the number of game balls being entered into the ball.

Further, the recess 954b extends linearly in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (vertical direction in FIG. 104(b)). This allows the rolling surface 953a2 to easily receive game balls rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (left-right direction in FIG. It is possible to guide (inflow) by time. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Furthermore, the width dimension L9 (see FIG. 104(b)) of the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the recessed portion 954b is set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, when a plurality of game balls are received in the recess 954b, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member 955 in an aligned state. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Furthermore, the width of the recess 954b in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is reduced from the passage member 955 side toward the opening 953a1 side (plate member 951 side). Thereby, when a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is received in the recess 954b, the game ball can easily flow toward the passage member 955 side. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The second inclined surface 954e is formed on the opposite side of the above-mentioned inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 across the recess 954b, and is inclined downward toward the inlet 953j (passage member 955). It is formed by As a result, the game balls that have entered the second inclined surface 954e are rolled in front of the inflow port 953j by utilizing the downward slope of the second inclined surface 954e, and quickly rolled toward the passage member 955. can be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The standing wall 954d is formed at a position spaced a predetermined distance from the second inclined surface 954e, and also directs the rolling direction of the game balls flowing into the second inclined surface 954e toward the inlet 953j (path member 955) side. 2 guide surface 954d1.

The second guide surface 954d1 is an end surface on the opening 953a1 side, and is formed to be inclined from the opening 953a1 side toward the inlet 953j side toward the recess 954b side in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. That is, the second guide surface 954d1 is inclined from the opening 953a1 toward the passage member 955, and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2, and also forms a contact with the longitudinal end of the rolling surface 953a2. It is arranged between the passage member 955 and the passage member 955. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the main body part 953a from the longitudinal end of the opening 953a1 can be quickly rolled toward the passage member 955. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The protruding portions 954c are formed at both longitudinal ends of the rolling surface 953a2 of the inclined surface 954a, and protrude toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). Thereby, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling outward on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 104(b)) of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced before the concave portion 954b (path member 955). . That is, while increasing the rolling speed of the game ball up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is slowed down before (immediately before) the recess 954b, and the game ball passes from the slope 954a through the recess 954b. Rolling up to the second inclined surface 954e can be suppressed. Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a shorter time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The protrusion 954c is formed into a substantially triangular shape when viewed from above, and one surface is connected to the surface opposite to the opening 953a1, and one of the remaining two surfaces is connected to the side edge 954c3 on the side of the recess 954b. is connected to the side surface of the recess 954b, and the remaining guide surface 954c1 is an opening 953a1 toward the rolling direction of the game ball (the longitudinally outward direction of the rolling surface 953a2) of the inclined surface 954a of the game ball. Formed with a slant to the side. Thereby, the rolling speed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced before the recess 954b (path member 955).

That is, while increasing the rolling speed of the game ball in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is slowed down before (immediately before) the recess 954b. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball from rolling from the slope 954a to the second slope 954e through the recess 954b. Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a shorter time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Further, as described above, the rotation axis of the plate member 951 is formed between both ends in the width direction of the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a, so when the plate member 951 is in an open state, The end of the plate member 951 can be located on one end (upper side in the gravity direction) in the gravity direction than the rolling surface 953a2. Thereby, when the plate member 951 is in the open state, it is possible to suppress the game balls that have flowed into the inside of the main body part 951a from jumping out from the opening 953a1 side of the main body part 951a.

Furthermore, since the game ball guided toward the opening 953a1 by the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the plate member 951, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be decelerated before the recess 954b (passage member 955). That is, while increasing the rolling speed of the game ball up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is slowed down before (immediately before) the recess 954b, and the game ball passes from the slope 954a through the recess 954b. Rolling up to the second inclined surface 954e can be suppressed. Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a shorter time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Further, the guide surface 954c1 is formed in a downwardly inclined shape from the connecting portion between the side edge portion 954c3 and the inlet 953j to the side portion 954c2 at the connecting portion with the inclined surface 954a. This allows the game balls rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 to flow into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) in a short time while suppressing the game balls from jumping out from the opening 953a1. I can do it.

That is, among the game balls that are rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 with the inclined surface 954a facing the passage member 955, the opening 933a1 is used for game balls whose rolling speed is relatively low (slow). Since there is a low risk of it flying out from the surface, by making it contact the guide surface 954c1 and guiding it toward the opening 953a1, it is possible to prevent it from rolling from the slope 954a through the recess 954b to the second slope 954e. Therefore, it is possible to flow into the passage member 955 in a shorter time. On the other hand, a game ball with a relatively high (fast) rolling speed can be guided over the guide surface 954c1 to the standing wall 954d formed on the second slope 954e side. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball is consumed by climbing over the guide surface 954c1 and colliding with the erected wall 954d, and it is possible to reliably decelerate the game ball. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be prevented from jumping out from the opening 953a1, and can be made to quickly flow into the inlet 953j (path member 955). As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In addition, a side edge 954c3 of the end face of the protruding portion 954c opposite to the standing wall 954d extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. A second side edge 954d2 of the end surface of the standing wall 954d opposite to the protrusion 954c extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The side edge portion 954c3 has a length L30 (see FIG. 104(b)) in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the second side edge portion 954d2. It is set smaller than the length dimension L31 in the direction of Thereby, the game ball that has climbed over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge 954d2 of the standing wall 954d, and can be reliably decelerated, and can be easily positioned near the passage member 955. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Further, the distance L32 (see FIG. 104(a)) between the intermediate position of the standing wall 954d in its thickness direction and the second inclined surface 954e is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball that has climbed over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge 954d2 of the upright wall 954d, and can be reliably decelerated. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The protruding portion 954c is located on the extension line of the second guide surface 954d1 of the standing wall 954d in the inclination direction, and the game ball guided toward the recess 954b (path member 955) by the second guide surface 954d1 is rolled. Even if the dynamic speed is relatively high (low), the game ball can be brought into contact with the protrusion 954c and decelerated. Therefore, game balls can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The distance L33 (see FIG. 104(a)) from the concave surface of the concave portion 954b to the protruding tip of the protruding portion 954c is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. In addition, as described above, the protruding portion 954c is formed in a continuous manner with the side surface of the recessed portion 954b, so that the game ball guided toward the passage member 955 by the second guide surface 954d1 of the standing wall 954d is rolled. Even when the speed is relatively high (fast), the game ball can easily come into contact with the protruding portion 954c. Therefore, such game balls can be decelerated and can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106, the assembled state of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 will be described. FIG. 105(a) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960, and FIG. 105(b) is a side view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the driving unit 960. FIG. 106(a) is a sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 along the CVIa-CVIa line in FIG. 105(a), and FIG. 106(b) is a sectional view on the CVIb-CVIb line in FIG. 106(a). It is a sectional view of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 in .

In addition, in FIGS. 105(a) and 105(b), the wiring HS1 is connected to the solenoid 957a that operates the plate member 951, and the wiring HS1 is connected to the solenoid 610 that operates the pair of wing members (see FIG. 83(a)). A part of the wiring HS2 is shown in the figure. Further, in FIG. 106(b), a part of the wiring HS3 connected to the detection device SE1 that detects the number of game balls that have flowed into the specific winning hole 65a is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the drive unit 960 that drives the wing member 945 (see FIG. 83(a)) of the winning opening unit 930 is located at a position where a part thereof overlaps with the specific winning opening unit 950 when viewed from the front. is formed. Thereby, a space can be formed on the side opposite to the gaming area (back side) of the second winning opening 140 (a pair of wing members 945).

Here, conventionally, the second winning opening 140, a pair of wing members 945 that open or close the second winning opening 140, a first driving means that drives the pair of wing members 945, and a specific winning opening 65a. A gaming machine is known that includes a board member 951 that opens or closes the specific winning opening 65a, and a second drive means that drives the board member 951. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first driving means and the second driving means are respectively disposed on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 and the plate member 951, so that the pair of wing members 945 and the plate member There is a problem in that it is difficult to arrange other members or devices on the back side of the member 951, and it is difficult to utilize the space effectively.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 is arranged on the back side of the plate member 951, it is possible to form a space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945. Yes (see Figure 97). That is, by consolidating the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning opening 65a), other members and devices can be arranged. A space for this can be secured on the back side of the pair of feather members 945 (second prize opening 140), and the space can be used effectively accordingly.

Further, the operating means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 disposed near the central opening formed in the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82) (where the center frame 86 is disposed) is moved far from the central opening. By disposing it on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning a prize opening unit 950) disposed on the base plate, the movable body of the operation unit that is visible to the player through the inside of the center opening (center frame 86) is attached to the base plate. 60 (on the side opposite to the gaming area) to make it difficult for players to see.

That is, the movable body of the operating unit is disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 when normally (retracted), making it difficult for players to see, and when movable (extended) the movable body of the operating unit is disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 (center frame 86). ), which makes it easier for players to see, the operation means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 disposed near the central opening can be moved to the specific winning opening located far from the central opening. By disposing the movable body at a position horizontally overlapping with the unit 950, the movable body can be easily disposed at a position away from the central opening when retreating. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body of the operating unit during normal (retreat) mode. As a result, when the movable body is operated to be in an extended state, it is possible to easily provide interest to the player.

Further, the projected area of the plate member 951 when viewed from the front is set to be larger than the projected area of the pair of wing members 945. Therefore, the dead space on the back side of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized. That is, in the game board 13 that includes two displacement members (a plate member 951 and a pair of wing members 945), respective driving means (a driving unit 957 and a Since the drive unit 960) is disposed, it is possible to easily dispose each drive means on the back side of one displacement member (plate member 951), and also on the back side of the other displacement member (pair of wing members 945). You can create a space.

Furthermore, since the plate member 951 is formed to have a larger projected area when viewed from the front than the projected area when viewed from the front of the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951, The dead space on the back side of the prize opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105(a), a drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and a drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are operated in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951 (in the left-right direction in FIG. 105(a)). are arranged in parallel along the Therefore, the dead space on the back side of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

In this case, as described above, the plate member 951 (specific winning a prize opening unit 950) is disposed at a position farther from the central opening of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 81) than the pair of wing members 945, and The longitudinal direction is arranged perpendicular to the separation direction. This makes it easier to secure a space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945. As a result, the space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 can be effectively utilized.

As described above, the rolling part 943a is formed on the front base 943 of the front unit 940, the rolling part 943a is disposed through the second prize opening 140 of the back base 941, and the drive unit 960 is formed on the front base 943 of the front unit 940. 941, the drive unit 960 can be held (disposed) on the front base 943 at the same time as the rear base 941 is fastened and fixed to the front base 943. This can prevent forgetting to attach the drive unit 960 when attaching the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (gaming board 13).

The solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 are set at substantially the same position on the opposite side (back side) to the plate member 951 side of the specific winning opening unit 950, and the drive unit Wiring HS1 and wiring HS2 connected to the solenoid 957a of 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 are connected from the end of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 on the side opposite to the plate member 951 (back side). Thereby, the wiring of the solenoid 957a and the solenoid 610 can be easily arranged together. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wiring from coming apart on the side opposite to the gaming area (back side) of the game board 13, and it is possible to suppress the wiring HS1 and HS2 from interfering with other devices and accessories.

That is, the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 that drives the wing member 945 and the solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are arranged with the axial directions of the shaft portion 961b and the shaft portion 957a2 facing in the same direction. At the same time, the wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 are connected (pulled out) to the sides of the main body portion 961a and the shaft portion 957a2 opposite to the shaft portions 961b and 957a2. This makes it easier to combine the wiring HS1 of the drive unit 960 and the wiring HS2 of the drive unit 957.

The drive unit 960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are arranged at positions where both side surfaces in the direction of gravity are substantially flush with each other. This makes it possible to simplify the shape of a partitioning member (not shown) that partitions the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 and limits the flow of an electromagnetic field to the area where the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 are disposed.

That is, the side surfaces of the main body portion 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body portion 957a1 of the drive unit 957 are formed to have different sizes, or the side surfaces of the main body portion 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body portion 957a1 of the drive unit 957 are formed on both sides in the direction of gravity. When the surfaces are arranged at different positions in the direction of gravity, both side surfaces of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 in the direction of gravity form a step, so the sections are divided according to the step. It becomes necessary to form a member, and the shape of such a partition member becomes complicated.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are disposed at positions where both side surfaces of the main body part 961a and the main body part 957a1 in the direction of gravity are substantially flush with each other, and the outer surfaces form a step. Therefore, the partition member can have a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the partition member can be simplified.

Note that the partition member is a conductive barrier that partitions the area where the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are installed from other areas and restricts the flow of electromagnetic waves between these two areas. It is formed from a metal plate.

Moreover, the transmission member 965 is arranged between the passage member 955 of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 and the rolling part 943a of the front unit 940 (see FIG. 97), and the transmission member 965 is provided at the tip (insertion part 965e). Since a displacement member 966 is disposed that slides to open and close the pair of wing members 945 as the pair of wing members 945 rotates, compared to a conventional product in which the pair of wing members 945 is opened and closed only by a rotating member, the second prize is achieved. Space can be secured on the back side of the opening 140 and on both sides (lateral sides) of the rolling portion 943a. In addition, unlike conventional products, there is no need to bend the throwing path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning port 140 toward the specific winning port unit 950 in order to avoid interference with the rotating member, so the second The winning hole 140 can be brought close to the specific winning hole 65a.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 106(a) and 106(b), the drive unit 960 is arranged at a position overlapping with the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE2 arranged in a pair on the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 in front view. will be established. That is, the detection device SE2 is arranged between the plate member 951 and the drive unit 960. As a result, if, for example, the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with from the specific winning opening 65a, the drive unit 960 can be hidden by the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE1, so that such illicit act cannot be carried out. It can be made difficult.

Here, as described above, when the drive means (drive unit 960) that drives the wing member 945 is disposed on the back side of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, a piano wire or the like is inserted through the gap in the pachinko machine 10. If a hole is formed in the ball entry member 953 from the gaming area side to the drive unit 960 with a drill or the like for the purpose of fraudulently operating the gaming machine, it will be difficult for store staff to discover the fraudulent activity. There was a risk of being exposed.

That is, since the plate member 951 is disposed on the gaming area (player) side of the ball entry member 953, the ball entry member 953 is hidden by the plate member 951, and the store staff cannot prevent fraud caused by the ball entry member 953. is said to be difficult to discover.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in order to secure the path from the specific prize opening 65a to the first driving means, if a tool such as a drill is used to perform hole-drilling, the detection Since the detection board SE1b of the device SE1 can be destroyed, fraudulent activity can be discovered by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the plate member 951 is opened and tampering is done to the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a, the drive unit 960 can be moved to the plate member 951 by closing the plate member 951. Since the location where the fraud has been committed cannot be seen, it is particularly effective to detect fraud by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1.

In addition, since the detection device SE1 is a reused item (ready-made product) that is the same as the detection devices that detect other game balls (for example, the detection device SE2 and the detection device SE3), a degree of freedom is ensured in its external size. Can not. Therefore, a gap is formed between the opposing detection devices SE1. Therefore, if the player drills a hole in the ball entry member 953 with a drill or the like, aiming at the gap, there is a risk that the player's fraudulent activity may not be reported to the clerk.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the wiring HS3 is connected to opposite sides of the pair of detection devices SE1. Thereby, the wiring HS3 can be arranged in the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. Therefore, when a player penetrates the gap between the pair of detection devices SE1 with a drill or the like, the wire HS3 can be broken by the drill. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 notifies the error, making it easier for the clerk to discover fraud.

That is, the wiring is relatively susceptible to damage. Therefore, in order to secure the path from the specific prize opening 65a to the drive unit, for example, if a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole, the wiring HS3 may be damaged (disconnected) due to the fraudulent act. ) can be easily done. Alternatively, it is possible to make the user recognize that it is difficult to commit fraudulent acts without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring HS3, thereby making it easier to deter fraudulent acts.

Moreover, an annular protrusion 953c into which a screw for fastening the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is screwed is formed between the pair of opposing detection devices SE1. As a result, when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with from the open side (E10(a) lower side) of the ball entry member 953, the drive unit 960 can be hidden, making it more difficult to commit such fraudulent acts. That is, as described above, it is difficult to shield the front surface of the drive unit 960 with the pair of detection devices SE1, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of opposing detection devices SE1. By setting the fastening position to , the unshielded area in the front of the drive unit 960 can be compensated for by the screw, making it more difficult for fraudulent acts to occur.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 106(b), the wiring HS3 is arranged so as to be wound around the annular projection 953c of the ball entry member 953. Thereby, the wiring HS3 can be routed (positioned) over a wider range of the gap formed between the pair of opposing detection devices SE1. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the wiring HS3. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with from the open side of the ball entry member 953, such tampering can be made more difficult. Alternatively, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that it is difficult to commit fraudulent acts without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring HS3, thereby making it easier to deter fraudulent acts.

Therefore, when the player aims a drill or the like to penetrate the gap between the opposing detection devices SE1, the wire HS3 can be easily broken by the drill. This allows the pachinko machine 10 to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 notifies the error, making it easier for the clerk to discover fraud.

Further, the wiring HS3 is arranged so as to be wound around the annular projection 953c. This makes it difficult for force in the shearing direction to act on the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS. That is, when the wiring HS3 is not wound around the annular protrusion 953c and is discharged to the outside of the specific winning opening unit 950, the wiring HS3 is pulled by the specific winning opening unit 950 in the discharge direction, and the detection is performed. A force in the shearing direction acts on the connecting portion between the device SE1 and the wiring HS. Since the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS3 is formed by an insertion type connector, it is easily cut by force in the shearing direction.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular projection 953c, when the wiring HS3 is pulled in the ejection direction of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950, the connecting portion with the detection device SE1 The direction of the force acting on the wiring HS3 can be made to act in the direction in which the wiring HS3 is connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring HS3 from being cut at the connection portion with the detection device SE1.

Further, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other is formed at a position that is biased towards the end of the wiring HS3 of the detection device SE1 on the opposite side to the discharge side. Therefore, the wiring HS3 of the pair of detection devices SE1 is pulled out to the side opposite to the screw engagement position (annular protrusion 953c), so the wiring HS3 is routed (positioned) over a wider range in front of the drive unit 960. be able to. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the screws and wiring. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened to tamper with the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a, such tampering can be made more difficult.

Next, the overall configuration of the ball throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. 107(a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 107(b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit 970. 108(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 108(b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the ball throwing unit 970.

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the ball throwing unit 970 includes a distribution unit 980 that is disposed on the player side (game area side) and has a space inside which a game ball can be inserted, and a game area of the distribution unit 980. and a passage unit 990 disposed on the opposite side.

The sorting unit 980 includes an opening (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) that is continuous with the first winning port 64 and second winning port 140 of the winning port unit 930 described above, and the opening (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b). ) can be received inside the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the gaming area via the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. Note that a detailed explanation of the distribution unit 980 will be given later.

The passage unit 990 is disposed on the other end side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 980 in the gravity direction. The passage unit 990 has a plurality of openings (first through hole 991a to second through hole 991d) on the surface facing the distribution unit 980, and receives game balls thrown inside the distribution unit 980 through the openings. A detailed explanation of the passage unit 990 will be given later.

Next, the configuration of the distribution unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 109 to 112. 109(a) is a front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 109(b) is a side view of the distribution unit 980. 110 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 980. 112(a) is a sectional view of the distribution unit 980 taken along the line CXIIa-CXIIa in FIG. 109(a), and FIG. 112(b) is a sectional view of the distribution unit 980 taken along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a). It is.

As shown in FIGS. 109 to 112, the sorting unit 980 has a rear base 985, a front base 981 disposed on the player side of the rear base 985, and a rotating unit between the front base 981 and the rear base. It is formed mainly of a distribution section 983 disposed in a possible state, and a cover member 987 disposed on the back side of the rear base 985 at a position corresponding to the distribution section 983.

The back base 985 is made of a colored semi-transparent (in this embodiment, blue) resin material, and includes a base portion 985a formed in a plate shape, and a plurality of openings (openings) passing through the base portion 985a in the thickness direction. 985b to 985g), a recessed portion 985h recessed on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the plurality of openings, and a housing portion 986b and a protruding portion 986e protruding from the opposite surface of the recessed portion 985h. be prepared and formed.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of circular fastening holes 986c and 986d penetrating the outer edge of the base portion 985a, and an inclined surface that slopes toward one side in the direction of gravity on the side opposite to the front base 981 side. 986a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole into which a screw inserted through the front base 981, which will be described later, is screwed. Thereby, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 986d is a hole into which a screw passing through a passage unit 990 described later is screwed. Thereby, the back base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the passage unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position overlapping a portion of openings 985b to 985f, which will be described later, on the other side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined surface 986a is formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Thereby, the downward direction of the game balls flowing down in the direction of gravity can be guided toward the openings 985b to 985f. As a result, game balls can easily flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The recessed portion 985h is recessed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 (the front side in FIG. 109(b)), and is formed approximately at the center of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (left-right direction in FIG. 109(b)). be done. Further, the recess 985h is formed to a size that can accommodate a portion of a distribution section 983, which will be described later, inside, and is provided with a bearing section 985j that protrudes in an annular shape from the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than an outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The opening 985b and the opening 985c are respectively formed at both ends in the lateral direction of the base portion 985a, and the size of the inner edge is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the openings 985b and 985c are formed such that the inner surfaces on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) are inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985d is formed at approximately the center of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (FIG. 109(b) left-right direction), and its position in the gravity direction (FIG. 109(b) vertical direction) is approximately the same as the openings 985b and 985c. set to the position. Further, like the openings 985b and 985c, the opening 985d is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward as it goes toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985e is formed between the opening 985b and the opening 985d, and the opening 985f is formed between the opening 985c and the opening 985d. In addition, the openings 985e and 985f extend in the direction of gravity into inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1, which are spaces that open on the front base 981 side, and discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3, which have spaces that open on the side opposite to the front base 981 side. It is formed mainly by intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 that communicate the passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between the facing sides of a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through. Ru. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage can be made to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed to extend in the gravity direction, and the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) communicates with the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1, and is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. . Thereby, the game balls passing through the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 can be made to flow into the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2.

Furthermore, a recessed portion 985f4 is formed in the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, which is recessed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the throwing direction (direction of gravity) of the game ball. The recessed portion 985f4 is a cutout for arranging a detection device SE3, which will be described later, inside the recessed portion 985f4, and is set to have substantially the same external shape as the detection device SE3 when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the detection device SE3 can be inserted and disposed from the back side of the base portion 985a (the side opposite to the front base 981).

Further, in the detection device SE3, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set parallel to the extending direction of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the space of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 substantially coincide with each other. placed in position. As a result, when the game ball flows down from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 to the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), it is possible to allow the game ball to pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. can. Thereby, game balls passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be detected.

Further, in the detection device SE3, since the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is formed parallel to the direction of gravity, the dead weight of the game ball can be easily utilized when throwing the game ball to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from getting caught in the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 and the connecting portion with the detection hole SE1a. Note that the detailed configuration of the detection device SE3 is the same as that of the detection device SE1 described above, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The recessed portions 985e4 and 985f4 are formed in a continuous manner with the spaces of the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3. That is, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed using the detection device SE3. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the length dimension of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 in the direction of gravity from increasing. As a result, it is possible to suppress the back base 985 from increasing in size in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passages 985e3, 985f3 are connected to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. In addition, the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d of the passage unit 990, which will be described later, when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game balls passing through the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 can flow into the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3, and the balls can be passed through the spaces and sent to the passage unit 990.

The opening 985g is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the opening 985d. Further, like the opening 985d, the opening 985g is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between the facing sides of a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through. Ru. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be made to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The housing portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings. Further, the accommodating portion 986b is a portion that accommodates a magnetic body 988b, which will be described later, inside, and its inner diameter is set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed in a cylindrical body. Further, the protruding dimension of the accommodating portion 986b is set larger than the axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b. Thereby, the magnetic body 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b. Furthermore, since the housing portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular bodies, even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is slightly increased due to manufacturing errors, the pair of semicircular bodies can be elastically deformed. A magnetic body 988b can be provided.

The protruding portion 986e is provided in a cylindrical shape from a position opposite to the above-described bearing portion 985j with the base portion 985a interposed therebetween. The protruding portion 986e also includes a circular fastening hole formed in the shaft thereof. The fastening hole is a hole into which the tip of a screw inserted through a cover member 987 (described later) is screwed. By screwing the screw while the cover member 987 is in contact with the cover member 987, the cover member 987 is fastened to the back base 985. Can be fixed.

The magnetic body 988b is made of a magnet, and by being disposed in the housing portion 986b, it is possible to generate a magnetic field toward the front base 981 via the base portion 985a. This makes it possible to repel a magnetic body 988c disposed in the distribution section 983, which will be described later, to facilitate the displacement of the distribution section 983.

The front base 981 is formed from a colored semi-transparent (in this embodiment, blue) resin material. The front base 981 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape that is larger than the back base 985 when viewed from the front, and includes a base plate 981a and a bulge that bulges out from the base plate 981a toward the player (opposite side to the back base 986). It is formed mainly with a protruding part 982.

The base plate 981a is formed as a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of insertion holes 981g extending through the plate thickness direction at its outer peripheral edge, and a first guide wall protruding toward the rear base 985 side. 981f and a second guide wall 981d, a second insertion hole 981e penetrating near the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and a plate on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulge 982. It is formed mainly with a through hole 981c penetrating in the thickness direction.

The insertion hole 981g is a hole through which a screw (not shown) for fastening the assembled ball throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82) is inserted, and is set to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw. .

The first guide walls 981f are formed in a semicircular annular shape, and are formed in pairs in the lateral direction with a bulge 982, which will be described later, sandwiched therebetween. Further, the first guide wall 981f is formed with a semicircular open portion facing substantially the center in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a.

The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed at two locations in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a. Further, the second guide wall 981d is formed below a bulge 982, which will be described later, in the direction of gravity, and a through hole 981c is formed between the two locations.

The first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d have an inner edge shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the periphery of the fastening hole 986c of the back base 985 described above. As a result, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined, the wall around the fastening hole 986c can be inserted inside the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981f and the second The guide wall 981d can be positioned.

The second insertion hole 981e is formed at the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and at the center of the second guide wall 981d. The second insertion hole 981e is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 986c when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are assembled, and a screw is inserted from the front base 981 side and screwed into the fastening hole 986d. By doing so, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened together.

The through hole 981c is formed in a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the through hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b that stands up along the edge thereof on the side opposite to the rear base 985 side (on the near side in the paper of FIG. 109(a)). In addition, the through hole 981c is a part that communicates with the second winning hole 140 of the winning hole unit 930 described above, and when the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60, the second winning hole 140 It is formed at a position that overlaps with the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the ball.

The side wall portion 981b is formed in such a size that the upright end surface contacts the second ball throwing portion 942c of the winning hole unit 930 in a state where the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. In addition, the side wall portion 981b has a rolling surface 981c1 on the inner surface on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is located closer to the other end side in the gravity direction than the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a, and the back base 985 It is formed with a downward slope towards the side.

Further, the side wall portion 981b includes a projection 981b1 projecting from the erected tip surface. The protrusion 981b1 is formed at a position spaced apart from the rolling surface 981c1 by a radius of the game ball in the direction of gravity. Thereby, when the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling part 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be made less likely to be caught between the rolling part 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed explanation of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges out from the base plate 981a, and is set to a size that allows a game ball to be inserted into the inside thereof, and a game ball flowing into the inside from the inflow port 982d passes through the bulging portion 982. The ball-throwing path TR0 includes a first path TR1 and a second path TR2 that branch from the ball-throwing path TR0. The bulging portion 982 is formed into a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is bent toward the rear base 985 side and stands approximately halfway between the inlet 982d, which is formed by cutting out the upper end in the direction of gravity. It is formed mainly of an upright wall 982a and recesses 982e to 982j recessed at a plurality of locations on the other side in the direction of gravity.

The inlet 982d is cut out and has a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the inflow port 982d has an inner edge portion that corresponds to the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the first winning port 64 of the winning port unit 930 when the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. Formed in overlapping positions.

The inlet 982d also includes a second protrusion 982d1 that protrudes toward the side opposite to the rear base 985 at the edge on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the shape of the inner edge of the first recessed notch 942g1 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are disposed on the base plate 60, the second protrusion 982d1 The second protrusion 982d1 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the recessed notch 942g1.

Further, the distance L34 (see FIG. 109(a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the end face of the inflow port 982d on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is from the inner edge of the first concave notch 942g1 to the first thrown ball. The distance L35 (see FIG. 87(b)) to the inner edge of the portion 942g on one side in the gravity direction is set larger than the distance L35 (see FIG. 87(b)). As a result, when the game ball thrown to the first ball throwing part 942g via the first winning opening 64 flows into the inflow port 982d, the inflow port 982d (bulging part 982) and the first ball throwing part 942g are connected to each other. You can avoid getting caught in between.

The erected wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape that is separated from the outer edge shape of the bulged portion 982 by a predetermined distance when viewed from the front. Further, the standing wall 982a is formed below the inflow port 982d in the gravity direction, and includes an abutment portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape when viewed from the standing direction above the gravity direction.

The standing wall 982a has a horizontal separation distance L36 (see FIG. 112(b)) from the inner edge of the outer circumferential portion of the bulging portion 982 that is set larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can be placed between the opposing sides. A first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 are formed as spaces through which the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can pass.

The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed on the downstream side of the distribution section 983, which will be described later, and game balls passing through the distribution section 983 are thrown to either direction. The distribution section 983 is configured to be able to alternately send game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the throwing of the game balls flowing into the first winning opening 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

On the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the standing wall 982a, a bearing portion 982c is formed which protrudes in an annular shape from the inner surface of the bulge portion 982 toward the rear base 985 side. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports a distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and has an inner diameter set to be approximately the same as an outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

Furthermore, as described above, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j of the back base 985, so when combining the front base 981 and the back base 985, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j. By inserting the other end of the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985.

The contact portion 982a1 is formed on the rotation locus of the distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and the amount of rotational displacement of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by contacting the action portion 983a of the distribution portion 983. Note that a detailed explanation of the contact state between the contact portion 982a1 and the distribution portion 983 will be given later.

The recessed portion 982e and the recessed portion 982f are recessed from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Further, inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2, which is a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, is formed.

The first branch passage BK1 communicates with the opening 985b of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch passage BK1 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985b of the back base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed to be able to receive the game balls flowing down the second passage TR2, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985c of the back base 985.

The recessed portion 982h and the recessed portion 982j are recessed from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. That is, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 extend on one side in the direction of gravity by the distance of the recess 982h and the recess 982j.

The first passage TR1 communicates with the opening 985e of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d are allowed to flow into the first passage TR1, and the game balls that have flowed in can also flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d are allowed to flow into the first passage TR1, and the game balls that have flowed in can also flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

The recessed portion 982g is formed between the recessed portion 982h and the recessed portion 982j, and the recessed direction is set parallel to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Furthermore, a third branch passage BK3, which is a space communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, is formed inside the recess 982g. Therefore, since the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, it is possible to downsize the distribution unit 980. .

The third branch passage BK3 communicates with the opening 985d of the back base 985 when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the third branch passage is formed to be able to receive the game balls flowing down the first passage or the second passage, and the received game balls can flow into the opening 985d of the back base 985.

The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side of the bulging portion 982 in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and extends obliquely toward the back base 985 side toward the one side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined portion 982b is formed at a position facing from the opening 985b to the opening 985f when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, the second passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2, and the third branch passage BK3 are brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b. can be guided toward the openings 985b to 985f to make it easier to flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1 are connected to the recessed portions 982h and 982j, and the inclined portion 982b, and the erected end surfaces thereof descend toward the rear base 985 side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 109(b)). tilted. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are brought into contact with the upright end surfaces of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1, and are guided toward the openings 985e and 985f, It is possible to easily flow into the opening 985e and the opening 985f.

Further, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed to be connected to the inclined portion 982b. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b and guided toward the rear base 985 side, and collided with the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1, thereby causing the game balls to flow through the opening 985e. and can easily flow into the opening 985f. Further, since the distance between the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be reduced by the slope of the slope portion 982b, the rigidity of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be increased and durability can be improved.

Here, as described above, the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is visible to the player via the front unit 940 (winning port unit 930) arranged on the player side. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through the front unit 940 become difficult to visually recognize from the player side. Furthermore, when the guide parts 982h1 and 982j1 are set up on the front side of the opening 985e and the opening 985f, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are There was a problem that it became difficult for people to see it.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b, so that the vertical dimension of the inclined portion 982b can be reduced. Therefore, the game balls thrown into the openings 985e and 985f (the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) can be easily recognized even through the front unit 940. That is, in the present embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be located on the back base 985 side as it goes in the downward direction of the game ball, thereby ensuring rigidity and guiding the game ball. Since the thickness of the portions 982h1 and 982j1 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner, visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

The distribution part 983 is set to have a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the facing front base 981 and the rear base 985, and is formed in a substantially T-shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the distribution part 983 penetrates through the T-shaped acting part 983a on one side, an intermediate plate 983b protruding from a substantially central position in the extending direction of the acting part 983a, and a connecting part between the acting part 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. a through hole 983c, a contact portion 983d that bulges out in a circular shape around the axis of the through hole 983c, and a wall portion 983e that is connected to the working portion 983a and the back base 985 side of the intermediate plate 983b. It is formed mainly by

The through-hole 983c is a hole into which a shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the rear base 985 is inserted, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. As a result, when assembling the front base 981 and the rear base 985, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the through hole 983c of the distribution part 983, the front base 981 and the rear base can be assembled while the distribution part 983 is rotatable. 985.

The intermediate plate 983b is formed to extend toward the outside in the radial direction of the through hole 983c, and when the displacement of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by rotating in one direction or the other, the intermediate plate 983b is formed from its tip. The distance L37 (see FIG. 112(b)) to the inside is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the throwing of the game ball is restricted to one or the other of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. In addition, the intermediate plate 983b allows the distribution portion 983 to be rotated around the through hole 983c, so that the throwing of the game ball from one side of the first passage TR1 is regulated to the other side of the second passage TR2. can be switched to a state where it is regulated.

The acting portion 983a is formed to extend in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b when viewed from the front. Moreover, the connection position of the action part 983a with the contact part 983d is set to the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position with the contact part 983d of the intermediate plate 983b. Thereby, the game ball thrown to the distribution part 983 via the inlet 982d is placed in a state where a load is applied to the action part 983a side. As a result, the distribution section 983 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and is formed into a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed in the axial direction of the through hole 983c. The wall portion 983e is formed to protrude outward from the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the through hole 983c, and has a thickness larger than the recess dimension of the recess portion 985h of the back base 985. is set small. Therefore, in a state where the distribution part 983 is arranged between the rear base 985 and the front base 981 facing each other, the wall part 983e can be arranged inside the recessed part 985h. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the distribution unit 980 from the inlet 982d can be prevented from being caught inside the recess 985h, thereby preventing the game ball from flowing down.

Further, the wall portion 983e includes an accommodating portion 983e1 that is recessed toward the intermediate plate 983b side from the through hole 983c at the radially outer end portion on the back side of the intermediate plate 983b. The accommodating portion 983e1 is a portion that accommodates the magnetic body 988c formed in a cylindrical body inside, and is recessed into a circular shape having an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. Further, the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed from the back base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is accommodated therein from the back base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is made of a magnet and is disposed in a state where it repels the magnetic body 988b disposed on the rear base 985. As a result, the magnetic body 988c of the distributing part 983 is rotated about the through hole 983c as an axis by the magnetic force acting on the magnetic body 988b disposed on the rear base 985, so that the magnetic body 988c rotates in one direction or the other direction in which the acting part 983a extends. It can be placed in a tilted position.

Further, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a state where they are repelled, and the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, the magnetic body 988c inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 is You can prevent yourself from slipping out. That is, since a portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the housing section 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distribution section 983 can be simplified, and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c in the distribution section 983 can be simplified.

In addition, the magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c is set to a magnetic force smaller than the load of the game ball. Thereby, the game balls thrown inside the distribution unit 980 can be prevented from being magnetically attracted to the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c and staying inside the distribution unit 980.

The cover member 987 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from above, and is disposed on the side opposite to the front base 981 side of the recess 985h of the rear base 985. Further, the cover member 987 is formed with two first recesses 987a and a second recess 987b, which are circular in shape when viewed from the front and are recessed in parallel in the direction of gravity.

The first recess 987a is a portion that accommodates the above-mentioned accommodating portion 986b of the back base 985 inside, and is set to have an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the accommodating portion 986b. Therefore, by accommodating the tip of the accommodating part 986b in the first recess 987a with the magnetic body 988b accommodated inside the accommodating part 986b as described above, the magnetic substance 988b accommodated inside the accommodating part 986b is accommodated. It can be suppressed from slipping out of the portion 986b.

The second recess 987b includes a through hole 987b1 on the bottom surface thereof for fastening and fixing to the back base 985. Further, the second recessed portion 987b has an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the protruding portion 986e of the rear base 985 described above. As a result, the cover member 987 can accommodate and position the second recess 987b in the protruding part 986e of the rear base 985, and in the positioned state, screws can be inserted into the fastening hole of the protruding part 986e through the through hole 987b1. Can be concluded.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the operation of the distribution section 983 when game balls flow into the distribution unit 980 from the inlet 982d will be described. 113(a) and 113(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the distribution unit 980 in range CXIII of FIG. 112(b). In addition, below, the action part 983a of the distribution part 983 is displaced from the state which regulates the throwing of a game ball to one side of 1st path|passage TR1 to the state which restricts the throwing of a game ball to the other side of 2nd path|passage TR2. Only the case will be explained, and a description of the case where the throwing of the game ball from the state of regulating the throwing of the game ball to the other side of the second passage TR2 to the one side of the first passage TR1 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 113(a) and 113(b), before the game ball is thrown to the distribution section 983 (before the game ball contacts the action section 983a), as described above, the game ball is distributed to the distribution section 983. The provided magnetic body 988c repels the magnetic body 988b (see FIG. 110), so that the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the second passage TR2 side. Note that the amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the second passage TR2 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981 (see FIG. 113(a)).

When the game ball is thrown to the distribution section 983 in this state, the game ball is thrown between the intermediate plate 983b and the action section 983a on the first passage TR1 side. As described above, the connection position of the acting part 983a with the contact part 983d is set to the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position with the contact part 983d of the intermediate plate 983b. , the load of the game ball can be applied to the acting portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side.

As a result, the distribution part 983 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c, and the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the first passage TR1 side, as shown in FIG. 113(b). It is said that Note that the amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981. Further, in this case, the repulsion direction of the magnetic body 988c is switched from a state in which the intermediate plate 983b on the radially outer side of the through hole 983c acts on the second passage TR2 side to a state in which it acts on the first passage TR1 side.

Therefore, the distribution section 983 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c by using the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. Furthermore, since the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c is switched, the rotating state of the distribution section 983 can be maintained. Therefore, each time a game ball is thrown, the distribution section 983 can displace the inclination direction of the intermediate plate 983b and throw the game ball one ball to the first path TR1 and the second path TR2.

Next, the configuration of the passage unit 990 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. 114(a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 114(b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 990.

As shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings that are opened on the sorting unit 980 side, and a first passage member 991 disposed in the first passage member 991. A second passage member 992 that throws a passing game ball; a third passage member 993 that is disposed in the second passage member 992 and that throws a game ball that has passed through the second passage member 992; The detection device SE4 is disposed between three passage members 993.

The first passage member 991 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with a predetermined width on the second passage member 992 side. The first passage member 991 also has a first insertion hole 991a formed through the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 980 side, and a first insertion hole 991a formed through the other side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the first insertion hole 991a. a second insertion hole 991b formed through the second insertion hole 991b, a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d formed on both sides of the second insertion hole 991b in the horizontal direction, and the outer periphery in front view. It is formed mainly by having a plurality of circular through holes 991f formed therethrough.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed into a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, game balls flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

Furthermore, an annular annular protrusion 991g, which has a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw inserted through the second passage member 992 is screwed, is formed in the first insertion hole 991a and connected to the outer peripheral portion thereof. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985g can be received into the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the third insertion hole 991c is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 is continuous when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 (first passage TR1) and passing through the opening 985e can be received in the third insertion hole 991c.

Further, the third insertion hole 991c includes recessed portions 991c1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991c1 is a portion that accommodates therein the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991c1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being tampered with from the outside in a state in which the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. can.

Furthermore, when combining the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990, the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980 can be received inside the recessed part 991c1 of the passage unit 990, so that the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a portion of the detection device SE3 from protruding to the outside, and to reduce the size of the ball throwing unit 970 as a whole.

The third insertion hole 991c has a protruding portion 991c2 on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side that protrudes from the second insertion hole 991b side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction. The second insertion hole 991b is formed to be inclined downward in a direction away from the matching second insertion hole 991b. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the third insertion hole 991c can collide with the protruding portion 991c2 and can be rolled in the direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (to the left in FIG. 114(a)).

The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 is continuous when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 (second passage TR2) and passing through the opening 985f can be received in the fourth insertion hole 991d.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d includes recessed portions 991d1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991d1 is a portion that accommodates therein the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991d1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being tampered with from the outside in a state in which the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. can.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d has a protruding portion 991c2 on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side that protrudes from the second insertion hole 991b side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is oriented horizontally. The second insertion hole 991b is formed to be inclined downward in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b adjacent to the second insertion hole 991b. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the fourth insertion hole 991d can collide with the protruding portion 991d2 and can be rolled in the direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (rightward in FIG. 114(a)).

The second passage member 992 is formed in a substantially T-shaped plate shape that is upside down when viewed from the front, and has a fifth insertion hole 922 that penetrates to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), and the fifth insertion hole The fifth insertion hole 922 mainly includes a sixth insertion hole 992c penetrating on one side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the fifth insertion hole 922 in the gravity direction, and an upright wall 992a erected on the inner peripheral edge of the fifth insertion hole 922.

The fifth insertion hole 922 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fifth insertion hole 991e is formed at a position where the inner space of the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 is continuous when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 can be received in the fifth insertion hole 922.

The erected wall 992a is erected from the entire edge of the fifth insertion hole 922 toward the third passage member 993 side. Further, the standing wall 992a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the fifth insertion hole 922 can be rolled toward the third passage member 993 side (the right side in FIG. 114(b)).

The outer peripheral surface of the standing wall 992a is formed with an engaging portion 992d that projects horizontally, and a projecting wall 992e that projects horizontally from the end on the first passage member 991 side. The engaging portion 992d is formed in an L-shape that protrudes in the horizontal direction and has a tip bent toward the third passage member 993. Wiring for a detection device SE4 and a detection device SE3 disposed in the sorting unit 980, which will be described later, are inserted between the engagement portion 992d and the vertical wall 992a. Thereby, the wiring of the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be locked, so that the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be prevented from slipping out from the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990.

The protruding wall 992e is formed to protrude in a semicircular shape when viewed from the front on both horizontal sides of the upright wall 992a, and includes a through hole 992e1 penetrating the axis of the semicircle. Further, the projecting wall 992e is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined, and the through hole 992e1 is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of the first passage member 991. It is located coaxially with the fastening hole 991g1. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed by inserting a screw into the through hole 992e1 from the second passage member 992 side and screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1.

The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed into a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the sixth insertion hole 992c is formed at a position where its internal space is continuous with the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. Ru. Thereby, the game ball passing through the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 can be received into the sixth insertion hole 992c.

Further, a guide wall 992c1 that stands upright toward the third passage member 993 is formed around the sixth insertion hole 992c. The guide wall 992c1 is connected to a first wall portion 992c2 that stands upright on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the sixth insertion hole 992c, and an end in the extending direction of the first wall portion 992c2, and and a second wall portion 992c3 extending in the direction.

The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are wall surfaces for positioning the detection device SE4, and are located between the standing wall 993e formed in the third passage member 993 and the engaging portion 993d. The dimensions are set to be substantially the same as the dimensions on the opposite side of the detection device SE4.

Further, the detection device SE4 is arranged at a position where the inner space of the detection hole SE1a is continuous with the inner space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. Thereby, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a and is detected by the detection device SE4, and is also thrown toward the third passage member 993 side.

Further, the second passage member 992 includes an annular projection 992f that projects toward the third passage member 993 at a position spaced apart from the sixth insertion hole 992c in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 114(a)). The annular projection 992f has a circular fastening hole 992f1 on its axis. The fastening hole 992f1 is a hole into which a screw inserted through the third passage member 993 is screwed, and thereby the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed into a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, game balls flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

Furthermore, an annular annular protrusion 991g, which has a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw inserted through the second passage member 992 is screwed, is formed in the first insertion hole 991a and connected to the outer peripheral portion thereof. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985g can be received into the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

The third passage member 993 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front. The third passage member 993 includes a seventh insertion hole 993a formed in a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, a guide wall 993b erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a, and an edge on the other side in the gravity direction. It mainly includes an erected wall 993e erected on the second passage member 992 side, an engaging portion 993d projecting in the longitudinal direction, and a recess 993c recessed on the side surface on the second passage member 992 side. It is formed.

The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square shape with one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Moreover, the seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a position continuous with the internal space of the detection device SE4 disposed in the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined. Thereby, the game ball that has passed through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 can be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

The guide wall 993b is erected from the edges of the seventh insertion hole 993a in three directions excluding the other side in the gravity direction (the upper side in the gravity direction) toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side. Further, the guide wall 993b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 side (inclined downward toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side). be done. Thereby, the game ball thrown into the seventh insertion hole 992g can be rolled to the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side (the right side in FIG. 114(b)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 114(b), the third passage member 993 is disposed on one side in the gravity direction of the upright wall 992a of the second passage member 992 (lower side in FIG. 114(b)). As described above, since the third passage member 993 is open on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 114(b)), the third passage member 993 can be arranged closer to the standing wall 992a. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 described above can be brought close to each other, and the external shapes of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 in the direction of gravity can be reduced in size.

The standing wall 993e is such that when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance between the second passage member 992 and the first wall 992c2 is equal to the detection hole of the detection device SE4. It is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension on the shorter side in the direction perpendicular to the axis of SE1a. This allows positioning of the detection device SE4 in the direction of gravity.

Further, a first wall portion 992c2 is formed on the upstream side (on the second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown, for positioning the detection device SE4 on the lower side in the direction of gravity. Thereby, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

That is, the detection hole SE1a is formed to have a size slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball in order to prevent fraud by the player, so a slight positional deviation in the height of the rolling surface of the game ball may cause damage to the inside of the hole SE1a. In this embodiment, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the gravity direction is provided on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the heights of the sixth insertion hole 992c, the detection hole SE1a, and the rolling surface from being misaligned. As a result, the game ball inserted through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a.

The engaging portion 993d is formed to protrude in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and includes a bent portion 993d1 bent toward the second passage member 992 at the protruding tip. When the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the bent portion 993d1 has a distance dimension between the second passage member 992 and the second wall portion 992c3 that is equal to the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. The distance dimension on the longitudinal side in the direction perpendicular to the axis of Thereby, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the horizontal direction.

The recess 993c is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, and is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f. It is formed with a larger inner edge shape. Further, the recess 993c includes a through hole 993c1 formed coaxially with the fastening hole 992f1 of the annular projection 992f on the bottom surface thereof. As a result, the annular protrusion 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the recess 993c, and the screw is inserted from the third passage member 993 side through the through hole 993c1 and screwed into the fastening hole 992f1. The member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

According to the ball throwing unit 970 configured as above, the ball throwing unit 970 is formed from a unit different from the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140, and the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 Since the ball throwing unit 970 (distributing unit 980) can be replaced with another unit and a different unit can be installed, the game that flows down the game area can be A different game format can be played without affecting the flow of the ball.

Another unit (replacement unit 1980) of the distribution unit 980 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. 117(a) is a front view of the replacement unit 1980, and FIG. 117(b) is a rear view of the replacement unit 1980. 118(a) is a cross-sectional view of the replacement unit 1980 taken along the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line in FIG. 117(a), and FIG. 118(b) is a cross-sectional view of the replacement unit 1980 taken along the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line in FIG. It is a diagram. Note that the same parts as those of the above-mentioned distribution unit 980 are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the exchange unit 1980 mainly includes a front base 1981 disposed on the gaming area side and a back base 1985 disposed on the opposite side of the front base 1981 to the gaming area side. Formed in preparation for.

The front base 1981 is formed from a colored semi-transparent resin material. Further, the front base 1981 is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the front base 981 of the sorting unit 980 when viewed from the front. The front base 1981 mainly includes a base plate 981a and a bulging portion 1982 that bulges from the base plate 981a toward the player side (the side opposite to the back base 1985).

Further, the front base 1981 is formed from a material whose color is different from the color of the front base 981 of the sorting unit 980 (in this embodiment, yellow). This makes it easy for the player to recognize whether the game board 13 is provided with the distribution unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980.

In other words, when the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) with the specifications in which the sorting unit 980 is installed and the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) with the specifications in which the exchange unit 1980 is installed are introduced into the same store. As will be described later, both specifications have the same shape of the gaming area (the front of the game board 13), making it difficult for the player to determine which specification it is. This makes it easier for players to recognize which specification of the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) it has.

The outer shape of the base plate 1981a when viewed from the front is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the base plate 981a of the sorting unit 980. Therefore, when the distribution unit 980 is replaced with the replacement unit 1980 (the specifications are changed), the front base 1981 (replacement unit 1980) can be placed on the base plate 60 without changing the shape of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60. Can be set. Therefore, there is no need to change the shape of the base plate 60 when specifications are changed by replacing the distribution unit 980 with the replacement unit 1980, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges out from the base plate 1981a, and is set to a size that allows a game ball to be inserted into the inside of the bulging portion 1982. The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an inlet 982d formed by cutting out the upper end in the direction of gravity.

The width dimension in the horizontal direction of the bulging portion 1982 is set to a size that allows only one game ball to pass through, and the game ball that flows in from the inflow port 982d can pass through the inside thereof and flow down. . Furthermore, the inner surface of the bulging portion 1982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is set at substantially the same position in the gravity direction as the inner surface of the opening 985d formed in the rear base 1985 on one side in the gravity direction. Thereby, the game balls that have flowed into the exchange unit 1980 from the inflow port 982d can be thrown to the opening 985d in the order in which they flow into the inflow port 982d.

The outer shape of the back base 1985 when viewed from the front is set to be approximately the same as the outer shape of the back base 985 of the sorting unit 980, and the opening 985d that communicates with the inner space of the bulging portion 1982 and the inner space of the through hole 981c communicate with each other. It is formed with an opening 985g.

According to the exchange unit 1980 configured as described above, as described above, the outer shape of the base plate 1981a when viewed from the front is substantially the same as the base plate 981a of the distribution unit 980. can be easily replaced (change of specifications).

Here, a game comprising a ball entrance unit formed to allow a game ball to enter therein and a passage connected to the ball entrance, and a game board on which the ball entrance unit is arranged. machine is known. According to such a gaming machine, by replacing the ball entry unit with another ball entry unit (for example, one with a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the gaming machine while reusing the game board. can. However, in the game machine described above, since the ball entry unit is arranged in front of the game board, it is necessary to secure a space in advance in front of the game board, for example, according to the maximum number of passages. Therefore, when using a ball entry unit with a small number of passages, there is a problem in that space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the distribution unit 980 (ball entry unit) has an inlet 982d, a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 connected to the inlet 982d, and A winning opening unit 930 is arranged on the front side, and a winning opening unit 930 is arranged on the back side of the winning opening unit 930 through the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and is connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Since the passage unit 990 is provided with a passage unit 990, it is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the winning slot unit 930 on the front of the game board 13, and a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages is secured on the front of the game board. There's no need. Therefore, by replacing the sorting unit 980 with the replacement unit 1980, the game board 13 (base board 60 and front unit 940) can be used (commonly used) and the front side of the game board 13 can be changed when changing the specifications of the game board 13. space can be used effectively.

In addition, as described above, the front unit 940 is formed from a colorless and transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material, and the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed to have a smaller external shape than the winning opening unit. In addition, since it is disposed at a position overlapping the front unit 940 when viewed from the front, the player can see the distribution unit 980 through the front unit 940, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, in order to make the sorting unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980 visible to the player, it is not essential that the base plate 60 be made of a light-transmitting material; for example, the base plate 60 may be made of a plywood board. , a sticker is attached to the base plate 60. Alternatively, since it is also permissible to paint the base plate 60, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

Further, since the sorting unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is made of a colored semi-transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material, the flow passes through the front unit 940 and flows down the inside (passage) of the sorting unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980. The game ball can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest in the game can be increased.

Further, since the front unit 940 is formed from a colorless and transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material, and the sorting unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980 is formed from a colored semi-transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material, the front Through the unit 940, the player can easily grasp the positional relationship in the front-rear direction (overlapping direction) with the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980. That is, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball changes its position in the front-back direction and flows down, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Further, the game ball passage of the distribution unit 980 is formed to include a ball throwing passage TR0 communicating with the inflow port 982d, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branching from the ball throwing passage TR0. Further, the sorting unit 980 is provided with a detection device SE3 that detects game balls passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Therefore, when manufacturing a game machine with a different specification by changing from the distribution unit 980 with many passing paths for game balls to the replacement unit 1980 with fewer passages, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of detection devices SE3.

That is, in a structure in which the detection device SE3 is disposed in the passage unit 990 disposed downstream of the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980, the detection device SE3 can be disposed for the passage of the distribution unit 980, but the downstream passage When changing from the distribution unit 980 with two flow passages to the replacement unit 1980 with one flow passage, it is sufficient to install one detection sensor in the passage unit 990, but the number of flow passages in the distribution unit 980 is There is a possibility that the detection device SE3 will be provided accordingly. On the other hand, if the detection device SE3 is arranged in a path branching from the ball throwing path TR0, when changing the distribution unit 980 to the replacement unit 1980, the number of detection devices SE3 corresponding to the unit is installed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in determining the number of locations.

On the other hand, the detection device SE4 that detects the inflow of game balls into the second winning opening 140 is arranged in the passage unit 990, as described above. Therefore, the detection devices disposed in the sorting unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 can be distributed, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the passages can be increased accordingly.

Further, the exchange unit 1980 is formed with a side wall portion 981b that throws the game ball flowing in from the second prize opening 140 at the same position as the distribution unit 980. Therefore, similarly to the sorting unit 980, when disposing the exchange unit 1980 in the front unit 940 (winning port unit 930), the side wall portion 981b can be used to position the exchange unit 1980. That is, regardless of the form of the replacement unit 1980, the position where the rolling part 943a and the side wall part 981b are connected is the same, so by positioning the side wall part 981b with respect to the rolling part 943a, the replacement unit 1980 However, positioning can be performed with respect to the front unit 940.

Furthermore, similarly to the distribution unit 980, the purpose of positioning the replacement unit 1980 with respect to the front unit 940 is to suppress positional deviation (step) from occurring at the connecting portion between the rolling portion 943a and the side wall portion 981b. Since the target portion can be positioned, the occurrence of positional deviations (steps) can be more effectively suppressed compared to the case where other portions are positioned. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the arrangement of the prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described. FIG. 119 is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 81.

As shown in FIG. 119, the passages of the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 are connected to each other in a state where they are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 119), and the convex portion formed on the ball throwing unit 970 is It is inserted into a protrusion formed on the front unit 940.

To explain in detail, in the first ball throwing section 942g and the inflow port 982d, the second protrusion 982d1 formed at the inflow port 982d is arranged inside the first recessed notch 942g1 formed at the first ball throwing section 942g. Further, in the second ball throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b, a protrusion 981b1 formed on the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside a second recessed notch 942c1 formed on the second ball throwing portion 942c.

Further, the second ball throwing section 942c of the front unit 940 and the side wall section 981b of the distribution unit 980 are arranged in an internal space surrounded by an arm section 962e formed in the drive unit 960 and a wall section 962f.

Here, conventionally, a game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes, and a first member communicating with the first passage of the first member. A game machine is known that has two passages and a second member disposed on the back side of the game board. The game ball that flows down the front side of the game board and flows into the first passage of the first member passes through the first passage, flows into the second passage of the second member, and flows into the second passage on the back side of the game board. Pass through 2 passages. Thereby, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front and back direction, which can provide interest to the player.

In this case, if there is a positional deviation (step) in the connecting part between the first passage and the second passage, the smooth flow of the game ball will be inhibited, so the positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member will be ensured. You are requested to do so. However, the gaming machine described above has a problem in that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having passages and decorative members are arranged on the front of the game board, positioning holes for positioning each of these members are provided on the game board. While the positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed in the process of forming the first member, in order to form the positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back of the game board, it is necessary to invert the game board. This requires a separate step of forming a positioning hole just for the second member, which is not practical.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, when the drive unit 960 is disposed on the front unit 940, the pair of second guides of the front unit 940 are placed between the opposing projections 962g of the drive unit 960. Wall 942d is inserted. When the ball throwing unit 970 is disposed in the front unit 940, the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 970 is inserted between the opposing arm portions 962e from which the protruding portion 962g is protruded.

That is, the drive unit 960 includes a protruding portion 962g (guide portion 962b) that engages with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940, and an arm portion 962e (guide portion 962b) that engages with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970. Equipped with. Thereby, the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 can be positioned using the guide portion 962b of the drive unit 960.

The arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b is located on the outer side of the pair of second ball throwing portions 942c of the front unit 940 in the opposing direction. As a result, the protruding portion 962g of the arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b is engaged with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940, and the arm portion 962e is engaged with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970, so that the front unit The positioning of the ball throwing unit 970 relative to the ball throwing unit 940 can be effectively performed. That is, the purpose of positioning the ball throwing unit 970 with respect to the front unit 940 is to suppress positional deviation (level difference) from occurring at the connecting portion between the second ball throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. (The connecting part between the second ball throwing part 942c and the side wall part 981b) can be directly positioned by the guide part 962b (arm part 962e), compared to the case where other parts are positioned by the guide part 962b. The occurrence of positional deviations (level differences) can be effectively suppressed.

Further, the drive unit 960 including the guide portion 962b is disposed in the inner space of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 while being disposed in the front unit 940. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide an opening for arranging the drive unit 960. In other words, the through hole 60a for arranging the connecting portion between the second ball sending part 942c and the side wall part 981b of the front unit 940 can also be used as an arrangement space, so that the number of processing steps can be reduced accordingly. , it is possible to reduce product costs.

As described above, since the drive unit 960 including the guide portion 962b is disposed (formed so as to be able to be held) in the front unit 940 including the second ball throwing portion 942c, the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 are provided on the front and back surfaces of the game board 13. When attaching each ball throwing unit 970, there is no need to separately attach the drive unit 960, and by attaching the front unit 940, the drive unit 960 can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of attachment can be improved accordingly.

Furthermore, when the drive unit 960 is disposed on the front unit 940, the protruding portion 962g and arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 are engaged with the second guide wall 942d and the second ball throwing portion 942c, respectively. Ru. Therefore, after attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 to the base plate 60, it is necessary to engage the projecting part 962g and the arm part 962e of the drive unit 960 with the second guide wall 942d and the second ball throwing part 942c, respectively. There is no need to do this separately. Therefore, the installation workability can be improved accordingly.

Further, when the drive unit 960 is disposed on the front unit 940, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is formed to be able to engage with the ball throwing unit 970 from the opposite side of the front unit 940, so that By attaching the drive unit 960 to the back of the base plate 60 after attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 at the same time, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 can be engaged with the throwing unit 970 at the same time as the attachment operation. can. Therefore, the workability of the installation work can be improved accordingly.

As described above, the wall portion 962f is connected between the pair of arm portions 962e facing each other, and when the front unit 940 and drive unit 960 are combined, the arm portion 962e and the wall portion 962f are connected to the front unit 940. The above-mentioned displacement member 966 is disposed between facing the back base 941. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the displacement of the displacement member 966. Therefore, the structure of the front unit 940 can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, in this case, the wall portion 962f of the guide portion 962b is arranged at a position facing the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 into which the projections 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are inserted, in the opening direction thereof. Therefore, the opening of the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 can be blocked from the outside by the wall portion 962f of the drive unit 960, and it is possible to suppress dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, the sliding movement of the protruding portion 966a is prevented from being hindered by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove 966a2, and the pair of wing members can be stably opened or closed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121, the connection state between the second ball throwing section 942c and the side wall section 981b will be described as a representative example. 120(a) and 121(a) are partially enlarged sectional views of the game board 13 in range CXXa in FIG. 119, and FIG. 120(b) and FIG. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 along the line -CXXb. In addition, in FIGS. 121(a) and 121(b), a state in which the prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are separated by a predetermined amount from the positions shown in FIGS. 120(a) and 120(b) is illustrated. Ru.

As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, a distance L38 between the protrusion 981b1 and the second recessed portion 942c1 and the rolling surface 981c1 is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the game ball.

Here, a game comprising a first passage member through which the game ball passes, and a second passage member whose upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and through which the game ball flowed down from the first passage member passes. machine is known. However, in this structure in which the first passage member and the second passage member are connected, misalignment between them is unavoidable, so that the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member There was a problem in that a step was formed at the connecting part, which could impede the smooth flow of the game balls.

Moreover, the winning a prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are fastened and fixed to both sides of the base plate 60, respectively, as described above. Therefore, if there is an error in the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 (thickness is increased), there is a risk that the prize opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 may become separated in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 (the left-right direction in FIG. 120(a)). There is. In that case, there was a problem in that a gap was formed between the second ball throwing part 942c and the side wall part 981b, which could hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b and the upstream end of the protrusion 981b1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball can It is possible to make the timing of passing through the step and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and to disperse those influences, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. can.

That is, as shown in FIG. 121, the gap K1 of the space formed between the game ball rolling part 943a of the second ball sending part 942c and the game ball rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall part 981b, and the second ball sending part The gap K2 of the space formed between the second recessed part 942c1 of 942c and the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall part 981b is formed at a different position in the rolling direction of the game ball (left and right direction in FIG. 121(a)). . Thereby, the game ball rolled from the second ball throwing part 942c to the side wall part 981b can be suppressed from entering both the gap K1 and the gap K2. Therefore, the maximum value of the resistance that the game ball receives can be reduced by the gap formed in the connecting portion between the second ball throwing part 942c and the side wall part 981b. As a result, the game ball can be prevented from stopping in the gap between the second ball throwing section 942c and the side wall section 981b.

Next, referring to FIG. 122, a displacement member 8966 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the sliding groove 966a2 is formed linearly, but the sliding groove 8966a2 of the displacement member 8966 in the seventh embodiment is formed on both outer sides in the lateral direction of the displacement member 8966. It is provided with a recessed portion 8966a6 recessed toward the other side in the gravity direction (the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 122)), and is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the rear. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 122 is a rear view of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 8966 in the seventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 122 corresponds to FIG. 91. As shown in FIG. 122, the displacement member 8966 in the seventh embodiment is formed in the shape of a vertically elongated rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and a second opening 966c is formed extending through the plate in the thickness direction at approximately the center position when viewed from the front. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c in front view is formed larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941, and when the displacement member 8966 is disposed in the front unit 940, a Two winning openings 140 are arranged.

The displacement member 8966 also has a protrusion 966a that protrudes from one end (top in FIG. 122) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 122) in the transverse direction (horizontal direction in FIG. ) and a bulging portion 966b that bulges out from the back side (toward the front side in FIG. 122).

The protruding portion 966a has a sliding groove 8966a2 formed to penetrate the displacement member 8966 in the thickness direction, and contact portions 966a1 located on both outer sides of the displacement member 8966 in the transverse direction and extending in the longitudinal direction. Be prepared.

The sliding groove 8966a2 is a hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is inserted, and extends in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966, and has a recess 8966a6 on the outside in the lateral direction on the other side in the gravity direction (gravitational direction). It is recessed toward the upper side (upper side in FIG. 122).

The width dimension of the concave portion 8966a6 in the short direction is set to be larger than the maximum dimension between the opposing outer peripheral surfaces of the protrusion 945b. Further, the moving side side surface of the protrusion 945b extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the moving direction of the protrusion 945b (left-right direction in FIG. 122), and the extending direction is the same as that of the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 in the closed state. It is parallel to the first surface 945b1.

Therefore, when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, at least a part of the protrusion 945b can be accommodated inside the recess 8966a6, and when the wing member 945 side is rotated, the first surface 945b1 is connected to the inner surface of the recess 8966a6. The displacement of the protrusion 945b can be restricted by contacting the protrusion 945b.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 (solenoid 610) side, the displacement member 8966 is slid to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), so that the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is moved to the recess 8966a6. It can be extracted from inside. Thereby, the protrusion 945b can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the sliding groove 8966a2, and the protrusion 945b can be displaced.

That is, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945, it is possible to restrict the drive from being transmitted to the transmission member 965 side, and when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 side, the protrusion 945b and the recess 8966a6 By releasing the engagement with the protrusion 945b, the protrusion 945b can be displaced. As a result, the wing member 945 can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

Further, when the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, the displacement member 8966 is slid to one side in the gravity direction (downward in the gravity direction). Furthermore, since the recessed portion 8966a6 is recessed toward the other side in the direction of gravity (the direction of gravity), it can receive the protrusion 945b as the displacement member 8966 slides. Therefore, the state in which the protrusion 945b is received in the recess 8966a6 can be easily maintained by using the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 8966.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 of the eighth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the distal end of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 is disposed inside the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, but in the eighth embodiment, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is The tip of the connecting hole 966b1 protrudes from the connecting hole 966b1. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b) are cross-sectional views of a drive unit 8960 and a displacement member 966 in the eighth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b) correspond to FIG. 96(a). Further, in FIG. 123(a), the closed state of the wing member 945 is illustrated, and in FIG. 123(b), the wing member 945 in the closed state is illegally operated (forcibly opened) by the player and changed from the closed state to the open state. An engaged state in the middle of displacement is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 123, the transmission member 9965 in the eighth embodiment is bent when viewed from the side, and has a distal end 9965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and a distal end 9965a. The rotary portion 965b is connected to the rotary portion 965b and extends toward the connecting member 964.

As in the sixth embodiment, the width of the tip portion 9965a in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c decreases as it moves away from the solenoid 610. Further, the distal end portion 9965a has an insertion portion 9965e inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 at the distal end, and an upstanding portion protruding from the connecting side with the rotating shaft 965c toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). 965f.

The insertion portion 9965e has an outer shape smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 when viewed from the front, and is inserted and disposed inside the connecting hole 966b1, and the tip end thereof is formed in the connecting hole 966b1. Projected from 966b1. In addition, the insertion portion 9966e includes an engaging portion 9965e3 that protrudes from the connecting hole 966b1 to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and an engaging portion 9965e3 that bulges out from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the inner surface side of the connecting hole 966b1. A bulging portion 965e1 is formed.

The engaging portion 9965e3 is formed to protrude in the displacement direction (gravity direction) of the displacement member 966, and is formed at a position where the abutting surface 9965e4 on the side surface on the rotating shaft 965c side is separated from the front surface of the displacement member 966 by a slight gap. be done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123(b), when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of arrow Y (the other side in the gravity direction), the front surface of the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 are brought into contact and the transmission is transmitted. Displacement of member 9965 can be regulated.

To explain in detail, when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of arrow Y, the abutted portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 abuts the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965, and the transmission member 9965 is rotationally displaced. . In this case, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is displaced in the direction of arrow Y due to rotational displacement and is also displaced toward the rotation axis 965c. Therefore, the contact surface 9965e4 can be brought into contact with the front surface of the displacement member 966 by displacing the insertion portion 9965e toward the rotating shaft 965c. This restricts the displacement of the transmission member 9965, and therefore the displacement of the displacement member 966 in the direction of arrow Y is similarly restricted.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the solenoid 610 (the coupling member 964 is displaced), the transmission member 965 rotates before the displacement member 966, so that the insertion portion 9965e and the displacement member 966 are connected to each other. Contact can be suppressed. Therefore, by rotationally displacing the transmission member 965, the displacement member 966 can be displaced.

As described above, the projections 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are connected to the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945 side, the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 come into contact with each other, so that rotation of the transmission member 9965 can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member 945 from being forcibly opened from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 9965 in the eighth embodiment includes an insertion portion 9965e and an engagement portion 9965e3 protruding from the tip of the insertion portion 9965e, and allows the displacement member 966 to be displaced with the wing member 945 closed. When one side of the insertion portion 9965e is brought into contact with the other side abutted portion 966b3 of the displacement member 966, the engaging portion 9965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the wing member 945 is forcibly opened from the outside, the engaging portion 9965e3 and the displacement member 966 can be engaged with each other. As a result, the wing member 945 can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, a transmission member 10965 and a displacement member 10966 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 has a distal end disposed only inside the connection hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966. However, in the ninth embodiment, the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 The tip of the portion 10965e is engaged with the connecting hole 10966b. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

124(a) and 124(b) are cross-sectional views of a drive unit 10960 and a displacement member 10966 in the ninth embodiment. Note that FIG. 124(a) corresponds to FIG. 96(a), and FIG. 124(b) corresponds to FIG. 96(b). Further, FIG. 124(a) shows the wing member 945 in a closed state, and FIG. 124(b) shows the wing member 945 in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 124, the transmission member 10965 in the ninth embodiment is bent when viewed from the side, and has a distal end portion 10965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and a distal end portion 10965a. It is formed from a rotating part that is connected to the connecting member 964 and extends toward the connecting member 964 side.

As in the sixth embodiment, the width of the tip portion 10965a in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c decreases as the tip portion 10965a moves away from the solenoid 610. Further, the distal end portion 10965a has an insertion portion 10965e inserted into a connecting hole 10966b of a displacement member 10966, which will be described later, and a rotating shaft 965c that protrudes toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). It is formed with an upright portion 965f.

The insertion portion 10965e has an outer shape smaller than the inner edge shape of the connection hole 10966b of the displacement member 10966 when viewed from the front, and is inserted and disposed inside the connection hole 10966b. In addition, the insertion portion 10965e includes an engaging portion 10965e3 that protrudes from one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and a bulging portion that bulges toward the inner surface of the connecting hole 966b1 from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). 964d1.

The engaging portion 10965e3 is formed into a plate shape that is curved around the axis of the rotating shaft 965c, and is disposed inside a recessed portion 10966d of a displacement member 10966, which will be described later, when the wing member 945 is closed. Further, the displacement member 10966 includes an abutment surface 10965e4 on the side surface (inner surface) on the rotating shaft 965c side. The contact surface 10966d4 is disposed to face a contact surface 10966dc of a displacement member 10966, which will be described later, with a predetermined gap in between when the wing member 945 is closed.

The displacement member 10966 is formed from a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c formed therethrough in the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 124(a)) at approximately the center position when viewed from the front. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c when viewed from the front is larger than the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 and the second ball throwing section 942c (see FIG. 88), and the second opening 966c is in a state where the second ball throwing section 942c is inserted inside. It will be placed in Thereby, the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area via the second winning opening 140 can be suppressed from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 10966 also has a protrusion 966a that protrudes from one end in the longitudinal direction in the transverse direction, a protrusion 966b that protrudes from the other end in the longitudinal direction toward the back side, and a protrusion 966b on the opposite surface of the protrusion 966b. It mainly includes a recessed portion 10966d.

The recessed portion 10966d is recessed so as to be continuous with the other side abutted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1, and includes an abutted surface 10966d1 on the side surface on the bulging portion 966b side. The contact surface 10966d1 is formed by being curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 10965 described above when the wing member 945 is closed, and has a slight gap with the contact surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965. They are placed facing each other and separated from each other. Further, the abutted surface 10966d1 includes an inclined surface 10966d2 at an end connected to the connecting hole 966b1.

The inclined surface 10966d2 is formed to be inclined toward the back side toward the one side abutted portion 966b2 side. Further, the inclined surface 10966d2 is formed radially inward from the abutted surface 10966d1 centered on the rotating shaft 965c.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the distance dimension between the opposing portions from the other side abutted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 to the one side abutted portion 966b2 is the insertion portion in a front view with the wing member 945 closed. It is set larger than the width dimension L39 in the gravity direction of 10965e (see FIG. 124(a)). As a result, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated, the abutment surface 10965e4 is displaced toward the back side, and the abutment surface 10965e4 and the abutted surface 10966d1 come into contact with each other, thereby restricting the rotation of the transmission member 10965. This can be suppressed.

According to the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 configured as described above, when the solenoid 610 is driven to displace the wing member 945 to the open state, the drive is transmitted from the connecting member 964 to the transmission member 10965. be done. As a result, the transmission member 10965 is rotated about the rotating shaft 965c. As described above, the contact surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965 and the contact surface 10966d1 of the displacement member 10966 are formed to be curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c, so that the transmission member 10965 rotates around the rotation shaft 965c. When the contact surface 10965e4 is rotated, the contact surface 10965e4 is displaced while maintaining a slight gap from the contact surface 10966d1. That is, the contact surface 10965e4 and the contact surface 10966d1 are displaced without interfering with each other.

As described above, since the distance between the opposite contact portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 and the one side contact portion 966b2 is formed to be larger than the width L36 of the transmission member 10965, the transmission member By rotating 10965, insertion portion 10965e disposed inside recess 10966d of displacement member 10966 can be brought out to the outside of recess 10966d. Thereby, the bulging portion 965e1 of the transmission member 10965 can be brought into contact with the other side abutted portion 10966b3, and the displacement member 10966 can be slid and displaced. Therefore, the pair of wing members 945 can be displaced to the open state.

Further, when displacing the pair of wing members 945 from the open state to the closed state, the tip of the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 slides along the inclined surface 10966d2 formed on the abutted surface 10966d1. By doing so, it is possible to displace the engaging portion 10965e3 inside the recessed portion 10966d while displacing the displacement member 10966 to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction).

On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 is displaced to the open state, when the drive is transmitted from the pair of wing members 945, the drive is transmitted from the displacement member 10966 to the transmission member 10965. In this case, the displacement member 10966 is slid and displaced with the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 disposed inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966. Therefore, since the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced along with the sliding displacement of the displacement member 10966, the engagement portion 10965e3 is displaced toward the back side due to the rotational displacement. Therefore, the contact surface 10965e4 of the engaging portion 10965e3 contacts the contact surface 10966d1 of the recessed portion 10966d, and rotational displacement of the transmission member 10965 is regulated. As a result, the wing member 945 can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 10965 in the ninth embodiment includes an insertion portion 10965e and an engagement portion 10965e3 protruding from the tip of the insertion portion 10965e, and when the wing member 945 is closed, one side abutted portion One side of the insertion portion 10965e in the gravity direction is brought into contact with the insertion portion 966b2, the engaging portion 10965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 10966, and the other side of the insertion portion 10965e in the gravity direction (bulging portion When the transmission member 10965 is rotated to the other side in the gravity direction to the position where the transmission member 965e1) comes into contact, the engagement of the engagement portion 10965e3 with the displacement member 10966 is released, so that the transmission member 10965 can be displaced without rotating. Slide displacement of the member 10966 to the other side in the direction of gravity is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly protected from the outside.

On the other hand, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated to a position where the engagement portion 10965e3 comes out from the inside of the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966, the engagement of the engagement portion 10965e3 with the displacement member 10966 is released. By further rotating the member 10965 to the other side in the gravity direction, the displacement member 10966 can be slid to the other side in the gravity direction, and the wing member 945 can be opened.

Next, the displacement member 11966 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged in the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140 has been explained, but the displacement member 11966 in the tenth embodiment is arranged from the second winning opening 140. The ball is placed on the rolling path of the game ball. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 11966 in the tenth embodiment. 126(a) and 126(b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 11966. Note that FIG. 126(a) shows the wing member 945 in a closed state, and FIG. 126(b) shows the wing member 945 in an open state.

As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the front unit 940 in the tenth embodiment has a pair of second guide walls 11942b extending in the direction of gravity on both horizontally outer sides of the second winning opening 140. Further, in the tenth embodiment, the tip position of the rolling portion 943a disposed between the opposing second ball throwing portions 942c is set to be substantially the same as the protruding tip position of the second ball throwing portion 942c.

The pair of second guide walls 11942b have first tooth surfaces 11942b1, which are gear tooth surfaces, formed on opposing sides thereof. Further, the pair of second guide walls 11942b are set so that the distance between them facing each other is larger than the width dimension in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 126(a)) of the displacement member 11966, which will be described later. will be placed.

The first tooth surface 11942b1 is meshed with a first gear GY1 that is pivotally supported by a displacement member 11966, which will be described later. Thereby, by slidingly displacing the displacement member 11966, the first gear GY1 that meshes with the first tooth surface 11942b1 can be rotated.

The displacement member 11966 includes a first member 11967 formed as a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a second member 11968 disposed in a displaceable state on the first member 11967, and an axis attached to the first member 11967. The first gear GY1 is supported and meshed with the second member 11968.

The first member 11967 has a second opening 966c formed therethrough in the thickness direction at a substantially central position when viewed from the front. The first member 11967 also has a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 11966 and a second opening 966c on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second opening 966c. It is formed with a support portion 11966d and a sliding protrusion 11966e that protrude in an annular shape on both sides in the lateral direction.

The support portion 11966d is provided to protrude toward the first member 11967, and its tip is inserted into the shaft hole of the first gear GY1. Thereby, the first gear GY1 can be rotatably supported by the first member 11967.

The sliding protrusion 11966e is provided to protrude toward the first member 11967, and its tip is inserted into the sliding groove 11968b of the second member 11968. Thereby, the second member 11968 can be disposed on the first member 11967.

The second member 11968 is formed of a metal material into a plate-like body that is substantially gate-shaped when viewed from the front, and has a second tooth surface 11968a1 of a gear tooth surface on both end surfaces in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 126(a)), and a A sliding groove 11968b formed through the plate thickness direction in the form of a long hole along the extension direction of the two tooth surfaces 11968a1 (vertical direction in FIG. 126(a)) and a horizontal direction of the inner edge formed in a gate shape. The blade portion 11968c is formed to include a blade portion 11968c that is inclined in the plate thickness direction on the end face extending from the side.

The pair of second tooth surfaces 11968a1 are meshed with the first gear GY1, respectively. Thereby, the rotation of the first gear GY1 can be transmitted from both horizontal sides of the second member 11968 where the second tooth surface 11968a1 is formed.

As described above, the sliding groove 11968b is formed in the shape of a long hole along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1, and the sliding protrusion 11966e of the first member 11967 is inserted into the sliding groove 11968b. Therefore, the second member 11968 can be slid relative to the first member 11967 by the gap between the sliding groove 11968b and the sliding protrusion 11966e.

Therefore, as described above, when the pair of first gears GY1 is rotationally displaced by the displacement of the first member 11967, the rotation of the first gear GY1 is transmitted from the second tooth surface 11968a1 to the second member 11968, and The second member 11968 is displaced in the direction in which the second tooth surface 11968a1 extends.

The blade portion 11968c is formed to be inclined downward toward the first member 11967 side, and its lower end portion is lower than the inner surface of the second ball throwing portion 942c on the other end side in the gravity direction when the wing member 945 is closed. , placed on the other end side in the direction of gravity. Thereby, the tip of the blade part 11968c can be placed on the other end side in the direction of gravity than the rolling surface of the game ball flowing in from the second prize opening 140.

Further, the protruding distance of the second ball throwing portion 942c is set to a length such that the second ball throwing portion 942c comes into contact with the back side of the second member 11968. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the tip position of the rolling portion 943a disposed between the opposing second ball throwing portions 942c is set to approximately the same position as the tip position of the second ball throwing portion 942c. Thereby, the end of the rolling surface flowing from the second winning opening 140, the blade part, and 11968c can cut the foreign matter inserted into the inside of the second winning opening 140.

According to the displacement member 11966 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 126(a), when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the blade portion 11968c of the second member 11968 is moved to the rolling portion 943a. Since the tip of the second ball sending part 942c can be disposed lower than the tip of the second ball throwing part 942c in the direction of gravity, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 may be cut off by unauthorized operation while no drive is being transmitted from the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960. When 945b is forcibly opened, the displacement member 11966 can restrict the flow of game balls entering from the second prize opening 140.

On the other hand, when the wing member 945 is in the open state, the first member 11967 of the displacement member 11966 is displaced upward by the transmission member 965, thereby displacing the second member 11968. Note that the amount of displacement of the first member 11967 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. As a result, as described above, the second member 11968 is displaced twice as much as the first member 11967 with respect to the back base 941, so the game ball that enters from the second prize opening 140 The ball can be separated from the rolling portion 943a, which is the rolling surface of the ball, by a distance greater than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the wing member 945 is in the open state, it is possible to allow the game ball that enters from the second prize opening 140 to flow down.

That is, the second member 11968 crosses the path of the game ball flowing down from the second prize opening 140 when the displacement member 11966 is slid from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where it is closed, and also crosses the edge of the path. (the ends of the rolling part 943a and the second ball throwing part 942c), so it is possible to cut the illegal object that is illegally inserted into the rolling path of the game ball from the second prize opening 140. I can do it.

For example, a detection device SE4 (see FIG. 114) that glues the tip of a thread to a game ball, causes the game ball to enter from the second winning opening 140, and passes through the rolling part 943a, detecting the passage of the game ball. ), there is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 detects the player multiple times by manipulating the other end of the string (feeding out, pulling) and causing the game ball to reciprocate. In response to such fraudulent acts, according to the tenth embodiment, even if the game ball described above enters the ball with the wing member 945 open, the displacement member moves from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where the wing member 945 is closed. 11966 (second member 11968) is slid and the blade part 11968c crosses the path of the rolling part 943a and the second ball throwing part 942c, the blade part 11968c cuts the middle part of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball. At the same time, when the blade part 11968c is brought into frictional contact with the edges of the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c, the blade part 11968c and The thread can be cut between the rolling part 943a or the edge of the second ball throwing part 942c. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Next, the displacement member 12966 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not placed on the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning hole 140 has been explained, but the displacement member 12966 in the eleventh embodiment is moved from the second winning hole 140. The ball is placed on the rolling path of the game ball. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 12966 in the eleventh embodiment. 128(a) and 128(b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 12966. Note that FIG. 128(a) shows the wing member 945 in a closed state, and FIG. 128(b) shows the wing member 945 in an open state.

As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the front unit 940 in the eleventh embodiment has a pair of second guide walls 12942b extending in the direction of gravity on both horizontally outer sides of the second winning opening 140. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the protruding distance of the second ball throwing part 942c and the rolling part 943a is set short, and the protruding tip surface is set at a position where it comes into contact with the front surface of the first member 12967 of the displacement member 12966, which will be described later. Ru.

Further, on both horizontally outer sides of the second winning opening 140 of the front unit 940, there are provided a first support portion 12942k1 and a second support portion 12942k2 that protrude toward the displacement member 12966 side. The first support portion 12942k1 and the second support portion 12942k2 are inserted into shafts of a first gear GY1 and a second gear GY2, which will be described later, respectively, and can pivotally support the first gear GY1 and the second gear GY2.

The pair of second guide walls 12942b has contact portions 12942b2 protruding in opposite directions on one end side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) of opposing side surfaces thereof. The distance between the pair of opposing contact portions 12942b2 is set to be slightly larger than the width in the lateral direction of the first member 12967, which will be described later. Thereby, the first member 12967 can be disposed between the pair of abutting portions 12942b2 facing each other, and the sliding displacement of the first member 12967 can be guided.

The displacement member 12966 includes a first member 12967 formed from a plate-shaped body having a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a second member 12968 disposed in a displaceable manner on the first member 12967, and a pivot support on the rear base 941. It is formed mainly of a first gear GY1 that is rotated and meshed with the first member 12967, and a second gear GY2 that is pivotally supported by the rear base 941 and meshed with the second member 12968.

The first gear GY1 is a gear having a tooth surface on its outer peripheral surface, and as described above, is pivotally supported by the first support portion 12942k1 of the back base 941, and the tooth surface is connected to the first member 12967 and the second gear. It meshes with GY2.

The second gear GY2 is a multi-stage gear composed of two stages of gears each having a different size, and is formed with a small-diameter gear GY2a on the small-diameter side and a large-diameter gear GY2b on the large-diameter side. Further, the second gear GY2 is pivotally supported by the second support portion 12942k2 of the rear base 941 as described above, and the tooth surface of the small diameter gear GY2a is meshed with the first gear GY1, and the teeth of the large diameter gear GY2b are engaged with the first gear GY1. The surface is mated to second member 12968.

The first member 12967 is formed from a metal material, and has a second opening 12966c formed therethrough in the thickness direction at approximately the center position when viewed from the front. The first member 12967 also has a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the short direction of the first member 12967 on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second opening 12966c, and a second opening. It is formed with sliding protrusions 12966e projecting in an annular shape on both sides of 12966c in the lateral direction, and third gear tooth surfaces 12966f on both side surfaces extending in the longitudinal direction.

The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 12966c when viewed from the front is set larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above. Further, the second opening 12966c is provided with a second blade portion 12966c2 on the inner surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction).

The second blade portion 12966c2 is formed to be inclined downward from the rear base 941 side toward the second member 12968 side, which will be described later. The second opening 12966c is such that when the pair of wing members 945 is closed, the second blade portion 12966c2 is disposed on the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140, and the pair of wing members 945 is closed. In the open state, the second blade part 12966c2 is arranged outside the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140.

The sliding protrusion 12966e is provided to protrude toward the second member 12968, and its tip is inserted into the inside of the sliding groove 12968b of the second member 12968. Thereby, the second member 12968 can be disposed on the first member 12967.

The pair of third tooth surfaces 12966f are meshed with the first gear GY1, respectively. Thereby, the first member 12967 of the first gear GY1 is slidably displaced in accordance with the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965, so that the first gear GY1 can be rotated. Moreover, as described above, the small diameter gear GY2a of the second gear GY2 is meshed with the first gear GY1, thereby allowing the second gear GY2 to rotate.

The second member 12968 is formed from a metal material into a substantially H-shaped plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is disposed with a pair of extended portions oriented in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 128(a)). Further, the second member 12968 has a second tooth surface 12968a of the gear tooth surface on the outside in the opposing direction of the pair of extending portions, and a second tooth surface 12968a of the gear tooth surface along the extending direction (vertical direction in FIG. 128(a)). A sliding groove 12968b formed in the form of a long hole penetrating the plate in the thickness direction, and a blade part 6683 on the end surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the connecting part that connects the pair of extended parts. be done.

As described above, the sliding groove 12968b is formed in the shape of a long hole along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 12968a, and the sliding protrusion 12966e of the first member 12967 is inserted into the sliding groove 12968b. Therefore, the second member 12968 can be slid in the direction of gravity relative to the first member 12967 by the gap between the sliding groove 12968b and the sliding protrusion 12966e.

The pair of second tooth surfaces 12968a are meshed with the large diameter gear GY2b of the second gear GY2, respectively. Therefore, by rotating the second gear GY2, the second member 12968 is slid. As described above, the second gear GY2 is rotated by the sliding displacement of the first member 12967 by the transmission member 965. Therefore, the second member 12968 can be displaced as the first member 12967 is displaced.

Note that the directions of sliding displacement of the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 are set to be opposite to each other, and the amount of displacement of the second member 12968 is set to be large due to the displacement of the second member 12968 via the second gear GY2 having a small diameter.

The blade portion 6683 is formed to be inclined upward toward the first member 12967 side, and its upper end portion is located on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the second ball throwing portion 942c when the wing member 945 is closed. ) on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). That is, the second member 12968 is arranged at a position where the blade portion 6683 overlaps the first member 12967 when viewed from the front with the wing member 945 closed.

Therefore, when the pair of wing members 945 are displaced from the open position to the closed position, they cross the rolling path of the game ball in the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c, and also rub their edges against each other. Since the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 (displaceable member 12966) are provided with the second blade part 12966c2 and the blade part 6683, it is possible to cut the illegal object that is illegally inserted into the passage from the second prize opening 140. can.

For example, the tip of a thread is glued to a game ball, and the game ball enters from the second prize opening 140 and passes through the rolling path of the game ball of the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c, and the detection device SE4 There is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 is detected multiple times by manipulating the other end of the string (feeding out, pulling) to make the game ball reciprocate in a state where the game ball has reached the detection position. In order to deal with such fraudulent acts, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is entered with the pair of wing members 945 open, the pair of wing members 945 will be displaced from the open position to the closed position. When the second blade part 12966c2 and the blade part 6683 cross the path of the passage member, the middle part of the thread whose tip is glued to the game ball is inserted between the pair of second blade part 12966c2 and the blade part 6683. Can be pinched and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the second member 12968 has the blade part 6683 on the other side in the gravity direction than the rolling surface (rolling part 943a) of the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 140 when the wing member 945 is open. Placed. As described above, when the feather member 945 is open, the second blade portion 12966c2 of the first member 12967 is arranged outside the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second prize opening 140. Therefore, in the state where the pair of wing members 945 are opened, the game ball flowing into the second prize opening 140 can be passed between the blade part 6683 and the second blade part 966c2.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 can close the rolling path of the game balls flowing into the second winning opening 140, so the displacement distance of the second member 12968 is The number can be smaller than the second member 11968 in the embodiment. As a result, the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second prize opening 140 can be closed in a short time, and the game ball flowing in can flow into the rolling path at the timing when the pair of wing members 945 are closed. can be suppressed.

Next, a drive unit 13960 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 129. In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the drive is transmitted from the solenoid 610 to the wing member 945 via three members, the connecting member 964, the transmission member 965, and the displacement member 966. However, in the twelfth embodiment, the solenoid 610 Transmission of drive from the blade member 945 to the wing member 945 is performed by one member. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 129(a) is a rear view of the front unit 940 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 129(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXIXb-CXXIXb in FIG. 129(a). In addition, in FIG. 129(b), only the external shape of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 is illustrated with a chain line for easy understanding. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, when the shaft portion 961b is pulled into the main body portion 961a, the pair of wing members 945 is closed, and the shaft portion 961b is extended from the main body portion 961a. In this case, the pair of wing members 945 are opened.

As shown in FIG. 129, the drive unit 13960 in the twelfth embodiment is disposed on the back side of the specific winning a prize unit 950 (right side in FIG. 129(b)), and the axis of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is (vertical direction in FIG. 129(b)). Further, a transmission member 13965 is connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610.

The transmission member 13965 includes a base portion 7658 extending from the solenoid 610 side toward the front unit 940 side, and an end portion of the base portion 7658 on the front unit 940 side that is erected toward the protrusion 945b side of the wing member 945. and an engaging portion 13965j.

An annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is connected to the base 7658 at an end opposite to the engaging portion 13965j. Thereby, by driving the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 in its axial direction, the transmission member 13965 can be slid.

The engaging portion 13965j is formed at a position that overlaps the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 129(a)) in a rear view (or front view). Furthermore, the length of the engagement portion 13965j is set to exceed the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945, so that the engagement portion 13965j overlaps the protrusion 945b when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, a supporting portion 13965j1 having a substantially C-shape in side view projects from the upright end of the engaging portion 13965j. In the support portion 13965j1, the dimension between opposing sides inside the opening is set to be larger than the maximum dimension of the outer shape of the protrusion 945b. Further, the width dimension of the support portion 13965j1 in the opposing direction of the pair of engaging portions 13965j (left-right direction in FIG. 129(a)) is set to be larger than the displacement distance of the protrusion 945b. Therefore, the protrusion 945b can be disposed inside the opening of the support portion 13965j1.

Therefore, as described above, when the connecting portion 10965h is slid in the direction of gravity, the engaging portion 9965j is slid in the direction of gravity, and the projection 945b is displaced in accordance with the displacement. By displacing the protrusion 945b, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state.

According to the drive unit 13960 configured as described above, the drive unit 13960 that drives the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are disposed on the back side of the plate member 951. A space can be formed on the back side of the wing member 945 (second winning opening 140). That is, by consolidating the installation space for the drive unit 13960 and the drive unit 957 on the back side of the pair of wing members 945, space for arranging other members and devices can be created on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 (second prize winner). It can be secured on the back side of the opening 140), and the space can be used more effectively.

Next, a displacement member 14966 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. In the sixth embodiment, the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape in front view of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965. A case will be described in which the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the member 14966 is formed to be sufficiently larger than the outer shape of the transmission member 965. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 130(a) and 131(a) are rear views of the winning a prize opening unit 930 in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 130(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXXb-CXXXb in FIG. FIG.

In addition, in FIG. 130(a) and FIG. 131(a), the outer shape of the pair of wing members 945 is illustrated by a chain line. Further, in FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b), the closed state of the pair of wing members 945 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b), the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is cut. The open state of the pair of wing members 945 in the case where the blade member 945 is opened is illustrated. Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the specific winning hole 65a is formed at a position farther away from the second winning hole 140 than in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b), the displacement member 14966 in the thirteenth embodiment is formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c at approximately the center position when viewed from the front. It is formed to penetrate in the plate thickness direction (left and right direction in FIG. 130(b)).

The displacement member 14966 has a protruding portion 966a that protrudes from one end side (upper side in FIG. 130(a)) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 130(a)) in the lateral direction (left-right direction in FIG. 130(a)), and It includes a bulging portion 14966b that bulges from the end side (lower side in FIG. 130(b)) to the back side (back side base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The bulging portion 14966b is formed to bulge toward the back side (back side base 941 side), and a horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 14966b1 is formed in the inner portion when viewed from the back. The connecting hole 14966b1 is an opening into which a tip (insertion portion 965e) of a transmission member 965 of a drive unit 960, which will be described later, is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965.

The connecting hole 14966b1 has an inner edge having a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and is connected to a contact portion 966b2 on one side of the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 130(a))). , and a contact portion 966b3 on the other side of the inner circumferential surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 90(a))).

The connecting hole 14966b1 is formed so that the separation distance L40 between opposing sides in the gravity direction (from the other side abutted part 966b3 to the one side abutted part 14966b2) is sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 of the insertion part 965e in the gravitational direction. When the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, the insertion portion 965e is brought into contact with the other side abutted portion 966b3.

In addition, the connection hole 14966b1 has a dimension obtained by subtracting the width L41 of the insertion portion 965e in the gravity direction from the separation distance L40 between the opposing sides in the gravity direction (from the other side abutted part 966b3 to the one side abutted part 14966b2). It is set larger than the distance L42 from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling part 943a to the inner edge of the second opening 966c of the displacement member 14966 minus the diameter of the game ball (L40-L41)>(L42-Game ball) diameter). Thereby, when the displacement member 14966 falls to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), the rolling path of the game ball flowing in from the second prize opening 140 can be blocked by the edge of the displacement member 14966.

Next, a case where the protrusions 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut will be described with reference to FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b). As described above, when the separation distance L40 of the connecting hole 14966b1 is formed to be sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 965e, and when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, the other side cover is Since the insertion portion 965e is brought into contact with the contact portion 966b3, as shown in FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b), when the protrusions 945b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut, one side is abutted. The displacement member 14966 is allowed to fall freely to one side in the gravity direction by the gap between the portion 966b2 and the insertion portion 965e.

As described above, the connection hole 14966b1 is set so that the dimension obtained by subtracting the width dimension L41 from the separation distance L40 is set larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the separation distance L42 (L40-L41)>(L42 - the diameter of the game ball), by allowing the displacement member 14966 to fall freely, the rolling path of the game ball flowing in from the second prize opening 140 can be blocked by the edge of the displacement member 14966.

That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 are not in communication with the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 14966 (the state shown in FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b)), the displacement member 14966 Since a part of the game ball is placed in the path of the game balls flowing in from the second prize opening 140, for example, even if the projection 945b of the feather member 945 is cut and the feather member 945 is forcibly opened from the outside, the second The flow of the game ball entered from the prize opening 140 can be regulated by the displacement member 14966.

Next, a drive unit 15960 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is positioned outside the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980, but in the fourteenth embodiment, the second arm portion 15962j is positioned on the side wall portion 981b. It is arranged and positioned inside the section 981b. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

132(a) is a side view of the drive unit 15960 in the fourteenth embodiment, FIG. 132(b) is a top view of the drive unit 15960, and FIG. 132(c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 15960. It is a diagram. FIG. 133(a) is a sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 133(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb in FIG. 133(a). Note that FIG. 133(a) corresponds to FIG. 120(a).

First, a drive unit 15960 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132. As shown in FIG. 132, the drive unit 15960 in the fourteenth embodiment is formed into a box shape, and includes a first accommodating part 15962 and a second accommodating part 963, which are arranged opposite to each other. A solenoid 610 disposed in the space between the second housing part 963, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a connecting member 964 that is pivotally supported by the first housing part 15962 and the second housing part 963. The transmission member 965 is connected to the transmission member 965.

The first accommodating part 15962 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and includes a covering part 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (the upper side in FIG. (see).

The drive unit 15960 is arranged in a space between a first accommodating part 962 and a second accommodating part 963 that are formed in a box shape and are arranged facing each other, and between the first accommodating part 962 and the second accommodating part 963. Mainly includes a solenoid 610, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a transmission member 965 pivotally supported by a first housing part 962 and a second housing part 963 and connected to the connecting member 964. be done.

The first accommodating part 962 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and includes a covering part 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (the upper side in FIG. (see).

The guide portion 15962b includes a pair of arm portions 15962e formed in a substantially L-shape in side view, a wall portion 962f connected to the pair of arm portions 15962e, and a wall portion 962f formed in a gate shape in front view. A protruding part 962g protrudes from the covering part 962a on the opposite side (back base 941 side (see FIG. 125)), and a protruding part 962g protrudes from the wall part 962f on the other side in the gravity direction of the pair of arm parts 15962e. The third arm portion 15962h is formed to protrude from the opposite side of the second arm portion 15962j with the wall portion 962f in between.

The arm portion 15962e protrudes from each of the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a toward the rear base 941 (see FIG. 85), and the protruding tip side is bent toward the other side in the gravity direction (opposite to the solenoid 610 side) when viewed from the side. It is formed into an approximately L shape. Further, the protruding position of the arm portion 15962e in the direction of gravity is set below the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 when the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 970 are combined.

The second arm 15962j is connected to the inner edge of the wall 962f, and the distance L43 between the pair of opposing arms is set smaller than the width between the opposing arms 962e. In addition, the diameter is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the distance dimension of the second arm portion 15962j in the direction of gravity is set smaller than the dimension between the opposing sides in the direction of gravity of the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980, and when the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 980 are combined, It is inserted inside the side wall portion 981b.

Further, the distance dimension of the pair of second arm portions 15962j on the outside in the opposing direction is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension between the opposing sides in the horizontal direction of the side wall portions 981b. Thereby, when arranging the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) in the winning a prize opening unit 930, it can be positioned by arranging the second arm part 15962j inside the side wall part 981b.

The distance dimension between the third arm portions 15962h facing each other is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension between the opposing arm portions 15962e. Further, a protrusion 15962h1 is formed on the third arm 15962h to be connected to the end of the second arm 15962j on the back base 941 side.

The protruding distance of the protruding portion 15962h1 from the end of the second arm portion 15962j toward the rear base 941 (see FIG. 85) is set to be approximately the same as the concave dimension of the second concave notch 942c1. Further, the protruding portion 15962h1 is formed at a position corresponding to the second recessed notch 942c1 when the front unit 940 and the drive unit 15960 are combined, and is arranged inside the second recessed notch 942c1.

Therefore, since the protruding portion 15962h1 and the upstream end of the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, the timing when the game ball passes the step on the bottom side and the side surface The timing of passing the step on the side can be made different. Therefore, the game ball is prevented from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and the influence of both is dispersed, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. can.

Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment, the drive unit 15960 can serve both the positioning of the front unit 940 and the positioning of the distribution unit 980, and is also a part of the passage path of the game balls flowing in from the second prize opening 140. becomes. Therefore, the distribution unit 980 side can also easily tolerate dimensional effects or mounting overlaps.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134(a), the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second ball throwing portion 16942c of the winning a prize opening unit 930 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside the second recessed portion 942c1 of the second ball throwing portion 942c, but in the fifteenth embodiment, the second ball throwing portion 16942c The protrusion 16942c2 is arranged inside the recessed part 16981b2 of the side wall part 16981b. The same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134(a) is a sectional view of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 134(a) corresponds to FIG. 120(a). As shown in FIG. 134(a), in the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 in the fifteenth embodiment, in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate, the upright end surface is the winning opening unit. It is formed in a size that makes contact with the tip of the second ball throwing section 16942c of the ball 930.

Further, the side wall portion 16981b includes a recessed notch 16981b2 recessed on the proximal end side of the protruding distal end surface. The concave notch 16981b2 is formed at a position spaced apart from the rolling surface 981c1 by a radius of the game ball in the direction of gravity, and its concave shape when viewed from the side corresponds to the side view shape of the protrusion 16942c2 of the second ball throwing section 16942c, which will be described later. is set almost the same as .

Thereby, when a game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling part 943a to the rolling surface of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be made less likely to be caught between the rolling part 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed explanation of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

Further, the recessed notch 16981b2 is recessed in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the side, and the inner surface of the proximal end of the side wall 16981b is formed to be inclined downward along the rolling direction of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the through hole 981c can be suppressed from bouncing upward at the switching portion of the rolling path of the game ball.

That is, in the fifteenth embodiment, the recessed end surface of the recessed notch 16981b2 is formed to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball that collides with the recessed end surface of the recessed notch 16981b2 can be pressed toward the rolling surface 981c1 (bottom surface) side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball from jumping up and bouncing on the recessed end surface of the recessed notch 16981b2. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to pass through (flow down) smoothly.

The protrusion 16942c2 is formed to protrude from the protruding distal end surface of the second ball throwing part 16942c, and its outer shape in side view is set to be substantially the same as the recessed notch 16981b2 of the side wall part 16981b. As a result, when a game ball rolling on the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 is thrown to the rolling surface 981c1 of the distribution unit 980, the game ball is transferred to the concave notch 16981b2 of the distribution unit 980. This can prevent it from getting caught inside. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game balls to smoothly pass (flow down) from the rolling portion 943a of the prize opening unit 930 to the rolling surface 981c1 of the distribution unit 980.

In addition, in the fifteenth embodiment, the recessed part 16981b2 of the side wall part 16981b and the upstream end of the rolling surface 981c1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball is placed on the bottom side. The timing at which the vehicle passes through the step on the side can be made different from the timing at which the vehicle passes through the step on the side surface. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and to disperse those influences, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. can.

Furthermore, according to the fifteenth embodiment, the recessed part 16981b2 is formed on the downstream side in the rolling direction of the game ball, and the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side, so that the downstream end of the side surface of the second ball sending part 942c and the rolling The downstream end of the bottom surface of the moving part 943a can be brought close to the upstream end of the side surface and the upstream bottom surface of the side wall section 16981b. That is, when the upstream end of the side surface of the second ball throwing section 942c is formed at a different position on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball with respect to the upstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling section 943a, the upstream end of the side surface of the side wall section 16981b Until the game ball reaches the end, the game ball can be guided by the protrusion 16942c2 of the second ball throwing section 942c. Therefore, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down (passed).

On the other hand, the protrusion 16942c2 has relatively low rigidity and may break. However, according to the fifteenth embodiment, the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side in the direction in which the game ball passes, so if the protrusion 16942c2 breaks. Even in the case of The timing of passing through a step can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and to disperse the influence of both, allowing the game ball to flow down (pass) smoothly. be able to.

In addition, since the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the winning opening unit 930 side and the recessed notch 16981b2 is formed on the distribution unit 980 side, the side surface of the recessed notch 16981b2 is brought into contact with the protrusion 16942c2, so that the rolling portion 943a It is possible to prevent the distribution unit 980 from shifting upward in the direction of gravity. That is, at a step where the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b is at a higher position than the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a, the game ball is likely to be bounced up when riding on it. Compared to the opposite step, it tends to impede the smooth flow down (passage) of game balls. Therefore, being able to prevent the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b from shifting upward in the direction of gravity relative to the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a is particularly effective for the smooth flow of the game ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134(b), the side wall portion 17981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second ball throwing portion 17942c of the winning a prize opening unit 930 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, when the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall part 981b and the end of the second recessed part 942c1 of the second ball throwing part 942c are formed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the rolling direction of the game ball when viewed from the side. However, in the sixteenth embodiment, the end portions of the second ball throwing portion 17942c and the side wall portion 17981b are formed to be inclined in side view. The same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 in the sixteenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 134(b) corresponds to FIG. 120(a). As shown in FIG. 134(b), the side wall portion 17981b of the distributing unit 980 in the sixteenth embodiment has a distal end surface 17981b3 at its upright distal end inclined downwardly from the proximal end toward the distal end. . In other words, the tip surface 17981b3 is formed to be inclined upward along the rolling direction of the game ball of the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 17981b.

On the other hand, the second ball sending part 17942c of the winning a prize opening unit 930 is formed such that a tip end surface 17942c3 of its protruding tip surface is inclined upwardly along the rolling direction of the game ball of the rolling part 943a. In addition, the tip surface 17942c3 of the second ball throwing section 17942c is in a state substantially parallel to the tip surface 17981b3 of the protruding tip of the side wall section 17981b mentioned above when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate. will be placed.

Therefore, since the side upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, the side upstream end of the side wall portion 17981b is formed perpendicular to the passing direction of the game ball. Compared to the case of (sixth embodiment), the game ball that collides with the upper end surface of the side surface of the side wall portion 17981b can be made to slide along the slope and be less likely to be bounced back. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to pass through (flow down) smoothly.

Furthermore, since the entire side upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b is formed to be inclined, compared to the case where the side wall portion 17981b is formed in a shape having a concave cutout portion 16981b2 as in the fifteenth embodiment, for example. , stress concentration can be suppressed and the durability of the side wall portion 17981b can be ensured. In addition, when the side wall portion 17981b is formed from a resin material, the shape of the injection mold cavity (hollow portion) can be gently changed, suppressing air bubbles and filling defects, and improving moldability. You can improve your performance.

Next, a displacement member 18966 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 137. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not placed on the rolling path of the game ball entering from the second winning opening 140 has been described, but the displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment is It is arranged on the rolling path of the game ball that enters from the prize opening 140. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

135(a), FIG. 136(a), and FIG. 137(a) are schematic diagrams of the winning opening unit 930 in the seventeenth embodiment viewed from the back, and FIG. 135(b) is the same as that of FIG. 135(a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the winning a prize opening unit 930 along the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line. FIG. 136(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb of FIG. 136(a). FIG. 137(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 taken along the line CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb in FIG. 137(a).

Note that FIG. 135 shows the closed state of the pair of wing members 945, FIG. 136 shows the open state of the pair of wing members 945, and FIG. 137 shows the pair of wing members 945 in the open state. The condition is illustrated. Moreover, in FIGS. 135(a), 136(a), and 137(a), only the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 18966, and the second winning hole 140 are illustrated. In FIGS. 135(b), 136(b), and 137(b), only the pair of wing members 945, the back base 941, the front base 943, the displacement member 18966, the transmission member 19958, and the solenoid 961 are schematically illustrated. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 135, the displacement member 18966 in the seventeenth embodiment has a larger outer shape in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 135(a)) than the displacement member 966 in the sixth embodiment. The sliding groove 18966a of the displacement member 18966 has a non-transmission portion 18966a6 that is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the rear, and extends in the gravity direction, and a sliding groove 18966a that extends from the lower end of the non-transmission portion 18966a6 in the gravity direction. A transmission portion 18966a7 is provided, which is bent and extended toward the center in the left-right direction.

In addition, in the displacement member 18966, when the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, the through hole 966c1 is arranged lower than the second prize opening 140 in the direction of gravity. Thereby, when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, it is possible to restrict the game ball passing through the second prize opening 140 from flowing into the through hole 981c of the ball throwing unit 970 from the rolling part 943a.

Furthermore, the displacement member 18966 includes a blade portion 1896g that is inclined toward the front side as it goes downward, on the inner peripheral edge on the upper side in the direction of gravity of the through hole 966c1. The front side of the blade portion 1896g is brought into contact with the protruding tip portion of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding tip portion of the second ball throwing portion 942c. That is, in a rear view, when the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, the blade portion 1896g, the rolling portion 943a, and the second ball throwing portion 942c are arranged at a position where they overlap.

Furthermore, the transmission member 18958 in the seventeenth embodiment has a larger rotation range on the tip end 965a side when the solenoid 961 is driven than in the first embodiment. That is, the displacement dimension of the tip portion 965a side in the gravity direction is set large, and the displacement dimension is set larger than the opening dimension of the second winning a prize opening 140 in the gravity direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, when the solenoid 961 is driven, the blade part 1896g can be placed above the second winning opening 140, and the second winning opening can be placed inside the through hole 966c1 of the displacement member 18966 in rear view. A mouth 140 opening may be located.

Further, as the displacement member 18966 is displaced in the direction of gravity due to the displacement of the transmission member 18958, the protrusion 945b is slid inside the sliding groove 18966a. When the projection 945b slides inside the sliding groove 18966a, the projection 945b first slides inside the non-transmission portion 18966a6, and then slides inside the transmission portion 18966a7. In this case, since the extending direction of the non-transmission part 18966 and the displacement direction of the displacement member 18966 are set to be substantially the same, the position of the protrusion 945b with respect to the back base 942 changes when sliding on the non-transmission part 18966a6. It slides inside the non-transmission part 18966a6 without being transmitted. On the other hand, when the projection 945b slides on the transmission section 18966a7, it is pushed out and displaced (rotated) by the inner peripheral edge of the transmission section 18966a7. Thereby, the pair of wing members 945 are displaced to the open state.

Therefore, when the pair of wing members are in the open state, the game ball passing through the second prize opening 140 can be allowed to flow into the through hole 981c of the ball throwing unit 970 from the rolling part 943a.

On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 slides on the transmission portion 18966a7, thereby rotating the wing member 945. In this case, as described above, the blade part 18966g of the displacement member 18966 is disposed below the inner peripheral edge of the second winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity, and the front side surface is the protruding tip of the rolling part 943a and Since it comes into contact with the protruding tip of the second ball throwing part 942c, as the blade part 18966g moves downward in the direction of gravity, the second winning ball is generated between the blade part 18966g, the rolling part 943a, and the second ball throwing part 942c. The biasing object inserted onto the rolling path of the game ball from the mouth 140 can be cut off.

That is, when the displacement member 18966 is slid from the position where the pair of wing members 945 is opened to the position where it is closed, the displacement member 18966 crosses the path of the game ball flowing down from the second prize opening 140, and Since it is equipped with a blade part 18966g that rubs against the edge of the passageway (ends of the rolling part 943a and the second ball throwing part 942c), it is possible to avoid any damage caused by unauthorized insertion of the game ball from the second prize opening 140 into the passageway where the game ball is placed. You can cut off power.

For example, a detection device SE4 (Fig. 114 There is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 is detected multiple times by manipulating the other end of the thread (feeding out, pulling) and causing the game ball to reciprocate when the game ball reaches the point (see). In response to such fraudulent acts, according to the seventeenth embodiment, even if the game ball mentioned above is entered with the wing member 945 open, the displacement member moves from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where it is closed. 18966 is slid and displaced, and when the blade part 18966g crosses the path of the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c, the middle part of the thread whose tip is glued to the game ball is displaced together with the blade part 18966g and rolled. 18966g and the rolling part 943a or the second ball sending part 942c are pressed against the edge of the part 943a or the second ball sending part 942c, and when the 18966g is rubbed against the edge of the rolling part 943a and the second ball sending part 942c. The thread can be cut between the edges. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 137, if the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is cut (broken) due to a fraudulent act by the player, the through hole of the displacement member 18966 966c1 is placed on the lower side in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the player forcibly opens the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 18966 can restrict the flow of the game ball that enters from the second prize opening 140.

In this case, the transmission member 18965 is biased by the solenoid 961 by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 94) in a direction in which the distal end portion 18965a side is displaced downward in the direction of gravity. That is, the displacement member 18966 is biased in the direction of closing the second winning opening 140. Therefore, when the pair of wing members 945 are forcibly opened due to a fraudulent act by the player, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 18966 from being forcibly opened in the same way. As a result, fraudulent acts by players can be suppressed.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the lower regulating part 175 and the upper regulating part 176 are disposed facing each other in the displacement direction of the driven member 163, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower regulating part 175 and the upper regulating part 176 may be arranged to face the driven member 163 in the radial direction of the rotational displacement of the driven member 163, or in the rotational axis direction (when the driven member 163 is displaced The drive member 163 may be arranged to face the driven member 163 in a direction intersecting a plane. In this case, a frictional force is generated between the driven member 163 and the driven member 163 can be decelerated by the frictional force.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the lower regulating part 175 and the upper regulating part 176 are always arranged opposite to each other in the displacement direction of the driven member 163, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the lower regulating part 175 and the upper regulating part 176 is configured to be displaceable in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the driven member 163, and at the timing when the driven member 163 is desired to be decelerated, the displacement of the driven member 163 is changed. It may be arranged such that it is disposed opposite to the driven member 163 at certain times, and is retracted out of the displacement locus of the driven member 163 at other times. Thereby, a plurality of types of displacement modes of the driven member 163 can be configured.

In the first embodiment, an example of the arrangement of the lower regulating section 175 and the upper regulating section 176 has been described, but the arrangement is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper regulating part 176 may be arranged at a position that overlaps the driven member 163 when viewed in the displacement direction, or the upper regulating part 176 may be arranged closer to the rotation axis of the driven member 163 than the lower regulating part 175 is. Also good.

Further, the lower regulating part 175 and the upper regulating part 176 are not limited to the case where the lower regulating part 175 and the upper regulating part 176 are disposed on either side of the rotation axis of the driven member 163. may be arranged on the right side.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 applies electromagnetic force in a direction to pull up the driven member 163, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 may be arranged below the driven member 163 to generate an electromagnetic force for pushing it up. Furthermore, instead of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, a rotary motor may be used to drive the driven member 163.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the light emitting means 181 is constituted by an LED, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a miniature light bulb, a laser, an illumination plate, or a small liquid crystal display surface may be used.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which vibration transmission to the illumination board 180 is suppressed by forming a gap between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illumination board 180, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, instead of closing the gap, a high-attenuation resin member may be filled in the area between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illumination board 180. In this case, vibration transmission can be suppressed while narrowing the space for arranging the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illumination board 180.

Conversely, the gap between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illumination board 180 may be closed and filling with the resin member may be omitted. In this case, since it is possible to promote vibration transmission to the illumination board 180 when the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is driven, it is possible to perform an effect in which the light emitted from the light emitting means 181 is swayed in accordance with the vibration of the illumination board 180. can.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the light transmission hole 60c is composed of one large opening, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a material having a plurality of through holes, such as punched metal, may be used.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the outer portion 94 is configured in a thin plate shape, but the outer portion 94 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a partial opening may be formed. In this case, by forming an opening at a position that matches the arrangement of the light emitting means 181 in a front view, it is possible to avoid the plate portion of the illumination board 180 from being seen while exposing the light emitting means 181 in a front view. can.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the driving force is transmitted to the elevating plate 430 by the arm member 414, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be transmitted by an endless gear belt or by a cam mechanism.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the rotation angle width of the auxiliary arm member 444 is vertically symmetrical with respect to the horizontal, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be asymmetrical in the upper and lower directions, or it may be configured to have a rotation angle width only in one direction above and below the horizontal.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the long hole portion 406 is a horizontally long hole, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a long hole that extends obliquely with respect to the horizontal direction, a long hole that has a curved shape, or a long hole that has a portion that extends in the vertical direction. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the auxiliary arm member 444 can be improved.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the pair of wing-like members 460 abut each other and form a symmetrical shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the structure may be such that a slight gap is provided from the design stage. As a result, compared to the case where the wing-like members 460 abut each other, fatigue accumulated in the wing-like members 460 due to contact can be reduced, so that the durability of the wing-like members 460 can be increased. Note that the pattern formed on the back side of the gap and the light emitted from the light emitting means may be configured to be visible to the player through this gap.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the displacement amounts and displacement speeds of the pair of wing-like members 460 are the same, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the size of the arcuate gears 462 of the wing-like members 460 may be made different on the left and right sides and the gear ratio may be adjusted so that the displacement amounts and displacement speeds of the pair of wing-like members 460 are different. Thereby, even if the shapes of the sides of the pair of wing-like members 460 that come into contact with each other are bilaterally symmetrical, the contact surface S1 can be shifted from the left-right center position.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the wing-like member 460 is visually recognized in a symmetrical shape when in contact, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, most parts may be left-right symmetrical, but some parts may be configured differently. For example, a part of the shape may be asymmetrical, a pattern drawn on the front side may be asymmetrical, or the color may be asymmetrical. Even in this case, since the shape of most of the wing-like members 460 is bilaterally symmetrical, the player can be made to think that the wing-like members 460 form a bilaterally symmetrical shape.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the wing-like members 460 that come into contact with each other are rotationally displaced, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the pair of wing-like members 460 may be moved in parallel in the left-right direction and brought into contact with each other. In this case, in comparison with the shape of the back case 310, the wing-like member 460 on the left side can be formed to have a larger area than the wing-like member 460 on the right side.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the wing-like members 460 that are supported and displaced by the elevating plate 430 form a series of shapes, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the wing-like member 460 and an unchanging predetermined member (for example, the center frame 86 of the game board 13) may be combined to form a symmetrical shape when viewed from the front. This allows the player to visually recognize the shape that is completed only by the wing-like member 460 and the shape that is completed by the other predetermined member and the wing-like member 460, thereby improving the performance effect of the wing-like member 460. I can do it.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the light emitting effect member LA1, the wing-like member 460, and the auxiliary member 470 evoke the concept of "shellfish and pearls," but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting effect member LA1 may be provided with a decorative pattern representing a bullet hole driven into a wall, and the wing-like member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 may be configured to have a shape representing the force of the bullet. In this case, it can be realized by reusing the shape of the wing-like member 460 and configuring the light emitting producing member LA1 and the auxiliary member 470 as decorations or separate members with different shapes. That is, it is possible to reuse some of the members to construct a new, separate operating unit, thereby reducing development costs.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the elevating plate 430 slides in a linear direction, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the cylindrical portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 may be configured to be pivotally supported in a fixed position, and the elevating plate 430 may be configured to be movable in an arcuate trajectory centered on this axis.

Further, in the case where the cylindrical portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to be fixedly arranged and pivotally supported, the elevating plate 430 may be configured to still be displaced in one direction. In this case, the relative displacement member 442 may be configured to be slidable in the left and right directions so that the displacement of the arcuate gear portion 444b in the left and right directions can be absorbed by the relative displacement member 442 side. For example, by providing a biasing means or an electromagnetic solenoid that biases the relative displacement member 442 toward the arcuate gear portion 444b in the left-right direction, the meshing between the arcuate gear portion 444b and the relative displacement member 442 is stabilized. be able to.

Note that the arcuate gear portion 444b may be made of a flexible resin material used in gear belts, etc., instead of being made of a highly rigid resin material. In this case, the horizontal displacement of the arcuate gear portion 444b can be absorbed by the deformation of the material.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the window section defined by the center frame 86 in the center of the game board 13 has a substantially symmetrical shape, but the window section is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inner shape of the center frame 86 may be asymmetrical depending on the size of the wing-like member 460. Thereby, it is possible to provide the game board 13 with a function of hiding the back side by shielding and a function of improving the degree of freedom in the shape of the game area.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the illumination board 777 is disposed on the back side of the light transmission hole 60c, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the illumination board 777 may be arranged inside the light transmission hole 60c. In this case, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the outer part 94 of the downstream surface component 91 can be brought close to each other, so by forming the outer part 94 thin, the outer part 94 vibrates in response to the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. It is possible to perform a waving effect.

In other words, the portion that is displaced by the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the second operating unit 700 and visible to the player is arranged not only inside the window defined by the center frame 86 but also outside the window. be able to.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the concave portions of the base plate 60 disposed on the front side of the illumination board 777 are disposed at the lower left and right sides of the game area, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as long as it does not affect the flow of game balls, it may be placed inside the center frame 86, below the outer rail 62, or inside the opening of the specific prize opening 65a. You may do so.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the partition member 708 is made of a resin material with little flexure (highly rigid resin material), but the partition member 708 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the partition member 708 may be formed from a rubber resin material. In this case, elastic deformation of the partition member 708 allows the partition member 708 to be brought into close contact with the illumination board 705 and the thin film cover member 712, thereby preventing light leakage.

In the first embodiment, the distance between the position where the left and right load members 761 abut against the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the reference O1 is the same, and the left and right load members 761 are arranged on the front side of the reference O1. Although explained above, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distance between the position where the load member 761 abuts the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the reference O1 may be made different between the left and right sides, or the arrangement of the load member 761 with respect to the reference O1 may be made different between the left and right sides.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the front inclined portion of the load member 761 is configured so as not to collide with the front lid member 770, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper wall of the front cover member 770 and the front surface of the load member 761 may come into contact with each other by displacing the load member 761 toward the front side. In this case, even if the load member 761 is displaced toward the front side due to the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the load member 761 can be returned to the rear side due to the load applied from the front cover member 770.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the left and right drive units 760 have a substantially symmetrical shape, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ease of deflection of the load member 761 may be changed by (locally) changing the density, thickness, or material of the vertical rod-shaped extension portions 761c of the left and right load members 761. good. Thereby, when the left and right drive units 760 are brought into a one-sided excited state, the posture in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 stops can be changed depending on which drive unit 760, left or right, is driven. That is, the number of postures in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be stopped can be increased.

Note that even if the left and right drive units 760 are left and right in a substantially symmetrical configuration, by making the shape of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 bilaterally asymmetric (for example, the loaded portion 733 on one side A similar effect can be achieved by providing extra wall thickness on the bottom side of the base.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be configured to move up and down while maintaining its posture, while the load member 761 may be configured to change its posture. Thereby, even if the plate-shaped displacement member 730 does not change its posture, it is possible to configure a state (posture) in which the load member 761 is easily bent and a state (posture) in which the load member 761 is difficult to bend.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the overhanging portion 761d is integrally formed with the load member 761, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the overhanging portion 761d is configured to be able to be assembled to the vertical bar-like extending portion 761c by fastening, engaging, fitting, fitting, sandwiching, etc. may be configured separately. In this case, even if the overhanging portion 761d is damaged, it is sufficient to reuse the load member 761 up to the vertical bar-shaped extension portion 761c and replacing only the overhanging portion 761d, so when replacing the entire load member 761, In comparison, the size of the maintenance member can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the front small receiving part 735a and the rear small receiving part 735b are misaligned in the direction of the rotation axis of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the centers of the front small receiving part 735a and the rear small receiving part 735b may be arranged at positions overlapping the same plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

In this case, since the direction of change in the interval between the front small receiving part 735a and the rear small receiving part 735b based on the rotational displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730 can be made orthogonal to the rotation axis of the plate-like displacement member 730, The change in the distance between the small receiving part 735a and the rear small receiving part 735b can be used to change the holding force of the hollow member 740, rather than to change the posture of the hollow member 740.

That is, as the inclination angle of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 increases, the distance between the front small receiving part 735a and the rear small receiving part 735b becomes mechanically narrower. It can be used to pinch from. Therefore, as the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes, the manner in which the hollow member 740 is held (ease of vibration) can be changed.

In this case, the clearance between the front small receiving part 735a and the protruding columnar part 743 may be made equal to the clearance between the rear small receiving part 735b and the protruding columnar part 743. In this case, since the holding force of the front and rear protruding columnar parts 743 increases in the same way, the posture of the hollow member 740 is lower than that in the case where the side with the larger clearance is allowed to rotate around the side with the smaller clearance. Changes can be easily suppressed.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the small receiving portions 735 that support the pair of protruding columnar portions 743 of the hollow member 740 are arranged on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in front and behind the reference O1. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair may be arranged together on the front side or the rear side of the reference O1.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be configured to slide in the left-right direction, and the small receiving portion 735 may be configured as a long groove extending in a direction inclined with respect to the sliding direction. In this case, by providing the slope of the front small receiving part 735a and the slope of the rear small receiving part 735b on opposite sides with respect to the sliding direction, the projecting columnar part 743 and The clearance with the small receiving portion 735 can be changed. Thereby, the manner in which the hollow member 740 is held (easiness of vibration) can be changed.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported and displaced by the left-right axis, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be supported in a manner that is rotatable also on the longitudinal axis (for example, in a manner in which it is supported by a ball joint).

Further, the plate main body (a long plate extending in the left-right direction) of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be supported as a separate body above the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. In this case, depending on the driving mode of the drive unit 760, the plate main body of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be displaced by a combination of rotation about the left-right axis and rotation about the front-rear axis.

Alternatively, the shaft support may be configured to have an elongated hole shape that is elongated in the vertical direction, so that vertical displacement of the shafted support 731 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is permitted. In this case, the attitude change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 caused not only by the rotational movement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 but also by vertical displacement of one of the left and right shafted supports 731 compared to the other (centered on the longitudinal axis) (corresponding to the rotational displacement), it is possible to further diversify the manner in which the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 are displaced in response to the displacement of the plate-like displacement member 730.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the deflection of the load member 761 is caused by a change in the load direction based on a change in the attitude of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a core material extending along the direction of displacement of the load member 761 is configured to be passed through the load member 761, and the length of the core inserted into the load member 761 changes as the load member 761 is displaced. (It may be configured so that the core material falls out.) In this case, since the rigidity of the load member 761 changes based on the presence or absence of the core material, the load member 761 may be deflected in accordance with this change in rigidity.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which one of the parts that decelerates the driven member 163 is configured to be displaceable, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, both of the parts that decelerate the driven member 163 may be configured to be displaceable. In this case, both of the parts to be decelerated (the lower regulating part 175 and the upper regulating part 176) may be made of the same member.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the biasing spring SP21 does not directly contact the driven member 163, but applies biasing force via the contact member 2190 in between, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, the biasing spring SP21 may be configured to directly contact the driven member 163.

Further, in this case, the arrangement (contact location) of the biasing spring SP21 with respect to the driven member 163 can be set arbitrarily. For example, a plurality of contact points between the biasing spring SP21 (single or plural) and the driven member 163 may be provided, and the contact points are placed on the rotating shaft side and the rotating tip side with the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 in between. It may be configured separately.

In the third embodiment described above, by extending the shape of the elongated hole portion 3406 in the direction of displacement of the elevating plate 430, a section is configured in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even while the elevating plate 430 is being displaced. Although a case has been described in which the transmission of the driving force to the downstream side of the auxiliary arm member 444 in that section is cut off, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a sliding portion (an angular region where the gear teeth are not in mesh) is provided between the arcuate gear portion 444b and the rotary gear 441, so that the rotary gear 441 does not rotate even if the arcuate gear portion 444b rotates. By configuring , transmission of the driving force to the downstream side of the auxiliary arm member 444 may be cut off.

In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement width of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 corresponds to the vertical position of the arm tip of the arm-equipped rotary gear 3441, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the arm-equipped rotating gear 3441 is not a gear in which gear teeth are formed around the entire circumference, but is configured to have an overhang partially formed so that it can function as a cam, and the overhang applies a load to the relative displacement member 442. The configuration may be such that the relative displacement member 442 is displaced by this. In this case, the displacement mode (displacement speed, displacement width) of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 can be arbitrarily designed depending on the design of the overhang of the rotary gear with arm 3441 and the relative displacement member 442.

In the fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which the detection sensor 4782 is configured to detect the easily damaged thin protruding portion 4761g that is a part of the load member 4761, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to detect the thick protruding portion 4761f.

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the adjustment member 5782 protrudes upward from the lower side of the load member 761 and presses the front side of the load member 761, but the adjustment member 5782 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the adjustment member 5782 may be configured to project forward from the rear side of the load member 761.

Further, for example, an opening may be formed on the inner side of the load member 761, and the adjustment member 5782 may enter the opening to function as a core. In this case, the ease with which the load member 761 bends can be changed depending on the degree of entry of the adjustment member 5782.

In the first and fifth embodiments described above, the case where the load member 761 is driven by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive device that drives the load member 761 may be configured with a motor such as a DC motor. Thereby, the load member 761 can be driven without being limited to an instantaneous driving mode.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion 945b is formed into a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the rear, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusion 945b may be formed into a circular shape when viewed from the rear. In this case, rattling of the wing member 945 during the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

That is, when the protrusion 945b is formed in an irregular shape in rear view or the sliding groove 966a2 is formed in a curved manner, the protrusion 945b slides on the sliding groove 966a2, so that the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b changes. Therefore, when the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b is increased, the protrusion 945b becomes easier to move by the gap, and the wing member 945 becomes more likely to wobble.

On the other hand, by forming the protrusion 945b in a circular shape in rear view and by extending the sliding groove 966a2 linearly in the displacement member 966, the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 during the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 is formed. The gap between the projection 945b and the projection 945b can always be kept constant. Therefore, rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening/closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

Furthermore, since the sliding groove 966a2 extends linearly along the direction perpendicular to the displacement direction of the displacement member 966, the length of the sliding groove 966a2 can be minimized. As a result, the amount of lightening caused by recessing the sliding groove 966a2 can be suppressed, and the rigidity of the displacement member 966 can be improved.

In the sixth embodiment, the screw threaded into the annular protrusion 953c formed between the opposing detection devices SE1 is for fastening and fixing the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a screw may be used to fasten and fix the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 and the front unit 940.

In the sixth embodiment described above, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the opposing pair of detection devices SE1 of the specific winning a prize opening unit 950 is formed to protrude in an annular shape, but it is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of opposing detection devices SE1 may be formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases as it moves away from the ball entry member 953 toward the passage member 955.

In this case, in order to secure a crossroads from the specific prize opening 65a to the drive unit 960, for example, when drilling is performed using a tool such as a drill, the direction of advance of the drill is set at the outer circumference of the annular protrusion 953c. The wiring HS3 can be easily damaged (disconnected) by causing the wiring HS3 to shift (sideways) in the lateral direction (the direction away from the axis of the annular protrusion 953c in the radial direction) on the surface (the outer circumferential surface of the enlarged diameter portion).

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the game area (front) side of the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980 is visible to the player, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the game area (front) of the distribution unit 980 is visible to the player. A sticker on which information consisting of text or figures is displayed may be attached to the side.

In this case, since information consisting of characters or figures is displayed on the gaming area (front) side of the ball throwing path TR0, first path TR1, and second path TR2 of the sorting unit 980, the front unit 940 (winning port unit 930 ), even when viewing the distribution unit 980, the player can easily recognize the position of the distribution unit 980 by using the display as a landmark (reference position). Note that the form of information display is not limited to the attachment of a sticker, but may also be ink printing, two-color printing, or the like.

In the tenth embodiment, the displacement member 11966 is formed from two members, the first member 11967 and the second member 11968, and the blade portion 11968c is formed as the second member 11968 having a larger displacement amount than the first member 11967. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. The displacement member 11966 may be formed from one member, and the amount of displacement of the one member (displacement member 11966) by the transmission member 965 may be increased, and the blade portion 11968c may be formed in the through hole 966c1 of the one member.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 are in the closed state, the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 is extended from the main body portion 961a by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. Although explained above, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the pair of wing members 945 is in the closed state, power may be applied to the main body portion 961a, and the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 may be in a state drawn inside the main body portion.

In this case, the displacement members 11966, 12966 have blade parts 11968c, 6683 and second blade part 12966c2 inserted into the rolling path of the rolling game ball of rolling part 943a and second ball sending part 942c. The illegal object (thread) can be cut using the electromagnetic force of the drive unit 960 (solenoid 610). That is, since the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2 are displaced in the cutting direction (pinching direction) using electromagnetic force, the driving force thereof can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an unauthorized object using the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the coil spring SP1 is disposed in a compressed state between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960, and electric power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a. Although a case has been described in which the annular portion 961c is displaced toward the main body portion 961a (the shaft portion 961b is drawn into the interior of the main body portion 961a), the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by disposing a spring in an expanded state between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960 and applying electric power to the main body portion 961a, the annular portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a. It may also be displaced in the direction.

In this case, similarly to the above, the displacement of the blade parts 11968c, 6683 and the second blade part 12966c2 in the cutting direction (pinching direction) is performed using electromagnetic force, so that the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an unauthorized object using the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Prevention of banging with solenoid. Use of cushion>
a displacing means configured to be displaceable; a driving means disposed on a predetermined direction side of the displacing means and configured to be able to generate a driving force for driving the displacing means in the predetermined direction; and a resistance means configured to be able to generate resistance to displacement in the predetermined direction, the resistance means being configured to be able to reduce a load applied from the displacement means to the drive means. Game machine A1.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines configured to displace a displacement member using an electromagnetic solenoid (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, the part that receives the load from the displacement member is limited to the electromagnetic solenoid, and because the electromagnetic solenoid receives excessive load, the electromagnetic solenoid is likely to fail early. There was a problem. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of improving the durability of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the resistance means is configured to generate resistance to the displacement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction (toward the drive means) and to reduce the load applied from the displacement means to the drive means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid applying an excessive load to the driving means. Thereby, the durability of the gaming machine can be improved.

Note that the manner in which the load applied to the drive means is reduced is not limited at all. For example, the load may be suppressed by dispersing the load by increasing the number of locations that receive the load, or the load may be transmitted by creating a gap between the displacement means and the drive means using resistance means. Alternatively, the surface of the resistance means acting on the displacement means may be increased to reduce the load per unit area.

A game machine A2 comprising a support means for supporting the displacement means in the game machine A1, wherein the drive means is arranged closer to the support means than the resistance means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, by keeping the arm length between the support means and the driving means short (the arm length of the moment of force), the load applied to the resistance means can be reduced. Excessive amounts can be avoided.

In the game machine A2, the support means rotatably supports the displacement means about a predetermined axis, and the predetermined axis is disposed on the side in the predetermined direction with respect to the resistance means. .

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, it is possible to avoid reversing the load generated between the predetermined shaft and the displacement means in the direction (left and right direction) intersecting the predetermined direction, Since it is possible to limit the side where rubbing of the portion covering the rotating shaft occurs to one side (avoiding slight displacement to the left and right), it is possible to limit the portion that needs to be formed thickly.

A gaming machine A3 includes a first resistance means that generates a load against displacement in the predetermined direction, and a second resistance means that generates a load against displacement in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the first resistance means and the second resistance means include misaligned portions arranged at different positions when viewed in the predetermined direction, and the first resistance means are arranged farther from the predetermined axis than the second resistance means. A game machine A4 characterized in that:

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A3, it is possible to reduce the load applied from the first resistance means to the displacement means. In other words, the magnitude of the load can be reduced by increasing the arm length of the moment of force generated on the displacement means due to the load from the first resistance means.

Furthermore, by separating the location where the load occurs between the first resistance means and the displacement means and the location where the load occurs between the second resistance means and the displacement means, concentration of the load can be avoided. Therefore, the durability of the displacement means can be improved.

In gaming machine A3 or A4, the displacement means includes a transmission section for transmitting a driving force to a predetermined displacement means, and an attached section extending radially outward of the transmission section, and A gaming machine A5 characterized in that the means is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the attached part.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3 or A4, even if the attached part is damaged, the driving force can be transmitted to the displacement means, so the drive control can be maintained until maintenance. The displacement of the displacement means can be continued.

Note that the form of the transmission section is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be configured in a position close to the drive means, or it may be configured on the opposite side in the axial direction to the side where the drive means is disposed with reference to a shaft member disposed along a predetermined axis. But it's okay.

Further, with respect to the shaft member, the aspect on the axially opposite side to the side on which the driving means is disposed is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the drive means and the transmission part may be configured at opposite positions with respect to a plane perpendicular to a predetermined portion of the shaft member, or even if the positions with respect to the plane are not opposite front and back, the shaft In the transmission path of the driving force through the member, the transmission section may be configured on the opposite side of the driving means with the shaft member in between.

A gaming machine A6, which is any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, and includes a load applying means for applying a load to the displacement means in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines A1 to A5, the displacement means can be quickly returned from the drive displacement side.

A gaming machine A7 in the gaming machine A6, wherein the load applying means is arranged on both sides of the driving means along a direction intersecting the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A6, it is possible to avoid imbalances in the posture of the load applying means and the generated load due to the influence of the driving force.

A game machine A8, which is any one of the game machines A1 to A7, wherein the resistance means is configured to be able to apply a reaction force while in contact with the displacement means.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines A1 to A7, a frictional force can be generated at the contact surface between the displacement means and the resistance means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the displacement means from being displaced in a direction other than the predetermined direction.

The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the displacement means is configured to receive an external force, and a contact surface between the displacement means and the resistance means is arranged parallel to at least one directional component of the external force. Game machine A9.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A8, it is possible to prevent the displacement means from shifting due to external force by using frictional resistance.

<Rack, pinion, gear arm (irregular double rack)>
a base means, an intermediate means slidably supported by the base means, a distal end means displaceably supported by the intermediate means, and a distal end means supported by the intermediate means, the intermediate means being supported by the base means. and a displacement configuration means configured to be able to displace the distal end means with respect to the intermediate means as the base means is displaced by the intermediate means, wherein the base means is displaceable in a manner incompatible with the displacement mode of the intermediate means. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, have a structure in which a pinion is sandwiched between a plurality of racks (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-153095). According to this structure, the rack is displaced in the opposite direction as the pinion rotates, so the displacement speed of one rack relative to the other rack can be increased, and it is possible to construct a performance object that moves at high speed. It is possible.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is necessary to separately prepare a shielding member to hide the fixed rack, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the presentation body may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the base means is configured to be displaceable, by displacing the base means in accordance with the displacement of the distal end means or the intermediate means, the base means can be moved by the distal end means or the intermediate means. can be hidden. Thereby, it is not necessary to separately prepare a shielding member, and the degree of freedom in designing the distal end means can be improved.

A gaming machine B2 characterized in that the basic means is configured to be rotatable in the gaming machine B1.

Here, if both members (base means and tip side means) that sandwich the pinion are racks that slide in parallel, and when the pinion and rack are arranged on the same plane, the rack should be moved in order to avoid interference between the members. Since the pinion cannot be placed in a position that overlaps the rack when viewed in the displacement direction, the space for placing the rack increases in the direction crossing the pinion's rotation axis, making it difficult to design compactly. There was a problem that.

In addition, it is necessary to provide supports at multiple points to maintain the rack's posture and optimize the meshing with the pinion, which may complicate the component structure and increase assembly man-hours. There was a problem. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of space saving and structural simplification.

At the retracted position, the protruding portion of the base means side and the recessed portion of the distal end means overlapped in the slide displacement direction, so that the shielding width at the retracted position was bulky.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, since the base means is configured to be rotationally displaced, the base means and the displacement forming means can be arranged at overlapping positions when viewed from the slide displacement direction of the intermediate means, thereby saving space. In addition, the structure can be simplified since it is sufficient to have a structure for pivoting the foundation means.

Moreover, since the overhang on the foundation means side can be placed on the back side by utilizing the curvature, the shielding width at the retracted position can be narrowed.

In gaming machine B2, a part of the base means is rotatably supported by the intermediate means, and by rotating the other part about the other part, the attitude of the base means is reversed along the slide displacement direction of the intermediate means. A gaming machine B3, wherein the other part is configured to be movable in a direction intersecting the slide displacement direction.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B2, since a part of the base means and the displacement configuring means are both supported by the intermediate means, the difference between the part of the base means and the displacement configuring means is Load transfer can be stabilized.

In addition, by displacing the other parts of the foundation means in a direction that intersects the slide displacement direction, the displacement can be balanced by the displacement of one part of the foundation means and the other part, and the amount of displacement of the entire foundation means (up and down) can be balanced. (both left and right) can be suppressed.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B3, when the tip side means is disposed at the end position on one side (overhanging side) of the displacement range, the base means is moved from a direction intersecting the direction of the slide displacement. A game machine B4 is characterized in that it receives a load for maintaining posture.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines B1 to B3, the load necessary for the slide displacement is reduced compared to the case where the load for maintaining the posture is applied in the direction of the slide displacement. I can do it. Furthermore, the arrangement of the intermediate means and the distal means can be stabilized by utilizing the fact that the base means maintains its posture with the distal means disposed at one end position.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B4, in a state in which the tip side means is disposed at the other end position (retreat side) of the displacement range, the base means is such that the load applied from the intermediate means is applied to the base means. Game machine B5 is characterized in that it takes a posture facing in a direction in which displacement is possible.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines B1 to B4, the basic means, intermediate means, and displaceable means can be started smoothly.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, when the tip side means is disposed at the other end (retracted side) end position of the displacement range, the base means has a bulge extending toward the retracted position side than the intermediate means. A gaming machine B6 characterized by having an exit part.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines B1 to B5, by adopting a configuration in which the projecting portion protrudes from the intermediate means at the other side (retracted side) terminal position where it is difficult for the player to see, the intermediate means It is possible to configure the base means to be hidden by the intermediate means at the end position on one side (overhanging side) while suppressing the vertical dimension of the base means to be less than the dimension of the base means.

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B6, the base means is partially rotatably supported by the intermediate means, and at least one of the intermediate means or the tip side means has electrical wiring guided to the base means. A gaming machine B7 characterized in that: is connected to the gaming machine B7.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the displacement of a part of the base means is suppressed to easily secure a passage route for the electrical wiring and to easily secure the electrical wiring. It is possible to suppress the load applied to the vehicle.

A gaming machine B8, in the gaming machine B7, wherein the tip side means is configured to be slidably displaceable, and the electric wiring is arranged outside the tip side means.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B7, the load applied to the electrical wiring can be reduced compared to the case where the electrical wiring is connected to the distal end means that is displaced by sliding displacement, which tends to put a load on the electrical wiring. Can be suppressed.

Thereby, it is possible to increase the amount of deviation (positional deviation, speed difference, etc.) that occurs in the operation of the distal end means and the intermediate means, while keeping the load applied to the electric wiring small. For example, a driving means for driving the intermediate means with reference to the base means and a driving means for driving the distal end means with respect to the intermediate means can be separately configured while keeping the load applied to the electric wiring small.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the displacement configuration means is configured to be able to displace the tip side means with respect to the intermediate means by a predetermined amount corresponding to the displacement amount of the intermediate means. Game machine B9.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines B1 to B8, the distal end means can be stably displaced at high speed (higher speed displacement than the intermediate means).

<A pair of left and right members are configured asymmetrically>
The plurality of displacement means are configured to be able to displace a first relative position and a second relative position disposed further apart from each other than the first relative position, and the plurality of displacement means Alternatively, at least one of the second relative positions is configured to be visually recognized in a series of predetermined shapes, and the plurality of displacement means includes a first displacement means and a second displacement means smaller than the first displacement means. A gaming machine C1 comprising:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which a plurality of operating parts having substantially the same shape are arranged in close proximity to form a series of shapes (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-153095). According to this structure, in addition to being able to easily construct a large performance object by combining small operating parts, the construction of the operating parts themselves are approximately the same, so the difficulty of assembly work can be reduced. can.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, since the shapes of the operating parts are almost the same, the space required to realize the displacement of each operating part is common to each operating part, so it is limited. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the perspective of increasing the degree of freedom in design so that the available space could be utilized.

For example, when the operating part displaces the right side of a display device, such as a liquid crystal display device placed in the center of the gaming area, the side closer to the display device attracts more attention from players. Nevertheless, the space required for the displacement of the moving part is symmetrical with respect to the moving part, so the amount of possible displacement on the left side of the moving part (the side where the player's attention is high) is equal to the displacement on the right side of the moving part. There was a problem in that it was limited by the allowable amount.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the first displacement means and the second displacement means, which are visually recognized as a series of shapes, are configured with different sizes, the amount of displacement of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is Even if they are the same, the space required to realize the displacement can be different, so the limited space can be used favorably and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

A gaming machine C2 in the gaming machine C1, wherein the first displacement means and the second displacement means have external shapes set according to an arrangement possible area at the second relative position.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the first displacement means and the second displacement means make the area visible at the first relative position regardless of the difference in the size of the placeable area at the second relative position. The degree of freedom in designing the shape can be improved.

Further, the decorativeness can be improved when the first displacement means and the second displacement means are used instead of the decoration of the area at the second relative position, as in the case where the game board is formed of a light-transmitting resin.

The gaming machine C1 or C2 is provided with a guide means disposed on the back side of the plurality of displacement means to guide the displacement of the plurality of displacement means, and the position between the guide means and the displacement means is different from each other when viewed in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that it is configured to be displaced.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C1 or C2, it is possible to avoid the guide means from being visually recognized through the gap between the plurality of displacement means. As a result, it is possible to make effective use of the gap, such as by making decorative parts other than the guide means visible through the gap instead.

In the gaming machine C3, the guide means is configured to be displaceable in a predetermined direction, and the positions between the plurality of displacement means are determined from a reference line passing through the center of the guide means and along the predetermined direction when viewed in the predetermined direction. A game machine C4 characterized in that it is arranged at a shifted position.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, in consideration of load balance, etc., the area where the player expects that the guiding means for guiding the plurality of displacement means will be arranged (standard A deterioration in design quality can be avoided by configuring the player (equivalent to a line) to be hidden by a plurality of displacement means so as to be difficult to see from the player.

Any one of the game machines C1 to C4 includes a driving means for generating a driving force, the first displacement means is disposed at a predetermined position in the driving force transmission path of the driving means, and the second displacement means A gaming machine C5 characterized in that it is disposed downstream of the predetermined position in the driving force transmission path.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, by configuring the driving force transmission path so that the members become smaller as they go downstream, It is possible to prevent excessive burden from occurring.

In the game machine C5, the drive means and the transmission means for transmitting the driving force are arranged at the upper left of the back case, and the first displacement means and the second displacement means are arranged at the upper left of the back case. A game machine C6 characterized in that the first displacement means is configured to be larger than the second displacement means disposed at a position different from the upper left.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, due to the configuration and arrangement of the payout device, the driving means and drive means are arranged in the upper left part where it is easier to secure a larger internal area of the back case than the upper right part. Since the transmission means can be easily hidden by the first displacement means similarly arranged at the upper left, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the driving means and the transmission means. This makes it unnecessary to construct a separate cover for hiding the driving means and the transmission means.

In the gaming machine C5 or C6, the first displacement means is configured to be in a posture where gravity acts in a tilting direction on the side of the first relative position, and to come close to the second displacement means by tilting displacement. Characteristic game machine C7.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C5 or C6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are set in a dimensional relationship that allows them to come into contact with each other, but the clearance ( When a gap is created due to non-contact due to misalignment (play between gear teeth that mesh, gap between the guide rail and the guided part, etc.), the gap can be easily filled by tilting displacement of the first displacement means due to gravity. can do.

This makes it possible to avoid maintaining a gap between the first displacement means and the second displacement means, so that the first displacement means and the second displacement means come into contact with each other and the series of The design quality when configuring the shape can be improved.

A game machine C8, which is any one of the game machines C5 to C7, characterized in that an electric wiring runs between the first displacement means and the second displacement means on the second displacement means side.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C5 to C7, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are prevented from over-displacement by passing the electrical wiring to the second displacement means side where over-displacement is less likely to occur. It is possible to reduce the load that occurs on the electrical wiring when displacement occurs.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the predetermined shape is a symmetrical shape, and the split surface forming part that forms the split surface that separates the first displacement means and the second displacement means is located at the center of the gaming area. A gaming machine C9 characterized in that it is placed on a side far from the position.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the asymmetrical split surface is arranged on the side far from the field of view (the side that is difficult to see from the player), so that the first displacement means Also, it is possible to avoid deterioration in the appearance of the second displacement means.

The appearance of the plurality of displacement means can be improved by making the shape of the opposite side, the central position side of the gaming area (the side closer to the field of view, the side that is easier for the player to see), symmetrical.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the plurality of displacement means are arranged such that the sides on which the size of the displaceable area is restricted at the second relative position are opposed to each other at the first relative position. Machine C10.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, it is possible to easily make the plurality of displacement means each having an asymmetrical shape visible as a series of symmetrical shapes at the first relative position. can do.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C10, the plurality of displacement means includes a first displacement in which the displacement from the second relative position to the first relative position is a downward displacement, and the first displacement is A gaming machine C11 comprising a different second displacement, and configured such that the second displacement does not occur during a predetermined section from the start of the displacement.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C10, the player's interest can be improved by complicating the displacement mode of the plurality of displacement means.

In addition, if the upper inner surface of the back case is vertically misaligned on the left and right sides due to the shape of the dispensing device, the multiple displacement means can be moved to an extent that the vertical misalignment of the back case does not affect (corresponding to a predetermined section) By starting the second displacement after descending by Even when the displacement modes of the displacement means are the same, collision of the plurality of displacement means with the rear case can be easily avoided.

<Movable accessory that changes relative displacement by placement>
A first displacement means configured to be displaceable, and a plurality of second displacement means displaceably supported by the first displacement means, the first displacement means supporting one of the second displacement means. a first support part that supports the other second displacement means, and a second support part that supports the second displacement means, and the first support part that is supported by the first support part as a predetermined displacement occurs in the first displacement means. 2. A displacement mode with respect to the first displacement means that occurs in the displacement means, and the first displacement means that occurs in the second displacement means supported by the second support part as a predetermined displacement occurs in the first displacement means. A gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the gaming machine D1 is configured to have a different displacement mode.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are configured so that the second displacement means (353) is displaced in accordance with the displacement of predetermined first displacement means (351 and 352) (for example, in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-2015- (See Publication No. 231434). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the displacement between the first displacement means and the second displacement means is monotonous, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of performance effects.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the second displacement means that is displaced as the first displacement means is displaced depends on whether the second displacement means is supported by the first support part or the second support part. Since the displacement manners for the first displacement means can be made different, the displacement manners of the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be complicated, and the performance effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1, the gap between the one second displacement means and the first support part is configured to be smaller than the gap between the other second displacement means and the second support part, and The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the displacement means has a larger displacement amount on the side of the first support part than on the side of the second support part.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D1, the gap between the first support parts can be eliminated by the displacement of the first displacement means, so that the difference in the displacement mode can be increased.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes a load applying means configured to apply a load to the first displacement means, and the first displacement means is supported on one side in a predetermined direction and can be displaced on the one side. and the displacement amount of the other side portion are different from each other, the load applying means is configured to apply a load to the other side portion of the first displacement means, and the second displacement means is configured to apply a load to the other side portion of the first displacement means. A gaming machine D3 comprising a one-side second displacement means arranged on one side and an other-side second displacement means arranged on the other side.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D1 or D2, the displacement of the second displacement means is arranged on one side regardless of where on the first displacement means the load applying means applies the load. It can be made different depending on whether it is placed on the opposite side or on the other side.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3 includes a load applying means configured to be able to apply a load to the first displacement means, and the load applying means is arranged at a plurality of positions and each independently adjusts the first displacement. A gaming machine D4 characterized in that it is configured such that a load can be applied to the means.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines D1 to D3, an auxiliary drive means for displacing the load applying means can be made unnecessary.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4 includes a load applying means configured to be able to apply a load to the first displacement means, and includes a light emitting board having a light emitting surface, and the load applying means is configured to apply at least one load to the light emitting board. A gaming machine D5 characterized in that a portion is shielded when viewed in a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines D1 to D4, the load applying means can be hidden by the light emitting board. That is, it is possible to avoid the load applying means from being visible to the player by using a light emitting board which is necessary for the light emitting effect. In this case, by irradiating strong light from the light emitting surface of the light emitting board, visibility of the vicinity of the light emitting board can be reduced, so that other parts of the load applying means that are not shielded from the light emitting board when viewed in a predetermined direction are It can also be made difficult for players to see.

In addition, when the light emitting board and the load applying means are arranged close to each other, electricity is supplied to a drive device (for example, an electromagnetic solenoid) that drives the load applying means by using the path of the electric wiring connected to the light emitting board. Since electrical wiring can be passed through, it is not necessary to create a separate gap for passing electrical wiring.

In the gaming machine D5, the light-emitting board is arranged on the back side of the game board, and the game board is provided with a recessed part whose opposite side is recessed at a position facing the light-emitting board. Machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D5, an area for arranging the light-emitting board can be secured between the game board and the load from the load applying means is transmitted to the game board. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

A gaming machine D7 in the gaming machine D6, wherein the recessed portion is disposed outward with respect to the outer shape of the gaming area when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D6, even if the membrane member formed on the front side of the recessed portion is displaced, the displacement can be prevented from affecting the gaming area. I can do it.

A game characterized in that any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7 is provided with a guide means for guiding the displacement of the second displacement means, and the guide means is disposed on the one side of the first displacement means. Machine D8.

According to the gaming machine 8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the displacement of the second displacement means can be regulated by the guiding means, and when the guiding means is disposed closer to the other side. Since the amount of displacement of the first displacement means in the vicinity of the guide means can be reduced compared to the above, it is possible to suppress friction between the first displacement means and the guide means.

In the gaming machine D8, a support plate that supports the guide means, a thin film member fixed in a predetermined area to the support plate, and a light emitting board disposed on the opposite side of the support plate with respect to the thin film member and having a light emitting section. A game machine D9, wherein the thin film member is configured to partition the guide means and the light emitting board without a gap.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D8, by partitioning the guide means and the light emitting board with a thin film member, it is possible to prevent dust from rubbing on the guide means from entering the light emitting board side. can.

A gaming machine D10 in the gaming machine D9, wherein the thin film member is configured with a size that allows it to avoid contact with other displacement means.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effects achieved by the game machine D9, it is not necessary to ensure the rigidity of the thin film member, so by forming it as thin as possible, the light from the light emitting board can be weakened by the thin film member. can be kept to a minimum.

<Use of deflection. The key is to communicate>
A displacement means configured to be displaceable, a drive means for generating a driving force for displacing the displacement means, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement means, the transmission means comprising a driving force. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to change its state so as to change the manner in which force is transmitted.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine configured such that a transmission means for transmitting driving force is inserted into a deformation groove of a displacement means, and the transmission means displaces the displacement means by displacing the deformation groove ( For example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-234152). According to this gaming machine, since the deformation groove is formed to extend along the displacement locus of the transmission means, it is possible to absorb some excessive displacement of the transmission means. However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the deformation groove is configured to absorb excessive displacement of the transmission means, extra wall thickness and length are required to constitute the deformation groove. This increases the restrictions on the shape of the displacement means. Therefore, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the configuration of the displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the transmission mode of the driving force can be changed by changing the state of the transmitting means, it is possible to absorb excessive displacement of the transmitting means by changing the state of the transmitting means. can. Therefore, since there is no need to add any extra configuration to the displacement means, the configuration of the displacement means can be improved.

Note that the change in the transmission mode is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the driving force transmission efficiency may be changed by changing the rigidity of the transmission means or by adjusting the direction of the load applied to the transmission means, or the change may be caused by increasing or decreasing the number of transmission means. .

In the gaming machine E1, the gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the change in the state of the transmission means occurs during displacement of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, a load for changing the state of the transmission means can be generated from the displacement means. This eliminates the need for a separate load source for changing the state of the transmission means.

Note that the mode of change in the state of the transmission means is not limited at all. For example, it may be due to deformation of the transmission means, or it may be due to a change in the rigidity (strength) of the transmission means.

Furthermore, examples of the mode of deformation of the transmission means include elastic (continuous) deformation such as bending, deflection, and twisting, and deformation that causes boundaries such as bending and positional displacement. Furthermore, examples of the manner in which the rigidity (strength) changes include a manner in which the thickness of the transmission means changes, and a manner in which a core inserted through the transmission means comes out.

In the gaming machine E2, the transmission means has a shape that has a bendability that differs depending on the direction, and the direction of the reaction force received from the displacement means before and after the displacement means passes a predetermined reference position as the displacement means is displaced; A game machine E3 characterized in that it is configured so that the angle formed by the direction in which it is easy to bend changes.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, it is possible to utilize the fact that the direction of the reaction force received from the displacement means changes during the displacement of the displacement means to change the shape of the transmission means. It is possible to divide the reference position into a range in which the driving force mainly displaces the displacement means and a range in which the driving force mainly bends and deforms the transmission means.

In the game machine E3, the displacement means is driven so as to stop at a predetermined mid-position, and the transmission means transmits a reaction force from the displacement means when the displacement means is set to the mid-position. A gaming machine E4 characterized in that the direction of is configured to be along a direction in which it is easy to bend.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine E3, the displacement means can be easily kept in the halfway position by the deflection of the transmission means, so the amount of driving force generated by the driving means and the generation period can be roughly controlled. Even if the setting is made, it is possible to easily keep the displacement means in an intermediate position.

In the game machine E4, the drive means applies a driving force so that the pushing part of the transmission means that pushes the displacement means passes through the abutment position of the displacement means in the middle position before being bent. A gaming machine E5 characterized in that it is controlled to generate a game.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine E4, even after the displacement means takes an intermediate position, driving energy can be internalized, and this can be used to vibrate the displacement means.

That is, since the transmission means is in a position where it is easy to flex, it is possible to cause the transmission means to generate vibrations using the flexure, without having to generate the driving force of the drive means in a manner to generate vibrations. This allows vibration to be generated with a simple mechanism.

A gaming machine E6, which is any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, and includes a range setting means configured to be able to set a range in which the state of the transmission means changes.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the range in which the state of the transmitting means changes can be set by the range setting means, so that the degree of change in the state of the transmitting means can be determined depending on the situation. You can adjust it depending on your needs.

In the gaming machine E6, the range setting means is configured to limit the range in which the state of the transmission means changes to the downstream side of the driving force transmission path with respect to a predetermined position. .

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E6, the range in which the state of the transmission path changes can be limited to the range on the opposite side of the drive means, so that the transmission of the driving force on the upstream side of the transmission path is improved. It is possible to suppress a decrease in efficiency.

Furthermore, by narrowing the range in which the state changes, the degree of state change that occurs in the transmission means can be reduced, so that the influence on the displacement mode of the displacement means can be reduced. Therefore, even if the drive means cannot be precisely controlled, deviations in the displacement mode of the displacement means (for example, deviations in the stop position) can be suppressed to a small level.

<Wiring route for movable accessories>
A game machine comprising a rotational displacement means configured to be rotatably displaced, and an electricity supply means configured to be able to supply electricity to the rotational displacement means and arranged along a line connecting a rotating shaft and a radial outside, The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the electricity supply means includes a disposed portion disposed on the rotating shaft portion of the rotational displacement means.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there are game machines in which electrical wiring is fixed to an arm-shaped member that is rotatably supported, and the electrical wiring is connected to a displacement member that is connected to the arm-shaped member (for example, (Refer to Japanese Patent Publication No. 2012-157474). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the electrical wiring is only held loosely due to the rotational displacement of the arm-shaped member, and there is a risk that the electrical wiring will expand or contract with the rotational displacement of the arm-shaped member. There was a problem in that there was room for improvement from the perspective of suppressing the load.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, since the disposed part of the electricity supply means (electrical wiring) is arranged on the rotation shaft of the rotational displacement means, when rotational displacement of the rotational displacement means occurs, the rotational displacement means It is possible to suppress the relative displacement of the arranged portion that occurs with respect to the electrical wiring, and it is possible to suppress the load applied to the electric wiring.

The gaming machine F1 includes a displacing means movably disposed near the electricity supply means, and a suppressing means for suppressing displacement of the electricity supply means in a direction approaching the displacing means. Gaming machine F2 is characterized by the following.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F1, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the arrangement displacement means, so that the distance between the arrangement displacement means and the electric wiring can be shortened. .

In the gaming machine F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the arrangement displacement means is configured to be easily separated from the electricity supply means when an unexpected displacement occurs.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F2, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the displacing means can be improved, so that the distance between the displacing means and the electric wiring can be shortened. .

In the game machine F3, the arrangement displacement means includes a first arrangement displacement means that is displaced close to the electricity supply means and stops, and a position where the arrangement displacement means is displaced close to the electricity supply means and stops, and a position of the first arrangement displacement means is such that the arrangement displacement means moves close to the electricity supply means and stops. a second arrangement displacement means set at a position away from the electricity supply means compared to a stop position, the first arrangement displacement means and the second arrangement displacement means moving toward the electricity supply means. A game machine F4 characterized in that the game machine F4 is configured to come into contact with each other by being displaced close to each other, and to apply a load to each other in a direction away from the electricity supply means.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F3, even if the first disposed displacement means and the second disposed displacement means are displaced too much, it is possible to avoid applying a load to the electricity supply means. can do.

In the gaming machine F4, the gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the first disposed displacement means is configured to have a smaller inertia than the second disposed displacement means.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F4, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the electricity supply means when the first arrangement means unintentionally comes into contact with the electricity supply means.

Note that the manner of configuring the magnitude of inertia is not limited at all. For example, the magnitude of the inertia may be configured by configuring the first displacement means to be lighter and smaller than the second displacement means, or the aspect of the support portion may be made different. The magnitude of inertia may be determined by varying the displacement resistance.

Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5 is provided with a support means for supporting the rotary displacement means, the support means having an open portion that is opened along the circumferential direction of a predetermined rotation axis of the rotary displacement means, A gaming machine F6, wherein the electricity supply means passes through the opening.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines F1 to F5, the axial width occupied by the rotational displacement means is suppressed compared to the case where the electricity supply means is passed inside a predetermined rotating shaft. be able to.

The gaming machines F1 to F6 each include a displacing means movably disposed near the electricity supply means, and a driving means for generating a driving force for driving the displacing means, the driving means comprising: A game machine F7 characterized in that it is arranged on a side where the rotational displacement means is not arranged.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F2 to F6, it is possible to improve the layout efficiency.

A game machine F8, characterized in that in any of the game machines F1 to F7, the rotational displacement means is configured to be able to transmit a driving force to the disposed displacement means.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines F1 to F7, the means for guiding the electric wiring has a driving force transmission function, so that the member can be used for multiple purposes. The number can be reduced.

<About the concept of the invention using the drive unit 600 as an example>
A ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry port to open or close the ball entry port, and the pair of wing members. In the game machine, the transmission mechanism includes a drive unit that generates a drive force for rotating the drive unit, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of the drive unit to the pair of wing members, wherein the transmission mechanism generates a drive force of the drive unit. a rotating member that is rotated by a rotating member; and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates; a protruding portion is provided protruding from one of the sliding member or the pair of wing members; A gaming machine G1 characterized in that a sliding groove into which the installation part is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members.

Here, a ball entry hole formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members that are rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry hole and open or close the ball entry hole, and a pair of wing members that open or close the ball entry hole. A game machine is known that includes a drive means that generates a driving force for rotating a wing member, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of the drive means to a pair of wing members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20111- 234009). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is connected to a protrusion that protrudes from the back surface of the pair of wing members. Specifically, opposing portions are formed on one end of the rotating member and are vertically opposed to each other at a predetermined interval, and the protruding portion of the wing member is inserted between the opposing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or pushed down by the opposing portion of the rotating member, thereby opening or closing the wing member.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there was a problem that the opening and closing operation of the wing member was unstable because it was necessary to set a large gap between the opposing part and the protruding part. That is, when the rotary member is rotated for the opening/closing operation of the wing member, the attitude of the facing part is inclined with respect to the protruding part, and the distance between the facing parts is determined by the outer shape (thickness) of the protruding part. If it is the same as (a), the protrusion will interfere between the opposing parts, and the rotating member will not be able to rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the spacing between the opposing parts to a size that does not interfere with the protruding parts, and the gap between the opposing parts and the protruding parts increases accordingly. As a result, the wing members tend to wobble, making the opening and closing operations of the wing members unstable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member that is slidably displaced in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member, and includes a sliding member or a pair of sliding members. A protrusion is provided protruding from one of the wing members, and a sliding groove into which the protrusion is slidably inserted is recessed in the slide member or the other of the pair of wing members, so that the sliding The groove width of the groove can be suppressed. That is, since the displacement of the sliding member is a sliding displacement and the attitude of the sliding groove is not inclined with respect to the protruding part, there is no need to avoid interference with the protruding part when rotating unlike the conventional product. Therefore, for example, by setting the width of the sliding groove to be equal to the size (thickness) of the protruding part, the groove width can be suppressed, so the gap between the sliding groove and the protruding part can be reduced. . As a result, rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening/closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized.

Note that the sliding groove may be a concave groove (indentation) or a through groove (opening). That is, the sliding groove may be formed such that the inserted protrusion can slide along the extending direction of the sliding groove (direction perpendicular to the groove width direction).

A gaming machine G2 in the gaming machine G1, wherein the direction of sliding displacement of the sliding member is substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G1, the direction of the sliding displacement of the sliding member is approximately orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, so that the sliding member is substantially displaced relative to the wing members. Can be arranged in parallel. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the protruding portion protrudes from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the sliding member and extends in a straight line along a direction perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement of the sliding member. Game machine G3 is characterized in that it is extended in a shape.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine G1 or G2, the protruding portion is provided protruding from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member and extends linearly. The gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove and the protrusion can always be kept constant during the opening and closing operations of the wing member. Therefore, rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening/closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized. Moreover, since the sliding groove extends linearly along the direction perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member, the length of the sliding groove can be minimized. As a result, the amount of lightening caused by recessing the sliding groove can be suppressed, and the rigidity of the sliding member can be improved.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G3, the protruding portion is provided protruding from the wing member, the sliding groove is recessed in the sliding member, and the sliding member is slid upward in the direction of gravity. A gaming machine G4 characterized in that the position of the protruding portion at the time of starting is set below along the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the wing member.

Here, unlike the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the wing member, in the present invention, the sliding member is interposed between the wing member and the rotating member, so that the sliding member is slid upward in the direction of gravity. At the time of operation, the weight of the slide member is added, and the inertial force becomes large, and the driving force required for the driving means increases. Therefore, it becomes difficult to smoothly perform an initial operation when starting to drive the wing member in a stopped state to open or close the wing member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines G1 to G3, the protruding portion is provided protruding from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member, so that the slide The position of the protruding part when the member starts sliding upward in the direction of gravity is set downward along the direction of gravity of the rotating shaft of the wing member, so the protruding part is pushed up by the inner wall of the sliding groove. It is possible to increase the horizontal direction component and reduce (minimize) the gravitational direction component of the displacement component of the part. Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, the initial operation when starting to drive the wing member in a stopped state and opening or closing it can be performed smoothly.

A game machine G5 in the game machine G4, wherein when the slide member starts sliding upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in a direction in which it is released.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4, when the sliding member starts sliding upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in the direction in which it is released. It can be rotated by its own weight. Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, the initial operation when starting to drive the wing member in the stopped state (closed position) and opening it can be performed smoothly.

In gaming machine G4 or G5, the inner wall of the sliding groove that the protruding portion comes into contact with when the sliding member starts sliding upward in the direction of gravity includes the rotation axis of the wing member and A gaming machine G6 characterized in that an inclined surface is formed that is inclined with respect to a plane perpendicular to the direction.

According to the gaming machine G6, in either the gaming machine G4 or G5, the inner wall of the sliding groove that the protrusion comes into contact with when the sliding member starts sliding upward in the direction of gravity has a wing member. Since an inclined surface is formed that includes the rotation axis and is inclined with respect to a plane that is orthogonal to the direction of gravity, even if the position of the protrusion is set below the rotation axis of the wing member in the direction of gravity. By guiding the protrusion along the direction of the slope of the slope, it is possible to smoothly start the slide displacement of the slide member upward in the direction of gravity.

In addition, by forming an inclined surface on the inner wall of the sliding groove, not only can the gap between the inner wall and the protrusion be made smaller, but also the protrusion can be brought into contact with the inclined surface. In addition to the displacement of the installation part in the direction of gravity, it is also possible to restrict displacement in the horizontal direction. Therefore, rattling of the wing member in the open or closed stopped state can be easily suppressed. That is, even when affected by vibrations caused by the falling of game balls, the wing member can be easily maintained in the open or closed position.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G6, a receiving portion is recessed in the inner wall of the sliding groove to receive the protruding portion when the sliding member is slid to a position where the wing member is closed; A game machine G7 characterized in that rotation of the wing member is restricted in a state in which the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion.

According to gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines G1 to G6, the inner wall of the sliding groove receives a protrusion when the sliding member is slid to a position where the wing member is closed. When the receiving portion is recessed and the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion, rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member is prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside.

A gaming machine G8 in the gaming machine G7, wherein the protruding portion is received in the receiving portion by slidingly displacing the sliding member downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G7, since the sliding member is slid downward in the direction of gravity, the protruding part is received in the receiving part, so that the weight of the sliding member (self-weight) is reduced. ), it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the protruding part is received in the receiving part.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G8, the rotating member includes an abutting portion and a projecting portion extending from the tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member is configured to close the wing member. a one-side abutted part with which one side of the abutting part comes into contact when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, and a predetermined interval apart from the one-side abutted part in the direction of the sliding displacement. the other side abutted part that is arranged oppositely to the other side and is abutted by the other side of the abutting part when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing member, the wing member In the closed state, one side of the abutting part is brought into contact with the one side abutted part, the projecting part is engaged with the slide member, and at least the other side abutted part is brought into contact with the other side abutted part. A game machine G9 characterized in that when the rotary member is rotated to the other side to a position where the other side of the abutting portion abuts, the engagement of the overhanging portion with the slide member is released.

According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, the rotating member includes an abutting portion and a projecting portion extending from the tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member has the following effects: One side abutted part that comes into contact with one side of the abutting part when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and the one side abutted part and the direction of sliding displacement. and the other side abutted part which is arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval and is abutted by the other side of the abutment part when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the one-side abutted part is pushed by the one side of the abutting part, and the sliding member is slid toward the one side, causing the wings to While the member is closed, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the other side abutted part is pushed by the other side of the abutting part and the sliding member slides towards the other side. By being displaced, the wing member is opened.

In this case, when the wing member is closed, one side of the abutting part is in contact with the one-side abutted part and the overhanging part is engaged with the slide member, so the rotating member is not rotated. Slide displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side to a position where the other side of the abutting part abuts at least the other side abutted part, the engagement of the overhanging part with the sliding member is released, so the rotation By further rotating the member toward the other side, the slide member can be slid toward the other side, and the wing member can be opened.

In the gaming machines G1 to G8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, and the transmission mechanism A protrusion is provided protruding from one of the wing members, and a sliding groove into which the protrusion is slidably inserted is recessed in the slide member or the other of the pair of wing members, and the rotation The member includes an abutting portion and a projecting portion extending from the tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member is configured to rotate when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. a one-side abutted part against which one side of the abutting part is abutted, and a one-side abutted part and the one-side abutted part arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the sliding displacement for opening the wing member. and an abutted part on the other side with which the other side of the abutting part abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side, and when the wing member is closed, the protruding part The slide member is disengaged from the slide member and is slid from a state in which the wing member is closed to a position where the one side abutment portion abuts one side of the abutment portion. The gaming machine G10 is characterized in that the projecting portion is engaged with the sliding member.

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, the rotating member includes an abutting part and an overhanging part extending from the tip of the abutting part, and the sliding member has the following effects: One side abutted part that comes into contact with one side of the abutting part when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and the one side abutted part and the direction of sliding displacement. and the other side abutted part which is arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval and is abutted by the other side of the abutment part when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the one-side abutted part is pushed by the one side of the abutting part, and the sliding member is slid toward the one side, causing the wings to While the member is closed, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the other side abutted part is pushed by the other side of the abutting part and the sliding member slides towards the other side. By being displaced, the wing member is opened.

In this case, when the slide member is slid from the state in which the wing member is closed to a position where the one-side abutment portion abuts one side of the abutment portion, the overhang portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, sliding displacement of the sliding member to the other side without rotating the rotating member is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

On the other hand, when the wing member is closed, the overhang portion is not engaged with the slide member, so by further rotating the rotary member toward the other side, the slide member is slid toward the other side, The wing member can be opened. Here, when the wing member is closed and the overhang part is engaged with the slide member, the shape of the overhang part and one side contact part can be changed to allow rotation of the rotating member to the other side. It is necessary to form it into a specific shape, which makes the shape complicated. Therefore, not only the strength may decrease, but also the engagement may become more likely to be released. On the other hand, in the present invention, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, so that the shape of the overhanging portion and one side contact portion can be rotated. There is no need to shape the member to allow rotation to the other side. Therefore, not only can the shape be simplified to ensure strength, but also a shape that is easy to maintain engagement can be adopted, making it difficult for the engagement to be released.

Any of the game machines G1 to G10 is provided with a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and when the protruding portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, the A gaming machine G11 characterized in that a part of the slide member is disposed within the passage of the passage member.

According to the game machine G11, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines G1 to G10, it is provided with a passage member that forms a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and the protruding part is not disposed in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is placed in the passage of the passage member, so even if the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside by cutting the protruding part, the ball will not enter from the ball entrance. The sliding member can restrict the flow of the game ball.

Any of the game machines G1 to G11 includes a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and the slide member slides the wing member from a position where it is opened to a position where it is closed. A game machine G12 characterized by comprising a friction contact portion that crosses the path of the passage member and rubs against the edge of the passage member when the member is slid and displaced.

According to the gaming machine G12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G11, when the sliding member is slid from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed, the sliding member crosses the passage of the passage member and the passage member Since the slide member is provided with a rubbing portion that rubs against the edge of the ball, it is possible to cut off an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the ball entrance.

For example, the end of a thread is glued to a game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entrance and passed through the path of the passage member, and when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor, the other end of the thread is There is a fraudulent act in which the detection sensor detects multiple times by manipulating (feeding out, pulling in) and moving the game ball back and forth. In response to such fraudulent acts, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is entered with the wing member open, the slide member is slid from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed. When the rubbing part crosses the path of the passage member, the middle part of the thread whose tip is glued to the game ball is displaced together with the rubbing part and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and the rubbing part crosses the passage member. When rubbed against the edge, the thread can be cut between the rubbed part and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Note that the frictional contact portion of the slide member is preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a portion of the slide member (friction portion) may be formed from a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be formed from a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the portion with which the friction contact portion is rubbed) may be formed from a metal material. Further, it is preferable that the frictional contact portion and the portion (edge of the passage member) with which the frictional contact portion comes into contact with each other are formed as a blade (cutting blade).

Any of the game machines G1 to G11 includes a passage member that forms a passage for a game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and the transmission mechanism is configured to displace the wing member from an open position to a closed position. A game machine G13 characterized in that it includes a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and bring their edges into frictional contact with each other.

According to the game machine G13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines G1 to G11, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, it crosses the passage of the passage member and touches each other's edges. Since the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members that come into frictional contact with each other, it is possible to cut off an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the ball entrance.

For example, the end of a thread is glued to a game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entrance and passed through the path of the passage member, and when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor, the other end of the thread is There is a fraudulent act in which the detection sensor detects multiple times by manipulating (feeding out, pulling in) and moving the game ball back and forth. In response to such fraudulent acts, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is entered with the wing member open, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and the pair of cutting members When the thread crosses the path of the passage member, the middle portion of the thread whose tip end is adhered to the game ball can be sandwiched between the pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Note that it is preferable that the pair of cutting members be formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a portion of the slide member (edges that rub against each other) may be formed from a metal material. Moreover, it is preferable that the portions of the pair of cutting members that rub against each other are formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the gaming machine G12 or G13, the drive means is configured to displace the drive shaft in a first direction by electromagnetic force, and also displace the drive shaft in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The actuator is formed as a solenoid actuator that is actuated by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement of the wing member from the open position to the closed position is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. A gaming machine G14 featuring:

According to the game machine G14, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine G12 or G13, the blade member is displaced from the open position to the closed position by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an unauthorized object (for example, a thread) between the frictional contact portion of the slide member and the edge of the passage member.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G14, the rotating member includes an abutting portion, and the sliding member is configured to engage the abutting portion when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. one side abutted part with which one side of the contact part abuts, and when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member arranged opposite to the one side abutted part. A game characterized in that the other side abutted part is abutted by the other side of the abutting part, and the one side abutted part and the other side abutted part are formed approximately at the center in the width direction. Machine G15.

According to the gaming machine G15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G14, the rotating member includes a contact portion, and the sliding member has an effect when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. One side of the abutted part is in contact with one side of the abutting part, and when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, which is arranged opposite to the one side of the abutted part. The other side of the abutting part is provided with an abutted part on the other side, and the abutted part on the one side and the abutted part on the other side are formed approximately at the center in the width direction, so that rotation with the pair of wing members is provided. Changes in the posture of the slide member relative to the other members can be easily tolerated. Therefore, as the rotating member rotates, the sliding member can be smoothly slid and displaced, and as a result, the wing member can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, when the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members during the operation of slidingly displacing the slide member with the rotation of the rotating member to open or close the pair of wing members, When the attitude of the slide member is changed, if the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two places and is also connected to the rotating member at two places, the slide member rotates with the pair of wing members. Changes in the attitude of the slide member with respect to the member are difficult to tolerate, and resistance occurs when sliding the slide member (i.e., rotating the rotating member), which prevents the wing member from opening or closing. . On the other hand, according to the present invention, the sliding member is connected to the pair of wing members at two locations and is connected to the rotating member at one location, so that one of the pair of wing members is connected to the sliding member at two locations. Even if the load from the game ball is applied to only one side, the change in attitude of the slide member between the pair of wing members and the rotating member can be easily tolerated.

Note that the approximate center in the width direction where the one-side abutted part and the other-side abutted part are formed is defined as passing through the approximate center between the pair of protruding parts when the pair of wing members are open or closed. , and means a position on an imaginary line along the direction of sliding displacement.

A gaming machine G16, in the gaming machine G15, characterized in that the width dimensions of one side and the other side of the abutting part are set to be at least three times or less the maximum external dimension of the protruding part.

According to the gaming machine G16, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G15, the width dimensions of one side and the other side of the abutting part are set to at least three times the maximum external dimension of the protruding part. Changes in the posture of the slide member between the wing member and the rotating member can be easily tolerated. In addition, it is preferable that the width dimensions of one side and the other side of the contact part are set to twice or less the maximum external dimension of the protruding part. This is because the above-mentioned attitude change tolerance can be more easily achieved.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 as an example>
a first ball entrance, a first opening/closing member for opening or closing the first ball entrance, a first driving means for driving the first opening/closing member, a second ball entrance, and a second ball entrance. In a gaming machine comprising a second opening/closing member that opens or closes a mouth, and a second driving means for driving the second opening/closing member, the first driving means and the second driving means are configured to drive the second opening/closing member. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that it is arranged on the back side.

Here, a first ball entrance, a first opening/closing member for opening or closing the first ball entrance, a first driving means for driving the first opening/closing member, a second ball entrance, and a first opening/closing member for opening or closing the first ball entrance; A game machine is known that includes a second opening/closing member that opens or closes a second ball entrance and a second driving means that drives the second opening/closing member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-177416). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the first opening/closing member and the second opening/closing member, so the first opening/closing member and the second opening/closing member There was a problem in that it was difficult to arrange other members and devices on the back side of the device, and it was difficult to use the space effectively.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the second opening/closing member, so that space can be formed. That is, by consolidating the installation space for the first drive means and the second drive means on the back side of the second opening/closing member, the space for installing other members and devices is freed up from the first opening/closing member (first entrance). It can be secured at the back of the ball opening), allowing for effective use of space.

A gaming machine H2 in the gaming machine H1, wherein a front projected area of the second opening/closing member is larger than a front projected area of the first opening/closing member.

A gaming machine H3 in the gaming machine H1 or H2, wherein a front projected area of the second opening/closing member is larger than a total front projected area of the first driving means and the second driving means.

According to the gaming machine H2 or H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the front projected area of the second opening/closing member is made larger than the front projected area of the first opening/closing member, or the first driving means Since the total front projected area of the second driving means is larger than that of the second driving means, the dead space on the back surface of the second ball entrance (second opening/closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In the gaming machine H3, the second opening/closing member is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front with one direction being the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are connected to the second opening and closing member on the back side of the second ball entrance. A gaming machine H4 characterized in that opening/closing members are arranged in parallel along the longitudinal direction.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H3, the second opening/closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in front view with one direction as the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are connected to the second ball entering ball. Since they are arranged in parallel along the longitudinal direction of the second opening/closing member on the back side of the mouth, the dead space on the back side of the second ball entry opening (second opening/closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In any of gaming machines H1 to H4, the first drive means and the second drive means include a main body, a drive shaft disposed on one side of the main body, and a drive shaft that drives the drive shaft and drives the main body. a drive unit housed in the main unit, and wiring that supplies power to the drive unit and is drawn out from the other side of the main unit, and the first drive unit and the second drive unit move the drive shaft to the second drive unit. A gaming machine H5 characterized in that it is arranged in a posture facing an opening/closing member.

According to the gaming machine H5, in any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the first driving means and the second driving means include a main body, a drive shaft disposed on one side of the main body, and a drive shaft thereof. The first driving means and the second driving means move the drive shaft to the second drive shaft. Since it is disposed in a posture facing the second opening/closing member, the wiring of the first driving means and the wiring of the second driving means can be easily integrated.

In the gaming machine H5, the main body portion of the first driving means and the main body portion of the second driving means are each formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the driving shaft and wiring are disposed on the outer surface of the main body portion. A game machine H6 characterized in that the first driving means and the second driving means are disposed at positions where one outer surface, excluding the outer surface, is substantially flush with each other.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H5, the main body of the first driving means and the main body of the second driving means are each formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the driving portion of the outer surface of the main body Since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where the outer surfaces of the one excluding the outer surfaces on which the shaft and the wiring are arranged are substantially flush with each other, for example, the first driving means and the second driving means Even if the two drive means have different outputs and the sizes of their main bodies are different, the shape of the shield plate for separating the first drive means and the second drive means from other regions can be simplified.

That is, when the main body portion of the first driving means and the main body portion of the second driving means are formed to have different sizes, the outer surfaces of one main body portion and the other main body portion form a step. It becomes necessary to form a shield plate by bending it along the step, and the shape of such a shield plate becomes complicated. In contrast, according to the present invention, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where the outer surfaces of the main body are substantially flush with each other, and the outer surfaces do not form a step, so that the shield plate can be made into a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the shield plate can be simplified.

Note that the shield plate is a shield plate that separates the area where the first drive means and the second drive means are disposed from other areas (for example, the area where the detection sensor and control board are disposed), and between the two areas. A barrier made of a conductor for restricting (suppressing) the flow of electromagnetic fields, and is formed, for example, as a metal plate.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a first passage member forming a passage for a game ball entered into the first ball entry port and a passage for a game ball entered into the second ball entry port are provided. and a first transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the first driving means to the first opening/closing member, and the first opening/closing member is rotated to a position sandwiching the ball entrance. The first transmission mechanism includes a pair of wing members that are pivotably supported to open or close the ball entrance, and the first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first drive means and is configured to rotate the first passage member and the second passage. A gaming machine H7 comprising: a rotating member disposed between the members; and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of wing members.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means, and the transmission mechanism between the first passage member and the second passage member is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means. Compare this with conventional products in which the pair of wing members are opened and closed only by the rotating member, as it is equipped with a rotating member disposed in the rotary member and a sliding member that is slid and displaced as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of wing members. Thus, space can be secured on both sides (lateral sides) of the first passage member on the back side of the first ball entry port. In addition, unlike conventional products, there is no need to bend the first passage member toward the second passage to avoid interference with the rotating member, so the first ball entrance can be moved closer to the second ball entrance. I can do it.

In the game machine H7, the rotating member includes a first portion extending from the rotating shaft and connected to the sliding member, and a second portion extending from the rotating shaft and driven by the first driving means. A game machine H8, wherein the first part is bent into a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H7, the rotating member includes a first portion extending from the rotating shaft and connected to the slide member, and a first portion extending from the rotating shaft and connected to the sliding member. Since the first part is bent in a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, the sliding amount of the slide member can be secured while the first part is driven by the first drive means. The distance between the slide member and the slide member can be suppressed.

That is, the first portion is formed in a straight line, and the length dimension (distance from the rotating shaft to the portion connected to the sliding member) of the first portion is determined by the distance from the rotating shaft to the sliding member in the present invention. If the distance is set equal to the straight line distance to the part where the sliding member is located, the amount of sliding of the sliding member can be made equivalent to that of the present invention, but the distance between the first driving means and the sliding member increases and the overall size increases. . On the other hand, when the first portion is formed linearly and the length of the first portion is shorter than the linear distance from the rotating shaft to the portion connected to the slide member in the present invention, Although the distance between the drive means and the slide member can be made the same as in the present invention, the amount by which the slide member slides becomes smaller.

On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first portion is bent in a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, so that the sliding amount of the sliding member is ensured, and the sliding distance between the first driving means and the sliding member is secured. The distance between the members can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine H8, the second part of the rotating member is formed on the back side of the first part, which is opposite to the sliding member.

According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H8, the second portion of the rotating member is formed on the back side of the first portion opposite to the sliding member, so that the first portion is bent. By effectively utilizing the space created by this, it is possible to downsize the rotating member. That is, the rotating member can be efficiently disposed in the space between the first passage member and the second passage member, and the overall size can be reduced.

Any one of the game machines H1 to H9 includes a detection sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the second ball entrance, and at least a part of the detection sensor is connected to the second opening/closing member and the first drive means. A gaming machine H10 characterized in that it is arranged between.

According to the game machine H10, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines H1 to H9, the game machine H10 includes a detection sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the second ball entrance, and at least a part of the detection sensor is configured to open and close the second ball. Since it is disposed between the member and the first drive means, for example, if the second opening/closing member is opened and the first drive means is tampered with from the second ball entrance, a part of the detection sensor will detect the first drive means. Since the drive means can be hidden, such fraudulent acts can be made difficult.

In this case, if a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole in order to secure the path from the second ball entrance to the first drive means, the detection sensor may be destroyed. Therefore, fraud can be detected by monitoring the state of such detection sensors. In addition, in the present invention in which the first driving means is disposed on the back side of the second opening/closing member, even if the second opening/closing member is opened and tampering is done to the first driving means from the second ball entrance, By closing the second opening/closing member, the first drive means is shielded by the second opening/closing member, making it impossible to see the location where fraud has been committed, and therefore fraud can be detected by monitoring the state of the detection sensor described above. is particularly effective.

The gaming machine H10 includes a case member that accommodates the detection sensor, and a screw member fastened to the case member, and a pair of the detection sensors are provided, and at least a portion of each of the pair of detection sensors is provided. is disposed between the second opening/closing member and the first driving means, and the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices facing each other.

According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H10, at least a portion of each of the pair of detection sensors is disposed between the second opening/closing member and the first driving means, and is fastened to the case member. Since the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices facing each other, when the second opening/closing member is opened to tamper with the first drive means from the second ball entrance, the first drive means cannot be hidden by the screw member. This makes it more difficult for such fraudulent acts to occur. That is, it is difficult to shield the entire front surface of the first driving means with the pair of detection sensors, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of opposing detection sensors. By setting this as the fastening position of the screw member, the unshielded area in front of the first drive means can be supplemented by the screw member, thereby making it more difficult for fraudulent acts to occur.

Note that the case member may consist of two members and the screw member may be for fastening and fixing these two members together, or it may be for fastening and fixing another member to the case member. good. Moreover, it is preferable that the screw member is made of metal.

A gaming machine H12 characterized in that, in the gaming machine H11, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other.

According to the gaming machine H12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H11, since the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other, for example, the second opening/closing member can be opened to open the second input. When tampering with the first driving means is attempted from the ball mouth, such tampering can be made more difficult.

That is, the wiring is relatively susceptible to damage. Therefore, if a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole in order to secure the path from the second ball entry port to the first drive means, the wiring may be damaged due to the unauthorized act. (disconnection) can be easily caused. Alternatively, it is possible to make the user recognize that it is difficult to commit fraudulent acts without damaging (breaking) the wiring, thereby making it easier to deter fraudulent acts.

In the gaming machine H12, the gaming machine H13 is characterized in that the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wirings of the pair of detection sensors are wound around the seat portion.

According to the gaming machine H13, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H12, the case member includes a seat to which the screw member is fastened, and the wiring for the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat. , can be routed (positioned) over a wider range in front of the first drive means. That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening/closing member is opened to tamper with the first drive means from the second ball entrance, such tampering can be made more difficult.

In the gaming machine H12 or H13, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the seat portion is formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases as the distance from the second opening/closing member increases. Game machine H14.

According to the game machine H14, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H12 or H13, the case member includes a seat portion to which a screw member is fastened, and the seat portion has a conical shape whose diameter increases as the distance from the second opening/closing member increases. Therefore, in order to secure a path from the second ball entry port to the first drive means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform hole-drilling, the direction of advance of the drill is set to the seat. Wiring can be easily damaged (broken) by causing it to shift laterally (slip) on the outer peripheral surface of the wire.

A game machine H15 characterized in that, in any of the game machines H12 to H14, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the opposite side to the fastening position of the screw member.

According to the gaming machine H15, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H12 to H14, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member, so that the wiring is connected to the first driving means. can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of the That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by the screw member and the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening/closing member is opened to tamper with the first drive means from the second ball entrance, such tampering can be made more difficult.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing ball unit 970 as an example>
a game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes; a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member; a second member disposed on the back side of a game board; a first engaging part that engages with the first member; and a second engaging part that engages with the second member. A gaming machine I1 characterized by comprising a third member having:

Here, a game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which a game ball passes, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member. A gaming machine is known that includes a second member disposed on the back side of the gaming board (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-5783). The game ball that flows down the front side of the game board and flows into the first passage of the first member passes through the first passage, flows into the second passage of the second member, and flows into the second passage on the back side of the game board. Pass through 2 passages. Thereby, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front and back direction, which can provide interest to the player.

In this case, if there is a positional deviation (step) in the connecting part between the first passage and the second passage, the smooth flow of the game ball will be inhibited, so the positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member will be ensured. You are requested to do so. However, the gaming machine described above has a problem in that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having passages and decorative members are arranged on the front of the game board, positioning holes for positioning each of these members are provided on the game board. While the positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed in the process of forming the first member, in order to form the positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back of the game board, it is necessary to invert the game board. This requires a separate step of forming a positioning hole just for the second member, which is not practical.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the third member has the first engaging part that engages with the first member and the second engaging part that engages with the second member, the third member It is possible to position the second member with respect to the first member using the following.

In the game machine I1, the game board is formed with an opening, and includes an opening in which a connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is disposed in the internal space, and the opening A gaming machine I2 characterized in that the third member is disposed in an internal space of the gaming machine I2.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I1, the gaming board is formed with an opening, and the connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is disposed in the internal space. Since the third member is disposed in the internal space of the opening, there is no need to separately provide an opening for disposing the third member. In other words, since the opening for arranging the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage is also used as the arranging space for the third member, the number of processing steps can be reduced accordingly, leading to a reduction in product cost. can be achieved.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the third member is configured such that the first engaging portion engages with the first passage of the first member, and the second engaging portion engages with the second passage of the second member, respectively. A game machine I3 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine I3, in the gaming machine I1 or I2, the third member has the first engaging part in the first passage of the first member, and the second engaging part in the second passage of the second member, respectively. Since they are engaged, the second member can be effectively positioned relative to the first member. That is, the purpose of positioning the second member with respect to the first member is to suppress positional deviation (level difference) from occurring in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, but the purpose of positioning the second member with respect to the first member is Since the connecting part between the first passage and the second passage can be directly positioned by the third member, positional deviations (level differences) can be effectively prevented compared to the case where other parts are positioned by the third part. can be suppressed to As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down.

A gaming machine I4 in the gaming machine I3, wherein a part of the inner wall of at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed by the third member.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I3, a part of the inner wall in at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed by the third member, so that the dimensions of the first passage and the second passage are reduced. Tolerances or installation tolerances can be more easily tolerated.

A gaming machine I5, which is any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, wherein the first member is formed to be able to hold the third member.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines I1 to I4, the first member is formed to be able to hold the third member, so the first member and the second member are attached to the front and back of the game board. When attaching each member, there is no need to separately attach the third member, and by attaching the first member, the third member can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of the installation work can be improved accordingly.

In the gaming machine I5, a first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member when the third member is held by the first member. .

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I5, when the third member is held by the first member, the first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. After the first member and the third member are attached to the game board, there is no need to perform a separate operation to engage the first engaging portion of the third member with the first member. Therefore, the workability of the installation work can be improved accordingly.

In the game machine I6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member is formed to be able to engage with the second member from the opposite side to the first member. A gaming machine I7 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member engages the second member from the side opposite to the first member. Therefore, by attaching the second member to the back of the game board after simultaneously attaching the first member and the third member to the game board, the second member of the third member can be engaged with the third member at the same time as the attachment operation. The two engaging portions can be engaged with the second member. Therefore, the workability of the installation work can be improved accordingly.

In any one of gaming machines I5 to I7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is disposed, and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member, and the third A gaming machine I8 characterized in that the members are fixed or integrally formed.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I5 to I7, the first member has a main body member in which the first passage is arranged and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member. Since the third member is fixed to or integrally formed with the fixing member, the third member can be held (arranged) in the first member at the same time as the fixing member is fastened and fixed to the main body member. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent forgetting to attach the third member when attaching the first member and the second member to the game board.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I8, the first member is formed to allow a game ball to enter therein and is rotated to a position sandwiching the ball entrance, which is communicated with the first passage. a pair of wing members that are rotatably supported and open or close the ball entrance; a drive means that generates a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members; and a drive means that generates a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members; a transmission mechanism for transmitting transmission to the member; the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means; and a sliding member that is slid and displaced as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of wing members. A gaming machine I9, characterized in that the third member is formed to be able to guide the sliding displacement of the sliding member.

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a pair of rotating members that are slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates. Since it is equipped with a slide member that opens and closes the pair of wing members, compared to the conventional product in which the pair of wing members are opened and closed only by a rotating member, the blade members can be opened and closed on the back side of the ball entrance and on both sides (sides) of the first passage. space can be secured. In this case, since the third member is formed to be able to guide the sliding displacement of the sliding member, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the sliding displacement of the sliding member. Therefore, the structure of the first member can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the game machine I9, the pair of wing members include a protruding portion that protrudes toward the slide member, and the slide member includes a sliding groove into which the protruding portion is slidably inserted, A game machine I10 characterized in that the third member includes a covered surface portion facing an opening on the opposite side of the wing member in the sliding groove of the slide member.

According to the game machine I10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine I9, the pair of wing members are provided with a protruding portion that protrudes toward the slide member, and a slide member through which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is provided. Since the slide member includes a sliding groove, and the third member includes a covering surface facing the opening on the opposite side of the wing member in the sliding groove of the sliding member, the sliding of the slide member is prevented by the covering surface of the third member. By shielding the opening of the groove from the outside, it is possible to suppress dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, the pair of wing members can be stably opened or closed while preventing the sliding movement of the protrusion from being obstructed by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove.

<About the concept of the invention using the specific winning opening unit 950 as an example>
A ball entrance formed to allow a game ball to enter, an opening/closing member for opening and closing the ball entrance, a rolling surface on which a game ball rolled after entering the ball entrance, and the rolling surface thereof. A gaming machine J1 comprising a passage member into which game balls rolling on a surface flow, wherein a plurality of said passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals.

Here, the ball entrance is formed such that a game ball can enter therein, an opening/closing member that opens and closes the ball entrance, and a passage member that forms a passage for the game ball that has entered the ball entrance. Gaming machines are known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-3092). The ball entrance is formed in a size that allows multiple game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that have entered the ball entrance are collected in the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and are collected in the passage member. One ball is poured into the ball. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the ball entrance is enlarged, the rolling distance of the game ball (length of the rolling surface) from the end of the ball entrance to the passage member increases accordingly. Therefore, it takes time for the ball to reach the passage member, and by the time the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, another game ball may enter the ball from the entrance, which causes the problem that over-winning is likely to occur. there were.

On the other hand, according to the game machine J1, since a plurality of passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals, even when the ball entrance is enlarged, the rolling distance of the game ball to the passage member (rolling surface (length) can be shortened. Therefore, the time it takes to reach the passage member is shortened by that amount, and the water can flow into the passage member quickly. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A game machine J1 comprising a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entry hole, and the detection sensor is disposed at a connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Machine J2.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J1, it is equipped with a detection sensor that detects a game ball that enters the ball entrance, and the detection sensor is arranged at the connection part between the rolling surface and the passage member. Therefore, the game ball entering the ball entrance can be detected more quickly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the ball entrance is closed by the opening/closing member, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

The gaming machine J1 or J2 includes a first guide means having a first inclined surface that is inclined from the ball entry hole toward the passage member and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with a game ball rolling on the rolling surface. , the ball entry port is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rolling surface extends along the longitudinal direction of the ball entry port, and the first guide means is located at one end of the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction. and the passage member.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the first inclined surface is inclined from the ball entrance toward the passage member and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface. The ball entry port is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rolling surface extends along the longitudinal direction of the ball entry port, and the first guide means extends along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since it is disposed between the side end and the passage member, when a game ball enters from near the longitudinal end of the ball entrance, the game ball is guided by the first inclined surface of the first guiding means. By guiding it to the passage member, it is possible to prevent it from getting stuck at the longitudinal end of the rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball that enters from the ball entrance can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the ball entrance is closed by the opening/closing member. This can prevent over-winning.

A game machine J4, which is any one of the game machines J1 to J3, and includes a guide groove formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and slopes downward from the ball entry hole toward the passage member. .

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines J1 to J3, the game machine J4 includes a guide groove formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and slopes downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member. Therefore, the rolling surface can receive game balls rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface and guide them to the passage member. That is, when the game ball rolls in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, it can be suppressed from passing through the passage member. Therefore, the game ball that enters from the ball entrance can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the ball entrance is closed by the opening/closing member. This can prevent over-winning.

A gaming machine J5 in the gaming machine J4, wherein the guide groove extends linearly in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J4, the guide groove extends linearly in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, so that the rolling surface is aligned with the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The game ball rolling in the direction can be easily received into the guide groove, and the received game ball can be quickly guided (flowed) into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A gaming machine J4 or J5, characterized in that the groove width of the guide groove is set to be approximately equal to the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J4 or J5, the groove width of the guide groove is set to be approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball, so when a plurality of game balls are accepted in the guide groove, The game balls can be guided to the passage member in an aligned state. Therefore, each game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In any of gaming machines J3 to J6, the rolling surface is on the opposite side of the passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with respect to the first region where the first guide means is disposed. A gaming machine J7 characterized in that the second area is formed with a downward slope toward the first area.

According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J3 to J6, the rolling surface has a passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with respect to the first region where the first guide means is disposed. The second area on the opposite side of the area is formed with a downward slope toward the first area, so a game ball that enters the second area or a game ball that rolls from the first area to the second area. can be quickly rolled toward the passage member by utilizing the downward slope of the second region. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A gaming machine J8 characterized in that the gaming machine J7 includes a second guide means protruding from the second region of the rolling surface.

According to the game machine J8, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J7, since it is provided with the second guide means protruding from the second region of the rolling surface, the rolling speed is increased due to the downward slope of the second region. The game ball can be decelerated before the passage member. That is, by increasing the rolling speed up to the passage member and decelerating it before (just before) the passage member, it is possible to suppress the game ball from rolling from the second area through the passage member to the first area. . Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member faster. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In the game machine J7 or J8, the game is arranged in a second region of the rolling surface and is rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface in the second region of the rolling surface toward the passage member. A gaming machine J9 comprising a second guide means formed to be able to guide a ball toward the ball entry opening.

According to the game machine J9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J7 or J8, the second area of the rolling surface is disposed in the second area of the rolling surface, and the second area of the rolling surface is directed toward the passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since the second guide means is formed to be able to guide the game balls rolling along the path toward the ball entrance side, the game balls whose rolling speed has been increased due to the downward slope of the second area are guided in front of the passage member. It can be slowed down. That is, by increasing the rolling speed up to the passage member and decelerating it before (just before) the passage member, it is possible to suppress the game ball from rolling from the second area through the passage member to the first area. . Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member faster. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A game machine J10 in the game machine J9, wherein the opening/closing member is disposed at a position where the game ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact when the ball entry opening is open.

According to the game machine J10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J9, when the ball entrance is open, the opening/closing member is disposed at a position where the game balls rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact. The game ball guided toward the ball entrance by the second guide means can be brought into contact with the opening/closing member and bounced toward the passage member. Therefore, the game balls can be made to flow into the passage member faster. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In the game machine J9 or J10, the second guide means has a side edge portion opposite to the first guide means that is inclined in a direction away from the ball entry hole as the side edge portion thereof is spaced apart from the first guide means; A gaming machine J11 characterized in that its upper surface is sloped downward toward the side opposite to the first guide means.

According to the game machine J11, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J9 or J10, the second guide means is spaced apart from the ball entrance as the side edge on the opposite side from the first guide means is spaced apart from the first guide means. Since the upper surface is tilted downward toward the side edge opposite to the first guide means, the game ball can be prevented from flying out from the ball entry hole and quickly flow into the passage member. can be done.

That is, among the game balls that are rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with the second region facing the passage member, for game balls whose rolling speed is relatively low (slow), the ball is rolled from the ball entrance. Since the risk of the ball flying out to the outside is low, by making it come into contact with the side edge of the second guide means and guiding it toward the ball entrance side, it is possible to prevent the ball from rolling from the second region through the passage member to the first region. By suppressing this, it is possible to flow into the passage member faster. On the other hand, a game ball with a relatively high (fast) rolling speed can be guided to the first area (first guide means) by being made to climb over the upper surface of the second guide means. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball is consumed by climbing over the second guide means and colliding with the first guide member, and it is possible to reliably decelerate the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from jumping out of the entrance hole and to quickly flow into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In the gaming machine J11, the second guide means has a side edge on the side facing the first guide means extending in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, The dimension of the side edge of the first guide means in the orthogonal direction is larger than the dimension of the side edge of the second guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Game machine J12.

According to the gaming machine J12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J11, the dimension of the side edge of the first guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface is larger than that in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since the size is larger than the side edge of the second guide means, the game ball that has climbed over the top surface of the second guide means can come into contact (collide) with the first guide means and be reliably decelerated. At the same time, it can be easily located near the passage member. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

A game machine J13, in the game machine J11 or J12, characterized in that a position spaced apart from the rolling surface by the radius of the game ball is included in the side edge of the second guide means.

According to the game machine J13, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J11 or J12, since the side edge of the second guide means includes a position spaced apart from the rolling surface by the radius of the game ball, the upper surface of the second guide means The game ball that has climbed over can be brought into contact (collision) with the side edge of the first guide means, thereby being able to be reliably decelerated and easily positioned near the passage member. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

A gaming machine J14, which is any one of the gaming machines J8 to J13, wherein the second guiding means is located on an extension of the first inclined surface of the first guiding means in the inclined direction.

According to the game machine J14, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines J8 to J13, the second guide means is located on the extension of the inclined direction on the first inclined surface of the first guide means, so that the first guide means Even if the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of , can be decelerated and can be easily located near the passage member. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

The gaming machine J14 is provided with a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and sloping downward from the ball entry hole toward the passage member, and the second guide means is connected from the bottom surface of the guide groove. A game machine J15 characterized in that the height dimension to the top is larger than the radius of the game ball.

According to the game machine J15, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J14, it is provided with a guide groove formed as a concave groove that is recessed in the rolling surface and slopes downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member, and the bottom surface of the guide groove is Since the height dimension from to the top of the second guide means is made larger than the radius of the game ball, the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the first guide means is increased. When the ball is relatively high (fast), the game ball can easily come into contact with (collide with) the second guide means. Therefore, such a game ball can be decelerated, and can be easily positioned near the passage member, and can be caused to quickly flow into the passage member.

Any one of gaming machines J1 to J15 includes a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and sloping downward from the ball entry hole toward the passage member, and the guide groove has a groove width. A game machine J16 characterized in that the size becomes smaller toward the passage member.

According to the game machine J16, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines J1 to J15, the game machine J16 includes a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and sloping downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member. Since the groove width of the guide groove becomes smaller toward the passage member, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface comes into contact with (collides with) the side wall of the guide groove, causing The rolling direction of the game ball can be easily changed to the direction toward the passage member. Therefore, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing ball unit 970 as an example>
A game machine comprising a ball entry unit having a ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter and a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged, The game board has an opening formed in the board thickness direction, and the ball entry unit has the ball entry port and a first passage connected to the ball entry port, and is disposed on the front side of the game board. and a second unit having a second passage disposed on the back side of the first unit through an opening of the game board and connected to the first passage. Gaming machine K1 is characterized by:

Here, a game comprising a ball entrance unit formed to allow a game ball to enter therein and a passage connected to the ball entrance, and a game board on which the ball entrance unit is arranged. A machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-131046). According to such a gaming machine, by replacing the ball entry unit with another ball entry unit (for example, one with a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the gaming machine while reusing the game board. can. However, in the game machine described above, since the ball entry unit is arranged in front of the game board, it is necessary to secure a space in advance in front of the game board, for example, according to the maximum number of passages. Therefore, when using a ball entry unit with a small number of passages, there is a problem in that space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, the ball entry unit has a ball entrance and a first passage connected to the ball entrance, and a first passage disposed on the front side of the game board. The second unit is provided on the back side of the first unit through the opening of the game board and has a second passage connected to the first passage. It is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the first unit, and there is no need to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages (second passages) in front of the game board. Therefore, by replacing the second unit with another second unit (for example, one with a different number of second passages), you can reuse the game board and change the specifications of the game board. The space in front of the can be used effectively.

In the gaming machine K1, at least a portion of the first unit is formed from a light-transmitting material, and the second unit is formed to have a smaller external shape than the first unit, and the second unit is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the first unit, and the second unit has a smaller outer shape than the first unit. A gaming machine K2 is characterized in that it is arranged in an overlapping position.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1, the first unit is formed from a light-transmitting material, the second unit is formed to have a smaller external shape than the first unit, and the second unit has a smaller outer shape than the first unit. Since it is disposed at a position overlapping one unit, the second unit can be seen by the player through the first unit, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, in order to make the second unit visible to the player, it is not essential that the game board be made of a light-transmitting material; for example, the game board may be made of plywood, or a sticker may be pasted on the game board. Since it is also permissible to attach or paint the game board, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

A gaming machine K3 in the gaming machine K2, wherein at least the front side of the second unit in the second passage is formed of a light-transmitting material.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K2, at least the front side of the second passage of the second unit is formed of a light-transmitting material, so that the flow of light through the first unit and down the second passage of the second unit is made of a light-transmitting material. It is possible to make the game ball visible to the player and increase the interest of the game.

Note that the first unit may be entirely formed from a light-transmitting material. Furthermore, when only a portion of the first unit is made of a light-transmitting material, it is preferable that at least a portion of the second unit that overlaps with the second passageway is formed of a light-transmitting material when viewed from the front. This is because the falling of the game ball can be visually recognized, increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine K4 characterized in that the first unit is formed from a colorless light-transmitting material, and the second unit is formed from a colored light-transmitting material.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K3, since the first unit is formed from a colorless light-transmitting material and the second unit is formed from a colored light-transmitting material, When the second unit is made visible to the player, the player can easily understand the positional relationship in the front and back direction between the first unit and the second unit. That is, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball changes its position in the front-back direction and flows down, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine K4, a gaming machine K5 is characterized in that information consisting of characters or figures is displayed on the front side of the second passage of the second unit.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K4, information consisting of characters or figures is displayed on the front of the second passage of the second unit, so that the second unit can be visually recognized through the first unit. Even in such a case, the player can easily recognize the position of the second passage (front-back direction position) by using the display as a landmark (reference position). Note that examples of the display mode include printing with ink, pasting of a sticker, two-color molding, and the like.

In any of gaming machines K1 to K5, the second passage includes a second upstream passage connected to the first passage, and a plurality of second branch passages branched into a plurality of passages from the second upstream passage. and a plurality of second connection passages connected to each of the plurality of second branch passages, the second unit being disposed on the back side of the first unit and connected to the second upstream passage. and a second upstream unit in which the plurality of second branch passages are formed, and a second downstream unit disposed in the second upstream unit and in which the plurality of second connection passages are formed, A gaming machine K6 characterized in that detection sensors for detecting passage of game balls are arranged in a plurality of second branch passages.

According to the gaming machine K6, in any of the gaming machines K1 to K5, the second unit is disposed on the back side of the first unit, and a second upstream passage and a plurality of second branch passages are formed. a second downstream unit disposed in the second upstream unit and in which a plurality of second connecting passages are formed, and detects passage of game balls through the plurality of second branch passages. Since detection sensors are installed, for example, when changing the second upstream unit to another unit with fewer second branch passages to manufacture a game machine with different specifications, the number of detection sensors installed can be reduced. It can prevent workers from making mistakes.

That is, in the structure in which the detection sensors are disposed in the second connecting passages, it is possible to arrange the detection sensors for the number of second connecting passages, but for example, in the second upstream unit in which two second branch passages are formed, When changing to another unit that connects the first passage and the second connecting passage with only one passage, it would be sufficient to install one detection sensor, but only one detection sensor would be required for the number of second connecting passages. There is a possibility that a detection sensor will be installed. On the other hand, if the structure is such that a detection sensor is installed in the second branch passage, when changing the second upstream unit to another unit, the number of detection sensors that correspond to the unit will be installed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of the arrangement.

In the gaming machine K6, the first unit includes a second ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter, and a third passage through which the game ball entered into the second ball entry port passes. A detection sensor is formed across each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and detects a game ball in a portion of the third passage that is formed in the second downstream unit. A gaming machine K7 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K6, the first unit is provided with a second ball entrance formed to allow a game ball to enter, and when a game ball is inserted into the second ball entrance. A third passage through which the game ball passes is formed across each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and the game ball is passed through a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit. Since the detection sensors for detection are arranged, the detection sensors arranged in the second unit can be distributed, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the passages can be increased accordingly.

In the gaming machine K7, the second passage directly or indirectly engages with the first passage, or the third passages of the first unit and the second unit directly or indirectly engage with each other. A gaming machine K8, wherein the second unit is positioned with respect to the first unit by aligning the second unit with the first unit.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K7, the second passage directly or indirectly engages with the first passage, or the third passages of the first unit and the second unit are connected to each other. Since the second unit is positioned with respect to the first unit by engaging directly or indirectly, positioning can be performed even when the second upstream unit of the second unit is changed to another unit. That is, regardless of the form of another unit, the position where the first passage and the second passage are connected or the position where the third passages are connected is the same, so the position where the second passage is connected to the first passage is the same. By directly or indirectly engaging the or the third passages with each other for positioning, it is possible to position the first unit even if it is a separate unit.

In addition, the purpose of positioning the second unit with respect to the first unit is to prevent positional deviation (level difference) from occurring at the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting portion between the third passages. Since the target part (the connecting part between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting part between the third passages) can be positioned, the positional deviation ( (steps) can be effectively suppressed. As a result, the game ball can be caused to flow down smoothly.

In any of gaming machines K6 to K8, a part of the detection sensor disposed in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage protrudes toward the second downstream unit, and the protruding A gaming machine K9 characterized in that a receiving portion for receiving a portion of the detection sensor is formed in the second downstream unit.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K6 to K8, a part of the detection sensor disposed in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage protrudes toward the second downstream unit. At the same time, since a receiving part is formed in the second downstream passage to receive a part of the protruded detection sensor, the positioning of the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit is performed by the engagement of the detection sensor and the receiving part. It is possible to reduce the size of the second unit as a whole by suppressing a portion of the detection sensor from protruding outside.

In the gaming machines K1 to K6, the first unit includes a second ball entrance formed to allow a game ball to enter, and a third passage through which the game ball entered into the second ball entrance passes. is formed at least between the second branch passages in the second unit.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines K1 to K9, the third passage through which the game ball entered into the second ball entry port passes is located between at least the second branch passage in the second unit. Therefore, the second unit can be made smaller.

In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K10, the second passage has a bent portion bent from the front side to the back side of the second unit, and an inner surface of a wall portion on the outside of the bent portion in the bent portion. A gaming machine K11, characterized in that an upright part is erected from above, and the bent outer wall part is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the downward direction of the game ball.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K10, a bent portion that is bent from the front to the back of the second unit is formed in the second passage, and the bending portion is bent from the front to the back of the second unit. An upright portion is erected from the inner surface of the wall portion on the outside of the bend in the portion, and the wall portion on the outside of the bend is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the downstream direction of the game ball. To make it easier for a player to visually recognize a game ball flowing down a curved part of a passage. In other words, by erecting the erected portion from the inner surface of the wall on the outside of the bent portion, the rigidity of the passage is increased and durability is improved, and the game ball is placed along the tip of the erected portion. While the curved part can be guided and flowed down smoothly, the upright part is located in front of the game ball when viewed from the front, so the game ball is hidden by the upright part and the visibility of the game ball is reduced. decreases. On the other hand, by slanting the curved outer wall so that it is located on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the downward direction of the game ball, it is possible to ensure rigidity and guide the game ball while also allowing the wall to stand upright. Since the thickness of the installation part in the front and back direction can be reduced, visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing ball unit 970 as an example>
A game machine comprising a first passage member through which game balls pass, and a second passage member whose upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and through which game balls flowed down from the first passage member pass. , a gaming machine L1 characterized in that at least a bottom upstream end on the bottom side and a side upstream end on the side side of the upstream ends of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. .

Here, a game comprising a first passage member through which the game ball passes, and a second passage member whose upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and through which the game ball flowed down from the first passage member passes. A machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-5783). However, in this structure in which the first passage member and the second passage member are connected, misalignment between them is unavoidable, so that the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member There was a problem in that a step was formed at the connecting part, which could impede the smooth flow of the game ball.

On the other hand, in the game machine L1, at least the bottom upstream end on the bottom side and the side upstream end on the side surface of the upstream ends of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. , the timing at which the game ball passes the step on the bottom side (the upstream end of the bottom surface) and the timing at which the game ball passes the step on the side surface side (the upstream end of the side surface) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and to disperse those influences, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. can.

In the gaming machine L1, the gaming machine L2 is characterized in that a position spaced apart by the radius of the game ball from the upstream end of the bottom surface is included in the upstream end of the side surface.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, since the side upstream end includes a position spaced apart from the bottom upstream end by the radius of the gaming ball, the gaming ball is transferred from the first passage member to the second passage member. When rolling (flowing down), such a game ball can be inscribed in the upstream end of the side surface. That is, the position of the step on the bottom surface side and the position of the step on the side surface side, which are affected by the game ball, can be reliably made different in the direction of passage of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to reliably avoid the game ball being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and it is easier to disperse these influences, so the game ball can flow down (pass through) smoothly. ) can be done.

In the gaming machine L1 or L2, of the downstream ends of the first passage member, a bottom downstream end on the bottom side and a side downstream end on the side side are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, and the first The passage member includes a protruding piece that protrudes from its downstream end toward the upstream end of the second passage member, and whose protruding tip is the downstream end of the side surface; A game machine L3 characterized in that the game machine L3 is provided with a recess that is recessed in the side wall and receives the protruding piece, and a portion facing the protruding tip of the protruding piece is an upstream end of the side wall.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the first passage member projects from its downstream end toward the upstream end of the second passage member, and its protruding tip is connected to the side downstream end. In addition, the second passage member includes a recess provided at its upstream end to receive the protrusion piece, and the portion facing the protruding tip of the protrusion piece is the upstream end of the side wall. A side downstream end and a bottom downstream end of the member can be proximate to a side upstream end and a downstream side end of the second channel member. That is, when the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed at a different position on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball with respect to the upstream end of the bottom surface, the game ball reaches the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member. Until then, the game ball can be guided by the protruding piece of the first passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down (passed).

On the other hand, the protruding piece has relatively low rigidity and there is a risk of breakage, but according to the game machine L3, the protruding piece is formed on the first passage member (i.e., on the upstream side in the direction of passage of the game ball). Even if the protruding piece is broken, the bottom upstream end and the side upstream end of the second passage member can be maintained at different positions in the direction in which the game ball passes, and the game ball can The timing of passing through the upstream end) and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface (the upstream end of the side surface) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side side at the same time, and to disperse those influences, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly. can.

Furthermore, according to the game machine L3, the game machine projecting piece is formed in the first passage member, and the recess is formed in the second passage member, so that when the side surface of the recess comes into contact with the projecting piece, the first passage member It is possible to restrict upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the passage member. In other words, at a level difference where the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member, the game ball is likely to be bounced up when riding on it. Compared to a step in which the upstream end of the second passage member is at a lower position, the smooth flow down (passage) of the game ball is likely to be inhibited. Therefore, as in game machine L3, the ability to restrict upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the first passage member means that the upstream end of the second passage member is at a higher position than the downstream end of the first passage member. It is possible to suppress the formation of steps, and it is particularly effective for the smooth flow of game balls.

In the gaming machine L3, the gaming machine L4 is characterized in that the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the gaming ball.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine L3, the side upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, so that the side upstream end of the second passage member Compared to the case where the game ball is formed perpendicular to the passing direction of the game machine, the game ball that collides with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member can be made to slide along the slope, making it difficult to bounce back. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to pass through (flow down) smoothly.

In the gaming machine L1 or L2, a gaming machine L5 is characterized in that at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L1 or L2, at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, so that the second passage member The side upstream end of the upstream ends can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. Therefore, compared to the case where the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed perpendicular to the passing direction of the game machine, the game ball that collides with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member is not allowed to slide along the slope. You can make it harder to bounce back. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to pass through (flow down) smoothly.

In this case, according to the gaming machine L5, the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined, so compared to, for example, a case where it is formed in a shape (step-like) having a protruding piece or a recessed part. , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of stress concentration and ensure the durability of the passage member. In addition, when the second passage member is made of a resin material, the shape of the injection mold cavity (hollow part) can be gradually changed, suppressing air bubbles (air trapping) and filling defects, and molding. It is possible to improve sexual performance.

A gaming machine L6, in the gaming machine L4 or L5, characterized in that the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L4 or L5, since the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the gaming machine, the side surface of the second passage member The game ball that collides with the upstream end can be pushed toward the bottom side. That is, it is possible to suppress the game ball from jumping up and bouncing at the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to pass through (flow down) smoothly.

<About the concept of the invention using the specific winning opening unit 550 as an example>
A ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry port to open or close the ball entry port, and the pair of wing members. In the game machine, the game machine includes a drive means that generates a driving force for rotating the drive means, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive means to the pair of wing members, wherein the pair of wing members move from the outside in an opening direction. A gaming machine M1, wherein the transmission mechanism is configured to be able to regulate displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction when the wing members are displaced.

Here, a ball entry hole formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members disposed across the ball entry hole, and a driving force applied to the pair of wing members to open or close the ball entry hole. When the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the drive means, the pair of wing members are placed in a permissible position that allows entry of the game ball into the ball entrance, and the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the drive means. A gaming machine is known that includes a regulating means disposed at a regulating position that regulates the entry of game balls into the ball entrance when the member is closed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-172833).

According to this game machine, when the pair of wing members is opened by the driving force of the drive means, the regulating means is arranged at the permissible position, thereby preventing the game ball that has passed between the pair of wing members from entering the ball entrance. You can let the ball enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of wing members is closed by the driving force of the drive means, the regulating means is placed in the regulating position, so that when the pair of wing members are forcibly opened from the outside, the game ball will be directed to the ball entrance. It is possible to restrict the ball being thrown into the ball.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the displacement of the regulating means is not regulated, so for example, after forcibly opening the pair of wing members from the outside, it is possible to displace the regulating means from the regulating position to the permissible position. Therefore, there was a problem in that the effect of regulating game balls from being illegally entered into the ball entrance was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, when the pair of wing members are displaced from the outside in the opening direction, the transmission mechanism is formed to be able to regulate the displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction. It is possible to prevent the wing member from being forced open. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent game balls from being illegally entered into the ball entrance.

In the gaming machine M1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, and the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, A protruding portion is protruded from one of the members, and a sliding groove into which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the sliding member or the pair of wing members, and the sliding groove is recessed in the other of the sliding member or the pair of wing members. A receiving part is recessed in the inner wall of the blade member to receive the protruding part when the slide member is slid to a position where the wing member is closed, and when the protruding part is received in the receiving part, the receiving part is recessed. , a gaming machine M2 characterized in that rotation of the wing member is regulated.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M1, the inner wall of the sliding groove is recessed with a receiving part that receives the protruding part when the sliding member is slid to a position where the wing member is closed. When the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion, the rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

In the game machine M2, the game machine M3 is characterized in that the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member is substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M2, since the sliding direction of the sliding member is substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, the wing member is displaced from the outside in the opening direction. Therefore, even when the external force is transmitted to the slide member via the protruding portion and the receiving portion, a sliding displacement component of the slide member is less likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forced to open.

Further, the slide member can be arranged substantially parallel to the wing member. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

A gaming machine M4, which is the gaming machine M2 or M3, wherein the protruding part is received in the receiving part by sliding the sliding member downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M2 or M3, the sliding member is slid downward in the direction of gravity, so that the protruding part is received in the receiving part, so that the weight of the sliding member is reduced. (self-weight) can be used to easily maintain the state in which the protruding part is received in the receiving part.

In the gaming machine M1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, and the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, A protruding portion is protruded from one of the members, and a sliding groove into which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the sliding member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is , comprising an abutting portion and an overhanging portion protruding from a tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member is configured to rotate the rotating member toward one side in order to close the wing member. One side of the abutted part is in contact with one side of the abutting part, and the one side of the abutted part and the one-side abutted part are arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the sliding displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the wing member. the other side abutted part with which the other side of the abutment part abuts when the member is rotated toward the other side, and when the wing member is closed, the one side abutted part to a position where one side of the abutting part is abutted and the overhanging part is engaged with the slide member, and at least the other side of the abutting part abuts the other side abutted part. A gaming machine M5 characterized in that when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the engagement of the projecting portion with the sliding member is released.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M1, the rotating member includes an abutting part and a projecting part extending from the tip of the abutting part, and the sliding member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the abutting part comes into contact with the one side abutted part, and the one side abutted part is spaced apart from the one side abutted part by a predetermined interval in the direction of sliding displacement. and the other side abutted part which is arranged facing each other and which is abutted by the other side of the abutting part when the rotating member is rotated towards the other side in order to open the wing member, so that the rotating member is on one side. When the wing member is rotated to , the one-side abutted part is pushed by the one side of the abutting part, and the slide member is slid toward the one side, thereby closing the wing member. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the other side abutted part is pushed by the other side of the abutting part and the sliding member is slid towards the other side. , the wing member is released.

In this case, when the wing member is closed, one side of the abutting part is in contact with the one-side abutted part and the overhanging part is engaged with the slide member, so the rotating member is not rotated. Slide displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side to a position where the other side of the abutting part abuts at least the other side abutted part, the engagement of the overhanging part with the sliding member is released, so the rotation By further rotating the member toward the other side, the slide member can be slid toward the other side, and the wing member can be opened.

In the gaming machine M1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, and the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates, A protruding portion is protruded from one of the members, and a sliding groove into which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the sliding member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is , comprising an abutting portion and an overhanging portion protruding from a tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member is configured to rotate the rotating member toward one side in order to close the wing member. One side of the abutted part is in contact with one side of the abutting part, and the one side of the abutted part and the one-side abutted part are arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the sliding displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the wing member. and an abutted part on the other side with which the other side of the abutting part abuts when the member is rotated toward the other side, and when the wing member is closed, the protruding part When the sliding member is disengaged from the member and is slid from the closed state of the wing member to a position where the one-side abutting portion abuts one side of the abutting portion. , a game machine M6, wherein the projecting portion is engaged with the slide member.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M1, the rotating member includes an abutting portion and a projecting portion extending from the tip of the abutting portion, and the sliding member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the abutting part comes into contact with the one side abutted part, and the one side abutted part is spaced apart from the one side abutted part by a predetermined interval in the direction of sliding displacement. and the other side abutted part which is arranged facing each other and which is abutted by the other side of the abutting part when the rotating member is rotated towards the other side in order to open the wing member, so that the rotating member is on one side. When the wing member is rotated to , the one-side abutted part is pushed by the one side of the abutting part, and the slide member is slid toward the one side, thereby closing the wing member. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the other side abutted part is pushed by the other side of the abutting part and the sliding member is slid towards the other side. , the wing member is released.

In this case, when the slide member is slid from the state in which the wing member is closed to a position where the one-side abutment portion abuts one side of the abutment portion, the overhang portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, sliding displacement of the sliding member to the other side without rotating the rotating member is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly opened from the outside.

On the other hand, when the wing member is closed, the overhang portion is not engaged with the slide member, so by further rotating the rotary member toward the other side, the slide member is slid toward the other side, The wing member can be opened. Here, when the wing member is closed and the overhang part is engaged with the slide member, the shape of the overhang part and one side contact part can be changed to allow rotation of the rotating member to the other side. It is necessary to form it into a specific shape, which makes the shape complicated. Therefore, not only the strength may decrease, but also the engagement may become more likely to be released. On the other hand, in the present invention, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, so that the shape of the overhanging portion and one side contact portion can be rotated. There is no need to shape the member to allow rotation to the other side. Therefore, not only can the shape be simplified to ensure strength, but also a shape that is easy to maintain engagement can be adopted, making it difficult for the engagement to be released.

Any of the game machines M2 to M6 is provided with a passage member that forms a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and when the protruding portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, the A gaming machine M7 characterized in that a part of the slide member is disposed within the passage of the passage member.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M2 to M6, the gaming machine M7 includes a passage member that forms a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entry hole, and the protruding portion is not disposed in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is placed in the passage of the passage member, so even if the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside by cutting the protruding part, the ball will not enter from the ball entrance. The sliding member can restrict the flow of the game ball.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 as an example>
A ball entry port formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry port to open or close the ball entry port, and the pair of wing members. In a game machine comprising a drive means for generating a drive force for rotating the ball, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the pair of wing members, the game ball inserted into the ball entry hole. A game machine N1 comprising a passage member forming a passage, and a part of the transmission mechanism crossing the passage of the passage member when displacing the wing member from an open position to a closed position.

Here, a ball entry hole formed to allow a game ball to enter, a pair of wing members that are rotatably supported at positions across the ball entry hole and open or close the ball entry hole, and a pair of wing members that open or close the ball entry hole. A game machine is known that includes a drive means that generates a driving force for rotating a wing member, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of the drive means to a pair of wing members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20111- 234009). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and as the rotating member is rotated toward one side or the other side, the wing member is opened or closed.

In this case, for example, the end of the thread is glued to the game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entrance and passed through the passage of the passage member, and when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor, the thread is There is a fraudulent act in which the detection sensor detects the ball multiple times by manipulating the other end (pulling out or pulling it) to move the game ball back and forth. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem in that it is difficult to effectively suppress fraudulent activity in which the tip of the thread is glued to the game ball and the detection sensor is detected multiple times.

On the other hand, according to the game machine N1, when displacing the wing member from the open position to the closed position, a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member, so that the thread whose tip end is glued to the game ball The transmission mechanism can at least interfere with the portion. As a result, by reciprocating the game balls, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that are caused to be detected by the detection sensor multiple times.

In the game machine N1, the transmission mechanism causes the slide member to cross the path of the passage member and rub against the edge of the passage member when displacing the wing member from the open position to the closed position. A gaming machine N2 characterized by having a frictional contact portion.

According to the game machine N2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine N1, the transmission mechanism allows the slide member to cross the passage of the passage member when displacing the wing member from the open position to the closed position, and the slide member to cross the passage of the passage member. Since the ball is provided with a rubbing portion that rubs against the edge, it is possible to cut off an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the ball entrance.

That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball enters the ball with the wing member open, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position and the friction portion of the slide member crosses the path of the passage member, The middle part of the thread whose tip is glued to the game ball is displaced together with the friction contact part and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and when the friction contact part is rubbed against the edge of the passage member, the friction contact part and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Note that the frictional contact portion of the slide member is preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a portion of the slide member (friction portion) may be formed from a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be formed from a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the portion with which the friction contact portion is rubbed) may be formed from a metal material. Further, it is preferable that the frictional contact portion and the portion (edge of the passage member) with which the frictional contact portion comes into contact with each other are formed as a blade (cutting blade).

In the game machine N1, the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub their edges against each other when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position. Gaming machine N3 is characterized by the following.

According to the game machine N3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine N1, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, a pair of blades that cross the passage of the passage member and rub their edges against each other are provided. Since the transmission mechanism is provided with the cutting member, it is possible to cut off an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the ball entrance.

That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball is entered with the wing member open, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position and the pair of cutting members cross the path of the passage member, The middle part of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball can be cut by sandwiching it between a pair of cutting members. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Note that it is preferable that the pair of cutting members be formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed from a metal material, or only a portion of the slide member (edges that rub against each other) may be formed from a metal material. Moreover, it is preferable that the portions of the pair of cutting members that rub against each other are formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the gaming machine N2 or N3, the drive means is configured to displace the drive shaft in a first direction by electromagnetic force and to displace the drive shaft in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The actuator is formed as a solenoid actuator that is actuated by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement of the wing member from the open position to the closed position is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. Gaming machine N4 is characterized by

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine N2 or N3, the blade member is displaced from the open position to the closed position by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an unauthorized object (for example, a thread) between the frictional contact portion of the slide member and the edge of the passage member.

Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B9, C1 to C11, D1 to D10, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, G1 to G16, H1 to H15, I1 to I10, J1 to J16, K1 to K11, L1 to L6, A gaming machine K1 characterized in that in any one of M1 to M7 and N1 to N4, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B9, C1 to C11, D1 to D10, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, G1 to G16, H1 to H15, I1 to I10, J1 to J16, K1 to K11, L1 to L6, A gaming machine K2 characterized in that in any one of M1 to M7 and N1 to N4, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B9, C1 to C11, D1 to D10, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, G1 to G16, H1 to H15, I1 to I10, J1 to J16, K1 to K11, L1 to L6, A gaming machine K3 in any of M1 to M7 and N1 to N4, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
There is a game machine configured to displace a displacement member using an electromagnetic solenoid (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434).
However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of improving the durability of the gaming machine. The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve durability.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to technical concept 1 includes a displacement means configured to be displaceable, and a drive disposed on the side of the displacement means in a predetermined direction for driving the displacement means in the predetermined direction. A driving means configured to be able to generate a force, and a resistance means configured to be able to generate a resistance against displacement of the displacement means in the predetermined direction, the resistance means being configured to move the force from the displacement means to the driving means. It is configured to be able to reduce the load applied to.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, comprising support means for supporting the displacement means, and the driving means is arranged on the support means side compared to the resistance means. Ru.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in which the supporting means rotatably supports the displacing means about a predetermined axis, and the predetermined axis is arranged in the predetermined direction with respect to the resisting means. placed on the direction side.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, durability can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, durability can be improved by the support mode of the displacement means.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, durability can be improved by suppressing the generated load.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board 60 Base board (game board)
60a Through hole (opening)
60c Light transmission hole (recessed part)
64 1st prize opening (1st aisle)
140 2nd prize opening (ball entrance, 1st ball entrance)
65a Specified prize opening (second ball entrance)
162 Transmission shaft rod part (support means)
163 Driven member (displacement means)
175 Lower regulating part (second resistance means)
176 Upper regulating part (resistance means, first resistance means)
310 Rear case 405 Metal rail (guiding means)
410,3410 Transmission unit (transmission means)
411 Drive gear (part of transmission means)
412 Transmission gear (part of transmission means)
413 Terminal gear (part of transmission means)
414 Arm member (part of transmission means)
425 Accommodating plate part (part of support means)
425b Omitted part (part of open part)
427 Through hole (part of suppressing means)
428 Closure plate (part of support means, part of restraint means)
430 Elevating plate (part of foundation means, part of intermediate means)
433 Cylindrical part (part of suppressing means)
441 Rotating gear (part of displacement configuration means)
442 Relative displacement member (part of intermediate means, part of distal means)
444 Auxiliary arm member (part of foundation means, rotational displacement means)
444a Proximal side part (part of the rotating shaft part)
444b Arc-shaped gear part (projection part)
444d Cylindrical part (other part, part of rotating shaft part)
460 Feather-like member (part of tip side means, displacement means, first displacement means, second displacement means, disposed displacement means)
464L Formation part (first displacement means, first disposed displacement means)
464R Formation part (second displacement means, second disposed displacement means)
490 Fixed transmission plate (part of displacement configuration means)
708 Partition member (support plate)
712 Thin film cover member (thin film member)
714 Light guiding member (guiding means)
730 Plate-shaped displacement member (displacement means, first displacement means)
735 Small receiving part (first support part, second support part)
736 Large receiving part (first support part, second support part)
740 Hollow member (second displacement means)
743 Projecting columnar part (second displacement means, part of second displacement means)
750 Variable decorative member (second displacement means)
761,4761 Load member (displacement means, part of load applying means, transmission means)
761c Vertical bar-shaped extension part (pushing part)
761d Overhanging part (attached part, part of range setting means)
762 Axial rod part (supporting means)
764 Lower regulating part (second resistance means)
765 Upper regulating part (resistance means, first resistance means, part of range setting means)
777 Illumination board (light emitting board)
DH1 Electric wiring (electricity supply means)
MT1 Drive motor (drive means)
S1 Contact surface (split surface)
SOL1 Electromagnetic solenoid (drive means)
SOL2 Electromagnetic solenoid (drive means, part of load applying means, part of range setting means)
SP21 Biasing spring (load applying means)
3441 Rotating gear with arm (part of displacement configuration means)
940 Front unit (first member, first unit)
941 Back base (fixing member)
942c Second ball throwing part (part of first passage member)
943 Front base (main body member)
943a Rolling part (first passage, part of first passage member)
945 Wing member (first opening/closing member)
945b Protrusion (Protrusion)
951 Plate member (second opening/closing member, opening/closing member)
953a1 Opening (ball entrance)
953a2 Rolling surface 953c Annular projection (seat)
954b Recess (guide groove)
954c Projection part (second guide means)
954c2 Side portion 954c3 Side edge portion 954d Standing wall (first guide means)
954d1 Second guide surface (first inclined surface)
954d2 Second side edge (side edge)
955 Passage member (case member)
955a Recessed portion (passage member)
957a1 Main body part 957a2 Shaft part (drive shaft)
960 Drive unit (third member)
961a Main body 961b Shaft (drive shaft)
962e Arm part (second engaging part)
962f Wall part (covered surface part)
962g Projection part (first engagement part)
140 2nd prize opening (ball entrance, 2nd ball entrance)
965,18965 Transmission member (rotating member, part of first transmission mechanism)
965a Tip (part of the first part)
965b Rotating part (part of the first part)
965c Rotating shaft 965d Projection part (second part)
965e Insertion part (contact part)
966, 8966, 11966, 12966, 14966, 18966 Displacement member (slide member, part of first transmission mechanism)
966a2, 8966a2 Sliding groove 966a5 Inclined surface 8966a6 Recess (receiving part)
966b2 One side abutted part 966b3 Other side abutted part 11968c, 18996g Blade part (rubbing part)
12966c2 Second blade part (part of cutting member)
6683 Blade (part of cutting member)
970 Throwing unit (second unit)
980 Sorting unit (second member, second upstream unit)
981b Side wall part (second passage, second passage member, third passage)
982b Inclined part (bending part)
982h1, 982j1 Guide part (erected part)
985e1, 985f1 Inflow passage (second connection passage)
900 Passage unit (second downstream unit)
991c1, 991d1 Recessed part (receiving part)
TR0 Ball throwing passage (part of the second passage, second upstream passage)
TR1 1st passage (part of 2nd passage, 2nd branch passage)
TR2 2nd passage (part of 2nd passage, 2nd branch passage)
SE1 Detection device (detection sensor)
SE3 Detection device (detection sensor)
SE4 Detection device (detection sensor)
HS1 Wiring HS2 Wiring HS3 Wiring SP Biasing spring (elastic member)
S1, S2 Screw C Collar (support ring)
θ1 1st drive range (outer range)
θ2 2nd drive range (center range)

Claims (3)

a displacing means configured to be displaceable; a driving means disposed on a predetermined direction side of the displacing means and configured to be able to generate a driving force for driving the displacing means in the predetermined direction; and a resistance means configured to be able to generate resistance against displacement in the predetermined direction,
A gaming machine characterized in that the resistance means is configured to be able to reduce the load applied from the displacement means to the drive means. comprising support means for supporting the displacement means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the drive means is arranged closer to the support means than the resistance means. The support means rotatably supports the displacement means about a predetermined axis,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the predetermined axis is arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to the resistance means.

Images